XEDGE6000 COVER12 - GDC

The Best Connections in the Business

TM

Xedge 6000Xedge 6000Xedge 60006RIWZDUH#&RQILJXUDWLRQ

IRU#9HUVLRQ#91513

6ORW#&RQWUROOHUV/LQH#,QWHUIDFH#0RGXOHV

365573309953#,VVXH#6'HFHPEHU#533:

Copyright©2007 General DataComm, Inc. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.This publication and the software it describes contain proprietary and confidential information. No part of this document may be copied, photocopied, reproduced, translated or reduced to any electronic or machine-readable format without prior written permission of General DataComm, Inc. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. General DataComm assumes no responsibility for any damages arising from the use of this document, including but not limited to, lost revenue, lost data, claims by third parties, or other damages. If you have comments or suggestions concerning this manual, please contact:

General DataComm, Inc. Technical Publications 6 Rubber Avenue, Naugatuck, Connecticut USA 06770Telephone: 1 203 729 0271

TrademarksAll brand or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies or organizations.

Documentation

Revision History: GDC P/N 032R400-V620

Related Publications

-REV is the hardware revision (-000 , -001 , etc.) -VREV is the most current software version (-V510, V620, V710, etc. ) In addition to the publications listed above, always read Release Notes supplied with your products.

Issue Date Release Description

1 March 2005 Initial release of Software Version 6.2.0

2 October 2006 Minor corrections and updates.

3 December 2007 Added IMA bandwidth information;New Features: Adjustable UBR, Link Restriction option

Description Part Number

Xedge 6000 Switch Application Guide 032R300-V620

Xedge 6000 Switch Technical Reference 032R310-V620

Xedge 6000 Switch Software Configuration Guide (for Ver 6.2 Slot Controllers/LIMs)Xedge 6000 Switch Software Ver 6.2 Release Notes and Patch Notes)

032R400-V620032R901-V62X

Xedge 6000 Switch Software Ver 7.X Configuration Guide ( for ISG2, PCx, OC-N LIM only)Xedge 6000 Switch Software Ver 7.X Release Notes and Patch Notes)

032R401-V7XX032R901-V7XX

Xedge 6000 Switch Chassis Installation Guide (all models) 032R410-000

Xedge 6000 Switch Hardware Installation Manual 032R440-V620

Xedge 6000 Switch Diagnostics Guide 032R500-V620

ProSphere Ver. 3.X Routing Manager Install & Oper Manual (RTM, INM, ADM) 032R600-V300032R605-V300032R606-V300

ProSphere NMS Version 5.X User Manual 032R610-V5XX

ProSphere NMS Version 4.4.0 Installation and Release Notes (CORE, AEM, GFM and MVS)ProSphere NMS Version 5.X Installation and Release Notes (CORE, AEM, GFM and SPM)

032R906-V440032R906-V5XX

03Iss

i

1

3

4

1

2

3

8

Table of Contents

PrefaceGraphical Conventions............................................................................................................xii

Navigating Xedge Menus and Screens................................................................................... xiv

Support Services and Training................................................................................................. xv

Contact Information .......................................................................................................... xv

Chapter 1: Switch OverviewChapter Overview...................................................................................................................1-

Xedge Hardware Overview.....................................................................................................1-2

Switch Fabric Modules.....................................................................................................1-2

Slot Controller Modules...................................................................................................1-2

Slot-0 Controllers.............................................................................................................1-

Xedge Software Overview......................................................................................................1-4

Virtual Disk Drives...........................................................................................................1-

Software Organization......................................................................................................1-5

File Naming Conventions.................................................................................................1-5

Using the File System.......................................................................................................1-5

Special Root Menu Selections........................................................................................1-13

Craft Port Security Option....................................................................................................1-14

Chapter 2: Software InstallationChapter Overview...................................................................................................................2-

Overview.................................................................................................................................2-2

Before You Begin...................................................................................................................2-

Software Files...................................................................................................................2-

Connecting a Workstation or PC to the Switch Serial Port..............................................2-7

Software Installation...............................................................................................................2-

How To Use This Procedure............................................................................................2-8

Transferring Software Files to Slot-0 Using a Workstation.............................................2-8

Transferring Software Files to Slot-0 Using a PC..........................................................2-10

Transferring Software Files from Slot-0 to Other Slot Controllers................................2-11

Changing the Root Password................................................................................................2-13

Creating Read-only or Limited Access Users.......................................................................2-16

2R400-V620 Xedge Switch Software Version 6.2.0 iue 03 Configuration Guide

Table of Contents

1

2

0

1

1

2

8

1

1

2

3

6

2

6

1

4

7

2

Chapter 3: Configuring ComponentsChapter Overview................................................................................................................... 3-

Before You Begin................................................................................................................... 3-

Connecting to the Manager Port on the Switch...................................................................... 3-2

Making Selections from Switch Menus.................................................................................. 3-3

Selecting the Xedge Switch IP Address................................................................................. 3-6

Creating the hosts File for Slot-0............................................................................................ 3-6

Performing the Slot-0 Configuration...................................................................................... 3-8

Defining the Quad Ethernet (ETH in Slot-0 only)........................................................... 3-9

Setting the System Time....................................................................................................... 3-1

SNMP Authentication........................................................................................................... 3-1

SNMP Authentication Table Configuration.................................................................. 3-11

Configuring the SLIP Line................................................................................................... 3-18

Chapter 4: Alarm HandlerChapter Overview................................................................................................................... 4-

Reclassifying Alarms.............................................................................................................. 4-

Alarm Reclassification Procedure.................................................................................... 4-5

Configuring Alarms................................................................................................................ 4-

Configuring Status Inputs................................................................................................ 4-8

Configuring Alarm Cut-Off........................................................................................... 4-13

Monitoring Alarms............................................................................................................... 4-2

Chapter 5: ACP ConfigurationChapter Overview................................................................................................................... 5-

Configuration Summary......................................................................................................... 5-

Define the LIM in Slot-0........................................................................................................ 5-3

Physical Layout Screen Parameters................................................................................. 5-4

Configure the PLCP Framer................................................................................................... 5-7

PLCP Configuration/Status Screen Parameters............................................................... 5-9

Configure the Physical Framer............................................................................................. 5-13

DS1-2C/2CS LIMs......................................................................................................... 5-1

DS3-2C LIMs................................................................................................................. 5-1

E1-2C/2CS LIMs........................................................................................................... 5-2

E3-2C LIMs ................................................................................................................... 5-2

HSSI-DTE LIMs............................................................................................................ 5-3

J2 LIMs.......................................................................................................................... 5-3

SI-2C LIMs.................................................................................................................... 5-3

Configure the Low Priority Buffers...................................................................................... 5-40

Procedure....................................................................................................................... 5-4

Configure the LCE-16 LIM.................................................................................................. 5-47

ii Xedge Switch Software Version 6.2.0 032R400-V620Configuration Guide Issue 03

Table of Contents

03Iss

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

9

9

9

5

ACP Version 2 Slot Controller Requirements................................................................5-47

Define the LCE-16 LIM in Slot-0..................................................................................5-47

Loading the LCE-16 Software........................................................................................5-48

LCE-16 Configuration Overview...................................................................................5-49

Control Signals Overview..............................................................................................5-49

Diagnostic Configuration Overview...............................................................................5-49

LCE-16 Configuration....................................................................................................5-50

Chapter 6: ACS ConfigurationChapter Overview...................................................................................................................6-

Configuration Summary..........................................................................................................6-

Define the LIM in Slot-0.........................................................................................................6-

Physical Layout Screen Parameters..................................................................................6-4

Configure the SDH Framer.....................................................................................................6-6

Configuration Table Screen Parameters...........................................................................6-7

Configure the DSP DLIM.....................................................................................................6-10

SONET/DELIM DLIM Config/Status Screen Parameters.............................................6-11

Configure the Low Priority Buffers......................................................................................6-12

Procedure .......................................................................................................................6-1

Chapter 7: ECC ConfigurationChapter Overview...................................................................................................................7-

Configuration Summary..........................................................................................................7-

Configure the 155 Series LIMs...............................................................................................7-3

Enable the Links...............................................................................................................7-

APS LIM Configuration...................................................................................................7-9

APS Group Configuration..............................................................................................7-12

APS Link Configuration.................................................................................................7-21

Configure the DSX1-IMA and E1-IMA LIMs.....................................................................7-29

IMA Bandwidth..............................................................................................................7-2

IMA Group Limitations..................................................................................................7-30

Configure the E1-IMA LIM...........................................................................................7-31

Configure the DSX1-IMA LIM......................................................................................7-35

IMA Configuration.........................................................................................................7-3

Configure the Timing............................................................................................................7-4

Select the Master Transmit Timing Source....................................................................7-49

Configure Traffic Management............................................................................................7-53

Peak Rate Limit & UBR Reservation.............................................................................7-53

EFCI Threshold..............................................................................................................7-5

Adjustable UBR Buffer Size..........................................................................................7-57

Link Restriction Option..................................................................................................7-58

2R400-V620 Xedge Switch Software Version 6.2.0 iiiue 03 Configuration Guide

Table of Contents

1

2

2

2

5

1

Additional Traffic Management Options....................................................................... 7-59

Updating the LIM Software.................................................................................................. 7-60

Configure Managed VP Services......................................................................................... 7-62

MTS and VPC Endpoint Configuration......................................................................... 7-62

Configure VP Service Category Queue................................................................................ 7-70

Chapter 8: ETH ConfigurationChapter Overview................................................................................................................... 8-


Configuring ETH for Data Transfer ................................................................................ 8-2

Operation of ETH for Slot 0/Switch Fabric Redundancy ............................................... 8-2

Define the DLIM in Slot-0..................................................................................................... 8-3

Physical Layout Screen Parameters................................................................................. 8-4

Configure the ETH IP Identity............................................................................................... 8-6

ETH DOC Screen Parameters.......................................................................................... 8-7

Configure the Physical to Logical Mappings........................................................................ 8-8

MappingTable Screen Parameters................................................................................... 8-9

ETH Physical Entities.................................................................................................... 8-10

ETH Logical Entities..................................................................................................... 8-11

Configure the Bridges........................................................................................................... 8-1

SYSIB Display and Management Screen Parameter Definitions.................................. 8-14

802.1D Spanning Tree Group Screen Parameters......................................................... 8-15

PortTable Screen Parameters......................................................................................... 8-18

Enable/Disable 802.1D Spanning Tree................................................................................ 8-20

Bridge Info Table Screen Parameters............................................................................ 8-21

Configure Tunnels................................................................................................................ 8-2

Tunnel Table Screen Parameters.................................................................................... 8-23

Conserving Resources.......................................................................................................... 8-2

Configuring ETH Adaptation Controller, Redundant Slot 0................................................ 8-26

ETH Slot 0 Standby (Redundant).................................................................................. 8-26

Chapter 9: SMC ConfigurationChapter Overview................................................................................................................... 9-

Setting SMC IP Addresses..................................................................................................... 9-2

Configuring MOLN on SMC................................................................................................. 9-6

Configuring Default MOLN............................................................................................ 9-6

Setting up MOLN-over-IP tunnels................................................................................. 9-13

Setting up Static Routes to NMS Workstations............................................................. 9-16

Deleting static routes on SMC....................................................................................... 9-18

SMC Redundancy Configuration......................................................................................... 9-19

Preparing for SMC Slot0 redundancy............................................................................ 9-19

iv Xedge Switch Software Version 6.2.0 032R400-V620Configuration Guide Issue 03

Table of Contents

03Iss

7

1

2

2

-3

7

1

2

-3

3

7

6

9

Configuring SMC for Redundancy................................................................................9-20

Set-up for Separate Slot0 terminals................................................................................9-24

Configuring SMC Controller, Redundant Slot 0..................................................................9-26

SMC Slot 0 Standby (Redundant)..................................................................................9-26

Operation of SMC Slot0 Redundancy............................................................................9-27

Manual Swap-over..........................................................................................................9-2

Chapter 10: FRC ConfigurationChapter Overview.................................................................................................................10-

Configuration Summary........................................................................................................10-

Traffic Management.......................................................................................................10-

Admin State....................................................................................................................10

Define the DLIM in Slot-0....................................................................................................10-4

Configure the DLIM.............................................................................................................10-

Configure the DS1-2C/2CS DLIM.................................................................................10-7

Configure the E1-2C/2CS DLIM.................................................................................10-11

Configure the HSSI-DCE/DTE DLIM.........................................................................10-15

Configure the SI-2C DLIM..........................................................................................10-19

Configure and Activate the Links.......................................................................................10-23

Service Specific Configuration...........................................................................................10-28

Configure the Frame Relay LMI..................................................................................10-28

Configure FUNI/ATM-DXI Mode...............................................................................10-31

Configure the Virtual Circuits.............................................................................................10-33

Frame Relay/Transport/PPP Virtual Circuits...............................................................10-33

FUNI/ATM-DXI Virtual Circuits ................................................................................10-41

Configure the Shaping Rate................................................................................................10-45

Chapter 11: CHFRC ConfigurationChapter Overview.................................................................................................................11-


Admin State....................................................................................................................11




DS1-2C/2CS and DS1-4C/4CS DLIMs.........................................................................11-7

E1-2C/2CS and E1-4C/4CS DLIMs.............................................................................11-11

Activate the Links...............................................................................................................11-1

Assign the Time Slots.........................................................................................................11-1

Viewing Time Slot Assignments Details.....................................................................11-20

Configure the Channel Interfaces.......................................................................................11-22

Service Specific Configurations..........................................................................................11-27

2R400-V620 Xedge Switch Software Version 6.2.0 vue 03 Configuration Guide

Table of Contents

1

2

7

1

7

1

2

6

5

7

9

Configure the Frame Relay LMI ................................................................................. 11-27

Configuring FUNI/ATM-DXI Channels..................................................................... 11-30

Configure the Virtual Circuits............................................................................................ 11-32

Frame Relay/Transport/PPP Virtual Circuits............................................................... 11-32

FUNI/ATM-DXI Virtual Circuits................................................................................ 11-40

Configure the Shaping Rate................................................................................................ 11-45

Chapter 12: CE ConfigurationChapter Overview................................................................................................................. 12-

Configuration Summary....................................................................................................... 12-

Activating Configuration Changes................................................................................. 12-2

Define the DLIM in the Slot-0 Physical Layout................................................................... 12-3

Physical Layout Screen Parameters............................................................................... 12-4

Configure the DLIM............................................................................................................. 12-

DS1-2C/2CS and DS1-4C/4CS DLIMs......................................................................... 12-7

DS3-2C DLIM............................................................................................................. 12-1

E1-2C/2CS and E1-4C/4CS DLIMs............................................................................ 12-13

E3-2C DLIM................................................................................................................ 12-1

SI-2C and SI-4C DLIMs.............................................................................................. 12-20

Configure the CE Configuration Table.............................................................................. 12-23

Chapter 13: SCE ConfigurationChapter Overview................................................................................................................. 13-


Software Requirements.................................................................................................. 13-2

Define the DLIM in the Slot 0............................................................................................. 13-3

Physical Layout Screen Parameters............................................................................... 13-4

Configure the DLIM............................................................................................................. 13-

DS1-2CS and DS1-4CS DLIMs ................................................................................... 13-6

E1-2CS and E1-4CS DLIMs........................................................................................ 13-10

Configure the Partial Cell Fill............................................................................................ 13-14

Enable the Links................................................................................................................. 13-1

Link Configuration Screen Parameters........................................................................ 13-16

Assign the Channels........................................................................................................... 13-1

Channel Configuration Screen Parameters.................................................................. 13-18

Configure the Bundles........................................................................................................ 13-1

Bundle Configuration Screen Parameters.................................................................... 13-20

vi Xedge Switch Software Version 6.2.0 032R400-V620Configuration Guide Issue 03

Table of Contents

03Iss

1

3

4

8

3

8

9

1

3

8

4

4

5

5

5

1

2

-3

6

Chapter 14: VSM ConfigurationChapter Overview.................................................................................................................14-



Physical Layout..............................................................................................................14-


DS1-2CS/4CS DLIMs ....................................................................................................14-8

E1-2CS/4CS DLIMs.....................................................................................................14-1

Configure VSM Options.....................................................................................................14-1

Card Configuration.......................................................................................................14-1

Configure the Links......................................................................................................14-2

Configure the Timeslots...............................................................................................14-23

Configure the Bundles..................................................................................................14-29

Logical Multicast................................................................................................................14-3

Q.SIG Configuration (Optional Feature)............................................................................14-35

Overview, Q.SIG Load Distribution............................................................................14-35

VSM Base Card Revision Requirements.....................................................................14-36

SAP Configuration.......................................................................................................14-3

Link Table Configuration (M, 60, 1)............................................................................14-39

Timeslot Table Configuration......................................................................................14-40

Bundle Table Configuration.........................................................................................14-40

SCC Configuration Table (M, 102, 0)..........................................................................14-40

Activate SAP (M, 109, 1).............................................................................................14-41

Q.931 Glare Priority.....................................................................................................14-4

Activate SAP................................................................................................................14-4

ISDN Link Table (M, 110, 2).......................................................................................14-44

Back-up Your .cfg Files...............................................................................................14-44

AEM ISDN Narrowband / Broadband Mapping Table Generation...................................14-45

VC Profiles...................................................................................................................14-4

VPN Plan......................................................................................................................14-4

DS0/VPN Mapping......................................................................................................14-4

Loading the isdn.bin Software File..............................................................................14-45

Chapter 15: VE ConfigurationChapter Overview.................................................................................................................15-


Required VE Configuration............................................................................................15-2

Optional Configuration...................................................................................................15-2

Define the LIM......................................................................................................................15

Configure the CDV...............................................................................................................15-

MPG2V LIM (VIP-4) Configuration....................................................................................15-8

2R400-V620 Xedge Switch Software Version 6.2.0 viiue 03 Configuration Guide

Table of Contents

1

2

2

2

4

1

-3

-

-3

-5

6

MPEG System Information Group................................................................................ 15-9

MPEG Physical Interfaces Group................................................................................ 15-13

MPEG Codec Function Ctrls Group............................................................................ 15-20

MPG2V Audio and Video Parameter Restrictions...................................................... 15-32

Network Bandwidth and Audio/Video Delays............................................................ 15-32

Loading MPG2V LIM Software......................................................................................... 15-33

Loading Software from the VE Adaptation Controller................................................ 15-33

Loading Software from the Front Panel Management Port......................................... 15-34

Chapter 16: Bandwidth Allocation and ReservationChapter Overview................................................................................................................. 16-

Bandwidth Allocation and SAPs.......................................................................................... 16-2

Physical SAPs................................................................................................................ 16-

Virtual SAPs.................................................................................................................. 16-

Logical SAPs.................................................................................................................. 16-

QAAL2 Physical SAPs.................................................................................................. 16-2

QAAL2 Virtual SAPs.................................................................................................... 16-3

Assigning Bandwidth to a Physical SAP....................................................................... 16-3

Assigning Bandwidth to a Logical SAP........................................................................ 16-3

Assigning Bandwidth to a QAAL2 Physical SAP......................................................... 16-3

Restricting Resources........................................................................................................... 16-

Restricting Cell Rates..................................................................................................... 16-4

Restricting QOS Classes and Allocating UBR CAC Deduction................................... 16-5

Configuring Link Resources................................................................................................. 16-7

Defining VP and VC Switching Ranges in the PVC Resource Table........................... 16-7

Allocating Physical SAP Resources............................................................................ 16-10

Allocating Logical SAP Resources.............................................................................. 16-21

Chapter 17: Configuring ConnectionsChapter Overview................................................................................................................. 17-

ATM Circuits........................................................................................................................ 17

MOLN ............................................................................................................................ 173

Signaling........................................................................................................................ 17

Configuring an GDC Xedge Network.................................................................................. 17-4

Network Configuration Summary........................................................................................ 17-5

Configure Slot-0 Overview............................................................................................ 17-5

Specific Slot Controllers (non-Slot-0) Configurations.................................................. 17-5

Routing........................................................................................................................... 17

Configure the PVCs....................................................................................................... 17-

Configure the SPVCs..................................................................................................... 17-8

viii Xedge Switch Software Version 6.2.0 032R400-V620Configuration Guide Issue 03

Table of Contents

03Iss

-9

4

4

2

9

4

1

3

Establish SVC Support Requirements............................................................................17-8

Configure Slot-0....................................................................................................................17

Configure the Port Types................................................................................................17-9

Configure Switching Ranges (VCC and VPC Switching Ranges)..............................17-10

Assign an ATM addresses (E.164 Address).................................................................17-10

LECS Network Prefix...................................................................................................17-11

Assign DTL Node IDs..................................................................................................17-11

Configure the Physical Table.......................................................................................17-11

Assign a Node IP Address............................................................................................17-12

Specific Slot Controller Network Configurations...............................................................17-13

PVCs...................................................................................................................................17-14

Resources......................................................................................................................17-1

Configuring a PVC.......................................................................................................17-1

Configuring a Multicast PVC.......................................................................................17-22

SPVCs.................................................................................................................................17-23

SPVPs...........................................................................................................................17-3

Configuring an SPVC...................................................................................................17-23

SPVC Multicast...................................................................................................................17-2

SPVC Multicast Configuration Overview....................................................................17-29

SPVC Multicast Configuration.....................................................................................17-31

SVCs...................................................................................................................................17-33

Configuring the Network for SVCs..............................................................................17-33

Interim Local Management Interface (ILMI).....................................................................17-34

Configuring ILMI.........................................................................................................17-3

Address Registration Information on the Network-Side..............................................17-37

Address Registration Information on the User-Side....................................................17-39

Chapter 18: System Timing ConfigurationChapter Overview.................................................................................................................18-

Overview...............................................................................................................................18-2


System Timing Without the NTM ........................................................................................18-4

System Timing References Screen.................................................................................18-4

Primary and Secondary System Timing.........................................................................18-5

System Timing Reference Hierarchy.............................................................................18-8

System Timing Reference Configuration.......................................................................18-8

System Timing With The NTM ..........................................................................................18-11

Configuring the NTM...................................................................................................18-11

Transmit Timing Configuration..........................................................................................18-22

OC-3c/STM-1 LIM Transmit Timing..........................................................................18-22

DS1/E1 LIM Transmit Timing.....................................................................................18-27

2R400-V620 Xedge Switch Software Version 6.2.0 ixue 03 Configuration Guide

Table of Contents

1

4

5

1

3

3

7

DS3 LIM Transmit Timing.......................................................................................... 18-30

E3 LIM Transmit Timing............................................................................................. 18-32

Serial I/O LIM Receive Timing................................................................................... 18-35

Transmit Timing for a LIM Associated with a CE Slot Controller.................................... 18-37

Chapter 19: PNNI ConfigurationChapter Overview................................................................................................................. 19-

Overview Of Routing Methods............................................................................................ 19-2

Static Routing Tables..................................................................................................... 19-2

Dynamic PNNI Routing................................................................................................. 19-2

Used Terminology.......................................................................................................... 19-


Select A PNNI Topology Slot.............................................................................................. 19-7

Configure The PT Slot................................................................................................... 19-7

Configure The Routing Parameters................................................................................ 19-9

Configure The Node Table.......................................................................................... 19-13

Configure The PNNI Timers........................................................................................ 19-17

SAP Configuration............................................................................................................. 19-2

Configure The Max PNNI SAPs.................................................................................. 19-21

Customize Metrics.............................................................................................................. 19-2

Configure Metrics........................................................................................................ 19-2

Adding Static Routes.......................................................................................................... 19-2

Configure Static Routes............................................................................................... 19-27

x Xedge Switch Software Version 6.2.0 032R400-V620Configuration Guide Issue 03

ATM LIMs

ther ta

ntirely ts, it omm,

Preface

Scope of this ManualThis manual describes how to install and configure the General DataComm Xedge family of switches. It includes procedures for configuring each of the Version 6.2.0 Slot Controllers andcontained in the ATM switch, allocating resources, and configuring ATM circuits by creatingPermanent Virtual Circuits (PVCs), Soft Permanent Virtual Circuits (SPVCs), and Switched Virtual Connections (SVCs).

For additional information about Xedge Version 7.x slot controllers and LIMs, refer to the corresponding user manual and release notes listed in the front of this document.

The contents of this manual is intended for switch technicians, engineers, managers, and onetwork engineers or service provider personnel. A background knowledge of voice and datelecommunications, network architecture and terminology is assumed.

The information contained in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be ereliable. As General DataComm improves the reliability, function, and design of their producis possible that the information in this document may not be current. Contact General DataCyour sales representative or point your browser to http:\\www.gdc.com for the latest information on this and other General DataComm products.

General DataComm, Inc.6 Rubber AvenueNaugatuck, Connecticut 06770 U.S.A.Tel: 1 203 729-0271 Toll Free: 1 800 523-1737

032R400-V620 Xedge Switch Software Version 6.2.0 xiIssue 03 Configuration Guide

Preface

.2.0

h.

ps),

ler

d

d

s.

e

Cs.

ns,

.

rk.

on-nt of your

Manual Organization

Chapter 1, Switch Overview describes the Xedge family of switches and the Xedge Version 6hardware and software components.

Chapter 2, Software Installation describes a first-time software installation on the Xedge switc

Chapter 3, Configuring Components describes procedures required before you can begin configuration of the Slot Controllers and their associated Line Interface Modules (LIMs).

Chapter 4, Alarm Handler describes how to classify alarms, configure status inputs (alarm traconfigure alarm cut-off, and monitor alarms.

Chapter 5, ACP Configuration describes configuring the ACP Cell Controller and its LIMs.

Chapter 6, ACS Configuration describes configuring the ACS Cell Controller and its LIMs.

Chapter 7, ECC Configuration describes configuring the ECC Cell Controller and its LIMs.

Chapter 8, ETH Configuration describes configuring and managing the ETH Adaptation Controller and its LIMs.

Chapter 9, SMC Configuration describes configuring and managing the SMC Cell Controller.

Chapter 10, FRC Configuration describes configuring the Frame Adaptation Controller Control(FRC) and its LIMs.

Chapter 11, CHFRC Configuration describes configuring the CHFRC Adaptation Controller anits LIMs.

Chapter 12, CE Configuration describes configuring the CE Adaptation Controller and its associated LIMs.

Chapter 13, SCE Configuration describes configuring and managing the Structured Circuit Emulation Controller (SCE) and its LIMs,

Chapter 14, VSM Configuration describes how to configure the VSM Adaptation Controller anits LIMs.

Chapter 15, VE Configuration describes configuring the VE Adaptation Controller and its LIM

Chapter 16, Bandwidth Allocation and Reservation describes configuring the bandwidth availablfor connections leaving a Slot Controller that is contained within a switch. This includes the Connection Admission Control (CAC) feature to optimize bandwidth resources for PVCs/SV

Chapter 17, Configuring Connections describes configuring permanent and switched connectioincluding procedures for PVCs, SPVCs and SVCs.

Chapter 18, System Timing Configuration describes sytem timing configurations for the switch

Chapter 19, PNNI Configuration describes how to configure PNNI routing in an Xedge netwo

Note For information on higher versions of Xedge software and hardware, such as the Version 7.X slot ctrollers and associated LIMs, refer to the corresponding manuals and release notes listed in the frothis document. For the latest information on Xedge Switches, go to http://www.gdc.com, or consult authorized Xedge representative.

xii Xedge Switch Software Version 6.2.0 032R400-V620Configuration Guide Issue 03

Preface Graphical Conventions

ways:

nd

while nts

Graphical Conventions

In this manual, the Xedge equipment, components and other hardware are illustrated in two

• traditional perspective (3-D) drawings that represent how the actual equipment acomponents look

• abstract representations of the equipment based on functionality

Note that a traditional, 3-D drawing will show components such as a power supply and fans,the abstract representation will not. The figures below demonstrate how traditional componetranslate into abstract elements.

Switch Fabric

Slot-0 Controller

Line Interface Module (LIM)

Slot Controller

Link-0

Link-3

Line Interface Module (4-links) (2-links)

Traditional Rendering Abstractof an Xedge 6640 Switch Representation

Traditional Rendering Abstractof an Xedge 6280 Switch Representation

032R400-V620 Xedge Switch Software Version 6.2.0 xiiiIssue 03 Configuration Guide

Preface Navigating Xedge Menus and Screens

e root n, type lay

ey. The

nual of ion

Navigating Xedge Menus and Screens

Selecting Root Menu Options

All configuration and status functions described in this document are executed from the Xedgmenu, shown below. Menu options are listed at the bottom of the screen. To select an optiothe bold, capital letter in the word describing the option. The Xedge Switch software will dispthe associated submenu or execute that action immediately.

Selecting Group Options

Xedge option menus employ group numbers (00, 01, 02, etc.) that correspond to selectablefunctions or parameters. To select a group number, type the number, then press the Enter kXedge Switch software will then execute that action.

Note IMPORTANT! When accompanying configuration procedures, all screen representations in this maare provided as examples only. Do not copy values from example screens. The actual appearancemenus and screens will vary, depending on your system environment and the Xedge software verscontrolling a particular module.

ATM SWITCH: Slot 0 SYS Root Menu SW Version

Select option:TCB status, Diagnostics, Events, File system, Gateway to 040I nternal status, Manage configuration, PSI management, self Restarts,Telnet, Username, s Vs routing, Warm start, Zap cell interface,eXit

ROOT MENUOPTIONS

ATM SWITCH: Slot 0 SYS MIB Display and Management New Event

Select option:Enter group number, save As, Load, s Tatus, e Xit,Last save file is '/$/config.cfg'.

GROUP NUMBERSELECTIONS

0001020304050607080910111221232427

systeminterfacesAddress TranslationipicmptcpudpsnmpSystem InformationSlot 0 Configuration/StatusTrace TogglesSlip ConfigurationStatis RoutingQuad Ethernet DOCPVC Configuration StatusSVC Configuration/StatusSystem Timing References

MENUOPTIONS

42 Alarm Handler

Version ID

Event Message

xiv Xedge Switch Software Version 6.2.0 032R400-V620Configuration Guide Issue 03

Preface Support Services and Training

re-and

nt, ck,

omers f GDC DC

nd ff used port the

anges n the

Support Services and Training

General DataComm offers two comprehensive customer support organizations dedicated to ppost-sale support services and training for GDC products. Corporate Client Services and Factory-Direct Support & Repair assist customers throughout the world in the installation, managememaintenance and repair of GDC equipment. Located at GDC’s corporate facility in NaugatuConnecticut USA, these customer support organizations work to ensure that customers getmaximum return on their investment through cost-effective and timely product support.

Corporate Client Services

Corporate Client Services is a technical support and services group that is available to GDC customers throughout the world for network service and support of their GDC products. Custget the reliable support and training required for installation, management and maintenance oequipment in their global data communication networks. Training courses are available at Gcorporate headquarters in Naugatuck, Connecticut, as well as at customer sites.

Factory Direct Support & Repair

GDC provides regular and warranty repair services through Factory Direct Support & Repair at its U.S. headquarters in Naugatuck, Connecticut. This customer support organization repairs arefurbishes GDC products, backed by the same engineering, documentation and support stato build and test the original product. Every product received for repair at Factory Direct Sup& Repair is processed using the test fixtures and procedures specifically designed to confirmfunctionality of all features and configurations available in the product.

As part of GDC’s Factory Direct program, all product repairs incorporate the most recent chand enhancements from GDC Engineering departments, assuring optimal performance whecustomer puts the product back into service. Only GDC’s Factory Direct Support & Repair can provide this added value.

Contact Information

General DataComm, Inc.6 Rubber AvenueNaugatuck, Connecticut 06770 USAAttention: Corporate Client Services

Telephones: 1 800 523-1737 1 203 729-0271Fax: 1 203 729-3013Email: [email protected]

General DataComm, Inc.6 Rubber AvenueNaugatuck, Connecticut 06770 USAAttention: Factory Direct Support & Repair

Telephones: 1 800 523-1737 1 203 729-0271Fax: 1 203 729-7964Email: [email protected]

Hours of Operation: Monday - Friday 8:30 a.m. - 5:00 p.m. EST

(excluding holidays)

http://www.gdc.com

032R400-V620 Xedge Switch Software Version 6.2.0 xvIssue 03 Configuration Guide

Preface Support Services and Training

xvi Xedge Switch Software Version 6.2.0 032R400-V620Configuration Guide Issue 03

03Iss

. TheXedge

3

4

Chapter 1: Switch Overview

Chapter OverviewThis chapter provides an overview of the General DataComm’s Xedge family of switchesoverview describes the different hardware and software components which make up the switch. The topics in this chapter include:

Xedge Hardware Overview.................................................................................................... 1-2

Switch Fabric Modules.....................................................................................................1-2

Slot Controller Modules...................................................................................................1-2

Slot-0 Controllers.............................................................................................................1-

Xedge Software Overview..................................................................................................... 1-4

Virtual Disk Drives...........................................................................................................1-

Software Organization......................................................................................................1-5

File Naming Conventions.................................................................................................1-5

Using the File System.......................................................................................................1-5

Special Root Menu Selections........................................................................................1-13

Craft Port Security Option................................................................................................... 1-14

2R400-V620 Xedge Switch Software Version 6.2.0 1-1ue 03 Configuration Guide

Switch Overview Xedge Hardware Overview

tail onumber

Line. Thel for

frontwitch

ystem.ction

assis.odule

re andCell

hernet,

singVCI/mance

h Slotn. Alled to

ad of

gement.IBs

e at boottors the

Xedge Hardware Overview

The Hardware Overview describes how each component functions in the switch. For more deXedge hardware components, refer to the Xedge Hardware Installation Guide, Part N032R440.

The Xedge switch is comprised of Switch Fabric modules, Slot Controller modules, andInterface Modules (LIMs), all plugged into a chassis containing its own power supply modulesXedge system may also have Node Timing Module(s) (NTM) to provide additional controsystem timing.

Switch Fabric Modules

All Switch Fabric modules plug into one of two dedicated slots (main and standby), on thepanel side of the switch chassis. The slots are marked “Switch Fabric (or SF) Main” and “SFabric (or SF) Standby”.

The Switch Fabric is responsible for transporting cells between the slot controllers in the sWithin the Xedge system, the switch fabric offers 400 Mbit/s throughput in each diresimultaneously to each of up to 16 slot controllers.

Slot Controller Modules

All Slot Controller modules plug into a universal slot on the front panel side of the switch chEach slot is identified by front panel labels showing either the slot number or switch fabric mlocations. There are two Slot-0s, “Slot-0 Main” and “Slot-0 Standby”.

A Slot Controller supports one of many physical interfaces and their associated hardwasoftware (LIMs). There are two types of Slot Controllers; Adaptation Controllers and Controllers.

Adaptation Controllers connect existing network technologies, such as Frame Relay and Etto the ATM switch.

Cell Controllers provide dedicated ATM cell interfaces. They perform ATM cell procesfunctions such as traffic management and Virtual Channel Identifier/Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) translation. These interfaces connect Xedge switches or attach LAN hubs, high perforworkstations and other local devices with ATM interfaces to the Xedge switch.

Up to 17 Slot Controllers (16 plus one Slot-0 Standby) fit into an Xedge chassis (shelf). EacController has an independent SNMP agent configured with MIBs appropriate to its functiooperating software is held in flash EPROM, enabling operating code to be downloadaccommodate new features as well as changing standards.

Using the industry standard TFTP file transfer protocol, Xedge supports upload/downlooperating software and configuration files to/from the network management system.

A management subsystem processor controls non-data path functions such as SNMP manaEach Slot Controller in the Xedge switch has its own SNMP agent configured with Mappropriate to the controller module. The subsystem processor checks the status of hardwartime and loads the correct software version. After start-up, the subsystem processor monistatus of the data path hardware and takes actions as required.

1-2 Xedge Switch Software Version 6.2.0 032R400-V620Configuration Guide Issue 03

Switch Overview Xedge Hardware Overview

03Iss

panel

faultf Slot/QEDlot-0

r slots. serial

hen a in the

directication

twork

on.

Slot-0 Controllers

All Slot-0 Controllers plug into one of two dedicated slots (main and standby), on the front side of the Xedge switch chassis. The slots are marked “Slot 0 Main” and “Slot 0 Standby”.

The Slot Controller, located in Slot-0, provides system-wide facilities, such as control of tolerance and redundancy, as well as control of PVC configuration information. Any type oController, except for the ECC and VSM is capable of acting as the Slot-0 Controller. The MSand ETH Adaptation Controllers are the only Slot Controllers that you can configure for Sredundancy (standby).

The Slot-0 Controller runs a background task that sends health check cells to all of the otheIf a module is active in a slot, it responds with its state, type, software version number andnumbers. Slot-0 therefore is aware of the overall slot configuration of the switch.

The Slot-0 Controller also maintains the PVC tables. PVCs are configured only on Slot-0. WPVC is activated, the Slot-0 Controller sends appropriate messages to each link involvedconnection in order to establish the circuit.

The Slot-0 Controller runs the local manager port service and can run the SLIP protocol or aterminal interface. As only Slot-0 and standby Slot-0 have a physical manager port, communwith non-Slot-0 modules must be via IP that provides Telnet access.

Finally, the Slot-0 Controller also acts as a router for the virtual IP Management Overlay Newithin the switch. IP packets are sent to and from Slot-0 for routing.

Note All 6640 or 6645 chassis that are not configured for Slot-0 redundancy must have a GDC System Termination Module (STM) (GDC P/N 032P105-001) in the redundant Slot-0 positiThe STM monitors and conditions the system clock signals.


Switch Overview Xedge Software Overview

us filepting to

flashs thel disk

stateevicesystems.

OMs flashlity toumber

e yout to aon the

or so

d then

befrom a

ferentding

Xedge Software OverviewThe Software Overview describes how the Xedge software is organized, and the variocommands available to the user. It is recommended that you read this section before atteminstall or configure software on an Xedge switch.

Except for switch fabric modules, each Slot Controller module in the Xedge switch has EPROM fitted for storing configuration and operating code files. The Xedge software makeflash EPROM appear to be a disk drive. The user interface provides many conventionaoperating system (DOS) commands such as format, copy, delete and rename.

Virtual Disk Drives

The Slot Controller modules store all run-time code and configuration information in solid nonvolatile memory devices called flash EPROMs. The switch software makes these dfunction as virtual disk drives. The user interface provides conventional disk operating s(DOS) functions such as format, copy, delete, and rename for use with the virtual disk drive

Like conventional electrically programmable read only memory (EPROM) devices, flash EPRretain the information written to them even after power is removed. Unlike other EPROMs,EPROMs can be electronically erased relatively quickly, which greatly enhances their abimimic disk drive operation. A flash EPROM supports hundreds of erase cycles. There are a nof advantages to treating the flash EPROM as disk drives:

• You can easily make copies of configurations. You can copy a switch configuration beformodify it so that you can reload the previous configuration if there is a need to reverprevious configuration. In a similar way, you can create test configurations, store them disk, and load them when you need them.

• Configuration files are plain ASCII text files. The switch software includes a screen edityou can create and modify files from the manager interface (this is not recommended).

• You can also copy the operating code. You can load a trial version of code for testing anload back the regular version for normal operation.

• The switch supports the widely used trivial file transfer protocol (TFTP). Files cantransferred by TFTP between boards, between flash EPROM virtual drives, and to and network management controller.

• Because each Slot Controller module has its own virtual disk drive(s), you can load difversions of the operating software on different Slot Controller modules. When upgrasoftware, smaller portions of the network are effected.



03Iss

. Eache runsisabled code

t time,

uration

hree

en.

ect the

Software Organization

The configuration and operating code for the switch appears as files on the virtual disk(s)module has its own copy of the code stored in its own flash EPROM. Each controller modulidentical software in its subsystem processor. Various parts of the software are enabled or ddepending on the type of module and which Daughter Option Card (DOC) is fitted. Extramodules may be required for particular interface types.

The subsystem processor software, which is loaded from the flash EPROM virtual disk at boois stored in a file called slave.cod for all controller modules except ACP, ACS, and SCE. Thesubsystem processor software for the ACP, ACS, and SCE modules is stored in the file, mpro1.cod.The code uses a multitasking, message passing operating system as its kernel. Configinformation is stored in a file called config.cfg.

File Naming Conventions

File names have the following characteristics:

• The file name maximum length is 11 alphanumeric characters.

• Periods(.) are not a special characters, therefore, file name suffixes are not limited to tcharacters.

• Slashes (/) separate directory paths.

Using the File System

The following describes the most frequently used software file system commands. From theRootMenu select File system to see the following commands displayed at the bottom of the scre

Alter file

The Alter file command provides access to the screen editor. To run the screen editor, selAlter file option and the Select File screen appears (as shown in Figure 1-1).



at it is

file

An

Figure 1-1 Select File Screen

This selection screen appears for many file operations. The highlighted file name indicates ththe currently selected file. To select another file, you move the highlighter by pressing CTRL-B (tomove back) or CTRL-N to move to the next file. You actually select a file by pressing the SPACEor ENTER keys or, by typing the name.

Copy File

To make a copy of a file:

1. Select the Copy file option from the File System screen.

2. Use the CTRL-B/CTRL-N keys to move to a file or enter the file name.

3. Select the file by pressing ENTER. To abort the copy, press ESC twice.

4. Use the CTRL-B/CTRL-N keys to move to an existing file to copy over or type a new name.

5. Select the file by pressing ENTER. A bar graph box indicates the progress of the copy. error box appears if the copy fails.

Switch Name: Slot x SYS Select File SW Version

File to editCurrent directory: /. Current mask: *

<..> | slave.cod | mpro1.cod | alr_cls.txt | qedoc.binusers.cfg | dtl.new | dtl.bin | dtl.gb0 | hostsdtl.ga0 | def.rtb | config.cfg | nager | restart.slv

Type file name or use ^B, ^N to move,space to select file. Type * or ? to change mask, esc to abort.



03Iss

isplay

mask is notf their

Directory

The Directory option displays a directory of the disk. If you select the option, you see a dsimilar to the screen shown below..

Figure 1-2 Directory Screen

By default the directory command shows all the files in the currently selected directory. Theis set to *. You can specify a different mask by selecting the Mask option. Remember that (.)a special character so that a mask of *.* only shows files that contain a full stop as part onames.

The default path is the root path - /. You can change the path by selecting the Path option.

To see more information about the files select Extra detail and the Directory , Extra Detail screenappears, as shown in Figure 1-3.

system-1: Slot 0 SYS DirectoryName Size

users.cfg 199qedoc.bin 49970alr_cls.org 1642hosts 21slave.cod 479307alr_cls.txt 1636config.cfg 18868restart.slv 266

Select option:Extra detail, Mask, Path, eXit.



the userversion

time.

andardandard

Figure 1-3 Detail of Directory Screen

As well as showing the name and size of the file, the extra detail screen shows the name of who created the file, the time and date it was created, the type of read/write status, the number of the file (for .cod or .bin files) and whether the file is open or not.

The type of access can be one of the following:

If there are more files on the disk than can be displayed on the screen then Up and Down optionsappears. You can also use the CTRL-W and CTRL-Z keys to scroll the display one line at a

Erase File

The Erase file option is used to erase a file from the disk. Selecting this option opens a stselect file screen. You select the file (or press the ESC key to abort the function) in the stway. You are asked to confirm the delete before the file is removed.

Table 1-1 Access Types

Shown As Means

All RW Everyone can read and write the file.

All RO Everyone can read the file.

Own RW The owner can read and write the file.

Own RO The owner can read the file.

Table 1-1

For Example Only - Do Not Copy Values

system-1:Slot 0 SYS DirectoryName Size Owner Created Access Ver Open

users.cfg 199 01 01 1992 00:01:21 All RW ? Noqedoc.bin 49970 root 01 01 1992 00:04:54 All RW 3.10 Noalr_cls.org 1642 root 07 12 1995 12:43:21 All RW ? Nohosts 21 root 08 12 1995 13:56:37 All RW ? Noslave.cod 479307 root 01 01 1992 00:34:06 All RW 4.X.X Noalr_cls.txt 1636 root 09 12 1995 09:13:25 All RW ? Norestart.slv 266 09 12 1995 17:06:07 All RW ? Noconfig.cfg 19260 root 01 01 1992 00:17:52 All RW ? No

Select option:Mask, Path, Summary, e Xit



03Iss

ion, the

tions to

valuesen youFTP

ears toou are

TFTP Menu

The TFTP menu option provides access to the TFTP task and menu. If you select the optTFTP screen is displayed as shown in Figure 1-4.

Figure 1-4 TFTP Screen

This screen shows the status of any TFTP transfers that are active as well as providing opSend or Get files.

Configuring the Host for TFTP

If you are using TFTP on a host computer via SLIP then you need to increase the time-outon the host to compensate for the reduced line rate of SLIP. If the time-out value is too low thmay lockup the TFTP transfer with the host computer continually retrying. To improve Treliability between a SUN workstation and the Switch:

1. Type ? at the TFTP prompt.

2. Set the SUN retransmit timer to 30 seconds.

3. Set the SUN maximum time-out to 120 seconds.

Sending Files

To send a file to a remote host, select the Send file option. A select file dialogue screen appask you for the file to send. You are then asked for the destination IP address for the file. If ysending a file to another slot on the same switch then you can simply put slotn where n is the slotnumber. For example, to send a file to slot 7 you can put slot7 as the target slot number.

Note You should not attempt to send or receive files to or from the Slot Controller you are using.


system-1:Slot 0 SYS TFTP Status and Control# T/O:No Remote State Filename

0 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 -10-11-12-13-14-

Select option:Broadcast file, Channel number for detail, Get file, Kill, Send file, change Timeout, e Xit



sferred.

e file to of

to getary, you

s a ition

,

Once you specify the host, the transfer starts up and the TFTP Status and Control screen appears,as shown in Figure 1-5.

Figure 1-5 TFTP Status and Control Screen

The status line shows the target IP address, the state of the transfer and file name being tranThe display is automatically updated, so you should see the transfer proceeding.

Broadcasting Files

In some situations, for example, when upgrading software, it is necessary to send the samall the slots in the switch. The Broadcast file option requests a file name and sends a copythat file to all the slots in the Xedge switch.

Getting Files

To fetch a file from a remote host, select the Get file option. You are asked for the file namefrom the remote system. Then you are asked for the remote host IP address. Again, if necesscan use slotn where n is the slot number.

Kill

Allows terminating a TFTP session after the TFTP has started (when using the Send file or Get filecommands).

Note In a fully loaded 6640 node with a redundant MS/QED Slot-0 controller, broadcasting causeTFTP slot error message because there are only 15 TFTP slots available and with the addof the redundant MS during broadcast in a fully loaded shelf makes 16 slots. It may be necessary to send the files to the redundant MS separately.

Note TFTP writes over the file if it has the same name as an already existing file. To prevent thischange the file name during the TFTP transfer.


system-1:Slot 0 SYS TFTP Status and Control# T/O:No Remote State Filename

0 20 :0 192.1.1.16:69 Sent 1024 bytes /hosts1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 -10-11-12-13-14-

Select option:Broadcast file, Channel number for detail, Get file, Kill, Send file, change Timeout, e Xit



03Iss

ally,

level

the

Change Timeout

Allows adjusting the retransmit timer. The total timeout is 3 times the retransmit timer. Typicthis command is used on a congested network.

Detailed Status

There is a detailed display available of a particular TFTP channel. This is intended for systemdebugging rather than day-to-day management of the switch.

To obtain the display:

1. Enter the channel number of the channel you wish to detail.The Detailed Display of TFTP Channel screen appears as shown in Figure 1-6.

Figure 1-6 Detailed Display of TFTP Channel Screen

The Detailed Display of TFTP Channel screen shows various system level parameters forTFTP control block. The parameter definitions are listed in Table 1-2.


system-1:Slot 0 SYS Detailed Display of TFTP Channel

State: 0, last packet type: 3.In: ac 10 07 05 f6 f2 00 45 00 04 00 26

Out: ac 10 07 05 f6 f2 00 45 00 03 00 26 30 35 5d 3d 31 0a 69 6e 64 65 78 3d31 34 0a 69 6e 5b 30 30 5d 3d 31 34 0a 65 6c 5b 30 31 5d 3d 31 0a 65 6cOut length: 257, in length: 4, Ackno: 39.

Bytes sent: 19197, Bytes received: 0.Needack flag: 0, timeout: 0, timeoutcount: 2.Success flag: 0, Target: 172.16.7.5.Current state: Send OK. local port: 69

Select option:eXit



Table 1-2 TFTP Channel Screen Parameter Definitions

Parameter Definition

Add entry Brings up a new line to which you may add new information.

Down (Up) Moves you to the next lower screen, e.g., from link 1 to link 2. Up performs the opposite function.

Enter entry number to edit

Enter the number shown on the left side of the screen that identifies the row that you wish to edit.

Extra detail Brings up a more detailed screen for a specific row that includes all MIB items for that row. For example, if you select Extra detail for link 0, the Extra detail screen shows all the MIB items for that particular link.

Goto row Allows you to select a particular row. When you select a row, that row is moved to the top of the screen, and selecting Extra detail brings up the detail for that row.

Kill entry You are prompted for a row number to delete (default row is 0). Pressing enter deletes the row.

Move entry You are asked for a row number and are allowed to change parameters within that row.

Press ̂ J for extra help on this item

Activates a help function for a selected item.

Right (Left) If more columns exist than are shown on the screen, this function shifts the screen items left, bringing items on the right into view. When you select Right, a Left function appears which allows the reverse movement.

Summary Brings you out of Extra detail to the previous screen. The current item is top row of the screen.

eXit Returns you to the Frame Adaptation Controller screen.



03Iss

h areof this

a log or TFTPnd traps

d in theg. The event.

ED

er

Special Root Menu Selections

Figure 1-7 shows a typical Root Menu for Slot-0. In this menu there are a few commands whiconly used for very specific functions and are not described in the configuration chapters manual. This section describes these commands.

Figure 1-7 Root Menu Selections, Slot-0

Events

Selecting Events causes the Events log screen to be displayed. The Events screen shows listing of common system occurrences ranging from the status of slot controllers to variousstates. Other common events that are displayed on this screen are the status of active links agenerated by the system. In general, the number of different events that can be displayeevents log are too numerous to list. A maximum of 160 events can be stored in the events loevents log can also be saved as a text file that can be printed for further analysis of a system

Gateway to 040

This function is used only with the MSQED Slot Controller. It provides a display of MSQspecific statistics.

Note Gateway to 040 is a maintenance tool for authorized Xedge service use only. It is not a ussupported feature.


Switch Name: Slot 0 SYS Root Menu Software Version

MS-QED : Active up down down down Received datacells = 127709805ACS-DS : Active up up Transmitted datacells = 55376986ACS-DM : Active up downSlot 03 : -------- Received configcells = 20071645Slot 04 : -------- Transmitted configcells= 1090438Slot 05 : --------Slot 06 : --------Slot 07 : Active down down stop stopSlot 08 : Active down stop User: rootSlot 09 : -------- From: 172.16.2.251Slot 10 : --------ACS-DM : Active up down Slot 0 Redund. available: NoACP-DDS3 : Active up down Slot 0 Redund: Main In-servSlot 13 : -------- Sys. Ref.: Non-CF LIMSlot 14 : -------- SVCs Connected: 2Slot 15 : Active up up PVCs Connected: 0 File transfer: InactiveSelect option:TCB status, Diagnostics, Events, File system, Gateway to 040,Internal status, Manage configuration, PSI management, self Restarts,Telnet, User name, sVc routing, Warm start, Zap cell interface,eXit


Switch Overview Craft Port Security Option

y for a

FLASHed.

thisthe

mpts

, is 10-d andd to

ser

as

ection

Warm Start

There are two sub-functions of the Warm start command; Normal and Force. A “Normal Warmstart” is used to restart the processor and load new configuration parameters from memorspecific Slot Controller. For A-series Cell Controllers, decompression is used.

Force Warm start is used to restart the processor and reload the operating system from memory. When Force Warm start is used, decompression of the operating system is perform

Zap Cell Interface

This function is used only with MSQED/ETH/CHFRC and FRC Slot Controllers. Typically, function is used by the factory to synchronize the master and slave processors. Selecting Zapcell interface function causes the following actions:

• resets the 040 master processor

• reloads the binary software file

• reloads the 040 portion the config.cfg file

When this function is used with ETH/CHFRC or FRC Adaptation Controllers, the software proyou for the name of a configuration file to load. Typically this is the config.cfg file.

Craft Port Security Option

From the Root Menu screen, selecting the Internal Status option displays the Internal Statusscreen. From the Internal Status screen, selection the option craft pOrt securit y provides accessto an option for setting an additional level of security to the local craft interface (Manager port).The craft pOrt securit y feature utilizes the telnet time-out mechanism which by defaultdisabled. When enabled, telnet is automatically performed to Slot-0 to access the node. Aminute timer begins with no keyboard activity and, once expired, the display is terminatereturned to the User name , Password prompt. The root name and password must be enterere-access the node. This option can only be enabled / disabled as a root user.

Note Zap Cell Interface is a maintenance tool for authorized Xedge service use only. It is not a usupported feature.

Note When the craft pOrt security function is disabled, you must exit the telnet connection and login again local. With craft pOrt security set to enable, the Root Menu screen displays:User = telnetFrom = 192.1.1.0 (local ip address)With craft pOrt security set to disable, the Root Menu screen displays:User = rootFrom = local

Note If a modem is connected to craft port to manage the switch, the modem should have password protto prevent unauthorized access to the node.


03Iss

family

2

3

8

Chapter 2: Software Installation

Chapter OverviewThe information in this chapter describes the Software Installation procedure for the Xedge of ATM switches. The topics in this chapter include:

Overview................................................................................................................................ 2-2

Before You Begin.................................................................................................................. 2-

Software Files...................................................................................................................2-

Connecting a Workstation or PC to the Switch Serial Port..............................................2-7

Software Installation.............................................................................................................. 2-

How To Use This Procedure............................................................................................2-8

Transferring Software Files to Slot-0 Using a Workstation.............................................2-8

Transferring Software Files to Slot-0 Using a PC..........................................................2-10

Transferring Software Files from Slot-0 to Other Slot Controllers................................2-11

Changing the Root Password............................................................................................... 2-13

Creating Read-only or Limited Access Users...................................................................... 2-16


Software Installation Overview

ftwaretwork

via a. The

(craft)

oftware

eading

itch,

truc-

r thetwarehich

troller, and

e guide.

n or to the

yoursitions

Overview

This procedure is applicable to the Xedge 6640, 6645, 6280 and 6160 switches. The soinstallation should be performed by network system administrators who are familiar with nearchitecture and terminology, as well as using a workstation or a PC.

The software installation procedure comprises sending files to the Slot-0 Controller workstation or PC, then distributing those files to the other Slot Controllers used in the switchworkstation or PC will use a direct serial connection to the switch, using the Management port on the back side of the switch chassis.

Before You Begin

This chapter describes loading software for the first time on a new system. In most cases, sis already preloaded at the factory. With no software installed, your system will boot to the “BootMenu” screen, not the “Root Menu” screen. Also, the Slot Controller front panel LEDs will bsequencing from top to bottom. There are two conditions that require software loading or reloon a Xedge Switch:

• Upgrading software on a Xedge switch:

If you are upgrading software or installing a new Slot Controller in an existing ATM swfollow the instructions in the Upgrade Procedure supplied in the System Release Notes foryour specific software version.

• Loading software on a Xedge switch for the first time:

If you have a new system that requires loading software for the first time, follow the instions in the Software Installation section.

Before installing any software, you must identify all Slot Controllers and their slot locations fonode you are installing software on. During the installation procedure, you will transfer soffiles specific to each Slot Controller type. When you transfer the files, you will have to know wslot to transfer the files to.

To make this process easier, make a copy of the blank “Xedge Software Installation Slot ConLog Sheet” on the following page and use it to list the slot controllers you have in your systemthe files each one needs. During the installation, you can use this sheet as a quick referenc

If you are using a Node Timing Module(s) (NTM), you must transfer the NTM file (ntm_t1.bintm_e1.bin) to Slot-0 using this procedure. Then, after completing software installation, referSystem Timing Configuration chapter of this manual to transfer the file to the NTM(s).

You do not have to log information for the Switch Fabric module. Also, depending on configuration and switch type (6640, 6645, 6280 or 6160), you may or may not use all slot poin the log.

Note For the most recent information on your software release, read the System Release Notessupplied with the Xedge software version you are installing. Any information in the SystemRelease Notes regarding software installation takes precedence over this procedure.


Software Installation Before You Begin

03Iss

llers

Product

mes

plied

ce

Software Files

For all the Slot Controller slots used in your node, perform the following:

1. Looking at the front panel of your switch, write down the names of all the Slot Controinstalled in your system in the “Slot Controller Installed” column of the log sheet (Table 2-1).Use the abbreviated name printed on the front panel of each Slot Controller.

2. Cross-reference the abbreviated names with the same abbreviated names in the “Name” column of the Xedge Slot Controller/LIM Software Files table (Table 2-2). In the table,refer to the “Software Files Required” column for each Slot Controller. Write the file nalisted for each Slot Controller in the “Software Files Required” column of the log sheet.

Note For VE Adaptation Controllers, the type of LIM used (VJLIM or VH320) determines which software files are used. The Xedge Slot Controller/LIM Software Files table below provides this information. To locate these files on the cd-rom, refer to the System Release Notes supwith the software.

Note If you are using Slot-0 redundancy, the software file slave.cod will NOT automatically TFTP when the redundant MS/QED boots. The files for the redundant controller must be manually loaded using the instructions provided in the Software Installation section of this Chapter.

When redundancy is available, any configuration changes made and saved to the config.cfg file will update the redundant Slot-0 Controller automatically. As the file transfers, the Root Menu will show File transfer = Active and the redundant controller LEDs will show a TFTP in-progress indication. All the module’s front panel LEDswill illuminate and then will illuminate, one at a time, from top to bottom. Then, this sequenrepeats until the TFTP transfer is complete.



Table 2-1 Xedge Software Installation Slot Controller Log Sheet

Xedge Software Installation Slot Controller Log Sheet

Slot Number Slot Controller Installed Software Files Required

Slot-0 Main

Slot-0 Standby

Slot 1

Slot 2

Slot 3

Slot 4

Slot 5

Slot 6

Slot 7

Slot 8

Slot 9

Slot 10

Slot 11

Slot 12

Slot 13

Slot 14

Slot 15

NTM Primary

NTM Secondary Slot-0



03Iss

Table 2-2 Xedge Slot Controller and LIM Software Files

Xedge Slot Controller/LIM Software Files

Slot Controller/LIM DescriptionProduct Name(Front Panel)

SoftwareFiles Required

ProductNumber

ATM Controller PDH 4K/4K ACP mpro1.codac_lca.bin

032M024-001

ATM Controller PDH 16K/16K 032M025-001



ATM Controller PDH 4K/4K w/logical multicast ACP mpro1.cod 032M024-002

ATM Controller PDH 16K/16K w/logical multicast 032M025-002



ATM Controller SDH/SONET 4K/4K ACS mpro1.codac_lca.bin

032M028-001

ATM Controller SDH/SONET 16K/16K 032M029-001



ATM Controller SDH/SONET 4K/4K w/logical multicast

ACS mpro1.cod 032M028-002


032M029-002


032M030-002


032M031-002

MS/QED Adaptation Controller MS/QED slave.codqedoc.bin

032M009-003

Ethernet to ATM Adaptation Controller ETH slave.codeth.bin

032M020-001

Frame Relay Adaptation Controller FRC slave.codfrdoc.bin

032M021-001

Channelized Frame Controller CHFRC slave.codcfdoc.bin

032M022-001

Circuit Emulation Controller CE slave.codce_lca.bin

032M016-003

Structured Circuit Emulation Controller SCE mpro1.codscelca.bin

032M032-001

Voice Service Module; 48, 60, 96 and 120 Channels VSM mpro1.codvsm.bin

032M033-001032M034-001032M035-001032M036-001

Video Emulation Controller with 032M015-001 VJLIM

VE slave.codvjlim.codvjlca.cod

032M017-003

Table 2-2 (Sheet 1 of 2)



he ide tes

Video Emulation Controller with 032M019-001 VJLIM

VE slave.codvjlim.codvjlca.cod

032M017-003

Video Emulation Controller with 032M078-001 VH320 LIM

VE slave.codvh320.codvhdev.cod

032M017-003

Video Emulation Controller with 032P097-001 MPG2V LIM

VE slave.codmpg2v.cod

032M017-003

Enhanced Cell Controller with 155 Series LIM (includes Automatic Protection Switching (APS) support)

ECC mpro2.codeccpga.cod

oc3.cod

032P025-001

LCE-16, Legacy Circuit Emulation 16 Link LIM LCE-16 lce.cod 032P187-001

DSX1-IMA, 16 link Inverse Multiplexing for ATM LIM DSX1-IMA e1ds1.cod 032P153-003

E1-IMA, 16 link Inverse Multiplexing for ATM LIM E1-IMA e1ds1.cod 032P153-013

T1 BITS Node Timing Module NTM-DS1 ntm_t1.bin 032P062-001

E1 BITS Node Timing Module NTM-E1 ntm_e1.bin 032P089-001

Note For VE Slot Controllers, the type of LIM used (VJLIM or VH320) determines which softwarefiles are used. For the VJLIM, the product number determines which vjlca.cod file to use. Tproduct number sticker is located on the component side of the LIM. The vjlca.cod files resin specific directories on the cd-rom. For more information, refer to the System Release Nosupplied with the software.

Table 2-2 Xedge Slot Controller and LIM Software Files (Continued)

Xedge Slot Controller/LIM Software Files

Slot Controller/LIM DescriptionProduct Name(Front Panel)

SoftwareFiles Required

ProductNumber




03Iss

PC toCommg your

nagers, use

er port the Y

Connecting a Workstation or PC to the Switch Serial Port

To install software for the first time you must connect the serial port on your workstation or the Manager port (craft) on the back panel of the Xedge switch chassis. A list of General Dataserial cables for each Xedge system is provided below. Follow the instructions for connectincomputer type and ensure the VT 100 emulation settings are as described.

Connecting a Sun Sparc Workstation

Using the GDC serial cable (or equivalent), connect the ttyb port on the workstation to the Maport (craft port) on the back panel of the switch chassis. For redundant Slot-0 configurationthe Y cable as specified in the table (or equivalent) and the serial cable.

Connecting a PC

Using the GDC serial cable (or equivalent), connect the com 1 (or com 2) port to the Manag(craft port) on the back panel of the switch chassis. For redundant Slot-0 configurations, usecable as specified in the table (or equivalent) and the serial cable.

VT 100 Emulation Settings

On both the workstation and the PC, ensure your VT 100 emulation settings are:19,200 baud8 data bitsparity=none1 stop bit

Table 2-3 Serial Craft Port Cables

Serial Craft Port Cables

System Connection Required GDC Part Number Cable Description

Workstation to 6640, 6645 28H502 Serial, DB25M to DB25M

Workstation to 6160 28H346 Serial, DB25M to DB9M

PC to 6640, 6645 28H303 Serial, DB9F to DB25M


Y-Cable, Redundant Slot-0 28H350-X06 Serial Y, DB9F to dual DB9Ms


Table 2-3


Software Installation Software Installation

s they

s OS DOSuch as

ing

s theement theor for

llow

igned toou candow.

the

Software Installation

For a listing of the Xedge software files used in this procedure, and the cd-rom directoriereside in, refer to the Xedge Switch System Release Notes.

The software installation procedure is written for either a workstation (NMS 3000 w/Solariversion 2.5) or a PC. On the PC, a VT100 emulation program that allows switching to thecommand line is required. Authorized Xedge service engineers typically use a program sProcomm Plus®.

How To Use This Procedure

To begin the installation, use one of the following procedures:

• Transferring Software Files to Slot-0 Using a Workstation

• Transferring Software Files to Slot-0 Using a PC

To finish the installation (on either a workstation or PC) use the following procedure: TransferringSoftware Files from Slot-0 to Other Slot Controllers.

Transferring Software Files to Slot-0 Using a Workstation

1. Start the NMS 3000 application by logging into your UNIX workstation using the followuser name and password:

Unix user name:nms3000Unix password:nms3000 (or other user password)

2. The NMS3000 application opens, starts all NMS3000 processes, and displayAnnouncement window. After several seconds, the Login window replaces the Announcwindow. The Login window provides access to all NMS3000 windows. The title bar ofLogin window shows UserId because this window is used by the system administratother purposes.

3. If you are a system administrator and this is the first time you are logging into NMS, fothis procedure (see step 4 for non-administrator):

Click the Login Name field and type root .Click the Password field and type public .Click Login.

4. If you are an operator with level 1 or 2 access, use the Login Name and Password assyou by your system administrator. Your access level determines the types of actions yperform. As soon as your login is accepted, the NMS3000 displays the Root Picture win

5. Bring up a “New Terminal Window” (xterm) by left-clicking on the background field of display.

6. At the prompt /export/home/nms3000>: type: tip hardwirethen press the Enter key.

Note If offered the option to “boot run time code,” do not select this option.



03Iss

wing

nsion

o

ve.cod

. The

to

Clickcase,

r

r

7. “Connected ” is displayed. You may have to refresh the screen by pressing the follokeys simultaneously:Ctrl ror press the Enter key.

8. The Xedge “Boot Menu” is displayed.

9. Select: Load file

In this menu, you select the method of transferring files to Slot-0. For files with the exte“.cod” use the “Compressed file” selection. For files with the extension “.bin” use the Binaryfile selection.

Select: Compressed file or Binary file

10. The Select File window is displayed. For “filename” use the actual file name you wish ttransfer. In this case we are transferring slave.cod so type slave.cod . Do NOT press return.The slave.cod file must be loaded to most slots so this is a good file to start with. The slafile is on disk 1 on the cd-rom.Type: filename (in this case slave.cod)Do NOT press Enter.

11. Bring up a second xterm window by left-clicking on the background field of the display.

12. At the prompt:Type: /usr/openwin/bin/filemgr&Press: Enter

13. The File Manager window is displayed. Insert the Xedge cd-rom into the cd-rom drivecd-rom directory structure is displayed (disk 1, disk 2, disk 3, docs). Refer to your XedgeSoftware Installation Slot Controller Log Sheet and note the file name(s) you’ll need. Refer the System Release Notes to find which disk (on the cdrom) the files reside on.

14. Double-click on the file icon for the appropriate disk (in this case, disk 1 for slave.cod). on the first file that must be transferred to Slot-0 by clicking once on the file icon (in this slave.cod). Under the File menu:Select: Remote Copy

15. In the Destination section of the Remote Copy window, leave Machine Name blank, andenter the Pathname:Type: /dev/ttybDo NOT press Enter.

16. Return to the Xedge “Select File” window at the craft port connection.Press: Enter

17. Return to the (File Manager) Remote Copy window.Click the Copy File button.

18. The file tumbler ( – ) will be rotating on the “Select File” screen. This indicates the filetransfer to Slot-0 is in-process.

19. Repeat step 8 through step 19 for all files on your “Xedge Software Installation Slot ControlleLog Sheet”.

20. To complete the installation, proceed with Transferring Software Files from Slot-0 to OtheSlot Controllers in this chapter.



e ctrl-

from.

nsion

oe you

op your. The

roller

r

Transferring Software Files to Slot-0 Using a PC

This procedure is not applicable if an ECC Controller is in Slot-0.

1. With the PC in the VT100 emulation mode, the “Boot Menu” screen is displayed. Use thr keys to refresh the screen.

2. Go to the DOS command line.

3. Create a new directory (C:\Xedge) to copy files to.

4. Change from your current directory to the newly created directory (C:\Xedge).

5. Insert the cd-rom in the cd-rom drive.Type (for “drive” add the drive letter of the cd-rom drive): xcopy/s “drive” :

Example for a cd-rom as the b drive: xcopy/s b:

6. Change to the directory on your hard disk (C:\Xedge\disk 1, 2, 3) you wish to copy files

7. Exit from the DOS command line mode back to the VT100 “Boot Menu” screen.

8. The Xedge “Boot Menu” is displayed.

9. Select: Load file

10. In this menu, you select the method of transferring files to Slot-0. For files with the exte“.cod” use the “Compressed file” selection. For files with the extension “.bin” use the Binaryfile selection.

Select: Compressed file or Binary file

11. The Select File window is displayed. For “filename” use the actual file name you wish ttransfer. In this case we are transferring slave.cod so type slave.cod. Enter the file namwish to load. Slave.cod must be loaded to most slots so this is a good file to start with.Type: filename(After you press Enter in this step, you have 30 seconds to complete the next step.)Press: Enter

12. Go to the DOS prompt. For “filename” following, use the actual file name you wish ttransfer. In this case we are transferring slave.cod so type slave.cod. Also, if you set uPC to transfer files from COM 2 instead of COM 1, substitute the correct serial port name/b switch is used for binary transfer.

Type: copy filename com1/bPress: Enter

13. The “copy” takes about 5 minutes. The system will prompt “1 file copied” when finished.

14. Exit back to the VT100 emulation program.

15. Wait for the lower menu selections to be displayed.

16. Repeat steps 8 through 15 for all files on your “Xedge Software Installation Slot ContLog Sheet”.

17. To complete the installation, proceed with Transferring Software Files from Slot-0 to OtheSlot Controllers in this chapter.



03Iss

2-4

en

e slot

steps,

the

Transferring Software Files from Slot-0 to Other Slot Controllers

A workstation or PC can be used to perform this procedure.

If you are using a Node Timing Module (NTM), refer to the System Timing Configuration chapterof this manual after performing this procedure.

1. The “Boot Menu” is displayed (if necessary, eXit to the “Boot Menu”). Verify all the required.cod and .bin files are transferred to Slot-0 (from procedure Transferring Software Files toSlot-0 Using a Workstation on page 2-8 for a workstation, or Transferring Software Files toSlot-0 Using a PC on page 2-10 for a PC):Select: File system

2. Type: Directory

3. Verify all files from the Xedge Software Installation Slot Controller Log Sheet on pagehave been transferred to Slot-0.

4. At the “Boot Menu” select: Warm start

5. Wait for about 5 minutes. The Slot-0 Controller will boot its ‘full-feature’ code. Whfinished, the screen will prompt:Username:

6. Type (lowercase): rootPress: Enter

7. Type (uppercase): MANAGERPress: Enter

8. Wait until the Root Menu displays Active for all non-Slot-0 Controllers. Depending on thnumber of controllers installed, this process could take from 10 minutes for a fewcontrollers, to 1 hour for a full system.When the process is finished (from the root menu):

Type: File system

9. Select: TFTP

10. Select: Send

11. Refer to the Xedge Software Installation Slot Controller Log Sheet on page 2-4. For each SlotController listed on the sheet, send the associated .bin files to ‘that’ slot. In the following substitute the actual file name for “filename” and the actual slot number (without spaces)for “slotnumber”. If you have Slot-0 Standby, instead of typing slotnumber , you must type“ redund ” to TFTP the files to Slot-0 Standby.

12. Type: filenamePress: Enterexample: qedoc.bin

13. Type: slotnumber (or) redundPress: Enterexample: slot10 (or) redund

14. Repeat step 8 through step 14 for all slot controllers and their associated .bin files listed on Xedge Software Installation Slot Controller Log Sheet on page 2-4.



he

15. When finished eXit back to the Root Menu.

16. Wait for Slot 0 Redund: available to toggle from No to Yes.Wait for File transfer: to toggle from Active to Inactive.

17. Select: Warm start

18. Select: Force slave.cod

19. Select: Yes

20. Wait for the User name prompt, then:Type (lowercase): rootPress: Enter

21. Type (uppercase): MANAGER

End of software installation procedure.

Note If you are using a Timing Module(s) (NTM), you must transfer the NTM file (ntm_t1.bin or ntm_e1.bin) to the NTM itself. Refer to the System Timing Configuration chapter of this manual to transfer the file from Slot-0 to the NTM(s).

If you are using a VE Adaptation Controller, the Slot-0 files must be transferred to the multimedia LIM. Refer to the “Configuring Components” section of this manual to transfer tfiles.


Software Installation Changing the Root Password

03Iss

o

an

Changing the Root PasswordAfter loading software, you may want to change the root password to something different. Tchange the root password, you must edit the users.cfg file in the root directory of Slot-0. Toedit this file, you must be logged in as root, or be using a locally connected (craft) system with access level greater than 0.

1. Select File system from the Root Menu screen by entering F. The File Operations screen isdisplayed as shown in Figure 2-1.

Figure 2-1 File Operations Screen

2. Select Alter file by typing A. The Select File screen is displayed as shown in Figure 2-2.


system-1: Slot 0 SYS File Operations

Select option:Alter file, Copy file, Directory, Erase file, Format media,Garbage collect, media I nfo, chec K media, Link file, Management,set Product info, Rename file, Scan file, TFTP menu, View sectors,eXit



03Iss

use.

4. With the cursor on the first line of the file (name= field), enter CTRL-X to move to the nextline, encrypt= line.

5. Press CTRL-Y to delete the encrypt= line.

6. Press the Enter key to add a new line.

7. Press CTRL-E to move up one line.

8. Type password= new_password where “new_password” is the password you want toThe Insert screen appears as shown in Figure 2-4 (if you typed SECRET for the newpassword).

Figure 2-4 Insert Screen

9. If the screen displays changes that are not correct, press CTRL-K followed by Q to abandonthe edit session and start again.

10. If the screen displays the changes correctly, press CTRL-K followed by X to save yourchanges and exit.

11. Press X to return to the Root Menu.



name=root <password=SECRET <terminal=vt100 <level=15 <' <name=GDC <encrypt=tPo0a <terminal=vt100 <level=1 <' <name=local <encrypt=9d2sd <terminal=vt100 <level=0 <' <name=telnet <encrypt=Lq02U <terminal=vt100 <level=0 <


Software Installation Creating Read-only or Limited Access Users

henimitedaccessedure

Creating Read-only or Limited Access UsersWhen you log in as user root, you have read-write access to all of the Xedge system options. Wyou create another user (whose login name is different that root), you provide read-only or lediting access options for that new user. The following table summarizes the different options for root and read-only or limited access users. This is followed by a step-by-step procfor creating new read-only users.

Table 2-4 Access Options

OptionsAccess

Root Read Only

TCB Status All All

Diagnostics All None

Events All All except: Clear event table and Save to disk

File System All All except: Alter file, Copy file, Erase file, Format media, Link File, set Product info, Rename file and TFTP

Internal Status All All

Load File Yes None

PSI Management All All except: Abort task, Run file, Single step and Trace

self Restart Yes All except: Clear Restart Count

Telnet Yes Yes

User name Yes Yes

Warm start Yes None

sVc routing Yes All except: Save, Copy, Delete, Load, Edit and New Entry

Table 2-4



03Iss

To Create Read-only Users

1. Select File system from the Root Menu screen by entering F. The File Operations screen isdisplayed as shown in Figure 2-5.

Figure 2-5 File Operations Screen

2. Select Alter file by typing A. The Select File screen is displayed.


system-1: Slot 0 SYS File Operations

Select option:Alter file, Copy file, Directory, Erase file, Format media,Garbage collect, media Info, checK media, Link file, Management,set Product info, Rename file, Scan file, TFTP menu, View sectors,eXit



03Iss

ew

,

4. With the cursor on the first line of the file (name= root in the example above), enter CTRL-Xrepeatedly until it is below the last entry.


6. Press CTRL-X to move the cursor down one line.

7. Type name=new_user , where “new_user” is the login name of the new user.


9. Type password=new_password , where “new_password” is the password for the nuser.


11. Type Terminal=term_type , where “term_type” is the name of the terminal.

The screen, shown in Figure 2-8, appears if you typed OPERATOR as the new user nameCHECKING for the new password, and vt100 for the terminal.

Figure 2-8 Name, Password and Terminal Fields Entered

12. If the screen displays changes that are not correct, press CTRL-K followed by Q to abandonthe edit session and start again.

13. If the screen displays the changes correctly, press CTRL-K followed by X to save yourchanges and exit. Press X oncce more to return to the Root Menu.

Note The level= line is not required. By entering a user name other than root, the system knows that it is a read-only level user.



name=root <encrypt=6640N2 <terminal=vt100 <level=15 < <name=OPERATOR <password=CHECKING <terminal=vt100 <

name=GDC <encrypt=tPo0a <terminal=vt100 <level=1 < <name=telnet <encrypt=Lq02U <terminal=vt100 <level=0 <...


03Iss

the slot

1

2

0

1

ch as

Chapter 3: Configuring Components

Chapter OverviewThis chapter describes the steps you need to perform before you actually start configuring controllers and their associated Line Interface Modules (LIMs).

Topics in this chapter include:

Chapter Overview.................................................................................................................. 3-

Before You Begin.................................................................................................................. 3-

Connecting to the Manager Port on the Switch..................................................................... 3-2

Making Selections from Switch Menus................................................................................. 3-3

Selecting the Xedge Switch IP Address................................................................................. 3-6

Creating the hosts File for Slot-0........................................................................................... 3-6

Performing the Slot-0 Configuration..................................................................................... 3-8

Defining the Quad Ethernet (MS/QED or ETH in Slot-0 only).......................................3-9

Setting the System Time...................................................................................................... 3-1

SNMP Authentication.......................................................................................................... 3-1

SNMP Authentication Table Configuration...................................................................3-11

Configuring the SLIP Line................................................................................................... 3-18

Note This chapter assumes you have already installed the appropriate software on the ATM switdescribed in the Software Installation section in Chapter 2: Software Installation of this manual.


Configuring Components Before You Begin

rs are

nel ofvalent)

ort ons. ForSlot-0ble.

e PC toSlot-0ble.

Before You Begin

Before you can configure the Slot Controllers and LIM(s) in the Xedge switch, you need to:

• Connect a workstation, PC, or terminal to the Manager port of the switch chassis.

• Create a hosts file for the Slot-0 Controller.

• Configure the controller in Slot-0.

Instructions for performing these operations are included here. The ETH Adaptation Controllecommonly used in Slot-0 and are the ones used in the following procedures.

Connecting to the Manager Port on the Switch

1. To connect a workstation, PC, or terminal to the Manager port (craft port) on the back pathe switch chassis, use one of the General DataComm serial cables (or its equidescribed in Table 3-1.

If you are connecting a workstation, go to step 2. To connect a PC, go to step 3.

2. To connect a workstation or terminal, use the GDC serial cable, and connect the ttyb pthe workstation to the Manager port (craft port) on the back panel of the switch chassiusing a terminal, use the appropriate 9-pin or 25-pin serial cable. For redundant configurations, use the Y cable as specified in the table (or equivalent) and the serial ca

3. To connect a PC, use the GDC serial cable and connect the com1 (or com2) port on ththe Manager port (craft port) on the back panel of the switch chassis. For redundant configurations, use the Y cable as specified in the table (or equivalent) and the serial ca

4. Set the VT 100 emulation settings to correspond to the following:

19,000 baud8 data bitsparity=none1 stop bit

Table 3-1 General DataComm Serial Cables

Serial Craft Port Cables

System Connection Required GDC Part Number Cable Description

Workstation to 6640, 6645 28H502 Serial, DB25M to DB25M

Workstation to 6160 28H346 Serial, DB25M to DB9M


PC to MAC, 6160, 6280 27H329 Serial, DB9F to DB9M



Table 3-1


Configuring Components Making Selections from Switch Menus

03Iss

witch

ing theample,

in theaction.

Making Selections from Switch MenusThe following conventions are used when describing how to select options from Xedge sscreens and menus:

• To select a screen option that appears as a bold capitalized letter within the word describoption, press the letter and the switch software automatically performs that action. For exFigure 3-1 shows an example of a Root Menu screen.

To select the Manage configuration option, simply type m.

Within a specific procedure this is stated as:

"Select Manage configuration from the Root Menu."

Figure 3-1 Root Menu Screen

• To select a menu option that appears next to an option number, you need to typecorresponding option number and press the Enter key before the switch performs that For example, Figure 3-2 shows an example of a MIB Display and Management screen.


Switch Name: Slot 0 SYS Root Menu SW Version

MS-QED : Active up down down down Received datacells = 44487388ACS-DS : Active up up Transmitted datacells = 24540720ACS-DM : Active up upSlot 03 : Active down down Received configcells = 9357818Slot 04 : -------- Transmitted configcells= 1121123Slot 05 : --------Slot 06 : --------Slot 07 : Active down down stop stopACP-DDS3 : Active down down User: rootSlot 09 : -------- From: 172.16.2.251Slot 10 : --------ACS-DM : -------- Slot 0 Redund. available: NoACP-DDS3 : -------- Slot 0 Redund: Main In-servSlot 13 : -------- Sys. Ref.: Non-CF LIMSlot 14 : -------- SVCs Connected: 5Slot 15 : -------- PVCs Connected: 0 File transfer: InactiveSelect option:TCB status, Diagnostics, Events, File system, Gateway to 040,I nternal status, Manage configuration, PSI management, self Restarts,Telnet, User name, s Vc routing, Warm start, Zap cell interface,eXit



ized in

Figure 3-2 MIB Display and Management Screen

To select the Slot 0 Configuration/Status option, type 9 and press the Enter key.

Within a specific procedure this is stated as:

“Select the Slot 0 Configuration/Status option and press the Enter key.”

The functions of some of the options common to most Xedge switch menus are summarTable 3-2.

Table 3-2 Common Xedge Switch Menu Option Descriptions

Option Description

Add entry Brings up a new line to which you may add new information.

Down (Up) Moves you to the next lower screen, e.g., from link 1 to link 2. Up performs the opposite function.

Enter entry number to edit Enter the number shown on the left side of the screen that identifies the row that you wish to edit.

Extra detail Brings up a more detailed screen for a specific row that includes all MIB items for that row. For example, if you select Extra detail for link 0, the Extra detail screen shows all the MIB items for that particular

link.

Goto row Allows you to select a particular row. When you select a row, that row is moved to the top of the screen, and selecting Extra detail

brings up the detail for that row.



Switch Name: Slot 0 SYS MIB Display and Management New Event

00 system 42 Alarm Handler01 interfaces02 Address Translation03 ip04 icmp05 tcp06 udp07 snmp08 System Information09 Slot 0 Configuration/Status10 Trace Toggles11 Slip Configuration12 Static Routing21 Quad Ethernet DOC23 PVC Configuration/Status24 SVC Configuration/Status27 System Timing ReferencesSelect option:Enter group number, save As, Load, s Tatus, e Xit,Last save file is `/$/config.cfg'.



03Iss

Kill entry You are prompted for a row number to delete (default row is 0). Pressing enter deletes the row.

Move entry You are asked for a row number and are allowed to change parameters within that row.

Press ^J for extra help on this item Activates a help function for a selected item.

Right (Left) If more columns exist than are shown on the screen, this function shifts the screen items left, bringing items on the right into view. When you select Right, a Left function appears which allows the

reverse movement.

Summary Brings you out of Extra detail to the previous screen.

eXit Returns you to the Frame Adaptation Controller screen.

Table 3-2 Common Xedge Switch Menu Option Descriptions

Option Description



Configuring Components Selecting the Xedge Switch IP Address

.0. Inue IP valid IP0, thistworkd IP

Selecting the Xedge Switch IP Address

When you turn on the switch for the first time it displays the local default address of 192.1.1order to connect this switch to any other switch in the network, you must assign it a uniqaddress. This address must be a valid, assigned IP address. The Xedge switch uses 16addresses in sequence, one for each slot. When you install an ETH Controller in Slot-controller must also have a valid IP address. All ethernet SNMP traffic is sent to the switch nethrough the controller acting as a bridge. Ask your LAN network administrator for the valiaddresses that can be used for your switch network. Refer to the NMS3000 Getting Started manualfor more information on connecting your ETH Controller to your network manager.

Creating the hosts File for Slot-0

1. If you have not already done so, log into the switch:

When prompted for the username, type root and press the Enter key.When prompted for the password, enter MANAGER.

After you press Enter, the Root Menu appears. The Root Menu shown in Figure 3-3 is for the MS/QED controller.

Figure 3-3 MS/QED Root Menu Screen

2. Select File system to open the File Operations screen.

3. Select Alter file ; at the Select File screen, enter the file name, hosts .

Note The default login/password is root/MANAGER .


Switch Name: Slot 0 SYS Root Menu SW Version

MS-QED : Active up down down down Received datacells = 44487388ACS-DS : Active up up Transmitted datacells = 24540720ACS-DM : Active up upSlot 03 : Active down down Received configcells = 9357818Slot 04 : -------- Transmitted configcells= 1121123Slot 05 : --------Slot 06 : --------Slot 07 : Active down down stop stopACP-DDS3 : Active down down User: rootSlot 09 : -------- From: 172.16.2.251Slot 10 : --------ACS-DM : -------- Slot 0 Redund. available: NoACP-DDS3 : -------- Slot 0 Redund: Main In-servSlot 13 : -------- Sys. Ref.: Non-CF LIMSlot 14 : -------- SVCs Connected: 5Slot 15 : -------- PVCs Connected: 0 File transfer: InactiveSelect option:TCB status, Diagnostics, Events, File system, Gateway to 040,Internal status, Manage configuration, PSI management, self Restarts,Telnet, User name, sVc routing, Warm start, Zap cell interface,eXit


Configuring Components Creating the hosts File for Slot-0

03Iss

and IPangingress be

n

4. Enter the IP address of the switch containing the Slot-0 Controller and the alias namesaddresses of other switches or components you want to access from this switch. Not chthe default IP address can lead to problems. It is strongly advised that the default addchanged to an assigned address; for example:

> ipaddress=192.100.100.16> system1=192.150.100.16> system2=192.200.100.16

5. When you have completed the entries, press CTRL K, then X to save and return to the FileOperations screen.

6. From the File Operations screen, press Directory to verify that the hosts file has beecreated.

7. In order to have these changes take effect, perform a warm start.

8. To perform a warm start from the Root Menu, select Warm start and then Normal start .

Note Perform all configuration changes before performing a warm start


Configuring Components Performing the Slot-0 Configuration

u

are

leteo the

these

s. To do

esses,l

t the

-

Performing the Slot-0 Configuration

1. From the Root Menu, select Manage configuration. This opens the MIB Display andManagement screen.

2. Select the Slot0 Configuration/Status option and press Enter.

3. Select Standby Switch Fabric option (this option not applicable to MAC or 6160). If yohave a redundant Switch Fabric module installed, press Y, otherwise press N.

4. Select Physical Layout option and press Enter. The Physical Layout screen appears whichprovides a list of all the controllers installed in the switch. You will note that you positioned on the Slot-0 entry.

5. Select Extra detail to open the Detail of Physical Layout of entry 0 screen.

6. Select Dlim type option and press Enter. This displays all of the Dlim types. For a complisting of all of the possible slot controller and associated Dlim type combinations, refer tXedge Compatibility and Performance Chart in the Hardware Installation Guide (PartNumber 032R440).

7. Select the option letter corresponding to the type of Dlim, followed by Enter. Note that option selections are case sensitive. This returns you to the Physical Layout screen.

8. Repeat step 5 through step 7 for all other Slot Controllers in the switch.

9. If you intend to use signaling, you need to enter the E.164 address and a node addresthis, select eXit to go back to the Slot 0 Configuration/Status screen.

10. Select E.164. Type in the address and press enter. For more information on E.164 addrrefer to Addressing on page 3-21 in Chapter 3, Connections of the Xedge Switch TechnicaReference Manual, Part Number 032R310.

11. Once you have defined all of the LIMs for all of the Slot Controllers in the switch (and seE.164 address), save the entries by continually pressing eXit until the prompt, Save changedconfiguration (Y/N): appears. Press Y.

12. If you have an ETH Controller in Slot-0, proceed to Defining the Quad Ethernet (ETH in Slot0 only) on page 3-9 next. If you are done at this point, perform a warm start.


Note If you are configuring other non-zero Slot Controllers, you select Goto row no. to advance to the proper slot, or you can advance one at a time by pressing Down.

Note When entering an address of less than 14 digits, the switch will append 0s.

Note Perform all configuration changes before performing a warm start.


Configuring Components Performing the Slot-0 Configuration

03Iss

thatill also

S/

Defining the Quad Ethernet (ETH in Slot-0 only)

1. From the Root Menu, select Manage configuration.

2. Select the Quad Ethernet DOC option from the MIB Display and Management screen andpress Enter

3. Select the QEDOC Address option and press Enter. Type in the ip address of the MS/QED controller.

4. Select QEDOC Mask.

5. Select QEDOC Broadcast.

6. Select eXit to return to the MIB Display and Management screen.

7. Select the System Information option; then select Authentication table for SNMP accessoption.

8. Select Extra detail . This opens the Extra detail screen for the Authentication table screen.

9. From within the Extra detail screen:

a. Select Source IP address. Enter the device IP addresses, for the network managersyou want to have SNMP access to this controller, and press Enter. These addresses wdetermine where SNMP traps will be sent.

b. Select Community. Type in public and press Enter.

c. Select Access type. Select A for read-only; B for read-write.

d. Select Send traps. Select A for send all; B for send none.

Do not change the default value for Validity .

10. Select eXit until the prompt, Save changed configuration (Y/N): appears. Press Y to save.

11. In order to have these changes take effect, perform a warm start.


Note This address must be a valid IP address for the network into which you have installed the MQED or ETH. Ask your network administrator for valid IP addresses.

Note Entries in the Authentication Table must be contiguous.

Note Perform all configuration changes before performing a warm start


Configuring Components Setting the System Time

wer iss that

time

Setting the System TimeThe Xedge system time needs to be set at installation and whenever the system’s pointerrupted. Note that the E-Series and A-Series Controllers have built-in system batterieretain the system time if the power is interrupted.

Use the following procedure to set the system time:

1. From the Root Menu of Slot-0, select Manage configuration. The MIB Display andManagement screen appears.

2. Select the System Information option and press Enter.

3. Select the Current time option and press Enter. This prompts you to type in the current in the format:DD YY HH:MM:SS

Note When setting the hour and minutes, two digits must be entered for each parameter.Example: to set 9:08 PM, enter 21:08.


Configuring Components SNMP Authentication

03Iss

. Youch, you

in

SNMP AuthenticationAccess to the MIB via SNMP can be configured by use of the SNMP Authentication Tableshould note that there is a table for each slot controller. To restrict access to the entire switneed to put entries into the SNMP authentication table for each Slot Controller.

SNMP Authentication Table Configuration

Use the following procedure to access and configure the SNMP Authentication Table:

1. Go to the root menu of the slot controller you want to configure SNMP security for.

2. Select the System Information option. The System Information screen appears as shown Figure 3-4.

Figure 3-4 System Information Screen

3. Select the Authentication table for SNMP access option. The SYSAuthentication table forSNMP access screen appears as shown in Figure 3-5.

Note Changes to the SNMP Authentication Table take effect immediately.


Switch Name: Slot 0 SYS System Information New Event

End of memory: 0x779790 Initial/Current memory items: 1024/1020 Initial/Current semaphores: 128/88 Initial/Current queue items: 2560/2560 Initial/Current queues: 256/238 Initial/Current ports: 256/238 Default cell mode: no0 Link Table1 Internal buffer counts2 Authentication table for SNMP access Last trap message: Redundant Slot 0 is unavailable3 New config.cfg: yes4 config.cfg control: no action Compilation date: 28 Jan 1998 18:30:00 Slot Number: 0 Last reset time: 06 Feb 1998 16:24:255 Current time: 10 Feb 1998 13:04:08

Select option:Enter option number or eXit



at . If

Figure 3-5 SYSAuthentication Table for SNMP Access Screen

4. Select Extra Detail. The Detail of Authentication table for SNMP access entry “X” screenappears as shown in Figure 3-6.

Note Since changes to the SNMP Authentication Table take effect immediately, it is important thyou configure SNMP access for the manager (entry in the table) you are working from firstyou configure another manager first, Xedge will reject SNMP and TFTP packets from your manager from that point on.


Switch Name: Slot 0 SYSAuthentication table for SNMP access No Entry index Source IP address Community Access type Send Traps Validity

0 1 172.16.7.1 public readWrite send all valid1 2 172.16.7.3 public readWrite send none valid2 3 172.16.7.5 public readWrite send none valid3 4 172.16.1.41 public readWrite send none valid4 5 192.9.21.16 public readWrite send none valid5 6 192.9.22.16 public readWrite send none valid6 7 192.168.62.33 public readWrite send none valid7 8 172.16.1.67 public readWrite send none valid8 9 192.9.23.16 public readWrite send none valid9 10 172.16.1.70 public readWrite send all valid

Select option:Add entry, Enter entry number to edit, Extra detail, Goto row,Kill entry, Move entry, Press ^J for extra help on this item, eXit



03Iss

hown

Figure 3-6 Detail of Authentication Table for SNMP Access

5. Select the Source IP Address option from the Detail of Authentication table for SNMPaccess screen. GDC Xedge will prompt you for the IP address of the entry’s manager as sin Figure 3-7.

Figure 3-7 Source IP Address Prompt Screen


Switch Name: Slot 0 SYSAuthentication table for SNMP access Detail of Authentication table for SNMP access entry 0

Entry index : 10 Source IP address : 172.16.7.11 Community : public2 Access type : readWrite3 Send Traps : send all4 Validity : valid

Select option:Add entry, Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row, Kill entry,Move entry, Press ^J for extra help on this item, Summary, eXit


Switch Name: Slot 0 SYSAuthentication table for SNMP access New EventDetail of Authentication table for SNMP access entry 0

Entry index : 10 Source IP address : 172.16.7.11 Community : public2 Access type : readWrite3 Send Traps : send all4 Validity : valid

Source IP address: 172.16.7.1

Press ^J for extra help on this item



6. Enter the manager’s Source IP Address.

7. Select the Community option from the Detail of Authentication table for SNMP accessscreen. Xedge will prompt you for the entry manager’s Community as shown in Figure 3-8.

The default community field is public.

Figure 3-8 Community Prompt Screen

8. Select the Access type option from the Detail of Authentication table for SNMP accessscreen. Xedge will prompt you for the entry manager’s Access Type as shown in Figure 3-9.

You can select either readOnly or readWrite .

Note The Source IP Address takes effect as soon as you enter it.

Note The Community field takes effect as soon as you enter it.

Note The Access Type takes effect as soon as you enter it.


Switch Name: Slot 0 SYSAuthentication table for SNMP access Detail of Authentication table for SNMP access entry 0 Entry index : 10 Source IP address : 172.16.7.11 Community : public2 Access type : readWrite3 Send Traps : send all4 Validity : valid

Community: public




03Iss

Figure 3-9 Access Type Prompt

9. Select the Send Traps option from the Detail of Authentication table for SNMP accessscreen. Xedge will prompt you for the entry manager’s Trap option as shown in Figure 3-10.You can select either send all (all traps are sent to this manager) or send none (no traps aresent to this manager).

Note The Send Traps selection takes effect as soon as you enter it.


Switch Name: Slot 0 SYSAuthentication table for SNMP access New Event

A - readOnlyB - readWrite

Access type: B [readWrite]




Figure 3-10 Send Traps Prompt Screen

10. Select the Validity option from the Detail of Authentication table for SNMP access screen.Xedge will prompt you for the entry manager’s Validity option as shown in Figure 3-11. Youcan select either valid (you are done configuring this entry) or invalid (delete this entry).

Note The Validity selection takes effect as soon as you enter it. If you select invalid, GDC Xedge will delete this entry from the SNMP Authentication Table.


Switch Name: Slot 0 SYSAuthentication table for SNMP access

A - send allB - send none

Send Traps: A [send all]




03Iss

Figure 3-11 Validity Prompt Screen


Switch Name: Slot 0 SYSAuthentication table for SNMP access New Event

A - validB - invalid

Validity: A [valid]



Configuring Components Configuring the SLIP Line

usingulates

andically

need to

ar

Configuring the SLIP LineTo manage the Xedge switch from a network management system (NMS), you need to run IPSLIP between the Xedge switch and the NMS. SLIP (Serial Line IP) is a protocol that encapsIP packets so they can be carried across a serial communications line.

The configuration of SLIP falls into two stages: configuring an external host to run SLIPconfiguring the Xedge switch to run SLIP. Once the configuration is complete, you physconnect the Xedge switch to the host computer.

To configure the host computer, you need to consult the host computer documentation (you set an IP address for the host serial line and its line speed).

Use the following procedure to configure SLIP for the Xedge switch:

1. Select the Manage configuration option from the Root Menu. The MIB Display andManagement screen appears as shown in Figure 3-12. Note that the actual options that appedepend on the type of controller in Slot-0.


2. At the Select option: prompt, select the Slip Configuration option. The SLIP Configurationscreen appears as shown in Figure 3-13.


system-1: Slot 0 SYS MIB Display and Management

00 system 42 Alarm Handler01 interfaces02 Address Translation03 ip04 icmp05 tcp06 udp07 snmp08 System Information09 Slot 0 Configuration/Status10 Trace Toggles11 Slip Configuration12 Static Routing21 Quad Ethernet DOC23 PVC Configuration/Status24 SVC Configuration/Status27 System Timing ReferencesSelect option:Enter group number, save As, Load, Save, sTatus, Use, eXit,Last save file is `/$/config.cfg'.



03Iss

ber.onds to

SLIP

m thegoinghost ise using

Figure 3-13 Slip Configuration Screen

3. All items must be set correctly for the SLIP line to operate. To set an item, enter its numThe line has its own IP address, both at the local and remote end. This address correspthose set for its host.

4. Set the line speed as high as can be supported by the physical wiring and the host.

5. Once the configuration is complete, enter X to exit the Slip Configuration screen and return tothe MIB Display and Management screen.

6. Enter X again.

7. The screen prompts you to save the configuration. If you have only changed theconfiguration, then you can safely enter Y, otherwise type N.

8. The screen then prompts you to use this configuration. Enter Y and the Xedge switch informsthe other software modules of the changes to the configuration.

9. Perform a warm, normal start to activate the SLIP line.

10. Connect the host computer to the Xedge switch. The Data Terminal Ready (DTR) frohost must be low; you may need to modify the cable (028H518-015 or 028H518-025) between the host and the Xedge switch to ensure that DTR, pin 20, is low. Once the connected to the Xedge switch, you should be able to communicate across the SLIP linping and Telnet.


system-1: Slot 0 SYS Slip Configuration

0 Local IP address: 0.0.0.01 SLIP Mask: 0.0.0.02 Remote IP address: 0.0.0.03 Line Speed: baud2400



03Iss

alarm

2

8

1

Chapter 4: Alarm Handler

Chapter OverviewThis chapter describes how to classify alarms, configure status inputs (alarm traps), configurecut-off, and monitor alarms. The chapter is organized according to the following topics:

Reclassifying Alarms............................................................................................................. 4-

Alarm Reclassification Procedure....................................................................................4-5

Configuring Alarms............................................................................................................... 4-

Configuring Status Inputs.................................................................................................4-8

Configuring Alarm Cut-Off............................................................................................4-13

Monitoring Alarms............................................................................................................... 4-2


Alarm Handler Reclassifying Alarms

switch

. ntacts

ons are

s: N.O.

r, orm defined

inor,start of

Reclassifying Alarms

The switch system allows you to reclassify the default settings of the alarms generated by theas critical, major, and minor.

Alarm classification affects the way the switch system handles alarms throughout the systemFor example, when an alarm classified as critical occurs, this trips the critical alarm relay coon the rear of the switch chassis (See the GDC Xedge Chassis Installation Guide, Part Number032R410). The contacts trigger an audible alarm (e.g. a buzzer). The other alarm classificatiactivated in the same way.

The alarm relays have a current rating of 1.5 amps, and they each have three contact(Normally Open), N.C. (Normally Closed), and C (Common).

Table 4-1 lists the default alarm classifications that you may reclassify as Critical, Major, MinoInformational. The switch does not support reclassification of a default informational alarmessage, except for the user_input1 (155), and user_input2 (156) alarms. These are userand the informattion for these must be entered from an external source.

Note that if the user_input1 and or user_input2 alarms are reclassified as Critical, Major or Mand then subsequently reclassified back to the default Informational class, a normal warm-slot 0 is required to affect the reclassification/change, otherwise the change will not take affect..

Note (1) Not all Alarms listed in Table 4-1 apply to all card types.

(2) Informational alarms shown in Table 4-1 can not be re-classified, except for user_input1 (155) and user_input2 (156).

Table 4-1 Default Alarm Classifications

Major Alarms No. Minor Alarms No. Informational Alarms No.

PSU_FAULT 4 AAL1_FAULT 107 INFO 0

LIM_FAULT 91 YEL_DS1 112 LINK INFO 1

LOS_DS1 109 YEL_DS1_2C 117 SLOT_DOWN 2

LOF_DS1 110 YEL_DS3 123 LINK_DOWN 3

AIS_DS1 111 YEL_E1 129 FRMR_DIFF_DS3 125

EXBER_DS1 113 YEL_E3 134 USER_INPUT1 155

LOS_DS1_2C 114 PLCP_YEL 137 USER_INPUT2 156

LOF_DS1_2C 115 LYEL_SONET 145 DQ7 177

AIS_DS1_2C 116 PYEL_SONET 146 APS_FAILOVER 301

EXBER_DS1_2C 118 LRDI_ESONET 206 APS_SF 302

LOS_DS3 119 PRDI_ESONET 208 APS_SD 303

LOS_DS3_2C 120 SCE_LINK_FAULT 402 APS_FORCEDSW 304

LOF_DS3 121 RDI 408 APS_MANUALSW 305

AIS_DS3 122 APS_EXERCISE 306

EXBER_DS3 124 APS_PLF 307

LOS_E1 126 SCE_LINK_STATE 403

LOF_E1 127 SCE_Q_FAULT 404



03Iss

AIS_E1 128 XBRIDGE_NEWROOT 440

EXBER_E1 130 XBRIDGE_TOPOLOGY_CHANGE

441

LOS_E3 131

LOF_E3 132

AIS_E3 133

EXBER_E3 135

LOCD 136

PLCP_LOF 138

LOS_SONET 139

LOF_SONET 140

LAIS_SONET 141

PAIS_SONET 142

LOP_SONET 143

PLM_SONET 144

EXBER_SONET 147

LOS_HSSI 150

LOS_J2 168

LOF_J2 169

AIS_J2 170

RAI_J2 171

LOS_SCF 172

SEF_ESONET 188

LOS_ESONET 202

LOF_ESONET 203

EXBER_ESONET 204

LAIS_ESONET 205

PAIS_ESONET 207

LOP_ESONET 209

PUNEQ_ESONET 210

PLM_ESONET 211

LOCD_ESONET 212

APS_PSBF 308

APS_FEPF 309

APS_CMF 310

APS_AMF 311

SCE_AAL1_FAULT 401

LOS 405

LOF 406

AIS 407

EBER 410

IMA_LIF 417

Table 4-1 Default Alarm Classifications (Continued)




IMA_LODS 418

IMA_RDI_IMA 419

IMA_TX_MISCON 420

IMA_RX_MISCON 421

IMA_TX_UNU_FE 422

IMA_RX_UNU_FE 423

IMA_GRP_STARTUP_FE 424

IMA_GRP_CFG_ABORT 425

IMA_GRP_CFG_ABORT_FE 426

IMA_GRP_INSUF_LINKS 427

IMA_GRP_INSUF_LINKS_FE 428

IMA_GRP_BLOCKED_FE 429

IMA_GRP_TMG_MISM 430

Note Note that there are no default Critical alarms.

Table 4-1 Default Alarm Classifications (Continued)




03Iss

s thears as

Alarm Reclassification Procedure

To reclassify an alarm:

1. Select File system from the Root Menu and the File Operations screen appears.

2. Select Alter file from the File Operations screen. The Select File screen appears.

3. Select alr_cls.txt from the Select File screen. The Screen Editor appears as shown in Figure4-1.

Figure 4-1 alr_cls.txt File in Screen Editor

4. The Screen Editor describes the alarm classification procedure. Simultaneously presCtrl and the C keys to scroll to the bottom of the screen. The bottom of the screen appeshown in Figure 4-2.


/alr_cls.txt L0 C0 Insert ^J for help. Free: 138; 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 8+; This file contains alarm classifications for corresponding traps. There are <; 4 classifications: Critical, Major, Minor, and Informational. This file <; contains only the Critical, Major and Minor classes. Some traps can only <; be classified as Informational, regardless of what this file contains (no <; harm will be done if one is present, it will just be ignored). For a list <; of traps that can have the critical, major, and minor classifications, <; reference the manual. Any trap not included in this file will use a default <; selection. The format of this file is : < <; 1. Each comment line starts with a semicolon. <; 2. Each line containing classifications starts with a '$', followed by the <; class name, a colon, whitespace, then the trap numbers associated with <; that class. EACH TRAP NUMBER MUST BE SEPARATED BY WHITESPACE. <; 3. A line is limited to 80 characters, and should always be terminated by <; a carriage return. <; 4. There can be more than one line of the same classification. < <; This file may be modified by adding/deleting trap numbers to the different <; classes. After modifying the file, the 'Scan Alarm Class File' under the <; slot 0 '' MIB selection must be performed for the changes <; to take effect. This scanning will also transfer the information to the <; non-slot 0 cards. <



Figure 4-2 Bottom of alr_cls.txt File in Screen Editor

The bottom of the screen lists the alarms that are configured as critical, major, and minor. The numbers following each classification represent the alarms. Table 4-1 lists the alarm numberin parentheses and the alarm name.

5. Use the Screen Editor control keys to edit the alarm classifications as desired. (Use CTRL-Jto display the control keys.) For example, if you want to change the lim-fault alarm frommajor to critical, remove 91 from the $Major line and add it to the $Critical line.

6. When you are finished editing the file, type X to save the file and exit the Screen Editor.

7. Select eXit in the File Operations screen.

8. Select Manage configuration from the Root Menu.

9. Select Alarm Handler from the MIB Display and Management screen and the AlarmHandler screen appears as shown in Figure 4-3.


/alr_cls.txt L26 C0 Insert ^J for help. Free: 137; harm will be done if one is present, it will just be ignored). For a list <; of traps that can have the critical, major, and minor classifications, <; reference the manual. Any trap not included in this file will use a default <; selection. The format of this file is : < <; 1. Each comment line starts with a semicolon. <; 2. Each line containing classifications starts with a '$', followed by the <; class name, a colon, whitespace, then the trap numbers associated with <; that class. EACH TRAP NUMBER MUST BE SEPARATED BY WHITESPACE. <; 3. A line is limited to 80 characters, and should always be terminated by <; a carriage return. <; 4. There can be more than one line of the same classification. < <; This file may be modified by adding/deleting trap numbers to the different <; classes. After modifying the file, the 'Scan Alarm Class File' under the <; slot 0 'Alarm Handler' MIB selection must be performed for the changes <; to take effect. This scanning will also transfer the information to the <; non-slot 0 cards. <$Critical: 91 92 <$Major: 141 109 110 111 113 114 115 116 118 119 120 121 122 124 <$Major: 139 127 128 130 131 132 133 135 136 138 140 142 143 144 147 150 <$Minor: 126 107 108 112 117 123 125 129 134 137 146 < ^



03Iss

s

Figure 4-3 Alarm Handler Screen

10. Select Scan alarm class file from the Alarm Handler screen. The Scan alarm class fileprompt appears as shown in Figure 4-4.

Figure 4-4 Scan alarm class file prompt

11. At the Scan alarm class file: prompt, enter Y to scan the alarm class file. Thiactivates the changes you made to the alarm classification file in the Screen Editor.

12. Select eXit in the Alarm Handler and MIB Display and Management screens to return tothe Root menu.


Switch Name: Slot 0 SYS Alarm Handler New Event

Node Summary Critical Status: clr Node Summary Major Status : maj Node Summary Minor Status: clr0 Slot Alarm Status Table1 Node Alarm Cut Off: off2 Slot/Link Alarm Cut Off3 User Status Inputs4 Scan alarm class file: no



Alarm Handler _SW Version

Node Summary Critical Status: clr Node Summary Major Status : maj Node Summary Minor Status: clr0 Slot Alarm Status Table1 Node Alarm Cut Off: off2 Slot/Link Alarm Cut Off3 User Status Inputs4 Scan alarm class file: no

Scan alarm class file: (Y/N): No



Alarm Handler Configuring Alarms

nerate

input

input

Configuring Alarms

There are two sets of user status input connectors on the rear of the switch chassis (S1-A/B andS2-A/B ). These connectors permit you to attach external equipment to the switch that gesignals that are inputted into the switch. Refer to the GDC Xedge Chassis Installation Guide, PartNumber 032R410, for information concerning the proper physical configuration of the statusconnections.

Configuring Status Inputs

To configure user status inputs:

1. Select Manage configuration from the Root menu.

2. Select Alarm Handler from the MIB Display and Management screen and the AlarmHandler screen appears, as shown in Figure 4-3.

3. Select User Status Inputs from the Alarm Handler screen and the User Status Inputsscreen appears, as shown in Figure 4-5.

Figure 4-5 User Status Inputs Screen

4. Select the user status input you wish to configure. User status input 0 (for statusconnector S1-A/B ) is already selected. To select the other status input connector (S2-A/B ),select Goto row and enter 1 at the prompt.

5. Select Extra detail to display the User Status Inputs extra detail screen, as shown in Figure4-6.


User Status Inputs _SW VersionNo Input Status No Status Input Trap Trap Description Active State

0 0 not applicab disabled active close1 1 not applicab disabled active close

Select option:Enter entry number to edit, Extra detail, Goto row,Press ^J for extra help on this item, Right, eXit



03Iss

Figure 4-6 Detail of User Status Inputs Screen

6. Select the Status Input option. The Status Input prompt appears as shown in Figure 4-7.

Figure 4-7 Status Input Prompt

7. Enter the desired parameter for the Status Input (Table 4-2 provides a description of theparameters).


User Status Inputs New Event Detail of User Status Inputs entry 0

Input Status No : 00 Status Input : not applicable1 Trap : disabled2 Trap Description :3 Active State : active closed Alarm Classification : informational Current Status : clear

Select option:Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row,Press ^J for extra help on this item, Summary, eXit


User Status Inputs New E ent

A - enabledB - disabledC - not applicable

Status Input: C [not applicable]




n

8. Select the Trap option. The Trap: prompt appears as shown in Figure 4-8.

Figure 4-8 Trap Prompt Screen

9. Enable or disable the Trap as desired (Table 4-2 provides a description of the parameters).

10. Select the Trap Description option. The Trap Description: prompt appears as shown iFigure 4-9.


User Status Inputs New E ent

A - enabledB - disabled

Trap: B [disabled]




03Iss

Figure 4-9 Trap Description Prompt Screen

11. If desired, you can enter a description (name) of the trap (Table 4-2 provides a description ofthis field).

12. Select the Active State option. The Active State: prompt appears as shown in Figure 4-10.


User Status Inputs New E entDetail of User Status Inputs entry 0

Input Status No : 00 Status Input : not applicable1 Trap : disabled2 Trap Description :3 Active State : active closed Alarm Classification : informational Current Status : clear

Trap Description:




Figure 4-10 Active State Prompt Screen

13. At the prompt, select either active closed or active open (Table 4-2 provides a description ofthe parameters that appear in the User Status Inputs options).


User Status Inputs _SW Version

A - active closedB - active open

Active State: A [active closed]




03Iss

layss alarmth ACO

14. Select eXit in the User Status Inputs, Alarm Handler , and MIB Display and Managementscreens to return to the Root menu.

Configuring Alarm Cut-Off

When you enable alarm cut-off (ACO) for a particular entity (node, slot, or link), the alarm reon the chassis rear panel do not trip when an alarm occurs. However, the system still reportstates to the alarm handler and alarms still appear in the alarm status tables as active wiappended to their status.

The following procedures describe how to configure the alarm cut-off function:

Node Alarm Cut-Off

To configure node alarm cut-off:


2. Select Alarm Handler from the MIB Display and Management screen. The AlarmHandler screen appears as shown in Figure 4-3.

3. Select Node Alarm Cut-Off from the Alarm Handler screen. The Node Alarm Cut-Off:prompt appears as shown in Figure 4-11.

4. Enter A to disable node alarm cut-off, or B to enable node alarm cut-off.

5. Select eXit in the Alarm Handler , and MIB Display and Management screens to return tothe Root menu.

Table 4-2 User Status Inputs Screen Parameter Descriptions

Parameter Description

Input Status No 0 or 1 :Indicates the selected user status input, 0 for status input connector S1-A/B or 1 for status input connector S2-A/B .

Status Input enabled , disabled , or not applicable : Selects/indicates whether the selected status input is enabled, disabled, or not applicable (the chassis does not support user status inputs).

Trap enabled or disabled : Selects/indicates whether the switch generates an alarm trap in response to the user status input.

Trap Description Selects/indicates the name of the alarm trap.

Active State active closed or active opened : Selects/indicates whether a closed or opened circuit causes the alarm to be active.

Alarm Classification Indicates the classification of the alarm. User status input alarms default to the informational class, but may be changed as described in “Classifying Alarms” above.

Current Status Indicates the current state of the user status input alarm.

Table 4-2



Figure 4-11 Node Alarm Cut-Off Prompt


Switch Name: Slot 0 SYS Alarm Handler SW Version

A - offB - on

Node Alarm Cut Off: A [off]




03Iss

select

n

Slot and Link Alarm Cut-Off

To configure slot and link alarm cut-off:


2. Select Alarm Handler from the MIB Display and Management screen. The AlarmHandler screen appears as shown in Figure 4-3.

3. Select Slot/Link Alarm Cut Off from the Alarm Handler screen. The Slot/Link Alarm CutOff screen appears, as shown in Figure 4-12.

Figure 4-12 Slot/Link Alarm Cut Off Screen

4. Select the slot you wish to configure. Slot-0 is already selected. To select a different slot,Goto row and the number of the slot you wish to monitor at the prompt.

5. Select Extra detail to display the Slot/Link Alarm Cut Off extra detail screen, as shown iFigure 4-13.


Switch Name: Slot 0 SYS Slot/Link Alarm Cut Off SW VersionNo Slot Number Slot ACO Link 0 ACO Link 1 ACO Link 2 ACO Link 3 ACO

0 0 off off off off off1 1 off off off off off2 2 off off off off off3 3 off off off off off4 4 off off off off off5 5 off off off off off6 6 off off off off off7 7 off off off off off8 8 off off off off off9 9 off off off off off10 10 off off off off off11 11 off off off off off12 12 off off off off off13 13 off off off off off14 14 off off off off off15 15 off off off off offSelect option:Down, Enter entry number to edit, Extra detail, Goto row,Press ^J for extra help on this item, eXit



Figure 4-13 Detail of Slot/Link Alarm Cut Off Screen

Table 4-3 provides a description of the parameters that appear in the Slot/Link Alarm Cut Offscreen.

6. Select the Slot 0 ACO option to configure the ACO for the slot controller. The Slot 0 ACOprompt appears as shown in Figure 4-14

7. Select A to disable alarm cut-off or select B to enable node alarm cut-off.

Table 4-3 Slot/Link Alarm Cut Off Screen Parameter Descriptions


Slot Number Indicates the number of the selected slot.

Slot ACO on or off , selects/indicates the status of the alarm cut-off function for the selected slot.

Link 0 ACO on or off , selects/indicates the status of the alarm cut-off function for link 0.




Table 4-3


Switch Name: Slot 0 SYS Slot/Link Alarm Cut Off Detail of Slot/Link Alarm Cut Off entry 0

Slot Number : 0 00 Slot ACO : off01 Link 0 ACO : off02 Link 1 ACO : off03 Link 2 ACO : off04 Link 3 ACO : off




03Iss

Figure 4-14 Slot 0 ACO Prompt Screen

8. Select the Link 0 ACO option to configure link-0. The Link 0 ACO prompt appears as shownin Figure 4-15.

9. Select A to disable alarm cut-off, or select B to enable the alarm cut-off (for link-0).


Slot/Link Al rm Cut Off New E ent

A - offB - on

Slot ACO: A [off]




Figure 4-15 Link 0 ACO Prompt Screen




Slot/Link Alarm Cut Off SW Version

A - offB - on

Link 0 ACO: A [off]




03Iss






Slot/Link Alarm Cut Off New Event

A - offB - on

Link 1 ACO: A [off]




A - offB - on

Link 2 ACO: A [off]







16. Select eXit in the Slot/Link Alarm Cut Off , Alarm Handler , and MIB Display andManagement screens to return to the Root Menu.



A - offB - on

Link 3 ACO: A [off]



Alarm Handler Monitoring Alarms

03Iss

to

n

r

Monitoring AlarmsUse the following procedure to obtain alarm status:


2. Select the Alarm Handler option from the MIB Display and Management screen. TheAlarm Handler screen appears as shown in Figure 4-3.

3. Select the Slot Alarm Status Table option from the Alarm Handler screen. The Slot AlarmStatus Table screen appears as shown in Figure 4-19. Slot-0 is already selected.

Figure 4-19 Slot Alarm Status Table Screen

4. To monitor a different slot, select Goto row and enter the number of the slot you wish monitor at the prompt.

5. Select Extra detail to display the Slot Alarm Status Table extra detail screen, as shown iFigure 4-20.

6. Select eXit in the Slot Alarm Status Table, Alarm Handler , and MIB Display andManagement screens to return to the Root Menu.

Note Do not use extra detail screen as a reference. For a log of past events go to the slot numbeevents table for details.


Switch Name: Slot 0 SYS Slot Alarm Status Table New EventNo Slot Number Slot Critical Status Slot Major Status Slot Minor Status

0 0 clr clr clr1 1 clr clr clr2 2 clr clr clr3 3 clr clr clr4 4 clr clr clr5 5 clr clr clr6 6 clr maj clr7 7 clr clr clr8 8 clr clr clr9 9 clr clr clr10 10 clr clr clr11 11 clr clr clr12 12 clr clr clr13 13 clr clr clr14 14 clr clr clr15 15 clr clr clrSelect option:Down, Enter entry number to edit, Extra detail, Goto row,Press ^J for extra help on this item, Right, eXit



Figure 4-20 Detail of Slot Alarm Status Table Screen

Table 4-4 provides a description of the parameters that appear in the Slot Alarm Status Tablescreen.

Table 4-4 Slot Alarm Status Table Parameter Descriptions


Slot Number Indicates the selected slot number.

Slot Critical Status Indicates the status of slot alarms that are classified as critical.

Slot Major Status Indicates the status of slot alarms that are classified as major.

Slot Minor Status Indicates the status of slot alarms that are classified as minor.

Link 0 Critical Status Indicates the status of link 0 alarms that are classified as critical.

Link 0 Major Status Indicates the status of link 0 alarms that are classified as major.

Link 0 Minor Status Indicates the status of link 0 alarms that are classified as minor.










Table 4-4


Switch Name: Slot 0 SYS Slot Alarm Status Table New EventDetail of Slot Alarm Status Table entry 0

Slot Number : 0 Slot Critical S: clr Slot Major Stat: clr Slot Minor Stat: clr Link 0 Critical: clr Link 0 Major St: clr Link 0 Minor St: clr Link 1 Critical: clr Link 1 Major St: clr Link 1 Minor St: clr Link 2 Critical: clr Link 2 Major St: clr Link 2 Minor St: clr Link 3 Critical: clr Link 3 Major St: clr Link 3 Minor St: clrWorking...Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row,Press ^J for extra help on this item, Summary, eXit



03Iss


03Iss

ociatedstics, Cell

2

3

3

6

2

6

1

34

7

2

Chapter 5: ACP Configuration

Chapter Overview

This section describes how to configure and manage the ACP Cell Controller and its assLIMs. You can find status information in Chapter 6, ACP Status of the GDC Xedge DiagnoGuide, Part Number 032R500. You can find an overview and a list of features in Chapter 4Controllers of the GDC Xedge Switch Applications Overview, Part Number 032R300.



Define the LIM in Slot-0........................................................................................................ 5-


Configure the PLCP Framer.................................................................................................. 5-7

PLCP Configuration/Status Screen Parameters................................................................5-9

Configure the Physical Framer............................................................................................ 5-13

DS1-2C/2CS LIMs.........................................................................................................5-1

DS3-2C LIMs.................................................................................................................5-1

E1-2C/2CS LIMs............................................................................................................5-2

E3-2C LIMs....................................................................................................................5-2

HSSI-DTE LIMs............................................................................................................5-3

J2 LIMs...........................................................................................................................5-

SI-2C LIMs.....................................................................................................................5-3

Configure the Low Priority Buffers..................................................................................... 5-40

Procedure........................................................................................................................5-4

Configure the LCE-16 LIM................................................................................................. 5-47

ACP Version 2 Slot Controller Requirements................................................................5-47

Define the LCE-16 LIM in Slot-0..................................................................................5-47

Loading the LCE-16 Software........................................................................................5-48

LCE-16 Configuration Overview...................................................................................5-49

Control Signals Overview..............................................................................................5-49

Diagnostic Configuration Overview...............................................................................5-49

LCE-16 Configuration....................................................................................................5-50


ACP Configuration Configuration Summary

h via a

Configuration SummaryFor the instructions that follow, we assume that you are connected to the GDC Xedge switcVT-100 terminal and the management port.

To configure the ACP ATM Interface, you need to perform the following procedures:

• Define the LIM in Slot-0

• Configure the PLCP Framer

• Configure the Physical Framer

• Configure the Low Priority Buffers

Once you have completed these procedures, refer to Chapter 16: Bandwidth Allocationand Reservation, and Chapter 17: Configuring Connections for instructions on how to configurePVCs and SPVCs.

Note Refer to the PDH Framing section in Chapter 1, Switch Function of the GDC Xedge SwitchTechnical Reference Manual (Part No. 032R310) for details about PLCP framing.


ACP Configuration Define the LIM in Slot-0

03Iss

P Cellelect

its

n

Define the LIM in Slot-0

The Slot-0 Controller sends a health check signal that detects the presence of the ACController in the installed slot. Before you can configure the ACP Cell Controller, you must sa DLIM type for it in the Slot-0 Physical Layout.

1. From the Slot-0 Root Menu, select Manage configuration. The MIB Display andManagement screen appears.

2. Select the Slot 0 Configuration/Status menu option and press the Enter key. The Slot 0Configuration/Status screen appears.

3. Select the Physical Layout menu option and press the Enter key. The Physical Layout screenappears.

4. Select Goto row and enter the number of the slot in which the ACP Cell Controller and LIM are installed, then press the Enter key (for example, if the ACP is in Slot-6, select Gotorow, type slot6 , then press the Enter key).

5. Select Extra detail . The Physical Layout, Detail of Physical Layout entry “X” appears asshown in Figure 5-1. These parameters are defined in Physical Layout Screen Parameters opage 5-4.

6. At the Select option: prompt, select the DLIM Type and press the Enter key.

7. From the list of DLIMs displayed, select the appropriate DLIM from the following:

• Q - ds1 dual for the DS1-2C/2CS DLIM.

• M - ds3 2c for the DS3-2C DLIM

• O - e1 dual for the E1-2C/2CS DLIM

• N - e3 2c for the E3-2C DLIM

• K - dhssi for the HSSI-DTE DLIM

• T - j2 dual for the J2 DLIM

• W - si dual for the SI-2C DLIM

8. Select eXit twice to return to the MIB Display and Management screen.

9. Select Save to save the configuration change.

10. Select eXit to return to the Root Menu. This completes the Define the LIM in Slot-0procedure.

11. Proceed to Configure the PLCP Framer on page 5-7.



IMs

Figure 5-1 Extra Detail of Physical Layout

Physical Layout Screen Parameters

The Physical Layout screen allows you to view and set parameters for Slot Controllers and Lin the Slot-0 Physical Layout. The parameters are defined in Table 5-1. The default values areindicated by d.

Table 5-1 Physical Layout Screen Parameter Definitions

Parameter Definition Takes Effect On

Slot No Displays the number of the slot currently under review. NA, read only

Name Enables you to assign a significant name to the slot being reviewed. If none is to be assigned, the default is the slot number in the format Slot XX.

Immediate

Type When the slot controller has been installed, the application code has booted and is running, and the config update has been passed to the Slot-0 Controller, the Type field identifies the type of Slot Controller installed in the slot. In this case, the Slot Controller is recognized as a type dv2ap .

NA, read only



5A: Slot 0 SYS Physical Layout SW VersionDetail of Physical Layout entry 0

Slot No : 0 DOC Ser # : 05069900430 Name : Slot 00 DOC HW Ver : 4.0J Type : pdh Slot MAC Addres: c4c4c4c4c4c41 DLIM Type : ds3 2c Last State Chan: 26 Apr 2000 13:13:52 Version : 51c9 Lst Chngd Link : link 0 State : active Lst Previous St: down2 Reset Slot : no3 Required State : normal Changed State : yes4 Associated Slot: 0 slot0PhyLink0St: up slot0PhyLink1St: up slot0PhyLink2St: stop slot0PhyLink3St: stop Slot Ser # : 0506990043 Slot HW Ver : 13.0TSelect option:Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row, Index search, Summary,eXit



03Iss

DLIM Type Enables you to specify the LIM type that is installed from a list of possible LIMs. The LIMs supported by the ACP Cell Controller are:K - dhssiM - ds3 2cN - e3 2cO - e1 dualQ - ds1 dualT - j2 dualW - si dual

Immediate

Version Indicates the version of application software running on the ACP Slot Controller.

NA, read only

State Indicates the current state of the slot controller. The possible states are:absent : Indicates that there is no slot controller in the slot or it

has lost communications.active : The full feature software has been loaded and is

running.bootmode : The full feature software has not been loaded; the

software may not be present or the rotary switch may be set to bootmode.

NA, read only

Reset Slot Enables you to reset the slot. This is a warm restart of the slot. It is necessary when certain configuration changes are made to the slot such as a change in its IP address: yes : Type y to reset the slot.

nod: Type n to exit this option without a slot reset.

Immediate

Required State Enables you to set the required state of the slot. The options are:

A - normal d: This is the normal state required for running.B - shutdown : Selecting this option stops the slot from

running.C - main : not supportedD - shadow : not supported

Immediate

Changed State Reports if a state change has taken place since the last time the Slot Controller was put into operation.

NA, read only

Associated Slot Not supported. NA

slot0PhyLink0St Indicates the current status of link 0. The possible states are:up : The Slot Controller and LIM have been installed, the LIM

has been selected and recognized, and line coding is passing.

down : Indicates an incomplete installation, selection of the wrong LIM, or line coding is not passing.

stop : Indicates that the port is disabled.

NA, read only

slot0PhyLink1St Same as slot0PhyLink0St except reports on link 1. NA, read only

slot0PhyLink2St Will always indicate stop since the ACP doesn’t support Link-2. NA

Table 5-1 Physical Layout Screen Parameter Definitions (Continued)





slot0PhyLink3St Will always indicate stop since the ACP doesn’t support Link-3. NA

Slot Ser # Reports the slot serial number as assigned in the manufacturing process.

NA, read only

Slot HW Ver Reports the slot hardware version as assigned in the manufacturing process.

NA, read only

DOC Ser # Reports the DOC serial number as assigned in the manufacturing process.

NA, read only

DOC HW Ver Reports the DOC hardware version as assigned in the manufacturing process.

NA, read only

Slot MAC Addres Reports the slot MAC address as assigned in the manufacturing process.

Immediate





ACP Configuration Configure the PLCP Framer

03Iss

ell

Configure the PLCP Framer1. From the Root Menu of the Slot-0 Controller, establish a telnet session with the ACP C

Controller. The Root Menu of the ACP Cell Controller appears.

2. From the Root Menu of the ACP Cell Controller select Manage configuration. The MIBDisplay and Management screen for the ACP Cell Controller appears.

3. Select the PDH Configuration/Status menu option and press the Enter key. The PDHConfiguration/Status screen appears.

4. Select the PLCP Configuration/Status menu option and press the Enter key. The PLCPConfiguration/Status screen appears.

5. Select Extra detail. The Detail of PLCP Configuration/Status entry 0 (Link-0) screenappears as shown in Figure 5-2. The screen parameters are described in Table 5-2.

6. Select the Phy Framer option and press the Enter key.

7. Select the appropriate framer mode type, as follows:

• A- none for DS1-2C/2CS LIMs

• B - ds3 for DS3-2C LIMs

• A- none for E1-2C/2CS LIMs

• C - e3 for E3-2C LIMs

• A- none for HSSI-DTE LIMs

• A- none for J2 LIMs

• A- none for SI-2C LIMs

8. Select Cell Delin and press the Enter key.

9. Select the appropriate delineation type, as follows:

For DS1-2C/2CS LIMs, either:

• A - hec based delineation (recommended for most applications)

• B - ds1 PLCP for DS1-2C/2CS LIMs.

For DS3-2C LIMs, either:

• A - hec based delineation

• C - ds3 PLCP for DS3-2C LIMs. (You must select ds3 PLCP if you want to transmit the 125µs bit clock.)

For E1-2C/2CS LIMs, either:


• D - e1 PLCP

For E3-2C LIMs, either:



h


• E - e3 g751 PLCP

For HSSI-DTE LIMs, only:


For J2 LIMs, only:


For SI-2C LIMs, only:


10. Select the Scrambler. The default is set to A - enabled. You may have to change it to matcyour circuit conditions.

11. Select Reconfigur and press the Enter key.

12. At the Reconfigure: (Y/N) prompt, type y to send the parameter values to the LIM.

13. Select Down to transition to the Detail of PLCP Configuration/Status entry 1 (Link-1)screen.

14. Repeat step 6 through step 12 for Detail of PLCP Configuration/Status entry 1.

15. Select eXit twice to return to the MIB Display and Management screen. This completes theConfigure the PLCP Framer procedure.

16. Proceed to Configure the Physical Framer on page 5-13.

Figure 5-2 Extra Detail of PLCP Configuration/Status


Switch Name:Slot x SYS PLCP Configuration/Status New EventDetail of PLCP Configuration/Status entry 0

Link # : 0 RX Clock : up FE-ES : 700 Link Enabl: enabled Txed Cells: 83527597 FE-SES : 701 Link Statu: ignored Rxed Cells: 2937143377 FE-UAS : 0 Link State: up HCS Errors: 002 Phy Framer: ds3 LOCD Defec: no03 Cell Delin: ds3 PLCP Yellow Def: no04 Scrambler : enabled LOF Defect: no05 XOR w/55H : enabled LOCD Alarm: no06 SMDS Mode : disabled Yellow Ala: no07 Idle Cell : unassigned LOF Alarm : no08 Loopback : none Frame Errs: 009 Clear Coun: no BIP8 Errs : 010 Reconfigur: no FEBE Errs : 011 Lpbk Timeo: 1 ES : 145 Chip Type : suni pdh SES : 145 TX Clock : up UAS : 0Select option:Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row, Index search, Summary,eXit



03Iss

d to

PLCP Configuration/Status Screen Parameters

The PLCP Configuration/Status screen allows you to view and set the parameters requireconfigure the PLCP framer. These parameters are defined in Table 5-2. The default values are

indicated by d. You can find additional information on cell delineation (Cell Delineation onpage 1-6), DS1 framing (DS1 Framing (1.544 Mbits/sec.) on page 1-9), PLCP (Physical LayerConvergence Protocol (PLCP) on page 1-9) and scrambling (Cell Payload Scrambling on page 1-7)in Chapter 1, Switch Functionof the GDC Xedge Switch Technical Reference Manual, Part Number032R310.

Table 5-2 PLCP Configuration/Status Parameter Definitions


Link # Displays the number of the link for which the extra detail is being shown.

NA, read only

Link Enabl Sets/indicates the link as being enabled or disabled. The options are:

A - enabled d

B - disabled

Immediate

Link Statu Sets/indicates the status of the control line, whether to be ignored or responded to. The options are:

A - ignored d

B - processedDetermines whether or not the PLCP chip will use the link state as a condition for attempting to transmit or receive data.

Reconfigure

Link State Indicates the current state of the link as:up : The link is operational.down : The link is non-operational.stop : The link has been disabled.off : The link control lines are down.

NA, read only

Phy Framer Enables the selection of the physical frame mode type for the ds3 and e3 series of LIMs. The options are:

A - none d: Select A - none if the installed LIM is not a DS3 or an E3.

B - ds3C - e3Framing for the ds3 and e3 LIMs is performed on the Slot Controller. Framing for the other LIMs that work with the ACP Slot Controller is performed at the LIMs.

Reconfigure

Cell Delin Enables/indicates the mode setting for the PLCP chip. The options are:A - hec based delineation d

B - ds1 PLCPC - ds3 PLCPD - e1 PLCPE - e3 g751 PLCPIt is in this field that the actual framing mode is set (for example, DS1, DS3, E1, or E3).

Reconfigure




Scrambler Sets/indicates the status of the scrambler. The options are:

A - enabled d

B - disabled .The scrambler is self-synchronizing and uses a polynomial of

x43+1 to scramble the ATM cell payload. If enabled, it performs scrambling for both transmission and reception. It may be used for both PLCP and non-PLCP based transmission systems.

Reconfigure

XOR w/55H Enables/indicates the exclusive ORing of a fixed 0x55 pattern with the data in the header field of the ATM cell header before transmission to assist with cell delineation. The options are:

A - enabled d

B - disabled

Reconfigure

SMDS Mode Sets/indicates the Switched Multimegabit Data Service mode on or off. The options are:

A - disabled d

B - enabled

Reconfigure

Idle Cell Sets/indicates which type of cell is to be inserted when there are no cells pending for transmission. The options are:A - unassigned d: (CLP=0, used according to ATM Forum

Specification)B - idle : (CLP=1, used according to ITU Specification).

Reconfigure

Loopback Enables/indicates the setting of loopbacks for testing. The options are:A - none d

B - diagnostic lpbkC - line lpbkD - payload lpbkE - cell lpbkNote: Loopbacks cause data disruption.

Immediate

Clear Coun Enables the clearing of the performance monitoring counters:yes : Type y to clear the counters.

nod: Type y to exit this option without clearing the counters.

Immediate

Table 5-2 PLCP Configuration/Status Parameter Definitions (Continued)



TPOS/TD

RPOS/RD

TRANSMIT FRAMER

RECEIVE FRAMER

LINE LOOPBACK

DIAGNOSTIC LOOPBACK

PAYLOAD LOOPBACK

TRANSMITCELLPROCESSOR

RECEIVECELLPROCESSOR

TRANSMITCELLFIFO

RECEIVECELLFIFO

CELL LOOPBACK

LOOPBACK TEST MODE



03Iss

Reconfigur Resets the ACP with the current parameter values:yes : Type y to reconfigure the ACP.

nod: Type n to exit this option without changes.

Immediate

Lpbk Timeo Enables setting the length of time a loopback will stay up

before being automatically reset. Range is (1d - 604800) minutes.

Reconfigure

Chip Type Indicates the type of framer detected on the controller as:suni pdh : supports G.804.plpp : indicates no support.You should select the suni pdh option for the ACP Slot Controller framer.

Reconfigure

TX Clock Indicates if the transmit clock is present at the chip:up : The clock is present.down : The clock is absent.

NA, read only

RX Clock Indicates if the receive clock is present at the chip:up : The clock is present.down : The clock is absent.

NA, read only

Txed Cells Reports the number of cells that have been sent to the TX FIFO buffer. Does not count idle, unassigned, or errored cells.

NA, read only

Rxed Cells Reports the number of cells that have been received at the RX FIFO buffer. Does not count idle, unassigned, or errored cells.

NA, read only

HCS Errors Reports the number of cells with bad header checksum sequences that have been received on the link.

NA, read only

LOCD Defec Indicates if there is currently a loss of cell delineation condition. NA, read only

Yellow Def Indicates if there is currently a PLCP yellow alarm defect state. This is triggered when ten or more consecutive frames are received with the yellow bit set in the PLCP framer.

NA, read only

LOF Defect Indicates if there is currently a PLCP loss of frame defect state condition.

NA, read only

LOCD Alarm Indicates if there is a loss of cell delineation alarm. NA, read only

Yellow Ala Indicates if there is a yellow alarm. When present, indicates that the yellow bit position in the path status octet has been detected. It is declared for either a DS3 LOF or a DS3 RX AIS. An alarm trap is sent to the manager.

NA, read only

LOF Alarm Indicates if there is currently a loss of frame alarm. NA, read only

Frame Errs Reports the number of PLCP framing errors detected. NA, read only

BIP8 Errs Reports the number of PLCP bit interleaved parity (BIP) errors that have been detected by the PLCP module.

NA, read only

FEBE Errs Reports the number of far-end block errors detected in each frame by the PLCP module.

NA, read only






ES Reports the number of errored second intervals. NA, read only

SES Reports the number of severely errored second intervals. NA, read only

UAS Reports the number of unavailable second intervals. NA, read only

FE-ES Reports the number of far-end errored second intervals. NA, read only

FE-SES Reports the number of far-end severely errored second intervals.

NA, read only

FE-UAS Reports the number of far-end unavailable second intervals. NA, read only





ACP Configuration Configure the Physical Framer

03Iss

e you

wing

red

Configure the Physical Framer

To configure the Physical Framer, perform the procedure that corresponds to the LIM typpreviously defined in Slot-0:

• DS1-2C/2CS LIMs

• DS3-2C LIMs

• E1-2C/2CS LIMs

• E3-2C LIMs

• HSSI-DTE LIMs

• J2 LIMs

• SI-2C LIMs

DS1-2C/2CS LIMs

Configuring the Physical Framer for the DS1-2C/2CS LIM requires that you perform the follotask:

• Configure the DS1-2C/2CS DSP DLIM

Configure the DS1-2C/2CS DSP DLIM

1. From the MIB Display and Management screen of the ACP Cell Controller, select the DSPDLIMs menu option and press the Enter key. The DSP DLIMs screen appears.

2. Select the ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status menu option and press the Enter key. The ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status screen appears.

3. Select Extra detail . The Detail of ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status entry 0 screen appears asshown in Figure 5-3. The screen parameters are described in DS1-2C/4C DLIM Config/StatusParameters on page 5-14.

4. At the Select option: prompt, enter the option number of the item or items to be configuand enter the configuration changes.

5. If making a change, select Reconfigure and press the Enter key.

6. At the Reconfigure: (Y/N) prompt, enter Y to send the changes to the LIM.

7. Select Down to transition to the Detail of ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status entry 1 screen.

8. Repeat step 4 through step 6 for Detail of ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status entry 1.


10. Select Save. This completes the Configure the Physical Framer procedure for the DS1-2C/2SLIM.

11. Proceed to Configure the Low Priority Buffers on page 5-40



the

Figure 5-3 Extra Detail of ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status Screen for entry “X”

DS1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status Parameters

The ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status screen allows you to view and set the parameters forDS1-2C/2CS DLIM. These parameters are defined in Table 5-3.

The default values are indicated by d

Table 5-3 DS1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status Parameter Definitions


Link No Indicates the number of the link currently under review. NA, read only

Version Indicates the LIM type installed, in this case, a ds1 dual. NA, read only

Txmt Line Lengt Enables/indicates the setting of the line length. The options are:

A - feet 0 110d, E - feet 440 550B - feet 110 220 , F - feet 550 660C - feet 220 330 , G - more than 655 feetD - feet 330 440 , H - square

Reconfigure

Framer Enables/indicates the setting of the framer. The options are:A - none d: transparent modeB - sf : superframeC - t1dm : DS1 data multiplexer framingD - slc96 : SLC96 framingE - esf4k : extended superframe, 4 Kbit/s data linkF - esf2K 3 : extended superframe, 2 Kbit/s data link, frames 3,

7, 11, 15, 19, 23G - esf2k 1 : extended superframe, 2 Kbit/s data link, frames 1,

5, 9, 13, 17, 21

Reconfigure



Switch Name:Slot x SYS ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status New EventDetail of ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status entry 0

Link No : 0 LOS Alarm : no Version : ds1 dual LOF Alarm : no0 Txmt Line Lengt: feet 0 110 AIS Alarm : no1 Framer : none Yellow Alarm : no2 Line Coding : b8zs BER Alarm : no3 Loopback : none DS1 Framing Err: 04 Tx AIS : no DS1 Bit Errors : 05 Extract Frame B: yes DS1 OOF/COFA Er: 06 Txmt Clock Sele: system DS1 LCV Errors : 07 Clear Counters : yes Line ES : 08 Reconfigure : no Line SES : 0 LOS Defect : no ES : 0 OOF Defect : no SES : 0 AIS Defect : no AISS : 0 Yellow Defect : no UAS : 0 BER Defect : no ExBER : 0Select option:Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row, Index search, Summary,eXit



03Iss

Line Coding Enables/indicates the setting of the line code. The options are:

A - b8zsd: bit 8-zero suppression coding.B - ami : alternate mark inversion coding.

Reconfigure

Loopback Enables/indicates the setting of the diagnostic loopback. The options are:

A - none d

B - line lpbkC - payload lpbkD - digital lpbk .

Note: Loopbacks cause data disruption.

Immediate

Tx AIS Enables/indicates the setting of the transmit Alarm Indication Signalling (AIS) cells. You can find more information in the Operations and Maintenance Overview chapter of the GDC Xedge Switch Diagnostics Guide, Part Number 032R500. yes : Type y to enable the transmission of AIS cells.

nod: Type n to disable AIS cell transmission.

Reconfigure

Extract Frame B Enables/indicates the extraction of frame bits: yes : Type y to enable the extraction of frame bits.

nod: Type y to disable frame bit extraction.

Note: You should leave this option set as nod.

Reconfigure

Txmt Clock Sele Enables/indicates the selection of the transmit clock. The options are:A - system

B - local oscillator d

C - local link

Reconfigure

Clear Counters Enables the clearing of the performance monitoring counters:yes : Type y to clear the counters.

nod: Type n to exit this option without clearing the counters.

Immediate

Reconfigure Resets the ACP Cell Controller with the current parameter values:yes : Type y to reconfigure the ACP.

nod: Type n to exit this option without reconfiguring the ACP.

Immediate

LOS Defect Indicates if there is currently a loss of signal condition. NA, read only

OOF Defect Indicates if there is currently an out of frame condition. Alarm towards network persists >5sec.

NA, read only

AIS Defect Indicates if there is currently an alarm indication signal. NA, read only

Yellow Defect Indicates if there is currently a yellow alarm defect state. NA, read only

Table 5-3 DS1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status Parameter Definitions (Continued)



LineInterface Framer Slot

Controller

Received Data

Transmitted Data

LineLoopback

PayloadLoopback

DigitalLoopback

DS1-2C/2CS LIM



ing

DS3-2C LIMs

Configuring the Physical Framer for the DS3-2C LIM requires that you perform the followtasks:

• Define the DS3-2C Framer Mode

• Configure the DS3-2C DSP DLIM

Define the DS3-2C Framer Mode

1. From the PDH Configuration/Status menu screen, select the DS3 Configuration/Status menu screen and press the Enter key.

2. Select Extra detail. The DS3 Configuration/Status, Detail of DS3 Configuration/Statusentry 0 screen appears as shown in Figure 5-4. The screen parameters are defined in DS3-2CDLIM Config/Status Screen Parameters on page 5-20.

3. Select the Framer Mod and press the Enter key.

4. Set the framer mode type to A - c bit for ATM.

BER Defect Indicates if there is currently a bit error rate of approximately

1x10-3. Note: Not supported.

Also, the BER threshold is not selectable.

NA

LOS Alarm Indicates if there is currently a loss of signal alarm. NA, read only


AIS Alarm Indicates if there is currently an alarm indication signal. NA, read only

Yellow Alarm Indicates if there is currently a yellow alarm. NA, read only

BER Alarm Indicates if there is currently a bit error rate alarm. Note: Not supported.

NA

DS1 Framing Err Reports the number of DS1 framing errors. Note: Not supported.

NA

DS1 Bit Errors Reports the number of DS1 bit errors. NA, read only

DS1 OOF/COFA ER Reports the number of OOF/COFA errors. Note: Not supported.

NA

DS1 LCV Errors Reports the number of DS1 line code violation errors. NA, read only

Line ES Reports the number of line errored second intervals. Note: Not supported.

NA

Line SES Reports the number of line severely errored second intervals. NA, read only

ES Reports the number of errored second intervals. Note: Not supported.

NA


AISS Reports the number of alarm indication signal second intervals. NA, read only


ExBER Reports the number of excessive bit errors. Note: Not supported.

NA

Table 5-3 DS1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status Parameter Definitions (Continued)





03Iss


6. At the Reconfigur: (Y/N) prompt, enter Y to send the changes to the LIM.

7. Select Down to transition to the Detail of DS3 Configuration/Status entry 1 screen.

8. Repeat step 3 through step 6 for Detail of DS3 Configuration/Status entry 1.


10. Select Save.

11. Proceed to Configure the DS3-2C DSP DLIM on page 5-19

Figure 5-4 Detail of DS3 Configuration/Status for Entry “X”


Switch Name:Slot 3 SYS DS3 Configuration/Status SW VersionDetail of DS3 Configuration/Status entry 0

Table Vali: yes AIS Defect: no FE-ES : 4 Link # : 0 Yellow Def: no FE-SES : 00 Framer Mod: c bit BER Defect: no FE-UAS : 01 Tx AIS : no LOS Alarm : no2 Clear Coun: no LOF Alarm : no3 Reconfigur: no AIS Alarm : no Rcv Frame : c bit Yellow Ala: no Rcv Idle S: no BER Alarm : no Tx FEAC Co: none Line ES : 152 Lcvs : 401 Line SES : 148 Frame Errs: 450 ES(P-bit) : 5 Parity Err: 17 ES(C-bit) : 6 C-bit Pari: 9538 SES(P-bit): 0 FEBE Error: 21 SES(C-bit): 6 LOS Defect: no AISS : 0 OOF Defect: no UAS : 183Select option:Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row, Index search, Summary,eXit



efine

DS3 Configuration/Status Screen Parameters

The DS3 Configuration/Status screen allows you to view and set the parameters required to d

the DLIM type. These parameters are defined in Table 5-4. The default values are indicated by d.

Table 5-4 DS3 Configuration/Status Screen Parameter Definitions


Table Vali Indicates table validity. NA, read only

Link # Indicates the link number currently under review. NA, read only

Framer Mod Enables/indicates the setting of the framer mode type. The options are:A - c bit d: Select this option for ATM.B - m23: This option is only used for T3 multiplexers.

Reconfigure

Tx AIS Enables/indicates the setting of the transmit Alarm Indication Signalling (AIS) cells. You can find more information in the Operations and Maintenance Overview chapter of the GDC Xedge Switch Diagnostics Guide, Part Number 032R500. yes : Type y to enable the transmission of AIS cells.nod: Type n to disable AIS cell transmission.

Reconfigure



Immediate

Reconfigur Resets the ACP Cell Controller with the current parameter values:yes : Type y to reconfigure the ACPGSM.


Immediate

Rcv Frame Indicates the type of frame being received, c bit or m23. NA, read only

Rcv Idle S Indicates receiving idle cells within the last second. NA, read only

Tx FEAC Co Indicates a far-end alarm condition. NA, read only

Lcvs Reports the number of line code violations. NA, read only

Frame Errs Reports the number of frame errors. NA, read only

Parity Err Reports the number of parity errors. NA, read only

C-bit Pari Reports the number of C-bit parity errors. NA, read only

FEBE Error Reports the number of far-end block errors. NA, read only


OOF Defect Indicates if there is currently an out of frame condition. NA, read only


Yellow Def Indicates if there is currently a yellow alarm defect state. NA, read only


1x10-3.

NA, read only




Yellow Ala Indicates if there is a yellow alarm. When present, indicates that the yellow bit position in the path status octet has been detected. It is declared for either a DS3 LOF or a DS3 RX AIS. An alarm trap is sent to the manager.

NA, read only




03Iss

red

Configure the DS3-2C DSP DLIM

1. From the MIB Display and Management screen, select the DSP DLIMs menu option. TheDSP DLIMs screen appears.

2. Select the DS3-2C DLIM Config/Status menu option. The DS3-2C DLIM Config/Statusscreen appears.

3. Select Extra detail . The Detail of DS3-2C DLIM Config/Status entry 0 appears as shown inFigure 5-5. The screen parameters are described in DS3-2C DLIM Config/Status ScreenParameters on page 5-20.




7. Select Down to transition to the Detail of DS3-2C DLIM Config/Status entry 1 screen.

8. Repeat step 4 through step 6 for Detail of DS3-2C DLIM Config/Status entry 1.


10. Select Save. This completes the Configure the Physical Framer procedure for the DS3-2CLIM.

11. Proceed to Configure the Low Priority Buffers on page 5-40.

BER Alarm Indicates if there is currently a bit error rate alarm. NA, read only

Line ES Reports the number of line errored second intervals. NA, read only


ES (P-bit) Reports the number of P-bit errored second intervals. NA, read only

ES (C-bit) Reports the number of C-bit errored second intervals. NA, read only

SES (P-bit) Reports the number of P-bit severely errored second intervals. NA, read only

SES (C-bit) Reports the number of C-bit severely errored second intervals. NA, read only



FE-ES Reports the number of far-end errored second intervals. NA, read only

FE-SES Reports the number of far-end severely errored second intervals. NA, read only

FE-UAS Reports the number of far-end unavailable second intervals. NA, read only

Table 5-4 DS3 Configuration/Status Screen Parameter Definitions (Continued)





S3-

Figure 5-5 Extra Detail of DS3-2C DLIM Config/Status for Entry “X”

DS3-2C DLIM Config/Status Screen Parameters

The DS3-2C DLIM Config/Status screen allows you to view and set the parameters for the D2C DLIM. These parameters are defined in Table 5-5. The default values are indicated by d.

Table 5-5 DS3-2C DLIM Config/Status Parameter Definitions



Loopback Enables/indicates the setting of a diagnostic loopback. The options are:

A - none d

B - line lpbkC - local lpbk


Immediate

Version Indicates the LIM type installed, in this case, a ds3 2c . NA, read only

LIM OK Indicates the health of the LIM. NA, read only



SWITCH name:Slot x SYS DS3-2C DLIM Config/Status SW VersionDetail of DS3-2C DLIM Config/Status entry 0

Link No : 00 Loopback : none Version : ds3 2c LIM OK : yes1 TX LBO : short2 Tx Clk Src : system LOS Defect : no LOS Alarm : no3 Reconfigure : no

Select option:Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row, Index search, Summary,eXit

LineInterface

SlotController

Received Data

Transmitted Data

LocalLoopback

DS3-2C LIM

LineLoopback



03Iss

TX LBO Enables/indicates the setting of the line build out. The options are:

A - short d: Select this option for 50-feet or less.B - long : Select this option for 50 to 450-feet.

Reconfigure

TX Clk Src Enables/indicates the setting of the TX clock source. The options are:A - system


C - link0 plcpD - link1 plcp

Reconfigure



Reconfigure Resets the ACP Cell Controller with the current parameter values:yes : Type y to reconfigure the ACP.nod: Type n to exit this option without reconfiguring the ACP.

Immediate

Table 5-5 DS3-2C DLIM Config/Status Parameter Definitions (Continued)





wing

red

E1-2C/2CS LIMs

Configuring the Physical Framer for the E1-2C/2CS LIM requires that you perform the follotask:

• Configure the E1-2C/2CS DSP DLIM

Configure the E1-2C/2CS DSP DLIM

1. From the MIB Display and Management screen, select the DSP DLIMs menu option andpress the Enter key. The DSP DLIMs screen appears.

2. Select the E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status menu option and press the Enter key. The E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status screen appears.

3. Select Extra detail . The Detail of E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status entry 0 appears as shownin Figure 5-6. The screen parameters are described in E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status ScreenParameters on page 5-23.




7. Select Down to transition to the Detail of E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status entry 1 screen.

8. Repeat step 4 through step 6 for Detail of E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status entry 1.


10. Select Save. This completes the Configure the Physical Framer procedure for the E1-2C/2SLIM.




03Iss

E1-

Figure 5-6 Detail of E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status

E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status Screen Parameters

The E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status screen allows you to view and set the parameters for the2C/2CS DLIM. These parameters are defined in Table 5-6. The default values are indicated by d.

Table 5-6 E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status Parameter Definitions



Version Indicates the LIM type installed. NA, read only


A - none d

B - line lpbkC - payload lpbkD - digital lpbk


Immediate



Switch Name:Slot x SYS E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status New EventDetail of E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status entry 0

Link No : 0 14 Sio Nat'l : on Line ES : 0 Version : dual 15 Si1 Nat'l : on Line SES : 000 Loopback : none LOS Defect: no ES : 001 Framer Mod: crc mfrm OOF Defect: no SES : 002 Tx Clk Src: system AIS Defect: no AISS : 003 TS16 PayLd: no FERF Defec: no UAS : 004 Tx AIS : no BER Defect: yes05 Extract Fr: no LOS Alarm : no06 Interface : balanc 120 LOF Alarm : no07 Clear Coun: yes AIS Alarm : no08 Reconfigur: no FERF Alarm: no09 SA4 Nat'l : on BER Alarm : yes10 SA5 Nat'l : on CRC Errors: 011 SA6 Nat'l : on Frame Erro: 012 SA7 Nat'l : on FEBE Error: 013 SA8 Nat'l : on Line Code : 0Select option:Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row, Index search, Summary,eXit


Controller

Received Data

Transmitted Data

LineLoopback

PayloadLoopback

DigitalLoopback

E1-2C/2CS LIM



Framer Mod Enables/indicates the setting of the framer. The options are:

A - crc mfrm d

B - basicC - unframedD - cas

Reconfigure

Tx Clk Src Enables/indicates the selection of the transmit clock. The options are:A - system


C - local link

Reconfigure

TS16 Payld Enables/indicates the setting of the TS16 payload:yes : Type y to set timeslot 16 to carry payload.

nod: Type n to be able to use timeslot 16 for CAS (Channel Associated Signaling).

Reconfigure



Reconfigure

Extract Frame B Enables/indicates the extraction of frame bits: yes : Type y to enable the extraction of frame bits.nod: Type n to disable frame bit extraction.

Note: You should leave this option set as nod.

Reconfigure

Interface Type Enables/indicates the choice of one of two interfaces:

A - balanced 120 d

B - unbalanced 75

Reconfigure



Immediate



Immediate

SA4 Nat’l National bit SA4, transmitted in bit position 4 of Non Frame Alignment Signal (NFAS) frames.Note: Only supported with E1-2CS/4CS LIMs. Bit is fixed to On

(1) for E1-2C/4C LIMs.

Reconfigure

SA5 Nat’l National bit SA5, transmitted in bit position 5 of NFAS frames. Note: Only supported with E1-2CS/4CS LIMs. Bit is fixed to On


Reconfigure



Reconfigure



Reconfigure

Table 5-6 E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status Parameter Definitions (Continued)





03Iss



Reconfigure

SI0 Nat’l International bit SI0, transmitted in bit position 1 of NFAS frames. Note 1: Only supported with E1-2CS/4CS LIMs. Bit is fixed to On

(1) for E1-2C/4C LIMs.Note 2: Not applicable when using CRC Multiframe Framing.

Reconfigure

SI1 Nat’l International bit SI1, transmitted in bit position 1 of Frame Alignment Signal (FAS) frames.Note 1: Only supported with E1-2CS/4CS LIMs. Bit is fixed to On

(1) for E1-2C/4C LIMs.Note 2: Not applicable when using CRC Multiframe Framing.

Reconfigure




FERF Defect Indicates if there is currently a FERF defect state. NA, read only


1x10-3.

NA, read only




FERF Alarm Indicates if there is currently a FERF alarm. NA, read only


CRC Errors Reports the number of CRC errors. NA, read only

Frame Errors Reports the number of frame errors. NA, read only

FEBE Error Reports the number of far end block errors. NA, read only

Line Code Viola Reports the number of line code violation errors. NA, read only












sks:

E3-2C LIMs

Configuring the Physical Framer for the E3-2C LIM requires that you perform the following ta

• Define the E3-2C Framer Mode

• Configure the E3-2C DSP DLIM

Define the E3-2C Framer Mode

1. From the PDH Configuration/Status screen, select the E3 Configuration/Status menuoption and press the Enter key. The E3 Configuration/Status screen appears.

2. Select Extra detail. The E3 Configuration/Status, Detail of E3 Configuration/Status entry 0 screen appears as shown in Figure 5-7. The screen parameters are described in E3Configuration/Status Screen Parameters on page 5-27.

3. Select the Framer Mod option and press the Enter key.

4. Set the appropriate framer mode type: either

A - g832, if PLCP Configuration/Status, Cell Delin is set to hec based delineation, or

B - g751, if PLCP Configuration/Status, Cell Delin is set to e3 g751 PLCP.


6. At the Reconfigur: (Y/N) prompt, enter Y to send the changes to the LIM.

7. Select Down to transition to the Detail of E3 Configuration/Status entry 1 menu screen.

8. Repeat step 3 through step 6 for Detail of E3 Configuration/Status entry 1.


10. Select Save.

11. Proceed to Configure the E3-2C DSP DLIM on page 5-28.



03Iss

LIM

Figure 5-7 Extra Detail of E3 Configuration/Status for Entry “X”

E3 Configuration/Status Screen Parameters

The E3 Configuration/Status screen allows you to view and set the parameters to define the Dtype. The parameters are defined in Table 5-7. The default values are indicated by d.

Table 5-7 E3 Configuration/Status Menu Definitions


Table Vali Indicates table validity. NA, read only

Link # Indicates the link number currently under review. NA, read only

Framer Mod Enables/indicates the setting of the framer mode type. The choices are:A - g832d

B - g751

Reconfigure

Clear Coun Enables the clearing of the performance monitoring counters:yes : Type y to clear the counters.nod: Type n to exit this option without clearing the counters.

Immediate

Reconfigur Resets the ACP Cell Controller with the current parameter values:yes : Type y to reconfigure the ACP.


Immediate

Traceable Enables/indicates signal is traceable to the pri ref clk (g832 only):yes : Type y to set to the primary reference clock.

nod: Type n to not set to the primary reference clock.

Reconfigure

Pyld Label Enables/indicates the payload label is set as:

A - atmdReconfigure



Switch Name:Slot x SYS E3 Configuration/Status SW VersionDetail of E3 Configuration/Status entry 0

Table Vali: no LOS Defect: no Rx Trail T: Link # : 0 OOF Defect: no Rx Trail I: no0 Framer Mod: g832 AIS Defect: no Rx Trail I: no1 Clear Coun: yes FERF Defec: no Rx Pyld La: no2 Reconfigur: no BER Defect: no Rx Pyld La: no3 Traceable : yes LOS Alarm : no4 Pyld Label: atm LOF Alarm : no5 Tx Trail T: length 16 AIS Alarm : no6 Tx Trl Trc: 2020202020 FERF Alarm: no7 Tx Trl Trc: 2020202020 BER Alarm : no8 Rx Exp Tr : 2020202020 Line ES : 09 Rx Exp Tr : 2020202020 Line SES : 0 Framing Er: 0 ES : 0 Lcvs : 0 SES : 0 Parity Err: 0 AISS : 0 FEBE Errs : 0 UAS : 0Select option:Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row, Index search, Summary,eXit



Configure the E3-2C DSP DLIM


2. Select the E3-2C DLIM Config/Status menu option. The E3-2C DLIM Config/Statusscreen appears.

Tx Trail T Enables/indicates the Tx Trail Trace length is set to:A - length 16 , (g832 only).

Reconfigure

Tx Trail Trc Enables/indicates that the Tx Trail Trc Upper Half (G832 only) is set. Reconfigure

Tx Trail Trc Enables/indicates that the Tx Trail Trc Lower Half (G832 only) is set. Reconfigure

Rx Exp Tr Enables/indicates that the Rx Exp Tr Trc Upper Half (G832 only) is set.

Reconfigure

Rx Exp Tr Enables/indicates that the Rx Exp Tr Trc Lower Half (G832 only) is set.

Reconfigure

Framing ER Reports the number of framing errors detected. NA, read only

Lcvs Reports the number of line code violations detected. NA, read only

Parity Err Reports the number of parity bit errors detected. NA, read only

FEBE Errs Reports the number of far-end block errors detected. NA, read only




FERF Defec Indicates if there is currently a FERF condition. NA, read only

BER Defect Indicates if there is currently a bit error rate condition. NA, read only




FERF Alarm Indicates if there is currently a FERF alarm. NA, read only








Rx Trail T Reports the last received trail trace message. NA, read only

Rx Trail I Indicates a received trace id mismatch. NA, read only

Rx Trail I Indicates an unstable received trace id. NA, read only

Rx Pyld La Indicates a received payload type label mismatch. NA, read only

Rx Pyld La Indicates an unstable received payload type label. NA, read only

Table 5-7 E3 Configuration/Status Menu Definitions (Continued)





03Iss

red

3. Select Extra detail . The Detail of E3-2C DLIM Config/Status entry 0 appears as shown inFigure 5-8. The screen parameters are described in E3-2C DLIM Config/Status ScreenParameters on page 5-30.




7. Select Down to transition to the Detail of E3-2C DLIM Config/Status entry 1 screen.

8. Repeat step 4 through step 6 for Detail of E3-2C DLIM Config/Status entry 1.


10. Select Save. This completes the Configure the Physical Framer procedure for the E3-2C LIM.


Figure 5-8 Extra Detail of E3-2C DLIM Config/Status


Switch Name:Slot x SYS E3-2C DLIM Config/Status New EventDetail of E3-2C DLIM Config/Status entry 0

Link No : 0 Version : e3 2c LIM OK : no0 Rx EQ Select : auto1 Loopback LIU : none2 Tx AIS : no3 Timing Reference : system LOS Defect : no LOS Alarm : no4 Reconfigure : no




d to

E3-2C DLIM Config/Status Screen Parameters

The E3-2C DLIM Config/Status screen allows you to view and set the parameters requireconfigure the E3-2C DLIM. These parameters are defined in Table 5-8. The default values areindicated by d.

Table 5-8 E3-2C DLIM Config/Status Screen Parameter Definitions



Version Indicates the LIM type installed, in this case, an e3 2c. NA, read only

LIM OK Indicates the health of the LIM. NA, read only

Rx EQ Select Enables/indicates the selection of the receive equalization as:

A - auto d

B - set 0 to 3p5 dbC - set 2p6 to 8 dbD - set 6 to 9p9 dbE - set 8p6 to 13p2 db

Reconfigure

Loopback LIU Enables/indicates the setting of a diagnostic loopback. The options are:A - none d



Immediate

TX AIS Enables/indicates the setting of the transmit Alarm Indication Signalling (AIS) cells. You can find more information in the Operations and Maintenance Overview chapter of the GDC Xedge Switch Diagnostics Guide, Part Number 032R500. yes : Type y to enable the transmission of AIS cells.nod: Type n to disable AIS cell transmission.

Reconfigure

Timing Reference

Enables/indicates the setting of the timing reference source. The options are:A - systemB - local oscillator d


Reconfigure





Immediate

Table 5-8

LineInterface

SlotController

Received Data

Transmitted Data

LocalLoopback

E3-2C LIM

LineLoopback



03Iss

ing

red

HSSI-DTE LIMs

Configuring the Physical Framer for the HSSI-DTE LIM requires that you perform the followtask:

• Configure the HSSI-DTE DSP DLIM

Configure the HSSI-DTE DSP DLIM

1. From the ACP MIB Display and Management screen, select the DSP DLIMs menu optionand press the Enter key. The DSP DLIMs screen appears.

2. Select the HSSI DLIM Config/Status menu option and press the Enter key. the HSSI DLIMConfig/Status screen appears.

3. Select Extra detail . The Detail of HSSI DLIM Config/Status entry 0 appears as shown inFigure 5-9. The screen parameters are described in HSSI DLIM Config/Status ScreenParameters on page 5-32.




7. Select Down to transition to the Detail of HSSI DLIM Config/Status entry 1 screen.

8. Repeat step 4 through step 6 for Detail of HSSI DLIM Config/Status entry 1.


10. Select Save. This completes the Configure the Physical Framer procedure for the HSSI-DTELIM.




d to

Figure 5-9 Extra Detail of HSSI DLIM Config/Status

HSSI DLIM Config/Status Screen Parameters

The HSSI DLIM Config/Status screen allows you to view and set the parameters requireconfigure the HSSI-DTE DLIM. These parameters are defined in Table 5-9. The default values areindicated by d.

Table 5-9 HSSI DLIM Config/Status Parameter Definitions


Link Indicates the number of the link currently under review. NA, read only

Local Loopback Enables/indicates the setting of the local loopback feature as one of the following:

A - none d

B - lineC - internalD - bilateral . See the loopback diagram in this table.

Immediate



Switch Name:Slot x SYS HSSI DLIM Config/Status SW VersionDetail of HSSI DLIM Config/Status entry 0

Link : 00 Local Loopback : none1 Remote Loopback : none2 Reconfigure : no3 Type : dte Version : hssi v14 Clock Source : local Test Mode : off Link Ready : no Remote Ready : no LOS Defect : no LOS Alarm : no


RXDTXCRXCCTSDCDTMTXDTTRTSDTRRLLL


DCE Interface DTE Interface



03Iss

Remote Loopback

Enables/indicates the setting of the remote loopback feature as one of the following options:

A - none d

B - lineC - digitalD - remote line .Note: These options are not user selectable.

NA, read only



Immediate

Type Enables/indicates the LIM is set to emulate. The options are:A - dted

B - dce - The ACP does not support this option.

Reconfigure

Version Indicates the LIM type installed, in this case, a hssi v1 . NA, read only

Clock Source Enables/indicates the selection of the transmit clock. The options are:

A - local d

B - from dceC - local 45 MbpsD - local 34 Mbps

Reconfigure

Test Mode Indicates if the local DTE is in test mode. NA, read only

Link Ready Indicates if the link is enabled. NA, read only

Remote Ready Indicates if the DTE connected to the HSSI-DTE interface is enabled.

NA, read only



Table 5-9 HSSI DLIM Config/Status Parameter Definitions (Continued)



Selectable loopbacks from the HSSI-DTE LIM.

Slot Controller

HSSI LIMLocalRemote

RemoteRemoteLineLoopback

RemoteDigitalLoopback

RemoteLineLoopback

LocalBilateralLoopback

LocalInternalLoopback

LocalLineLoopback



red

J2 LIMs

Configuring the Physical Framer for the J2 LIM requires that you perform the following task:

• Configure the J2 DSP DLIM

Configure the J2 DSP DLIM

1. From the ACP MIB Display and Management screen, select the DSP DLIMs menu optionand press the Enter key. The DSP DLIMs screen appears.

2. Select the J2 DLIM Config/Status menu option and press the Enter key. The J2 DLIMConfig/Status screen appears.

3. Select Extra detail. The Detail of J2 DLIM Config/Status entry 0 appears as shown inFigure 5-10. The screen parameters are described in J2 DLIM Config/Status ScreenParameters on page 5-35.


5. If making a change, select Reconfig Button and press the Enter key.


7. Select Down to transition to the Detail of J2 DLIM Config/Status entry 1 screen.

8. Repeat step 4 through step 6 for Detail of J2 DLIM Config/Status entry 1.


10. Select Save. This completes the Configure the Physical Framer procedure for the J2 LIM.


Figure 5-10 Extra Detail of J2 DLIM Config/Status


Switch Name:Slot x SYS J2 DLIM Config/Status SW VersionDetail of J2 DLIM Config/Status entry 0

Link No : 0 AIS Alarm : no Firmware : 0 Remote Alarm : no0 Line EQ : low dB Frame Errors : 01 Loopback : none Remote Errors : 02 Tx AIS : no LCV Errors : 03 Tx Clk Select : system bus CRC Errors : 04 Clear Stats : yes Line ES : 05 Reconfig Button: no Line SES : 06 Value TS 97+98 : 0xffff ES : 0 Quality of Cloc: low Primary SES : 0 LOS Defect : no AISS : 0 OOF Defect : no UAS : 0 AIS Defect : no Remote Defect : no LOS Alarm : no LOF Alarm : noSelect option:Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row, Index search, Summary,eXit



03Iss

d to

J2 DLIM Config/Status Screen Parameters

The J2 DLIM Config/Status screen allows you to view and set the parameters requireconfigure the J2 DLIM. These parameters are defined in Table 5-10. The default values areindicated by d.

Table 5-10 J2 DLIM Config/Status Screen Parameter Definitions



Firmware Indicates the revision of the firmware installed. NA, read only

Line EQ Enables/indicates the setting of the line equalization as:A - low dbB - high db

Reconfigure

Loopback Enables/indicates the setting of the loopback feature as:A - none d

B - liu lineC - j2_Framer PayloadD - j2_Framer Digital

Immediate

TX AIS Enables/indicates the setting of the transmit Alarm Indication Signalling (AIS) cells. You can find more information in the Operations and Maintenance Overview chapter of the GDC Xedge Switch Diagnostics Guide, Part Number 032R500. yes : Type y to enable the transmission of AIS cells.nod: Type n to disable AIS cell transmission.

Reconfigure

Gapped Clock Enables/indicates the setting of the gapped clock feature. The options are:

A - non gapped d

B - atm .

Reconfigure

TX Clock Select Enables/indicates the setting of the transmit clock. The options are:

A - local rx d

B - system busC - int oscillatorD - link 0E - link 1

Reconfigure

Clear Stats Enables the clearing of the performance monitoring counters:yes : Type y to clear the counters.


Immediate



Controller

Received Data

Transmitted Data

LIU LineLoopback

J2 FramerDigitalLoopback

J2 LIM

PayloadLoopback

J2 Framer



Reconfig Button Resets the ACP Cell Controller with the current parameter values:yes : Type y to reconfigure the ACP.nod: Type n to exit this option without reconfiguring the ACP.

Immediate




Remote Defect Indicates if there is currently a remote error condition. NA, read only




Remote Alarm Indicates if there is currently a remote alarm. NA, read only

Frame Errors Reports the number of frame errors detected. NA, read only

Remote Errors Reports the number of remote errors detected. NA, read only

OOF/COFA Errors Reports the number of out of frame or change of frame alignment errors detected.

NA, read only

LCV Errors Reports the number of line code violation errors. NA, read only







Table 5-10 J2 DLIM Config/Status Screen Parameter Definitions (Continued)





03Iss

sk:

ell

red

SI-2C LIMs

Configuring the Physical Framer for the SI-2C LIM requires that you perform the following ta

• Configure the SI-2C DSP DLIM

Configure the SI-2C DSP DLIM

1. From the Root Menu of the Slot-0 Controller, establish a telnet session with the ACP CController (for example, if the ACP is in Slot-6, select Telnet, type slot6 , then press theEnter key). The Root Menu of the ACP Cell Controller appears.

2. From the Root Menu of the ACP Cell Controller select Manage configuration. The MIBDisplay and Management screen for the ACP Cell Controller appears.


4. Select the SI (SCF) DLIM Config/Status menu option.The SI (SCF) DLIM Config/Statusscreen appears.

5. Select Extra detail . The Detail of SI (SCF) DLIM Config/Status entry 0 appears as shownin Figure 5-11. The screen parameters are described in SI-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status ScreenParameters on page 5-38.



8. At the Reconfig Button: (Y/N) prompt, enter Y to send the changes to the DLIM.

9. Select Down to transition to the Detail of SI-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status entry 1.

10. Repeat step 6 through step 8 for the Detail of SI (SCF) DLIM Config/Status entry 1.


12. Select Save. This completes the Configure the Physical Framer procedure for the SI-2C LIM.




d to

Figure 5-11 Extra Detail Screen for SI (SCF) DLIM Config/Status

SI-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status Screen Parameters

The SI (SCF) DLIM Config/Status screen allows you to view and set the parameters requireconfigure the SI-2C DLIM. The parameters are defined in Table 5-11. The default values areindicated by d.

Table 5-11 SI-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status Screen Parameter Definitions

Parameter Definition Takes Effect on

Link Number Indicates the number of the link currently under review. NA, read only

LIM I.D. Type Indicates the DLIM type installed, in this case, an si dual . NA, read only

Firmware Revision Indicates the revision of the firmware installed. NA, read only

Quality of Clock Indicates the quality/source of the receive clock. NA, read only

Controller Enables/indicates the choice of Slot Controller base card:

A - ce hpg hc2 d Select this option for the ACP Cell Controller.B - ms ms2 : do not use this option for the ACP.

Reconfigure

scfDCEDCD Enables/indicates the DLIM is set to emulate. The options are:

A - dced - This option is not supported on the ACP.B - dte - Select this option for the ACPNote: If the port is to be set to operate in DTE mode, the 16-pin

resistor pack associated with the port must be resident in the DTE mode socket.

Reconfigure



SWITCH name:Slot x SYS SI (SCF) DLIM Config/Status SW VersionDetail of SI (SCF) DLIM Config/Status entry 0

Link Number : 0 LIM I.D. Type : si dual Firmware Revision : 0 Quality of Clock : low Primary0 Controller : ce hpg hc21 DCE or DTE : dce2 Loopback : line3 Receive Line Timing : enabled4 Data Rate in K Bits/Sec : rate 2x45 Clock : system6 Interface Type : x217 Reconfig Button : no LOS Defect : no LOS Alarm : no




03Iss

Loopback Enables/indicates the setting of the loopback feature. Options are:

A - none d

B - lineC - link (plus controls RTS->CTS and DTR->DSR must be

made.)D - digital

Immediate

Receive Line Timing

Enables/indicates the setting of receive line timing. Options are:A - enabled d: Select this option to allow clocking of data from a

remote timing source (use with long cable runs).B - disabled : This option uses internal source for clocking of

data.

Reconfigure

Data Rate in KBits/Sec

Enables/indicates the data rate set for the port. The options are:A - rate 2x4 O - rate 57x6 d - rate 307x2B - rate 4x8 P - rate 64x0 e - rate 320x0C - rate 7x2 Q - rate 76x8 f - rate 384x0D - rate 9x6 R - rate 96x0 g - rate 448x0E - rate 14x4 S - rate 112x0 h - rate 512x0F - rate 16x0 T - rate 115x2 i - rate 768x0G - rate 16x6 U - rate 128x0 j - rate 1024x0H - rate 19x2 V - rate 144x0 k - rate 1536x0I - rate 28x8 W - rate 153x6 l - rate 1920x0J - rate 32x0 Y - rate 192x0 m - rate 2048x0K - rate 38x4 Z - rate 224x0 n - rate 3072x0L - rate 48x0 a - rate 230x0 o - rate 4096x0M - rate 50x0 b - rate 256x0 p - rate 6144x0N - rate 56x0 c - rate 288x0 q - rate 8192x0

Reconfigure

Clock Enables/indicates that the transmit clock source is set. The options are:

A - system d

B - local oscillator

Reconfigure

Interface Type Enables/indicates the setting of the interface type. The options are:A - x21B - rs449C - eia530 AD - v35

Reconfigure

Reconfig Button Resets the ACP Cell Controller with the current parameter values:yes : Type y to reconfigure the ACP.nod: Type n to exit this option without reconfiguring the ACP.

Immediate



Table 5-11 SI-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status Screen Parameter Definitions (Continued)

Parameter Definition Takes Effect on



Controller

Received Data

Transmitted Data

LineLoopback

LinkLoopback

DigitalLoopback

Serial I/O (SCF) DLIM


ACP Configuration Configure the Low Priority Buffers

low sizes

r. The

blestrafficstionCI is

ou cane low

arded.of the

this

Configure the Low Priority BuffersThe ACP Cell Controller offers four combinations of three different sized, configurable,priority ingress and egress FIFO buffers. The four combinations of maximum physical bufferare shown in Table 5-12.

The selection of the size of the buffers is set at the time you order the ACP Cell Controllebuffers are located on a daughter card (DOC) that is factory installed on the ACP.

In addition to the choice of low priority buffer size configurations, each low priority buffer enayou to set three threshold parameters to tailor the ACP Cell Controller buffers to match profiles. The first parameter is the threshold at which EFCI (Explicit Forward CongeIndication) is generated. EFCI tells the downstream node that the node originating EFapproaching congestion. The Payload Type field being set to a value of 2 indicates EFCI. Yset the EFCI threshold, in 1K cell increments (0 - 63), up to the maximum physical size of thpriority buffer. It is important to note that for the purpose of this discussion, 1K = 1 x 1024.

The second parameter is the threshold at which low priority traffic of CLP=1 begins to be discYou can set this threshold, in 1K cell increments (0-63), up to the maximum physical size low priority buffer.

The third parameter is the logical buffer size at which the buffer will work. You can setthreshold, in the range of 0-63, up to the maximum physical size of the low priority buffer.

Table 5-12 Low Priority Buffer Configurations

Combination # Ingress Buffer Size Egress Buffer Size

1 4K cells 4K cells

2 16K cells 16K cells



Table 5-12



03Iss

ighdelay

anCP tout)

fic

ned in

Figure 5-12 Example of ACP Cell-Based Controller “Wrapping” the Switch Fabric

The ACP routes high priority traffic (CBR and rtVBR) through the high priority buffers. The hpriority buffer size is 63 cells. High priority traffic is expected to pass through with near-zero and with near-zero buffering.

Low priority traffic (nrtVBR and UBR) shares the cell stream with the high priority traffic on“as available” basis. As the high priority traffic increases, it may become necessary for the Abuffer low priority traffic until bandwidth becomes available. These are FIFO (First-In-First-Obuffers. How long the “First-In” low priority cell will be held is a function of the high priority trafprofile.

In Table 5-12, the three threshold parameters of the low priority egress buffer are set as defiTable 5-13.

Table 5-13 Examples of Low Priority Egress Buffer Threshold Parameter Settings


EFCI Set to 26K cells; the ACP will send EFCI downstream at this level.

CLP=1 Set to 32K cells; the ACP will discard low priority traffic of CLP=1 at this level.

Logical Buffer Size Set to 48K cells; the buffer will not operate above this level even though it has the physical capacity to do so.

Table 5-13

ATM Switch Fabric

High Priority

Low Priority

Link-0

Link-1

Link-0

Link-1

ACP Cell Controller ACP Cell Controller

63 0

CBRrtVBR

Cells

nrtVBRUBR

64K 0

High Priority

Low Priority

63 0

CBRrtVBR

Cells

nrtVBRUBR

64K 0

Ingress Egress

48K 32K 26K

LogicalBufferSize

CLP=1 EFCI

Input(Slot-0)

Output(Slot-0)



in toibleeginille low

findd, the thente?” their

red

red

As the high priority traffic begins to peak, you can expect that the low priority buffer will begfill. When the buffer fills to 26K cells, the ACP will send EFCI downstream indicating the possonset of congestion. Should the buffer fill to 32K cells, the setting for CLP=1, the ACP will bto discard newly arriving low priority cells with CLP=1. Low priority cells with CLP=0 woverflow above the 32K cell threshold and will not begin to be discarded unless and until thpriority buffer fills to its logical buffer size of 48K cells.

As low priority buffering is increased, it becomes apparent that more low priority traffic will “space available” in the bit stream. The trade-off is delay. As the buffer size is increasepossible buffer time that a low priority cell may experience is increased. The questionbecomes, “How long of a cell delivery delay rate can the low priority traffic application toleraYou will have to experiment with the applications to determine tolerable buffer sizes andresultant delay rates.

Procedure

The following assumes that you are still in the MIB Display and Management screen of the ACPCell Controller.

1. Select the System Information menu option and press the Enter key. The SystemInformation screen appears.

2. Select the Link Table menu option and press the Enter key. The Link Table screen appears.

3. Select Extra detail. The Detail of Link Table entry 0 (Link-0) appears as shown in Figure5-13. The screen parameters are described in Link Table Screen Parameters on page 5-43.


5. Select Down to transition to the Detail of Link Table entry 1 screen.



8. Select Save. This completes the process of configuring the ACP Cell Controller.

9. Proceed to Chapter 16: Bandwidth Allocation and Reservation, and Chapter 17: ConfiguringConnections for configuring PVCs and SPVCs.



03Iss

iority

Figure 5-13 Extra Detail of Link Table for Entry “X”

Link Table Screen Parameters

The Link Table screen allows you to view and set the parameters for the link and the low prbuffers. These parameters are defined in Table 5-14. The default values are indicated by d.

Table 5-14 Link Table Screen Parameter Definitions


Link Displays the number of the link for which the extra detail is being shown.

NA, read only

Restart Link Enables/indicates the restarting of the link. The options are:

A - nod: Select this if you want to exit this parameter without restarting the link.

B - restart : Select this option to restart the link.Note: Restarting the link causes data disruption.

Immediate

State Indicates the current state of the link. The possible states are:up : the link is operationaldown : the link is non-operationalstop : the link has been disabledoff : the link control lines are down

NA, read only

Transmit Cells Reports the number of cells that have been sent from the switch fabric for transmission out of the link (LIM). Does not count idle, unassigned, or errored cells.

NA, read only



SWITCH name:Slot x SYS Link Table New EventDetail of Link Table entry 0

Link : 0 8 Tx Logic Buff S: 10 Restart link : no 9 Rx Logic Buff S: 1 State : up Tx LP FIFO Dept: 0 Transmit Cells : 83866079 Rx LP FIFO Dept: 0 Receive Cells : 2937440179 Tx Mem Block ID: mem 64k Transmit Rate : 60 Rx Mem Block ID: mem 16k Receive Rate : 60 Max Transmit Ra: 4658 Max Receive Rat: 412421 Reset Stats : no2 Clock Source : normal3 Reset Link Reso: no4 Tx LP FIFO CLP1: 05 Rx LP FIFO CLP1: 06 Tx LP FIFO EFCI: 07 Rx LP FIFO EFCI: 0Select option:Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row, Index search, Summary,eXit



Receive Cells Reports the number of cells that have been received from the link (LIM) to be sent to the switch fabric. Does not count idle, unassigned, or errored cells.

NA, read only

Transmit Rate Reports the current rate at which cells are being sent to the TX FIFO buffer.

NA, read only

Receive Rate Reports the current rate at which cells are being received at the RX FIFO buffer.

NA, read only

Max Transmit Rate Reports the maximum rate at which cells can be sent to the TX FIFO buffer.

NA, read only

Max Receive Rate Reports the maximum rate at which cells can be received at the RX FIFO buffer.

NA, read only

Reset Stats Enables/indicates the resetting of the link statistics:yes : Type y to reset the statistics.

nod: Type n to exit this option without resetting the statistics.

Immediate

Clock Source Enables/indicates the setting of the clock source. The options are:

A - normal d

B - low qualityC - high qualityD - loop timedE - local

Link Restart

Reset Link Resource Enables/indicates the resetting of the link resources:yes : Type y to reset the link resources.

nod: Type n to exit this option without resetting the link resources.

Immediate

Tx LP FIFO CLP1 Discard Thresh

Enables/reports the level at which the egress low priority FIFO buffer threshold is set to begin discarding low priority traffic with CLP=1. The indicated range is [0-63] in 1000 cell increments;

selecting 0 indicates that a threshold is not configured and is disabled.

You should check the Tx Mem Block ID field to determine the maximum physical size of the egress FIFO buffer installed.

Note: A suggested value for this parameter is 50% of the physical size of the Tx Mem Block ID .

Reset Link Resources

Rx LP FIFO CLP1 Discard Thresh

Enables/reports the level at which the ingress low priority FIFO buffer threshold is set to begin discarding low priority traffic with CLP=1. The indicated range is [0-63] in 1000 cell increments;


You should check the Rx Mem Block ID field to determine the maximum physical size of the ingress FIFO buffer installed.

Note: A suggested value for this parameter is 50% of the physical size of the Rx Mem Block ID .


Table 5-14 Link Table Screen Parameter Definitions (Continued)





03Iss

Tx LP FIFO EFCI Thresh Enables/reports the level at which the egress low priority FIFO buffer EFCI level is set. The indicated range is [0-63] in 1000 cell increments;





Rx LP FIFO EFCI Thresh Enables/reports the level at which the ingress low priority FIFO buffer EFCI level is set. The indicated range is [0-63] in 1000 cell increments;





Tx Logic Buff S Enables/reports the maximum logical size setting of the egress low priority buffer. The indicated range is [0-63] in 1000 cell increments,

default = 1 . You should check the Tx Mem Block ID field to determine the maximum physical size of the egress FIFO buffer installed.

Note: A suggested value for this parameter is the maximum physical size of the Tx Mem Block ID.


Rx Logic Buff S Enables/reports the maximum logical size setting of the ingress low priority buffer. The indicated range is [0-63] in 1000 cell increments,

default = 1 . You should check the Rx Mem Block ID field to determine the maximum physical size of the ingress FIFO buffer installed.

Note: A suggested value for this parameter is the maximum physical size of the Rx Mem Block ID.


Tx LP FIFO Dept Reports the number of cells currently in the egress low priority buffer.

NA, read only

Rx LP FIFO Dept Reports the number of cells currently in the ingress low priority buffer.

NA, read only

Tx Mem Block ID Indicates the actual physical size of the egress low priority buffer installed on the DOC. The possible sizes are:mem 4kmem 16kmem 64k

NA, read only






Rx Mem Block ID Indicates the actual physical size of the ingress low priority buffer installed on the DOC. The possible sizes are:mem 4kmem 16kmem 64k

NA, read only





ACP Configuration Configure the LCE-16 LIM

03Iss

singthe

r-right

2 Cellelect

Configure the LCE-16 LIMThis section describes the following procedures:

• ACP Version 2 Slot Controller Requirements

• Define the LCE-16 LIM in Slot-0

• Loading the LCE-16 Software

• Control Signals Overview

• LCE-16 Configuration Overview

• LCE-16 Configuration

ACP Version 2 Slot Controller Requirements

The LCE-16 LIM requires an ACP Version 2 (ACP2) slot controller. To determine if you are uACP2 controllers, identify the revision level of your ACP slot controllers by performing following procedure:

1. Telnet to an ACP slot controller slot.

2. From the Root Menu observe the software revision number that is flashing in the uppehand corner of the screen.

3. For an ACP2 slot controller, the software version will be followed by "/Rev - -" or "/Rev A-".Only the "/Rev A-" version will support the logical multicast function. If there is no “/Rev”field, you have a standard ACP slot controller.

4. Repeat this procedure for all ACP slot controllers requiring Version 2 verification.

Define the LCE-16 LIM in Slot-0

The Slot-0 Controller sends a health check signal that detects the presence of the ACPController in the installed slot. Before you can configure the ACP2 Cell Controller, you must sa DLIM type for it in the Slot-0 Physical Layout.




Note The LCE-16 LIM must be used with an ACP Version 2 slot controller. The ACP Version 2 Slot Controller Requirements verification procedure is provided in this section.

Note Both “Rev - -” and “ Rev A-” support logical multicast on the ACP2. The ACP2 supports logical and spacial multicast. The standard ACP only supports spacial. The “Rev A-” ACP2 includes an update to fix a multicast problem.



its

n

er as

4. Select Goto row and enter the number of the slot in which the ACP2 Cell Controller and LIM are installed, then press the Enter key (for example, if the ACP2 is in Slot-6, select Gotorow, type slot6 , then press the Enter key).

5. Select Extra detail . The Physical Layout, Detail of Physical Layout entry “X” appears asshown in Figure 5-1. These parameters are defined in Physical Layout Screen Parameters opage 5-4.


7. From the list of DLIMs displayed, select j - lce 16 for the LCE-16 LIM.




11. Proceed toLoading the LCE-16 Software on page 5-48.

Loading the LCE-16 Software

Before loading software on the LCE-16 LIM, you must first load the lce.cod file on the ACPVersion 2 (ACP2) slot controller. The file is loaded on the slot controller in the same mannloading any file to a slot controller. These instructions are provided in Chapter 2: SoftwareInstallation.

1. Telnet to an ACP2 slot controller slot.

2. From the Root Menu select Manage configuration.

3. From the MIB Display and Management screen, select DSP DLIMs

4. From the DSP DLIMs screen, select LCE-16 LIM Info

5. From the LCE-16 LIM Info screen, select File Download.

6. From the File Download screen, select 0 Start Download.

7. Type Y at the (Y/N) prompt.

8. Wait for the Download Progress (%): to reach 100% and Download Status: to displaysuccessful.

9. Select 1 Restart LIM from the File Download screen.

10. Type Y at the (Y/N) prompt.

11. Wait for the Download Status: to display idle.

12. Repeat this procedure for all LCE-16 LIMs in the shelf.

Note When downloading the code to the LIM, it is possible that disruptive traffic loss or port dataerrors may be experienced.



03Iss

ata. Portronous/tion ismeters

r the

32 only.

DCD).rols forg andoss-

to Yes.sometest.

LCE-16 Configuration Overview

The LCE-16 LIM provides circuit emulation for legacy EIA232, EIA530 and V.35 interfaces. Dpath configuration for each link has two steps: port configuration and emulation configurationconfiguration is used to select the physical interface parameters such as: DTE/DCE, synchasynchronous, data rate, character configuration, interface type etc. After the port configuraselected the port is enabled. Emulation configuration is used to select adaptation layer parasuch as: ATM cell fill values, forwarding times, control signal transport mapping, etc. Afteemulation configuration is selected the emulation for that port is enabled.

The 16 ports on the LCE-16 are not all identical. Ports 6, 7, 14 and 15 are asynchronous RS2All others ports are synchronous/asynchronous RS232, EIA530 or V.35.

Control Signals Overview

For 01 version hardware, Ports 0, 1, 8 and 9 of the LCE-16 support four controls each (no For 02 and higher version hardware, Ports 0, 1, 8 and 9 support five controls each. Two conteach port are inputs, and two are outputs. The fifth signal, DCD, is bi-directional. The cablindistribution panels for the LCE-16 conform to a DCE pin definition. In this configuration, a crover cable is required to achieve DTE pin assignments.

Diagnostic Configuration Overview

To set up diagnostics refer to either the Port Diagnostics Screen parameters shown in Table 5-23 orEmulation Diagnostics Screen parameters shown in Table 5-26. Select the type of diagnostic youwish to perform. Set the diagnostic timer (Seconds Remaining) and then set Run DiagnosticsWhen the diagnostic timer expires, the selected diagnostic will be terminated. Also, in loopback configurations, the emulation or port functions must be enabled for the port under

Note The LCE-16 hardware version is displayed by the LIM Hardware Version parameter on the LCE-16 LIM Info screen.



and

16

LCE-16 Configuration

Table 5-15 through Table 5-26 list and describe the configurable and non-configurable statusdisplay MIB parameters for the LCE-16 LIM.

LCE-16 LIM Info Screen

The LCE-16 LIM Info screen shown inFigure 5-14 is the screen used to access all other LCE-configuration and status screens described in this section.

Figure 5-14 LCE-16 LIM Info Screen

Table 5-15 LCE-16 LIM Info Screen

Parameter Description Takes Effect On

LIM Hardware Version: The Hardware Version of the LIM. Read Only

LIM Boot Version: The version of Boot Software running on the LIM. Read Only

LIM Firmware Version: The version of (loadable) Firmware used in the programmable logic chips on the LIM.

Read Only

LIM Software Version: The version of the full-feature software running in the LIM.

Read Only

Number of Ports: The number of links on the LCE-16 LIM. Read Only


GD: ACP II: Slot 6 SYS LCE-16 LIM Info SW Version

LIM Hardware Version: 01 LIM Boot Version: -- LIM Firmware Version: fpga.rbt-2.5 LIM Software Version: 51c7 Number of Ports: 16 LIM Status: ready0 LIM Timing1 File Download2 Port Configuration3 Port Performance4 Port Alarms5 Port Diagnostics6 Emulation Configuration7 Emulation Performance8 Emulation Diagnostics




03Iss

in

LIM Timing Screen

The LIM Timing screen is shown in Figure 5-15. The parameters for this screen are describedFigure 5-16.

LIM Status: The current state of the LCE-16 LIM. Possible values are noCommunication, boot-Load, ready, unknown and resetInProgress .noCommunication means the Xedge slot-controller is

not able to communicate with the LIM. The LIM may be in the initial boot sequence, or it may be faulty and inoperable.

bootLoad means the LIM FLASH doesn’t contain full-feature software. The controller may be in the process of loading the full-feature code to the LIM.

ready means the LIM has successfully completed initialization; and is successfully executing commands from the slot-controller.

unknown means no message has been received from the LIM through the ATM LIM-Controller communication channel.

resetInProgress indicates a LIM-reset sequence was initiated but not completed yet.

Read Only

LIM TimingFile DownloadPort ConfigurationPort PerformancePort AlarmsPort DiagnosticsEmulation Configuration Emulation PerformanceEmulation Diagnostics

Screen items used to access all LCE-16 configuration and status screens.

Immediate

Table 5-15

Table 5-15 LCE-16 LIM Info Screen (Continued)




Figure 5-15 LIM Timing Screen

Table 5-16 LIM Timing Screen Parameters


Tmg Source to be Used:

Master Transmit Timing Source Select - This parameter is used to set what source should be used to drive the Transmit Clock. Possible values are systemClock , or localOscillator . The default value for this object is systemClock .When the systemClock is selected, transmit timing is

synchronized to the primary or secondary system clock in the Xedge node. This synchronizes the LCE-16 LIM to the network.

When localOscillator is selected, transmit timing is synchronized to an oscillator on the LCE-16 LIM. In this mode, transmit timing is asynchronous to the network.

Immediate

Tmg Bus Actually Used:

The actual timing source used. Possible values for this object are localOscillator,

primaryBus and secondaryBus. Note: Depends on Tmg Source to be Used: and

actual availability of clocks.

Read Only

limTmgStratum3ClockAvailable:

Is the LIM is receiving Stratum3 timing. The possible values are yes and no.

Read Only


GD: ACP II: Slot 6 SYS LIM Timing SW Version

0 Tmg Source to be Used: systemClock Tmg Bus Actually Used: primaryBus limTmgStratum3ClockAvailable: no Primary Timing Bus Status: valid Secondary Timing Bus Status: invalid




03Iss

in

File Download Screen

The File Download screen is shown in Figure 5-16. The parameters for this screen are describedTable 5-17.

Figure 5-16 File Download Screen

Primary Timing Bus Status:

The status of the Primary timing bus. Possible values are valid and invalid .

Read Only

Secondary Timing Bus Status:

The status of the Secondary timing bus. Possible values are valid and invalid .

Read Only

Table 5-16

Table 5-16 LIM Timing Screen Parameters (Continued)



GD: ACP II: Slot 6 SYS File Download SW Version

0 Start Download: no Download Progress (%): 0 Download Status: idle1 Restart LIM: no limDloadFileName: lce.cod




Port Configuration Screen

The Extra detail of the Port Configuration screen is shown in Figure 5-17. The parameters forthis screen are described in Table 5-18.

Table 5-17 File Download Screen Parameters


Start Download: Used to load a file to LIM from flash. By setting a value of yes , the file specified by limDloadFileName can be loaded from the controller’s file system to the LIM FLASH. The default value for this object is no . Note: While a download is in progress, the value

remains at yes , but when the download is completed, it reverts to no .

Immediate

Download Progress (%):

Shows the percent of download complete. Before any download is started, the value of this object is 0.

Read Only

Download Status: Status of the download mechanism. Possible values are successful, failed, inProgress, idle, and erasingFlash . Before any download is started the value is idle .

Read Only

Restart LIM: Used to restart the LIM software. Possible values are yes and no. The default value for this object is no . A Restart is required after software Download.

Immediate

limDloadFileName: Name of the file used to load the LIM full-feature software from. For the LCE-16 LIM, this value is lce.cod .

Read Only

Table 5-17



03Iss

Figure 5-17 Extra Detail of Port Configuration Screen

Table 5-18 Extra Detail of Port Configuration Screen Parameters


Port No Values 0 through 15, indicating the link number. Read Only

Enabled? The link-status desired by the user. Possible values are portEnabled , and portDisabled. The default value is portDisabled.

Immediate

Clock Mode Whether the link is async, or which sync DTE/DCE clocking mode. Possible values are async, syncDce1, syncDce2, syncDce3, syncDte1, and syncDte3. The default value is async . Links 6, 7, 14 and 15 are ASYNC only.Note: See Figure 5-18 through Figure 5-22.

Immediate

Sync RxClk Invert Specifies whether the received clock should be inverted. Possible values are yes and no . The default value is no .

Immediate


GD: ACP II: Slot 6 SYS Port Configuration SW VersionDetail of Port Configuration entry 0

Port No : 000 Enabled? : portEnabled01 Clock Mode : syncDce102 Sync RxClk Inve: no03 Baud Rate : sync6400004 Bits Per Char : 805 Stop Bits : 106 Parity : none07 Interface : rs23208 RTS usage : notApplicable09 CTS control : notApplicable10 DTR usage : notApplicable11 DSR control : notApplicable12 DCD control/usa: notApplicable13 Async overspeed: none14 Reset Perf Coun: noSelect option:Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row, Index search, Summary,eXit



Baud Rate Baud rate for the serial line. Ports configured for ASYNC operation allow the values async75, async150, async300, async1200, async2400, async4800, async7200, async9600, async19200, async28800, async33600, async38400, async57600. When a link is configured for SYNC, only the values sync1200, sync2400, sync4800, sync9600, sync19200, sync56000 , and sync64000, are allowed. The default value is async19200. SYNC is available on links 0 through 5, and 8 through 13. Links 6, 7, 14 and 15 are ASYNC only.Note: The LCE-16 LIM is divided into two halves; ports 0-7,

and ports 8-15. Sync below 4800 and sync64000 can not be selected simultaneously within one-half of the LIM.

Example: If port 0 is set to sync2400 , ports 1-7 can not be set to sync64000.

Immediate

Bits Per Character The number of bits per received/transmitted character. Possible values are 5, 6, 7, and 8. The default value is 8.

Immediate

Stop Bits The number of stop bits used. Possible values are 1 and 2. Default value is 1.

Immediate

Parity Type of parity used on the link. Possible values are none, odd , and even . The default value is none .

Immediate

Interface The physical interface to use on this link. Possible values are eia530, x21, v35, rs449 , and rs232 . The default value is rs232 . Only rs232 is available on links 6, 7, 14 and 15.

Immediate

RTS usage Note: This parameter only applies to 02 Revision Hardware (and higher) as per LIM Hardware Version on the LCE-16 LIM Info screen.transportRTS - Selected for ports 0, 1, 8 or 9 to transport

RTS through the ATM network to the far end.useRTSinpu t - Future use option for ports 0, 1, 8 and 9.notApplicable - Selected for ports 2-7 and 10-15 which do

not support RTS.

Immediate

CTS control Note 1: For the 01 version LCE-16 (as per LIM Hardware Version on the LCE-16 LIM Info screen), this item is only configurable in the asynchronous mode. In the synchronous mode CTS is always asserted.

Note 2: Applicable to ports 0,1, 8 and 9.emulation - CTS output is controlled based on the CTS

emulation configuration.alwaysAssert - CTS output is always asserted independent

of other conditions or configurationsalwaysNegate - CTS output is always negated independent

of other conditions or configurations.notApplicable - Selected for ports 2-7 and 10-15 which do

not support CTS

Immediate

DTR usage transportDTR - Selected for ports 0, 1, 8 or 9 to transport DTR through the ATM network to the far end.

useDTRinput - Future use option for ports 0, 1, 8 or 9.notApplicable - Selected for ports 2-7 and 10-15 which do

not support DTR.

Immediate

Table 5-18 Extra Detail of Port Configuration Screen Parameters (Continued)




03Iss

DSR control Note: Applicable to ports 0,1, 8 and 9.emulation - DSR output is controlled based on the DSR

emulation configuration.alwaysAssert - DSR output is always asserted independent

of other conditions or configurations.alwaysNegate - DSR output is always negated independent

of other conditions or configurations.notApplicable - Selected for ports 2-7 and 10-15 which do

not support DSR.

Immediate

DCD Control / Usage Note 1: This parameter only applies to 02 Revision Hardware (and higher) as per LIM Hardware Version on the LCE-16 LIM Info screen.

Note 2: Applicable to ports 0,1, 8 and 9.emulation - DCD output is controlled based on the DCD

emulation configuration.†

alwaysAssert - DCD output is always asserted independent of other conditions or configurations.†

alwaysNegate - DCD output is always negated independent of other conditions or configurations.†

transportDCD - Selected for ports 0, 1, 8 or 9 to transport DCD through the ATM network to the far end. DCD is an input for this selection.‡

useDCDinput - Future use option for ports 0, 1, 8 and 9.‡notApplicable - Selected for ports 2-7 and 10-15 which do

not support DCD.

Immediate

Async overspeed The percentage by which the nominal clock rate should be speeded up. Not all overspeed settings apply to all async baud rates. Possible values are none, onePointSevenPercent,

threePointFourPercent, fivePointThreePercent, sevenPointOnePercent. The default value is none .

Note: For details see Table 5-19 and Table 5-20.

Immediate

Reset Perf Counters Used to reset counters in the port performance table. Possible values are yes and no . The default value for this object is no .Note: The value reverts back to no after the reset action is

complete.

Immediate

Table 5-18

† When in synchronous mode, the Clock Mode parameter must be set to one of the DCE options.‡ When in synchronous mode, the Clock Mode parameter must be set to one of the DTE options.

Table 5-19 Async Overspeed

Over Speed Values Clock Rate

onePointSevenPercent nominal + 1.7%

threePointFourPercent nominal + 3.4%

fivePointThreePercent nominal + 5.3%

sevenPointOnePercent nominal + 7.1%

Table 5-19

Table 5-18 Extra Detail of Port Configuration Screen Parameters (Continued)




Figure 5-18 DTE3 Xedge Not Providing Timing

Table 5-20 Nominal Baud Rate

Nominal Baud Rate +1.7% +3.4% +5.3% +7.1%

75 yes yes yes yes

150 yes yes yes yes

300 yes yes yes yes

1200 yes yes yes yes



7200 no no yes no


19200 no yes no yes

28800 no no yes no

33600 no no no yes

38400 no no no yes

57600 no no no no

Table 5-20

ETTD

TT

RT

RD

RTRD

ET

TD

S H IFT S H IFT

S H IFT S H IFT

D

D

Q

Q

X edgeD C E

C R O S S O V E R

X edge loop tim es on TT

ETTD

TT

RT

RD

RTRD

ET

TD

S H IFTS H IFT

S H IFTS H IFT

D

D

Q

Q

X edge D C E

C R O S S O V E R

X edge loop tim es on TTNote: The LCE-16 is always DCE (i.e. RD, pins 3 and 16 are outputs). To interface to DCE, a cross-over cable is required and wired as follows:

From:To:TDRDRDTDTTTT



03Iss

Figure 5-19 DTE1 Xedge Network Providing Timing

Figure 5-20 DCE1 Xedge Network Providing Timing

ETTD

TT

R T

R D

R TR D

E T

T D

SH IFT S H IFT

SH IFT S H IFT

D

D

Q

Q

X edgeDC E

C RO S S O V E R

D C E m ust “loop” tim e on E T

E TT D

TT

R T

R D

R TR D

E T

T D

S H IFTSH IFT

S H IFTSH IFT

D

D

Q

Q

X edge D C E

C R O S S O V ER

D CE m ust “loop” tim e on ET

Note: The LCE-16 is always DCE (i.e. RD, pins 3 and 16 are outputs). To interface to DCE, a cross-over cable is required and wired as follows:

From:To:TDRDRDTDTTTT

TT

TD

RT

RD

S H IFT S H IFT

S H IFT S H IFTQ

Q

D

D

X edgeD TE

D TE doesn ’t support E T

D C E

TTTD

RT

RD

SH IFTSH IFT

SH IFTSH IFTQ

Q

D

D

X edge D TE

DTE doesn ’t support E T

D C E



Figure 5-21 DCE2 Xedge Network Providing Timing

Figure 5-22 DCE3 Xedge Not Providing Timing

T D

R D

R T

SH IFT S H IFT

SH IFT S H IFTQ

Q D

X edgeDTE

D TE supports ET

D

T T

E T

T D

R D

R T

SH IFTS H IFT

SH IFTS H IFTQ

QD

X edge D TE

D TE supports E T

D

TT

E T

S H IFT S H IF T

S H IFT S H IF TQ

Q D

X ed geD T E

D

Tim ing provided by ET

Xedge loop times on ET. TT is driven by Xedge, but not used.

ET

TD

RD

RT

S H IF TS H IF T

S H IF TS H IF TQ

QD

X edg e D T E

D

Tim ing provided by ET

ET

TD

RD

RT

Xedge loop times on ET. TT is driven by Xedge, but not used.



03Iss

Port Performance Screen

The Extra detail of the Port Performance screen is shown in Figure 5-23. The parameters for thisscreen are described in Table 5-21.

Figure 5-23 Extra Detail of Port Performance Screen

Table 5-21 Extra Detail of Port Performance Screen Parameters



Port Status The actual status of the link, up if the link is enabled and has no problem, down if enabled but has problem, and disabled if user has disabled the link. Possible values are up, down and disabled .

Read Only

Rx Bytes Total number of bytes received, including any errored bytes. Read Only

Rx Err Bytes Total number of bytes with parity error received. This counter is relevant only if parity is enabled.

Read Only

Rx Overflows The number of times an overflow condition was encountered at the receiver.

Read Only

Tx Bytes Total number of bytes transmitted. Read Only

Tx Overflows Total number of bytes lost due to overflow of queues. Read Only

Tx Underflows Total number of times a transmit underflow condition occurred. This value is relevant only for SYNC configuration.

Read Only


GD: ACP II: Slot 6 SYS Port Performance SW VersionDetail of Port Performance entry 0

Port Status : up Rx Bytes : 58561568 Rx Err Bytes : 0 Rx Overflows : 0 Tx Bytes : 58561536 Tx Overflows : 0 Tx Underflows : 0 RTS State : asserted CTS State : notApplicable DTR State : asserted DSR State : asserted DCD State : notApplicable




RTS State Note 1: This parameter is applicable to links 0, 1, 8 and 9 only.

Note 2: 01 Revision Hardware (as per LIM Hardware Version on the LCE-16 LIM Info screen) will always indicate asserted .

State of the RTS line. Possible values are asserted , negated, and notApplicable .

Read Only

CTS State State of the CTS line. Possible values are asserted , negated, notApplicable. Note: This object is applicable to links 0, 1, 8 and 9 only.

Read Only

DTR State State of the DTR line. Possible values are asserted , negated, and notApplicable . Note: This object is applicable to links 0, 1, 8 and 9 only.

Read Only

DSR State State of the DSR line. Possible values are asserted , negated, and notApplicable . Note: This object is applicable to links 0, 1, 8 and 9 only.

Read Only

DCD State Note 1: This parameter is applicable to 02 Revision Hardware (and higher) as per LIM Hardware Version on the LCE-16 LIM Info screen.

State of the DCD line. Possible values are asserted , negated, and notApplicable . Note 2: This object is applicable to links 0, 1, 8 and 9 only.

Read Only

Table 5-21

Table 5-21 Extra Detail of Port Performance Screen Parameters (Continued)




03Iss

n

Port Alarms Screen

The Extra detail of the Port Alarms screen is shown in Figure 5-25. The parameters for this screeare described in Table 5-22.

Figure 5-24 Extra Detail of Port Alarms Screen

Table 5-22 Extra Detail of Port Alarms Screen Parameters



LOS Defect Loss of Signal Defect. Declared when no data/clock is received for 10 milliseconds or longer. Cleared when valid data/clock, is received for 100 milliseconds. Applies to synchronous link configurations that use the clock received from the link only. Possible values are inactive , and active .

Read Only

LOS Failure Loss of Signal Failure. Declared when Loss of Signal Defect is declared for at least 2.5 +/- 0.5 seconds. Cleared when Loss of Signal Defect is absent for 10 +/- 0.5 seconds. Applies to synchronous link configurations that use the clock received from the link only. Possible values are inactive , and active .

Example: As in DTE3, DTE1, DCE2, DCE3 network timing.Note: See Figure 5-18, Figure 5-19, Figure 5-21, and Figure

5-22.

Read Only


GD: ACP II: Slot 6 SYS Port Alarms SW VersionDetail of Port Alarms entry 0

LOS Defect : inactive LOS Failure : inactive Spacing Rest Defect : inactive Spacing Rest Failure : inactive




Port Diagnostics Screen

The Extra detail of the Port Diagnostics screen is shown in Figure 5-25. The parameters for thisscreen are described in Table 5-24.

Figure 5-25 Extra Detail of Port Diagnostics Screen

Spacing Rest Defect Spacing Rest Defect. Declared when an ASYNC input is at the Space level for 1 second. Cleared when normal ASYNC input condition exists for more than 10 seconds. Possible values are inactive , and active .

Read Only

Spacing Rest Failure Spacing Rest Failure. Declared when an ASYNC input is at the Space level for 2.5 seconds. Cleared when normal ASYNC input condition exists for more than 25 seconds.Possible values are inactive , and active .

Read Only

Table 5-22

Table 5-22 Extra Detail of Port Alarms Screen Parameters (Continued)



GD: ACP II: Slot 6 SYS Port Diagnostics SW VersionDetail of Port Diagnostics entry 0

0 Seconds Remaining : 01 Loop Towards cable? : disabled2 Loop Toward ATM Side? : disabled3 Force CTS? : none4 Force DSR? : none5 Force DCD? : none6 Force Break (Space)? : forceConstantly7 Run Diagnostics? : no




03Iss

Table 5-23 Extra Detail of Port Diagnostics Screen Parameters



Seconds Remaining Time Remaining (seconds) - This control/status parameter indicates how much time remains before the diagnostics action will be turned off. User sets this parameter to a nonzero value before starting the diagnostics action. The LIM software decrements this parameter as the diagnostics action is performed. Possible values are 0 through 604800 . The default value for this object is 0.

Immediate (requires Run Diagnostics? set to yes .

Loop Towards cable? Used to specify if loopback should be enabled on the line side. If enabled, the bit stream arriving from the line cable is looped back to the cable. Possible values for this object are disabled , and enabled . The default value is disabled .Note: See Figure 5-26.


Loop Toward ATM Side?

Used to specify if loopback should be enabled on the ATM side of the link. If enabled, the bit stream arriving from the emulation processor is looped back to the emulation processor instead of being sent out to the line. Possible values for this object are disabled , and enabled . The default value is disabled .Note: See Figure 5-26.


Force CTS? Note: For the 01 version LCE-16, this item is only configurable in the asynchronous mode. In the synchronous mode CTS is always asserted Applicable to ports 0,1, 8 and 9. There are no restrictions on other versions of the LCE-16 LIM.

Specifies whether to force the line labeled CTS. Possible values are assert, negate, and none . When set to none , no diagnostic action is performed on this signal. The default value is none .


Force DSR? Specifies whether to force the DSR line. Possible values are assert, negate, and none . When set to none , no diagnostic action is performed on this signal. Note: Applicable to links 0, 1, 8 and 9 only.

The default value is none .


Force DCD Note : This parameter only applies to 02 Revision Hardware (and higher) as per LIM Hardware Version on the LCE-16 LIM Info screen.Specifies whether to force the DCD line. Possible values are assert, negate, and none . When set to none , no diagnostic action is performed on this signal. Note: Applicable to links 0, 1, 8 and 9 only.





Figure 5-26 Line and Diagnostic-Line Loopbacks Supported by the LCE-16 LIM

Force Break (Space)?

Specifies whether to force BREAK on the ASYNC line. When set to force300ms , holds the transmit line in the

SPACE condition for 300 milliseconds. In this case the value of “Force Break (Space)?” reverts to none when the 300ms interval starts.

When set to forceConstantly, forces the transmit line to the SPACE condition and keeps it there until the diagnostic timer expires or the value none is written to “Force Break (Space)?”, whichever occurs first.

Possible values are force300ms, forceConstantly and none . The default value is none .


Run Diagnostics? Specifies whether to turn on the diagnostics. Reverts to no when done. Possible values are yes, and no . The default value is no .

Immediate

Table 5-23

Table 5-23 Extra Detail of Port Diagnostics Screen Parameters (Continued)


Controller LCE-16 LIM

LineEmulationATMVCC

LoopToward

ATM Side

cells

bytes

bits

cells

bytes

bits

LoopTowardCable Side

Port



03Iss

Emulation Configuration Screen

The Extra detail of the Emulation Configuration screen is shown in Figure 5-27. The parametersfor this screen are described in Table 5-24.

Figure 5-27 Extra Detail of Emulation Configuration Screen

Table 5-24 Extra Detail of Emulation Configuration Screen Parameters



Enabled? This variable is used to enable or disable the emulation function. Possible values are Enabled , and sleDisabled . The default value for this object is sleDisabled .Note: To pass data, this option must be set to Enabled

(along with Port Configuration Enabled? set to portEnabled ).

Immediate

VCC VPI The Virtual Path Identifier of the ATM VCC. Currently has a fixed value of 0.

Read Only

VCC VCI The Virtual Connection Identifier of the ATM VCC. Currently has a fixed value of 32+ link No .

Read Only


GD: ACP II: Slot 6 SYS Emulation Configuration SW VersionDetail of Emulation Configuration entry 0

Port Number : 00 Enabled? : sleEnabled VCC VPI : 0 VCC VCI : 321 Cell Fill Level : thirtyTwoBytes2 Max Forwarding Time (ms) : 100003 sleCTSconfig : notApplicable4 sleDSRconfig : notApplicable5 sleDCDconfig : notApplicable6 Tx Prestore Time (us) : 100007 Reset Perf Counters : no




Cell Fill Level The number of bytes of data in each cell. Applicable to SYNC link configuration only. Possible values are twoBytes, fourBytes, sixteenBytes, thirtyTwoBytes and maxBytes (max is currently 44, three bytes of the AAL1 payload is taken by the Serial Line Emulation overhead), with the additional restriction that it be greater than Baud Rate/(8*200) . This is because of the LIM’s design limitation of 200 cells per second in each direction per link. The default value is 44.

Immediate

Max Forwarding Time (ms)

The maximum inter-cell time when sending cells, independent of the number of bytes accumulated (must be nonzero byte count) in each cell. Possible values are 10 through 10,000 milliseconds, in multiples of 1 millisecond. Applies to the cell flow starting at the local LIM. Useful when emulating ASYNC lines. The default value is 10.

Immediate

Table 5-24 Extra Detail of Emulation Configuration Screen Parameters (Continued)




03Iss

sleCTSconfig Note: CTS control in the local port configuration must be set to emulation. On version 01 hardware (as per LIM Hardware Version on the LCE-16 LIM Info screen), this is only configurable in the asynchronous mode. In synchronous mode CTS output will be asserted when ever the LCE-16 is not in an initialization state.

copyRemoteRTS - Not available on 01 version hardware. RTS received at the remote end is mapped to this output. RTSusage in the remote port configuration must be set to transportRTS.

copyRemoteDTR - DTR received at the remote end is mapped to this output. DTRusage in the remote port configuration must be set to use transportDTR.

copyRemoteDCD - Not available on 01 version hardware. DCD received at the remote end is mapped to this output. DCD Control / Usage in the remote port configuration must be set to use transportDCD.

copyLocalRTS - Not available on 01 version hardware. RTS received locally is mapped to this output. RTSusage in the local port configuration must be set to transportRTS.

copyLocalDTR - DTR received locally is mapped to this output. DTRusage in the local port configuration must be set to transportDTR.

copyLocalDCD - Not available on 01 version hardware. DCD received locally is mapped to this output. DCD Control / Usage in the local port configuration must be set to transportDCD.

copyRTSecho - Not available on 01 version hardware. RTS received locally and looped back by the remote end is mapped to this output. RTSusage in the local port configuration must be set to ignoreRTS.

copyDTRecho - DTR received locally and looped back by the remote end is mapped to this output. DTRusage in the local port configuration must be set to transportDCD.

copyDCDecho - Not available on 01 version hardware. DCD received locally and looped back by the remote end is mapped to this output. DCD Control / Usage in the local port configuration must be set to transportDCD.

notApplicable - Selected for ports 2 through 7 and 10 through 15 which do not support CTS.

Immediate





sleDSRconfig DSR control in the local port configuration must be set to emulation.


copyRemoteDTR - DTR received at the remote end is mapped to this output. DTRusage in the remote port configuration must be set to transportDTR.

copyRemoteDCD - Not available on 01 version hardware. DCD received at the remote end is mapped to this output. DCD Control / Usage in the remote port configuration must be set to transportDCD.



copyLocalDCD - Not available on 01 version hardware. DCD received locally is mapped to this output. DCD Control / Usage in the local port configuration must be set to transportDCD.

copyRTSecho - Not available on 01 version hardware. RTS received locally and looped back by the remote end is mapped to this output. RTSusage in the local port configuration must be set to transportRTS.

copyDTRecho - DTR received locally and looped back by the remote end is mapped to this output. DTRusage in the local port configuration must be set to transportDTR.

copyDCDecho - Not available on 01 version hardware. DCD received locally and looped back by the remote end is mapped to this output. DCD Control / Usage in the local port configuration must be set to transportDCD.

notApplicable - Selected for ports 2 through 7 and 10 through 15 which do not support DSR.

Immediate





03Iss

sleDCDconfig Note: This parameter only applies to 02 Revision Hardware (and higher) as per LIM Hardware Version on the LCE-16 LIM Info screen. DCD control in the local port configuration must be set to emulation.


copyRemoteDTR - DTR received at the remote end is mapped to this output. DTRusage in the remote port configuration must be set to transportDTR.

copyRemoteDCD - Not available on 01 version hardware. DCD received at the remote end is mapped to this output. DCD Control / Usage in the remote port configuration must be set to transportDCD.



copyRTSecho - Not available on 01 version hardware. RTS received locally and looped back by the remote end is mapped to this output. RTSusage in the local port configuration must be set to transportRTS.

copyDTRecho - DTR received locally and looped back by the remote end is mapped to this output. DTRusage in the local port configuration must be set to transportDTR.

notApplicable - Selected for ports 2 through 7 and 10 through 15 which do not support DSR.

Immediate

Tx Prestore Time The number of microseconds to store data at the serial port’s transmitter before enabling the transmission. Only applicable when the serial port configuration is SYNC. The buffering is meant to smooth the effect of the cell-delay variation of the ATM network. If this value is too small, there is a danger of serial transmitter underflow. Possible values for this object are 0 through 10000

microseconds, in increments of 100 microseconds. The default value of this object is 1000 microseconds .

Immediate

Reset Perf Counters Used to reset counters in the emulation performance table. Use with care; has potential for confusion when multiple entities are observing the counters. Possible values are yes and no . The default value for this object is no . The value reverts back to no after the reset action is complete.

Immediate

Table 5-24





Emulation Performance Screen

The Extra detail of the Emulation Performance screen is shown in Figure 5-28. The parametersfor this screen are described in Table 5-25.

Figure 5-28 Extra Detail of Emulation Performance Screen

Table 5-25 Extra Detail of Emulation Performance Screen Parameters



Emulation State The status of the Serial Line Emulation. Possible values are emulationOff, and emulationUp .emulationOff indicates the emulation function is disabled for

this link. emulationUp indicates the emulation function is enabled for

this link.

Read Only

Rx Cells Number of cells created by the segmentation processor and sent to the other emulation end for this link.

Read Only

Tx Cells Number of cells received from the other emulation end for this link.

Read Only

Out of Seq Cells The number of cells received from the other emulation end that had a sequence number lower than cells already received. These cells are dropped.

Read Only

Bad Format Cells Number of cells received from the other emulation end that have an undecodable/unsupported format.

Read Only


GD: ACP II: Slot 6 SYS Emulation Performance SW VersionDetail of Emulation Performance entry 0

Emulation State : emulationOff Rx Cells : 0 Tx Cells : 0 Out of Seq Cells : 0 Bad Format Cells : 0 Seq Number Sent : 0 Seq Number Received : 0




03Iss

Emulation Diagnostics Screen

The Extra detail of the Emulation Diagnostics screen is shown in Figure 5-29. The parameters forthis screen are described in Table 5-26.

Figure 5-29 Extra Detail of Emulation Diagnostics Screen

Seq Number Sent The sequence number sent in the last cell transmitted, to the other emulation end.

Read Only

Seq Number Received

The sequence number in the last cell received. Read Only

Table 5-25

Table 5-25 Extra Detail of Emulation Performance Screen Parameters (Continued)



GD: ACP II: Slot 6 SYS Emulation Diagnostics SW VersionDetail of Emulation Diagnostics entry 0

0 Seconds Remaining : 01 Loop Towards Port : disabled2 Loop Towards ATM : disabled3 Force RTS To Remote : none4 Force DTR To Remote : none5 Force DCD To Remote : none6 Force ASYNC Break to Remote : none7 Run Diagnostics : no




Table 5-26 Extra Detail of Emulation Diagnostics Screen Parameters



Seconds Remaining Time Remaining (seconds) - This control/status parameter indicates how much time remains before the diagnostics action will be turned off. User sets this parameter to a nonzero value before starting the diagnostics action. The diagnostics software decrements this parameter as the diagnostics action is performed. Possible values are 0 through 604800 . The default value for this object is 0.

Immediate (requires Run Diagnostics?

set to yes .

Loop Towards Port Used to specify if Diagnostic LIM loopback should be enabled for this emulation link. If enabled, the cell stream arriving from the emulation processor is looped back to the emulation processor. Possible values for this object are disabled and enabled . The default value of this object is disabled .Note: See Figure 5-30.


set to yes .

Loop Towards ATM Used to specify if Diagnostic Controller loopback should be enabled for this emulation link. If enabled, the cells arriving from the slot controller are looped back to the slot controller. Possible values for this object are disabled and enabled . The default value of this object is disabled.Note: See Figure 5-30.


set to yes .

Force RTS To Remote

Specifies whether to force the RTS signal toward the ATM VCC. Applies to links 0, 1, 8 and 9 only. Possible values are assert, negate and none . When the value none is selected, no diagnostic action is performed and it follows the value of the local RTS line. The default value is none .


set to yes .

Force DTR To Remote

Specifies whether to force the DTR signal toward the ATM VCC. Applies to links 0, 1, 8 and 9 only. When the value none is selected, no diagnostic action is performed and it follows the value of the local DTR line. Possible values are assert, negate and none . The default value is none .


set to yes .

Force DCD To Remote

Note: This parameter only applies to 02 Revision Hardware (and higher) as per LIM Hardware Version on the LCE-16 LIM Info screen.

Specifies whether to force the DCD signal toward the ATM VCC. Applies to links 0, 1, 8 and 9 only. When the value none is selected, no diagnostic action is performed and it follows the value of the local DCD line. Possible values are assert, negate and none . The default value is none .


set to yes .



03Iss

Figure 5-30 Emulation Loopbacks Supported by the LCE-16 LIM

Force ASYNC Break to Remote

Specifies whether the ASYNC line’s break is to be forced toward the ATM VCC. Possible values are assert, negate and none . Use assert to attempt to force a 300 ms BREAK condition on

the remote end’s serial line transmit. When set to assert , the value automatically reverts to none after sending the BREAK command to the remote end.

The negate value has the effect of filtering out the BREAK condition from the emulation.

Use none to send the local break condition as-is to the remote end.



set to yes .

Run Diagnostics Specifies whether to turn on the diagnostics. Reverts to no when done. Possible values are yes, and no . The default value is no .

Immediate

Table 5-26

Table 5-26 Extra Detail of Emulation Diagnostics Screen Parameters (Continued)


Controller LCE-16 LIM

LineEm ulationATMVCC

ce llsbytes

ce llsbytes

b its

b its

LoopTow ard

ATM

LoopTow ardP ort

Port


03Iss

ociatedstics, Cell

2

3

4

Chapter 6: ACS Configuration

Chapter OverviewThis section describes how to configure and manage the ACS Cell Controller and its assLIMs. You can find status information in Chapter 5, ACS Status of the GDC Xedge DiagnoGuide, Part Number 032R500. You can find an overview and a list of features in Chapter 4Controllers of the GDC Xedge Switch Applications Overview, Part Number 032R300.



Define the LIM in Slot-0........................................................................................................ 6-


Configure the SDH Framer.................................................................................................... 6-6

Configuration Table Screen Parameters...........................................................................6-7

Configure the DSP DLIM.................................................................................................... 6-10

SONET/DELIM DLIM Config/Status Screen Parameters.............................................6-11

Configure the Low Priority Buffers..................................................................................... 6-12

Procedure .......................................................................................................................6-1


ACS Configuration Configuration Summary

trollertwork

tch via

Configuration SummaryTo configure the ACS Cell Controller you can use the menu system within the ACS Cell Conor the ProSphere Network Management System. For information on the ProSphere NeManagement System, refer to the ProSphere User Manual.

For the instructions that follow, it is assumed that you are connected to the GDC Xedge swia VT-100 terminal and the management port.

To configure the ACS ATM Interface, you need to perform the following procedures:

• Define the LIM in Slot-0

• Configure the SDH Framer

• Configure the DSP DLIM

• Configure the Low Priority Buffers

Once you have completed these procedures, refer to Chapter 16: Bandwidth Allocationand Reservation, and Chapter 17: Configuring Connections for instructions on how to configurePVCs and SPVCs.


ACS Configuration Define the LIM in Slot-0

03Iss

S Cellelect

en

Define the LIM in Slot-0The Slot-0 Controller sends a health check signal that detects the presence of the ACController in the installed slot. Before you can configure the ACS Cell Controller, you must sthe appropriate DLIM type in the Slot-0 Physical Layout.




4. Select Goto row, type the number of the slot in which the ACS Cell Controller is installed thpress the Enter key.

5. Select Extra detail . The Physical Layout, Detail of Physical Layout entry “X” appears asshown in Figure 6-1. The screen parameters are described in Physical Layout ScreenParameters on page 6-4.

6. At the Select option: prompt, select the DLIM Type option and press the Enter key.

7. From the list of DLIMs displayed, select:

• dsolim for any of the optical LIMs such as the; DSLIM, DMLIM, DHLIM, LDSLIM, orLDHLIM.

• delim for the DELIM (electrical STS-3c/STM-1 LIM).




11. Proceed to Configure the SDH Framer on page 6-6.



IMs

Figure 6-1 Detail of Physical Layout


The Physical Layout screen allows you to view and set parameters for Slot Controllers and Lin the Slot-0 Physical Layout. These parameters are defined in Table 6-1. The default values areindicated by d.

Table 6-1 Physical Layout Parameter Definitions




Immediate

Type When the Slot Controller has been installed, the application code has booted and is running, and the config update has been passed to the Slot-0 Controller, the Type field identifies the type of Slot Controller installed in the slot. In this case, the Slot Controller is recognized as a type dv2as .

NA, read only

DLIM Type Enables you to specify the LIM type that is installed from a list of possible LIMs. For the ACS Slot Controller, the supported LIMs are:L - dsolim : Select this option for any of the optical LIMs (DSLIM,

DMLIM, DHLIM, LDSLIM, LDHLIM).Z - delim : Select this option for the DELIM.

Immediate

Version Indicates the version of application software running on the ACS Cell Controller.

NA, read only



Switch Name: Slot 0 SYS Physical Layout New EventDetail of Physical Layout entry x

Slot No : 8 DOC Ser # : 07309901120 Name : Slot 08 DOC HW Ver : 0.0A Type : sdh Slot MAC Addres: 3838383838381 DLIM Type : dsolim Last State Chan: ( 0:00:42) Version : 51c9 Lst Chngd Link : link 1 State : active Lst Previous St: down2 Reset Slot : no3 Required State : normal Changed State : no4 Associated Slot: 0 slot0PhyLink0St: up slot0PhyLink1St: up slot0PhyLink2St: stop slot0PhyLink3St: stop Slot Ser # : 0730990112 Slot HW Ver : 0.0-Select option:Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row,Press ^J for extra help on this item, Summary, Up, eXit



03Iss

State Indicates the current state of the Slot Controller. The possible states are:absent : There is no Slot Controller in the slot or it has lost

communications.active : The full feature software has been loaded and is running.bootmode : The full feature software has not been loaded; the


NA, read only

Reset Slot Enables you to reset the slot. This is a warm restart of the slot. It is necessary when certain configuration changes are made to the slot such as a change in its IP address. The options are:yes : Type y to reset the slot.

nod: Type n to exit this option without resetting the slot.

Immediate

Required State Enables you to set the required state of the slot. The options are:A - normal d: This is the normal state required for running.B - shutdown : Select this option to stop the slot from running.C - main : not supportedD - shadow : not supported

Immediate


NA, read only


slot0PhyLink0St Indicates the current status of link 0. The possible states are:up : The Slot Controller and the LIM have been installed, the LIM

has been selected and recognized, and line coding is passing.down : Indicates an incomplete installation, selection of the wrong

LIM, or line coding is not passing.stop : Indicates that the port is disabled.

NA, read only


slot0PhyLink2St Will always indicate stop since the ACS does not support link 2. NA, read only

slot0PhyLink3St Will always indicate stop since the ACS does not support link 3. NA, read only


NA, read only


NA, read only


NA, read only


NA, read only


Immediate

Table 6-1 Physical Layout Parameter Definitions (Continued)




ACS Configuration Configure the SDH Framer

ell

it

Configure the SDH Framer1. From the Root Menu of the Slot-0 Controller, establish a telnet session with the ACS C

Controller. The Root Menu of the ACS Cell Controller appears.

2. From the Root Menu of the ACS Slot Controller, select Manage configuration. The MIBDisplay and Management screen appears.

3. Select the SDH Configuration/Status menu option and press the Enter key. The SDHConfiguration/Status screen appears.

4. Select the Configuration Table menu option and press the Enter key. The ConfigurationTable screen appears.

5. Select Extra detail. The Configuration Table, Detail of Configuration Table entry 0 screenappears as shown in Figure 6-2. The screen parameters are described in Configuration TableScreen Parameters on page 6-7

6. Select Loop Timing and press the Enter key. The default is no. At the (Y/N): prompt, selecteither yes (by typing a y ), or no (by typing an n),.

7. Select Scramble. The default is set to yes. You may have to change it to match your circuconditions.

8. Select 155.52Mbit/s or 51.84Mbit/s and press the Enter key.

9. Select oc 3.

10. Select Sonet/SDH and press the Enter key.

11. Select sonet, or sdh.

12. Select Reconfigure and press the Enter key.

13. At the Reconfigure: (Y/N) prompt, enter Y (yes) to send the changes to the LIM.

14. Select Down to transition to the Detail of Configuration Table entry 1 screen.

15. Repeat step 6 through step 13 for Detail of Configuration Table entry 1.

16. Select eXit twice to return to the MIB Display and Management screen. This completes theConfigure the SDH Framer procedure.

17. Proceed to Configure the DSP DLIM on page 6-10.

Note Only oc3 at 155.52Mbit/s is supported.



03Iss

SDH

DHpter 1,310.

Figure 6-2 Detail of Configuration Table for Entry 0

Configuration Table Screen Parameters

The Configuration Table screen allows you to view and set the parameters to configure the framer. These parameters are defined in Table 6-2. The default values are indicated by d. You canfind additional information on cell delineation (Cell Delineation on page 1-6), SONET/SDH (Sand SONET on page 1-20) and scrambling (Cell Payload Scrambling on page 1-7) in ChaSwitch Functionof the GDC Xedge Switch Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R


Switch Name:Slot x SYS Configuration Table SW VersionDetail of Configuration Table entry 0

Link No : 000 Enable : yes01 Loop Timing : no02 Diagnostic Loopback : no03 Line Loopback : no04 Scramble : yes05 XOR With 0x55 : yes06 Sonet/SDH : sonet07 Clear Counts : no08 Reconfigure : no09 Loopback Timeout : 110 155.52Mbit/s or 51.84Mbit/s : oc 311 APS On/Off : off12 Idle Cell : unassigned

Select option:Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row, Index Search, SummaryeXit



Table 6-2 Configuration Table Parameter Definitions


Link No Displays the number of the link for which the extra detail is being shown.

NA, read only

Enable Sets/indicates the link as being enabled or disabled:yesd: Type y to enable the link.no : Type n to disable the link.

Immediate

Loop Timing Enables/indicates the setting of loop timing for the link. The options are:yes : Type y to set loop timing for the link.

nod: Type n to not set loop timing.

Immediate

Diagnostic Loopback

Enables/indicates the setting of the diagnostic loopback for the link. The options are:yes : Type y to set the diagnostic loopback for the link.

nod: Type n to not set the diagnostic loopback.

Immediate

Line Loopback Enables/indicates the setting of the line loopback for the link. The options are:yes : Type y to set the line loopback for the link.

nod: Type n to not set the line loopback.

Immediate

Scramble Enables/indicates the setting of the scrambler for the link:

yesd: Type y to enable the scrambler for the link.no : Type n to disable the scrambler.

The scrambler is self-synchronizing and uses a polynomial of x43+1 to scramble the ATM cell payload. If enabled, it performs scrambling for both transmission and reception.

Reconfigure

XOR With 0x55 Enables/indicates the exclusive ORing of a fixed 0x55 pattern with the data in the header field of the ATM cell header before transmission to assist with cell delineation. The options are:

yesd: Type y to enable XORing.no : Type n to disable XORing.

Reconfigure


SWITCHLIMSDHInterface

To/FromLine

Diagnostic Loopback Mode

SWITCHLIMSDHInterface

To/FromLine

Line Loopback Mode



03Iss

155.52 Mbit/s or 51.84Mbit/s

Enables/indicates the setting of the bit stream as either OC 3 (155.52Mbit/s) or OC 1 (51.84Mbit/s). The options are:

A - oc 3d: 155.52Mbit/sB - oc 1 : 51.84Mbit/s; not supported

Reconfigure

Sonet/SDH Enables/indicates the setting of the link as either sonet or sdh . The options are:

A - sonet d: Sets the ACS to use the SONET header (North American standard).

B - sdh : Sets the ACS to use the SDH header (European standard).

Reconfigure

APS On/Off Enables/indicates the use of the sdh Automatic Protection Switching (APS).This feature is not supported.

NA

Clear Counts Enables the clearing of the performance monitoring counters:yes : Type y to clear the counters.nod: Type n to exit this option without clearing the counters.

Immediate

Reconfigure Resets the ACS Cell Controller with the current parameter values:yes : Type y to reconfigure the ACP.


Immediate

Loopback Timeout

Enables setting the length of time a loopback will stay up before being automatically reset.

Range is (1d - 604800) minutes.

Immediate

Idle Cell Sets/indicates which type of cell is to be inserted when there are no cells pending for transmission. The options are:A - unassigned d: (CLP=0, used according to ATM Forum

Specification)B - idle : (CLP=1, used according to ITU Specification).

Reconfigure

Table 6-2 Configuration Table Parameter Definitions (Continued)




ACS Configuration Configure the DSP DLIM

he

Configure the DSP DLIM


2. Select the SONET/DELIM DLIM Config/Status menu option and press the Enter key. TSONET/DELIM DLIM Config/Status screen appears.

3. Select Extra detail. The Detail of SONET/DELIM DLIM Config/Status entry 0 screenappears as shown in Figure 6-3. The screen parameters are described in SONET/DELIMDLIM Config/Status Screen Parameters on page 6-11.

4. Select LIM Description and press the Enter key.

5. Select the alpha character for the SONET LIM type installed. The options are:

• B - DSLIM• H - DHLIM

• D - DMLIM• I - LDHLIM

• F - LDSLIM• J - DELIM

6. Select Reconfigure and press the Enter key.



9. Select Save. This completes the Configure the DSP LIM procedure.


Figure 6-3 Extra Detail of SONET/DELIM DLIM Config/Status


Switch Name:Slot x SYS SONET/DELIM DLIM Config/Status SW VersionDetail of SONET/DELIM DLIM Config/Status entry x

Index : 0 Version : solim v10 Timing Reference : system1 Link 0 TX Enable : yes2 Link 1 TX Enable : yes3 LIM Description : dual intermediate reach4 Reconfigure : no

Select option:Enter entry number to edit, Summary, eXit


ACS Configuration Configure the DSP DLIM

03Iss

to

SONET/DELIM DLIM Config/Status Screen Parameters

The SONET/DELIM DLIM Config/Status screen allows you to view and set the parametersconfigure the SONET DLIM. These parameters are defined in Table 6-3. The default values areindicated by d.

Table 6-3 SONET/DELIM DLIM Config/Status Parameter Definitions


Index There is only one entity selectable in this screen, therefore the index will always report 0.

NA

Version Reports the current version as solim v0 . NA, read only

Timing Reference

Enables/indicates the setting of the timing source for the LIM. The options are:A - systemB - local oscillatord

C - local link0D - local link1

Immediate

Link 0 TX Enable Sets/indicates Link-0 as enabled or disabled:

yesd: Type y to enable the link.no : Type n to disable the link.

Immediate

Link 1 TX Enable Sets/indicates Link-1 as enabled or disabled:

yesd: Type y to enable the link.no : Type n to disable the link.

Immediate

LIM Description Sets/indicates the LIM as one of the following:A - pre system timingB - dual intermediate reach: DSLIMD - dual short reach: DMLIMF - dual long reach: LDSLIMH - dual hybrid intermediate: DHLIMI - dual hybrid long: LDHLIMJ - dual electrical: DELIM

Immediate

Reconfigure Resets the ACS Cell Controller with the current parameter values:yes : Type y to reconfigure the ACS.

nod: Type n to exit this option without reconfiguring the ACS.

Immediate

Table 6-3


ACS Configuration Configure the Low Priority Buffers

ress

r. The

rdsers toard

g EFCII. Youysical = 1

arded.ysical

thisome

efer to

Configure the Low Priority BuffersThe ACS Cell Controller offers four combinations of configurable, low priority ingress and egFIFO buffers. The four combinations of maximum physical buffer sizes are shown in Table 6-4.

The selection of the size of the buffers is set at the time you order the ACS Cell Controllebuffers are located on a daughter card (DOC) that is factory installed on the ACS.

In addition to the choice of low priority buffer size configurations, each low priority buffer affothe user the ability to set three threshold parameters to tailor the ACS Cell Controller buffmatch traffic profiles. The first parameter is the threshold at which EFCI (Explicit ForwCongestion Indication) is generated. EFCI tells the downstream node that the node originatinis approaching congestion. The Payload Type field being set to a value of 2 indicates EFCcan set the EFCI threshold in 1K cell increments, in the range of 0 - 63, up to the maximum phsize of the low priority buffer. It is important to note that for the purpose of this discussion, 1Kx 1024.

The second parameter is the threshold at which low priority traffic of CLP=1 begins to be discYou can set this threshold in 1K cell increments, in the range of 0 - 63, up to the maximum phsize of the low priority buffer.

The third parameter is the logical buffer size at which the buffer will work. You can setthreshold, in the range of 0 - 63, up to the maximum physical size of the low priority buffer. Sdiscussion of the ingress and egress buffers, both high and low priority, may be helpful. RFigure 6-4.

Table 6-4 Low Priority Buffer Configurations

Combination # Ingress Buffer Size Egress Buffer Size

1 4K cells 4K cells




Table 6-4



03Iss

ighdelay

ane low-out)fic

ned in

in toibleeginille low

Figure 6-4 Example of ACS Cell Controller “wrapping” the Switch Fabric

The ACS routes high priority traffic (CBR and rtVBR) through the high priority buffers. The hpriority buffer size is 63 cells. High priority traffic is expected to pass through with near-zero and with near-zero buffering.

Low priority traffic (nrtVBR and UBR) shares the cell stream with the high priority traffic on“as available” basis. As the high priority traffic increases, it may become necessary for thpriority traffic to be buffered until bandwidth becomes available. These are FIFO (first-in-firstbuffers. How long the first in low priority cell will be held is a function of the high priority trafprofile.

In Figure 6-4, the three threshold parameters of the low priority egress buffer are set as defiTable 6-5.

As the high priority traffic begins to peak, you can expect that the low priority buffer will begfill. When the buffer fills to 26K cells, the ACS will send EFCI downstream indicating the possonset of congestion. Should the buffer fill to 32K cells, the setting for CLP=1, the ACS will bto discard newly arriving low priority cells with CLP=1. Low priority cells with CLP=0 woverflow above the 32K cell threshold and will not begin to be discarded unless and until thpriority buffer fills to its logical buffer size of 48K cells.

Table 6-5 Examples of Low Priority Egress Buffer Threshold Parameters


EFCI Set to 26K cells; the ACS will send EFCI downstream at this level.

CLP=1 Set to 32K cells; the ACS will discard low priority traffic of CLP=1 at this level.

Logical Buffer Size Set to 48K cells; the buffer will not operate above this level even though it has the physical capacity to do so.

Table 6-5

ATM Switch Fabric

High Priority

Low Priority

Link-0

Link-1

Link-0

Link-1

ACS Cell Controller ACS Cell Controller

63 0

CBRrtVBR

Cells

nrtVBRUBR

64K 0

High Priority

Low Priority

63 0

CBRrtVBR

Cells

nrtVBRUBR

64K 0

Ingress Egress

48K 32K 26K

LogicalBufferSize

CLP=1 EFCI

Input(Slot-0)

Output(Slot-0)



findd, the thente?” their

red

nter

its

As low priority buffering is increased, it becomes apparent that more low priority traffic will “space available” in the bit stream. The trade-off is delay. As the buffer size is increasepossible buffer time that a low priority cell may experience is increased. The questionbecomes, “How long of a cell delivery delay rate can the low priority traffic application toleraYou will have to experiment with the applications to determine tolerable buffer sizes andresultant delay rates.

Procedure

The following procedure assumes that you are in the MIB Display and Management screen of theACS Cell Controller.

1. Select the System Information menu option and press the Enter key. The SystemInformation screen appears.

2. Select the Link Table menu option and press the Enter key. The Link Table screen appears.

3. Select Extra detail. The Detail of Link Table entry 0 appears as shown in Figure 6-5. Thescreen parameters are described in Link Table Screen Parameters on page 6-15.


5. Select Down to transition to the Detail of Link Table entry 1 screen.

6. At the Select option: prompt, enter the option number of the item to be configured and ethe configuration changes.


8. Select Save. This completes the process of configuring the ACS Cell Controller withassociated LIM and low priority buffers.

9. Proceed to Chapter 16: Bandwidth Allocation and Reservation, and Chapter 17: ConfiguringConnections for configuring PVCs and SPVCs.



03Iss

iority

Figure 6-5 Extra Detail of Link Table for Entry 0

Link Table Screen Parameters

The Link Table screen allows you to view and set the parameters for the link and the low prbuffers. These parameters are defined in Table 6-6. The default values are indicated by d.

Table 6-6 Link Table Parameter Definitions


Link Displays the number of the link for which the extra detail is being shown, in this case, link 0. Note: To view the extra detail for link 1, select

Down .

NA, read only

Restart link Enables/indicates the restarting of the link. The options are:A - nod:Select this to exit this option without

restarting the link.B - restart . Select this to restart the link.Note: Restarting the link causes data disruption.

Immediate

State Indicates the current state of the link. The possible states are:up : the link is operationaldown : the link is non-operationalstop : the link has been disabledoff : the link control lines are down

NA, read only



Switch Name:Slot x SYS Link Table New EventDetail of Link Table entry 0

Link : 0 8 Tx Logic Buff S: 10 Restart link : no 9 Rx Logic Buff S: 1 State : up Tx LP FIFO Dept: 0 Transmit Cells : 375434 Rx LP FIFO Dept: 0 Receive Cells : 377564 Tx Mem Block ID: mem 64k Transmit Rate : 90 Rx Mem Block ID: mem 16k Receive Rate : 90 Max Transmit Ra: 108 Max Receive Rat: 1181 Reset Stats : no2 Clock Source : normal3 Reset Link Reso: no4 Tx LP FIFO CLP1: 05 Rx LP FIFO CLP1: 06 Tx LP FIFO EFCI: 07 Rx LP FIFO EFCI: 0Select option:Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row, Index search, Summary,eXit



Transmit Cells Reports the number of cells that have been sent from the switch fabric for transmission out of the link (LIM). Does not count idle, unassigned, or errored cells.

NA, read only

Receive Cells Reports the number of cells that have been received from the link (LIM) to be sent to the switch fabric. Does not count idle, unassigned, or errored cells.

NA, read only

Transmit Rate Reports the current rate at which cells are being sent to the TX FIFO buffer.

NA, read only

Receive Rate Reports the current rate at which cells are being received at the RX FIFO buffer.

NA, read only

Max Transmit Rate Reports the maximum rate at which cells can be sent to the TX FIFO buffer.

NA, read only

Max Receive Rate Reports the maximum rate at which cells can be received at the RX FIFO buffer.

NA, read only

Reset Stats Enables/indicates the resetting of the link statistics:yes : Type y to reset the statistics.

nod: Type n to exit this option without resetting the statistics.

Immediate

Clock Source Enables/indicates the setting of the clock source. The options are:

A - normal d

B - low qualityC - high qualityD - loop timedE - local

Link Restart

Reset Link Resource Enables/indicates the resetting of the link resources:yes : Type y to reset the link resources.

nod: Type n to exit this option without resetting the link resources.

Immediate

Tx LP FIFO CLP1 Discard Thresh

Enables/reports the level at which the egress low priority FIFO buffer threshold is set to begin discarding low priority traffic with CLP=1. The indicated range is [0-63] in 1000 cell increments;





Table 6-6 Link Table Parameter Definitions (Continued)





03Iss

Rx LP FIFO CLP1 Discard Thresh

Enables/reports the level at which the ingress low priority FIFO buffer threshold is set to begin discarding low priority traffic with CLP=1. The indicated range is [0-63] in 1000 cell increments;





Tx LP FIFO EFCI Thresh Enables/reports the level at which the egress low priority FIFO buffer EFCI level is set. The indicated range is [0-63] in 1000 cell increments;





Rx LP FIFO EFCI Thresh Enables/reports the level at which the ingress low priority FIFO buffer EFCI level is set. The indicated range is [0-63] in 1000 cell increments;





Tx Logic Buff S Enables/reports the maximum logical size setting of the egress low priority buffer. The indicated range is [0-63] in 1000 cell increments,

default = 1 . You should check the Tx Mem Block ID field to determine the maximum physical size of the egress FIFO buffer installed.

Note: A suggested value for this parameter is the maximum physical size of the Tx Mem Block ID.


Rx Logic Buff S Enables/reports the maximum logical size setting of the ingress low priority buffer. The indicated range is [0-63] in 1000 cell increments,

default = 1 . You should check the Rx Mem Block ID field to determine the maximum physical size of the ingress FIFO buffer installed.

Note: A suggested value for this parameter is the maximum physical size of the Rx Mem Block ID.


Tx LP FIFO Dept Reports the number of cells currently in the egress low priority buffer.

NA, read only






Rx LP FIFO Dept Reports the number of cells currently in the ingress low priority buffer.

NA, read only

Tx Mem Block ID Indicates the actual physical size of the egress low priority buffer installed on the DOC. The possible sizes are:mem 4kmem 16kmem 64k

NA, read only

Rx Mem Block ID Indicates the actual physical size of the ingress low priority buffer installed on the DOC. The possible sizes are:mem 4kmem 16kmem 64k

NA, read only





03Iss

n. Fordwares, sees,

nostics

2

3

7

9

2

Chapter 7: ECC Configuration

Chapter Overview

This chapter provides a step-by-step procedure to perform the basic ECC configuratioinstallation instructions and detailed specifications of the ECC and related LIMs, see the HarInstallation Guide, Part Number 032R440. For an overview of the ECC and a list of its featureECC Cell Controller on page 4-5 of the Applications Overview, Part Number 032R300. For statudiagnostic and performance monitoring information see Chapter 4, ECC Status of the DiagGuide, Part Number 032R500. This chapter contains the following topics:


Configure the 155 Series LIMs.............................................................................................. 7-3

Enable the Links...............................................................................................................7-

APS LIM Configuration...................................................................................................7-9

APS Group Configuration..............................................................................................7-12

APS Link Configuration.................................................................................................7-21

Configure the DSX1-IMA and E1-IMA LIMs.................................................................... 7-29

IMA Bandwidth ............................................................................................................ 7-29

IMA Group Limitations..................................................................................................7-29

Configure the E1-IMA LIM...........................................................................................7-29

Configure the DSX1-IMA LIM......................................................................................7-34

IMA Configuration.........................................................................................................7-3

Configure the Timing........................................................................................................... 7-4

Select the Master Transmit Timing Source....................................................................7-49

Select the Link Transmit Clock Source..........................................................................7-51

Configure Traffic Management........................................................................................... 7-53

Peak Rate Limit & UBR Reservation.............................................................................7-53

Adjustable UBR Buffer Size ........................................................................................ 7-57

Link Restriction Option ................................................................................................ 7-58

Additional Traffic Management Options.......................................................................7-59

Updating the LIM Software................................................................................................. 7-60

Managed VP Services.......................................................................................................... 7-6

MTS and VP Endpoint Configuration............................................................................7-62

Configure VP Service Category Queue............................................................................... 7-70


ECC Configuration Configuration Summary

C Cellt.

LIMs,

es as

dure is

Configuration SummaryThe Slot-0 Controller sends a health check signal that detects the presence of the ECController and its associated LIM and automatically adds them to the Slot-0 Physical Layou

For information on the software files required by the ECC slot controller and its associated refer to Table 2-1 on page 2-4 of Chapter 2: Software Installation.

The ECC may be referred to as "enh cell" or "E-Series" in the menu screens.

To complete the configuration of the ECC you need to perform the following procedurdescribed in this chapter:

• Configure the 155 Series LIMs

• Configure the DSX1-IMA and E1-IMA LIMs

• Configure the Timing

• Configure Traffic Management

• Configure Managed VP Services

This chapter also includes a procedure for loading software updates to the LIM. This procedescribed in Updating the LIM Software.

Note The ECC slot controller does not support redundant slot-0 system configurations.


ECC Configuration Configure the 155 Series LIMs

03Iss

s (7-

LIM

able

re

ECC

Configure the 155 Series LIMsThe ECC Cell Controller works in conjunction with one of three classes of 155 Series LIMLIMs total):

• 155M-APS LIM, 155I-APS LIM, 155L-APS LIM

• 155M-2 LIM, 155I-2 LIM, 155L-2 LIM

• 155E-2 LIM

By default the overhead type is set to SONET. If you are using SDH you will need to set thefor SDH in step 7 of the Enable the Links procedure.

If you are not configuring your LIM for APS (Automatic Protection Switching) you need to Enthe Links on your LIM (configuring APS automatically enables the links). Proceed to Enable theLinks on page 7-3 if you are not configuring APS.

If you want to configure your LIM for APS, as a minimum you need to perform the APS LIMConfiguration. In addition to this you can perform the APS Group Configuration on page 7-12, andAPS Link Configuration on page 7-21 procedures for your APS LIM. These procedures aoptional. Proceed to APS LIM Configuration on page 7-9 to begin the APS configuration.

Enable the Links

By default, ECC LIM links are disabled. You need to activate the links before you can use theCell Controller. Use the following procedure to enable the ECC links:

1. Establish a Telnet session with the ECC Cell Controller.

2. Select Manage Configuration from the ECC Root menu. The MIB Display andManagement screen appears as shown in Figure 7-39.

Figure 7-1 ECC MIB Display and Management Screen


Switch Name: Slot X SYS MIB Display and Management SW Version

00 system 54 Prefix Group01 interfaces 66 E-Series LIM Information02 at 67 Slot Controller Statistics03 ip 68 Managed VP Service04 icmp05 tcp06 udp07 snmp08 System Information12 Static Routing16 Virtual Circuit Status20 Billing Records24 SVC Configuration/Status40 OAM Configuration/Status41 ILMI Configuration/Status43 CAC Configuration53 Address GroupSelect option:Enter group number, save As, Load, Save, sTatus, eXit,Last save file is `/$/config.cfg'.



3. Select E-Series LIM Information from the MIB Display and Management screen. The E-Series LIM Information screen appears as shown in Figure 7-2.

Figure 7-2 E-Series LIM Information Screen

4. Select SONET/SDH LIM from the E-Series LIM Information screen. The SONET/SDHLIM screen appears as shown in Figure 7-3.

Figure 7-3 SONET/SDH LIM Screen


Slot Name: Slot X E-Series LIM Information SW Version

LIM ID: LIM Hardware Version: LIM Boot Version: LIM Firmware Version: LIM Software Version: Number of Ports: LIM Status: 0 Common LIM1 SONET/SDH LIM2 E1 LIM3 DS1 LIM



Switch Name: Slot X SYS SONET/SDH LIM SW Version 0 SONET/SDH Diagnostic Page1 SONET/SDH Performance Monitoring Page2 SONET/SDH Alarms Page3 SONET/SDH Link Configuration Page4 SONET Automatic Protection Switching (APS) Select option: Enter option number or eXit



03Iss

s

5. Select SONET/SDH Link Configuration Page from the SONET/SDH LIM screen. TheSONET/SDH Link Configuration Page screen appears as shown in Figure 7-4.

Figure 7-4 SONET/SDH LIM Link Configuration Page

6. Select Extra detail to start with Link-0 or use the Goto row command to select a specificLink (for this procedure we will start at Link-0). The Detail of SONET/SDH LinkConfiguration Page entry 0 screen appears as shown in Figure 7-5. The screen parameterare described in SONET/SDH Link Configuration Page Screen Parameters on page 7-8.


Switch Name: Slot X SYS SONET/SDH Link Configuration Page SW VersionNo Link # Link Config Link Status Tx Clk Source Tx Clk Src Used Scr Cell Payld

0 0 disabled disabled master timing master timing scrambled1 1 disabled disabled master timing master timing scrambled2 2 disabled disabled master timing master timing scrambled3 3 disabled disabled master timing master timing scrambled

Select option:Enter entry number to edit, Extra detail, Goto row, Index search,Right, eXit



Figure 7-5 Detail of SONET/SDH Link Configuration Page Entry 0 Screen

7. The default overhead type is sonet. If your line framing is SDH, select Overhead Type andthen select sdh at the prompt. The software will then return you to the Detail of SONET/SDHLink Configuration Page entry 0 screen.

8. Select Link Config . The software will prompt you for the Link Config as shown in Figure7-6. Type an A to enable the Link. The software will enable the Link and return to the Detailof SONET/SDH Link Configuration Page entry 0 screen.

Figure 7-6 Link Config Prompt


Switch Name: Slot X SYS SONET/SDH Link Configuration Page SW VersionDetail of SONET/SDH Link Configuration Page entry 0

Link # : 00 Link Config : disabled Link Status : disabled1 Tx Clk Source : master timing Tx Clk Src Used : master timing2 Scr Cell Payld : scrambled3 XOR 55 w/55H : enable4 Cell Rate Dcpl : unassigned cells5 Overhead Type : sonet



Switch Name: Slot X SYS SONET/SDH Link Configuration Page SW Version

A - enabledB - disabled

Link Config: B [disabled]



03Iss

te,
9. Use the Down command to display and access the next link (Link-1). Repeat step 7 to step 8
for this link. You can then use the Down command to access Link-2 and Link-3, if appropriaand repeat step 7 to step 8 for these links.

10. This completes the Link enabling procedure. Proceed to Configure the Timing on page 7-49.



SONET/SDH Link Configuration Page Screen Parameters

Table 7-1 SONET/SDH Link Configuration Page Screen Parameter Descriptions


Link # Indicates the number of the Link displayed. NA, read only

Link Config This parameter is used to enable or disable the link.Select enabled to enable the link.Select disabled to disable the link.

Immediate

Link Status Indicates the current status of the link.The possible states are:UP - The link is enabled and no failures are detected. DOWN - The link is enabled and one or more of the

following failures have been detected:LOS FailureLOF FailureAIS-L FailureAIS-P FailureLOP-P FailurePath Unequipped FailureSTS Payload Label Mismatch FailureLOCD

DISABLED - link is disabled at the request of the userNote: A link in the DOWN state will continue to function for OAM and timing purposes unless an AIS, LOS, or LOF Failure condition exists.

NA, read only

Tx Clk Source This parameter allows you to pick what timing source to use to drive the transmit data line for the link.The options are:Master Timing - This option indicates the link will use the master transmit timing source that is setup via the LIM timing option.Loop Timing - This option indicates that the link should use the extracted clock from the receive data stream as the transmit clock.

Immediate

Tx Clk Source Used Indicates what Transmit Timing Source is being used for the Selected Link.

NA, read only

SCR Cell Payload Scramble Cell Payload. Indicates that the 48 octet information field should be scrambled. A parallel implementation of a self synchronous scrambles is used. The Cell headers are always transmitted unscrambled. This option also forces the receiver to expect the Cell Payload to be scrambled in the same manner.The options are:scrambled - The ATM cell payload is scrambled using

the polynomialnot-scrambled - The ATM cell payload is not scrambled.

Immediate


x43

1+



03Iss

ation

f yout one LIM:

APS LIM Configuration

This procedure enables you to select how APS works on your LIM. You can find more informon APS in Automatic Protection Switching (APS) Channel on page 1-26 of Chapter 1, SwitchFunctionof the Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310.

You can configure your LIM so that APS is disabled, or you can configure the links for APS. Ihave a “quad” LIM you can enable APS on two logical links, or you can configure it so tha“link” has APS and the other does not. Use the following procedure to configure APS for your

1. Establish a Telnet session with the ECC Cell Controller.


XOR 55 w/55H Add Coset Poly (xor 55). Indicates that the coset polynomial should be added to the HCS octet prior to insertion in the synchronous payload envelope. This option forces the receiver to expect the HCS octet to have the coset polynomial added to it as well.The options are: enable - add the coset polynomial to the transmitted HCS octetdisable - do not add the coset polynomial to the transmitted HCS octet

Immediate

Cell Rate Dcpl Indicates how the unused cells should be filled. Fill with un-assigned cells or fill with idle cells.The options are:unassigned cells - fill unused cells with unassigned cells.idle cell s - fill unused cells with idle cells

Immediate

Overhead Type Selects the type of physical layer framing to and from the link. The options are:SONET - Select this option if the link is connected to SONET (Synchronous Optical NETwork).SDH - Select this option if the link is connected to SDH (Synchronous Digital Hierarchy).

Immediate

Table 7-1 SONET/SDH Link Configuration Page Screen Parameter Descriptions








4. Select SONET/SDH LIM from the E-Series LIM Information screen. The SONET/SDHLIM screen appears as shown in Figure 7-9.



00 system 54 Prefix Group01 interfaces 66 E-Series LIM Information02 at 67 Slot Controller Statistics03 ip 68 Managed VP Service04 icmp05 tcp06 udp07 snmp08 System Information12 Static Routing16 Virtual Circuit Status20 Billing Records24 SVC Configuration/Status40 OAM Configuration/Status41 ILMI Configuration/Status43 CAC Configuration53 Address GroupSelect option:Enter group number, save As, Load, Save, sTatus, Use, eXit,Last save file is `/$/config.cfg'.



LIM ID: sonet sdh oc3 quad short reach LIM Hardware Version: 1 LIM Boot Version: elb5.0a1 LIM Firmware Version: elf3.6 LIM Software Version: els5.0a1 Number of Ports: 4 LIM Status: operational0 Common LIM1 SONET/SDH LIM




03Iss

Figure 7-9 SONET/SDH LIM Screen

5. Select SONET Automatic Protection Switching (APS) from the SONET/SDH LIM screen.The Automatic Protection Switching screen appears as shown in Figure 7-10.

Figure 7-10 Automatic Protection Switching Screen

6. Select APS LIM Configuration from the Automatic Protection Switching screen. The Automatic Protection Switching prompt appears as shown in Figure 7-11.


Switch Name: Slot X SYS SONET/SDH LIM SW Version 0 SONET/SDH Diagnostic Page1 SONET/SDH Performance Monitoring Page2 SONET/SDH Alarms Page3 SONET/SDH Link Configuration Page4 SONET Automatic Protection Switching (APS) Select option: Enter option number or eXit


Switch Name: Slot X SYSET Automatic Protection Switching (APS) SW Version 0 APS LIM Configuration: aps1plus11 APS Group Configuration2 APS Alarms3 APS Link Configuration Select option: Enter option number or eXit



s

e Wait

Figure 7-11 Automatic Protection Switching (APS) Prompt Screen

7. At the APS LIM Configuration: prompt select the APS configuration for the LIM afollows:

If the LIM is a 155M-2, 155I-2, or 155L-2, select either:

• apsdiabled (APS disabled)

• aps1plus1 (one-plus-one).

If the LIM is a 155M-APS, 155I-APS, or 155L-APS, select either:

• apsdiabled (APS disabled)

• aps1plus1and1plus1 (one-plus-one and one-plus-one)

• aps1plus1andnone (one-plus-one and none)

8. The software returns you to the Automatic Protection Switching screen. This completes theAPS LIM Configuration procedure.

9. Proceed to either APS Group Configuration on page 7-12 (optional), or APS LinkConfiguration on page 7-21 (optional). Otherwise, proceed to Configure the Timing on page 7-49.

APS Group Configuration

This optional procedure enables you to select the Switching Mode, Directional Mode and thto Restore Period for your APS LIM.

Use the following procedure to configure the APS Group:

1. Select APS Group Configuration from the Automatic Protection Switching screen. TheAPS Group Configuration screen appears as shown in Figure 7-12.


Switch Name: Slot x SYSET Automatic Protection Switching (APS) SW Version

A - apsdisabledB - aps1plus1and1plus1C - aps1plus1andnone

APS LIM Configuration: A [apsdisabled]



03Iss

in

Figure 7-12 APS Group Configuration Summary Screen

2. Use the Extra detail command to display the Detail of APS Group Configuration entry 0(APS logical link-0) screen as shown in Figure 7-13. The screen parameters are describedAPS Group Configuration Screen Parameters on page 7-14.

Figure 7-13 Detail of APS Group Configuration Screen


Switch Name: Slot X SYS APS Group Configuration SW VersionNo APS Group Number Links in APS Group Switching Mode Actual Switching Mode

0 0 link0working nonrevertive revertive1 1 link1working nonrevertive revertive Select option: Enter entry number to edit, Extra detail, Goto row, Index search,Right, eXit


Switch Name: Slot X SYS APS Group Configuration SW VersionDetail of APS Group Configuration entry 0

APS Group Numbe: 0 Rvd K1 Con Code: norequest Links in APS Gr: link0working Rvd K1 Channel : nullchannel0 Switching Mode : nonrevertive Rvd K2 Channel : nullchannel Actual Switchin: revertive Rvd K2 Arch : oneplusone1 Directional Mod: unidirectional Rvd K2 Mode : unknown Actual Directio: bidirectional2 WTR Period : fiveminutes3 Lockout : no Actual Lockout : no State : disabled Time to Revert : 900 Xmt K1 Con Code: norequest Xmt K1 Channel : nullchannel Xmt K2 Channel : nullchannel Xmt K2 Arch : oneplusone Xmt K2 Mode : unknownSelect option: Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row, Index search, Summary,eXit



ve)

n

3. If you want to change the APS switching mode, select Switching Mode and enter the desiredAPS switching mode at the prompt.

4. If you want to change the APS directional mode, select Directional Mod and enter the desiredAPS switching mode at the prompt.

5. If you want to change the Wait to Restore Period, select WTR Period and enter the desiredperiod at the prompt (you cannot change this unless the switching mode is set to reverti

6. If you want to change the APS lockout, select Lockout and enter y to lockout APS fail-over orn to allow APS fail-over.

7. If you are configuring a “quad” LIM, use the Down command to transition to the detail screefor entry 1 (APS logical link-1).

8. Repeat step 3 through step 7 for entry 1 (APS logical link-1).

9. When you are finished, use the eXit command to return to the Automatic ProtectionSwitching screen.

10. This completes the APS Group Configuration procedure. If desired, proceed to APS LinkConfiguration on page 7-21 (this is optional). Otherwise proceed to Configure the Timing onpage 7-49.

APS Group Configuration Screen Parameters

Table 7-2 APS Group Configuration Screen Parameter Definitions

Parameter DefinitionTakes Effect

On

APS Group Numbe Indicates the displayed APS Group Number. NA, read only

Links in APS Gr Links in APS Protection Group.This parameter displays the links that comprise the APS protection group.The possible values are:link0 working - APS is disabled on Link-0.link1 working - APS is disabled on Link-1.link0 working and link0 protection - APS is enabled on Link-0.link1 working and link1 protection - APS is enabled on Link-1.

NA, read only




03Iss

Switching Mode This option specifies whether or not the traffic running on the protection link will be reverted back to the working link once the error or user command on the working link has been cleared and the WTR period has expired.The values you can select are:Revertive - the working link automatically will revert back from the protection link when the error on the working link has cleared and the WTR period has expired or when the user command is cleared.Nonrevertive - the working link will not revert back from the protection link once the error has cleared. WTR Period is ignored.While in nonrevertive mode, the working link will revert back from the protection link only as a result of an error on the protection link or user command to switch.

Immediate

Actual Switchin This parameter reports the actual switching mode that is currently running on the APS group.

NA, read only

Directional Mod Directional mode deals with whether or not the tail and head ends will cooperate during a fail over request. We recommend you set both ends of the fiber span to the same mode (both ends bidirectional or both ends unidirectional).The options are:Bidirectional Switching - local LTE and remote LTE negotiate

whether or not the receiver switch is on the protection link.Unidirectional Switching - In one-plus-one unidirectional, the

tail end switches the receiver from the working to protection link without regard to the head end. Unidirectional switching provides a minor advantage over bidirectional switching in that the protection link can handle a receiver failure from both nodes.

Immediate

Actual Directio This parameter reports the directional mode that is currently running on the APS group.If the local side has the APS Directional Mode set to bidirectional and the remote side is set to unidirectional , the Actual APS Directional Mode will be set to unidirectional .See Directional Mod for a description of the possible values.

NA, read only

WTR Period Wait to Restore Period. This option specifies the number of minutes to wait after an error has cleared on the working link before switching back from the protection link. The WTR Period is provided to avoid repeated fail-overs due to intermittent error conditions.The values you can select are: 0, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, and 12 minutesNote: 0 = disable (revert immediately)This option is not selectable if the Switching mode is set to NonRevertive .

Immediate



On




Lockout Lockout from Protection. This option prevents any of the working links from failing over to the protection link, regardless of the severity of the errors on the links. If a working link is on the protection link when lockout is issued, it is switched back to its working link.Note: You cannot issue this command if an APS error exists on the working link.Select yes to prevent fail-over.Select no to allow fail-over.

Immediate

Actual Lockout Actual Lockout from Protection. Indicates whether or not the lockout from protection is in effect.Note: The lockout will not take effect when an APS error exists on the working link (protection link failure, channel mismatch, protection switching byte failure, far-end protection switching failure or APS mode mismatch failure).The possible values are: yesno

NA, read only



On




03Iss

State This parameter reports the state of the APS protection group. For bidirectional configurations, it shows the state of both LTE’s. For unidirectional configurations, it shows just the state of the local LTE. The possible states are:disabled - APS is disabled for this group.active - No errors or commands are currently active.requestfailover - Signal fail request, waiting for the remote to acknowledge.failover - working link that is switched over to protection.sfsdwait - wait 5 seconds after a SD/SF has cleared before reverting or entering DNR or WTR states.wtr - revertive APS that is waiting for the WTR timer to expire before restoring the linkdnr - A one-plus-one working link had a fail-over to the protection link but the cause of the failure has been fixed or the user command has been terminated. The working link does not revert back from protection because APS is configured for nonrevertive. revert - local LTE has requested that the remote LTE switch back to the working link from the protection link (this is a temporary state for bidirectional configurations only)requestlockout - local LTE is waiting for the remote LTE to acknowledge a lockout request (this is a temporary state for bidirectional APS only)lockout - local LTE has locked out all working links from the protection linkrequestexercise - local LTE is waiting for the remote LTE to acknowledge an exercise request (this is a temporary state for bidirectional APS only)Exercise - Exercise command is currently in effect on the protection linkrequestswitchfromprotection - local LTE has requested that the working link be removed from the protection link (via either a manual switch or a forced switch). This is a temporary state for bidirectional one-plus-one APS.switchfromprotection - a manual or forced switch from the protection link is in effect. For one-plus-one APS only.removefailoverrequest - temporary state. Remote LTE is requesting to failover to the working link. Local LTE should acknowledge the request with a reverse request and go to the remotefailover state.remotefailover - local LTE is entertaining a failover request from the remote LTE. For bidirectional APS only.

NA, read only



On




State(continued)

remotewtr - local LTE is entertaining a WTR command from the remote LTE. A working link is currently failed over to the protection link. For bidirectional APS only.remoterevert - local LTE is in the process of reverting a working link from the protection link as commanded by the remote LTE. For bidirectional APS only.remoteswitchfromprotection - the remote LTE has moved the working link from the protection link via either a manual or forced switch that has been issued on the protection link. For bidirectional APS only.remotelockout - the local LTE is currently entertaining a lockout request from the remote LTE. For bidirectional APS only.remoteexercise - the local LTE is currently entertaining an exercise request from the remote LTE. For bidirectional APS only. remotednr - the bidirectional local LTE is currently entertaining a DNR request from the remote LTE.protectionlinkerror - signal fail, signal degrade, AIS, LOS, LOF on the protection link.channelmismatcherror - the channel number in the transmitted K1 does not match the channel number in the received K2. Indicates that the local and remote LTE's are out of sync.protectionswitchingbyteerror - K1 and K2 are not stable possibly due to a hardware error on the protection link.farendprotectionfailure - the remote LTE is indicates that there is a failure condition on the protection link. apsmodemismatch - the configuration of the local and remote LTE's do not match. Either the mode (bidirectional or unidirectional) or the APS type (1:n or one-plus-one) do not match between the two LTEs.protectiondegrade - A signal degradation is detected on the protection link.remoteprotectiondegrade - A remote LTE detected a signal degradation on a protection link.

NA, read only

Time to Revert Time to Revert indicates how much time (in seconds) is left before the revert of the protection to working link will actually occur. If this value is non-zero, then the link is configured for revertive switching mode and is currently waiting for the WTR timer to expire. Once a fail-over has occurred and the error condition is cleared then the “wait to revert” timer is started prior to reverting the protection link back to the working link. The displayed value indicates the time in seconds before the revert occurs.Note: If a link has its switching mode set to “non revertive” then Time to Revert is not functional.Time to revert is only non-zero on the tail end node.APS State should be WTR when Time to Revert is non-zero.

NA, read only



On




03Iss

Xmt K1 Con Code Transmitted Condition Code. The current APS request, transmitted in the K1 byte, to the remote LTE. A signal failure is either an AIS-L, LOS, LOF, or exceeding the Signal Failure Bit Error Rate as described in SF BER Threshold on page 7-22.The possible values are:Lockout - This state indicates the working link is locked out from using the protection link.Signal Fail High - This state indicates a protection link signal failure.Signal Fail Low - This state indicates a working link signal failure.Signal Deg High - This state indicates that a signal degradation is detected on the protection link (see SD BER Threshold on page 7-21).Signal Deg Low - This state indicates that a signal degradation is detected on the working link (see SD BER Threshold on page 7-21).Manual Switch - This state indicates a manual switch was invoked on either the working or protection link.Wait-to-Restore - The APS waits 5-minutes after a failure condition before transmitting a No Request or do not revert condition code.Reverse Request - The APS is configured for bidirectional and acknowledges a request from the tail end.No Request - This state indicates that there are no errors or user commands.do not revert - After a failure condition, APS maintains the receiver switch on the protection link until the user manually switches the receiver back to the working link.exercise - This state indicates that the user is invoking an exercise command.Not Valid - not supported

NA, read only

Xmt K1 Channel Transmitted K1 Channel Number. This parameter reports the current link number, transmitted in bits 5-8 of the K1 byte by the local LTE, that is being requested to be placed onto the protection link.The possible values are:null-channel - the remote LTE is not requesting that the working link be placed on the protection link.channel1 - local LTE is requesting that the working link be placed on the protection link.channel2 - local LTE is requesting a command that applies to the protection linkchannel3 through channel15 - are not currently supported

NA, read only



On




Xmt K2 Channel Transmitted K2 Channel Number. This parameter reports the current link number, transmitted in the K1 byte by the local LTE, that is being bridged onto the protection link.The possible values are:null-channel - no working link is currently bridged onto the protection linkchannel1 - local LTE is requesting that the working link be placed on the protection link.channel2 - local LTE is requesting requested a command that applies to the protection linkchannel3 through channel15 - are not currently supported

NA, read only

Xmt K2 Arch Transmitted K2 Type. This parameter reports the APS architecture transmitted by the local LTE in bit 5 of K2.The possible values are:1+1

NA, read only

Xmt K2 Mode Transmitted K2 Misc. Code. This parameter reports the current APS mode transmitted by the local LTE in bits 6-8 of K2.The possible values are:bidirectional unidirectional

NA, read only

Rvd K1 Con Code Received Condition Code. This parameter reports the current APS request, received in bits 1-4 of the K1 byte, from the remote LTE. A signal failure is either an AIS-L, LOS, LOF, or exceeding the Signal Failure Bit Error Rate as described in SF BER Threshold on page 7-22.The possible values are:Lockout - This state indicates the working link is locked out from using the protection link.Signal Fail High - This state indicates a high priority signal failure.Signal Fail Low - This state indicates a low priority signal failure.Signal Deg High - This state indicates that a signal degradation is detected (see SD BER Threshold on page 7-21).Signal Deg Low - This state indicates that a signal degradation is detected (see SD BER Threshold on page 7-21).Manual Switch - This state indicates a manual switch was invoked on either the working or protection link.Wait-to-Restore - The APS waits 5-minutes after a failure condition before transmitting a No Request or do not revert condition code.Reverse Request - The APS is configured for bidirectional and acknowledges a request from the tail end.No Request - This state indicates that there are no errors or user commands.do not revert - After a failure condition, APS maintains the receiver switch on the protection link until the user manually switches the receiver back to the working link.exercise - This state indicates that the user is invoking an exercise command.Not Valid - not supported

NA, read only



On




03Iss

grade.

e B2it slice

APS Link Configuration

SD BER Threshold

The SD BER Threshold is the bit error rate (BER) that will cause a fail-over due to signal de

Bit rate error is calculated by the using the bit-interleaved parity-24 (BIP-24) contained in thbytes from each STS-3C frame. The B2 bytes provide an even parity calculation for each bin the STS-3C frame. As a result, each STS-3 frame can have up to 24 parity errors.

Rvd K1 Channel Received K1 Channel Number.This parameter reports the current link number, received in bits 5-8 in the K1 byte from the remote LTE, that is being requested to be placed onto the protection link.The possible values are:null-channel - The remote LTE is not requesting that the working link be placed on the protection link.channel1 - The remote LTE is requesting that the working link be placed on the protection link.channel2 - The remote LTE is requesting requested a command that applies to the protection linkchannel3 through channel15 are not currently supported

NA, read only

Rvd K2 Channel Received K2 Channel Number. This parameter reports the current link number, received in bits 5-8 in the K1 byte from the remote LTE, that is bridged on the protection link.The possible values are:null-channel - The remote LTE is not requesting that the working link be placed on the protection link.channel1 - The remote LTE is requesting that the working link be placed on the protection link.channel2 - The remote LTE is requesting requested a command that applies to the protection link.channel3 through channel15 are not currently supported

NA, read only

Rvd K2 Arch Received K2 Type. This parameter reports the APS architecture from the remote LTE in bit 5 of K2.The possible values are:1+1

NA, read only

Rvd K2 Mode Received K2 Misc. Code. This parameter reports the APS mode received from the remote LTE in bits 6-8 of K2.The possible values are:bidirectional unidirectionalaisrdiunknown

NA, read only



On




th ofmpled0

ition takes

points

l.

section3 byte

s. The parityp to 24

clearmine anR clear

As shown in Table 7-3, the period of time over which BER is accumulated, as well as the lengtime it will take to clear the error, depends on the BER. For example, the line error rate is saover a 1 second interval to determine an error rate of . The line error rate is sampled over a 1second interval to determine when the has cleared.

If APS is configured for revertive switching and working link is recovering from an error condthen the WTR timeout is added to the clear interval when determining the amount of time itto revert a link from protection to working, once an error has been cleared.

You can set the BER Threshold to either , , , , or .

Although each link can have a different SD BER threshold, it is recommended that both endof an OC-3 span have the same values for SD BER.

SF BER Threshold

The SF BER Threshold is the bit error rate (BER) that will cause a fail-over due to signal fai

The APS SF BER measures the BER as based on the line BIP-24 bytes in the link overheadof the SONET frame. The EBER threshold, specified in the link alarm page, is based on the B(the BIP-8 error rate associated with the path overhead section of the SONET frame).

The BIP-24 code in the line overhead section of the STS-3C frame is contained in the B2 byteB2 bytes are generated by the transmitting equipment such that they provide an evencalculation for each bit slice in the STS-3C payload. As a result, STS-3C frame can have uparity errors.

The period of time over which BER is accumulated, as well as the length of time it will take tothe error, depends on the BER. For example, it takes .008 seconds of sample time to detererror rate of and .013-seconds to determine that the error rate has lowered below the BEthreshold.

Table 7-3 SD BER Values and Effects

BER Threshold BER Accumulation Interval (in seconds) BER Clear Interval (in seconds)

.100 1.000

1.000 10.000

10.000 83.000

83.000 667.000

667.000 5000.000

Table 7-3

Note The SD BER threshold must be greater than the SF BER threshold.

10 6–

10 6–

10 5–

10 6–

10 7–

10 8–

10 9–

10 5– 10 6– 10 7– 10 8– 10 9–

10 3–



03Iss

te and APS

in

You can set the SF BER Threshold to either , , or .

The APS Link Configuration Screen enables you to set the Signal Degradation Bit Error RaSignal Failure Bit Error Rate thresholds. Additionally you can manually switch between theworking and protection link and/or exercise the APS protocol.

Use the following procedure to perform the optional APS Link Configuration procedure:

1. Select APS Link Configuration from the Automatic Protection Switching screen. The APSLink Configuration screen appears as shown in Figure 7-14.

Figure 7-14 APS Link Configuration Summary Screen

2. Use the Extra detail command to display the Detail of APS Link Configuration entry 0(APS logical link-0) screen as shown in Figure 7-15. The screen parameters are describedAPS Link Configuration Screen Parameters on page 7-25.

Table 7-4 SF BER Threshold Values and Effects

BER Threshold BER Accumulation Interval (in seconds) BER Clear Interval (in seconds)

.008 .013

.013 .100

.100 1.000

Table 7-4

Note The SD BER threshold must be less than the SF BER threshold.

10 3–

10 4–

10 5–

10 3– 10 4– 10 5–


Switch Name: Slot X SYS APS Link Configuration SW VersionNo Link Number Signal Degrade bit error rate Signal Fail bit error rate

0 0 tentominusfive tentominusthree1 1 tentominusfive tentominusthree2 2 tentominusfive tentominusthree3 3 tentominusfive tentominusthree Select option: Enter entry number to edit, Extra detail, Goto row, Index search,Right, eXit



s.

he

he

n

Figure 7-15 Detail of APS Link Configuration Screen

3. If you want to change the SD BER threshold, select Signal Degrade bit error rate and enterthe desired value at the prompt.

4. If you want to change the SF BER threshold, select Signal Fail bit error rate and enter thedesired value at the prompt.

5. Select Clear APS Commands and enter a y at the prompt if you want to clear all command

6. Select Forced Switch and enter a y at the prompt if you want to force a switch between tAPS working link and its corresponding protection link.

7. Select Manual Switch and enter a y at the prompt if you want to manually switch between tAPS working link and its corresponding protection link.

8. Select APS Exercise and enter a y at the prompt if you want to exercise the APS protocol.

9. If you are configuring a “quad” LIM, use the Down command to transition to the detail screefor entry 1, “link-0 (P).”

10. Repeat step 3 through step 9 for entry 1 (APS logical link-1).

11. This completes the Configure the LIM procedure. Proceed to Configure the Timing on page 7-49.


Switch Name: Slot X SYS APS Link Configuration SW VersionDetail of APS Link Configuration entry 0

Link Number : 00 Signal Degrade bit error rate : tentominusfive1 Signal Fail bit error rate : tentominusthree2 Clear APS Commands : no3 Forced Switch : no Actual Forced Switch : no4 Manual Switch : no Actual Manual Switch : no5 APS Exercise : no Actual APS Exercise : no Link State : failedover Signal Fail Condition : no Signal Fail Threshold Error : no Signal Degrade Threshold Error: no Select option: Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row, Index search, Summary,eXit



03Iss

APS Link Configuration Screen Parameters

Table 7-5 APS Link Configuration Screen Parameter Definitions


Link Number Indicates the link number of the displayed link. NA, read only

Signal Degrade bit error rate The bit error rate (BER) that will cause a fail over due to signal degrade. Although each link can have a different SD BER threshold, it is recommended that both endpoints of an OC-3C span have the same values for SD BER.Note: the SF BER threshold must be smaller than the SD BER threshold.See SD BER Threshold on page 7-21.

Immediate

Signal Fail bit error rate The bit error rate (BER) that will cause a fail over due to signal fail.Note: The SD BER threshold must be greater than the SF BER threshold (Signal Degrade bit error rate).See SF BER Threshold on page 7-22.

Immediate

Clear APS Commands This parameter clears all outstanding commands (lockout , force , manual , exercise ) on the APS link.Select yes to clear all outstanding commands.Select no to exit this option without clearing all outstanding commands.

Immediate

Forced Switch Switches the specified working link to the protection link (or the protection link back to the working link) unless there is one of the following conditions; a higher priority command, a higher priority force command or there is an failure outstanding on the protection link. Has higher priority than a manual switch, signal fail, and signal degrade.For revertive configurations, when the forced switch is turned off, the protection link will immediately revert back to the working link, unless there is a signal fail or signal degrade condition on the working link. There isn’t a WTR interval at the end of the forced switch. In the nonrevertive configuration, disabling the forced switch will leave the working link on the protection link unless there is an error or another forced or manual switch from protection to the working link.When a APS group lockout is in effect, this option is not functional.If the Forced Switch is preempted by a higher priority command (lockout from protection or forced switch from protection) then the Forced Switch will automatically be set to ‘no ’.Select yes to switch the specified working link to the protection link.Select no to revert (if revert is enabled).

Immediate




Actual Forced Switch Indicates if the Forced Switch actually took effect.The possible values are: no - indicates a forced switch did not occur.yes - indicates a forced switch did occur.

NA, read only

Manual Switch This parameter switches the working link to the protection link (or a protection link back to the working link), unless a command or error of equal or higher priority is in effect. Force switch , signal fail and signal degrade have higher priority than a manual switch .Select yes to switch the specified working link to the protection link.Select no to revert (if revert is enabled).Note: For revertive configurations, when the manual switch is turned off, the protection link will immediately revert back to the working link, unless there is a signal fail or signal degrade condition on the working link. There is not a WTR interval at the end of the manual switch.In the nonrevertive configuration, disabling the manual switch will keep the working link on the protection link unless there is an error or another forced or manual switch from protection to the working link.When a APS group lockout is in effect, this option is not functional.If a manual switch is prevented by a higher priority command (forced switch, lockout from protection, forced switch from protection or manual switch from protection) will result in the manual switch being set to no .

Immediate

Actual Manual Switch Indicates if the Manual Switch actually took effect.no - indicates a manual switch did not occur.yes - indicates a manual switch did occur.

NA, read only






03Iss

APS Exercise This parameter exercises the APS protocol and checks the responses to APS commands from the head end. If the protection link is already in use the exercise command has no effect. This is a continuous non-interfering exercise and it does not cause an APS switch.Select yes to exercise the APS protocol.Select no to exit this option without exercising the APS protocol.Note: 1+1 bidirectional - causes an exercise command to be sent to the remote LTE but has no impact on the local LTE. 1+1 unidirectional - no action required.When a APS group lockout is in effect, this option is not available.If the Exercise command is preempted by a higher priority command (lockout from protection, forced switch, manual switch, forced switch of protection link or manual switch of protection link), then Exercise will be set to no .

Immediate

Actual APS Exercise Indicates if the exercise command is in effect.no - indicates the exercise command is not in effect.yes - the exercise command is in effect.

NA, read only

Link State This parameter indicates the state of the APS link.The possible states are:disabled - APS is disabled on this link.working - Working link, no errorslockout - link has an error condition or APS user command but has not failed over to protection because of the lockout command issued, either locally or remotely, on the APS group.APS error - link has an error condition or APS user command but has not failed over to protection because of an APS defect or failure preventing the APS protocol from flowing from the local LTE to the remote LTE.failed over - Working link that has failed over to the protection linklockout - link is locked out from the protection linkprotection - Protection link, no working links have currently failed over.protection, in use - Protection link. One of the working links has failed over.

NA, read only






Signal Fail Condition This parameter indicates a signal fail condition because of a Loss of Signal , Loss of Frame , AIS or RDI is active on the link. no - indicates a signal fail condition is not present.yes - indicates a signal fail condition is present.Note: If there is a SF condition on a working link then the state of the APS group should be one of the following: pending , switched , bridged , switch+bridge or WTR.If there is a SF condition on a protection link then the state of the APS group should be Error .

NA, read only

Signal Fail Threshold Error This parameter indicates that the link bit error rate has passed the SF BER threshold. The SF threshold is specified the Link Configuration screen.no - indicates the link bit error rate has not passed the SF BER threshold.yes - link bit error rate has passed the SF BER threshold.Note: If there is a SF Threshold Error and this is a working link then the state of the APS group should be one either switch and bridge or lockout .If there is a SF Threshold Error and this is a protection link, then the state of the APS group should be error .

NA, read only

Signal Degrade Threshold Error This parameter indicates that the link bit error rate has passed the SD BER Threshold error rate. The SD threshold is specified in the APS Link Configuration screen.no - indicates the link bit error rate has not passed the SD BER Threshold error rate.yes - indicates the link bit error rate has passed the SD BER Threshold error rate.Note: If there is a SD Threshold Error, and this is a working link, then the Status of the link should be one either pending , failed over , or lockout .A SD threshold error has no effect on the protection link.

NA, read only





ECC Configuration Configure the DSX1-IMA and E1-IMA LIMs

03Iss

ller.ce

ks,e ATMross a

ultiple

ber

IMA

, IMAwidth,

e.

, IMAwidth,

e.

Configure the DSX1-IMA and E1-IMA LIMsTwo LIMs support ATM Inverse Multiplexing with the ECC slot controller -- the DSX1-IMA LIMand the E1-IMA LIM. Each provides a 16-link physical DS1 or E1 interface for the ECC controThe individual IMA LIMs comply with standard DS1 and E1 physical-layer interfaspecifications.

The IMA LIMs provide inverse multiplexing of an ATM cell stream over multiple physical linand reassemble the original stream at the far end from these links. In the transmit direction thcell stream received from the ATM layer is uniformly distributed on a cell-by-cell basis acmultiple links in IMA Group. The uniform distribution of cells to the IMA links is performed oncyclical, "round-robin" fashion. In the receive direction, the cells are reassembled from the mlinks into the original ATM layer stream.

• IMA Bandwidth

• IMA Group Limitations

• Configure the E1-IMA LIM

• Configure the DSX1-IMA LIM

• IMA Configuration

For a detailed explanation of IMA LIM configuration, refer to the Inverse Multiplexing with ATM(IMA) LIMs on page 5-22 of the GDC Xedge Switch Applications Overview manual, Part Num032R300.

IMA Bandwidth

The ECC controller provisions IMA Bandwidth automatically when links are assigned to an group.

For T1 IMA, each T1 is assigned 3592 cps. For a single T1, without the IMA protocol enabledICP cells are replaced by idle ATM cells, so the single T1 continues to use the same band3592.cps, and not 3622cps as you might expect when the IMA ICP cells are no longer in us

For E1 IMA, each E1 is assigned 4490 cps. For a single E1, without the IMA protocol enabledICP cells are replaced by idle ATM cells, so the single E1 continues to use the same band4490 cps, and not 4528cps as you might expect when the IMA ICP cells are no longer in us



rs 0ithert of the

uitsC. TheATM;

TM

ksed byl links

nmentped

groupy be fromsical

IMA Group Limitations

3K\VLFDO#/LQNVThese are the physical-link connections to the IMA LIM front panel - physical link numbethrough 15. Each IMA LIM carries 16 physical links. All physical links may be configured as ecomponents of IMA Groups, or as independent DS1, or E1, ATM UNI links. Assignmenphysical links to ATM ports is done automatically. By default, a PHY link is assigned tocorresponding numbered ATM port (i.e., link 0-to-ATM port 0, etc.).

$70#3RUWVAn ATM Port is a source or destination logical port within the Xedge switch to which ATM circare addressed. The ATM Ports reside on the slot controller -- in these configurations, the ECATM Ports are identified by numbers 0 through 15. Each ECC slot controller supports 16 Ports. Four ATM Ports (numbers 0, 4, 8, and 12) on each ECC may be configured as NNIsthe remaining ATM ports may be configured as either individual, or IMA Group-ed, UNIs.NNI ATM Ports support PVC, SVC, and SPVC (dynamically rerouted), connections. UNI APorts support PVC and SVC connections.

,0$#*URXSVReferred to as “Group Index” in the IMA MIB, an IMA Group is a collection of physical linbundled or grouped together and assigned to an ATM Port. The IMA Groups are identifinumbers 1 through 8 -- numbers 1-4 would be assigned to IMA Groups composed of physica0-7; numbers 5-8 would be assigned to IMA Groups composed of physical links 8-15. Assigof an ATM Port to an IMA Group is done automatically by switch code. The IMA Group is mapto the ATM Port that corresponds to the lowest numbered physical link in its group (i.e., a made up of links 2, 5, and 7, will be assigned to ATM Port 2). While an IMA Group macomposed of up to 8 physical links, all physical links making up a specific IMA Group must beeither the physical-link set 0-7, or the physical-link set 8-15. IMA Groups of more than 8 phylinks are NOT SUPPORTED.

Note For software versions 5.2 and 5.2.1 only; IMA LIM Physical links can not be enabled in thenon-IMA mode. Version 6.0 supports both IMA and non-IMA modes.



03Iss

h link

Configure the E1-IMA LIM

By default, the 16 E1-IMA physical links are disabled and inactive. To enable each link, eacmust first be assigned to an IMA Group and made active.

1. Establish a Telnet session to the ECC slot controller for the E1-IMA LIM.






00 system 66 E-Series LIM Information02 at 67 Slot Controller Statistics03 ip 68 Managed VP Service04 icmp 69 ATM Port05 tcp 97 IMA06 udp07 snmp08 System Information12 Static Routing16 Virtual Circuit Status20 Billing Records24 SVC Configuration/Status40 OAM Configuration/Status41 ILMI Configuration/Status43 CAC Configuration53 Address Group54 Prefix GroupSelect option:Enter group number, save As, Load, sTatus, eXit,Last save file is `/$/config.cfg'.



as


4. Select E1 LIM from the E-Series LIM Information Screen. The E1-LIM screen is diplayedshown in Figure 7-18.

Figure 7-18 E1 LIM Screen


Switch Name: Slot X SYS E-Series LIM Information SW Version

LIM ID: elim e1 16 port LIM Hardware Version: 2 LIM Boot Version: A- LIM Firmware Version: elf1.3 LIM Software Version: e1_ds1_45 Number of Ports: 16 LIM Status: operational0 Common LIM1 SONET/SDH LIM2 E1 LIM3 DS1 LIM



Switch Name: Slot X SYS E1 LIM SW Version

0 E1 Diagnostic Page1 E1 Performance Monitoring Page2 E1 Alarms Page3 E1 Link Configuration Page




03Iss

aining

5. Select E1 Link Configuration Page from the E1 LIM screen. Then select Extra detail . TheDetail of the E1 Link Configuration Page entry 0 is displayed as shown in Figure 7-19.

Figure 7-19 Detail of E1 Link Configuration Page entry 0

6. If changing the E1 Link Configuration default values is required, refer to Table 7-6 for adescription of the E1 Link Configuration Page Screen Parameters. Repeat for all remlinks (0 through 15) using the Down and Up options.

Table 7-6 Detail of E1 Link Configuration Page Screen Parameter Descriptions


Link # Displays the physical link number (0 through 15). read only

Link Config Enables or disables the link. The current status of the link is indicated by the Link Status parameter.Options are enabled or disabled .Default=disabled .Note: A link can NOT be set to disabled if the Detail of IMA Link Table screen (shown in Figure 7-25) Row Status parameter is set to active .Note: It is necessary to set Link Config to enable if it is used in an IMA group. In this case, it will be set to enable automatically.

Immediate



Switch Name: Slot X SYS E1 Link Configuration Page SW VersionDetail of E1 Link Configuration Page entry 0

Link # : 000 Link Config : enabled Link Status : port up01 Tx Clk Source : master timing02 XOR w/55H : enabled03 Scramble Cell Payload : scrambled04 Framing Mode : crc multiframe05 Sa4 Spare Bit : set06 Sa5 Spare Bit : set07 Sa6 Spare Bit : set08 Sa7 Spare Bit : set09 Sa8 Spare Bit : set10 Si0 International Bit : set11 Si1 International Bit : set




7. Configure the IMA features of the E1-IMA LIM in the section IMA Configuration onpage 7-39.

Link Status Indicates the current status of the link.disabled =the port is disabled at the request of the user by the Link Config parameter.port up =ithe port is enabled by the user and no alarms are detected in the receive data stream.port down =the user has enabled the link but one or more alarms are detected in the receive data stream.

read only

Tx Clk Source Selects the timing source to used to drive the transmit data line for this link.master-timing =use the master transmit timing source that is set in LIM Timing and the Slot 0 System Timing .loop-timing =use the extracted clock from the receive data stream as the transmit source. Default=master-timing

Immediate

XOR w/55H Adds the coset polynomial to the HCS octet prior to insertion in the transmit stream.Options are enabled or disabled .Default=enabled .

Immediate

Scramble Cell Payload Scrambles the 48 octet info field of ATM cells. Also forces the receiver to expect the cell payload to be scrambled in the same manner.Options are scrambled and not scrambled .Default=scrambled

Immediate

Framing Mode Selects the framing mode used.Options are basic and crc multiframe .Default= crc multiframe

Immediate

Sa4 Spare Bit Selects the Sa4 National Spare Bit used in the E1 Framing.Options are set and cleared .Default=set

Immediate


Immediate


Immediate


Immediate


Immediate

Si0 International Bit Selects the Si0 International Bit used in the E1 Framing.Options are set and cleared .Default=set

Immediate

Si1 International Bit Selects the Si1 International Bit used in the E1 Framing.Options are set and cleared . Default=set

Immediate

Table 7-6 Detail of E1 Link Configuration Page Screen Parameter Descriptions





03Iss

t first

Configure the DSX1-IMA LIM

By default, the 16 DSX1-IMA physical links are disabled. To enable each link, each link musbe assigned to an IMA Group and made active.

1. Establish a Telnet session to the ECC slot controller for the DSX1-IMA LIM.






00 system 66 E-Series LIM Information02 at 67 Slot Controller Statistics03 ip 68 Managed VP Service04 icmp 69 ATM Port05 tcp 97 IMA06 udp07 snmp08 System Information12 Static Routing16 Virtual Circuit Status20 Billing Records24 SVC Configuration/Status40 OAM Configuration/Status41 ILMI Configuration/Status43 CAC Configuration53 Address Group54 Prefix GroupSelect option:Enter group number, save As, Load, sTatus, eXit,Last save file is `/$/config.cfg'.




4. Select DS1 LIM from the E-Series LIM Information Screen. The DS1 LIM screen isdisplayed as shown in Figure 7-22.

Figure 7-22 DS1 LIM Screen


Switch Name: Slot X SYS E-Series LIM Information SW Version

LIM ID: elim ds1 16 port LIM Hardware Version: 2 LIM Boot Version: A- LIM Firmware Version: elf1.3 LIM Software Version: e1_ds1_45 Number of Ports: 16 LIM Status: operational0 Common LIM1 SONET/SDH LIM2 E1 LIM3 DS1 LIM



Switch Name: Slot X SYS DS1 LIM SW Version

0 DS1 Diagnostic Page1 DS1 Performance Monitoring Page2 DS1 Alarms Page3 DS1 Link Configuration Page




03Iss

aining

5. Select DS1 Link Configuration Page from the DS1 LIM screen. Then select Extra detail.The Detail of the DS1 Link Configuration Page entry 0 is displayed as shown in Figure7-23.

Figure 7-23 Detail of DS1 Link Configuration Page entry 0

6. If changing the DS1 Link Configuration default values is required, refer to Table 7-7 for adescription of the DS1 Link Configuration Page Screen Parameters. Repeat for all remlinks (0 through 15) using the Down and Up or Goto row options.

Table 7-7 Detail of DS1 Link Configuration Page Screen Parameter Descriptions


Link # Displays the physical link number (0 through 15). read only

Link Config Enables or disables the link. The current status of the link is indicated by the Link Status parameter.Options are enabled or disabled .Default=disabled .Note: A link can not be set to disabled if the Detail of IMA Link Table screen (shown in Figure 7-25) Row Status parameter is set to active .Note: It is necessary to set Link Config to enable if it is used in an IMA group. In this case, it will be set to enable automatically.

Immediate



Switch Name: Slot X SYS DS1 Link Configuration Page SW VersionDetail of DS1 Link Configuration Page entry 0

Link # : 00 Link Config : enabled Link Status : port up1 Tx Clk Source : master timing2 XOR w/55H : enabled3 Scr Cell Payld : scrambled4 Framing Mode : esf5 Line Code : b8zs6 Line Length : feet 0 to 110




7. Configure the IMA features of the DSX1-IMA LIM in the section IMA Configuration onpage 7-39.

Link Status Indicates the current status of the link.disabled =the port is disabled at the request of the user by the Link Config parameter.port up =the port is enabled by the user and no alarms are detected in the receive data stream.port down =the user has enabled the link but one or more alarms are detected in the receive data stream.

read only

Tx Clk Source Selects the timing source to used to drive the transmit data line for this link.master-timing =use the master transmit timing source that is set in LIM Timing and the Slot 0 System Timing .loop-timing =use the extracted clock from the receive data stream as the transmit timing source.Default=master-timing

Immediate

XOR w/55H Adds the coset polynomial to the HCS octet prior to insertion in the transmit stream.Options are enabled or disabled .Default=enabled .

Immediate

Scr Cell Payld Scrambles the 48 octet info field of ATM cells. Also forces the receiver to expect the cell payload to be scrambled in the same manner.Options are scrambled and not scrambled .Default=scrambled

Immediate

Framing Mode Selects the framing mode used. Options are:sf=Super Frame modeesf=Extended Super Frame modeDefault=esf

Immediate

Line Code Allows selection of the DS1 line coding. Options are:ami=alternate mark inversionb8zs=binary 8 zero substitutionDefault=b8zsNote: ami line coding is not recommended for use with ATM interfaces. Idle cells and IMA ICP cells will produce excessive zeros (EXZ) indications per the ANSI T1.231-1997 specification. One or more EXZ per second causes an Errored Second. 1544 or more EXZ's per second will generate a Severely Errored Second.

Immediate

Line Length Selects the length of cable that DS1 LIM will drive.Options are:feet-0-to-110feet-110-to-220feet-220-to-330feet-330-to-440feet-440-to-550feet-550-to-655Default=feet-0-to-110

Immediate

Table 7-7 Detail of DS1 Link Configuration Page Screen Parameter Descriptions





03Iss

IMA Configuration

This section applies to both the E1-IMA LIM and DSX1-IMA LIM.

1. Select eXit until the MIB Display and Management screen appears as shown in Figure 7-20.Select IMA from the screen options.

2. The IMA screen is displayed as shown in Figure 7-24.

Figure 7-24 IMA Screen


Switch Name: Slot X SYS IMA SW Version

Num IMA Groups: 20 IMA Group Table1 IMA Link Table




by

dices

he

y the

3. Select IMA Link Table from the IMA screen. Select Extra detail . The Detail of IMA LinkTable entry 0 screen is displayed as shown in Figure 7-25.

Figure 7-25 Detail of IMA Link Table entry 0 Screen

4. Assign each physical link (0 through 15) you are using in IMA mode to an IMA Groupselecting Group Index from the Detail of IMA Link Table entry 0 screen shown in Figure7-25. The Group Index options are 1 through 8. Use the Down and Up options to sequencethrough each physical link. The physical link number (0 through 15) is displayed by the LinkIndex parameter.

Note that for links 0 - 7, the valid Group Indices are 1 - 4. For links 8 - 15, the valid Group inare 5 - 8. Refer to the section IMA Group Limitations on page 7-30 for an description of IMA Grouplimitations.

5. Set the Row Status to active for each link assigned to an IMA Group (0 through 15) from tDetail of IMA Link Table entry 0 screen shown in Figure 7-25. Use the Down and Upoptions to sequence through each link. The link number (0 through 15) is displayed bLink Index parameter. Refer to Table 7-8 for a description of the Detail of IMA Link Tablescreen parameters.

Table 7-8 Detail of IMA Link Table Screen Parameter Descriptions


Link Index Displays the physical link number (0 through 15). read only



Switch Name: Slot X SYS IMA Link Table SW VersionDetail of IMA Link Table entry 0

Link Index : 0 FE Unavail Secs: 00 Row Status : notInService NE Tx Unusbl Se: 21 Group Index : 1 NE Rx Unusbl Se: 5 NE Tx State : active FE Tx Unusbl Se: 1 NE Rx State : unusableFailed FE Rx Unusbl Se: 22 FE Tx State : active NE Tx Failures : 0 FE Rx State : active NE Rx Failures : 0 NE Rx Fail Stat: imaLinkFailure Rx Test Pattern: 0 FE Rx Fail Stat: noFailure Test Proc Statu: disabled Tx LID : 0 Rx LID : 4 Relative Delay : 117 IMA Violations : 0 NE Sev Err Secs: 5 FE Sev Err Secs: 3 NE Unavail Secs: 364877Select option:Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row, Index search, Summary,eXit



03Iss

Row Status Options are active and notInServiceDefault=notInServiceNote: Valid selections are active and notInService . All other options are not supported.Note: The Row Status can only be set to active when there is a Group Index selected (1-8).Note: The Row Status can only be changed when the corresponding Group Index is set to notInService.

Immediate

Group Index A unique value for the IMA Group. Valid values are 1 through 8.Note: To change the Group Index , Row Status must be set to notInService.Note: Group Index 1-4 can only be used for physical links 0-7. Group Index 5-8 can only be used for physical links 8-15. Note: The system will prompt with “[0-4294967295]” for a Group Index range. Disregard these values. Valid selections for Group Index are 1 through 8.

Immediate

NE Tx State(See note below)

The current state of the near-end transmit link. Status messages are:notInGroupunusableNoGivenReasonunusableFaultunusableMisconnectedunusableInhibitedunusableFailedusableactive

read only

NE Rx State(See note below)

The current state of the near-end receive link. Status messages are:notInGroupunusableNoGivenReasonunusableFaultunusableMisconnectedunusableInhibitedunusableFailedusableactive

read only

FE Tx State(See note below)

The current state of the far-end transmit link as reported via ICP cells. Status messages are:notInGroupunusableNoGivenReasonunusableFaultunusableMisconnectedunusableInhibitedunusableFailedusableactive

read only






FE Rx State(See note below)

The current state of the far-end receive link as reported via ICP cells. Status messages are:notInGroupunusableNoGivenReasonunusableFaultunusableMisconnectedunusableInhibitedunusableFailedusableactive

read only

NE Rx Fail Stat(See note below)

The current link failure status of the near-end receive link. Status messages are:noFailureimaLinkFailurelifFailurelodsFailuremisConnectedblockedfaultfarEndTxLinkUnusablefarEndRxLinkUnusable

read only

FE Rx Fail Stat(See note below)

The current link failure status of the far-end receive link as reported via ICP cells. Status messages are:noFailureimaLinkFailurelifFailurelodsFailuremisConnectedblockedfaultfarEndTxLinkUnusablefarEndRxLinkUnusable

read only

Tx LID The outgoing LID used currently on the link by the local end. This value has meaning only if the link belongs to an IMA group.

read only

Rx LID The incoming LID used currently on the link by the remote end as reported via ICP cells. This value has meaning only if the link belongs to an IMA group. The distinguished value of 31 may be used if the receive LID has not yet been detected.

read only

Relative Delay The latest measured delay on this link relative to the link in the same IMA group with the least delay.

read only

IMA Violations ICP violations: count of errored, invalid or missing ICP cells, except during SES-IMA or UAS-IMA conditions.

read only

NE Sev Err Secs Count of one second intervals containing >= 30% of the ICP cells counted as IV-IMAs, or one or more link defects (e.g., LOS, OOF/LOF, AIS, or LCD), LIF defects, or LODS defects, except during UAS-IMA condition.

read only

FE Sev Err Secs Count of one second intervals containing one or more RDI-IMA defects, except during UAS-IMA-FE condition.

read only






03Iss

6. Select eXit until the Manage Configuration screen for ECC/IMA slot is displayed. The MIBDisplay and Management screen appears as shown in Figure 7-20.

7. Exit back to the IMA screen by typing “x.” The IMA screen is displayed as shown in Figure7-24.

8. Select IMA Group Table from the IMA screen options. Select Extra detail. The Detail ofIMA Group Table entry 0 screen is displayed as shown in Figure 7-26.

NE Unavail Secs Count of unavailable seconds at near-end: unavailability begins at the onset of 10 contiguous SES-IMA and ends at the onset of 10 contiguous seconds with no SES-IMA.

read only

FE Unavail Secs Count of unavailable seconds at far-end: unavailability begins at the onset of 10 contiguous SES-IMA-FE and ends at the onset o 10 contiguous seconds with no SES-IMA-FE.

read only

NE Tx Unusbl Se Tx Unusable seconds: count of Tx Unusable seconds at the near-end Tx LSM.

read only

NE Rx Unusbl Se Rx Unusable seconds: count of Rx Unusable seconds at the near-end Rx LSM.

read only

FE Tx Unusbl Se Tx Unusable seconds at far-end: count of seconds with Tx Unusable indications from the far-end Tx LSM.

read only

FE Rx Unusbl Se Rx Unusable seconds at far-end: count of seconds with Rx Unusable indications from the far-end Rx LSM.

read only

NE Tx Failures The number of times a near-end transmit failure alarm condition has been entered on this link (i.e., some form of implementation specific transmit fault).

read only

NE Rx Failures The number of times a near-end receive failure alarm condition has been entered on this link (i.e., LIF, LODS, RFI-IMA, misconnected or some form of implementation specific receive fault).

read only

Rx Test Pattern Identifies the test pattern received in the ICP Cell (octet 17) on the link during the IMA Test Pattern Procedure. This value may then be compared to the transmitted test pattern.

read only

Test Proc Statu This value indicates the current state of the Test Pattern Procedure.disabled =the test is not runningoperating =the test is running and no error has been found on this interfacelinkFail =an error has been detected on this link during the test. Once an error is detected, the linkFail value is latched until either this object is read or until the Group Test Proc Status is moved to disabled. Once read, if the error no longer persists, a subsequent read will report operating.

read only

Note Refer to the ATM Forum IMA Specification Ver. 1.1 (AF-PHY-0086.001 for the definition of each NE and FE state and failure.






be

Figure 7-26 Detail of IMA Group Table entry 0 Screen

9. For each IMA group you are using, there are four configurable items on the Detail of IMAGroup Table screen; Row Status, Test Link , Test Patte, and Test Proc. To identify whichIMA group number you are configuring, refer to the Group Inde (Group Index) on the Detailof IMA Group Table screen. Using the Down and Up options to sequence through the IMAgroups. Refer to Table 7-9 for a description of the Detail of IMA Group Table screen

parameters.

Note At-least one physical link in an IMA Group must be set to active before the IMA Group canset to active. To activate the links, use the IMA Link Table shown in Figure 7-25.

Table 7-9 Detail of IMA Group Table Screen Parameter Descriptions


Group Inde A unique value for the IMA Group. Valid values are 1 through 8.

read only

Row Status At least one link must be provisioned in the group using the IMA LInk Table before setting Row Status to active .Options are active and notInServiceNote: Valid selections are active and notInService . All other options are not supported.Default=notInService

Immediate



Switch Name: Slot X SYS IMA Group Table SW VersionDetail of IMA Group Table entry 0

Group Inde: 1 Tx Frame L: m128 Rx Actual : 00 Row Status: notInServce Rx Frame L: m128 2 Test Link : 0 IF Index : 1 Diff Delay: 25 3 Test Patte: - NE State : insufficie Least Dela: 0 4 Test Proc : disabled FE State : operationa Dif Dly Ma: 0 Tx OAM Lab: 3 Failure St: insufficie Alpha : 2 Rx OAM Lab: 3 Symmetry : symmetricO Beta : 2 Min Tx Lin: 4 Gamma : 1 Min Rx Lin: 4 Running Se: 936941 NE Tx Clk : ctc Unavail Se: 364862 FE Tx Clk : ctc NE Failure: 3 Tx Timing : 0 Tx Avail C: 17962 Rx Timing : 4 Rx Avail C: 17962 Last Chang: 13 Mar 200 Tx Cfg Lin: 4 Tx IMA ID : 2 Rx Cfg Lin: 4 Rx IMA ID : 3 Tx Actual : 4Select option:Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row, Index search, Summary,eXit



03Iss

IF Index Identifies the logical interface number assigned to this IMA group.Note: Re-initializing the management agent may cause the IF Index to change.

read only

NE State The current operational state of the near-end IMA Group State Machine. Status messages are:notConfiguredstartUpstartUpAckconfigAbortUnsupportedMconfigAbortIncompatibleSymmetryconfigAbortOtherinsufficientLinksblockedoperationalconfigAbortUnsupportedImaVersion

read only

FE State The current operational state of the far-end IMA Group State Machine. Status messages are:notConfiguredstartUpstartUpAckconfigAbortUnsupportedMconfigAbortIncompatibleSymmetryconfigAbortOtherinsufficientLinksblockedoperationalconfigAbortUnsupportedImaVersion

read only

Failure St The current failure status of the IMA group [the reason why the Group Traffic State Manager (GTSM) is in the down state]. Status messages are:noFailurestartUpNestartUpFeinvalidMValueNeinvalidMValueFefailedAssymetricNefailedAssymetricFeinsufficientLinksNeinsufficientLinksFeblockedNeblockedFeotherFailureinvalidImaVersionNeinvalidImaVersionFe

read only

Symmetry Symmetry of the IMA group. Status messages are:symmetricOperationasymmetricOperationasymmetricConfigurationNote: Only symmetricOperation is supported.

read only

Min Tx Lin The number of transmit links provisioned in this group.Default=1 (min number)

read only






Min Rx Lin The number of receive links provisioned in this group. read only

NE Tx Clk Transmit clocking mode used by the near-end IMA group. Options are:ctc =common transmit clockitc =independent transmit clockDefault=ctcNote: Only ctc is supported. Do NOT select itc.

Immediate

FE Tx Clk Transmit clocking mode used by the far-end IMA group. Status messages are:ctc =common transmit clockitc =independent transmit clock

read only

Tx Timing The link number of the transmit timing reference link to be used by the near-end for IMA data cell clock recovery from the ATM layer. The valid range of link numbers is 0 through 15. The distinguished value of 0 may be displayed if no link has been configured in the IMA group, or if the transmit timing reference link has not yet been selected. Note: The T1 Timing link is selected automatically by the switch node.

read only

Rx Timing The link number of the receive timing reference link to be used by the near-end for IMA data cell clock recovery toward the ATM layer. The valid range of link numbers is 0 through 15. The distinguished value of 0 may be displayed if no link has been configured in the IMA group, or if the receive timing reference link has not yet been detected.

read only

Last Chang The date the IMA group last changed operational state. read only

Tx IMA ID The IMA ID currently in use by the near-end IMA function.Note: The Tx IMA ID is selected automatically by the switch node.

read only

Rx IMA ID The IMA ID currently in use by the far-end IMA function. The distinguished value of 255 may be used if the receive IMA id has not yet been detected.

read only

Tx Frame L The frame length (in cells) to be used by the IMA group in the transmit direction. This is a fixed value and is set when an IMA group is in startup. Status messages are:m32m64m128m256Default=m128

read only

Rx Frame L Value of IMA frame length (in cells) as received from remote IMA function. Status messages are:m32m64m128m256

read only






03Iss

Diff Delay The maximum number of milliseconds of differential delay among the links that will be tolerated on this interface. This value is 25 milliseconds.

read only

Least Dela The link number of the link configured in the IMA group which has the smallest link propagation delay. The valid range of link numbers is 0 through 15. The distinguished value of 0 may be displayed if no link has been configured in the IMA group, or if the link with the smallest link propagation delay has not yet been determined.

read only

Dif Dly Ma The latest maximum differential delay observed (in milliseconds) between the links having the least and most link propagation delay among the receive links that are currently configured in the IMA group.

read only

Alpha The 'alpha' value used to specify the number of consecutive invalid ICP cells to be detected before moving to the IMA Hunt state from the IMA Sync state.Range=1 through 2. Set to default value of 2.

read only

Beta The 'beta' value used to specify the number of consecutive errored ICP cells to be detected before moving to the IMA Hunt state from the IMA Sync state.Range=1 through 5. Set to default value of 2.

read only

Gamma The 'gamma' value used to specify the number of consecutive valid ICP cells to be detected before moving to the IMA Sync state from the IMA PreSync state.Range=1 through 5. Set to default value of 1.

read only

Running Se The amount of time (in seconds) that this IMA group has been in the Operational state.

read only

Unavail Se Count of one second intervals where the IMA Group Traffic State Machine has been Down.

read only

NE Failure The number of times a near-end group failure (Config-Aborted, Insufficient-Links) has been reported since power-up or reboot.

read only

Tx Avail C The current cell rate (truncated value in cells per second) provided by this IMA group in the transmit direction, considering all the transmit links in the Active state.

read only

Rx Avail C The current cell rate (truncated value in cells per second) provided by this IMA group in the receive direction, considering all the receive links in the Active state.

read only

Tx Cfg Lin The number of links that are configured to transmit in this IMA group.

read only

Rx Cfg Lin The number of links that are configured to receive in this IMA group.

read only

Tx Actual The number of links which are configured to transmit and are currently Active in this IMA group.

read only

Rx Actual The number of links which are configured to receive and are currently Active in this IMA group.

read only






10. This completes the IMA LIM configuration procedure. Proceed to Configure the Timing onpage 7-49.

Test Link Used to designate a link as the test link or use in the Test Pattern Procedure. The valid range is 0 through 15.Note: This value is NOT the same as the Tx LID value, but instead identifies the link value of the test link to be used by the Test Pattern Procedure (i.e., the link whose LID value is inserted in the Tx LID field of the transmitted ICP cells).Default=0

Immediate

Test Patte Used to specify the Tx Test Pattern in an IMA group loopback operation. A value in the range 0 to 255 designates a specific pattern. The distinguished value of –1 specifies that the implementation may choose the value. In this case, the implementation may also choose the value of Test Link IF Index'.Note: It is recommended that the specific value 255 not be used for testing, since by (R-137) the IMA interface is required to transmit 0xFF (i.e., 255) when the incoming test command is inactive or the test link is not detected, and thus it cannot be established for certain whether 255 was received due to an actual loopback operation or due to the normal operation of an IMA that is not performing (or else cannot perform) the test pattern procedure.Note: When the screen displays “–” (minus sign), the actual value is –1.Default= –1

Immediate

Test Proc Used to enable or disable the Test Pattern Procedure and note whether at least one link failed the test. The test is started by setting operating status. If any link should fail the test, the IMA will set the status to linkFail . The linkFail state will persist until either the disabled state is set or until no instance of Test Proc Status has the value linkFail .Note: Only the values disabled and operating may be written. Writing the operating value will not cause clearing of the linkFail state. Options are:disabledoperatinglinkFailDefault=disabled

Immediate

Tx OAM Lab IMA OAM Label value transmitted by the NE IMA unit.Range=0 through 255

read only

Rx OAM Lab IMA OAM Label value transmitted by the FE IMA unit. The value 0 likely means that the IMA unit has not received an OAM Label from the FE IMA unit at this time.Range=0 through 255

read only





ECC Configuration Configure the Timing

03Iss

IM.)

h SlotECCe of

Configure the Timing

For an overview of the ECC timing, see ECC Timing Overview on page 4-25 in Chapter 4, SystemTiming & Synchronization of the Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310.

The ECC timing configuration is divided into two main sections:

• Select the Master Transmit Timing Source on page 7-49

• Select the Link Transmit Clock Source (This information is found in the Detailed Configuration parameter Description of each L

Select the Master Transmit Timing Source

The clock source for the node is selected in the Slot-0 Controller and distributed to eacController via the timing bus. This is the “system clock.” You can use this clock to time the LIM or you can use the local oscillator on the LIM, or you can receive the LIM timing from onthe links on the LIM. Use the following procedure to select the clock source for the LIM:


2. Select Common LIM . The Common LIM screen appears as shown in Figure 7-27.

Figure 7-27 ECC Common LIM Screen

3. Select LIM Timing . The LIM Timing screen appears as shown in Figure 7-28. The screenparameters are described in LIM Timing Screen Parameters on page 7-51.


Switch Name: Slot X SYS Common LIM SW Version

0 LIM Timing1 File Download




n

IM

Figure 7-28 ECC LIM Timing Screen

4. Select Master Tx Tmg Source. The Master Tx Tmg Source prompt screen appears as showin Figure 7-29.

Figure 7-29 ECC Master Tx Tmg Source Prompt

5. You can select either system clock, link0 through link15, or local oscillator. For the SONET/SDH LIM, link2 through link15 options are not valid. For the E1/DS1 Lwith IMA, all physical links 0-15 can be used as Master Tx Timing Source..


Switch Name: Slot X SYS LIM Timing SW Version

Sys Tmg Driver Source Used: local oscillator Sys Tmg Bus Being Driven: none0 Master Tx Tmg Source: local oscillator Master Tx Tmg Source Used: local oscillator HQ Pri Bus Status: not available HQ Sec Bus Status: invalid LQ Pri Bus Status: invalid LQ Sec Bus Status: invalid


For Examp le Only - Do Not Copy Values

Switch Name: Slot X SYS LIM Timing SW Version

A - system clock R - local oscillatorB - link0C - link1D - link2E - link3F - link4G - link5H - link6I - link7J - link8K - link9L - link10M - link11N - link12O - link13P - link14Q - link15Master Tx Tmg Source: R [local oscillator]



03Iss

LIM Timing Screen Parameters

Table 7-10 lists the parameters found in the LIM Timing Screen (Figure 7-28) and provides theirdefinitions.

Table 7-10 LIM Timing Screen Parameter Definitions


Sys Tmg Driver Source Used System Timing Driver Source being used. This status parameter indicates what source on the LIM is being used to drive the low quality system timing bus. The LIM is selected to drive the system timing bus on the Slot-0 System Timing Page.The possible values are:LINK0 LINK4 LINK8 LINK12LINK1 LINK5 LINK9 LINK13LINK2 LINK6 LINK10 LINK14LINK3 LINK7 LINK11 LINK15local oscillator .

NA, read only

Note: With a quad APS LIM, LINK2 and LINK3 are Link-1 in Slot-0 (logical link-1). Additionally LINK0 and LINK1 are Link-0 in Slot-0 (logical Link-0)

Sys Tmg Bus Being Driven This status parameter indicates what system timing bus is being driven by the LIM.The possible values are:none - the LIM is not driving the system timing buslow Quality Primarylow Quality Secondaryboth - This value is not supported.

NA, read only

Master Tx Tmg Source Master Transmit Timing Source . This parameter allows you to select what clock source can be used to drive the transmit clocks for all links on the LIM.The options are:system clock - use the highest quality system timing source available.LINK0 LINK4 LINK8 LINK12LINK1 LINK5 LINK9 LINK13LINK2 LINK6 LINK10 LINK14LINK3 LINK7 LINK11 LINK15 local oscillator Note: For OC3 LIMs only, Link0, Link1 and local oscillator are valid selections.

Immediate




Master Tx Tmg Source Used Master Transmit Timing Source Used . This status item is used to indicate what clock source is being used to drive the Master Transmit clock on the LIM.The possible values are:high quality primaryhigh quality secondarylow quality primarylow quality secondaryLINK0 LINK4 LINK8 LINK12LINK1 LINK5 LINK9 LINK13LINK2 LINK6 LINK10 LINK14LINK3 LINK7 LINK11 LINK15local oscillatorNote: For OC3 LIMs only, Link0, Link1 and local oscillator are valid selections.

NA, read only

HQ Pri Bus Status High Quality Primary Bus Status. This parameter indicates the status of the high quality primary system timing bus. The possible values are:valid - The primary NTM is present and configured.invalid - The primary NTM is present and configured

but is not supplying a valid timing source.not available - This parameter indicates that there

isn’t a primary NTM timing source present in the system or that the primary NTM is not correctly configured on the Slot-0 System Timing Page .

NA, read only

HQ Sec Bus Status High Quality Secondary Bus Status. This parameter indicates the status of the high quality secondary system timing bus. The possible values are:valid - secondary NTM is present and configuredinvalid - secondary NTM present and configured but

is not supplying a valid timing sourcenot available - indicates that there isn’t a secondary

NTM timing source present in the system or that the secondary NTM is not correctly configured on the Slot-0 System Timing Page .

NA, read only

LQ Pri Bus Status Low Quality Primary Bus Status. This parameter indicates the status of the low quality primary system timing bus. The possible values are:valid - The primary low quality timing source is

present, configured and providing a valid clock.invalid - The primary low quality timing source is not present.

NA, read only

LQ Sec Bus Status Low Quality Secondary Bus Status. This parameter indicates the status of the low quality secondary system timing bus. The possible values are:valid - The secondary low quality timing source is present, configured and providing a valid clock.invalid - The secondary low quality timing source is not present.

NA, read only

Table 7-10 LIM Timing Screen Parameter Definitions




ECC Configuration Configure Traffic Management

03Iss

ement

n

Configure Traffic ManagementThe ECC has traffic management features that you can configure. The ECC traffic managfeatures are arranged in the following groups:

• Peak Rate Limit & UBR Reservation

• EFCI Threshold

• Additional Traffic Management Options

Peak Rate Limit & UBR Reservation

Use the following procedure to configure the ECC Peak Rate Limit and UBR Reservation:

1. Go to the ECC MIB Display and Management screen.

2. Select SVC Configuration/Status. The SVC Configuration/Status screen appears as showin Figure 7-30.

Figure 7-30 ECC SVC Configuration/Status Screen

3. Select SVC Resource Table. The SVC Resource Table screen appears.

4. Select Extra Detail. The Detail of SVC Resource Table Entry 0 (SAP-0 or Link-0) appearsas shown in Figure 7-31.


Switch Name: Slot x SYS SVC Configuration/Status SW Version

00 Max Pt-Pt Connection: 25 17 Max Outstanding: 2001 Max Pt-Mpt Trees: 3 18 Load Route Tables: both02 Max Parties per Tree: 10 19 StaEnq Poll Timer: 1003 SVC Resource Table Num Half-Conns Detec: 004 SVC Configuration/Status Table 20 Q.93B T398 Timer: 4005 SPVC Configuration/Status Table 21 Q.93B T399 Timer: 14006 Q.93B Statistics Table 22 svcRetryPeriod: 18007 Q.SAAL Statistics Table 23 Link Cell Rate Restrictions08 SSCOP Poll Timer: 8 24 Link QOS Class Restrictions09 SSCOP Keep Alive Tim: 2010 SSCOP No Resp Timer: 10011 SSCOP CC Timer: 2012 SSCOP Max PD: 1513 Q.93B T303 Timer: 4014 Q.93B T310 Timer: 20015 Q.93B T308 Timer: 30016 Q.93B T309 Timer: 0Select option:Enter option number or eXit



Figure 7-31 ECC Detail of SVC Resource Table

5. Select Pk Rate Li: (Peak Rate Limit). At the prompt enter the peak rate limit value.

6. Select UBR Reserv (UBR Reservation). At the prompt enter the appropriate value.

7. Use the Down command to transition to the next entry (entry 1, SAP-1 for Link-1).

8. Repeat step 5 to step 6 for this entry (link).

9. Repeat step 7 to step 8 for each entry (link) on your LIM.

10. When you are finished, exit back to the ECC MIB Display and Management screen.

11. This completes the Peak Rate Limit & UBR Reservation procedure. Proceed to EFCIThreshold on page 7-55.


Switch Name: Slot x SYS SVC Resource Table SW VersionDetail of SVC Resource Table entry 0

SAP : 0 Cur SAP Co: 0 27 Signalling: iisp3100 VPI/VCI Hi: low 12 Physical L: 0 28 Routing Pr: Xedge SVC VCI St: 32 13 VPCI/VPI M: off 29 Status : on SVC VCI En: 816 14 QoS Based : off01 SVC VPI St: 0 15 Restart Op: off02 SVC VPI En: 2 16 Dest E164 :03 SVP Start(: 5 17 Auto Sap O: no04 SVP End(Lo: 255 18 Sap Utiliz: 10005 SVC Max SA: 353207 19 CBR Bw Lim: 100 Available : 277265 20 VBR-RT Bw : 10006 Signalling: 5 21 VBR-NRT Bw: 10007 Signalling: 0 22 ABR Bw Lim: 10008 CDVT (uS) : 200 23 UBR Bw Lim: 10009 Interface : network 24 Ena Best E: off10 Policing : off 25 Pk Rate Li: 011 Max SAP Co: 55 26 UBR Reserv: 0Select option:Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row, Index search, Summary,eXit



03Iss

on

EFCI Threshold

Use the following procedure to configure the ECC EFCI Threshold:

1. Select the Slot Controller Statistics option from the ECC MIB Display and Managementscreen. The Slot Controller Statistics screen appears as shown in Figure 7-32. The screenparameters are described in Slot Controller Statistics Screen Parameter Descriptionspage 7-56.

2. Select the Threshold EFCI Marki: option. The Threshold EFCI Marking: prompt screenappears.

3. Enter the appropriate value for the EFCI threshold.

4. Exit back to the ECC MIB Display and Management screen.

5. This completes the ECC EFCI Threshold procedure. Proceed to Additional TrafficManagement Options on page 7-59.

Figure 7-32 Slot Controller Statistics Screen


Switch Name: Slot x SYS Slot Controller Statistics SW Version

Unprovisioned VPI/VC: 30441 Egress Buffer 2 High: 525 Dscrd Congest Clp1s : 0 2 Reset Egress Buffer : no DscrdClp01BufOvrflw: 0 3 Threshold EFCI Marki: pct50 BufCurrentLVL: 1 4 Maximum UBR V Q size: 32767 BufHighWaterMark: 10 Reset Ingress Buffer: no Invalid Egress Cell: 0 DscrdBuf1CngestClp1s: 0 DscrdBuf2CngestClp1s: 0 DscrdClp01Buf1Ovrflw: 0 DscrdClp01Buf2Ovrflw: 29227 Buf1PktDscrds(Cells): 0 Buf2PktDscrds(Cells): 0 Egress Buffer 1 Curr: 0 Egress Buffer 1 High: 01 Reset Egress Buffer : no Egress Buffer 2 Curr: 0Maximum UBR VC Q size: [0-32767]: 32767Select option:Enter option number or eXit



Slot Controller Statistics Screen Parameter Descriptions

Table 7-11 Slot Controller Statistics Screen Parameters


Unprovisioned VPI/VC Number of ingress cells with unprovisioned VPI/VCI NA, read only

Dscrd Congest CLp1s: The number of ingress CLP=1 cells dropped due to congestion. CLP1 cells will be discarded when the ingress buffer pool usage (See BufCurrentLvl) exceeds 48000 (75% of the buffer pool).

NA, read only

DscrdClp01BufOvrflw The number of ingress ABR and UBR cells discarded due to buffer overflow. When BufCurrentLvl exceeds 56000 (88% of the buffer pool), ABR and UBR cells will be discarded until buffer pool utilization decreases.

NA, read only

BufCurrentLvl Current number of ingress buffers in use (one per cell).Range = 0-65,535

NA, read only

BufHighWaterMark High water mark of ingress buffer utilization.Range = 0-65,535

NA, read only

Reset Ingress Buffer High Water Mark

Set BufHighWaterMark to 0 Immediate

Invalid Egress Cell Always 0 NA, read only

DscrdBuf1CngestClp1s Total number of egress CLP=1 cells dropped due to congestion for all UBR connections

NA, read only

DscrdBuf2CngestClp1s Total number of egress CLP=1 cells dropped due to congestion for all CBR, VBR-RT and VBR-NRT connections

NA, read only

DscrdClp01Buf1Ovrflw Total number of egress cells dropped due to congestion for all UBR connections

NA, read only

DscrdClp01Buf2Ovrflw Total number of egress cells dropped due to congestion for all CBR, VBR-RT and VBR-NRT connections

NA, read only

Buf1PkdDscrds(cells) Total number of egress cells dropped due to early packet discard for all VBR-RT and VBR-NRT connections

NA, read only

Buf2PktDscrds(cells) Total number of egress cells dropped due to early packet discard for all UBR connections

NA, read only

Egress Buffer 1 Current Usage

The current number of egress UBR cells that are queued at the ECC buffer.

NA, read only

Egress Buffer 1 High Water The largest number of egress UBR cells queued at the ECC buffer. Note: UBR cells are not shaped.

NA, read only

Reset Egress Buffer 1 High Water

Reset the Buffer 1 high water mark Immediate

Egress Buffer 2 Current Usage

The current number of CBR, VBR-RT and VBR-NRT egress cells queued at the ECC shaping engine

NA, read only

Egress Buffer 2 High Water The largest number of CBR, VBR-RT and VBRT-NRT egress cells queued at the ECC shaping engine

NA, read only

Reset Egress Buffer 2 High Water

Reset the Buffer 2 high water mark Immediate

Threshold EFCI Marking Sets the buffer pool usage threshold at which the EFCI bit will be set in egress cells. The options are:pct25 pct37 pct50 pct62

Immediate

Maximum UBR VC Q size Sets the ECC/UBR buffer depth. The range of valid values are: 64 to 32767 cells

Immediate



03Iss

on

Adjustable UBR Buffer Size

The user can change the ECC/UBR buffer depth as follows.

1. Select the Slot Controller Statistics option from the ECC MIB Display and Managementscreen. The Slot Controller Statistics screen appears as shown in Figure 7-33. The screenparameters are described in Slot Controller Statistics Screen Parameter Descriptionspage 7-56.

2. Select the Maximum UBR VC Q size option. The Maximum UBR VC Q size: promptscreen appears.

3. Enter the appropriate value for the maximum UBR buffer size.


5. This completes the procedure. Proceed to Additional Traffic Management Options onpage 7-59.

Figure 7-33 Slot Controller Statistics Screen


Switch Name: Slot x SYS Slot Controller Statistics SW Version

Unprovisioned VPI/VC: 30441 Egress Buffer 2 High: 525 Dscrd Congest Clp1s : 0 2 Reset Egress Buffer : no DscrdClp01BufOvrflw: 0 3 Threshold EFCI Marki: pct50 BufCurrentLVL: 1 4 Maximum UBR V Q size: 32767 BufHighWaterMark: 10 Reset Ingress Buffer: no Invalid Egress Cell: 0 DscrdBuf1CngestClp1s: 0 DscrdBuf2CngestClp1s: 0 DscrdClp01Buf1Ovrflw: 0 DscrdClp01Buf2Ovrflw: 29227 Buf1PktDscrds(Cells): 0 Buf2PktDscrds(Cells): 0 Egress Buffer 1 Curr: 0 Egress Buffer 1 High: 01 Reset Egress Buffer : no Egress Buffer 2 Curr: 0Maximum UBR VC Q size: [0-32767]: 32767Select option:Enter option number or eXit



to rm the

Best

Link Restriction Option

The Link Restriction feature applies only to the ECC/OC3 only. This feature allows the userresize the physical link to a value other than the default OC3 rate. To resize the value perfofollowing steps:

1. Select the System Information option from the ECC MIB Display and Management screen.

2. Select the Link Table option.The Link Table screen appears as shown in Figure 7-34.

3. Select the sysLKMaxUsage option. The sysLKMaxUsage prompt screen appears.

4. Enter one of the following selections for Link Restriction and the resulting usage of theEffort Enabled (BEE):

• 0 - Use full OC3 line rate; BEE not enabled.

• 1 - Use fill OC3 line rate; BEE enabled for all rates up to 35089.

• X - [Specify rate] OC3 Link Restricted to the rate specified; BEE enabled. Note: For specified rates above 353089, BEE not enabled.


6. This completes the procedure. Proceed to Additional Traffic Management Options onpage 7-59.

Figure 7-34 Link Table Screen


Switch Name: Slot x SYS Link Table SW Version

Link : 0 08 Tx Logic Buff S: 100 Restart Link : 0 09 Rx Logic Buff S: 1 State : up Tx LP FIFO Dept: 0 Transmit Cells : 0 Rx LP FIFO Dept: 0 Receive Cells : 0 Tx Mem Block ID: mem 4k Transmit Rate : 0 Rx Mem Block ID: mem 4k Max Transmit Rat: 0 10 sysLKMaxUsageRe: 0 Max Receive Rate: 0 sysLKMaxUsageRe: 35312501 Reset Stats : no02 Clock Source : normal03 Reset Link Reso : no04 Tx LP FIFO CLP1 : 005 Rx LP FIFO CLP1 : 006 Tx LP FIFO EFCI : 007 Rx LP FIFO EFCI : 0




03Iss

affic

fic

acket

ard.

es andn

Additional Traffic Management Options

You can find more information about the ECC traffic management in Chapter 2, TrManagement of the Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310 under ECC TrafficManagement on page 2-7.Use the following procedure to configure the additional TrafManagement options:

1. Go to the Slot-0 MIB Display and Management screen.

2. Select the PVC Configuration/Status option. The PVC Configuration/Status screenappears.

3. Select the PVC Configuration/Status Table option. The PVC Configuration/Status Tablescreen appears. Use the Extra detail command to display the Detail of PVC Configuration/Status Table screen (link-0) as shown in Figure 7-35.

Figure 7-35 PVC Configuration/Status Table Screen

4. Use the Goto row command or the arrow keys to select the desired entry.

5. If the connection is configured as VBR (VBR-rt, VBR-nrt), select the Frame Disc: option. Atthe prompt select either to allow or disallow frame discard (this includes both Early PDiscard and Partial Packet Discard).

6. If the connection is configured for the UBR.2 Conformance Definition, select the EnableUBR: option. At the prompt select either to enable or disable UBR tagging.

7. Select the CLP1 Disc : option. At the prompt select either to enable or disable CLP1 discSet to on for VBR.2, VBR.3 and CBR. Set to off for VBR.1 and CBR.1.

8. Repeat step 4 to step 7 for each desired entry.

9. Exit to the Root Menu and save your changes.

10. This completes the basic ECC configuration. You are now ready to allocate resourcconfigure your connections. Proceed to Chapter 16: Bandwidth Allocation and Reservatio,and Chapter 17: Configuring Connections for configuring PVCs and SPVCs.


Switch Name: Slot x SYS PVC Configuration/Status Table SW VersionDetail of PVC Configuration/Status Table entry 0

Dest Slot : 3 08 Sd Fd Mode: off 18 CLP1 Disc : off Dest Link : 0 09 Sd Bd Rate: 1766 Dest VCI : 51 10 Bd MBS(Cel: 32 Dest VPI : 2 11 Sd Bd Mode: off Src Slot : 4 12 Service Ca: vbr nrt Src Link : 1 13 Multicast : no Src VCI : 32 14 Direction : bidirect Src VPI : 2 15 Frame Disc: disallow00 Pk Fd Rate: 3532 16 Enable UBR: off01 Fd CDVT(uS: 5000 17 Status : running02 Pk Fd Mode: off Error Code: ok03 Pk Bd Rate: 3532 Num Leaves: -04 Bd CDVT(uS: 5000 Fwd Int VP: 3005 Pk Bd Mode: off Fwd Int VC: 100506 Sd Fd Rate: 1766 Bwd Int VP: 207 Fd MBS(Cel: 32 Bwd Int VC: 32Select option:Add entry, Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row, Kill entry,Move entry, Press ^J for extra help on this item, Summary, eXit


ECC Configuration Updating the LIM Software

begin,

C to

amein

er.

Updating the LIM SoftwareIf necessary, you can upgrade the LIM software through the ECC Controller. Before you canensure the correct new software file is located on the ECC Controller. The Release Notes suppliedwith your system software provides a list of all LIM and slot controller software files.All E-SeriesLIMs use the same software upgrade process.

The following procedure updates the LIM software by transferring the .cod files from the ECthe LIM and restarting the LIM using the new code.

1. Select the E-Series LIM Information from the MIB Display and Management screen. (TheE-Series LIM Information is used in this procedure as an example. IMA LIMs use the ssoftware upgrade procedure.) The E-Series LIM Information screen appears as shown Figure 7-36.


2. Select Common LIM . The Common LIM screen appears as shown in Figure 7-37.

Figure 7-37 Common LIM Screen

Note IMPORTANT! Do not reset a LIM or its associated slot controller during a software File Download. Wait until the file download is complete before restarting the LIM or slot controll



LIM ID: LIM Hardware Version: LIM Boot Version: LIM Firmware Version: LIM Software Version: Number of Ports: LIM Status: operational0 Common LIM1 SONET/SDH LIM



Switch Name: Slot X SYS Common LIM SW Version

0 LIM Timing1 File Download



ECC Configuration Updating the LIM Software

03Iss

in

ed

til

3. Select File Download. The File Download screen appears as shown in Figure 7-38.

Figure 7-38 File Download Screen

4. Select Start Download. The new LIM software download begins and its progress appearsthe Download Status: field which transitions from “idle” to “erasing flash” to “in progress”.The Download Progress (%): fields increments from 0% to 100%.

When the download is complete, the Download Progress (%): field indicates “100%” and the Download Status: field indicates “successful”. After about 30 seconds, the Download Progress %: field returns to “0” and the Download Status: field returns to “idle”.

5. Select Restart LIM .

6. At the prompt select Cold Start. This forces the LIM to restart and execute the newly loadsoftware.

Note The Auto Upgrade parameter shown in Figure 7-38, File Download screen, is NOT supported.

Note Do not reset a LIM or its associated slot controller during a software File Download. Wait unthe file download is complete before restarting the LIM or slot controller. A Failed message indicates the download was not successful. For additional information refer to the Events log for the appropriate Cell Controller.


Switch Name: Slot X SYS File Download SW Version

0 Start Download: no Download Progress (%): 0 Download Status: idle1 Auto Upgrade: off2 Restart LIM: no



ECC Configuration Configure Managed VP Services

hapterection

ts in

e

ed for

(VCsed VP)

Configure Managed VP ServicesManaged VP Service s are used to groom VCs to conform to a VP traffic contract. Refer to C4 of the Xedge Application Guide for information on how managed VPs can be used. This sdescribes the necessary configurations for the following Managed VP Services:

• MTS

• VPC Endpoints

• VP Service Category Queues

The configuration of a VP Service Category Queue differs from that of MTS or VPC Endpointhat MTS or a VPC Endpoint must exist prior to a VP Service Category Queue.

MTS and VPC Endpoint Configuration

To configure MTS perform the following:

1. In the PVC Resource Table, configure the VC Switching Range of the ECC. For informationon VC Switching Range, refer to the section Defining VP and VC Switching Ranges in thPVC Resource Table on page 16-7 of Chapter 16: Bandwidth Allocation and Reservation. TheVC VPI End Range must be at least as high as the highest MTS VPI (i.e. the VPI’s usMTS’s must be within the links VC VPI switching range).

2. Before configuring a managed VP, all active VCs that will be shaped by the managed VPintended to be configured, currently in a running state with a VPI the same as a managmust be set to an idle state first.

3. Establish a Telnet session with the ECC Cell Controller (or configure using SNMP).




03Iss


5. Select Managed VP Service. The Managed VP Service screen is displayed as shown inFigure 7-40.

Figure 7-40 Managed VP Service Screen



00 system 54 Prefix Group01 interfaces 66 E-Series LIM Information02 at 67 Slot Controller Statistics03 ip 68 Managed VP Service04 icmp 69 ATM Port05 tcp 95 Node Status06 udp 97 IMA07 snmp 101 QAAL208 System Information12 Static Routing16 Virtual Circuit Status20 Billing Records24 SVC Configuration/Status40 OAM Configuration/Status41 ILMI Configuration/Status43 CAC Configuration53 Address GroupSelect option:Enter group number, save As, Load, Save, sTatus, eXit,Last save file is `/$/config.cfg'.


GDC Xedge Switch: Slot 1 Managed VP Service SW Version

0 MTS Enable: true MTS Enable Status: true1 Configuration and Status2 VC Summary Table




p tp

1.

6. Set MTS Enable to true and Warm Start the ECC to enable MTS.

7. After the Warm Start , verify the Managed VP Service screen shows MTS Enable Statusset to true as shown in Figure 7-40.

8. From the Managed VP Service screen select Configuration and Status. The Configurationand Status screen is displayed as shown in Figure 7-41.

Figure 7-41 Configuration and Status Screen

Table 7-12 Managed VP Service Screen Parameters


MTS Enable Enables or disables MTS Multi-Tier Shaping. MTS functionality is not enabled until MTS Enable Status is true.true = enabledfalse = disabled

Warm Start

MTS Enable Status Status of MTS Enabletrue = enabledfalse = disabled

Read Only

Note If using MTS and MTS Enable Status is false, perform steps 6 and 7 below. Otherwise, skistep 8.

Note When MTS Enable Status = true, only link0 can be used since enabling MTS disables Link


GDC Xedge Switch: Slot 1 Configuration and Status SW VersionNo Link VPI Type PCR Actual PCR Bandwidth Available CDVT

0 0 5 vpcendpoint 250000 249795 149770 300

Select option:Add entry, Enter entry number to edit, Extra detail, Kill entry,Right, eXit



03Iss

9. Select Add entry.

10. Follow the screen prompts and Set Link to the associated Link number.

11. Set VPI to the VPI of the service you are connecting to.

12. Set Type to vpcendpoint.

13. Select Extra detail . The Extra Detail of the Configuration and Status screen is displayed asshown in Figure 7-42.

Figure 7-42 Extra Detail of Configuration and Status Screen

Table 7-13 Configuration and Status Screen Parameters


Link Must always be set to 0. Immediate

Type Select vpcendpoin t. When MTS Enable = true , vpcendpoint is the MTS or Multi-Tier Shaper. Other options are: vpqueucbr , vpqueuevbrrt , vpqueuevbrnrt , and vpqueueubr

Immediate

VPI The desired VPI to which all VCs will be shaped to a VP, with a CBR contract, specified in PCR and CDVT.

Immediate


GDC Xedge Switch: Slot 1 Configuration and Status SW VersionDetail of Configuration and Status entry 0

Link : 0 Current Shaped : 0 VPI : 5 Num of Dropped : 0 Type : vpcendpoint Num of xmitted : 00 PCR : 44 Num of CLP1 xmi: 0 Actual PCR : 44 6 Admin State : valid Bandwidth Avail: 44 Operational Sta: running1 CDVT : 0 7 Disable VC Poli: true2 Overbooking Fac: 100 8 Peak Rate Limit: 03 UBR BW Reserved: 4004 Max UBR Connect: 1024 Current UBR Con: 0 Max Num Connect: 1024 Current Num of : 0 Max Shaping Buc: 8029 Current Shaping: 05 MTS Max Q Size : 100Select option:Add entry, Enter entry number to edit, Kill entry, Summary, eXit



14. Select PCR. Set the PCR to the PCR of the service you are connecting to.

15. Select CDVT.

16. If MTS, you can configure the following additional parameters:

• Overbooking

• UBR BW Reserved

• Max UBR Connections

• MTS Max Q Size

• Disable VC Policing

• Peak Rate Limit

• VBR BE Enabled

17. If VPC Endpoint, you can configure the following additional parameters:


• Peak Rate Limit

Table 7-14 Extra Detail of Configuration and Status Screen


PCR Peak Cell Rate (cps) of the Shaped VP.Range is 44cps min , to line rate, max for MTS.Range is 44cps to line rate for VPC Endpoint.Range is 44cps to PCR of VPC Endpoint for VP Service Category Queue.Note: Can be increased while the VP is in the running

state up to the link bandwidth without restriction. PCR can not be decreased below the level required to support existing VCs.

Immediate

Actual PCR Displays the Actual Shaping Rate plus 50ppm. This may be different than the PCR of the VP because of the shaping engine granularity. If the rate is different than the VP PCR, it will always be lower, to guarantee traffic will conform to the VP Service.Note: Since the Peak Shaping rate may vary between

-50ppm and +50ppm, the Actual Shaping Rate to be used for CAC will be adjusted by +50ppm, to account for far-end tolerances in far-end policers.

Read Only

Bandwidth Avail Bandwidth Available. Used for Bandwidth CAC. Displays the remaining bandwidth of the Shaped VP available to booking additional connections (Available = Actual - CAC of current connections).When Bandwidth Avail = 0, all connections except UBR

will be rejected.Note: Available is adjusted to account for worst-case

tolerance (-50ppm) of the local oscillator.

Read Only




03Iss

CDVT Cell Delay Variation Tolerance. Defines the CDVT that will be used by the shaper for the specified VP.Range= 2 cell intervals min, or 10,000 usec max for MTS. Range=0-10,000; CDVT for VPC Endpoints without MTS is used for CAC purposes only.Example: one timeslot = 184 cps(1/184) x 2 = 10869usec, therefor use 10,000.Note: Can be changed while MTS is in running state.

Immediate

Overbooking Fac Overbooking Factor for a VP queue or a MTS (does not apply to VPC Endpoint). Specifies the overbooking factor for the Reserved Bandwidth (UBRBWReserved ). Overbooking on a MTS applies to VBR-NRT VCCs only (Overbooking of VBR-RT connections must be performed by a VBR-RT Service Category Queue.) Overbooked VBR-NRT VCCs will be CAC’d as VBR-NRT but will be treated as UBR when shaped.Restrictions on overbooking a MTS : Overbooking can not be enabled if there are existing UBR connections on the MTS already. Once overbooking is enabled, no UBR connections are accepted by the MTS.Range for MTS = 100 to 10000.Range for VBR-RT Service Category Queue = 100 to 250.Range for VBR-NRT Service Category Queue=100 to 1000.Note: This parameter can be increased without restriction while the vpcendpoint is in the running state. Overbooking can not be decreased below the level required to support the VCs currently on the vpcendpoint while the vpcendpoint is running.Note: VPC Endpoints without MTS cannot be overbooked.Note: CBR and UBR Service Category Queues cannot be overbooked.Examples of overbooking are as follows:100 => overbooking is disabled101 => max PCR is 1.01 x PCR102 => max PCR is 1.02 x PCR150 => max PCR is 1.5 x PCR200 => max PCR is 2 x PCR250 => max PCR is 2.5 x PCR300 => max PCR is 3 x PCR350 => max PCR is 3.5 x PCR500 => max PCR is 5 x PCR1000 => max PCR is 10 x PCR2000 => max PCR is 20 x PCR10000 => max PCR is 100 x PCR

Immediate

UBR BW Reserved(For MTS Only)

UBR Bandwidth Reservation. For MTS. Allows a portion of the MTS Bandwidth to be reserved for UBR. The amount specified here will be treated by CAC as a connection. Bandwidth Available will be reduced by the amount specified here.Range = 0 to PCR of MTS, cps .Note: Can be changed while MTS is in running state.

Immediate






Max UBR Connect(For MTS Only)

Restricts MTS to number of UBR connections specified.Range = 0 to 1024Default = 1024Note: Can be changed while MTS is in running state.Note: Can set for MTS and UBR Service Category only.

Immediate

Current UBR Con Current number of UBR Connections booked to this MTS or UBR Service Category Queue.

Read Only

Max Num Connect Specifies the maximum number of connections that can be placed on a vpcendpoint .Range: 0 to 1024Note: Can not be reduced below the current number of connections.

Immediate

Current Num of Current number of connections booked at this VPC Endpoint, MTS or Service Category Queue..

Read Only

Max Shaping Buc Maximum Shaping Bucket Level. This is status of the calculated maximum size of the bucket being used by the shaper for MTS and Service Category Queue.

Read Only

Current Shaping Current Shaping Bucket Size. Displays current fill level of the shaping bucket for MTS and Service Category Queue.

Read Only

MTS Max Q Size MTS Maximum Queue Size. This is the queue used in the egress buffer by second level shaper. At a minimum, queue size should equal the maximum number of connections in the VP Queue (to avoid dropping cells at VP Queue). Units = cellsRange = 0 to 64000Default = 100

Immediate

Current Shaped Current Shaped Queue Size. Displays the current fill level of the queue used by second stage shaper for MTS and Service Category Queue.Units = cells

Read Only

Num of Dropped If the second stage shaper should become congested such that the egress queue overruns, this counter will tally the number of cells dropped due to congestion for MTS and Service Category Queue only.

Read Only

Num of xmitted Number transmitted clp0 and clp1 cells. This is a counter tallying the number of cells of the full stream, clp0s and clp1s for MTS and Service Category Queue only.

Read Only

Num of CLP1 xmi Number of transmitted CLP1 cells. This as a counter tallying the number of clp1 cells transmitted from this MTS, for MTS and Service Category Queue only.

Read Only

Admin State Valid indicates MTS has been created and is in use.Invalid for snmp to remove. Can only be removed when all VCs terminating on MTS, VPC Endpoint or Service Category Queue are idled or removed.

Immediate






03Iss

Operational Sta Operational State. Status of the vpcendpoint .Running = indicates there are no VCs in use with same VPI as MTS, that are not included in MTS.Note: MTS is VPSwitching, a collection of VC’s. linkbandwidthnotavail = The vpcendpoint can not be activated because there is not enough bandwidth available on the link (see svcBackwardCellrateAvailable in the SVC Resource Table).logicalLinkbandwidthnotavail : The vpcendpoint can not be activated because there is not enough bandwidth available on the Logical Link (see svcBackwardCellrateAvailable in the SVC Resource Table).vpctBandwidthNotAvailable = The VP queue can not be activated because there is not enough bandwidth available in the logical VP or MTS that is associated with the explicit VP.vpnotavailable = Existing PVP or SPVP using the same VPI.logicallinkconfiguredasuser = The vpcendpoint can not be activated because the logical link has been configured as user (see svcIntType in the SVC Resource Table).vpinotinrange = The specified VPI is not in the range of the physical or logical link.MTSrebootrequired = Enable MTS has been set but the ECC has not been rebooted.internalerror : Internal error while attempting to create the vpcendpoint . Contact GDC.cantcreate = VPC Termination point can not be created for one of the following reasons: (1) MTS is not supported on the T1/E1 LIM. (2) ATM port is not available.

Read Only

Disable VC Poli This disables policing for cells being received into the MTS from the ATM Network side.Enabled = trueDisabled = falseDefault = true

Immediate

Peak Rate Limit For nrt-VBR connections only. Shaping factor for VC; Defines the peak shaping rate.PSR is defined as:((1 - PRL / 100 X SCR) + (PRL / 100 X PCR))

Immediate

VBR BE Enable(For MTS Only)

Enabled = VBR-NRT connections will consume up to PCR of MTS. (See Xedge Technical Reference guide for details.)Disabled = VBR-NRT VCs shaped according to traffic parameters of VCC.Default - disabled

Immediate





ECC Configuration Configure VP Service Category Queue

y

.

Configure VP Service Category QueueTo configure VP Service Category Queue, perform the following configuration steps:

1. Create MTS or VPC Endpoint that will provide the container for the VP Service CategorQueue.

2. Establish a Telnet session with the ECC Cell Controller (or configure using SNMP).



4. Select Managed VP Service. The Managed VP Service screen is displayed as shown inFigure 7-44.

Note The PCR and CDVT of the MST or VPC Endpoint must be large enough for the VP Queue



00 system 54 Prefix Group01 interfaces 66 E-Series LIM Information02 at 67 Slot Controller Statistics03 ip 68 Managed VP Service04 icmp 69 ATM Port05 tcp 95 Node Status06 udp 97 IMA07 snmp 101 QAAL208 System Information12 Static Routing16 Virtual Circuit Status20 Billing Records24 SVC Configuration/Status40 OAM Configuration/Status41 ILMI Configuration/Status43 CAC Configuration53 Address GroupSelect option:Enter group number, save As, Load, Save, sTatus, eXit,Last save file is `/$/config.cfg'.



03Iss

Figure 7-44 Managed VP Service Screen

5. From the Managed VP Service screen select Configuration and Status. The Configurationand Status screen is displayed as shown in Figure 7-45.

Figure 7-45 Configuration and Status Screen


7. Follow the screen prompts and Set Link to the associated Link number.

8. Set VPI to the VPI of the service you are connecting to.


GDC Xedge Switch: Slot 1 Managed VP Service SW Version

0 MTS Enable: true MTS Enable Status: true1 Configuration and Status2 VC Summary Table



GDC Xedge Switch: Slot 1 Configuration and Status SW VersionNo Link VPI Type PCR Actual PCR Bandwidth Available CDVT

0 0 5 vpcendpoint 250000 249795 149770 300

Select option:Add entry, Enter entry number to edit, Extra detail, Kill entry,Right, eXit



is the d R.

t

9. Set Type to one of the following:

vpqueuecbrvpqueuevbrrtvpqueuevbrnrtvpqueuevbr

10. Select Extra detail . The Extra Detail of the Configuration and Status screen is displayed asshown in Figure 7-46.

Figure 7-46 Extra Detail of Configuration and Status Screen

11. Select the PCR of the VP Service Category Queue. Note that the upper limit of the PCRPCR of the MTS or VPC Endpoint.The PCR of the container VP may have to be adjusteupward at this point, in order for the VP Service category Queue to have the desired PC

12. Select CDVT.If the VP Service Category Queue is contained in a VPC Endpoint, withouMTS, the upper range of the CDVT will be that which will not violate CAC in the VPC Endpoint.

13. The following additional parameters can be configured. Refer to Table 7-14 for details.

• Overbooking Factor - only for VBR-RT and VBR-NRT Service category Queue.


• Peak Rate Limit - only for VBR-NRT Service category Queue

• Max UBR Connections - only for UBR VP Service Category Queue


GDC Xedge Switch: Slot 1 Configuration and Status SW VersionDetail of Configuration and Status entry 0

Link : 0 Current Shaped : 0 VPI : 5 Num of Dropped : 0 Type : vpcendpoint Num of xmitted : 00 PCR : 44 Num of CLP1 xmi: 0 Actual PCR : 44 6 Admin State : valid Bandwidth Avail: 44 Operational Sta: running1 CDVT : 0 7 Disable VC Poli: true2 Overbooking Fac: 100 8 Peak Rate Limit: 03 UBR BW Reserved: 4004 Max UBR Connect: 1024 Current UBR Con: 0 Max Num Connect: 1024 Current Num of : 0 Max Shaping Buc: 8029 Current Shaping: 05 MTS Max Q Size : 100Select option:Add entry, Enter entry number to edit, Kill entry, Summary, eXit


03Iss

nd itstionR500.

Xedge

2

2

2

5

Chapter 8: ETH Configuration

Chapter Overview

This chapter describes how to configure and manage the ETH Adaptation Controller aassociated Line Interface Modules (LIMs), the DAUI and QTLIM. You can find status informain Chapter 13, ETH Entity and Status of the GDC Xedge Diagnostics Guide, Part Number 032You can find an overview and a list of features in Chapter 9, Ethernet Adaptation of the GDC Switch Applications Overview, Part Number 032R300. The topics in this chapter include:


Configuring ETH for Data Transfer ................................................................................8-2

Operation of ETH for Slot 0/Switch Fabric Redundancy ...............................................8-2

Define the DLIM in Slot-0..................................................................................................... 8-3


Configure the ETH IP Identity............................................................................................... 8-6

ETH DOC Screen Parameters..........................................................................................8-7

Configure the Physical to Logical Mappings........................................................................ 8-8

MappingTable Screen Parameters....................................................................................8-9

ETH Physical Entities.....................................................................................................8-10

ETH Logical Entities......................................................................................................8-11

Configure the Bridges.......................................................................................................... 8-1

SYSIB Display and Management Screen Parameter Definitions...................................8-14

802.1D Spanning Tree Group Screen Parameters..........................................................8-15

PortTable Screen Parameters..........................................................................................8-18

Enable/Disable 802.1D Spanning Tree................................................................................ 8-20

Bridge Info Table Screen Parameters.............................................................................8-21

Configure Tunnels................................................................................................................ 8-2

Tunnel Table Screen Parameters....................................................................................8-23

Conserving Resources.......................................................................................................... 8-2

Configuring ETH Adaptation Controller, Redundant Slot 0............................................... 8-26

ETH Slot 0 Standby (Redundant)...................................................................................8-26


ETH Configuration Configuration Summary

within GDC

reateridge

ing

tch via

Configuration Summary

To configure the ETH Adaptation Controller you can either use the craftport menu system the ETH, or the GDC ProSphere Network Management System. For information on theProSphere Network Management System, refer to the GDC ProSphere user Manual. The earlierversion of this controller (MS/QED) allowed you to enable/disable links and tunnels to clogical bridges. With the ETH Adaptation Controller, you map links and tunnels to bridges. Bports are defined based on the 802.1d MAC bridge standard. Table 8-1 and Table 8-2 define themappings between physical links or tunnels to bridges.

Configuring ETH for Data Transfer

To configure the ETH Adaptation Controller for data transfer, you typically perform the followprocedures:

Define the DLIM in Slot-0

Configure the ETH IP Identity

Configure the Physical to Logical Mappings

Configure the Bridges

Enable/Disable 802.1D Spanning Tree

Configure Tunnels

Conserving Resources

Operation of ETH for Slot 0/Switch Fabric Redundancy

Hardware settings must be defined before installation. Refer to the GDC Xedge Switch HardwareInstallation Guide, GDC Part Number 032R440. Refer to the Configuring ETH AdaptationController, Redundant Slot 0 on page 8-26 for a description of Slot-0 redundancy.

For the instructions that follow, it is assumed that you are connected to the GDC Xedge swia VT100 terminal to the management port.

Once you have completed these procedures, refer to Chapter 16: Bandwidth Allocationand Reservation for allocating resources, and Chapter 17: Configuring Connections, forconfiguring PVCs and SPVCs.

Table 8-1 Physical Link to Bridge Port Mapping

Physical links Physical Index Bridge port

0-3 2-5 1-4

Table 8-1

Table 8-2 Tunnel Number to Bridge Port Mapping

Tunnel number Physical Index Bridge port

1-127 6-132 5-131

Table 8-2

8-2 GDC Xedge Switch Configuration Guide 032R400-V620Configuration Guide Issue 03

ETH Configuration Define the DLIM in Slot-0

03Iss

ptationmust

nd

Define the DLIM in Slot-0The Slot-0 Controller sends a health check signal that detects the presence of the ETH AdaController in the installed slot. Before you can configure the ETH Adaptation Controller, you select a DLIM type for it in the Slot-0 Physical Layout.

1. From the Slot-0 Controller Root Menu, select Manage configuration. The MIB Display andManagement screen appears.

2. Select the Slot 0 Configuration/Status menu option and press the enter key. The Slot 0Configuration/Status screen appears.


4. Select Goto row and enter the number of the slot in which the ETH Adaptation Controller aits DLIM are installed, then press the Enter key (for example, if the ETH is in Slot-6, typeg toselect Goto row, then type 6 and press the Enter key).

5. Select Extra detail. The Physical Layout, Detail of Physical Layout entry “X” appears asshown in Figure 8-1. The screen parameters are described in Physical Layout ScreenParameters on page 8-4.

6. At the Select option: prompt, select the DLIM Type .

7. From the list of DLIMs displayed, select either: dAUI for the DAUI LIM.or qtlim for the QTLIM.



10. Select eXit to return to the Root Menu. This completes the Define the DLIM in Slot-0procedure.

11. Proceed to Configure the ETH IP Identity on page 8-6.



Slot

Figure 8-1 Extra Detail of Physical Layout Entry “X”


The Physical Layout menu screen allows you to view and set the following parameters for Controllers and their DLIMs in the Slot-0 Physical Layout. Table 8-3 lists the Physical Layoutparameter definitions. The default values are indicated by d.



Slot No Displays the number of the slot currently under review. NA


Immediate

Type When the Slot Controller has been installed, the application code has booted and is running, and the config update has been passed to the Slot-0 controller, the Type field identifies the type of Slot Controller installed in the slot. In this case, the Slot Controller is recognized as a type eth .

NA, read only

DLIM Type Enables you to specify the DLIM type that is installed from a list of possible DLIMs. The ETH Adaptation Controller supports two DLIMs, the DAUI and the QTLIM, both identified as type:G - dAUI

Immediate

Version Indicates the version of application software running on the ETH Adaptation Controller.

Immediate



Switch Name: Slot 0 SYS Physical Layout SW VersionDetail of Physical Layout entry x

Slot No : 0 DOC Ser # : 07269900070 Name : Slot 00 DOC HW Ver : 1.0A Type : eth Slot MAC Addres: 00c064403be21 DLIM Type : dAUI Last State Chan: ( 0:00:44) Version : 51c8 Lst Chngd Link : link 3 State : active Lst Previous St: off2 Reset Slot : no3 Required State : normal Changed State : no4 Associated Slot: 0 slot0PhyLink0St: up slot0PhyLink1St: up slot0PhyLink2St: down slot0PhyLink3St: down Slot Ser # : 0726990007 Slot HW Ver : 8.0NSelect option:Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row,Press ^J for extra help on this item, Summary, eXit



03Iss

State Indicates the current state of the Slot Controller. Possible states are:absen t: the slot may be empty or the Slot Controller has lost communicationsactive : the full feature software has been loaded and is runningbootmode : the full feature software has not been loaded; the software may not be present or the rotary switch may be set to bootmode

NA, read only

Reset Slot Enables a reset (toggle) of the slot. This is the equivalent of a Warm restart , Normal restart command combination found in the Root Menu of the Slot Controller. It is necessary when certain configuration changes are made to the settings of the Slot Controller:yes : Type y to reset the slot.N - nod: Type n to exit this option without resetting the Slot Controller.

Immediate

Required State Enables you to set the required state of the slot.

A - normal d: the normal state required for runningB - shutdown : stops the slot from runningC - main : not supportedD - shadow : not supported

Immediate


NA, read only

Associated Slot Not used. NA

slot0PhyLink0St Indicates the current status of Link-0. The possible states are:up : the Slot Controller and the DLIM have been installed, the DLIM has been selected and recognized, and signal has been detecteddown : may indicate an incomplete installation, selection of the wrong DLIM, or signal has not been detectedstop : indicates this link is disabled

NA, read only

slot0PhyLink1St Same as slot0PhyLink0St except reports on Link-1. NA, read only




NA, read only


NA, read only


NA, read only


NA, read only


Immediate





ETH Configuration Configure the ETH IP Identity

e usesller inure to

TH

TH

.

TH

to

Configure the ETH IP IdentityThe IP address Slot-0 gives to all Slot Controllers in a node is internal to the node. GDC Xedgthis address primarily for MOLN. You need to assign a unique IP address for an ETH Controa slot other than zero (or zero standby) to connect it to a LAN. Use the following procedconfigure the ETH IP identity:

1. From the Root Menu of the Slot-0 Controller, establish a telnet session with the EAdaptation Controller. The Root Menu of the ETH Adaptation Controller will appear.

2. From the Root Menu of the ETH Adaptation Controller, select Manage configuration. TheMIB Display and Management screen for the ETH Adaptation Controller appears.

3. From the MIB Display and Management menu screen, select the Ethernet DOC menuoption, and press the Enter key. The Ethernet DOC screen appears as shown in Figure 8-2.The screen parameters are described in ETH DOC Screen Parameters on page 8-7.

4. Select the qeDocIpAddress: option. At the prompt enter the IP address (identity) for the Eon the LANs it is connected to.

5. Select the qeDocIpMask: option. At the prompt enter the IP mask for the ETH IP address

6. Select the qeDocIpBCast: option. At the prompt enter the IP broadcast identity for the Eon the LANs it is connected to.

7. Exit to the MIB Display and Management screen. If you made changes and are readyperform a “warm start” continue to step 8, otherwise select Save and then proceed toConfigure the Physical to Logical Mappings on page 8-8.

8. Exit to the Root Menu and save your changes.

9. Select Warm start from the Root Menu. At the prompt select Normal (enter a y for yes).This completes the Configure the ETH IP Identity procedure.

10. Proceed to Configure the Physical to Logical Mappings on page 8-8.

Note If you make any change in step 4, step 5 and/or step 6, you must perform a Warm start, Normal command combination (found in the Root Menu) for the changes to take effect.


ETH Configuration Configure the ETH IP Identity

03Iss

Figure 8-2 Ethernet DOC Screen

ETH DOC Screen Parameters

The Ethernet DOC screen allows you to set the attributes listed in Table 8-4 for the ETHAdaptation Controller.

Table 8-4 Ethernet DOC Screen Definitions


Tunnel Table Displays the Tunnel Table. NA

qeDocIpAddress Enables/indicates the setting of the IP network address for the ETH Adaptation Controller.

Warm Start,Normal

qeDocIpMask Enables/indicates the setting of the subnet mask dependent on the net/subnet design in which the ETH is installed.

Warm Start,Normal

qeDocIpBCast Enables/indicates the setting of the broadcast address dependent on the IP net/subnet installation design.

Warm Start,Normal

Bridge Info Table Is used to enable/disable the 802.1D spanning tree for a bridge. NA

Table 8-4


Switch Name: Slot x SYS Ethernet DOC SW Version

0 Tunnel Table1 qeDocIpAddress: 172.16.6.12 qeDocIpMask: 255.255.0.03 qeDocIpBCast: 172.16.6.2554 Bridge Info Table



ETH Configuration Configure the Physical to Logical Mappings

and

lt, theical

ou

5

c, ortity) inthe

e 2,

ll

Configure the Physical to Logical MappingsThe MappingTable allows you to add and delete associations, between logical bridgesphysical links or ETH tunnels.

The logical entities are the local ethernet bridges on the ETH Adaptation Controller. By defausoftware has one pre-configured physical to logical mapping (entry): ETH LIM link-0 (physindex #2) to bridge 1 (logical entity #0). Note that you can go to an entry and use the Kill entrycommand to delete it from the table.

If you want to locally bridge ethernet traffic from ETH Link-1 to ETH Link-3 using bridge 2, ywould add an entry to the MappingTable and enter 1 for the LogIndex and enter 3 for thePhyIndex. Then add another entry to the MappingTable and enter 1 for the LogIndex and enterfor the PhyIndex.

If you want to bridge ethernet traffic from an ETH link across the GDC Xedge switch fabriacross an ATM network, you need to create a tunnel and associate it to a bridge (logical enthe MappingTable. You would also need to associate the ETH link to the bridge in MappingTable.

1. From the MIB Display and Management screen, select the Physical to Logical Mappingsmenu option. The Physical to Logical Mappings screen appears.

2. From the Physical to Logical Mappings screen, select the MappingTable menu option, andpress the Enter key. The MappingTable appears as shown in Figure 8-3. The screenparameters are described in MappingTable Screen Parameters on page 8-9.

3. At the Select option: prompt, select Add entry. The software prompts you for a LogIndex:[0-3] (logical index number).

4. Enter the number for the logical entity (bridge). The logical entities are defined in ETHLogical Entities on page 8-11. For example, enter 0 (zero) for bridge 1, or enter 1 for bridgor enter 2 for bridge 3, or enter 3 for bridge 4.

5. The software prompts you for a PhyIndex: [2-132] (Physical Index number). The physicaentities are defined in ETH Physical Entities on page 8-10. Enter the number for the physicaentity you want to associate with the bridge (logical entity).

6. Repeat step 3 to step 5 for each physical to logical association you want to make.


8. Select Save. This completes the Physical to Logical Mapping procedure.

9. Proceed to Configure the Bridges on page 8-12.



03Iss

Figure 8-3 MappingTable Screen

MappingTable Screen Parameters

The MappingTable screen parameters are described in Table 8-5.

Table 8-5 Mapping Table Definitions


No Indicates the number of the association currently under review. This association is between a logical bridge and a physical ethernet or ATM port.

NA, read only

LogIndex Indicates the number of the logical bridge in the association in the range: (0-3).

NA, read only

Phy Index Indicates the number of the entity in the association in the range: (2-132).

NA, read only

Table 8-5


Switch Name: Slot 0 SYS MappingTable SW VersionNo LogIndex PhyIndex

0 0 21 0 62 0 73 0 84 0 95 0 106 0 117 0 128 0 139 0 1410 0 1511 0 1612 0 1713 0 1814 0 1915 0 20Select option:Add entry, Down, Enter entry number to edit, Extra detail, Goto row,Kill entry, eXit



TMngs or

3 andnel 0 is

orge to

ETH Physical Entities

This group defines configuration identities of the ETH Controller, the ETH links and the Atunnels (in that order). This group is read only and is used when configuring physical mappibridge/port associations. A portion of the Physical Table is shown in Table 8-6.

In total, there are 133 entries in the Physical Table, however, only Ethernet links 0 throughtunnels 1 through 127, or entries 2-132 are used in bridge-port associations. Note that tunnot supported in the Physical Table.

To review the entities found in the Physical Table:

1. From the MIB Display and Management screen, select the Physical Entities menu option.The Physical Entities screen appears.

2. Select the Physical Table item number. The Physical Table appears in Summary view (oneline per entity).

3. At the Select option: prompt, enter the Physical Index number for the entity you wish toreview, and press Enter.

4. Selecting Extra detail on an entry provides additional information for that entity. Fexample, Figure 8-4 shows the Extra detail screen for Physical Index 2. Select S to chanSummary view of Physical Table with the selected entity at the top of the screen.


Table 8-6 ETH Physical Table

No PhyIndexPhysical

DescriptionPhyVendorType PhyContainedIn PhyClass

0 0 MS2 Controller MS2 BaseCard 0 module

1 1 QE2 DOC QEDOC 1 module

2 2 Enet Link #1 (ETH LIM Link-0)

Ethernet 2 port

3 3 Enet Link #2(ETH LIM Link-1)

Ethernet 2 port


Ethernet 2 port


Ethernet 2 port

6 6 Tunnel #1 ATM 2 port






For the physical configuration identity of all other tunnels (7-132), add 5 to the tunnel number. This yields the physical index number for the tunnel.

Table 8-6



03Iss

inglein

Figure 8-4 Extra Detail of Physical Table Entry 2

ETH Logical Entities

The Logical Entities group is the new “logical bridge” group. Selecting this group brings up a ssub-element, the Logical Table, shown in Figure 8-5. The Logical Table entities are described Table 8-7.

Table 8-7 Logical Entity

No LogIndex Logical Description Logical Type Community Logical TAddress

0 0 802.1 Bridge #1 dot 1dBridge bridge1




Table 8-7


Switch Name: Slot 0 SYS Physical Table New EventDetail of Physical Table entry 2

PhyIndex : 2 Physical Description : Enet Link #1 PhyVendorType : Ethernet PhyContainedIn : 2 PhyClass : port PhyParentRelPos : 1 Name : Port #1

Select option:Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row,Press ^J for extra help on this item, Summary, Up, eXit


ETH Configuration Configure the Bridges

tatione #1

idgeid notctedge 1ysical

ter aeter and

Configure the Bridges

Bridges enable ethernet traffic to cross over between ports (links) on the ETH AdapController. The ETH Adaptation Controller has four bridges (logical entities). By default Bridg(logical entity 0) is associated with ETH LIM link-0 (physical entity 2) in the ETH MappingTable.If you map (associate) another physical entity with this bridge (logical entity), you will brethernet traffic between the link-0 and the physical entity. For example, providing that you d“kill” the default MappingTable entry, and you want transfer ethernet traffic from a LAN conneto Link-0 on the ETH to a LAN connected to Link-3, you would map physical entity 5 to brid(logical entity 0). To make use of the other three ETH bridges you need to map them to phentities in the MappingTable.

The ETH Logical Table enables you to configure the ETH bridges.

1. From the MIB Display and Management screen, select the Logical Entities menu option,and press the Enter key. The Logical Entities screen appears.

2. From the Logical Entities screen, select the Logical Table menu option. The Logical Tableappears as shown in Figure 8-5.

Figure 8-5 Logical Table Screen

3. Select the goto Community command.

4. Enter the row number for the bridge to be configured.

5. Select the 802.1D Spanning Tree Group and press the Enter key. The Spanning Tree Groupscreen appears for the row entered as shown in Figure 8-6.

6. At the Select option: prompt, enter the option number of a parameter to be configured. Ennew value in the range specified (or make no change), and press Enter to set the paramreturn to the previous screen.


Switch Name: Slot 0 SYS Logical Table New EventNo LogIndex Logical Description Logical Type Community Logical TAddress

0 0 802.1D Bridge #1 dot1dBridge bridge11 1 802.1D Bridge #2 dot1dBridge bridge22 2 802.1D Bridge #3 dot1dBridge bridge33 3 802.1D Bridge #4 dot1dBridge bridge4

Select option:goto Community, Enter entry number to edit, Extra detail, Goto row,Press ^J for extra help on this item, Right, eXit



03Iss

asn

red

e.

7. To configure the PortTable for the selected bridge, at the Select option: prompt, select thePortTable and press the Enter key.

8. Select Extra detail . The Detail of PortTable entry 0 screen for the selected bridge appearsshown in Figure 8-8. The screen parameters are described in PortTable Screen Parameters opage 8-18.


10. Select Down to transition to the other detail of PortTable entry screens for the selected bridg

11. Repeat step 9 for each of the other detail of PortTable entry screens.

12. To configure the PortTable for each of the other bridges, select eXit three times to return tothe Logical Table.

13. Repeat step 3 through step 11 for each bridge to be configured.

14. Select eXit (repeatedly) until you return to the MIB Display and Management screen.

15. Select Save. This completes the Bridge Configuration procedure.

16. Proceed to Enable/Disable 802.1D Spanning Tree on page 8-20.

Figure 8-6 SYSIB Display and Management for Bridge1 Screen


Switch name: Slot 0 SYSIB Display and Management for Bridge1 SW Version

0 802.1D Base Group1 802.1D Spanning Tree Group2 802.1D Filtering Database Group3 802.1D Permanent Database Group

Select option:Enter group number, save As, Load, sTatus, eXit,Last save file is `/config.cfg'



SYSIB Display and Management Screen Parameter Definitions

Figure 8-7 802.1D Spanning Tree Group Screen

Table 8-8 SYSIB Display and Management Screen Parameter Definitions


802.1D Base Group Displays bridge MAC address, number of ports/tunnels configured. This screen is a read-only.

NA, read only

802.1D Spanning Tree Group Enables spanning tree parameter viewing and settings.

NA

802.1D Filtering Database Group Displays all learned MAC addresses for the bridge and detailed port information.Selecting this option allows setting the time-out period of the Aging Timer. The time-out period, set in seconds, is for aging out dynamically learned forwarding information.Specification IEEE 802.1D-1990 recommends

using the default value of 300d seconds.

NA

802.1D Permanent Database Group Displays the 16 MAC addresses (0-15, left column) assigned to spanning tree by IEEE 802.1D (RFC 1493, Section 3.1.5). This function is typically used for permanently filtering the assigned spanning tree MAC addresses. Static addresses and ports can also be added (see note).Note: This item is reserved for future use.

NA

Table 8-8


Switch Name: Slot 0 SYS 802.1D Spanning Tree Group New Event

ProtoSpec: ieee8021d0 Priority: 32768 TimeSinceTopChange: 0 TopChanges: 0 DesignatedRoot: 8000000000000000 RootCost: 0 RootPort: 0 MaxAge: 2000 HelloTime: 200 HoldTime: 100 FwdDelay: 15001 BridgeMaxAge: 20002 BridgeHelloTime: 2003 BridgeFwdDelay: 15004 PortTable




03Iss

s for

802.1D Spanning Tree Group Screen Parameters

The 802.1D Spanning Tree Group screen enables the viewing and setting of the parameterthe spanning tree. The parameters are described in Table 8-9. The default values are indicated by d.

Note The definitions provided in Table 8-10 are from ANSI/IEEE Std 802.1D, 1993 edition.

Table 8-9 802.1D Spanning Tree Group Screen Parameter Definitions


ProtoSpec Indicates the protocol specification for the bridge, in this case, IEEE 802.1D.

NA, read only

Priority Enables/indicates the setting of priority for the

selected bridge in the range [0 - 65535] 32768d. The value of the write-able portion of the Bridge ID, i.e., the first two octets of the (8 octet long) Bridge ID. The other (last) 6 octets of the Bridge ID are given by the value of dot1dBaseBridgeAddress.

Immediate

TimeSinceTopChange Indicates the elapsed time since the last topology change to the Designated Root bridge.

NA, read only

TopChanges Indicates the incremental count of the number of topology changes to the Designated Root bridge.

NA, read only

DesignatedRoot The unique Bridge Identifier of the Bridge assumed to be the Root. This parameter is used as the value of the Root Identifier parameter in all Configuration BPDUs transmitted by the Bridge.

NA, read only

RootCost The cost of the path to the Root from this Bridge. It is equal to the sum of the values of the Designated Cost and Path Cost parameters held for the Root Port. When the Bridge is the Root this parameter has the value zero. This parameter is used:(1) To test the value of the Root Path Cost parameter conveyed in received Configuration BPDUs.(2) As the value of the Root Path Cost parameter offered in all Configuration BPDUs transmitted by the Bridge.

NA, read only




RootPort The Port Identifier of the Port that offers the lowest cost path to the Root, i.e., that Port for which the sum of the values of the Designated Cost and Path Cost parameters held for the Port is the lowest.If two or more Ports offer equal least cost paths to the Root, the Root Port is selected to be that with the highest priority Port Identifier held as the Designated Bridge Parameter for that Port. If two or more Ports offer equal least cost paths to the Root and hold the same Designated Bridge parameter values, then the Root Port is selected to be that with the highest priority Designated Port held for that Port. Finally, if two or more ports offer equal least cost paths to the Root and hold the same Designated Bridge and Designated Port parameter values, then the Root Port is selected to be that with the highest priority Port Identifier. The Port Identifiers for different Ports on the same Bridge are guaranteed to be different and thus enforce a tie-breaker. This parameter is used to identify the Port through which the path to the Root is established. It is not significant when the Bridge is the Root, and is set to zero.

NA, read only

MaxAge The maximum age of received protocol information before it is discarded.

NA, read only

HelloTime The time interval between the transmission of Configuration BPDUs by a Bridge that is attempting to become the Root or is the Root.

NA, read only

HoldTime This parameter specifies the minimum time period elapsing between the transmission of Configuration BPDUs through a given Bridge Port. No more than two Configuration BPDUs shall be transmitted in any Hold Time period.This parameter is a fixed parameter of the Bridge.

NA, read only

FwdDelay The time spent in the Listening State while moving from the Blocking State to the Learning State.The time spent in the Learning State while moving from the Listening State to the Forwarding State.The value used for the ageing time of dynamic entries in the Filtering Database while the Topology Change flag is set in protocol messages received from the Root.

NA, read only

BridgeMaxAge Enables/indicates the setting of the BridgeMaxAge

in the range [600 - 4000] 2000d. The value of the Max Age parameter when the Bridge is the Root or is attempting to become the Root.This parameter may be updated by management action.

Immediate

Table 8-9 802.1D Spanning Tree Group Screen Parameter Definitions (Continued)





03Iss

Figure 8-8 Extra Detail of PortTable Entry “X”

BridgeHelloTime Enables/indicates the setting of the

BridgeHelloTime in the range [100 - 1000] 200d. The value of the Hello Time parameter when the Bridge is the Root or is attempting to become the Root.The time interval between transmissions of Topology Change Notification BPDUs towards the Root when the Bridge is attempting to notify the Designated Bridge on the LAN to which its Root Port is attached of a topology change.This parameter may be updated by management action.

Immediate

BridgeFwdDelay Enables/indicates the setting of the BridgeFwdDelay

in the range [400-3000] 1500d. The value of the Forward Delay parameter when the Bridge is the Root or is attempting to become the Root.This parameter may be updated by management action.

Immediate

PortTable Enables the selection of the PortTable menu screen. The PortTable contains port-specific information for the Spanning Tree Protocol.

Immediate

Table 8-9 802.1D Spanning Tree Group Screen Parameter Definitions (Continued)




Switch Name:Slot x SYS PortTableDetail of PortTable entry 0

Port : 10 Priority: : 128 State : forwarding1 Enable : enabled2 PathCost : 100 DesignatedRoot : 000a00c064400201 DesignatedCost : 1 DesignatedBridge : 800000c064400a8c DesignatedPort : 8001 FwdTransitions : 3

Select option:Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row,Press ^J for extra help on this item, Summary, e Xit



nning

PortTable Screen Parameters

The PortTable screen enables the viewing and setting of port-specific parameters for the SpaTree Protocol for the selected bridge. The parameters are described in Table 8-10. The default

values are indicated by d.

Note The definitions provided in the following table are from ANSI/IEEE Std 802.1D, 1993 edition.

Table 8-10 PortTable Screen Definitions


Port Indicates the Port for which the information is being displayed.

NA, read only

Priority Enables: indicates the setting of the priority for the port in

the range [0 - 255] 128d. The value of the priority field which is contained in the first (in network byte order) octet of the (2 octet long) Port ID. The other octet of the Port ID is given by the value of dot1dStpPort.

Immediate

State The current state of the Port, i.e., Disabled, Listening, Learning, Forwarding, or Blocking.This parameter is used to control the acceptance of frames from the MAC Entity associated with the Port by the Forwarding and Learning Processes, the forwarding of frames by the Forwarding Process to that MAC Entity, and the transmission and reception of BPDUs.This parameter is updated by the action of the protocol.

NA, read only

Enable Enables/indicates the status of the port. The options are:A - enabled d

B - disabled

Immediate

PathCost Enables/indicates the setting of the PathCost in the range

[1 - 65535] 100d. The contribution of this port to the path cost of paths towards the spanning tree root which include the port. 802.1D-1990 recommends that the default value of this parameter be in inverse proportion to the speed of the attached LAN.

Immediate

DesignatedRoot The unique Bridge Identifier of the Bridge recorded as the Root in the Root Identifier parameter of Configuration BPDUs transmitted by the Designated Bridge for the LAN to which the Port is attached.This parameter is used to test the value of the Root Identifier parameter conveyed in received Configuration BPDUs.

NA, read only

DesignatedCost The cost of the path to the Root offered by the Designated Port on the LAN to which this Port is attached.This parameter is used to test the value of the Root Path Cost parameter conveyed in received Configuration BPDUs.

NA, read only

Table 8-10, (Sheet 1 of 2)



03Iss

DesignatedBridge The unique Bridge Identifier of the Bridge believed to be the Designated Bridge for the LAN associated with the Port.This parameter is used:(1) Together with the Designated Port and Port Identifier parameters for the Port to ascertain whether this Port should be the Designated Port for the LAN to which it is attached.(2) To test the value of the Bridge Identifier parameter conveyed in received Configuration BPDUs.

NA, read only

DesignatedPort The Port Identifier of the Bridge believed to be the Designated Port for the LAN associated with the Port.This parameter is used:(1) Together with the Designated Bridge and Port Identifier parameters for the Port to ascertain whether this Port should be the Designated Port for the LAN to which it is attached.(2) By management to determine the topology of the Bridged Local Area Network.

NA, read only

FwdTransitions Indicates the incremental count of the State changes of the Port.

NA, read only

Table 8-10 PortTable Screen Definitions (Continued)




ETH Configuration Enable/Disable 802.1D Spanning Tree

g the looksenablenits

e, findch LAN

include Tree.nally

s in

Enable/Disable 802.1D Spanning TreeEnabling the Spanning Tree option prevents network loops on multiple ETH ports by havinETH bridges dynamically discover a topology subset that is loop-free. Ideally, Spanning Treefor a topology subset that has a connection path between every pair of LANs. When you Spanning Tree on an ETH bridge, it transmits Configuration Bridge Protocol Data U(Configuration BPDUs). These Configuration BPDUs enable the bridges to; elect a root bridgthe shortest path between themselves and the root bridge, elect a designated bridge for eato forward packets to the root bridge, choose a root port to the root bridge, and select ports toin the Spanning Tree. Data traffic is transmitted between the ports included in the SpanningData traffic arriving at a port, that is not included in the Spanning Tree, is discarded. Additiodata traffic is never forwarded to a port that is not included in the Spanning Tree.

1. From the Root Menu of the ETH Adaptation Controller select Manage configuration. TheMIB Display and Management screen for the ETH Adaptation Controller will appear.

2. From the MIB Display and Management screen, select the Ethernet DOC menu option, andpress the Enter key. The Ethernet DOC screen appears.

3. From the Ethernet DOC screen, select the Bridge Info Table menu option. The Bridge InfoTable screen appears.

4. Select Extra detail. The Bridge Info Table, Detail of Bridge Info Table entry 0 appears asshown in Figure 8-9. The screen parameters are described in Bridge Info Table ScreenParameters on page 8-21.

5. If you want to disable spanning tree for this bridge, select Spanning Tree Enable, and at theprompt select disable (if spanning tree is already disabled you can select enable to enablespanning tree for this bridge).

6. Select Down to transition to the next entry in the table.

7. Repeat step 5 to step 6 for the remaining entries in the table (there is a total of four entriethe table).


9. Select Save. This completes the Enable/Disable 801.2D Spanning Tree procedure.

10. Proceed to Configure Tunnels on page 8-22.


ETH Configuration Enable/Disable 802.1D Spanning Tree

03Iss

Figure 8-9 Extra Detail of Bridge Info Table Entry 0

Bridge Info Table Screen Parameters

The Bridge Info Table screen allows you to view the parameters listed in Table 8-11 and to enable/disable the spanning tree for each bridge. The default values are indicated by d.

Table 8-11 Bridge Info Table Parameter Definitions


Logical Index Indicates the number of the logical bridge. NA, read only

Bridge Description Indicates the logical description of the bridge as an 802.1D Bridge #1 for entry 0. Entries 1, 2, and 3 will be described as 802.1D Bridge #2, 3, and 4 respectively.

NA, read only

Spanning Tree Enable Enables/indicates the spanning tree of the bridge being displayed as enabled/disabled:

A - enable d: Select this option to enable the spanning tree.B - disable : Select this option to disable the spanning tree.

Immediate

Table 8-11


Switch Name: Slot 0 SYS Bridge Info Table New EventDetail of Bridge Info Table entry 0

Logical Index : 0 Bridge Description : 802.1D Bridge #10 Spanning Tree Enable : enable



ETH Configuration Configure Tunnels

fic to fromciateH sidege ine00.

rs

red

for

re.

Configure TunnelsTunnels enable you to bring ethernet traffic over to ATM. They enable you to “map” this trafATM PVCs or SPVCs. You need to configure a tunnel when you want to send ethernet trafficone ETH Adaptation Controller to another across a GDC Xedge ATM Switch. You will assothis tunnel with a PVC/SPVC by using the actual tunnel number as the VCI value at the ETof the PVC/SPVC connection. You will also associate the tunnel with the ETH ethernet bridthe Mapping Table (Physical to Logical Mapping). For more information about tunnels seTunnels on page 9-7 of the GDC Xedge Switch Applications Overview, Part Number 032R3

1. Select the Tunnel Table menu option, and press the Enter key. The Tunnel Table screenappears.

2. At the Select option: prompt, enter Add. Tunnel 1 will be the first tunnel to appear.

3. Select Extra detail. The Tunnel Table, Detail of Tunnel Table entry 0 screen appears asshown in Figure 8-10. The screen parameters are described in Tunnel Table Screen Parameteon page 8-23.


5. If there are multiple entries in the table, select Down or Up to transition to the other entries inthe table.

6. At the Select option: prompt, enter the option number of the item or items to be configuredthose other entries and enter the configuration changes.


8. Select Save.

9. If changes were made to addresses in the Ethernet DOC screen, select eXit to return to theRoot Menu.

10. Select Warm restart.

11. Select Normal and reply Yes to the prompt. This completes the ETH Configuration procedu

12. Proceed to Chapter 16: Bandwidth Allocation and Reservation for allocating resources, andChapter 17: Configuring Connections, for configuring PVC and/or SPVCs.



03Iss

Figure 8-10 Extra Detail of Tunnel Table Entry “X”

Tunnel Table Screen Parameters

The Tunnel Table screen allows you to view and set the parameters listed in Table 8-12 for theETH Adaptation Controller. The default values are indicated by d.

Table 8-12 Tunnel Table Parameter Definitions


Tunnel No Indicates the tunnel ID. The table is sorted based on the value of this number. The tunnel number is used as the VCI for the PVC/SPVC that connects it to the remote ETH. The VPI is always 1. Do not add tunnels beyond #127.

NA, read only

Name Enables/indicates the setting of a mnemonic name for the tunnel entry. It has no function in the operation of the tunnel.

Immediate

Tunnel Type Enables/indicates the setting of the tunnel type. This option is not supported. The options are:A - unused

B - mac bridge d

NA

State Enables/indicates the setting of the tunnel state. The options are:A - idle : prevents data transfer over the tunnelB - use pvc : should be selected when using with a PVCC - use svc : should be selected when using with a SVCD - failedNote: A - idle must be selected when changing the Peak Cell

Rate.

Immediate



Switch Name: Slot 0 SYS Tunnel Table SW VersionDetail of Tunnel Table entry 0

Tunnel No : 1 7 Peak Cell Rate : pcr 960000 Name :1 Tunnel Type : mac bridge2 State : use svc Call State : active Frames in : 0 Frames out : 34746082 VPI : 1 VCI : 1 Priority : 0 Target Slot : 7 Target Link : 03 Destination Add:4 E.164 Sub-addre:5 Validity : valid6 RFC 1483 encap : noSelect option:Add entry, Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row, Kill entry,Press ^J for extra help on this item, Summary, eXit



Call State Indicates the call state as: active or idle . NA, read only

Frames in Reports the number of frames received from the switch fabric. NA, read only

Frames out Reports the number of frames sent to the switch fabric. NA, read only

VPI Indicates the destination VPI value used by the tunnel. NA, read only

VCI Indicates the destination VCI value used by the tunnel. NA, read only

Priority Indicates the priority setting for the handling of cells related to this interface. This is set as part of the ATM PVC configuration. (1 - high)

Immediate

Target Slot Indicates the number of the circuit destination slot. NA, read only

Target Link Indicates the number of the circuit destination link. NA, read only

Destination Add Enables/indicates the setting of the destination address for the tunnel. This is only required for SVC tunnels. Not supported.

NA

E.164 Sub-addre Enables/indicates the setting of the E.164 sub-address for the tunnel. This is only required for SVC tunnels. Not supported.

NA

Validity Enables/indicates the validity setting for the tunnel. The options are:A - valid d

B - invalid : removes the tunnel entry from the table.

Immediate

RFC 1483 encap Enables/indicates the setting of RFC 1483 encapsulation. The options are:yes : Type y to enable RFC 1483 LLC encapsulation.

nod: Type n to disable encapsulation.Note: Set to Y - yes if destination terminating circuit is non-GDC.

Immediate

Peak Cell Rate Enables/indicates the setting of the peak cell rate for the tunnel. The selectable PCRs and their estimated Ethernet throughput rates in kbit/s are(assuming a frame size of 256 bytes):A - pcr 96000 : 32768B - pcr 48000 : 16384C - pcr 32000 : 10922D - pcr 16000 : 5461E - pcr 8000 : 2730F - pcr 6000 : 2048G - pcr 3000 : 1024H - pcr 2000 : 682I - pcr 1000 : 341J - pcr 750 : 250K - pcr 500 : 170L - pcr 400 : 136

Note: Use the equivalent cell rate when configuring the peak and sustained forward rates for the PVC. Refer to Chapter 17: Configuring Connections.

Note: When changing the Peak Cell Rate , State must be set to idle .

Immediate

Table 8-12 Tunnel Table Parameter Definitions (Continued)




ETH Configuration Conserving Resources

03Iss

with

6, 7,

Conserving Resources

If a link in a configuration is not going to be utilized, the Slot Controller resources associatedthat link can be conserved by turning the link down in the ifTable. This is performed as follows.

1. From the MIB Display and Management screen, select the interfaces menu option.

2. Select the ifTable menu option. The summary screen of the ifTable appears as shown inFigure 8-11. The four links appear in Figure 8-11 (ifTable) as items No 5 through 8, ifIndex 6through 9, and ifDescr Elink 0 through Elink 3.

3. At the Select option: prompt, enter the item number of the link to be turned down, i.e., 5, or 8.

4. At the ifAdminStatus: A - upd, B - down, C - testing prompt, enter B.

5. If additional links are to be turned down, repeat the procedure for each link.

The ifAdminStatus item is the only user configurable item in the ifTable. The ifTable providesextensive performance information on each of the configured interfaces. Refer to the ETH Entityand Status chapter of the GDC Xedge Switch Diagnostics Guide (Part No. 032R500) for details.

Figure 8-11 ifTable Screen

Note If this procedure is used on ifIndex 10, the SFabric, i.e., the SFabric is changed to down, all ATM tunnels will be disabled.


Switch Name: Slot 0 SYS ifTable New EventNo ifIndex ifDescr ifType ifMtu ifSpeed ifPhysAddress ifAdminStatus

0 1 Local software 1518 1000000 up1 2 SLIP slip 1000 2400 up2 3 ATM other 1518 1000000 up3 4 TUNNEL other 1518 1000000 00c064401775 up4 5 OSERV slip 1000 38400 up5 6 Elink 0 ethernet 1518 1000000 00c064401776 up6 7 Elink 1 ethernet 1518 1000000 00c064401777 up7 8 Elink 2 ethernet 1518 1000000 00c064401778 up8 9 Elink 3 ethernet 1518 1000000 00c064401779 up9 10 SFabric other 1518 1000000 00c064401775 up



ETH Configuration Configuring ETH Adaptation Controller, Redundant Slot 0

ectionre in this

ementponsenother 1 take

or thec hasabricg, therst-cases is

henile will andronthen,

riod. (iflot-0

itchby)

Slot-0

fter it

r will the

rs,

Configuring ETH Adaptation Controller, Redundant Slot 0

ETH Slot 0 Standby (Redundant)

Although Slot-0 redundancy (Slot-0 standby) operation is transparent to the user, this sdescribes Slot-0 redundancy software and operational issues that are not covered elsewhemanual.

Redundant ETH and the XH Switch Fabric Issues

• Transfer of the Switch Fabric between Main and Standby is accomplished by the managprocessor via use of ‘healthcheck’ cells. If the processor fails to get a ‘healthcheck’ resfor 6 seconds, it assumes the Switch Fabric has failed (or has been removed). It takes asecond for the processor to initiate the switch-over (including 250ms for the transfer toplace) for a total of approximately 7 seconds (a ‘healthcheck period’). It is also possible fprocessor to take 2 ‘healthcheck periods’ to determine if a failure of the Switch Fabrioccurred, making the total time 13 seconds (maximum). Therefore, upon a Switch Ffailure, switch-over to the Standby Switch Fabric may take from 7 to 13 seconds. In testinswitch-over occurred between 7 and 10 seconds. The 13 seconds is a calculated wocondition. Total cell loss is 7 to 13 seconds for auto detect and switch-over. Total cell los1/4 second for manual switch-over when performing routine maintenance.

• The Root Menu screen displays the status of the Slot-0 Standby Slot Controller. Wredundancy is available, any configuration changes made and saved to the config.cfg fupdate the redundant Slot-0 Controller. The Root Menu will show File transfer = Activethe redundant controller LEDs will show a TFTP in-progress indication. All the module’s fpanel LEDs will be illuminated and then will sequence, one at a time, from top to bottom. Tthis sequence repeats.

• The ETH in Slot-0 (main) must receive a health check cell from itself within a 6 second peIf the health check fails, the XH switch fabric (main) will switch to the redundant XHavailable) and wait for the health check cell. If the health check is still not received, the SETH (main) will switch to the redundant Slot-0 ETH. If there isn’t a redundant XH swfabric available, the ETH in Slot-0 (main) will switch to the redundant ETH (standimmediately.

• The MAC / IP Address / E.164 address in Slot-0 main is transferred to the redundant (standby) module at bootup.

• The out-of-service controller only displays IP address and MAC address information acomes into service.

• If the node is power cycled, and Slot-0 controller is missing slave.cod, the Slot-0 controllecome up In-Service and In Boot Mode. The Slot-0 controller will not relinquish service toredundant Slot-0 (standby) module.

Note The binary files for the redundant controller must be manually loaded using the instructionsprovided in the Software Installation section of Chapter 2: Software Installation in this manual.

When redundancy is available, any configuration changes made and saved to the config.cfg file will update the redundant Slot-0 module automatically. As the file transfethe Root Menu will show File transfer = Active and the redundant controller LEDs will show a TFTP in-progress indication. All the module’s front panel LEDs will illuminate and then will illuminate, one at a time, from top to bottom. Then, this sequence repeats until the TFTP transfer is complete.



03Iss

n

Slot 0 Redundant Status and the Root Menu Screen

Refer to the Root Menu screen shown in Figure 8-12. Slot 0 Redundancy information is found othe right side of the screen.

The redundancy status parameters are defined in Table 8-13.

Figure 8-12 Root Menu Screen, highlighting the Slot 0 Redundancy information

Note Before removing an out-of-service Slot-0 controller, use the disable option on the Slot 0 Configuration/Status screen to disable the Slot-0. If you do not replace the controller withinapproximately 5 minutes, the Slot-0 reverts to normal out-of-service state.

Table 8-13 Root Menu Redundancy Status Parameter Definitions


Slot 0 Redund. available: Indicates the availability of Slot-0 redundancy as:Yes: the redundant module is activeNo: the redundant module is not active or not present

Immediate

Slot 0 Redund: Indicates the state of the Slot-0 redundant module as:Main in-service : main Slot-0 is activeMain out-service : main Slot-0 is not activeStandby in-service : standby Slot-0 activeStandby out-service : standby Slot-0 not active

Immediate

Table 8-13


Switch name: Slot 0 SYS Root Menu SW version

ETH 00 : Active up down down down Received datacells = 1213966ACP 01 : Active up up Transmitted datacells = 1392001ACP 02 : Active up upACP 03 : Active up up Received IPC buffers = 24646ACP 04 : Active up up Transmitted IPC buffers= 12636ACP 05 : Active up up Master processor state = ABCDACP 06 : Active up upACP 07 : Active up upACS 08 : Active up up User: rootACS 09 : Active up up From: 172.16.2.201ACS 10 : Active up upACS 11 : Active up up Slot 0 Redund. available: YesACS 12 : Active up up Slot 0 Redund: Main In-servACS 13 : Active up up Sys. Ref.: Non-CF LIMACS 14 : Active up up SVCs Connected: 30ACS 15 : Active up up PVCs Connected: 15 File transfer: InactiveSelect option:TCB status, Diagnostics, Events, File system, Internal status,Manage configuration, PSI management, self Restarts, Telnet,User name, sVc routing, Warm start, Zap cell interface, eXit



us by

the

Slot 0 Redundant Status and the Slot 0 Configuration/Status Screen

The ETH and the XH switch fabric modules can be switched manually through the MIB menselecting Manage configuration from the Root Menu and then selecting slot 0 configuration.Refer to the Slot 0 Configuration/Status screen as shown in Figure 8-13.

Figure 8-13 Slot 0 Configuration/Status Menu Screen

The Slot 0 Configuration/Status screen allows you to view or set the parameters pertaining toimplementation of Slot-0 redundancy, listed in Table 8-14.

Table 8-14 Slot 0 Configuration/Status Screen Parameter Definitions


Switch Fabric Status Indicates which module is in service. NA, read only

Switch Fabric to Use Enables/indicates the setting of the switch fabric mode. The options are:A - auto : automatically selects standby if main failsB - mainC - standbyD - not applicable

Immediate

Standby Switch Fabric Enables/indicates the setting of the standby switch fabric. The options are:yes : standby is availableno : standby is not in service or not available

Immediate



Switch name: Slot 0 SYS Slot 0 Configuration/Status SW Version

Switch Fabric Status: main in servic Max Active Slots: 700 Switch Fabric to Use: not applicable Cur Active Slots: 701 Standby Switch Fabri: no Slot0 Redund Avail: yes02 Power supply statistics03 Physical Layout04 Auto xfr to out-serv: yes05 Broadcast MIB Table: none Slot0 IP Addr: 159.220.100.4806 Slot0 IP Mask: 255.255.255.24007 Slot0 Switch ID: 2208 Slot 0 E.164 Address: 220022000009 LECS Network Prefix:10 LECS ESI: Slot0 Redund Status: main in service11 Slot0 To Use: auto Slot0 Redund Mode: enhanced redundancy12 NTM compatible SODOC: noSelect option:Enter option number or eXit



03Iss

Auto xfr to out-serv Enables/indicates the setting of the automatic transfer of files to the redundant Slot-0 controller feature. The options are:yes : automatically updates redundant controller module with config.cfg, users.cfg, def.rtb, and dtl.bin.no : will not update redundant Slot-0 controller

Immediate

Slot 0 E.164 Address This refers to the ATM address. For more information, refer to Addressing on page 3-21 of the GDC Xedge Switch, Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310.

Immediate

LECS Network Prefix This is used for LANE (LAN Emulation) applications. Enter the LEC Network Prefix address using the NSAP ICD format comprised of 13 hex bytes or 26 digits. For more information, refer to Configure Slot-0 section in Chapter 17: Configuring Connections in this manual.

Immediate

LECS ESI Not supported. NA

Slot0 Redund Status Indicates Slot-0 redundancy as one of the following:main in service : main Slot-0 is activemain out service : main Slot-0 is not activestandby in service : standby Slot-0 is activestandby out service : standby Slot-0 is not active

NA, read only

Slot0 To Use Enables/indicates the setting of which Slot-0 is to be used. The options are:A - auto : automatically selects standby when main failsB - mainC - standbyD - not applicableE - disable : disables module from service

Immediate

Slot0 Redund Avail Yes indicates that the redundant module is active. No indicates that the redundant module is not present. Unknown indicates that the Slot-0 Controller does not support redundancy.

Immediate

Table 8-14 Slot 0 Configuration/Status Screen Parameter Definitions (Continued)




03Iss

1

7

Chapter 9: SMC Configuration

Chapter OverviewThis section describes how to configure and manage the SMC Cell Controller.


Chapter Overview...................................................................................................................9-

Setting SMC IP Addresses......................................................................................................9-2

Configuring MOLN on SMC..................................................................................................9-6

Configuring Default MOLN.............................................................................................9-6

Setting up MOLN-over-IP tunnels.................................................................................9-13

Setting up Static Routes to NMS Workstations.............................................................9-16

Deleting static routes on SMC........................................................................................9-18

SMC Redundancy Configuration..........................................................................................9-19

Preparing for SMC Slot0 redundancy............................................................................9-19

Configuring SMC for Redundancy................................................................................9-20

Set-up for Separate Slot0 terminals................................................................................9-24

Configuring SMC Controller, Redundant Slot 0..................................................................9-26

SMC Slot 0 Standby (Redundant)..................................................................................9-26

Operation of SMC Slot0 Redundancy............................................................................9-27

Manual Swap-over..........................................................................................................9-2


SMC Configuration Setting SMC IP Addresses

enu

Setting SMC IP Addresses1. Insert the SMC to Slot0 of the Xedge chassis and turn on chassis power.

2. Attach a craft port interface to the chassis.

3. Attach a 10/100baseT cable to the front of SMC

4. Set the LAN IP address of SMC by performing the following steps:

5. Log onto SMC as user: root (lowercase), password: MANAGER (uppercase) the root mwill appear as shown in the sample menu in Figure 9-1.

Figure 9-1 Root Menu of SMC


NODE_1: Slot 0 SYS Root Menu New Event

00SMC red: Active smc Received datacells = 3766068Slot 01 : Bootmode ce Transmitted datacells = 330806402ECC-net: Active enh cell03ACP-ds3: Active pdhSlot 04 : Bootmode ce05ECC-oc3: Active enh cell06ECC-ima: Active enh cellSlot 07 : Bootmode ce08ACP-ds3: Active pdh User: rootSlot 09 : Bootmode ce From: 172.16.12.5810ACP-lce: Active pdh11ACP-ds3: Active pdh Slot 0 Redund. available: Noslot 12 : Bootmode ce Slot 0 Redund: Main In-serv13VE-mpg2: -------- Sys. Ref.: NONE14VE-mpg2: Active ve SVCs Connected: 100Slot 15 : -------- PVCs Connected: 13 File transfer: InactiveSelect option:Diagnostics, Events, File system, Internal status,Connection to host lost.lf Restarts, Telnet, User name, sVc routing,Warm start, eXit, LinK



03Iss

6. At the root menu, enter the “Manage configuration,” see Table 9-2, of SMC to enter the 'Management IF' submenu.

Figure 9-2 SMC Management Menu

7. At the Manage Configuration Menu, type “94” to enter the “Management IF” table, see Figure 9-3. Enter the appropriate LAN IP address and IP Mask.

Figure 9-3 Management IF Menu of SMC


NODE_1: Slot 0 SYS MIB Display and Management 600A /600a1

00 system 95 Node Status01 interfaces 96 aal5 Performance Statistics02 at 98 Module Loader03 ip04 icmp05 tcp06 udp07 snmp08 System Information09 Slot 0 Configuration/Status12 Static Routing23 PVC Configuration/Status24 SVC Configuration/Status27 System Timing References42 Alarm Handler82 Ethernet Statistics94 Management IFSelect option:Enter group number, save As, Load, sTatus, eXit,Last save file is `/$/config.cfg'.


NODE_1: Slot 0 SYS Management IF 600A /600a1

0 IP address: 172.16.9.2511 IP Mask: 255.255.0.02 Broadcast Addr: 172.16.255.255 mgntMacAddress: 00c06440d0223 Tunnel Management Table4 mgntStbyIpAddress: 0.0.0.0 mgntStbyMacAddress:




ars

8. Set the Node IP address of SMC by following these steps:

• Exit back to the Root Menu by typing ‘x’ until the ‘Save Configuration prompt appe

• Hit <enter> or ‘y’ to save the configuration.

• At SMC root menu, see Figure 9-1, enter ”f” to go to the “File System” menu, shown inFigure 9-4

Figure 9-4 File system menu of SMC


NODE_1: Slot 0 SYS File Operations New EventCurrent directory: A/ (SYS Drive)

Select option:Alter file, Copy file, Directory, Erase file, Format media,Garbage collect, media Info, checK media, Link file, Management,set Product info, Rename file, Scan file, TFTP menu, View sectors,driveN,mOunt,Unmount, HDiskBformat, eXit



03Iss

he

clude ith the eft of

.ppp 1ss

9. At the File System menu, enter “a” and the “alter file” menu will display the directory of tfiles in SMC's flash memory, to that shown in Figure 9-5

Figure 9-5 Alter file sub menu of SMC

10. If there is no ‘hosts’ file in the file system type hosts, to create the file.

11. Change the hosts file to set the Node IP address. At a minimum, the hosts file should inthe following line: ipaddress=aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd. “aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd” should be replaced wNode IPaddress. There can be blank lines above the ipaddress line. No spaces to the lipaddress or between ipaddress and the ipaddress are allowed.

12. Save the hosts file by hitting '<ctrl>k' and then 'x' to save the file.Reboot SMC by typing 'w', 'f', 'y' as prompted at SMC root Figure 9-1Verify that the NMS can communicate to the LAN address of SMC:

• wait for the logon prompt to appear at the craft port

• issue a ping from the NMS to the LAN IP address of SMCIf the ping is not successful, go back to step 1.

13. Verify that the NMS can communicate to the Node address of SMC:

14. Add a static route on the NMS to go through SMC's LAN IP address to SMC's Node IPaddress with a hop count of 1.

• On a UNIX workstation, the command is: route add aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd nnn.mm.oooaaa.bbb.ccc.ddd = SMC node IP address nnn.mmm.ooo.ppp = SMC LAN IP addre

15. Issue a ping from the NMS to the Node IP address of SMC

If the ping is not successful, go back to step 3.


NODE_1: Slot 0 SYS Select File New Event

File to editCurrent directory: /. Current mask: *

<..> mpro2.cod def.rtb ntm_e1.bin dtl.bin ce_lca.bin hosts users.cfg config.cfg smc.cod



SMC Configuration Configuring MOLN on SMC

e net-

an

heinks in

Configuring MOLN on SMC

Refer to Application Guide, Chap 5, section x for determining whether or not you should be using Default MOLN and MOLN over IP tunnels.

Configuring Default MOLN

For each physical link in the Xedge node that will be running Default MOLN to other nodes in the Xedgwork, perform the following steps:

1. Ensure that the outbound link on the cell controller where Default MOLN is running has “UP” status in SMC's Line State Table (refer to section y.1 in the diagnostics guide).If the link is not “UP,” the MOLN Routing Protocol will not output MOLN RP requests to tother node. Refer to the appropriate sections in this manual for setting up the physical lXedge cell controllers before proceeding further.

2. At SMC root menu, Figure 9-1 Root Menu of SMC, go to the Manage configuration menu, Figure 9-2 SMC Management Menu.

3. Enter the “PVC Configuration/Status” menu, Figure 9-6 PVC Configuration/Status Menu, by entering “23” at the Manage Configuration menu.

4. Enter “PVC Resource Table Menu” by entering “0” <enter> at PVC Configuration/StatusMenu.

5. The summary version of the PVC Resource Table will be displayed, as shown in Figure 9-6.

Figure 9-6 39&#&RQILJXUDWLRQ26WDWXV#0HQX


NODE_1: Slot 0 SYS PVC Configuration/Status 600A /600a1

0 PVC Resource Table1 PVC Configuration/Status Table




03Iss

ng

:

Figure 9-7 Summary View of PVC Resource Table

6. Determine the row number to go to in the PVC Resource Table, according to the followiformula:

Calculated_Row = (Slot#_of_nni_card * 16) + nni_link#

7. Go to the Calculated_Row by typing the following at the PVC Resource Table summarya) “g”: will see the 'go to row' prompt at the bottom of the screenb) Calculated_Row<enter>c) “e”: to obtain extra detail screen of the Calculated_Row. A screen like Figure 9-8 Extra

Detail View of an Entry in the PVC Resource Table will appear.


NODE_1: Slot 0 SYS PVC Resource Table New EventNo Slot No Link No VC VCI Range Start VC VCI Range End VC VPI Range Start

0 0 0 0 816 01 0 1 0 816 02 0 2 0 816 03 0 3 0 816 04 0 4 0 816 05 0 5 0 816 06 0 6 0 816 07 0 7 0 816 08 0 8 0 816 09 0 9 0 816 010 0 10 0 816 011 0 11 0 816 012 0 12 0 816 013 0 13 0 816 014 0 14 0 816 015 0 15 0 816 0Select option:Down, Extra detail, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row,Index search, Right, eXit



MOLN.

the

n ostic

ery

Figure 9-8 Extra Detail View of an Entry in the PVC Resource Table

8. If needed, reassign the Default MOLN VPI by typing:

a) “7”<enter> -- to change the MOLN VPIb) new_value_of_Default_MOLN_vpi<enter>

9. If needed, reassign the Default MOLN VCI by typing:

a) “8”<enter> -- to change the MOLN VCIb) new_value_of_Default_MOLN_vci<enter>

10. Enable Default MOLN on the link by typing:

a) “6”<enter> -- to change the link type from UNI to NNIb) “b” -- to enable Default MOLN on the link

11. Save the configuration. Type ‘x’ until the “Save changed configuration (Y/N):” prompt appears, type ‘y’ or hit <enter>.

Perform steps 1 to 11 on the other node that SMC node is attempting to communicate with via Default Verify that the ATM VC associated with Default MOLN is working by performing the following steps:

• Verify that the ATM port that the Default MOLN channel is on is in the UP state in Link State Table (see "Link State Table" in SMC Diagnostics).

• Obtain the Virtual Circuit Statistics for the ATM VC associated with Default MOLN othe cell card. The procedures are detailed in the appropriate chapter of the DiagnGuide for each cell controller.

• Verify that the ATM VC that is used for Default MOLN is and receiving cells. At a minimum, the Xedge MOLN Routing Protocol will cause a transmit-and-receive ev10 seconds in both directions on the ATM VC.


NODE_1: Slot 0 SYS PVC Resource Table 600A /600a1Detail of PVC Resource Table entry 0

Slot No : 0 Link No : 00 VC VCI Range Start : 01 VC VCI Range End : 8162 VC VPI Range Start : 03 VC VPI Range End : 24 VP VPI Range Start : 55 VP VPI Range End : 2556 Link type : uni7 MOLN VPI : 08 MOLN VCI : 16




03Iss

ng of . IP

ated

error.

check-vered

12. Verify that the other node's IP address is in SMC node's routing table.

13. At the root menu of SMC, Figure 9-1 Root Menu of SMC, Enter “m” to enter the “Manage Configuratio menu,” Figure 9-2 SMC Management Menu.

14. At the Manage Configuration menu, enter “3”<enter> to enter the “ip” menu, Figure 9-9 IP Menu on SMC

Figure 9-9 IP Menu on SMC

Table 9-1 SMC IP Menu Definitions

Note If either steps 12 or 13 fail, go back to step 1 and verify that the NNI link has been properlyconfigured on both nodes.


NODE_1: Slot 0 SYS ip 600A /600a1

0 ipForwarding: forwarding ipFragFails: 01 ipDefaultTTL: 255 ipFragCreates: 0 ipInReceives: 141147 2 ipAddrTable ipInHdrErrors: 0 3 ipRouteTable ipInAddrErrors: 0 4 ipNetToMediaTable ipForwDatagrams: 0 ipRoutingDiscards: 0 ipInUnknownProtos: 148 ipInDiscards: 0 ipInDelivers: 140999 ipOutRequests: 94582 ipOutDiscards: 0 ipOutNoRoutes: 0 ipReasmTimeout: 30 ipReasmReqds: 0 ipReasmOKs: 0 ipReasmFails: 0 ipFragOKs: 0Select option:Enter option number or eXit

Item Description

ipForwarding The indication of whether this entity is acting as an IP gateway in respect to the forwardidatagrams received by, but not addressed to, this entity. IP gateways forwarddatagramshosts generally do not (except those source-routed via the host)

ipDefaultTTL The default value inserted into the Time-To-Live field of theIP header of datagrams originat this entity, whenever aTTL value is not supplied by the transport layer protocol.

ipInReceives The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces, including those received in

ipInHdrErrors The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IP headers, including badsums, version number mismatch, other format errors, time-to-live exceeded, errors discoin processing their IP options, etc.



tination esses e not IP arded

result tities

e of an

ir con-is

g IC-

d to ounted

eir Note ts met

to their ich route

iting

med some by

ented at

ation at

15. At the IP menu, hit “3<enter>” to enter the IP Routing Table,Figure 9-10 Sample of SMC's IPRouting Table.

ipInAddrErrors The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their IP header's desfield was not avalid address to be received at this entity. This count includes invalid addr(e.g., 0.0.0.0) and addresses of unsupported Classes (e.g., Class E). For entities which arGateways and therefore do not forward datagrams, this counter includes datagrams discbecause the destination address was not a local address.

ipForwDatagrams The number of input datagrams for which this entity was not their final IP destination, as a of which an attempt was made to find a route to forward them to that final destination. In enwhich do not act as IP Gateways, this counter will include only those packets which wereSource-Routed via this entity, and the Source-Route option processing was successful.

ipInUnknownProtos The number of locally-addressed datagrams received successfully but discarded becausunknown or unsupported protocol.

ipInDiscards The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent thetinued processing, but which were discarded (e.g., for lack of buffer space). Note that thcounter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re-assembly.

ipInDelivers The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP user-protocols (includinMP).

ipOutRequests The total number of IP datagrams which local IP user protocols (including ICMP) supplieIP in requests for transmission. Note that this counter does not include any datagrams cin ipForwDatagrams.

ipOutDiscards The number of output IP datagrams for which no problem was encountered to prevent thtransmission to their destination, but which were discarded (e.g., for lack of buffer space).that this counter would include datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams if any such packethis discretionary discard criterion

ipOutNoRoutes The number of IP datagrams discarded because no route could be found to transmit themdestination. Note that this counter includes any packets counted in ipForwDatagramswhmeet this 'no-route' criterion. Note that this includesany datagrams which a host cannot because all of its default gateways are down.

ipReasmTimeout The maximum number of seconds which received fragments are held while they are awareassembly at this entity.

ipReasmReqds The number of IP fragments received which needed to be reassembled at this entity.

ipReasmOKs The number of IP datagrams successfully re-assembled.

ipReasmFails The number of failures detected by the IP re-assembly algorithm (for whatever reason: tiout, errors, etc). Note that this is not necessarily a count of discarded IP fragments sincealgorithms (notably the algorithm in RFC 815) can lose track of the number of fragmentscombining them as they are received.

ipFragOKs The number of IP datagrams that have been successfully fragmented at this entity.

ipFragFails The number of IP datagrams that have been discarded because they needed to be fragmthis entity but could not be,e.g., because their Don't Fragment flag was set.

ipFragCreates The number of IP datagram fragments that have been generated as a result of fragmentthis entity.

Item Description



03Iss

le.

Figure 9-10 Sample of SMC's IP Routing Table

Figure 9-11 Extra Detail of IP Route Table

16. Verify that the other Node IP address of the other Xedge switch is in the IP Routing Tab

17. Verify that SMC's Node Address is in the other node's IP Routing Table. Refer to Table 9-2 for more information on this screen.


NODE_1: Slot 0 SYS ipRouteTable New EventNo ipRouteDest ipRouteIfIndex ipRouteMetric1 ipRouteMetric2 ipRouteMetric3

0 0.0.0.0 3001 3 - -1 10.25.35.16 3001 4 - -2 127.0.0.1 1 0 - -3 127.0.0.2 1 0 - -4 127.0.0.3 5 0 - -5 129.166.4.16 3002 2 - -6 129.166.7.16 3002 2 - -7 129.166.10.16 3002 1 - -8 129.166.11.16 3002 2 - -9 172.16.0.0 4 0 - -10 172.16.9.251 1 0 - -11 172.17.0.0 108 5 - -12 172.18.0.0 108 3 - -13 172.19.0.0 108 5 - -14 172.20.0.0 108 4 - -15 172.21.0.0 1608 1 - -Select option:Add entry, Down, Extra detail, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row,Kill entry, Move entry, Right, eXit


EArtwork: Slot 0 SYS ipRouteTable 600 /rev A-Detail of ipRouteTable entry 0

ipRouteDest : 127.0.0.10 ipRouteIfIndex : 11 ipRouteMetric1 : 02 ipRouteMetric2 : -3 ipRouteMetric3 : -4 ipRouteMetric4 : -5 ipRouteNextHop : 127.0.0.16 ipRouteType : direct ipRouteProto : other7 ipRouteAge : 9998 ipRouteMask : 255.255.255.2559 ipRouteMetric5 : - ipRouteInfo :

Select option:Add entry, Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row, Kill entry,Move entry, Summary, eXit



fault ltiple nt pro-

this ame

the

the

the

the

hich nter-

and t of

sso- is rom ation ntries

r ls.

rrect. pro-

d to asks, cor-ask)

the

le

Table 9-2 IP Route Table Definitions

Item Description

ipRouteDest The destination IP address of this route. An entry with avalue of 0.0.0.0 is considered a deroute. Multiple routes to a single destination can appear in the table, but access to such muentries is dependent on the table access mechanisms defined by the network managemetocol in use

ipRouteIfIndex The index value which uniquely identifies the local interface through which the next hop of route should be reached. The interface identified by a particular value of this index is the sinterface as identified by the same value of the ifIndex object.

ipRouteMetric1 The primary routing metric for this route. The semantics of this metric are determined by routing-protocol specified in the route's ipRouteProto value

ipRouteMetric2 An alternate routing metric for this route. The semantics of this metric are determined byrouting-protocol specifiedin the route's ipRouteProto value.

ipRouteMetric3 An alternate routing metric for this route. The semantics of this metric are determined byrouting-protocol specified in the route's ipRouteProto value.

ipRouteMetric4 An alternate routing metric for this route. The semantics of this metric are determined byrouting-protocol

ipRouteNextHop The IP address of the next hop of this route. (In the case of a route bound to an interface wis realized via a broadcast media, the value of this field is the agent's IP address on that iface.)

ipRouteType The type of route. Note that the values direct(3) and indirect(4) refer to the notion of directindirect routing in the IP architecture. Setting this object to the value invalid(2) has the effecinvalidating the corresponding entry in the ipRouteTable object. That is, it effectively disaciates the destination identified with said entry from the route identified with said entry. Itan implementation-specific matter as to whether the agent removes an invalidated entry fthe table. Accordingly, management programs must be prepared to receive tabular informfrom agents that corresponds to entries not currently in use. Proper interpretation of such erequires examination of the relevant ipRouteType object.

ipRouteProto The routing mechanism via which this route was learned. Obviously, inclusion of values fogateway routing protocols is not intended to imply that hosts should support those protoco

ipRouteAge The number of seconds since this route was last updated or otherwise determined to be coNote that no semantics of 'too old' can be implied except through knowledge of the routingtocol by which the route was learned.

ipRouteMask Indicate the mask to be logical-ANDed with the destination address before being comparethe value in the ipRouteDest field. For those systems that do not support arbitrary subnet man agent constructs the value of the ipRouteMask by determining whether the value of therespondent ipRouteDest field belong to a class-A, B, or C network, and then using one of (m(network):

255.0.0.0 class-A; 255.255.0.0 class-B; 255.255.255.0 class-C;

ipRouteMetric5 An alternate routing metric for this route. The semantics ofthis metric are determined byrouting-protocol specified in the route's ipRouteProto valu

ipRouteInfo A reference to MIB definitions specific to the particular routing protocol which is responsibfor this route, as determined by the value specified in the route's ipRouteProto value



03Iss

nel

Setting up MOLN-over-IP tunnels

1. Create and configure the MOLN IP Tunnel. Follow these steps:

a) from the root menu of SMC (Figure 9-1) go to the Manage Configuration menu (Figure 9-2).

b) enter the “Management IF” menu (Figure 9-3) by typing “94”<enter>. Enter the TunnelManagement Table (Figure 9-12) by typing “3”<enter>.

Figure 9-12 SMC Tunnel Management Table, summary view

c) Enter “a” to add an entry and enter an index from 1 to 256; index will serve as tunnumber.

d) Enter “e” to obtain the extra detail for the tunnel, see Figure 9-13.


NODE_1: Slot 0 SYS Tunnel Management Table 600A /600a1No Index Name Type Interface Number Slot Link VPI

Select option:Add entry, Down, Extra detail, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row,Index search, Kill entry, Right, eXit



Figure 9-13 SMC's Tunnel Management Table, extra detail view

2. Configure the tunnel using the definitions found in Table 9-3.

Table 9-3 Extra Detail of Tunnel Management Table


GDC ACx Switch: Slot0 Tunnel Management Table New EventDetail of Tunnel Management Table entry 0_______________________________________________________________________ Index : 10 Name : Type : ip Interface Number : 3001 Slot : 0 Link : 0 VPI : 0 VCI : 01 Receive RIP : disabled2 Broadcast RIP : enablemin Operational State : down3 State of Tunnel Call : down4 Status : valid Select option: Add entry, Enter entry number to edit, Kill entry, Summary, eXit


Tunnel Number When creating the PVC or SPVC to carry the

tunnel traffic, the VCI of the connection at SMC side will be the tunnel number. Range 1-256

read only

Name Mnemonic name for tunnel. immediate

Type Specifies the type of the tunnel.

Currently only IP tunnels are supported

read only

Interface Number The tunnel management interface number, index into the interfaces table. Also used to identify the route in the ip-RouteIfIndex field in the Sample of SMC's IP Routing Table on page 9-11.See Section z.2 in SMC section of the Tech Ref.

read only

Slot Target slot for the tunnel. Only filled in when the PVC or SPVC goes to the RUNNING state

read only

Link Target link for the tunnel. Only filled in when the PVC or SPVC goes to the RUNNING state.

read only

VPI Target VPI on Slot/link for the tunnel -- only filled in when the PVC or SPVC goes to the RUNNING state.

read only

VCI Target VCI on Slot/Link/VPI for the tunnel. Only filled in when the PVC or SPVC goes to the RUNNING state.

read only



03Iss

”the

h the

3. Create, configure and start the PVC or SPVC used by the tunnel. Refer to Chapter 17: Configuring Connections in the config guide for how to setup up a PVC or SPVC. When setting up SMC-side of the VC, adhere to the following rules:

• the link is always “0”

• the VPI is always “1”

• the VCI is the index of the tunnel in the tunnel table -- that is, if the tunnel index is “1,VCI will be “1.”

4. Verify that management traffic is being sent and received on the ATM VC associated witMOLN tunnel. Follow steps 11 and 12 in Default MOLN Configuration.

Receive RIP When set to “disabled,” RIP updates of routes receive-from this tunnel will be discarded and will not update the MOLN Routing Table. Also, the route associated with the tunnel will not be added into MOLN updates. Range: disabled/enabled.

immediate

Broadcast RIP Determines if and what types of RIP updates should be sent out this tunnel. Range as follows:

disabled = don't include route associated with tunnel in updates to other nodes

enablemin = include static routes (see section x.3) in RIP updates to this tunnel and route to node through the tun-nel in RIP update. Will not include dynamic routes to other nodes by RIP updates from other Xedge nodes (dy-namic routes). This can be used isolate a MOLN cluster from the rest of the virtual IP network.

enablefull = all routes for RIP updates to this tunnel.

immediate

Operational State Indicates the state of the PVC or SPVC associated with the IP Tunnel. Range as follows:

down -- PVC or SPVC is not in RUNNING state

running-pvc -- PVC in RUNNING state

running-spvc -- SPVC in RUNNING state

read only

State of Tunnel Call Administrative state of the Tunnel.

down -- do not include route to node at other end of this tunnel in RIP updates on other tunnels. Do not send RIP updates out on this tunnel

up -- RIP enabled on this tunnel

read only




l on

his

Setting up Static Routes to NMS Workstations

To set-up a static route in SMC:1. Create and configure a static route.

a) from the root menu of SMC (Figure 9-1) go to the Manage Configuration menu (Figure 9-2).

b) enter the “Static Routing Table” menu (Figure 9-14) by typing “12”<enter>”0”<enter>.

Figure 9-14 Summary view of SMC Static Routing Table

2. Add a Static Route by typing ‘A’, and enter an index number. Hit ‘e’ to obtain extra detaithe entered route.

3. The screen should appear as indicated in the “Static Routing Table” in , Figure 9-15.

Note This is not necessary if the NMS workstation is on the same Ethernet segment as SMC. Tstep is only required if there is a Ethernet gateway between SMC and the NMS.


NODE_1: Slot 0 SYS Static Routing Table New EventNo Index Network Address Network Mask Gateway Address Metric Interfac

Select option:Add entry, Enter entry number to edit, Extra detail, Right, eXit



03Iss

Figure 9-15 Extra Detail of SMC's Static Routing Table

4. Enter the fields in the Static Routing Table according to the definitions in Table 9-4.

Table 9-4 Extra Detail of Static Routing Table


EArtwork: Slot 0 SYS Static Routing Table 600 /rev A-Detail of Static Routing Table entry 0

Index : 00 Network Address : 0.0.0.01 Network Mask : 0.0.0.02 Gateway Address : 0.0.0.03 Metric : 154 Interface : 15 Validity : valid

Select option:Add entry, Enter entry number to edit, Kill entry, Summary, eXit


Index Entry number in the Static Routing Table, Range 0-5 read only

Network Address address of the network or subnet where the NMS resides. [Suppose the NMS has an IP address of 192.5.3.18. Its network address would be 192.5.3.0 in a class C network, 192.5.0.0 in a class B network and 192.0.0.0 in a class A network.

immediate

Network Mask mask associated with the network address or subnet immediate

Gateway Address IP address of the gateway to the network or subnet immediate

Metric number of gateways between SMC and the NMS immediate

Interface The index in the Interface Table that contains the Ethernet Device (ENET). Should be set to 4, indicating an Ether-net Interface. Default is 1, which indicates an ATM inter-face.

immediate

Validity allows the entry in the Static Routing Table to be deleted.

Range: invalid = delete the entry from the static routing table and from the ipRouteTable. You must exit to the root menu of SMC in order for the element to be removed from the ipRouteTable.

valid = allow the entry in the static routing table to remain

Immediate

Table 9-4,



MC

a

1 s

nu

5. Exit to the root menu of SMC (Root Menu of SMC on page 9-2). by typing ‘x’ until the “Save changed configuration (Y/N):” prompt appears, type ‘y’ or hit <enter>.

6. Verify that the static route has been included in the ipRouteTable, Figure 9-10.

7. Configure the NMS to have a route to SMC. Assuming that SMC node is one Ethernet segment away from the NMS, configure the route from the NMS to SMC:

• At the gateway node that intersects the LAN where SMC is on and the LAN where Sis on, perform the following procedure:

i) add a static route to go through SMC's LAN IP to SMC's Node IP address withhop count of 1.

On a UNIX workstation, the command would be: route add aaa.bb.cc.dd nnn.mm.ooo.ppp where aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd = SMC node IP address and nnn.mmm.ooo.ppp = SMC LAN IP addres

ii) issue a ping from the gateway node to the Node IP address of SMC.

b) At the NMS add a static route to SMC with a hop count of 2.

On a UNIX workstation, the command would be: route add aaa.bb.cc.dd eee.ff.gg.hh 2

where: aaa.bb.cc.dd = SMC node IP address and eee.ff.gg.hh = IP address of the gateway

8. Verify the connection between SMC and the NMS:

a) issue a ping at the NMS to the Node IP address of SMC

b) issue a ping from SMC to the NMS

Deleting static routes on SMC

To remove a static route on SMC:1. Follow the steps in Setting up Static Routes to NMS Workstations.

2. Perform the following to remove the entry in the Static Routing Table:

• Type “k.” Type in the row number to delete

• Type “g.” Enter the row number to delete. Hit “e” for extra detail (see Extra Detail of SMC's Static Routing Table on page 9-17)

Note The static route will not be added into the ipRouteTable until you exit to the root me

Note If either ping is not successful, go back to step 1.

Note You must exit to the root menu of SMC (Figure 9-1) before the corresponding entry in the ipRouteTable will be removed.


SMC Configuration SMC Redundancy Configuration

03Iss

s

elf. are he e the

er.

ore

ss on

from n

D on

pe d file, d.”

f-

SMC Redundancy Configuration

Preparing for SMC Slot0 redundancy

1. Perform the following steps in order to prepare your node for SMC Slot0 redundancy.Set-up the Terminal Port. The default terminal port setting is for "Y" cable operation. Thimeans that only one terminal is necessary for terminal control. The "Y" cable physically connects the two terminal ports together on the back of an Xedge 6640/6645 or 6280 shOnly the in-service SMC Slot0 controller terminal port will be active. If separate terminalsrequired, one for the in-service controller and one for the out-of-service controller, then tout-of-service controller will have to be configured to turn on its terminal port. Please seSet-up for Separate Slot0 terminals on page 9-24 section for information on how to configureseparate terminals for each Slot0 controller.

WARNING: Never enable both "Main" and "Standby" terminal ports with the "Y" cable attached.

2. Installation of the main and standby SMCs. Install the out-of-service SMC Slot0 controllThe rotary switch on the "Main" Slot0 controller mustbe set to switch position "0,” the "Standby" SMC Slot0 controller switch setting must be set to "4.”Improper switch settings could cause undesirable results, and will, at minimum, cause redundancy not to become active. Please refer to the hardware installation manual for minformation on properswitch settings.

3. Configure the LAN and Node and IP addresses of main SMC (refer to Setting SMC IP Addresses on page 9-2) The config file must contain the IP Address for the Ethernet management port. This address is neededto configure the IP port with the proper addrestartup.

4. Transfer of files from the main SMC to the standby SMC. The config.cfg and hosts files the main SMC Slot0 controller need to be loaded to the standbycontroller. In order for aSMC to become available for redundancy it will need at least the config file from the in-service SMC Slot0 controller.

5. Load the config file on the soon-to-standby SMC Slot0 controller.When the green run LEout-of-service controller starts to flash (at a one-half second period), or when the "Slot0 Redund. available:" is "not ready on the root screen then tftp the config.cfg and hostfile to the out-of-service controller. The tftp is accomplished by going to the File menu (tyëfí on the root screen) then go to the tftp menu (type t on the File screen). Type 's' for sentype in the name"config.cfg.” Now give it the address - in this case the address is "redun

6. There are three files needed for redundancy, config.cfg, hosts, and smc.cod. There are three filesthat should be available: users.cfg, def.rtb and dtl.bin . All of the six files mentioned will be copied tothe out-of-service controller automatically if they are not on the out-of-service controller. Only theconfig.cfg will be automatically copied from the in-service to the out-oservice controller if it changes.

7. Warm-start the standby SMC.



e

n

Configuring SMC for Redundancy

Once Preparing for SMC Slot0 redundancy on page 9-19 has been accomplished, the user can configure thSlot0 controllers for redundancy. The main menu of SMC should look similar to Figure 9-16.

Figure 9-16 Main menu on SMC when Redundancy has been enabled

Slot 0 Redundant Status and the Root Menu Screen

Refer to the Root Menu screen shown in Figure 9-17. Slot 0 Redundancy information is found othe right side of the screen.

The redundancy status parameters are defined in Table 9-5.


NODE_1: Slot 0 SYS Root Menu New Event

00SMC red: Active smc Received datacells = 4466434Slot 01 : Bootmode ce Transmitted datacells = 392586702ECC-net: Active enh cell03ACP-ds3: Active pdhSlot 04 : Bootmode ce05ECC-oc3: Active enh cell06ECC-ima: Active enh cellSlot 07 : Bootmode ce08ACP-ds3: Active pdh User: rootSlot 09 : Bootmode ce From: 172.16.12.5810ACP-lce: Active pdh11ACP-ds3: Active pdh Slot 0 Redund. available: Yesslot 12 : Bootmode ce Slot 0 Redund: Main In-serv13VE-mpg2: -------- Sys. Ref.: NONE14VE-mpg2: Active ve SVCs Connected: 100Slot 15 : -------- PVCs Connected: 13 File transfer: InactiveSelect option:Diagnostics, Events, File system, Internal status,Manage configuration, self Restarts, Telnet, User name, sVc routing,Warm start, eXit, LinK

Table 9-5 Root Menu Redundancy Status Parameter Definitions


Slot 0 Redund. available: Indicates the availability of Slot-0 redundancy as:

Yes: the redundant module is active

No: the redundant module is not active or not present

Immediate

Slot 0 Redund: Indicates the state of the Slot-0 redundant module as:

Main in-service: main Slot-0 is active

Main out-service: main Slot-0 is not active

Standby in-service: standby Slot-0 active

Standby out-service: standby Slot-0 not active

Immediate

Table 9-5



03Iss

tatus" et the h-

Figure 9-17 Root Menu Screen, highlighting the Slot 0 Redundancy information

When the user is logged into the node on the in-service Slot0 controller, go to the "Slot Configuration/Sscreen (Figure 9-17). If autotransfer of the needed redundancy files and updated config files is desired, s"Auto xfr to out-serv" to “yes.” By default, the "Slot0 To Use" item will be set to “auto.” If a manual switcover is desired, this item will be used (for more information, please refer to the Operation of SMC Slot0 Redundancy on page 9-27 section).


Switch name: Slot 0 SYS Root Menu SW version

SMC 00 : Active up down down down Received datacells = 1213966ACP 01 : Active up up Transmitted datacells = 1392001ACP 02 : Active up upACP 03 : Active up up Received IPC buffers = 24646ACP 04 : Active up up Transmitted IPC buffers= 12636ACP 05 : Active up up Master processor state = ABCDACP 06 : Active up upACP 07 : Active up upACS 08 : Active up up User: rootACS 09 : Active up up From: 172.16.2.201ACS 10 : Active up upACS 11 : Active up up Slot 0 Redund. available: YesACS 12 : Active up up Slot 0 Redund: Main In-servACS 13 : Active up up Sys. Ref.: Non-CF LIMACS 14 : Active up up SVCs Connected: 30ACS 15 : Active up up PVCs Connected: 15 File transfer: InactiveSelect option:TCB status, Diagnostics, Events, File system, Internal status,Manage configuration, PSI management, self Restarts, Telnet,User name, sVc routing, Warm start, Zap cell interface, eXit



us by

the

Slot 0 Redundant Status and the Slot 0 Configuration/Status Screen

The SMC and the XH switch fabric modules can be switched manually through the MIB menselecting Manage configuration from the Root Menu and then selecting slot 0 configuration.Refer to the Slot 0 Configuration/Status screen as shown in Figure 9-18.

Figure 9-18 Slot0 Redundancy Configuration Screen on SMC

The Slot 0 Configuration/Status screen allows you to view or set the parameters pertaining toimplementation of Slot-0 redundancy, listed in Table 9-6.

Table 9-6 Slot0 Configuration/Status


Node 1: Slot0 SYS Slot0 Configuration/Status New Event

Switch Fabric Status: main in serv Slot0 Redund Avail: not ready00 Switch Fabric to Use: auto01 Standby Switch Fabri: yes02 Power supply statistics03 Physical Layout04 Auto xfr to out-serv: yes05 Broadcast MIB Table: none Slot0 IP Addr: 192.168.30.1606 Slot0 To Use: auto Slot0 Redund Mode: enhanced redundancy07 Slot0 Switch ID: 008 NTM compatible SODOC: yes09 Slot0 E.164 Address: Slot0 Redund Status: standby in service10 Slot0 IP Mask: 255.255.255.240 Max Active Slots: 2 Cur Active Slots: 2

Select option: Enter option number or eXit


Switch Fabric Status Indicates which module is in service. NA, read only

Switch Fabric to Use Enables/indicates the setting of the switch fabric mode. The options are:

A - auto: automatically selects standby if main fails

B - mainC - standbyD - not applicable

Immediate

Standby Switch Fabric Enables/indicates the setting of the standby switch faric. The options are:

yes: standby is available

no: standby is not in service or not available

Immediate




03Iss

Auto xfr to out-serv Enables/indicates the setting of the automatic transfer of files to the redundant Slot-0 controller feature. The op-tions are:

yes: automatically updates redundant controller module with config.cfg, users.cfg, def.rtb, and dtl.bin.

no: will not update redundant Slot-0 controller

Immediate

Slot 0 E.164 Address This refers to the ATM address. For more information, refer to Addressing on page 3-21 of the GDC Xedge Switch, Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310.

Immediate

LECS Network Prefix This is used for LANE (LAN Emulation) applications. Enter the LEC Network Prefix address using the NSAP ICD format comprised of 13 hex bytes or 26 digits. For more information, refer to Configure Slot-0 section in Chapter 17: Configuring Connections in this manual.

Immediate

LECS ESI Not supported. NA

Slot0 Redund Status Indicates Slot-0 redundancy as one of the following:

main in service: main Slot-0 is active

main out service: main Slot-0 is not active

standby in service: standby Slot-0 is active

standby out service: standby Slot-0 is not active

NA, read only

Slot0 To Use Enables/indicates the setting of which Slot-0 is to be used. The options are:

A - auto: automatically selects standby when main fails

B - mainC - standbyD - not applicableE - disable: disables module from service

Immediate

Slot0 Redund Avail Yes indicates that the redundant module is active.

No indicates that the redundant module is not present.

Unknown indicates that the Slot-0 Controller does not support redundancy.

Immediate





" l.If

be ack of

nal

the " hit

n will

as

s.

Set-up for Separate Slot0 terminals

1. "Y" cable terminal connection is the default for SMC with Slot0 redundancy. The non "Ycable terminal setup utilizes two separate terminals and a separate able to each terminaseparate Slot0 communication terminals are desired then the out-of-service Slot0 must configured. The first step is to physically connect separate terminal connections to the bthe Xedge6640/6645 or 6280 shelf.

2. The next step is to configure the out-of-service SMC Slot0 controller to enable its termiport. To do this, the network administrator must telnet to the out-of-service SMC Slot0 controller. This is accomplished by performing a telnet to "redund" from the in-service controller.

3. Log into the out-of-service Slot0 controller. To log into the out-of-service controller from terminal port on the in-service controller: type t for telnet, type in the ipaddress "redund,the return key. Log into the out-of-service controller.At the main screen, choose the "Internal Status" screen by typing the letter "I". The screelook similar to Figure 9-19:

Figure 9-19 Internal Status menu on SMC

4. choose the "Local terminal enable" option by typing the letter "L." The screen will look in Local Terminal Enable screen on SMC on page 9-25.

Note Please refer to the hardware installation manual for proper terminal cables and connection


EArtwork: Slot 0 SYS TCP Module Internal Status 600 /rev A-

Select option:siGnalling status, Ping, Management traffic status, Semaphore state,tAsk state, craft pOrt security, Local terminal enable, arp Cache,eXit



03Iss

Figure 9-20 Local Terminal Enable screen on SMC

5. Press "Y" to enable the local terminal. At this point both the in-service and out-of serviceterminals will be available.


EArtwork: Slot 0 SYS TCP Module Internal Status 600 /rev A-

Warning: Do not use ’Y’ cable with both Main and Standbylocal terminals enabledPress ’Y’ to enable ’N’ to disable the local terminal: Yes

Select option:


SMC Configuration Configuring SMC Controller, Redundant Slot 0

ection

ementponsenother 1 take

or thec hasabricg, therst-cases is

henile will andfront

eriod. (iflot-0

itchby)

Slot-0

r will the

g file will s

Configuring SMC Controller, Redundant Slot 0

SMC Slot 0 Standby (Redundant)

Although Slot-0 redundancy (Slot-0 standby) operation is transparent to the user, this sdescribes Slot-0 redundancy software and operational issues.

Redundant SMC and the XH Switch Fabric Issues

• Transfer of the Switch Fabric between Main and Standby is accomplished by the managprocessor via use of ‘healthcheck’ cells. If the processor fails to get a ‘healthcheck’ resfor 6 seconds, it assumes the Switch Fabric has failed (or has been removed). It takes asecond for the processor to initiate the switch-over (including 250ms for the transfer toplace) for a total of approximately 7 seconds (a ‘healthcheck period’). It is also possible fprocessor to take 2 ‘healthcheck periods’ to determine if a failure of the Switch Fabrioccurred, making the total time 13 seconds (maximum). Therefore, upon a Switch Ffailure, switch-over to the Standby Switch Fabric may take from 7 to 13 seconds. In testinswitch-over occurred between 7 and 10 seconds. The 13 seconds is a calculated wocondition. Total cell loss is 7 to 13 seconds for auto detect and switch-over. Total cell los1/4 second for manual switch-over when performing routine maintenance.

• The Root Menu screen displays the status of the Slot-0 Standby Slot Controller. Wredundancy is available, any configuration changes made and saved to the config.cfg fupdate the redundant Slot-0 Controller. The Root Menu will show File transfer = Activethe redundant controller LEDs will show a TFTP in-progress indication. The module’s panel LEDs will flash in an alternating pattern.

• The SMC in Slot-0 (main) must receive a health check cell from itself within a 6 second pIf the health check fails, the XH switch fabric (main) will switch to the redundant XHavailable) and wait for the health check cell. If the health check is still not received, the SSMC (main) will switch to the redundant Slot-0 SMC. If there isn’t a redundant XH swfabric available, the SMC in Slot-0 (main) will switch to the redundant SMC (standimmediately.

• The MAC / IP Address / E.164 address in Slot-0 main is transferred to the redundant (standby) module at bootup.

• If the node is power cycled, and Slot-0 controller is missing slave.cod, the Slot-0 controllecome up In-Service and In Boot Mode. The Slot-0 controller will not relinquish service toredundant Slot-0 (standby) module.

Note When redundancy is available, any configuration changes made and saved to the config.cfwill update the redundant Slot-0 module automatically. As the file transfers, the Root Menushow File transfer = Active and the redundant controller LEDs will show a TFTP in-progresindication. The module’s fault LED will flash until the TFTP transfer is complete.

Note Before removing an out-of-service Slot-0 controller, use the disable option on the Slot 0 Configuration/Status screen to disable the Slot-0. If you do not replace the controller withinapproximately 5 minutes, the Slot-0 reverts to normal out-of-service state.



03Iss

r. as

tary, between r an forms lly sent ve" t e t-of-

S"

out-of-ble

e redun-

earlier.

r n, go to

Operation of SMC Slot0 Redundancy

Synchronization

The in-service SMC Slot0 controller must synchronize itself with the out-of-service SMC Slot0 controlleWhen the two redundant controllers are synchronized, they both will display a status in their root menushown in Root Menu Screen, highlighting the Slot 0 Redundancy information on page 9-21. The in-service SMC Slot0 controller communicates to the out-of-service SMC Slot0 controller via a dedicated, propriecommunications port. The Slot0 controllers exchange messages once a second. If the communicationsthe Slot0 controllers fail, redundancy will not become available. Redundancy must become available foautomatic swap-over to occur. Via the redundant communications, the out-of-service Slot0 controller inthe in-service Slot0 controller which files it needs to become available. The needed files are automatica(via TFTP) to the out-of-service controller. On the root menu the "File transfer" item will display as "Actiduring a transfer, otherwise "Inactive". While the TFTP is in-progress, the in-service controller will repor"NOT Ready" in the "Slot0 Redund. available:" item on the main screen. This item is also reported in th"Slot0 Configuration/Status" as the “Slot0 Redund Avail:" item. When all the files are present on the ouservice SMC Slot0 controller, the availability of redundancy will go from "NO" to "YES.” The in-service availability item will go from "NOT Ready" to "YES" once the out-of-service Slot0 controller reports "YEand the synchronization between the Slot0 controllers have stabilized.

The out-of-service receives a new config file from the in-service controller each time it is updated. The service controller does not load the config file until a swap-over occurs; however, it will load the non-taitems in the config file. The root menu redundancy status is described in Table 9-5. As discussed earlier, the root menu displays the availability of the Slot0 redundancy. The root menu also indicates the state of thdant module.

The Slot0 Configuration/Status screen displays redundancy status and configurable items as discussedTable x.4.2 describes this screen and all the items on it related to Slot0 Redundancy.

Manual Swap-over

In order to perform a manual swap-over, the user must inform the SMC in-service Slot0 controller eithethrough the SNMP manager (e.g Prosphere) or through the terminal screen. If using the terminal screethe Slot 0 Redundant Status and the Slot 0 Configuration/Status Screen on page 9-22 screen and choose "Slot0To Use:" option. The screen will look as in Swap-over menu options for Redundant SMCs on page 9-28.



e Just

. The ller. hould eriod

Figure 9-21 Swap-over menu options for Redundant SMCs

If the "Main" SMC Slot0 controller is in-service and it is desired to put the Standby in-service, choose thStandby option above, by typing “C.” If using a "Y" cable, the terminal will immediately become active.type the username and password and the main screen will appear.

There are two front panel LEDs on an SMC Slot0 controller. One is the Run LED, the other, the fault LEDrun LED is on solid, fault LED off (unless there is a fault) on the in-service Slot0 SMC redundant controThe out-of-service controller's Run LED will flash at a period of about one-half second, the Fault LED sremain off. In addition, during an TFTP the out-of-service Fault and Run LED's will flash in unison at a pof about one-half second.


EArtwork: Slot 0 SYS Slot 0 Configuration/Status New Event

A - autoB - mainC - standbyD - not applicableE - disable

Slot0 To Use: A [auto]


03Iss

ciatedf thelist ofview,

2

2

-3

7

Chapter 10: FRC Configuration

Chapter OverviewThis chapter describes how to configure the Frame Adaptation Controller (FRC) and its assoLine Interface Modules (LIMs). You can find status information in Chapter 14, FRC Status oGDC Xedge Diagnostics Guide, Part Number 032R500. You can find an overview and a features in Chapter 6, Frame Relay Adaptation of the GDC Xedge Switch Applications OverPart Number 032R300.




Admin State....................................................................................................................10

Define the DLIM in Slot-0................................................................................................... 10-4

Configure the DLIM............................................................................................................ 10-

Configure the DS1-2C/2CS DLIM.................................................................................10-7

Configure the E1-2C/2CS DLIM.................................................................................10-11

Configure the HSSI-DCE/DTE DLIM.........................................................................10-15

Configure the SI-2C DLIM..........................................................................................10-19

Configure and Activate the Links...................................................................................... 10-23

Service Specific Configuration.......................................................................................... 10-28

Configure the Frame Relay LMI..................................................................................10-28

Configure FUNI/ATM-DXI Mode...............................................................................10-31




Configure the Shaping Rate............................................................................................... 10-45


FRC Configuration Configuration Summary

talledenu

ment

in its

basedATMe

Configuration SummaryAs a minimum, the FRC Adaptation Controller must have the slave.cod and frdoc.bin files inson it prior to configuration. To configure the FRC Adaptation Controller you can use the msystem within the FRC Adaptation Controller or the GDC ProSphere Network ManageSystem.

To configure a FRC Adaptation Controller, you need to perform the following procedures:

• Define the DLIM in Slot-0

• Configure the DLIM

• Configure the DS1-2C/2CS DLIM

• Configure the E1-2C/2CS DLIM

• Configure the HSSI-DCE/DTE DLIM

• Configure the SI-2C DLIM

• Configure and Activate the Links

• Service Specific Configuration (optional)

• Configure the Frame Relay LMI (optional)

• Configure FUNI/ATM-DXI Mode (optional)

• Configure the Virtual Circuits

• Frame Relay/Transport/PPP Virtual Circuits

• FUNI/ATM-DXI Virtual Circuits

• Configure the Shaping Rate (optional)

Once you have completed these procedures, refer to Chapter 16: Bandwidth Allocationand Reservation for allocating resources, and Chapter 17: Configuring Connections, forconfiguring PVCs and/or SPVCs. The FRC end of the PVC/SPVC always uses link-0 configuration.

Traffic Management

The ingress CIR (in bits per second), Be and Bc values (in bits), are policed by frame-facilities and converted to ATM-based PCR, SCR and MBS for shaping in route to the environment. See Traffic Policing on page 2-52 of the GDC Xedge Switch Technical ReferencManual, Part Number 032R310, for a detailed explanation of these parameters.


FRC Configuration Configuration Summary

03Iss

nd, and

n pass

Admin State

The Admin State of a row has several options. Some of them are state, some are commasome can be both state and command. Table 10-1 explains these options.

The Oper State of a row indicates how the software and hardware react to the Admin statecommand. It also indicates the link or the VC associated with this row is operational (data cathrough).

Table 10-1 Admin State Option Definitions

Option State Command

active The row is used or active. Activate the row.

notInService The row is not used or inactive. De-activate the row.

destroy NA Destroy the row.

restart NA Restart the row. Usually, it is used to reset the hardware.

notReady The row has invalid setup. Usually it indicates the traffic parameters are not configured properly.

NA

wait The row is waiting for some prerequisite. Usually, it indicates the VC is waiting for ATM PVC/SPVC to come up.

NA

Table 10-1


FRC Configuration Define the DLIM in Slot-0

ptationfigureout.

is

Define the DLIM in Slot-0The Slot-0 Controller sends a health check signal that detects the presence of the FRC AdaController in the installed slot and enters it in the Slot-0 Physical Layout. Before you can conthe FRC Adaptation Controller, you must select a DLIM type for it in the Slot-0 Physical Lay

1. Log in to Slot-0. From the Slot-0 Root Menu, select Manage configuration. The MIBDisplay and Management screen appears.

2. Select the Slot 0 Configuration/Status menu option and press the enter key. The Slot 0Configuration/Status screen appears.


4. Select Goto row and enter the number of the slot in which the FRC Adaptation Controllerinstalled (for example, if the FRC is in Slot-14, select Goto row, and type 14, then press theEnter key).

5. Select Extra detail . The Physical Layout, Detail of Physical Layout entry “X” appears asshown in Figure 10-1. The screen parameters are described in Physical Layout ScreenParameters on page 10-5.


7. From the list of DLIMs displayed, select the appropriate DLIM:

• select ds1 dual for the DS1-2C/2CS DLIM.

• select e1 dual for the E1-2C/2CS DLIM.

• select the dhssi for the HSSI-DCE or HSSI-DTE DLIMs

• select the si dual for the SI-2C DLIM



10. Select eXit to return to the Root Menu.

11. This completes the Define the DLIM in Slot-0 procedure. Proceed to Configure the DLIM onpage 10-7.



03Iss

IMs

Figure 10-1 Extra Detail of Physical Layout for Entry “x” (in this example, x=14)







Immediate

Type When the FRC Adaptation Controller has been installed, the application code has booted and is running, and the config update has been passed to the Slot-0 Controller, the Type field identifies the type of Slot Controller installed in the slot. In this case, the Slot Controller is recognized as a frac .

NA, read only

DLIM Type Enables you to specify the LIM type that is installed from a list of possible LIMs. For the FRC Slot Controller, the possible LIMs that can be used are:K - dhssiO - e1 dualQ - ds1 dualW - si dual.Enter the alpha character (case sensitive) for the LIM type installed.

Immediate



Switch Name: Slot 0 SYS Physical Layout New EventDetail of Physical Layout entry X

Slot No : 14 DOC Ser # : 08199900340 Name : Slot 14 DOC HW Ver : 2.0C Type : frac Slot MAC Addres: 0404040404041 DLIM Type : si dual Last State Chan: ( 0:01:08) Version : 51c9 Lst Chngd Link : link 1 State : active Lst Previous St: up2 Reset Slot : no3 Required State : normal Changed State : no4 Associated Slot: 0 slot0PhyLink0St: up slot0PhyLink1St: down slot0PhyLink2St: stop slot0PhyLink3St: stop Slot Ser # : 0819990034 Slot HW Ver : 8.0NSelect option:Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row,Press ^J for extra help on this item, Summary, Up, eXit



Version Indicates the version of application software running on the FRC Adaptation Controller.

NA, read only

State Indicates the current state of the Slot Controller. The possible states are:absent : This indicates that the slot may be empty or the Slot Controller has lost communications.active : This indicates that the full feature software has been loaded and is running.bootmode : This indicates that the full feature software has not been loaded; the software may not be present or the rotary switch may be set to bootmode.

NA, read only

Reset Slot Enables a reset (toggle) of the slot. This is a warm restart of the slot. It is necessary when certain configuration changes are made to the slot such as a change in its IP address:yes, Type y to reset the slot.

N - nod: Type n to exit this option without resetting the slot.

Immediate

Required State Enables you to set the required state of the slot.

A - normal d: This is the normal state required for running.B - shutdown : This stops the slot from running.C - main : not supportedD - shadow : not supported

Immediate


NA, read only

Associated Slot Not used. NA

slot0PhyLink0St Indicates the current status of PhyLink 0. The possible states are:up : This indicates that the Slot Controller and the LIM have been installed, the LIM has been selected and recognized, and line coding is passing.down : This indicates an incomplete installation, selection of the wrong LIM, or line coding is not passing.stop : This indicates that this link is disabled.

NA, read only

slot0PhyLink1St Same as slot0PhyLink0St except reports on PhyLink 1. NA, read only

slot0PhyLink2St Will always indicate stop since the FRC does not support PhyLink-2.

NA

slot0PhyLink3St Will always indicate stop since the FRC does not support PhyLink-3.

NA


NA, read only


NA, read only


NA, read only


NA, read only


Immediate





FRC Configuration Configure the DLIM

03Iss

ed to

RC

t to

Configure the DLIM

After you associate the appropriate DLIM with the FRC in the Slot-0 Physical Table you neperform the DLIM specific configuration.

• If you have the DS12C/2CS LIM, proceed to Configure the DS1-2C/2CS DLIM on page 10-7.

• If you have the E1-2C/CS LIM, proceed to Configure the E1-2C/2CS DLIM on page 10-11.

• If you have the HSSI LIM, proceed to Configure the HSSI-DCE/DTE DLIM on page 10-15.

• If you have the SI-2C LIM, proceed to Configure the SI-2C DLIM on page 10-19.

Configure the DS1-2C/2CS DLIM

1. From the Root Menu of the Slot-0 Controller, establish a telnet session with the FAdaptation Controller (for example, if the FRC is in Slot-14, select Telnet, type slot14 , thenpress the Enter key). The Root Menu of the FRC Adaptation Controller appears.

2. From the Root Menu of the FRC Adaptation Controller, select Manage configuration. TheMIB Display and Management screen for the FRC Adaptation Controller appears.

3. From the MIB Display and Management screen, select DSP DLIMS and press the Enterkey.


5. Select Extra detail. The Detail of ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status entry 0 (link-0) appearsas shown in Figure 10-2. The screen parameter are described in DS1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status Screen Parameter Definitions on page 10-8.

6. At the Select option: prompt, enter the option number of the item or items you wanconfigure and enter the configuration changes.

7. Select Extract Frame B. At the prompt select yes.

8. If you made any configuration changes, select Reconfigure and press the Enter key.


10. Select Down to transition to the Detail of ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status entry 1 (link-1)screen.

11. Repeat step 6 through step 9 for Detail of ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status entry 1.


13. Select Save. This completes the Configure the DS1-2C/CS DLIM procedure. Proceed toConfigure and Activate the Links on page 10-23.

Note Extract Frame B must be set to yes for the FRC.



d to

Figure 10-2 Extra Detail of ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status (example using Slot-14)

DS1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status Screen Parameter Definitions

The ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status screen allows you to view and set the parameters requireconfigure the DS1-2C/2CS DLIM. These parameters are defined in Table 10-3. The default valuesare indicated by d.

Table 10-3 ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status Menu Definitions



Version Indicates the LIM type installed, in this case, a ds1 dual . NA, read only

Txmt Line Lengt Indicates/selects transmit line length.

A - feet 0 110d, selected transmit line length is 0 to 110 feet.B - feet 110 220 , selected transmit line length is 110 to 220 feetC - feet 220 330 , selected transmit line length is 220 to 330 feetD - feet 330 440 , selected transmit line length is 330 to 440 feetE - feet 440 550 , selected transmit line length is 440 to 550 feetF - feet 550 660 , selected transmit line length is 550 to 660 feetG - more than 655 , selected transmit line length is greater than 655 feetH - square , selected for use of external line buildout networks

Reconfigure



Switch Name: Slot 14 SYS ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status New EventDetail of ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status entry 0

Link No : 0 LOS Alarm : no Version : ds1 dual LOF Alarm : no0 Txmt Line Lengt: feet 0 110 AIS Alarm : no1 Framer : none Yellow Alarm : no2 Line Coding : b8zs BER Alarm : no3 Loopback : none DS1 Framing Err: 04 Tx AIS : no DS1 Bit Errors : 05 Extract Frame B: yes DS1 OOF/COFA Er: 06 Txmt Clock Sele: system DS1 LCV Errors : 07 Clear Counters : yes Line ES : 08 Reconfigure : no Line SES : 0 LOS Defect : no ES : 0 OOF Defect : no SES : 0 AIS Defect : no AISS : 0 Yellow Defect : no UAS : 0 BER Defect : no ExBER : 0Working...Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row,Press ^J for extra help on this item, Summary, eXit



03Iss

Framer Indicates/selects the following framer mode types:

A - none d, no framer modeB - sf , superframe framing is selectedC - t1dm , DS1 data multiplexer framing is selectedD - slc96 , SLC 96 framing is selectedE - esf4k , extended superframe framing is selected (4 Kbit/s data link)F - esf2k 3 , extended superframe framing is selected (2 kbit/s data link, frames 3, 7, 11, 15, 19, 23)G - esf2k 1 , extended superframe framing is selected (4 kbit/s data link, frames 1, 5, 9, 13, 17, 21)

Reconfigure


A - b8zsd, bit 8-zero suppression coding is selectedB - ami , alternate mark inversion coding is selected

Reconfigure

Loopback Indicates/selects the following loopback types:

A - none d: no loopback is selectedB - line lpbk : the line loopback causes received data to be looped back as transmitted data in the line interface of the LIMC - payload lpbk : the payload loopback causes received data to be looped back as transmit data in the framer of the LIM; the looped data undergoes frame generation, alarm insertion, trunk conditioning, and line codingD - digital lpbk : the digital loopback causes signals received from the Slot Controller to be looped back by the LIM framer to the Slot Controller.

Note: The loopback is initiated upon pressing A - D. Loopback timeout is set in the DSP DLIMs menu screen.

Immediate



Reconfigure

Extract Frame B Enables/indicates the extraction of frame bits: yes : Type y to enable the extraction of frame bits.

nod: Type y to disable frame bit extraction.

Note: You must set this option to yesd.

Reconfigure

Table 10-3 ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status Menu Definitions (Continued)




Controller

Received Data

Transmitted Data

LineLoopback

PayloadLoopback

DigitalLoopback

DS1-2C/2CS LIM



Txmt Clock Sele Enables/indicates the selection of the transmit clock. The options are:

A - system d, the system clock provides the LIM transmit clockB - local oscillator , the local oscillator provides the LIM transmit clockC - local link0 , timing from link 0 provides the LIM transmit clockD - local link1 , timing from link 1 provides the LIM transmit clock



Immediate

Reconfigure Resets the FRC with the current parameter values:yes : Type y to reconfigure the FRC.nod: Type n to exit this option without reconfiguring the FRC.

Immediate

LOS Defect Indicates if there is currently a loss of signal condition NA, read only


NA, read only




1x10-3. Not supported. Also, the BER threshold is not selectable.

NA, read only

LOS Alarm Indicates if there is currently a loss of signal alarm. This will result in the operational state of the link going to down. In addition, all Frame Relay/Transport/PPP VCs and FUNI/ATM-DXI VCs configured on the link will have their operational state set to down.Note : See the FRC Status chapter of the GDC Xedge Switch Diagnostics Guide (Part No. 032R500).

NA, read only

LOF Alarm Indicates if there is currently a loss of frame alarm. This will result in the operational state of the link going to down. In addition, all Frame Relay/Transport/PPP VCs and FUNI/ATM-DXI VCs configured on the link will have their operational state set to down.Note : See the FRC Status chapter of the GDC Xedge Diagnostics Guide (Part No. 032R500).

NA, read only



BER Alarm Indicates if there is currently a bit error rate alarm. Not supported.

NA

DS1 Framing Err Reports the number of DS1 framing errors. Not supported. NA


DS1 OOF/COFA Er Reports the number of OOF/COFA errors. Not supported. NA







03Iss

RC

and

Configure the E1-2C/2CS DLIM



3. From the MIB Display and Management screen, select DSP DLIMS and press the Enterkey. The DSP DLIMS screen appears.

4. Select the E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status menu option and press the Enter key.

5. Select Extra detail . The Detail of E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status entry 0 appears as shownin Figure 10-3. The screen parameters are described in E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status ScreenParameters on page 10-12.

6. Select Extract Fr . At the prompt, select yes.

7. At the Select option: prompt, enter the option number of the item you want to configure enter the configuration changes.



10. Select Down to transition to the Detail of E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status entry 1 screen.

11. Repeat step 7 through step 9 for Detail of E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status entry 1.


13. Select Save. This completes the Configure the E1-2C/CS DLIM procedure. Proceed toConfigure and Activate the Links on page 10-23.

Line ES Reports the number of line errored second intervals. Not supported.

NA, read only


ES Reports the number of errored second intervals. Not supported. NA, read only




ExBER Reports the number of extended bit errors. Not supported. NA, read only

Note Extract Frame B must be set to yes for the FRC.






d to

Figure 10-3 Extra Detail Screen of E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status


The E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status screen allows you to view and set the parameters requireconfigure the E1-2C/2CS DLIM. These parameters are defined in Table 10-4. The default valuesare indicated by d.


Switch Name: Slot x SYS E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status SW VersionDetail of E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status entry 0

Link No : 0 14 Sio Nat'l : on Line ES : 0 Version : dual 15 Si1 Nat'l : on Line SES : 000 Loopback : none LOS Defect: no ES : 001 Framer Mod: crc mfrm OOF Defect: no SES : 002 Tx Clk Src: system AIS Defect: no AISS : 003 TS16 PayLd: no FERF Defec: no UAS : 004 Tx AIS : no BER Defect: yes05 Extract Fr: no LOS Alarm : no06 Interface : balanc 120 LOF Alarm : no07 Clear Coun: yes AIS Alarm : no08 Reconfigur: no FERF Alarm: no09 SA4 Nat'l : on BER Alarm : yes10 SA5 Nat'l : on CRC Errors: 011 SA6 Nat'l : on Frame Erro: 012 SA7 Nat'l : on FEBE Error: 013 SA8 Nat'l : on Line Code : 0Select option:Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row,Press ^J for extra help on this item, Summary, eXit



03Iss

Table 10-4 E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status Parameter Definitions



Version Indicates the LIM type installed, in this case, an e1 dual . NA, read only

Loopback Enables/indicates the setting of the diagnostic loopback. Choices are:

A - none d: no loopback is selectedB - line lpbk : the line loopback causes received data to be looped back as transmitted data in the line interface of the LIMC - payload lpbk : the payload loopback causes received data to be looped back as transmitted data in the framer of the LIM; the looped data undergoes frame generation, alarm insertion, trunk conditioning, and line codingD - digital lpbk : the digital loopback causes signals received from the Slot Controller to be looped back by the LIM framer to the Slot Controller.

Note: The loopback is initiated upon pressing A - D. Loopback timeout is set in the DSP DLIMs screen.

Immediate


A - crc mfrm d: CRC multiframe alignment signal patternB - basic : Frame Alignment Signal (FAS) patternC - unframed : unframed signal pattern

Reconfigure

Tx Clk Src Enables/indicates the selection of the transmit clock. The options are:

A - system d: the system clock provides the LIM transmit clockB - local oscillator : the local oscillator provides the LIM transmit clockC - local link0 , timing from link 0 provides the LIM transmit clockD - local link1 , timing from link 1 provides the LIM transmit clock

Reconfigure

TS16 Payld Enables/indicates the setting of the TS16 payload:yes : Type y to set timeslot 16 to carry payload.

nod: Type n to be able to use timeslot 16 for CAS (Channel Associated Signaling).

Reconfigure



Reconfigure

Extract Fr Enables/indicates the extraction of frame bits: yes : Type y to enable the extraction of frame bits.

nod: Type n to disable frame bit extraction.

Note : Must be set to yesd for the FRC

Reconfigure



Controller

Received Data

Transmitted Data

LineLoopback

PayloadLoopback

DigitalLoopback

E1-2C/2CS LIM



Interface Enables/indicates the choice of one of two interfaces:

A - balanced 120 d

B - unbalanced 75

Reconfigure



Immediate

Reconfigur Resets the FRC with the current parameter values:yes : Type y to reconfigure the FRC.nod: Type n to exit this option without reconfiguring the FRC.

Immediate

se1SA4 National bit SA4, transmitted in bit position 4 of Non Frame Alignment Signal (NFAS) frames. Note: Only supported with E1-2CS/4CS LIMs. Bit is fixed to On (1) for E1-2C/4C LIMs.

Reconfigure

se1SA5 National bit SA5, transmitted in bit position 5 of NFAS frames. Note: Only supported with E1-2CS/4CS LIMs. Bit is fixed to On (1) for E1-2C/4C LIMs.

Reconfigure


Reconfigure


Reconfigure


Reconfigure

se1SI0 International bit SI0, transmitted in bit position 1 of NFAS frames. Note 1Only supported with E1-2CS/4CS LIMs. Bit is fixed to On (1) for E1-2C/4C LIMs.Note 2Not applicable when using CRC Multiframe Framing.

Reconfigure

se1SI1 International bit SI1, transmitted in bit position 1 of Frame Alignment Signal (FAS) frames.Note 1Only supported with E1-2CS/4CS LIMs. Bit is fixed to On (1) for E1-2C/4C LIMs.Note 2Not applicable when using CRC Multiframe Framing.

Reconfigure




FERF Defect Indicates if there is currently a far end receiver failure condition. NA, read only


1x10-3.

NA, read only

LOS Alarm Indicates if there is currently a loss of signal alarm. This will result in the operational state of the link going to down. In addition, all Frame Relay/Transport/PPP VCs and FUNI/ATM-DXI VCs configured on the link will have their operational state set to down.Note: See the FRC Status chapter of the GDC Xedge Switch Diagnostics Guide (Part No. 032R500) for more information.

NA, read only






03Iss

P ort.

RC

red

Configure the HSSI-DCE/DTE DLIM

The HSSI-DCE or HSSI-DTE DLIM provides two high-speed Frame Relay/transport/PPFUNI/ATM-DXI based interfaces for connection to a router or equivalent network equipmen



3. From the MIB Display and Management menu screen, select the DSP DLIMS option andpress the Enter key. The DSP DLIMS screen appears.

4. Select the HSSI DLIM Config/Status menu option and press the Enter key. The HSSI DLIMConfig/Status screen appears.

5. Select Extra detail . The Detail of HSSI DLIM Config/Status entry 0 screen appears asshown in Figure 10-4. The screen parameters are described in HSSI DLIM Config/StatusScreen Parameters on page 10-16.




LOF Alarm Indicates if there is currently a loss of frame alarm. This will result in the operational state of the link going to down. In addition, all Frame Relay/Transport/PPP VCs and FUNI/ATM-DXI VCs configured on the link will have their operational state set to down.Note: See the FRC Status chapter of the GDC Xedge Diagnostics Guide (Part No. 032R500) for more information.

NA, read only


FERF Alarm Indicates if there is currently a far end receiver failure alarm. NA, read only



Frame Erro Reports the number of frame errors. NA, read only


Line Code Reports the number of line code violations. NA, read only












SSI-

9. Select Down to transition to the Detail of HSSI DLIM Config/Status entry 1 screen.

10. Repeat step 6 through step 8 for Detail of HSSI DLIM Config/Status entry 1.


12. Select Save. This completes the Configure the HSSI-DCE/DTE DLIM procedure. Proceed toConfigure and Activate the Links on page 10-23.

Figure 10-4 Extra Detail Screen of HSSI DLIM Config/Status

HSSI DLIM Config/Status Screen Parameters

The HSSI DLIM Config/Status screen allows you to view and set the parameters for the HDCE/DTE DLIM. These parameters are defined in Table 10-5.

The default values are indicated by d.


Switch Name:Slot x SYS HSSI DLIM Config/Status New EventDetail of HSSI DLIM Config/Status entry 0

Link : 00 Local Loopback : none1 Remote Loopback : none2 Reconfigure : no3 Type : dte Version : hssi v14 Clock Source : local Test Mode : off Link Ready : no Remote Ready : no LOS Defect : no LOS Alarm : no




03Iss

Table 10-5 HSSI DLIM Config/Status Screen Parameter Definitions



Local Loopback Enables/indicates the setting of the local loopback feature as one of the following:A - none d

B - lineC - internalD - bilateral . See the following diagram:

Immediate


Selectable local loopbacks from the HSSI-DCE/DTE DLIM.

Local HSSI Slot Controller

Local Line Loopback Local Internal Loopback

Local Bilateral Loopback

Local



DCE Interface DTE Interface



Remote Loopback Indicates the local HSSI-DCE/DTE DLIM has been placed into the desired loopback remotely by the DCE/DTE:

A - none d

B - lineC - digitalD - remote line . See the following diagram:Note: These are not user selectable.

Immediate

Reconfigure Resets the FRC with the current parameter values:yes : Type y to reconfigure the FRC.nod: Type n to exit this option without reconfiguring the FRC.

Immediate

Type Enables/indicates the LIM is set to emulate:A - dte

B - dced

NA

Version Indicates the LIM type installed, in this case, an hssi v1 NA, read only

Clock Source Enables/indicates the selection of the transmit clock. The options are:

A - local d

B - from dce : not supported on the HSSI-DCE/DTE DLIMC - local 45 MbpsD - local 34 Mbps

Reconfigure

Test Mode Indicates to the remote DTE when the local DCE is in test mode (output).

NA, read only

Link Ready Indicates if the link is enabled. NA, read only

Remote Ready Indicates if the remote DTE connected to the HSSI-DCE interface is enabled (input).

NA, read only


LOS Alarm Indicates if there is currently a loss of signal alarm. This will result in the operational state of the link going to down. In addition, all Frame Relay/Transport/PPP VCs and FUNI/ATM-DXI VCs configured on the link will have their operational state set to down.Note: See the FRC Status chapter of the GDC Xedge Switch Diagnostics Guide (Part No. 032R500) for more information.

NA, read only

Table 10-5 HSSI DLIM Config/Status Screen Parameter Definitions (Continued)



Selectable loopbacks invoked by the remote DCE/DTE.

to LocalRemote

Local HSSI Slot Controller

DigitalLoopback

Line Loopback



03Iss

First,tion.

signal.

DTElabeled

e wireationed with port,d of the

RC

and

Configure the SI-2C DLIM

Two items must be configured before installing the Serial LIM in the GDC Xedge chassis. you must determine if the ports on the LIM will be used in the DCE or DTE mode of operaSecond, you must decide if the shield ground connection will be used for each input channelBoth items must be configured for each channel on the LIM.

The default operating mode for the Serial LIM is the DCE mode. If any port is to be used in themode, the 16-pin resistor pack associated with that port must be moved from the socket DCE PORT (0, or 1) to the corresponding socket labeled DTE PORT (0, or 1).

The input for each channel uses a “balanced” line configuration. A balanced line is a threinput connection using two wires for signal, and the third for the shield. The default configuron the LIM connects the shield to the system’s chassis ground (the shield jumper associateach port is installed). If you wish to remove the shield-to-ground connection for a particularremove the shield jumper associated with that port. It is recommended that at least one enconnecting cable’s shield be connected to chassis ground.

Use the following procedure to configure the SI-2C DLIM:



3. From the MIB Display and Management screen, select the DSP DLIMS option and pressthe Enter key. The DSP DLIMS screen appears.

4. Select the SI-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status menu option and press the Enter key. The SI-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status screen appears.

5. Select Extra detail. The Detail of SI-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status entry 0 appears as shownin Figure 10-5. The screen parameters are described in SI-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status ScreenParameter Definitions on page 10-20.

6. Select Controller . Select ms ms2 for this item. (You must select ms ms2 for the FRC tooperate.)

7. At the Select option: prompt, enter the option number of the item you want to configure enter the configuration changes.

8. If you made any changes, select Reconfig Button and press the Enter key.

9. At the Reconfig Button: (Y/N) prompt, enter Y to send the changes to the LIM.

10. Select Down to transition to the Detail of SI-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status entry 1 screen.

11. Repeat step 6 through step 9 for entry 1 (link-1).


13. Select Save. This completes the Configure the SI-2C/CS DLIM procedure. Proceed toConfigure and Activate the Links on page 10-23.



Figure 10-5 Extra Detail of SI-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status for entry “0”

SI-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status Screen Parameter Definitions

The SI-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status screen allows you to view and set the parameters for the SI-2C DLIM. These parameters are defined in Table 10-6. The default values are indicated by d.




LIM I.D. Type Indicates the LIM type installed. NA, read only

Firmware Revision Indicates the revision of the LIM firmware installed. NA, read only


Controller Enables/indicates the choice of Slot Controller base card:

A - ce hpg hc2 d

B - ms ms2Note: You must select B - ms ms2 for the FRC Adaptation Controller.

Reconfigure(Reconfig Button)

DCE or DTE Enables/indicates the LIM is set to emulate:A - dced

B - dteNote: If the port is to be set to operate in DTE mode, the 16 pin resistor pack associated with the port must be resident in the DTE mode socket.




SWITCH name:Slot x SYS SI (SCF) DLIM Config/Status New EventDetail of SI (SCF) DLIM Config/Status entry 0





03Iss

Loopback Enables/indicates the setting of the loopback feature as:

A - none d

B - line , (plus controls RTS->CTS and DTR->DSR must be made.)C - linkD-digital .

Immediate

Receive Line Timing Enables/indicates the setting of receive line timing as:A - enabled d: allows clocking of data from remote timing source; do not use with long cable runsB - disabled : uses internal source for clocking of data


Data Rate in KBits/Sec Enables/indicates the data rate set for the port is:A - rate 2x4 O - rate 57x6 d - rate 307x2B - rate 4x8 P - rate 64x0 e - rate 320x0C - rate 7x2 Q - rate 76x8 f - rate 384x0D - rate 9x6 R - rate 96x0 g - rate 448x0E - rate 14x4 S - rate 112x0 h - rate 512x0F - rate 16x0 T - rate 115x2 i - rate 768x0G - rate 16x6 U - rate 128x0 j - rate 1024x0H - rate 19x2 V - rate 144x0 k - rate 1536x0I - rate 28x8 W - rate 153x6 l - rate 1920x0J - rate 32x0 Y - rate 192x0 m - rate 2048x0K - rate 38x4 Z - rate 224x0 n - rate 3072x0L - rate 48x0 a - rate 230x0 o - rate 4096x0M - rate 50x0 b - rate 256x0 p - rate 6144x0N - rate 56x0 c - rate 288x0 q - rate 8192x0


Clock Enables/indicates that the transmit clock source is set as:

A - system d

B - local oscillator : not used when the link is DTE (see the DCE or DTE option).


Interface Type Enables/indicates the setting of the interface type as:A - x21B - rs449C - eia530 AD - v35


Reconfig Button Resets the FRC with the current parameter values:yes : Type y to reconfigure the FRC.

nod: Type n to exit this option without reconfiguring the FRC.

Immediate

LOS Defect Indicates if there is currently a loss of signal condition.Link Type LOS Defect LOS Alarm Fr Panel Er LedDTE CTS Off CTS Off ONDCE RTS Off RTS Off ON

NA, read only





Controller

Received Data

Transmitted Data

LineLoopback

LinkLoopback

DigitalLoopback

Serial I/O (SCF) LIM



LOS Alarm Indicates if there is currently a loss of signal alarm. This will result in the operational state of the link going to down. In addition, all Frame Relay/Transport/PPP VCs and FUNI/ATM-DXI VCs configured on the link will have their operational state set to down .See defect and alarm indications above.Note: See the FRC Status chapter of the GDC Xedge Switch Diagnostics Guide (Part No. 032R500) for more information.

NA, read only





FRC Configuration Configure and Activate the Links

03Iss

UNI.type.

of thetive.also

ll the

stics

Configure and Activate the Links

The FRC supports five types of service; frame transport, PPP, frame relay, ATM-DXI and FThe Link Configuration menu screen allows you to configure and activate the links for each

Links are created automatically. Links cannot be removed. The link is viewed as the parentVC. The VC is viewed as the child of the link. A VC can be activated if the link is already acTherefore, the link must be activated prior to the VCs on the link. Deactivating a link deactivates all of its VCs if they are active. Therefore, deactivating a link will bring down aVCs on the link.

Use the following procedure to select the service type for the links and to activate them:


2. From the MIB Display and Management screen, select the Frac-Frame Adaptation menuoption. The Frac-Frame Adaptation screen appears as shown in Figure 10-6.

Figure 10-6 Frac-Frame Adaptation Screen

Note The link’s Admin state must be notInService in order to make changes to any of the configurable parameters.

Note Link Status, Frame Relay/Transport/PPP VC Status, and FUNI/ATM-DXI VC Status are status only and are described in the FRC Status chapter of the GDC Xedge Switch DiagnoGuide (Part No. 032R500).


Switch Name: Slot 14 SYS Frac - Frame Adaptation SW Version

0 Link Configuration1 Link Status2 Frame Relay Configuration3 FUNI/ATM-DXI Configuration4 Frame Relay/Transport/PPP VC Config5 Frame Relay/Transport/PPP VC Status6 FUNI/ATM-DXI VC Configuration7 FUNI/ATM-DXI VC Status8 ATM Shaping Rates




ting.

ke

e of

DXI).

link.

want

3. Select the Link Configuration menu option. The Link Configuration screen appears.

4. Select Extra detail. The Link Configuration, Detail of Link Configuration entry 0 screenappears as shown in Figure 10-7. The screen parameters are described in Link ConfigurationScreen Parameters on page 10-25.

5. Select the Admin state item and press Enter. The current Admin state is the default setThe software prompts you to select the administrative state for the link.

6. Select the letter for notInService. Removing the link from service enables you to maconfiguration changes. You are returned to the Link Configuration screen.

7. Select the Service Type item and press Enter. The software prompts you to select the typframe service on the link.

8. Select the appropriate service type (Frame Transport, frame relay, FUNI, PPP, or ATM-Press Enter to continue, and you are returned to the Link Configuration screen.

9. Select Admin state. The software prompts you to select the administrative state for the Select Active. This re-activates the link.

10. If desired, you can configure the other options. Enter the option number of the item youto configure (at the Select option: prompt) and enter the configuration changes.

11. Use the Down command to access entry 1 (link-1).

12. Repeat step 5 through step 10 for entry 1.

13. When you are finished eXit back to the Frac-Frame Adaptation screen. This completes theConfigure and Activate the Links procedure.

14. If you selected frame relay for the service type in step 7, and you want to configure the LMIproceed to Configure the Frame Relay LMI on page 10-28. Otherwise, proceed to Configurethe Virtual Circuits on page 10-33.



03Iss

igure

Figure 10-7 Detail of Link Configuration for Entry 0

Link Configuration Screen Parameters

The Link Configuration screen allows you to view and set the parameters required to confthe link interface. These parameters are defined in Table 10-7. The default values are indicated by d.

Table 10-7 Link Configuration Screen Parameter Definitions



NA, read only

Channel Will always be 0. NA, read only

Service type Enables/indicates the setting of the type of service. The options are:

A - frame transport d

B - frame relay C - funiD - pppE - atm-dxi

Link Activation (Admin state)

Maximum size Enables/indicates the setting of the frame size. The largest acceptable frame, not including the start and end flags, is 9335 bytes.




Switch Name: Slot 14 SYS Link Configuration SW VersionDetail of Link Configuration entry 0

Link : 0 Channel : 00 Service type : frame relay1 Maximum size : 40962 Maximum VCC : 3003 Over booking : none4 CRC mode : crc 165 Invert data : no6 Loopback : none7 Trap config : no trap8 Admin state : active9 Link B/W : 64000




Maximum VCC Enables/indicates the setting of the maximum number of VCs per link: For Frame Relay, ATM-DXI and FUNI, maximum VCs per link is 992 (5)

For Frame Transport and PPP, this value is fixed at 1d.


Over booking This option is Not Supported.The options are:A - none d: = 100% channel utilizationB - x150: = 150%C - x200: = 200%D - x250: = 250%E - x300: = 300%F - x400: = 400%G - x500: = 500%

NA

CRC mode Enables/indicates the setting of the CRC mode as:

A - crc16 d

B - crc32 .


Invert data Enables/indicates the setting of the invert data option: (Y/N):Y - yes , invert data option on

N - nod, invert data option off


Loopback Enables/indicates the setting of the link loopback. The options are:

A - none d: no loopbackB - tx loopback : frames from the SAR are sent back to the SAR by the HDLC device, this loopback requires the LIM to be configured as a DCE or, if the LIM is configured as DTE, a cable must be attached to the link and attached equipment must supply clock; if the operational state of the link is down due to the link being disconnected, the tx loopback will force the link to active oper state permitting frames to passC - rx loopback : not supported.


Table 10-7 Link Configuration Screen Parameter Definitions (Continued)



SwitchFabric

Received Data

Transmitted Data

txLoopback

FRC

HDLC SAR Engine

Loopback



03Iss

Trap config Enables/indicates which SNMP unsolicited messages are sent by the FRC to the NMS* authentication tables. The options are:A - no trap d: send no trapsB - state-change : send traps when operational state changesC - lmi-errors : turns on traps for various LMI message errors, e.g., new DLCI found in the full status report has not been provisioned on the deviceD - trap-all : turns on all traps


Admin state Enables/indicates the setting of the Admin state. The options are:A - active : Must be selected to use the link. Activating a channel will cause all frame VCs associated with the channel set to WAIT to be reactivated, providing the ATM VC has been configured and is running.B - notInService d

C - restartNote: See Admin State in this chapter for a discussion.

Immediate

Link B/W Link B/W is used by CAC to determine if there is enough usable bandwidth available for a VC.Link B/W reports the usable bandwidth of the link not including framing.For the DS1-2C/2CS, reports 1536000 and is not configurable.For the E1-2C/2CS, reports 1984000 and is not configurable.For the HSSI-DCE/DTE and the SI-2C when the link is configured as DCE, reports the data rate selected in the DSP DLIM menu screen and is not configurable.For the HSSI-DCE/DTE and SI-2C when the link is configured as DTE, this item is configurable. Enter the desired link bandwidth.Note: Toggle the Admin state from notInService to

active to make any change to this field.


Table 10-7 Link Configuration Screen Parameter Definitions (Continued)




FRC Configuration Service Specific Configuration

re theyour

rs fornk.

e

nter

nter

stics

Service Specific Configuration

The FRC software enables you to configure the LMI for Frame Relay services and to configuMode for FUNI and ATM-DXI services. These configurations are optional depending on network requirements.

Configure the Frame Relay LMI

The Frame Relay Configuration screen enables you to set the frame relay specific parametethe virtual circuits of the frame relay link, as well as (optionally) configuring the LMI for the li



3. From the Frac-Frame Adaptation screen, select the Frame Relay Configuration menuoption. The Frame Relay Configuration screen appears.

4. Select Extra detail. The Frame Relay Configuration, Detail of Frame RelayConfiguration entry 0 screen appears as shown in Figure 10-8. The screen parameters ardescribed in Frame Relay Configuration Screen Parameters on page 10-29.

5. At the Select option: prompt, enter the option number of the items to be configured and ethe configuration changes.

6. Select Down to transition to the Frame Relay Configuration, Detail of Frame RelayConfiguration entry 1 screen.

7. At the Select option: prompt, enter the option number of the items to be configured and ethe configuration changes.

8. Select eXit to return to the Frac-Frame Adaptation screen. This completes the Configure theFrame Relay LMI procedure.

9. Proceed to Frame Relay/Transport/PPP VC Config Screen Parameters on page 10-35.

Note The selected link must be in the notInService Admin State in order to make changes to any of these configurable parameters.


Note An entry appears in this table when the service type, selected previously from the Link Configuration screen, is changed to Frame Relay. The entry is removed if the service type is changed from Frame Relay.



03Iss

d to

Figure 10-8 Extra Detail of Frame Relay Configuration Screen for Entry 0

Frame Relay Configuration Screen Parameters

The Frame Relay Configuration screen allows you to view and set the parameters requireconfigure frame relay for the link. These parameters are defined in Table 10-8. The default valuesare indicated by d.

Table 10-8 Frame Relay Configuration Screen Parameter Definitions


Link Displays the number of the link currently under review. NA, read only


Address length Enables/indicates the setting of the length of the frame relay header (two bytes currently supported).


LMI protocol Enables/indicates the setting of the LMI protocol. The options are:

A - none d: disables the local managerB - go4-LMIC - ansi-t1617d94D - itu-q933a


LMI procedure Enables/indicates the setting of the LMI procedure. The options are:A - network d: FRC responds to cpe status inquiry requestsB - user : FRC sends status inquiry requests to cpeC - bidirectional : does both A and B above




Switch Name:slot x SYS Frame Relay Configuration SW VersionDetail of Frame Relay Configuration entry 0

Link : 0 Channel : 00 Address length : two bytes1 LMI protocol : none2 LMI procedure : network3 N391 : 64 N392 : 35 N393 : 46 T391 : 107 T392 : 158 Enable async status msgs : yes




N391 The N391 parameter defines the interval between full status polls for the link. The valid range for this parameter is between 1 and 255. It is used by the user end to request full status responses.

For example, if N391 is 6d, every sixth request is for a full status response


N392 N392 is the maximum number of unanswered (user) or not received (network) status enquiries the FRC shall accept before declaring the link down. The value may range between 1 and 10 and should be less than or equal to N393. It is used to determine the up/down status of the Frame

Relay link; 3d.


N393 N393 is the number of status polling intervals over which N392 is counted. For example, if within N393 number of events the station receives N392 errors, then the link is

declared down. N393 can range between 1 and 10; 4d.


T391 T391 is the number of seconds between successive status enquiry messages. The value may range between 5 and 30

seconds; 10d. When the LMI protocol is set to user or to bidirectional, every T391 second a status enquiry message will be sent out the frame port. If LMI does not receive a status message or a full status message in response to the status enquiry, then LMI will increment the reliability error counter in the Link Status screen.T391 does not apply to links configured as network.


T392 T392 is the polling verification timer for the link. The value

can vary between 5 and 30 seconds; 15d seconds. Must be greater than T391. When the LMI protocol is set to network or bidirectional, LMI will expect to receive a status enquiry message every T392 second. If a status enquiry is not received, then LMI will increment the reliability error counter in the Link Status screen.T392 does not apply to links configured as user.


Enable async status msgs

Enables the sending of unsolicited status messages on the frame side when the state of the frame to ATM VC changes.


Table 10-8 Frame Relay Configuration Screen Parameter Definitions (Continued)





03Iss

he

Configure FUNI/ATM-DXI Mode

The FUNI/ATM-DXI Configuration screen is reserved for future use.

The FUNI/ATM-DXI Configuration screen will allow you to configure the parameters for tFUNI/ATM-DXI link. If desired you can use the following procedure to access the FUNI/ATM-DXI Configuration screen:



3. From the Frac-Frame Adaptation screen, select the FUNI/ATM-DXI Configurationmenu option. The FUNI/ATM-DXI Configuration screen appears.

4. Select Extra detail. The FUNI/ATM-DXI Configuration, Detail of FUNI/ATM-DXIConfiguration entry 0 screen appears as shown in Figure 10-9.

5. Select Down to transition entry 1 (link-1).

6. Select eXit to return to the Frac-Frame Adaptation screen.

7. Proceed to Configure the Virtual Circuits on page 10-33.

Note In the next step, be certain to select the correct menu option choice, FUNI/ATM-DXI Configuration, since there are several similar menu titles.

Note When FUNI or ATM-DXI is selected as the Service Type from the Link Configuration menu screen, a virtual channel entry is automatically generated. This screen is initially empty.

Note There is currently nothing in this screen that is user configurable.



hed

Figure 10-9 Extra Detail Screen of FUNI/ATM-DXI Configuration for Entry “0”

The FUNI/ATM-DXI Configuration screen allows you to view the following parameters for tFUNI/ATM-DXI link. These parameters are defined in Table 10-9. The default values are indicateby d.

Table 10-9 FUNI/ATM-DXI Configuration Screen Parameter Definitions




FUNI/ATM-DXI mode Enables/indicates the setting of the FUNI mode. A - mode 1a d


Signaling Not supported. Enables or disables ATM signaling on this link.

NA

Signaling VPI Not supported. Address used to generate signaling messages.

NA

Signaling VCI Not supported. NA

ILMI Not supported. Enables or disables management function. NA

ILMI VPI Not supported. VPI used for ILMI on this FUNI link. NA

ILMI VCI Not supported. VCI used for ILMI on this FUNI link. NA

OAM Not supported. Enables/indicates the setting of OAM support on this link.

NA

Table 10-9


Switch Name: Slot x SYS FUNI/ATM-DXI Configuration SW VersionDetail of FUNI/ATM-DXI Configuration entry 0

Link : 0 Channel : 00 FUNI/ATM-DXI mode : mode 1a1 Signaling : -2 Signaling VPI : -3 Signaling VCI : -4 ILMI : -5 ILMI VPI : -6 ILMI VCI : -7 OAM : -

Select option:Enter entry number to edit, Press ^J for extra help on this item, Summary,eXit


FRC Configuration Configure the Virtual Circuits

03Iss

on

red

basedATM

stics

d by

are

Configure the Virtual CircuitsThis topic is divided into two sub-headings:

Frame Relay/Transport/PPP Virtual Circuits (Perform this procedure if your service type is frame relay, frame transport or PPP)

FUNI/ATM-DXI Virtual Circuits(Perform this procedure if your service type is FUNI or ATM-DXI)

Frame Relay/Transport/PPP Virtual Circuits

Use the following steps to add a frame relay, frame transport, or PPP virtual circuit:



3. From the Frac-Frame Adaptation screen, select the Frame Relay/Transport/PPP VCConfig menu option.

4. Select Extra detail. The Frame Relay/Transport/PPP VC Config, Detail of Frame Relay/Transport/PPP VC Config entry 0 screen appears as shown in Figure 10-10. The screenparameters are described in Frame Relay/Transport/PPP VC Config Screen Parameterspage 10-35.

5. Select Admin state. At the prompt, select notInService. This enables you to makeconfiguration changes.

6. At the Select option: prompt, enter the option number of the item or items to be configuand enter the configuration changes.The ingress CIR (in bits per second), Be and Bc values (in bits), are policed by frame-facilities and converted to ATM-based PCR, SCR and MBS for shaping in route to the environment. You can find additional information in Traffic Policing on page 2-52 of the GDCXedge Switch Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310.

Note The selected VC entry’s Admin state must be notInService in order to make changes to all configurable parameters.


Note This screen is initially empty. In the case of Frame Transport or PPP type service, a virtualchannel entry is automatically made. In the case of Frame Relay, a virtual channel is addemeans of the Add entry. An entry must be added for each FR DLCI.

Note If ingress CIR, ingress Bc, and ingress Be are all set to 0, then ingress policing and shapingdisabled.



e

s.

rtr the

7. Select Admin state. At the prompt, select Active to use the VC.

8. Select Down to transition to the Detail of Frame Relay/Transport/PPP VC Config entry 1screen.

9. Repeat step 5 and step 7 for Detail of Frame Relay/Transport/PPP VC Config entry 1.

10. Select eXit to return to the Frac-Frame Adaptation screen. If you want to manually set thshaping rate proceed to Configure the Shaping Rate on page 10-45, otherwise continue to step 11.

11. Select eXit to return to the MIB Display and Management screen and save your changeThis completes the FRC configuration.

12. Proceed to Chapter 16: Bandwidth Allocation and Reservation for allocating resources, andChapter 17: Configuring Connections, for configuring PVCs (the FRC does not suppoSPVCs at this time). Note that the FRC PVC/SPVC always uses Link-0 and VPI =1 foFRC side of the PVC/SPVC configuration.

Figure 10-10 Extra Detail of Frame Relay/Transport VC Config for Entry 0


Switch Name: Slot x SYSFrame Relay/Transport/PPP VC Config SW VersionDetail of Frame Relay/Transport/PPP VC Config entry 0

Link : 0 12 Egress Be : - 25 User MBS : - Channel : 0 13 Egress CIR: - DLCI : 16 14 T.P. trans: method2100 VC option : pvc 15 FR/ATM IW : ni without ATM VPI : 1 16 DE-CLP map: mode 101 ATM VCI : 16 17 CLP-DE map: mode 102 DeMux inde: - 18 FECN-EFCI : -03 Dest E.164: 19 ULP Encap : -04 Dest chann: - 20 Trap confi: no trap05 Dest DLCI : - 21 Admin stat: active06 QoS : vbr med Pcr : 22500007 Ingress Bc: 0 Scr : 22500008 Ingress Be: 0 Mbs : 109 Ingress CI: 0 22 Info Field: 6410 Tag option: yes 23 User PCR : -11 Egress Bc : - 24 User SCR : -Select option:Add entry, Enter entry number to edit, Kill entry,Press ^J for extra help on this item, Summary, eXit



03Iss

ersers are

Frame Relay/Transport/PPP VC Config Screen Parameters

The Frame Relay/Transport/PPP VC Config screen allows you to view and set the parametrequired to configure the Frame Relay/Transport/PPP for the virtual circuits. These parametdefined in Table 10-10. The default values are indicated by d.

Table 10-10 Frame Relay/Transport/PPP VC Config Screen Parameter Definitions




DLCI Indicates the setting of the DLCI number in the range (16-1007) for Frame Relay as selected during Add entry .

NA, read only

VC option This parameter is not used. The software will not accept any changes to this field.A - pvc d

B - spvc .

NA

ATM VPI Indicates the setting of the ATM Virtual Path Identifier. This parameter must always be VPI=1.

NA

ATM VCI Enables/indicates the setting of the ATM Virtual Channel

Identifier in the range (1d to 1023). You will use this VCI value for the VC in the PVC Configuration/Status table of Slot-0 or the FRC SPVC Configuration/Status table.Note: Use 1 - 1007 only. This value must be unique in the

system for the Admin state to go active.


Demux index For multiplexing many DLCIs into one (NI many to one). Not supported.

NA

Dest E.164 For end-to-end connection to a destination you have defined. Not supported.

NA

Dest channel Destination channel number. Not supported. NA

Dest DLCI Destination DLCI number. Not supported. NA

QoS Enables/indicates the setting of QoS. Defines the priority of the connection: high, medium, or low. QOS is currently only used in the initial set up of a circuit. The options are:A - VBR high - Not supported. When you select this option the software defaults to VBR medium .

B - VBR medium d - When you select this option the software subtracts the CIR of the VC from the high priority bandwidth. C - VBR low .- When you select this option the software does not subtract any bandwidth but marks all incoming frames as DE=1.For more information, see Frame Traffic Management on page 2-52 of the GDC Xedge Switch Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310.


Ingress Bc Enables/indicates the setting of Ingress Bc (Committed Burst Size) of incoming frames in bits (see Note that follows this table). For more information, see Frame Traffic Management on page 2-52 of the GDC Xedge Switch Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310.





Ingress Be Enables/indicates the setting of Ingress Be (Excess Burst Size) of incoming frames in bits (see Note that follows this table). (Frame relay only: for more information, see Frame Traffic Management on page 2-52 of the GDC Xedge Switch Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310)


Ingress CIR Enables/indicates the setting of Ingress CIR (Committed Information Rate) of incoming frames in bits per second (see Note that follows this table). For more information, see Frame Traffic Management on page 2-52 of the GDC Xedge Switch Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310.


Tag option Enables/indicates the setting of the Tag option (frame relay

only). If set to Y - Yesd, policing sets the DE bit in frames exceeding ingress Bc. For more information, see Frame Traffic Management on page 2-52 of the GDC Xedge Switch Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310


Egress Bc Not supported. NA

Egress Be Not supported. NA

Egress CIR Not supported. NA

T.P. translation Enables/indicates the setting of the traffic parameter translation for converting frame traffic (policing) descriptors to ATM, and ATM traffic (policing) traffic descriptors to frame. The options are:A - method21 (default). Calculations based on B-ICI V1.1.B - method22 Calculations based on B-ICI V1.1.C - no shaping - sets shaping of frames to maximum PCR rate supported by the FRC/CHRCD - user specified - user specifies ATM traffic contract, independently of the frame relay traffic contract. User defined PCR, SCR and MBS are via the User PCR, User SCR and User MBS.Calculations are based on ITU-T I.370 and B-ICI 1.1. See Frame Traffic Management on page 2-52 of the GDC Xedge Technical Reference (Part Number 032R310).


FR/ATM IW option Enables/indicates the setting of the frame relay/ATM interworking option. The options are:

A - ni frf5 d: network interworking with PVC management,B - si frf8 : service interworkingC - ni without pvcm : network interworking without PVC managementNote: You can not specify iwType until a VCI is specified


Table 10-10 Frame Relay/Transport/PPP VC Config Screen Parameter Definitions (Continued)





03Iss

DE-CLP mapping Enables/indicates the mapping of frame to ATM, based on interworking options above (frame relay only). The options are:

A - mode 1 d: DE is copied unchanged into the DE field in the FR-SSCS PDU header and mapped to the ATM CLP of every ATM cell generated for that frameB - mode 20 : DE is copied unchanged into the DE field in the FR-SSCS PDU header and CLP is set to 0C - mode 21 : DE is copied unchanged into the DE field in the FR-SSCS PDU header and CLP is set to 1For more information, see Frame Traffic Management on page 2-52 of the GDC Xedge Switch Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310


CLP-DE mapping Enables/indicates the mapping of ATM to frame, based on interworking options above (frame relay only). The options are:A - mode 1 d: DE is set if CLP is set or DE in FR-SSCS PDU header is set,B - mode 2 : FR-SSCS PDU DE field is copied unchanged to DE; FRF5 only,C - mode 20 : DE in Q.922 core frame is set to 0; FRF8 only, orD - mode 21 : DE in Q.922 core frame is set to 1, FRF8 only.For more information, see Frame Traffic Management on page 2-52 of the GDC Xedge Switch Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310.


FECN-EFCI mapping

Enables/indicates the setting for congestion mapping, based on interworking options above (frame relay only). Choices are:A - mode 1 d: the FECN in the frame is mapped into the ATM EFCI field, orB - mode 2 : the EFCI field is always set to “congestion not experienced.” Note: This item is only meaningful to the SI mode.For more information, see Frame Traffic Management on page 2-52 of the GDC Xedge Switch Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310.


ULP Encap mode Enables/indicates the setting of the upper layer protocol handling option (frame relay only). The options are:

A - transparent d B - translationFor Service Interworking, RFC 1490 to RFC1483 translation.Note: This item is only meaningful to the SI mode.


Trap config Enables/indicates which SNMP unsolicited messages are sent by the FRC to the NMS authentication tables. The options are:

A - no trap d: send no trapsB - state change : send traps when operational state changesC - resource err : send traps when configuration fails due to lack of resourcesD - trap-all : turns on all traps







Admin state Enables/indicates the setting of the Admin state. The options are:

A - active d: must be selected to use this VCB - notInService : the VC is not available for use; if you attempt to activate a VC and there is not enough high priority and /or low priority bandwidth available, or if the link has not been activated, or if the VCI has been allocated to another VC, then the Admin state will remain notInServiceC - destroy : is supplied by the management function for destroying the VCD - restartE - notReady : indicates that the parameters selected are not correct, read only, see the Note following this table.F - wait : waiting for PVC/SPVC to be enabled, read only.States wait and notReady cannot be set by management. Refer to Admin State in this chapter.


Pcr Indicates the actual peak cell rate going into the ATM network. The Frame Relay/Transport/PPP traffic parameters, CIR, Bc, and Be, are converted into the PCR according to the following formula (see B-ICI 1.1, Appendix A for more detail):for FT & FR w/T.P. translation = method21: PCR = (link bandwidth * OHA) / 8 where OHA = ((Info Field Len + 10) / 48) / (Info Field Len + 6),for FR w/T.P. translation = method22: PCR = ((CIR + CIR*Bc/Be) * OHB) / 8 where OHB = ((Info Field Len + 10) / 48) / Info Field Len.When the T.P. translation is set to “no shaping” then the PCR will be set to 225000. If T.P. translation is set to “user specified” then the PCR will be set to the user specified value rounded up to one of the 36 possible values.The FRC has only 36 possible PCRs to choose from; these are not user selectable. The FRC takes the above calculated PCR and rounds it up to the nearest available PCR.For more information, see Frame Traffic Management on page 2-52 of the GDC Xedge Switch Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310.Note: The PCR should be entered in the Peak Forward Rate in the PVC setup.







03Iss

Scr Indicates the sustained cell rate going into the ATM network. When T.P. translation is set to method21 or method22 , the Frame Relay/Transport/PPP traffic parameter, CIR, is converted into the SCR according to the following formula (see B-ICI 1.1, Appendix A for more detail):SCR = (CIR * OHB) / 8 where OHB = ((Info Field Len + 10) / 48) / Info Field Len.The SCR is rounded up to the nearest 12.5% of one of the 36 possible PCR values.When the T.P. translation is set to no shaping then Scr will be set to 225000. When the T.P. translation is set to user specified then the User supplied Scr is rounded up as above.For more information, see Frame Traffic Management on page 2-52 of the GDC Xedge Switch Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310.Note: The SCR should be entered in the Sustained Forward Rate in the PVC setup. Set the desired physical access rate below the SCR.


Mbs Indicates the maximum burst size going into the ATM network. When the T.P. translation method is set to method21 or method22 , then the Frame Relay/Transport/PPP traffic parameters, CIR and Bc, are converted into the MBS according to the following formula (see B-ICI 1.1, Appendix A for more detail):MBS = (((link bandwidth * Bc / 8) / (link bandwidth - CIR)) + 1) * OHBwhere OHB = ((Info Field Len + 10) / 48) / Info Field Len.When the T.P. translation method is set to no shaping then Mbs will be set to 1. When the T.P. translation method is set to user specified then the Mbs will be as specified by the user, with the restriction that it must be between 1 and 2048.For more information, see Frame Traffic Management on page 2-52 of the GDC Xedge Switch Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310.Refer to Chapter 17: Configuring Connections, for how MBS is used in setting up PVCs and SPVCs.







Info Field Len This field only applies if the T.P. translation method is set to method21 or method22 .Enables/indicates the setting of the frame information field length used in converting the FR/FT traffic contract to an ATM traffic contract. It is ‘n’ as specified in the formulas for OHA (n) and OHB (n) of appendix A of the B-ICI specification, or frame size in the above calculations for OHA and OHB.

The permitted range for this value is (1 - 9232) 64d.Caution, changes to this parameter directly affect the PCR/SCR.Small information field lengths will cause the FR/FT traffic contract to be converted to a higher PCR/SCR resulting in fewer frames being discarded due to transmit queue build up and thus requiring more bandwidth resources in the ATM network to support this VC.Larger information field lengths will cause the FR/FT traffic contract to be converted to a lower PCR/SCR resulting in more frames being discarded due to transmit queue build up and thus requiring less bandwidth resources in the ATM network to support this VC.Changes to this parameter only take effect when the VC Config Admin state field is toggled from notInService to active .For more information, see Frame Traffic Management on page 2-52 of the GDC Xedge Switch Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310.


User PCR User Specified PCR. Only valid if the T.P. translation mode is set to user specified .


User SCR User specified SCR. Only valid if the T.P. translation mode is set to user specified .


User MBS User specified MBS. Only valid if the T.P. translation mode is set to user specified .


Note Ingress CIR, Ingress Bc, Ingress Be and traffic parameter translation (T. P. translation) mode have to be set up properly based on ITU-T I.370 and B-ICI 1.1 Appendix A.

The VC Admin state will be set to notReady for the following reasons:1) inCIR is non zero but inBc is 02) inBc is non zero and inCIR is 03) inCIR + (inCIR / ingress Bc) * ingress Be is greater than the available

bandwidth4) the policing interval, Tc, is less than 100 milliseconds. Tc is calculated as

follows:

CIR Bc Be Tc

>0 >0 >0 Tc = Bc / CIR

>0 >0 =0 Tc = Bc / CIR=0 =0 >0 Tc = Bc / access rate






03Iss

s

red

e

s.

stics

R st

FUNI/ATM-DXI Virtual Circuits

Use the following procedure to configure FUNI/ATM-DXI virtual circuits:



3. From the Frac-Frame Adaptation screen, select the FUNI/ATM-DXI VC Configurationmenu option. The FUNI/ATM-DXI VC Configuration screen appears.

4. Select Extra detail . The FUNI/ATM-DXI VC Configuration, Detail of FUNI/ATM-DXIVC Configuration entry 0 screen appears as shown in Figure 10-11. The screen parameterare described in FUNI/ATM-DXI VC Configuration Screen Parameters on page 10-42.

5. Select Admin state. At the prompt, select notInService. This enables you to makeconfiguration changes.


7. Select Admin state. Then select active to activate the VC.

8. Select Down to transition to the Detail of FUNI/ATM-DXI VC Configuration entry 1screen.

9. Repeat step 5 and step 7 for Detail of FUNI/ATM-DXI VC Configuration entry 1 .

10. Select eXit to return to the Frac-Frame Adaptation screen. If you want to manually set thshaping rate, proceed to Configure the Shaping Rate on page 10-45, otherwise continue to step 11.

11. Select eXit to return to the MIB Display and Management screen and save your changeThis completes the FRC configuration.


Note This screen is initially empty. Items can be added using Add entry provided the Service Type in the Link Configuration screen is configured for FUNI or ATM-DXI .

Note The Fwd PCR, Fwd SCR, Fwd MBS and Traffic Parameter Mode have to be set up properly based on UNI3.1 and B-ICI 1.1 Appendix A. The calculated Fwd MBS and Fwd SCR should be less than the total bandwidth, otherwise, the Admin state will become notReady. To exit notReady state, you need to set the related objects to a valid combination. The selected PCwill differ from the actual PCR. The actual PCR is determined by rounding to the next higherate available from the 36 built-in shaping rates. See Frame Traffic Management on page 2-52 of the GDC Xedge Technical Reference, Part Number 032R310.



rtr the

ers

12. Proceed to Chapter 16: Bandwidth Allocation and Reservation for allocating resources, andChapter 17: Configuring Connections, for configuring PVCs (the FRC does not suppoSPVCs at this time). Note that the FRC PVC/SPVC always uses Link-0 and VPI =1 foFRC side of the PVC/SPVC configuration.

Figure 10-11 Extra Detail of FUNI/ATM-DXI VC Configuration Entry 0

FUNI/ATM-DXI VC Configuration Screen Parameters

The FUNI/ATM-DXI VC Configuration screen allows you to view and set the parametrequired to configure the FUNI/ATM-DXI virtual circuits. These parameters are defined in Table10-11. The default values are indicated by d.


Switch Name:Slot 14 SYS FUNI/ATM-DXI VC Configuration SW VersionDetail of FUNI/ATM-DXI VC Configuration entry 0

Link : 0 11 Bkwd SCR : - Channel : 0 12 Bkwd MBS : - FUNI/ATM-DXI VP: 2 13 Trap config : no trap FUNI/ATM-DXI VC: 32 14 Admin state : wait00 VC option : pvc Dest VPI : 101 Dest VCI : 23202 Dest E.164 :03 Dest channel : -04 AAL type : aal505 QoS : vbr high06 Fwd PCR : 007 Fwd SCR : 008 Fwd MBS : 009 Tag option : -10 Bkwd PCR : -Select option:Add entry, Enter entry number to edit, Kill entry,Press ^J for extra help on this item, Summary, eXit



03Iss

Table 10-11 FUNI/ATM-DXI VC Configuration Menu Definitions



Channel Will always be 0. NA

FUNI/ATM-DXI VPI Displays the VPI on the frame side (local end), (0d - 15). Link Activation (Admin state)

FUNI/ATM-DXI VCI Displays the operator specified VCI on the frame side,

(32d - 63).


VC option This parameter is not supported. You cannot make changes to this parameter.A - pvcB - spvc

NA

Dest VPI Indicates the setting of the ATM Virtual Path Identifier, must always be VPI=1.You must use VPI=1 in the PVC Configuration/Status table of Slot-0, or the FRC SPVC Configuration/Status table, for the FRC side of the PVC/SPVC.

NA

Dest VCI Enables/indicates the setting of the ATM Virtual Channel

Identifier in the range (1d to 1023). You must use this value for this VC in the PVC Configuration/Status table of Slot-0, or the FRC SPVC Configuration Status table.Note: Use 1 - 255 only. This value must be unique in the

system, i.e., once assigned, it cannot be used for any other VC of any type.


Dest E.164 For SPVCs only. The destination address for the SPVC setup option. Not supported.

NA

Dest channel The destination port number for the SPVC setup option.Not applicable for PVCs. Not supported.

NA

AAL type Enables/indicates the setting of the AAL type. The options are:

A - aal5d

NA

QoS Enables/indicates the setting of the QoS for the virtual circuit. The options are:A - vbr-high d

The quality of service for this VC.QOS is currently only used in the initial set up of a circuit. QOS has no effect on how frames are treated as they go through the FRC. Frames received on VBR low and VBR medium compete for system resources, i.e., system buffers, space on queues, and sequence of transmission, on an equal footing with VCs configured for VBR high.For VBR high QOS, the CIR of the VC is subtracted from the high priority bandwidth. For VBR medium and VBR low, the CIR is subtracted from the low priority available and CIR * 100 / overbooking value from the high priority bandwidth.For more information, see Frame Traffic Management on page 2-52 of the GDC Xedge Switch Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310.

NA




Fwd PCR Enables/indicates the setting of the Fwd PCR, the forward peak cell rate at which cells can be sent. Fwd refers to the direction from the frame to ATM. For more information, see Frame Traffic Management on page 2-52 of the GDC Xedge Switch Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310.


Fwd SCR Enables/indicates the setting of the sustained cell rate in the frame to ATM direction. For more information, see Frame Traffic Management on page 2-52 of the GDC Xedge Switch Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310.


Fwd MBS Enables/indicates the setting of the forward maximum burst size (in cells), i.e., the maximum number of cells generated at the PCR in any burst. For more information, see Frame Traffic Management on page 2-52 of the GDC Xedge Switch Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310.


Tag option Enables/indicates the setting of the Tag option for policing. Not supported.

NA

Bkwd PCR Not supported. NA

Bkwd SCR Not supported. NA

Bkwd MBS Not supported. NA

Trap config Enables/indicates which SNMP unsolicited messages are sent by the FRC to the NMS authentication tables. The options are:

A - no trap d: send no trapsB - state change : send traps when operational state changesC - resource-err : send traps when configuration fails due to lack of resourcesD - trap-all : turns on all traps


Admin state Enables/indicates the setting of the Admin state. The options are:A - active : must be selected to use this VCB - notInService d: VC is not available for use, or the destination VCI has been assigned to another VCC - destroy : is supplied by the management function for destroying the VCD - restart : FUNI/ATM-DXI VCE - notReady : indicates that the parameters selected are not correct (read only)F - wait : Waiting for PVC/SPVC to be enabledRefer to Admin State in this chapter.


Table 10-11 FUNI/ATM-DXI VC Configuration Menu Definitions (Continued)




FRC Configuration Configure the Shaping Rate

03Iss

s framest of

fcelle

troller:

Configure the Shaping RateThe FRC provides 12-shaping rates for ATM cells that are generated when the FRC segmenttraffic (into ATM cells). When you configure a frame to ATM VC, the FRC chooses the closethe 12-shaping rates that is equal to or above the shaping rate you configured in the Frame Relay/Transport/PPP VC Config or FUNI/ATM-DXI VC Configuration screen. You can select one othese 12-rates, providing you with greater flexibility. For a detailed explanation of ATM shaping, refer to Traffic Shaping on page 2-55 of the GDC Xedge Switch Technical ReferencManual, Part Number 032R310.

Use the following procedure to change the default ATM shaping rate on the FRC Adaptation Con


2. Select the Frac-Frame Adaptation menu option from the FRC MIB Display andManagement screen. The Frac-Frame Adaptation screen appears as shown in Figure 10-12.

Figure 10-12 Frac - Frame Adaptation Screen

3. Select the ATM Shaping Rates menu option. The ATM Shaping Rates screen appears.

4. Use the Extra Detail command to display the Detail of ATM Shaping Rates entry 0 screenas shown in Figure 10-13.


Switch Name: Slot x SYS Frac - Frame Adaptation SW Version

0 Link Configuration1 Link Status2 Frame Relay Configuration3 FUNI/ATM-DXI Configuration4 Frame Relay/Transport/PPP VC Config5 Frame Relay/Transport/PPP VC Status6 FUNI/ATM-DXI VC Configuration7 FUNI/ATM-DXI VC Status8 ATM Shaping Rates



FRC Configuration Configure the Shaping Rate

ply to

r

ePVC

Figure 10-13 Detail of ATM Shaping Rates entry 0 Screen

5. Select the option number that corresponds to the ATM cell shaping rate you want to apfor the FRC (note that the rates are in ATM cells per second).

6. Select eXit to return to the frc-Frame Adaptation screen.

7. Select eXit to return to the FRC MIB Display and Management screen and save youchanges. This completes the FRC configuration.

8. Proceed to Chapter 16: Bandwidth Allocation and Reservation for allocating resources, andChapter 17: Configuring Connections, for configuring PVC and/or SPVCs. Note that thCHFRC PVC/SPVC always uses Link-0 and VPI =1 for the CHFRC side of the PVC/Sconfiguration. The actual link is determined from the Frame Relay/Transport/PPP VCConfig or FUNI ATM/DXI VC Config table.


Switch Name: Slot x SYS ATM Shaping Rates SW VersionDetail of ATM Shaping Rates entry 0

00 Shaping Rate 1 : 40001 Shaping Rate 2 : 50002 Shaping Rate 3 : 100003 Shaping Rate 4 : 200004 Shaping Rate 5 : 600005 Shaping Rate 6 : 800006 Shaping Rate 7 : 1600007 Shaping Rate 8 : 3200008 Shaping Rate 9 : 4200009 Shaping Rate 10 : 6400010 Shaping Rate 11 : 12800011 Shaping Rate 12 : 225000

Select option:Enter entry number to edit, Kill entry,Press ^J for extra help on this item, Summary, eXit


03Iss

ntrollern in

tion of

2

-3

3

7

6

9

Chapter 11: CHFRC Configuration

Chapter OverviewThis chapter describes how to configure and manage the Channelized Frame Adaptation Co(CHFRC) and its associated Line Interface Modules (LIMs). You can find status informatioChapter 15, CHFRC Status of the GDC Xedge Diagnostics Guide, Part Number 032R500. You canfind an overview and a list of features and specifications in Chapter 6, Frame Relay Adaptathe GDC Xedge Switch Applications Overview, Part Number 032R300.



Admin State....................................................................................................................11


Define the DLIM in Slot-0................................................................................................... 11-4




Activate the Links.............................................................................................................. 11-1

Assign the Time Slots........................................................................................................ 11-1

Viewing Time Slot Assignments Details.....................................................................11-20

Configure the Channel Interfaces...................................................................................... 11-22

Service Specific Configurations......................................................................................... 11-27

Configure the Frame Relay LMI .................................................................................11-27

Configuring FUNI/ATM-DXI Channels......................................................................11-30




Configure the Shaping Rate............................................................................................... 11-45


CHFRC Configuration Configuration Summary

must menuation

ing

in its

.

Configuration SummaryBefore you can configure the CHFRC Adaptation Controller, the slave.cod and cfdoc.bin filesbe resident on the CHFRC. To configure the CHFRC and the frame connection, use thesystem within the CHFRC or the GDC ProSphere Network Management System. For informon the GDC ProSphere Management System, refer to the GDC ProShpere User Guide.

To configure the CHFRC Adaptation Controller, you typically need to perform the followprocedures:



• DS1-2C/2CS and DS1-4C/4CS DLIMs

• E1-2C/2CS and E1-4C/4CS DLIMs

• Activate the Links

• Assign the Time Slots

• Configure the Channel Interfaces

• Service Specific Configurations (optional)

• Configure the Frame Relay LMI (optional)

• Configuring FUNI/ATM-DXI Channels (optional)

• Configure the Virtual Circuits

• Frame Relay/Transport/PPP Virtual Circuits

• FUNI/ATM-DXI Virtual Circuits

• Configure the Shaping Rate (optional)

Once you have completed these procedures, proceed to Chapter 16: Bandwidth Allocationand Reservation for allocating resources, and Chapter 17: Configuring Connections for configuringPVCs and/or SPVCs. Note that the CHFRC PVC/SPVC always uses Link-0 (and VPI=1) configuration. The actual link is determined from the Frame Relay/Transport/PPP VC Config orFUNI ATM/DXI VC Config table.

Note The CHFRC uses the Motorola 68060 cpu. References to the “040” imply use of the 68060


CHFRC Configuration Configuration Summary

03Iss

nd, and

l (data

basedATMe

Admin State

The Admin State of a row has several options. Some of them are state, some are commasome can be both state and command. Table 11-1 explains these options.

The Oper State of a row indicates how the software and hardware react to the Admin statecommand. It also indicates the link, channel, or the VC associated with this row is operationacan pass through).

Traffic Management

The ingress CIR (in bits per second), Be and Bc values (in bits), are policed by frame-facilities and converted to ATM-based PCR, SCR and MBS for shaping in route to the environment. See Traffic Policing on page 2-52 of the GDC Xedge Switch Technical ReferencManual, Part Number 032R310, for a detailed explanation of these parameters.

Table 11-1 CHFRC Admin State Options

Option State Command

active The row is used or active. Activate the row.

notInService The row is not used or inactive. De-activate the row.

destroy NA Destroy the row.

restart NA Restart the row. Usually, it is used to reset the hardware.

notReady The row has invalid setup. Usually it indicates the traffic parameters are not

configured properly.

NA

wait The row is waiting for some prerequisite. Usually, it indicates the VC is waiting for

ATM PVC/SPVC to come up.

NA

Table 11-1


CHFRC Configuration Define the DLIM in Slot-0

HFRCe theut.

ess.

Define the DLIM in Slot-0The Slot-0 Controller sends a health check signal that detects the presence of the CAdaptation Controller and enters it in the Slot-0 Physical Layout. Before you can configurCHFRC Adaptation Controller, you must select a DLIM type for it in the Slot-0 Physical Layo




4. Select Goto row and enter the number of the slot in which the CHFRC is installed, then prthe Enter key (for example, if the CHFRC is in slot 6, type g, type 6, then press the Enter key)

5. Select Extra detail . The Physical Layout, Detail of Physical Layout entry “X” appears asshown in Figure 11-1. The screen parameters are defined in Physical Layout ScreenParameters on page 11-5.


7. From the list of DLIMs displayed, select the appropriate DLIM from the following:

• Q - ds1 dual for the DS1-2C/2CS DLIM

• R - ds1 quad for the DS1-4C/4CS DLIM


• P - e1 quad for the E1-4C/4CS DLIM




11. Proceed to Configure the DLIM on page 11-7.



03Iss

IMs




Table 11-2 Physical Layout Screen Definitions




Immediate

Type When the slot controller has been installed, the application code has booted and is running, and the config update has been passed to the Slot-0 Controller, the Type field identifies the type of Slot Controller installed in the slot. In this case, the Slot Controller is recognized as the type chfrc .

NA, read only

DLIM Type Enables you to specify the LIM type that is installed from a list of possible LIMs. For the CHFRC Adaptation Controller, the possible LIMs that you can use are:A- unknown d

O - e1 dual - select this option for the E1-2C/CS LIMP - e1 quad - select this option for the E1-4C/CS LIMQ - ds1 dual - select this option for the DS1-2C/CS LIMR - ds1 quad - select this option for the DS1-4C/CS LIMEnter the alpha character (case sensitive) for the LIM type installed.

Immediate



Switch Name: Slot 0 SYS Physical Layout SW VersionDetail of Physical Layout entry 2

Slot No : 2 DOC Ser # : 04159800220 Name : Slot 02 DOC HW Ver : 3.0E Type : chfrc Slot MAC Addres: dcdcdcdcdcdc1 DLIM Type : ds1 quad Last State Chan: 26 Apr 2000 13:15:09 Version : 51c9 Lst Chngd Link : link 0 State : active Lst Previous St: down2 Reset Slot : no3 Required State : normal Changed State : yes4 Associated Slot: 0 slot0PhyLink0St: up slot0PhyLink1St: down slot0PhyLink2St: stop slot0PhyLink3St: stop Slot Ser # : 0415980022 Slot HW Ver : 8.0NSelect option:Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row, Index search, Summary,Up, eXit



Version Indicates the version of application software running on the CHFRC Adaptation Controller.

NA, read only

State Indicates the current state of the Slot Controller. Possible states are:absent : the slot may be empty or the slot controller has lost communicationsactive : the full feature software has been loaded and is runningbootmode : the full feature software has not been loaded; the software may not be present or the rotary switch may be set to bootmode

NA, read only

Reset Slot Enables you to reset the slot. This is a warm restart of the slot. It is necessary when certain configuration changes are made to the slot such as a change in its IP address. The options are:yes : Type y to reset the slot.

N - nod: Type n to exit this option without resetting the slot.

Immediate

Required State Enables you to set the required state of the slot. The options are:A - normal d: This is the normal state required for running.B - shutdown : This stops the slot from running.C - main : not supportedD - shadow : not supported

Immediate


NA, read only


slot0PhyLink0St Indicates the current status of Phylink-0. The possible states are:up : This indicates the Slot Controller and the LIM have been installed, the LIM has been selected and recognized, and line coding is passing.down : This indicates an incomplete installation, selection of the wrong LIM, or line coding is not passing.stop : This indicates that the port is disabled.

NA, read only

slot0PhyLink1St Same as Link 0 Status except reports on Phylink 1. NA, read only

slot0PhyLink2St Same as Link 0 Status except reports on Phylink 2, if a quad is installed. Reports stop if a dual is installed.

NA, read only

slot0PhyLink3St Same as Link 0 Status except reports on Phylink 3, if a quad is installed. Reports stop if a dual is installed.

NA, read only


NA, read only


NA, read only


NA, read only


NA, read only


Immediate

Last State Chan Reports the date and time of Last State Change of a Link NA, read only

Lst Chngd Link Reports the Link which Changed last NA, read only

Lst Previous St Report the previous State of the Link which changed last NA, read only

Table 11-2 Physical Layout Screen Definitions (Continued)




CHFRC Configuration Configure the DLIM

03Iss

IM.

ed in

ed in

RC

e

red

Configure the DLIM

This topic is divided into two sub-headings; configuring a DS1 LIM, and configuring an E1 L

If your CHFRC is using a DS1-2C/2CS or DS1-4C/4CS DLIM, perform the procedure describDS1-2C/2CS and DS1-4C/4CS DLIMs.

If your CHFRC is using an E1-2C/2CS or E1-4C/4CS DLIM, perform the procedure describE1-2C/2CS and E1-4C/4CS DLIMs.

DS1-2C/2CS and DS1-4C/4CS DLIMs

1. From the Root Menu of the Slot-0 Controller, establish a Telnet session with the CHFAdaptation Controller. The Root Menu of the CHFRC Adaptation Controller appears.

2. From the Root Menu of the CHFRC Adaptation Controller select Manage configuration.The MIB Display and Management screen for the CHFRC appears.

3. Select the DSP DLIMs menu option and press the Enter key. The DSP DLIMs screenappears.


5. Select Extra detail . The ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status, Detail of ds1-2C/4C DLIMConfig/Status entry 0 screen appears as shown in Figure 11-2. The screen parameters ardescribed in DS1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status Screen Parameters on page 11-8.




9. Select Down to transition to the other entries of the ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status screen.

10. Repeat step 6 through step 8 for the other entries of the ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Statusscreen.


12. Select Save.

13. Select eXit to return to the Root Menu.

14. Select Save. This completes the DS1-2C/2CS or DS1-4C/4CS DLIM configuration.

15. Proceed to Activate the Links on page 11-16.

Note Extract Frame B must be set to no for the CHFRC.



the

Figure 11-2 Detail of ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status

DS1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status Screen Parameters

The ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status screen allows you to view and set the parameters forDS1-2C/2CS and the DS1-4C/4CS DLIMs. These parameters are defined in Table 11-3. The defaultvalues are indicated by d.

Table 11-3 ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status Screen Parameter Definitions



Version Indicates the LIM type installed. NA, read only

Txmt Line Lengt Enables/indicates the selection of the transmit line length. The options are:A - feet 0 110d: The selected transmit line length is 0 to 110 feet.B - feet 110 220 : The selected transmit line length is 110 to 220 feet.C - feet 220 330 : The selected transmit line length is 220 to 330 feet.D - feet 330 440 : The selected transmit line length is 330 to 440 feet.E - feet 440 550 : The selected transmit line length is 440 to 550 feet.F - feet 550 660 : The selected transmit line length is 550 to 660 feet.G - more than 655 : The selected transmit line length is greater than 655 feet.H - square : This is selected for use for external line buildout networks.

Reconfigure



Switch Name: Slot XX SYS ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status SW VersionDetail of ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status entry 0

Link No : 0 LOS Alarm : no Version : ds1 quad signaling LOF Alarm : no0 Txmt Line Lengt: feet 0 110 AIS Alarm : no1 Framer : esf4k Yellow Alarm : no2 Line Coding : b8zs BER Alarm : no3 Loopback : none DS1 Framing Err: 04 Tx AIS : no DS1 Bit Errors : 225 Extract Frame B: no DS1 OOF/COFA Er: 06 Txmt Clock Sele: system DS1 LCV Errors : 27817 Clear Counters : no Line ES : 308 Reconfigure : no Line SES : 30 LOS Defect : no ES : 1 OOF Defect : no SES : 1 AIS Defect : no AISS : 0 Yellow Defect : no UAS : 30 BER Defect : no ExBER : 0Select option: Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row,Press ^J for extra help on this item, Summary, eXit



03Iss

Framer Enables/indicates the setting of the framer mode type. The options are:

A - none d: no framer modeB - sf : superframe framing is selectedC - t1dm : DS1 data multiplexer framing is selectedD - slc96 : SLC 96 framing is selectedE - esf4k : extended superframe framing is selected (4 Kbit/s data link)F - esf2k 3 : extended superframe framing is selected (2 Kbit/s data link, frames 3, 7, 11, 15, 19, 23)G - esf2k 1 : extended superframe framing is selected (4 Kbit/s data link, frames 1, 5, 9, 13, 17, 21)

Reconfigure

Line Coding Enables/indicates the setting of the line code. The options are:A - b8zsd: bit 8-zero suppression coding is selectedB - ami : alternate mark inversion coding is selected

Reconfigure

Loopback Enables/indicates the selection of the following loopback types:

A - none d: no loopback is selectedB - line lpbk : the line loopback causes received data to be looped back as transmitted data in the line interface of the LIMC - payload lpbk : the payload loopback causes received data to be looped back as transmit data in the framer of the LIM; the looped data undergoes frame generation, alarm insertion, trunk conditioning, and line codingD - digital lpbk : the digital loopback causes signals received from the Slot Controller to be looped back by the LIM framer to the Slot Controller

Immediate

Tx AIS Enables/indicates the setting of the transmit Alarm Indication Signalling (AIS) cells:yes : Type y to enable the transmission of AIS cells.nod: Type n to disable AIS cell transmission.

Reconfigure

Extract Frame B Enables/indicates the extraction of frame bits:yes : Type y to enable the extraction of frame bits.

nod: Type n to disable frame bits extraction.Note: This option must be set to no for the CHFRC.

Reconfigure

Table 11-3 ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status Screen Parameter Definitions (Continued)




Controller

Received Data

Transmitted Data

LineLoopback

PayloadLoopback

DigitalLoopback

DS1-2C/2CS or DS1-4C/4CS LIM



Txmt Clock Sele Enables/indicates the selection of the transmit clock. For more information refer to Chapter 4, System Timing & Synchronization of the GDC Xedge Switch Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310. The options are:A - system d: the system clock provides the DLIM transmit clockB - local oscillator : the local oscillator provides the DLIM transmit clockC - local link0 : timing from the link provides the DLIM transmit clockD - local link1 : timing from the link provides the DLIM transmit clockE - local link2 : timing from the link provides the DLIM transmit clockF - local link3 : timing from the link provides the DLIM transmit clock

Reconfigure



Immediate

Reconfigure Implements the reconfigurable changes made in this screen:yes : Type y to reconfigure the CHFRC with the current parameters.


Immediate



NA, read only



BER Defect Indicates if there is currently a bit error rate of approximately 1x10-3. This option is not supported at this time. Also, the BER threshold is not selectable.

NA, read only

LOS Alarm Indicates if there is currently a loss of signal alarm. This will result in the operational state of the link going to down. In addition, all frame relay/transport/PPP VCs and FUNI/ATM-DXI VCs configured on the link will have their operational state set to down.See the CHFRC Status chapter of the GDC Xedge Diagnostics Guide, Part Number 032R500, for more information.

NA, read only




BER Alarm Indicates if there is currently a bit error rate alarm. This option is not supported at this time.

NA

DS1 Framing Err

Reports the number of DS1 framing errors. This option is not supported at this time.

NA


DS1 OOF/COFA Er

Reports the number of OOF/COFA errors. This option is not supported at this time.

NA


Line ES Reports the number of line errored second intervals. This option is not supported at this time.

NA







03Iss

RC

e

red

M

E1-2C/2CS and E1-4C/4CS DLIMs


2. Select Manage configuration. The MIB Display and Management screen appears.

3. Select the DSP DLIMs menu option and press the Enter key.

4. Select the E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status menu option and press the Enter key.

5. Select Extra detail. The E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status, Detail of E1-2C/4C DLIMConfig/Status entry 0 screen appears as shown in Figure 11-3. The screen parameters ardescribed in E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status Screen Parameters on page 11-12.




9. Select Down to transition to the other detail entries of the E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Statusscreen.

10. Repeat step 6 through step 8 for the other detail entries of the E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Statusscreen.


12. Select Save.

13. Select eXit to return to the Root Menu. This completes the E1-2C/2CS or E1-4C/4CS DLIconfiguration.

14. Proceed to Activate the Links on page 11-16.

ES Reports the number of errored second intervals. This option is not supported at this time.

NA, read only




ExBER Reports the number of extended bit errors. This option is not supported at this time.

NA, read only

Note Extract Frame B must be set to no for the CHFRC.Also, when using an E1 LIM, the TS16 PayLd must always be set to yes (located on the Extra Detail of the E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status screen).






E1-

Figure 11-3 Extra Detail of E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status


The E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status screen allows you to view and set the parameters for the2C/2CS and the E1-4C/4CS DLIMs. These parameters are defined in Table 11-4. The default valuesare indicated by d.


Switch Name: Slot XX SYS E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status SW VersionDetail of E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status entry 0

Link No : 0 14 Sio Nat'l : on Line ES : 0 Version : dual 15 Si1 Nat'l : on Line SES : 000 Loopback : none LOS Defect: no ES : 001 Framer Mod: crc mfrm OOF Defect: no SES : 002 Tx Clk Src: system AIS Defect: no AISS : 003 TS16 PayLd: no FERF Defec: no UAS : 004 Tx AIS : no BER Defect: yes05 Extract Fr: no LOS Alarm : no06 Interface : balanc 120 LOF Alarm : no07 Clear Coun: yes AIS Alarm : no08 Reconfigur: no FERF Alarm: no09 SA4 Nat'l : on BER Alarm : yes10 SA5 Nat'l : on CRC Errors: 011 SA6 Nat'l : on Frame Erro: 012 SA7 Nat'l : on FEBE Error: 013 SA8 Nat'l : on Line Code : 0Select option: Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row,Press ^J for extra help on this item, Summary, eXit



03Iss

Table 11-4 E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status Screen Definitions



Version Indicates the DLIM type installed. NA, read only


A - none d, no loopback is selectedB - line lpbk , the line loopback causes received data to be looped back as transmitted data in the line interface of the LIMC - payload lpbk , the payload loopback causes received data to be looped back as transmitted data in the framer of the LIM; the looped data undergoes frame generation, alarm insertion, trunk conditioning, and line codingD - digital lpbk , the digital loopback causes signals received from the Slot Controller to be looped back by the LIM framer to the Slot Controller.

Note: The loopback is initiated upon pressing A - D. Loopback timeout is set in the DSP DLIMs screen.

Immediate

Framer Mod Enables/indicates the setting of the framer. The options are:A - crc mfrm d: CRC multiframe alignment signal patternB - basic : Frame Alignment Signal (FAS) patternC - unframed : unframed signal pattern, do not use with the CHFRC

Reconfigure

Tx Clk Src Enables/indicates the selection of the transmit clock. For more information refer to Chapter 4, System Timing & Synchronization of the GDC Xedge Switch Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310. The options are:

A - system d: the system clock provides the DLIM transmit clockB - loc oscil : the local oscillator provides the DLIM transmit clockC - loc link0 : timing from the link provides the DLIM transmit clockD - loc link1 : timing from the link provides the DLIM transmit clockE - loc link2 : timing from the link provides the DLIM transmit clockF - loc link3 : timing from the link provides the DLIM transmit clock

Reconfigure

TS16 Payld Enables/indicates the setting of the TS16 payload:yes : Type y to set timeslot 16 to carry payload.nod: Type n to be able to use timeslot 16 for CAS (Channel Associated Signaling).

Reconfigure

Tx AIS Enables/indicates the setting of the transmit Alarm Indication Signalling (AIS) cells:yes : Type y to enable the transmission of AIS cells.


Reconfigure



Controller

Received Data

Transmitted Data

LineLoopback

PayloadLoopback

DigitalLoopback

E1-2C/2CS or E1-4C/4CS DLIM

CHFRC



Extract Fr Enables/indicates the extraction of frame bits:yes : Type y to enable the extraction of frame bits.

nod: Type n to disable frame bit extraction.Note: Must be set to no for the CHFRC Adaptation Controller.

Reconfigure


A - balanc 120 d

B - unbalan 75

Reconfigure

Clear Coun Enables the clearing of the performance monitoring counters:yes : Type y to clear the counters


Immediate

Reconfigur Implements the reconfigurable changes made in this screen:yes : Type y to reconfigure the CHFRC with the current screen parameters.


Immediate

SA4 Nat'l National bit SA4, transmitted in bit position 4 of Non Frame Alignment Signal (NFAS) frames. Note: Only supported with E1-2CS/4CS LIMs. Bit is fixed to On (1)

for E1-2C/4C LIMs.

Reconfigure

SA5 Nat'l National bit SA5, transmitted in bit position 5 of NFAS frames. Note: Only supported with E1-2CS/4CS LIMs. Bit is fixed to On (1)

for E1-2C/4C LIMs.

Reconfigure


for E1-2C/4C LIMs.

Reconfigure


for E1-2C/4C LIMs.

Reconfigure


for E1-2C/4C LIMs.

Reconfigure

Si0 Nat'l International bit SI0, transmitted in bit position 1 of NFAS frames. Note: Only supported with E1-2CS/4CS LIMs. Bit is fixed to On (1)

for E1-2C/4C LIMs. Not applicable when using CRC multiframe framing.

Reconfigure

Si1 Nat'l International bit SI1, transmitted in bit position 1 of Frame Alignment Signal (FAS) frames.Note: Only supported with E1-2CS/4CS LIMs. Bit is fixed to On (1)

for E1-2C/4C LIMs. Not applicable when using CRC multiframe framing.

Reconfigure



AIS Defect Indicates if there is currently an alarm indication signal condition. NA, read only

FERF Defect Indicates if there is currently a far end receiver failure defect state. NA, read only


1x10-3.

NA, read only

Table 11-4 E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status Screen Definitions (Continued)





03Iss

E1-

LOS Alarm Indicates if there is currently a loss of signal alarm. This will result in the operational state of the link going to down. In addition, all frame relay/transport/PPP VCs and FUNI/ATM-DXI VCs configured on the link will have their operational state set to down.Note: For more information, see the CHFRC Status chapter of the

GDC Xedge Diagnostics Guide (Part No. 032R500).

NA, read only


AIS Alarm Indicates if there is currently an alarm indication signal alarm. NA, read only






Line Code Reports the number of line code violation errors. NA, read only







Note Only the E1-2CS and the E1-4CS LIMs support signaling; the bit is fixed to on or 1 for the 2C and E1-4C LIMs.

Table 11-4 E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status Screen Definitions (Continued)




CHFRC Configuration Activate the Links

of thetive.also

ll the

nd/or

RC

Activate the LinksLinks are created automatically. Links cannot be removed. The link is viewed as the parentVC. The VC is viewed as the child of the link. A VC can be activated if the link is already acTherefore, the link must be activated prior to the VCs on the link. Deactivating a link deactivates all of its VCs if they are active. Therefore, deactivating a link will bring down aVCs on the link.

Use the following procedure to activate or deactivate a link (or view the number of frames abytes transmitted or received):



3. Select the Chfrc-Frame Adaptation menu option and press the Enter key. The Chfrc-FrameAdaptation screen appears as shown in Figure 11-4.

Figure 11-4 Chfrc-Frame Adaptation Screen

Note If you place an active link to notInService from the Link Config/Status screen, all channels on that link will be changed to notInService. Any Virtual Circuits configured for those channels will go into the WAIT State. Activating a link that was previously inactive causes all of the previously inactive channels and Virtual Circuits on that link to become active.


Switch Name: Slot 2 SYS Chfrc - Frame Adaptation SW Version

00 Link Configuration/Status01 Time Slot Assignment for Channel02 Channel Configuration03 Channel Status04 Frame Relay Configuration05 FUNI/ATM-DXI Configuration06 Frame Relay/Transport/PPP VC Config07 Frame Relay/Transport/PPP VC Status08 FUNI/ATM-DXI VC Configuration09 FUNI/ATM-DXI VC Status10 ATM Shaping Rates




03Iss

in

4. Select the Link Configuration/Status menu option. The Link Configuration/Status screenappears.

5. Select Extra detail , and the Link Configuration/Status , Detail of Link Configuration/Status entry 0 screen appears as shown in Figure 11-5. The screen parameters are describedLink Configuration/Status Parameters on page 11-18.

6. Select Admin state and press the Enter key.

7. Select active to enable the link.

8. Use the Goto row command or use the Down command (or Up) to transition to the otherlinks.

9. Repeat step 6 to step 8 for each link on the LIM.

10. Select eXit to return to the Chfrc-Frame Adaptation screen. This completes the Activate theLinks procedure.

11. Proceed to Assign the Time Slots on page 11-19.

Figure 11-5 Extra Detail of Link Configuration/Status


Switch Name: Slot XX SYS Link Configuration/Status SW VersionDetail of Link Configuration/Status entry 0

Link : 00 Admin state : active Oper state : up Frames Rx : 12388589 Bytes Rx : 1238858900 Frames Tx : 12179376 Bytes Tx : 1217937600 Frames discarded : 10




d to

Link Configuration/Status Parameters

The Link Configuration/Status screen allows you to view and set the parameters requireconfigure the links. These parameters are defined in Table 11-5. The default values are indicated by d.

Table 11-5 Link Configuration/Status Parameter Definitions


Link Displays the number of the selected link. NA, read only

Admin state Enables/indicates the setting of the Admin state of the link. The options are:A - active : must be selected to use the linkB - notInService d: indicates that the link is not available for use (also enables you to make configuration changes)

Immediate

Oper state Indicates up if the Admin state is active, the LIM is up and there are no alarms on the link. Otherwise, it indicates down .

NA, read only

Frames Rx Count of ingress frames received. NA, read only

Bytes Rx Count of ingress bytes received. NA, read only

Frames Tx Count of egress frames transmitted. NA, read only

Bytes Tx Count of egress bytes transmitted. NA, read only

Frames discarded Count of frames dropped by the CHFRC for one of the following reasons:- frame exceeding b/w limitation of 8192- short frame (<5 bytes)- loss of synchronization with remote end- CRC errors- number of bits not divisible by 8- long frame, i.e., larger than the defined maximum length- overflow of driver internal buffer (for example, the processor on the CHFRC cannot keep up with the rate at which frames are received)- received an abort condition

NA, read only

Table 11-5


CHFRC Configuration Assign the Time Slots

03Iss

el. You

0 (DS-u canntainsnnels

lots 1,ake up

S1 link,anches

RC

Assign the Time Slots

To create a channel on a link, you need to assign at least one timeslot of the link to the channcan also assign non-contiguous time slots to the channel by adding multiple rows in the Time SlotAssignment table for the channel. Once this is done in the Time Slot Assignment table, this willcreate a row in the Channel Configuration table and a row in the Channel Status table.Furthermore, this will add a row in the Frame Relay/Transport/PPP VC Config table since thedefault service type of the channel is Frame Transport.

A time slot is a 64-kbps segment of the DS1 frame or E1 G.704 frame, also known as a DSzero). A channel is the logical element formed by a bundle of one or more timeslots. Yoconcatenate, logically, two or more time slots to form a N x 64-kbps bundle. Each channel coone type of service, such as frame relay, FUNI, PPP, ATM-DXI, or Frame Transport. Chawithin a link can be either contiguous or non-contiguous within a bundle; for example, time s2, 3, and 4 make up a contiguous 256-kbps bundle, while time slots 5, 7, 9, 12, 19, and 23 ma non-contiguous 384-kbps bundle. You can generate up to 24 channels for each physical D31 channels on an E1 link, or configure each link as a single channel by grooming all DS0 brtogether into a single pipe.

Use the following procedure to assign the time slots to channels:



3. Select Chfrc-Frame Adaptation. The Chfrc-Frame Adaptation screen appears.

4. From the Chfrc-Frame Adaptation screen, select the Time Slot Assignment for Channelmenu option. The Time Slot Assignment for Channel screen appears as shown in Figure11-6. (For a new installation, this screen will initially be blank.)

Figure 11-6 Time Slot Assignment for Channel Screen


Switch Name:Slot 9 SYS Time Slot Assignment for Channel SW RevisionNo Link Start time slot End time slot Channel Oper state Row status

0 0 1 24 0 active valid1 1 1 24 0 active valid2 2 1 24 0 active valid3 3 1 24 0 active valid

Select option:Add entry, Enter entry number to edit, Extra detail, Goto row,Kill entry, Press ^J for extra help on this item, eXit



es) assign

ies)

lots

has

5. Select Add entry to add an entry to the Time Slot Assignment for Channel table. Thesoftware will respond with a series of prompts.

6. At the Link: [0-3] prompt, type the link number and press Enter.

7. At the Start time slot: [1-31] prompt, type the first time slot number (of a contiguous seriand press Enter. (Note that if a series is non-contiguous, you can add another entry andthe non-contiguous time slots to the same channel).

8. At the End time slot: [1-31] prompt, type the last time slot number (of a contiguous serand press Enter.

9. At the Channel: [0-30] prompt, type the number of the channel you want the time sassigned to and press Enter.

10. When you have configured all time slots, select eXit to return to the Chfrc-FrameAdaptation screen. This completes the Assign the Time Slots procedure.

Note that you can use the Kill entry to delete time slots assignments (provided the channelbeen deactivated). You can also use Row status, B - destroy to delete entries.

11. Proceed to Configure the Channel Interfaces on page 11-22.

Viewing Time Slot Assignments Details

1. While you are in the Time Slot Assignment for Channel screen, use the Goto row or Downcommands to select the desired assignment entry.

2. Select Extra detail. The Detail of Time Slot Assignment for Channel entry 0 screenappears as shown in Figure 11-7.

Note Expect the Oper State to go active after you set the Admin State to active at end of the Configure the Channel Interfaces section.



03Iss

els.

Figure 11-7 Extra Detail of Time Slot Assignment for Channel Entry

The Time Slot Assignment for Channel screen allows you to add or delete time slots for channThe screen parameters are defined in Table 11-6. The default values are indicated by d.

Note The channel Admin state must be notInService in order to change (Add or Delete) time slots associated with it.

Table 11-6 Time Slot Assignment for Channel Screen Parameter Definitions



Start time slot Indicates the starting DS0 selected for the channel. NA, read only

End time slot Indicates the ending DS0 selected for the channel. NA, read only

Channel Indicates the channel number as defined by the time slots. NA, read only

Oper state Indicates the operating state of the channel as active or inactive. NA, read only

Row status Enables/indicates the row status. The options are:A - valid d

B - destroy : deletes the entry


Table 11-6


Switch Name: Slot xx SYS Time Slot Assignment for Channel New EventDetail of Time Slot Assignment for Channel entry 0

Link : 0 Start time slot : 1 End time slot : 24 Channel : 0 Oper state : active0 Row status : valid

Select option:Add entry, Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row, Kill entry,Press ^J for extra help on this item, Summary, eXit


CHFRC Configuration Configure the Channel Interfaces

UNI.

RC

n

e

Configure the Channel InterfacesCHFRC supports five types of service; Frame Relay, Frame Transport, PPP, ATM-DXI and FThe Channel Configuration screen enables you to configure your channels for each type.



3. Select Chfrc-Frame Adaptation. The Chfrc-Frame Adaptation screen appears.

4. Select the Channel Configuration menu option. The Channel Configuration screen appearsas shown in Figure 11-8.

Figure 11-8 Channel Configuration Screen

5. Select Extra detail . The Detail of Channel Configuration entry 0 screen appears as showin Figure 11-9. The screen parameters are described in Table 11-7 under ChannelConfiguration Screen Parameters on page 11-24.

Note The channel must be in the notInService Admin State in order to make changes to any of thesconfigurable parameters.


Switch Name: Slot xx SYS Channel Configuration SW VersionNo Link Channel Logical channel Service type Maximum size Maximum VCC

0 0 0 0 ppp 8188 11 1 0 0 frame relay 4096 252 2 0 0 atm dxi 4096 53 3 0 0 frame relay 4096 20




03Iss

Figure 11-9 Extra Detail of Channel Configuration Screen

6. Select Admin state. At the prompt select notInService. This enables you to makeconfiguration changes to this channel.

7. Select Service Type. The Service Type Prompt appears as shown in Figure 11-10.

Figure 11-10 Channel Configuration Service Type Prompt


Switch Name: Slot xx SYS Channel Configuration SW VersionDetail of Channel Configuration entry 0

Link : 0 Channel : 000 Logical channel: 001 Service type : frame relay02 Maximum size : 409603 Maximum VCC : 50404 Over booking : none05 CRC mode : crc 1606 DS0 rate : ds0 64Kbps07 Invert data : no08 Inter-frame gap: shared flag09 Idle/fill char : hex 7E10 Loopback : none11 Trap config : no trap12 Admin state : active13 Channel B/W : 1536000Select option:Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row,Press ^J for extra help on this item, Summary, eXit


Switch Name: Slot x SYS Channel Configuration SW Version

A - frame transportB - frame relayC - funiD - pppE - atm dxi

Service type: B [frame relay]




enter

ed

d to

8. Select the service type for this channel. The software will return you to the Detail of ChannelConfiguration Screen screen.

9. If desired, you can configure other parameters on the Detail of Channel ConfigurationScreen screen by entering the option number of the item or items to be configured andthe configuration changes.

10. When you are finished, select Admin state. At the prompt select active. This enables the useof this channel.

11. Use the Goto row or Down command to transition to the other entries.

12. Repeat step 6 to step 11 for each entry in the Channel Configuration screen.

13. Select eXit to return to the Chfrc-Frame Adaptation screen. This completes the Configurethe Channel Interfaces procedure.

14. If you selected frame relay in step 8, and you want to configure the frame relay LMI, proceto Configure the Frame Relay LMI on page 11-27. Otherwise proceed to Configure the VirtualCircuits on page 11-32.

Channel Configuration Screen Parameters

The Channel Configuration screen allows you to view and set the parameters requireconfigure the channel interface. These parameters are defined in Table 11-7. The default values areindicated by d.



03Iss

Table 11-7 Channel Configuration Screen Parameter Definitions



NA, read only

Channel Displays the selected channel number. NA, read only

Logical channel Not supported. NA

Service type Enables/indicates the setting of the type of service. The options are:A - frame transport d

B - frame relayC - funiD - pppE - atm dxi


Maximum size Enables/indicates the setting of the frame size. The largest acceptable frame is 8188 bytes, excluding the header and CRC. The default size is 4096.


Maximum VCC Enables/indicates the setting of the maximum number of Virtual Circuit Connections per channel:

For frame relay, maximum VCs per channel is 992 (5d)

For Frame Transport or PPP, this value is fixed at 1d

For FUNI, the maximum value is 256.


Over booking This option is not supported. The options are:

A - none d = 100% channel utilizationB - x150 = 150%C - x200 = 200%D - x250 = 250%E - x300 = 300%F - x400 = 400%G - x500 = 500%.


CRC mode Enables/indicates the setting of the CRC mode as:A - crc16 d B - crc32 , not supported at this time


DS0 rate Enables/indicates the setting of the DS0 rate.A - ds0 64 kbpsB - ds0 56 kbps


Invert data Enables/indicates the setting of the invert data option:yes : Type y to enable the invert data option

nod: Type n to disable the invert data option


Inter-frame gap Enables/indicates the setting of the inter-frame gap. The options are:

A - shared flag d

B - two flagsC - flag fill flagD - flag 2 fill flag


Idle/fill char Enables/indicates the setting of the idle/fill character. The options are:

A - hex 7ed

B - hex FF





Loopback Enables/indicates the setting of the link loopback. The options are:

A - none d: no loopbackB - tx loopback : not supportedC - rx loopback : not supported


Trap Config Enables/indicates which SNMP unsolicited messages are sent by the CHFRC to NMS* authentication tables. The options are:

A - no trap d: send no trapsB - state-change : send traps when operational state changesC - lmi-errors : turns on traps for various LMI message errors, e.g., New DLCI found in the full status report has not been provisioned on the deviceD - trap-all : turns on all traps.


Admin state Enables/indicates the setting of the admin state. Choices are:A - active d - Must be selected to use the channel. Activating a channel will cause all frame VCs associated with the channel set to WAIT to be reactivated, providing the ATM VC has been configured and is running.B - notInService - places all VCs on the channel into the wait state.C - destroy - deletes the current channelD - restart


Channel B/W Indicates the bandwidth allocated to the channel via the number of timeslots.Note: This is not user selectable.

NA, read only

Table 11-7 Channel Configuration Screen Parameter Definitions (Continued)




CHFRC Configuration Service Specific Configurations

03Iss

hange

ters

RC

is

Service Specific ConfigurationsThis topic is divided into two sub-sections:

Configure the Frame Relay LMI (used for frame relay LMI configuration only)

Configuring FUNI/ATM-DXI Channels (used for FUNI/ATM-DXI Mode configuration only)

Configure the Frame Relay LMI

This procedure is optional and applies to Frame Relay only. You can use it if you want to cthe CHFRC default LMI parameters.

The Frame Relay Configuration screen enables you to configure frame relay specific paramefor the virtual circuits of the frame relay channel. Use the following procedure to access the FrameRelay Configuration screen:



3. Select the Chfrc-Frame Adaptation option. The Chfrc-Frame Adaptation screen appears.

4. Select the Frame Relay Configuration menu option. The Frame Relay Configurationscreen appears as shown in Figure 11-11.

Figure 11-11 Frame Relay Configuration Screen

Note An entry appears in this table when the service type, selected previously from the Channel Configuration screen, is changed to frame relay; the entry is removed if the service typechanged from frame relay. An entry appears for each channel.


Switch Name:Slot 9 SYS Frame Relay Configuration New EventNo Link Channel Address length LMI protocol LMI procedure N391 N392

0 1 0 two bytes none network 6 31 3 0 two bytes none network 6 3




red

d to

5. Select Extra detail. The Detail of Frame Relay Configuration entry 0 screen appears asshown in Figure 11-12. The screen parameters are described in Frame Relay ConfigurationScreen Parameters on page 11-28.


7. When complete, select eXit to return to the Chfrc-Frame Adaptation screen. This completesthe Configure the Frame Relay LMI procedure.


Figure 11-12 Extra Detail of Frame Relay Configuration Screen

Frame Relay Configuration Screen Parameters

The Frame Relay Configuration screen allows you to view and set the parameters requireconfigure the frame relay for the channel. These parameters are defined in Table 11-8. The defaultvalues are indicated by d.

Table 11-8 Frame Relay Configuration Screen Definitions


Link Displays the number of the physical link that the selected channel is on.

NA, read only

Channel Indicates the channel number under review. NA, read only

Address length Enables/indicates the setting of the length of the frame relay header (two bytes currently supported).




Switch Name: Slot xx SYS Frame Relay Configuration SW VersionDetail of Frame Relay Configuration entry 0

Link : 0 Channel : 00 Address length : two bytes1 LMI protocol : none2 LMI procedure : network3 N391 : 64 N392 : 35 N393 : 46 T391 : 107 T392 : 158 Enable async status msgs : yes




03Iss

LMI protocol Enables/indicates the setting of the LMI protocol. The options are:

A - none d: disables the local managerB - go4-LMIC - ansi-t1617d94D - itu-q933a


LMI procedure Enables/indicates the setting of the LMI procedure. The options are:

A - network d: CHFRC responds to cpe status inquiry requestsB - user : CHFRC sends status enquiry requests to cpeC - bidirectional : does both A and B above.


N391 The N391 parameter defines the interval between full status polls for the channel. The valid range for this parameter is between 1 and 255.It is used by the user end to request full status responses.

For example, if N391 is 6d, every sixth request is for a full status response.


N392 N392 is the maximum number of unanswered (user) or not received (network) status enquiries the CHFRC shall accept before declaring the channel and all VCs on the channel down. The value may range between 1 and 10 and should be less than or equal to N393. It is used to determine the up/

down status of the frame relay channel; 3d.


N393 N393 is the number of status polling intervals over which N392 is counted. For example, if within N393 number of events the station receives N392 errors, then the channel and all VCs on the channel is declared down. N393 can

range between 1 and 10; 4d.


T391 T391 is the number of seconds between successive status enquiry messages. The value may range between 5 and 30

seconds; 10d. When the LMI protocol is set to user or to bidirectional, every T391 seconds a status enquiry message will be sent out the frame port. If LMI does not receive a status message or a full status message in response to the status enquiry, then LMI will increment the reliability error counter in the channel Status screen.T391 does not apply to channels configured as network.


T392 T392 is the polling verification timer for the channel. The

value can vary between 5 and 30 seconds; 15d seconds. Must be greater than T391. When the LMI protocol is set to network or bidirectional, LMI will expect to receive a status enquiry message every T392 second. If a status enquiry is not received, then LMI will increment the reliability error counter in the Channel Status screen.T392 does not apply to channels configured as user.


Enable async status msgs

Enables the sending of unsolicited status messages on the frame side when the state of the frame to ATM VC changes.


Table 11-8 Frame Relay Configuration Screen Definitions (Continued)





towing

Configuring FUNI/ATM-DXI Channels

The FUNI/ATM-DXI Configuration screen is reserved for future use. It will allow you configure the parameters for the FUNI/ATM-DXI channel. If desired you can use the folloprocedure to access the FUNI/ATM-DXI Configuration screen:

1. From the Chfrc-Frame Adaptation screen, select the FUNI/ATM-DXI Configurationmenu option. The FUNI/ATM-DXI Configuration screen appears as shown in Figure 11-13.

Figure 11-13 FUNI/ATM-DXI Configuration Screen

2. Select Extra detail. The Detail of FUNI/ATM-DXI Configuration entry 0 screen appearsas shown in Figure 11-14. The screen parameters are described in FUNI/ATM-DXIConfiguration Screen Parameters on page 11-31.

3. Select Down to transition to the view the next entry.

4. Select eXit to return to the Chfrc-Frame Adaptation screen. This completes the ConfiguringFUNI/ATM-DXI Channels procedure.


Note When you select the FUNI/ATM-DXI service type from the Channel Configuration screen, you automatically generate a virtual channel entry. This screen is initially empty.

Note The FUNI/ATM-DXI screen is reserved for future use. You cannot configure any of the parameters on it.


Switch Name: Slot 9 SYS FUNI/ATM-DXI Configuration New EventNo Link Channel FUNI/ATM-DXI mode Signaling Signaling VPI Signaling VCI

0 2 0 mode 1a - - -

Select option:Enter entry number to edit, Extra detail,Press ^J for extra help on this item, Right, eXit



03Iss

NI/

Figure 11-14 Extra Detail of FUNI/ATM-DXI Configuration Screen

FUNI/ATM-DXI Configuration Screen Parameters

The FUNI/ATM-DXI Configuration screen allows you to view the parameters for the FUATM-DXI channel. These parameters are defined in Table 11-9. The default values are indicated by d.

Table 11-9 FUNI/ATM-DXI Configuration Screen Field Definitions



Channel Indicates the channel number. NA, read only

FUNI/ATM-DXI mode Enables/indicates the setting of the FUNI/ATM-DXI mode. A - mode 1a d

NA, read only

Signaling Enables or disables ATM signaling on this channel. Not supported

NA

Signaling VPI Address used to generate signaling messages. Not supported

NA

Signaling VCI Not supported. NA

ILMI Enables or disables management function. Not supported. NA

ILMI VPI VPI used for ILMI on this FUNI/ATM-DXI channel. Not supported.

NA

ILMI VCI VCI used for ILMI on this FUNI/ATM-DXI channel. Not supported.

NA

OAM Enables/indicates the setting of OAM support on this channel. Not supported.

NA

Table 11-9


Switch Name: Slot 9 SYS FUNI/ATM-DXI Configuration SW VersionDetail of FUNI/ATM-DXI Configuration entry 0

Link : 2 Channel : 00 FUNI/ATM-DXI mode : mode 1a1 Signaling : -2 Signaling VPI : -3 Signaling VCI : -4 ILMI : -5 ILMI VPI : -6 ILMI VCI : -7 OAM : -

Select option:Enter entry number to edit, Press ^J for extra help on this item, Summary,eXit


CHFRC Configuration Configure the Virtual Circuits

, andand

PPP,

RC

vicer) a).e adds

Configure the Virtual Circuits

This topic is divided into two main sub-headings; Frame Relay/Transport/PPP Virtual CircuitsFUNI/ATM-DXI Virtual Circuits. CHFRC virtual circuits are associated with the channels links you configured previously in this chapter.

If you configured the service type for your channel as frame relay, Frame Transport, orperform the Frame Relay/Transport/PPP Virtual Circuits procedure.

If you configured the service type for your channel as FUNI or ATM-DXI, perform the FUNI/ATM-DXI Virtual Circuits procedure.

Frame Relay/Transport/PPP Virtual Circuits

Use the following steps to configure a frame relay, frame transport, or PPP virtual circuit:



3. Enter the Chfrc-Frame Adaptation item number and press Enter. The Chfrc-FrameAdaptation screen appears.

4. Select Frame Relay/Transport/PPP VC Config. The Frame Relay/Transport/PPP VCConfig screen appears


6. At the Link: [0-3] prompt, enter the link number.

7. At the Channel: [0-30] prompt, enter the channel number.

8. If your service type is frame relay, the software will prompt you for a DLCI. If your sertype is frame transport or PPP, the software will not prompt you for (nor will you enteDLCI value. At the DLCI: [16-1007] prompt, enter the DLCI value (the default DLCI is 16This value must be the same DLCI value used by the Frame Relay frame. The softwarthe entry to the Frame Relay/Transport/PPP VC Config screen.

9. Use the Goto row or the Up / Down commands to access your new entry.

10. Select Extra detail . The Detail of Frame Relay/Transport/PPP VC Config screen appearsas shown in Figure 11-15. The screen parameters are described in Frame Relay/Transport/PPPVC Config screen Parameters on page 11-34.

11. Select Admin state. At the prompt select notInService.

Note In the case of Frame Transport or PPP type service, a virtual channel entry is automatically made. In the case of frame relay, FUNI or ATM-DXI, a virtual channel is added by means of the Add entry.

Note The selected channel must be in notInService Admin State in order to make changes to some configurable parameters.



03Iss

You on

of the

ure

ll

e

s.

eined

12. Select the ATM VCI option and enter a value for the VCI you want the DLCI mapped to. will use this VCI in the PVC or SPVC Configuration/Status Table (in Slot-0) for the VCIthe CHFRC end of the PVC/SPVC.

13. If desired, you can select and enter values for the QoS, Ingress Bc, Ingress Be, and IngressCIR . For detailed explanations of these parameters, see Traffic Policing on page 2-52GDC Xedge Switch Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310.

14. At the Select option: prompt, enter the option number of any other item you want to configand enter the configuration changes.

15. Select Admin State. At the prompt select active. This enables the VC. Note that the VC wibe in the wait state until activate a PVC or SPVC.

16. Repeat step 5 to step 15 for each VC you want to add.

17. Select eXit to return to the Chfrc-Frame Adaptation screen. If you want to manually set thshaping rate proceed to Configure the Shaping Rate on page 11-45, otherwise continue to step18.

18. Select eXit to return to the MIB Display and Management screen and save your changeThis completes the CHFRC configuration.

19. Proceed to Chapter 16: Bandwidth Allocation and Reservation for allocating resources, andChapter 17: Configuring Connections, for configuring PVCs and/or SPVCs. Note that thCHFRC PVC/SPVC always uses Link-0 in its configuration. The actual link is determfrom the Frame Relay/Transport/PPP VC Config or FUNI ATM/DXI VC Config table.Additionally you must set VPI=1 for the CHFRC PVC/SPVC.

Figure 11-15 Frame Relay/Transport/PPP VC Config Screen


Switch Name:Slot 9 SYSFrame Relay/Transport/PPP VC Config SW VersionDetail of Frame Relay/Transport/PPP VC Config entry 0

Link : 0 12 Egress Be : - 25 User MBS : 1 Channel : 0 13 Egress CIR: - DLCI : - 14 T.P. trans: user suppl00 VC option : pvc 15 FR/ATM IW : - ATM VPI : 1 16 DE-CLP map: -01 ATM VCI : 101 17 CLP-DE map: -02 DeMux inde: - 18 FECN-EFCI : -03 Dest E.164: 19 ULP Encap : -04 Dest chann: - 20 Trap confi: no trap05 Dest DLCI : - 21 Admin stat: active06 QoS : vbr high Pcr : 2000007 Ingress Bc: 0 Scr : 2000008 Ingress Be: - Mbs : 109 Ingress CI: 0 22 Info Field: 6410 Tag option: - 23 User PCR : 2000011 Egress Bc : - 24 User SCR : 20000Working...Add entry, Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row, Kill entry,Press ^J for extra help on this item, Summary, eXit



ersers are

Frame Relay/Transport/PPP VC Config screen Parameters

The Frame Relay/Transport/PPP VC Config screen allows you to view and set the parametrequired to configure the frame relay/Transport/PPP for the virtual circuits. These parametdefined in Table 11-10.

The default values are indicated by d.

Table 11-10Frame Relay/Transport/PPP VC Config Screen Definitions


Link Displays the physical link of the channel under review. NA, read only

Channel Indicates the channel number for the selected VC. NA, read only

DLCI Indicates the setting of the DLCI number in the range (16-1007) for frame relay as selected during Add entry. Note that this parameter is “blank” for Frame Transport or PPP.

NA, read only

VC option This is not a user selectable item.

A - pvc d

B - spvc

NA, read only

ATM VPI Indicates the setting of the ATM Virtual Path Identifier; will always be VPI=1.You must use VPI=1 for the CHFRC end of a PVC/SPVC in the PVC or SPVC Configuration/Status table (in Slot-0).

NA, read only

ATM VCI Enables/indicates the setting of the ATM Virtual Channel

Identifier (VCI) in the range (1d to 1023). You will use this VCI for the CHFRC end of your PVC/SPVC in the PVC configuration/status table in Slot-0.Note: Use 1 - 1007 only. This value must be unique in the

system for the Admin state to go active.


DeMux index For multiplexing many DLCIs into one (NI many to one). Not supported.

NA

Dest E.164 For end-to-end connection to a destination you have defined. Not supported.

NA

Dest channel Destination channel number. Not supported. NA

Dest DLCI Destination DLCI number. Not supported. NA

QoS Enables/indicates the setting of QoS. Defines the priority of the connection: high, medium, or low. QOS is currently only used in the initial set up of a circuit. The options are:A - VBR high - Not supported. When you select this option the software defaults to VBR medium .

B - VBR medium d - When you select this option the software subtracts the CIR of the VC from the high priority bandwidth. C - VBR low .- When you select this option the software does not subtract any bandwidth but marks all incoming frames as DE=1.For more information, see Frame Traffic Management on page 2-52 of the GDC Xedge Switch Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310.


Ingress Bc Enables/indicates the setting of Ingress Bc (Committed Burst Size) of incoming frames in bits (see Note1 that follows this table).





03Iss

Ingress Be Enables/indicates the setting of Ingress Be (Excess Burst Size) of incoming frames in bits (see Note1 that follows this table).


Ingress CIR Enables/indicates the setting of Ingress CIR (Committed Information Rate) of incoming frames in bits per second (see Note1 that follows this table).


Tag option Enables/indicates the setting of the Tag option (frame relay

only). If you set this to Yesd, policing sets the DE bit in frames exceeding ingress Bc.


Egress Bc Not supported. NA

Egress Be Not supported. NA

Egress CIR Not supported. NA

T.P. translation Enables -indicates the setting of the traffic parameter translation for converting frame traffic (policing) descriptors to ATM, and ATM traffic (policing) descriptors to frame. For more information see Traffic Policing on page 2-52 of the GDC Xedge Switch Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310. The options are:

A - method21 d - Calculations based on B-ICI V1.1B - method22 - Calculations are based on ITU-T I.370 and B-

ICI 1.1. C - no shaping - sets shaping of frames to maximum PCR rate

supported by the CHFRCD - user specified - user specifies ATM traffic contract,

independently of the frame relay traffic contract. User defined PCR, SCR and MBS are via the User PCR, User SCR and User MBS.


FR/ATM IW option Enables/indicates the setting of the frame relay/ATM interworking option. The options are:

A - ni frf5 d: network interworking with PVC managementB - si frf8 : service interworkingC - ni without pvcm : Network interworking without PVC managementFor more information see the Traffic Management chapter of the GDC Xedge Switch Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310.


DE-CLP mapping Enables/indicates the mapping of frame to ATM, based on interworking options above (frame relay only). The options are:A - mode 1 d: DE is copied unchanged into the DE field in the FR-SSCS PDU header and mapped to the ATM CLP of every ATM cell generated for that frameB - mode 20 : DE is copied unchanged into the DE field in the FR-SSCS PDU header and CLP is set to 0C - mode 21 : DE is copied unchanged into the DE field in the FR-SSCS PDU header and CLP is set to 1For more information see the Traffic Management chapter of the GDC Xedge Switch Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310.


Table 11-10Frame Relay/Transport/PPP VC Config Screen Definitions (Continued)





CLP-DE mapping Enables/indicates the mapping of ATM to frame, based on interworking options above (frame relay only). The options are:

A - mode 1 d: DE is set if CLP is set or DE in FR-SSCS PDU header is setB - mode 2 : FR-SSCS PDU DE field is copied unchanged to DE; FRF5 onlyC - mode 20 : DE in Q.922 core frame is set to 0; FRF8 onlyD - mode 21 : DE in Q.922 core frame is set to 1; FRF8 onlyFor more information see the Traffic Management chapter of the GDC Xedge Switch Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310.


FECN-EFCI mapping Enables/indicates the setting for congestion mapping, based on interworking options above (frame relay only). The options are:

A - mode 1 d: the FECN in the frame is mapped into the ATM EFCI fieldB - mode 2 : the EFCI field is always set to “congestion not experienced.” For more information see the Traffic Management chapter of the GDC Xedge Switch Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310.Note: This item is only meaningful to the SI mode.


ULP Encap mode Enables/indicates the setting of the upper layer protocol handling option (frame relay only). The options are:

A - transparent d B - translationFor Service Interworking, RFC 1490 to RFC1483 translation.Note : This item is only meaningful to the SI mode.


Trap config Enables/indicates which SNMP unsolicited messages are sent by the CHFRC to the NMS authentication tables. The options are:

A - no trap d: send no trapsB - state change : send traps when operational state changesC - resource err : send traps when configuration fails due to lack of resourcesD - trap-all : turns on all traps







03Iss

Admin state Enables/indicates the setting of the Admin state. The options are:

A - active d: must be selected to use this VCB - notInService : the VC is not available for use; if you attempt to activate a VC and there is not enough high priority and /or low priority bandwidth available, or if the link has not been activated, or if the VCI has been allocated to another VC, then the Admin state will remain notInServiceC - destroy : is supplied by the management function for destroying the VCD - restartE - notReady : indicates that the parameters selected are not correct, read only, see Note1 that follows this tableF - wait : waiting for PVC/SPVC to be enabled, or the link or channel is not in service (read only)Refer to Admin State on page 11-3.


Pcr Indicates the actual peak cell rate going into the ATM network. The frame relay/transport/PPP traffic parameters, CIR, Bc, and Be, are converted into the PCR according to the following formula (see B-ICI 1.1, Appendix A for more detail):for FT & FR w/T.P. translation = method21: PCR = (link bandwidth * OHA) / 8, where OHA = ((Info Field Len + 10) / 48) / (Info Field Len + 6),for FR w/T.P. translation = method22: PCR = ((CIR + CIR*Bc/Be) * OHB) / 8 where OHB = ((Info Field Len + 10) / 48) / Info Field Len.The CHFRC has only 12 possible PCRs to choose from; these are not user selectable. The CHFRC takes the above calculated PCR and rounds it up to the nearest available PCR.When the T.P. translation is set to “no shaping ” then the PCR will be set to 20000. If T.P. translation is set to “user specified ” then the PCR will be set to the user specified value rounded up to one of the 12 possible values.Note : The PCR should be entered in the Peak Forward Rate in the PVC/SPVC setup. See Shaping Anomaly the Traffic Management chapter of the GDC Xedge Switch Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310.







Scr Indicates the sustained cell rate going into the ATM network. When T.P. translation is set to method21 or method22, the frame relay/transport/PPP traffic parameter, CIR, is converted into the SCR according to the following formula (see B-ICI 1.1, Appendix A for more detail):SCR = (CIR * OHB) / 8 where OHB = ((Info Field Len + 10) / 48) / Info Field Len.The SCR is rounded up to the nearest 12.5% of one of the 36 possible PCR values.When the T.P. translation is set to no shaping , then Scr will be set to 20000. When the T.P. translation is set to user specified , then the User supplied Scr is rounded up as above.Note: The SCR should be entered in the Sustained Forward Rate in the PVC/SPVC setup. Set the desired physical access rate below the SCR. See Shaping Anomaly the Traffic Management chapter of the GDC Xedge Switch Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310.


Mbs Indicates the maximum burst size going into the ATM network. When the T.P. translation method is set to method21 or method22 , then the frame relay/transport/PPP traffic parameters, CIR and Bc, are converted into the MBS according to the following formula (see B-ICI 1.1, Appendix A for more detail):MBS = (((link bandwidth * Bc / 8)/(link bandwidth - CIR)) + 1) * OHBwhere OHB = ((Info Field Len + 10) / 48) / Info Field Len.When the T.P. translation method is set to no shaping then Mbs will be set to 1. When the T.P. translation method is set to user specified the Mbs will be as specified by the user, with the restriction that it must be between 1 and 2048.Refer to Chapter 17: Configuring Connections, and Chapter 2, Traffic Management of the GDC Xedge Switch Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310, for how MBS is used in setting up PVCs and SPVCs. See Shaping Anomaly on the CHFRC and FRC on page 2-59 of the Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310.







03Iss

Info Field Len This field only applies if the T.P. translation method is set to method21 or method22.Enables/indicates the setting of the frame information field length used in converting the FR/FT traffic contract to an ATM traffic contract. It is ‘n’ as specified in the formulas for OHA (n) and OHB (n) of appendix A of the B-ICI specification, or frame size in the above calculations for OHA and OHB.

The permitted range for this value is (1 - 9232) 64d. Note: Changes to this parameter directly affect the PCR/SCR.Small information field lengths will cause the FR/FT traffic contract to be converted to a higher PCR/SCR resulting in fewer frames being discarded due to transmit queue build up and thus requiring more bandwidth resources in the ATM network to support this VC.Larger information field lengths will cause the FR/FT traffic contract to be converted to a lower PCR/SCR resulting in more frames being discarded due to transmit queue build up and thus requiring less bandwidth resources in the ATM network to support this VC.Changes to this parameter only take effect when the VC Config Admin state field is toggled from notInService to active .For more information see Chapter 2, Traffic Management of the GDC Xedge Switch Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310.


User PCR User Specified PCR. Only valid if the T.P. translation mode is set to user specified .


User SCR User specified SCR. Only valid if the T.P. translation mode is set to user specified .


User MBS User specified MBS. Only valid if the T.P. translation mode is set to user specified .


Note 1 Ingress CIR, Ingress Bc, Ingress Be and traffic parameter translation (T. P. translation) mode have to be set up properly based on ITU-T I.370 and B-ICI 1.1 Appendix A.

The VC Admin state will be set to notReady for the following reasons:1) inCIR is non zero but inBc is 02) inBc is non zero and inCIR is 03) inCIR + (inCIR / ingress Bc) x ingress Be is greater than the available

bandwidth4) the policing interval, Tc, is less than 100 milliseconds. Tc is calculated as

follows:

CIR Bc Be Tc

>0 >0 >0 Tc = Bc / CIR>0 >0 =0 Tc = Bc / CIR=0 =0 >0 Tc = Bc / access rate






RC

I/DC

I/

FUNI/ATM-DXI Virtual Circuits

Use the following procedure to configure Virtual Circuits for FUNI or ATM-DXI connections:



3. Enter the Chfrc-Frame Adaptation item number and press Enter. The Chfrc-FrameAdaptation screen appears.

4. Select the FUNI/ATM-DXI VC Configuration menu option. The FUNI/ATM-DXI VCConfiguration screen appears as shown in Figure 11-16.

Figure 11-16 FUNI/ATM-DXI VC Configuration Screen


6. At the Link: [0-3] prompt, enter the link number.

7. At the Channel: [0-30] prompt, enter the channel number.

8. At the FUNI/ATM-DXI VPI: [0-15] prompt, enter the VPI value coming from the FUNATM-DXI side of the connection. The software will map this value to VPI =1 for the GXedge CHFRC side of the connection.

9. At the FUNI/ATM-DXI VCI: [32-63] prompt, enter the VPI value coming from the FUNATM-DXI side of the connection.

Note This screen is initially empty. Items can be added using Add entry provided the Channel Configuration screen for FUNI/ATM-DXI type of service was selected.


Switch Name:Slot 9 SYS FUNI/ATM-DXI VC Configuration SW RevisionNo Link Channel FUNI/ATM-DXI VPI FUNI/ATM-DXI VCI VC option Dest VPI

0 2 0 2 33 pvc 1

Select option:Add entry, Enter entry number to edit, Extra detail, Kill entry,Press ^J for extra help on this item, Right, eXit



03Iss

ill

table

er the

e

s.

ePVC

R st

10. Use the Goto row or the Up / Down commands to access your new entry.

11. Select Extra detail . The Detail of FUNI/ATM-DXI VC Configuration entry “X” screenappears as shown in Figure 11-17. The screen parameters are described in FUNI/ATM-DXIVC Configuration Screen Parameters on page 11-42.

12. Select Admin state. At the prompt select notInService.

13. Select the Dest VCI option. The software will prompt you for a VCI value. The software wassociate the VCI you enter to the FUNI/ATM-DXI VCI value you entered in step 9.You willuse this Dest VCI value for the CHFRC side of a PVC in the PVC Configuration/Status when you configure a PVC.

14. If desired, enter the option number of any other item you want to configure and entconfiguration changes.

15. Select Admin state. At the prompt select active.

16. Repeat step 5 to step 15 for each additional VC you want to configure.

17. Select eXit to return to the Chfrc-Frame Adaptation screen. If you want to manually set thshaping rate proceed to Configure the Shaping Rate on page 11-45, otherwise continue to step18.

18. Select eXit to return to the MIB Display and Management screen and save your changeThis completes the CHFRC configuration.


Note The selected channel must be in notInService Admin State in order to make changes to some configurable parameters.

Note 1 You must properly set up the Fwd PCR, Fwd SCR, Fwd MBS and Traffic Parameter Mode based on UNI3.1 and B-ICI 1.1 Appendix A. The calculated Fwd MBS and Fwd SCR should be less than the total bandwidth, otherwise, the Admin state will become notReady. To exit notReady state, you need to set the related objects to a valid combination. The selected PCwill differ from the actual PCR. The actual PCR is determined by rounding to the next higherate available from the 36 built-in shaping rates. See Shaping on the FRC/CHFRC in the Traffic Shaping section of the Traffic Management chapter in the GDC Xedge Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310.



ers

Figure 11-17 Detail of FUNI/ATM-DXI VC Configuration Screen

FUNI/ATM-DXI VC Configuration Screen Parameters

The FUNI/ATM-DXI VC Configuration screen allows you to view and set the parametrequired to configure the FUNI/ATM-DXI virtual circuits. These parameters are defined in Table11-11. The default values are indicated by d.

Table 11-11FUNI/ATM-DXI VC Configuration Screen Parameter Definitions



Channel Indicates the channel number. NA, read only

FUNI/ATM-DXI VPI Displays the VPI on the frame side (local end) in the range (0 - 15).

NA, read only

FUNI/ATM-DXI VCI Displays the operator specified VCI on the frame side in the range (32 - 63).

NA, read only

VC option This is not a user selectable item.A - pvc d B - spvc - not supported.

NA

Dest VPI Indicates the setting of the ATM Virtual Path Identifier, will always be VPI=1. You must use VPI=1 for the CHFRC end of a PVC/SPVC in the PVC or SPVC Configuration/Status Table.

NA



Switch Name:Slot 9 SYS FUNI/ATM-DXI VC Configuration New EventDetail of FUNI/ATM-DXI VC Configuration entry 0

Link : 2 11 Bkwd SCR : - Channel : 0 12 Bkwd MBS : - FUNI/ATM-DXI VP: 2 13 Trap config : no trap FUNI/ATM-DXI VC: 33 14 Admin state : active00 VC option : pvc Dest VPI : 101 Dest VCI : 23302 Dest E.164 :03 Dest channel : -04 AAL type : aal505 QoS : vbr high06 Fwd PCR : 007 Fwd SCR : 008 Fwd MBS : 009 Tag option : -10 Bkwd PCR : -Select option:Add entry, Enter entry number to edit, Kill entry,Press ^J for extra help on this item, Summary, eXit



03Iss

Dest VCI Enables/indicates the setting of the ATM Virtual Channel

Identifier in the range (1d to 1023). You will use this VCI for the CHFRC end of your PVC/SPVC in the PVC or SPVC Configuration/Status table (in Slot-0).Note: Use 1 - 255 only. This value must be unique in the

system, i.e., once assigned, it cannot be used for any other VC of any type.


Dest E.164 For SPVCs only. The destination address for the SPVC setup option. Not supported.

NA

Dest channel The destination port number for the SPVC setup option. Not applicable for PVCs. Not supported.

NA

AAL type Enables/indicates the setting of the AAL type. A - aal5d

NA, read only

QoS Enables/indicates the setting of the QoS for the virtual circuit. The options are:

A - vbr-high d

The quality of service for this VC.QOS is currently only used in the initial set up of a circuit. QOS has no effect on how frames are treated as they go through the FRC. Frames received on VBR low and VBR medium compete for system resources, i.e., system buffers, space on queues, and sequence of transmission, on an equal footing with VCs configured for VBR high.For VBR high QOS, the CIR of the VC is subtracted from the high priority bandwidth. For VBR medium and VBR low, the CIR is subtracted from the low priority available and CIR * 100 / overbooking value from the high priority bandwidth.For more information, see the Frame Traffic section of the Traffic Management chapter in the GDC Xedge Switch Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310.

NA, read only

Fwd PCR Enables/indicates the setting of the Fwd PCR, the forward peak cell rate at which cells can be sent. Fwd refers to the direction from the frame to ATM. See Note1 that follows this table.


Fwd SCR Enables/indicates the setting of the sustained cell rate in the frame to ATM direction. See Note1 that follows this table.


Fwd MBS Enables/indicates the setting of the forward maximum burst size (in cells), i.e., the maximum number of cells generated at the PCR in any burst. See Note1 that follows this table.


Tag option Enables/indicates the setting of the Tag option for policing. Not supported.


Bkwd PCR Not supported. NA

Bkwd SCR Not supported. NA

Bkwd MBS Not supported. NA

Table 11-11FUNI/ATM-DXI VC Configuration Screen Parameter Definitions (Continued)





Trap config Enables/indicates which SNMP unsolicited messages are sent by the CHFRC to the NMS authentication tables. The options are:A - no trap d: send no trapsB - state change : send traps when operational state changesC - resource-err : send traps when configuration fails due to lack of resources D - trap-all : turns on all traps


Admin state Enables/indicates the setting of the Admin state. The options are:A - active d: must be selected to use this VCB - notInService : VC is not available for use, or the destination VCI has been assigned to another VCC - destroy : is supplied by the management function for destroying the VCD - restart : FUNI/ATM-DXI VCE - notReady : indicates that the parameters selected are not correct (see Note 1 below), read onlyF - wait : waiting for PVC/SPVC to be enabled, read onlyRefer to Admin State.in this chapter.


Table 11-11FUNI/ATM-DXI VC Configuration Screen Parameter Definitions (Continued)




CHFRC Configuration Configure the Shaping Rate

03Iss

FRCRCnfigured

ailed

tation

RC

Configure the Shaping Rate

The CHFRC provides 12-shaping rates for ATM cells that are generated when the CHsegments frame traffic (into ATM cells). When you configure a frame to ATM VC, the CHFchooses the closest of the 12-shaping rates that is equal to or above the shaping rate you coin the Frame Relay/Transport/PPP VC Config or FUNI/ATM-DXI VC Configuration screen.You can select one of these 12-rates, providing you with greater flexibility. For a detexplanation of ATM cell shaping, refer to the Traffic Management chapter of the GDC XedgeSwitch Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310.

Use the following procedure to change the default ATM shaping rate on the CHFRC AdapController:



3. Select the Chfrc-Frame Adaptation menu option from the CHFRC MIB Display andManagement screen. The Chfrc-Frame Adaptation screen appears as shown in Figure11-18.

Figure 11-18 Chfrc-Frame Adaptation Screen

4. Select the ATM Shaping Rates menu option. The ATM Shaping Rates screen appears.

5. Use the Extra Detail command to display the Detail of ATM Shaping Rates entry 0 screenas shown in Figure 11-19.


Switch Name: Slot 2 SYS Chfrc - Frame Adaptation SW Version

00 Link Configuration/Status01 Time Slot Assignment for Channel02 Channel Configuration03 Channel Status04 Frame Relay Configuration05 FUNI/ATM-DXI Configuration06 Frame Relay/Transport/PPP VC Config07 Frame Relay/Transport/PPP VC Status08 FUNI/ATM-DXI VC Configuration09 FUNI/ATM-DXI VC Status10 ATM Shaping Rates



CHFRC Configuration Configure the Shaping Rate

ply to

r

ePVC

Figure 11-19 Detail of ATM Shaping Rates entry 0 Screen

6. Select the option number that corresponds to the ATM cell shaping rate you want to apfor the CHFRC (note that the rates are in ATM cells per second).

7. Select eXit to return to the Chfrc-Frame Adaptation screen.

8. Select eXit to return to the CHFRC MIB Display and Management screen and save youchanges. This completes the CHFRC configuration.



Switch Name: Slot x SYS ATM Shaping Rates SW VersionDetail of ATM Shaping Rates entry 0

00 Shaping Rate 1 : 40001 Shaping Rate 2 : 50002 Shaping Rate 3 : 75003 Shaping Rate 4 : 100004 Shaping Rate 5 : 150005 Shaping Rate 6 : 200006 Shaping Rate 7 : 300007 Shaping Rate 8 : 400008 Shaping Rate 9 : 600009 Shaping Rate 10 : 800010 Shaping Rate 11 : 1600011 Shaping Rate 12 : 20000

Select option:Enter entry number to edit, Kill entry,Press ^J for extra help on this item, Summary, eXit


03Iss

tationon ind

2

7

1

7

Chapter 12: CE Configuration

Chapter OverviewThis chapter describes how to configure and manage the Circuit Emulation (CE) AdapController and its associated Line Interface Modules (LIMs). You can find status informatiChapter 9, CE Status of the GDC Xedge Diagnostics Guide, Part Number 032R500. You can finan overview and a list of features in Chapter 7, Circuit Emulation of the GDC Xedge SwitchApplications Overview, Part Number 032R300.



Activating Configuration Changes.................................................................................12-2

Define the DLIM in the Slot-0 Physical Layout.................................................................. 12-3

Physical Layout Screen Parameters................................................................................12-4



DS3-2C DLIM..............................................................................................................12-1


E3-2C DLIM ................................................................................................................12-1

SI-2C and SI-4C DLIMs..............................................................................................12-20

Configure the CE Configuration Table.............................................................................. 12-23


CE Configuration Configuration Summary

stalledenu. For

ion.

ssor ise slave

Configuration SummaryAs a minimum, the CE Adaptation Controller must have the slave.cod and ce_lca.bin files inon it prior to configuration. To configure the CE Adaptation Controller, you can use the msystem within the CE Adaptation Controller or the ProSphere Network Management Systeminformation on the ProSphere Network Management System, refer to the GDC ProShpere UserGuide.

To configure the CE interface, you typically need to perform the following procedures:

• Define the DLIM in the Slot-0 Physical Layout


• Configure the CE Configuration Table

Once you have completed these procedures, refer to Chapter 16: Bandwidth Allocationand Reservation for allocating resources, and Chapter 17: Configuring Connections, forconfiguring PVCs and SPVCs. The PVC/SPVC always uses VPI=1, VC1=0 in its configurat

Activating Configuration Changes

CE configuration changes only take effect when the link is restarted or when the main procereset by some mechanism. Otherwise, changes only effect the configuration stored in thprocessor memory or on disk. The controller processor may be reset by performing a Warm start(normal) from the Root Menu.


CE Configuration Define the DLIM in the Slot-0 Physical Layout

03Iss

ptationmust

is

use,

Define the DLIM in the Slot-0 Physical Layout

The Slot-0 Controller sends a health check signal that detects the presence of the CE AdaController in the installed slot. Before you can configure the CE Adaptation Controller, you select a DLIM type for it in the Slot-0 Physical Layout.




4. Select Goto row and enter the number of the slot in which the CE Adaptation Controllerinstalled. (for example, if the CE is in slot 6, select Goto row, type 6, then press the Enterkey).

5. Select Extra detail . The Physical Layout, Detail of Physical Layout entry "X" appears asshown in Figure 12-1. The screen parameters are described in Physical Layout ScreenParameters on page 12-4.


7. From the option list of DLIMs displayed, select the letter for the DLIM type you wish to and press Enter:

• M - ds3 2c for the DS3-2C DLIM

• N - e3 2c for the E3-2C DLIM


• P - e1 quad for the E1-4C/4CS DLIM

• Q - ds1 dual for the DS1-2C/2CS DLIM

• R - ds1 quad for the DS1-4C/4CS DLIM

• W - si dual for the SI-2C DLIM

• Y - si quad for the SI-4C DLIM







LIMs



The Physical Layout screen enables you to view and set parameters for Slot Controllers andin the Slot-0 Physical Layout. These parameters are defined in Table 12-1. The default values areindicated by d.





Immediate

Type When the Slot Controller has been installed, the application code has booted and is running, and the config update has been passed to the Slot-0 Controller, the Type field identifies the type of Slot Controller installed in the slot. In this case, the Slot Controller is recognized as a type ce.

NA, read only



Switch Name: Slot 0 SYS Physical Layout SW VersionDetail of Physical Layout entry x

Slot No : 5 DOC Ser # : 07089900080 Name : Slot 05 DOC HW Ver : 1.0A Type : ce Slot MAC Addres: 9090909090901 DLIM Type : si quad Last State Chan: 02 May 2000 14:53:41 Version : 51c9 Lst Chngd Link : link 1 State : active Lst Previous St: up2 Reset Slot : no3 Required State : normal Changed State : no4 Associated Slot: 0 slot0PhyLink0St: down slot0PhyLink1St: down slot0PhyLink2St: stop slot0PhyLink3St: stop Slot Ser # : 0708990008 Slot HW Ver : 2.0GSelect option:Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row,Press ^J for extra help on this item, Summary, Up, eXit



03Iss

DLIM Type Enables you to specify the DLIM type that is installed from a list of possible DLIMs. For the CE Adaptation Controller, the supported DLIMs are:M - ds3 2cN - e3 2cO - e1 dualP - e1 quadQ - ds1 dualR - ds1 quadW - si dualY - si quadEnter the alpha character (case sensitive) for the DLIM type installed.

Immediate

Version Indicates the version of application software running on the CE Adaptation Controller.

NA, read only

State Indicates the current state of the Slot Controller. Possible states are:absent : The slot may be empty or the Slot Controller has lost communications.active : The full feature software has been loaded and is running.bootmode : The full feature software has not been loaded; the software may not be present or the rotary switch may be set to bootmode.

NA, read only

Reset Slot Enables a reset (toggle) of the slot. This is a warm restart of the slot. It is necessary when certain configuration changes are made to the slot:yes : Type y to reset the slot.no d: Type n to exit this option without resetting the slot.

Immediate

Required State Enables you to set the required state of the slot as:

A - normal d: The normal state required for running.B - shutdown : Stops the slot from running.C - main : Not supported.D - shadow : Not supported.

Immediate


NA, read only


slot0PhyLink0St Indicates the current status of link 0. May be:up : The Slot Controller and the DLIM have been installed, the DLIM has been selected and recognized, and line coding is passing.down : May indicate an incomplete installation, selection of the wrong DLIM, or line coding is not passing.stop : Indicates this link is disabled.

NA, read only


slot0PhyLink2St Same as slot0PhyLink0St except reports on link 2, if a quad is installed. Will indicate stop if a dual is installed.

NA, read only

slot0PhyLink3St Same as slot0PhyLink0St except reports on link 3, if a quad is installed. Will indicate stop if a dual is installed.

NA, read only







NA, read only


NA, read only


NA, read only


NA, read only


Immediate





CE Configuration Configure the DLIM

03Iss

s:

e

red

Configure the DLIMThis procedure is divided into two main sub-headings which correspond to the CE LIM type

• If you have a DS1-2C or DS1-4C LIM, perform the procedure described in DS1-2C/2CS andDS1-4C/4CS DLIMs on page 12-7.

• If you have a DS3-2C perform the procedure described in DS3-2C DLIM on page 12-11.

• If you have a E1-2C or E1-4C LIM, perform the procedure described in E1-2C/2CS and E1-4C/4CS DLIMs on page 12-13.

• If you have a E3-2C LIM, perform the procedure described in E3-2C DLIM on page 12-17.

• If you have a SI-2C or SI-4C LIM, perform the procedure described in SI-2C and SI-4C DLIMson page 12-20

DS1-2C/2CS and DS1-4C/4CS DLIMs

1. From the Root Menu of the Slot-0 Controller, establish a telnet session with the CE Adaptation Controller. The Root Menu of the CE Adaptation Controller appears.

2. From the Root Menu of the CE Adaptation Controller, select Manage configuration. TheMIB Display and Management screen for the CE Adaptation Controller appears.






8. At the Reconfigure: (Y/N) prompt, enter Y to send the changes to the DLIM.

9. Select Down to transition to the other detail entries of the ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Statusscreen.

10. Repeat step 6 through step 8 for the other entries of the ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Statusscreen.


12. Select Save. This completes the Configure the DLIM procedure.

Note Unless framing is enabled, the only performance monitoring capabilities are LOS, AIS, andAAL1. All others are not maintained.

Note Extract Frame B must be set to no for the CE.



d to

13. Proceed to Configure the CE Configuration Table on page 12-23.

Figure 12-2 Extra Detail Screen of ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status


The ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status screen allows you to view and set the parameters requireconfigure the DS1-2C/2CS and the DS1-4C/4CS DLIMs. These parameters are defined inTable12-2. The default values are indicated by d.

Table 12-2 ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status Menu Definitions




Txmt Line Lengt Enables/indicates the setting of the line length. The options are:

A - feet 0 110d

B - feet 110 220C - feet 220 330D - feet 330 440E - feet 440 550F - feet 550 660G - more than 655 feetH - square.

Reconfigure



Switch Name:Slot x6 SYS ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status New EventDetail of ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status entry 0

Link No : 0 LOS Alarm : no Version : ds1 dual LOF Alarm : no0 Txmt Line Lengt: feet 0 110 AIS Alarm : no1 Framer : none Yellow Alarm : no2 Line Coding : b8zs BER Alarm : no3 Loopback : none DS1 Framing Err: 04 Tx AIS : no DS1 Bit Errors : 05 Extract Frame B: yes DS1 OOF/COFA Er: 06 Txmt Clock Sele: system DS1 LCV Errors : 07 Clear Counters : yes Line ES : 08 Reconfigure : no Line SES : 0 LOS Defect : no ES : 0 OOF Defect : no SES : 0 AIS Defect : no AISS : 0 Yellow Defect : no UAS : 0 BER Defect : no ExBER : 0Select option:Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row,Press ^J for extra help on this item, Summary, eXit



03Iss

Framer Enables/indicates the setting of the framer. The options are:

A - none d: transparent mode, select this for unstructured CEB - sf : superframeC - t1dm : DS1 data multiplexer framingD - slc96 : SLC96 framingE - esf4k : extended superframe, 4 Kbit/s data linkF - esf2K 3 : extended superframe, 2 Kbit/s data link, frames 3, 7, 11, 15, 19, 23,G - esf2k 1 : extended superframe, 2 Kbit/s data link, frames 1, 5, 9, 13, 17, 21.

Reconfigure


A - b8zsd: bit 8-zero suppression codingB - ami : alternate mark inversion coding

Reconfigure


A - none d


NOTE: You must set the Clock Mode in the CE Configuration Table to none for the loopback to operate. Loopback will not operate in the adaptive mode.

Immediate

Tx AIS Enables/indicates the setting of the transmit alarm indication signalling:yes : Type y to enable the transmission of Alarm Indication Signalling (AIS) cells.nod: Type n to disable AIS cell transmission.

Reconfigure

Extract Frame B Enables/indicates the extraction of frame bits:yes : Type y to enable the extraction of frame bits.

nod: Type n to disable frame bit extraction.Note: Should be left nod

Reconfigure

Txmt Clock Sele Enables/indicates the selection of the transmit clock. The options are:A - system : system clock provides the DLIM transmit clockB - local oscillator d: local oscillator provides the DLIM transmit clockC - local link : timing from the link provides the DLIM transmit clock

Reconfigure





Controller

Received Data

Transmitted Data

LineLoopback

PayloadLoopback

DigitalLoopback

DS1-2C/2CS or DS1-4C/4CS DLIM



Clear Counters Enables the clearing of the performance monitoring counters,:yes : Type y to clear the counters.


Immediate

Reconfigure Implements the reconfigurable changes made in this screen:yes : Type y to reconfigure the CE with the current screen values.

nod: Type n to exit this option without reconfiguring the CE.

Immediate


OOF Defect Indicates if there is currently an out of frame condition. Alarm towards network persists > 5sec.

NA, read only



BER Defect Indicates if there is currently a bit error rate > 1x10-3. Not supported. Also, the BER threshold is not selectable.

NA, read only






DS1 Framing Err Reports the number of DS1 framing errors. NA, read only


DS1 OOF/COFA ER Reports the number of DS1 out of frame/change of frame alignment errors. Not supported.

NA, read only








ExBER Reports the number of extended bit errors. Not supported. NA






03Iss

CE

red

DS3-2C DLIM

1. From the Root Menu of the Slot-0 Controller, establish a telnet session with the Adaptation Controller. The Root Menu of the CE Adaptation Controller appears.

2. From the Root Menu of the CE Adaptation Controller, select Manage configuration. TheMIB Display and Management screen for the CE Adaptation Controller will appear.


4. Select the DS3-2C DLIM Config/Status menu option. The DS3-2C DLIM Config/Statusscreen appears.

5. Select Extra detail . The Detail of DS3-2C DLIM Config/Status entry 0 appears as shown inFigure 12-3. The screen parameters are described in DS3-2C DLIM Config/Status ScreenParameters on page 12-12.




9. Select Down to transition to the Detail of DS3-2C DLIM Config/Status entry 1 screen.

10. Repeat step 6 through step 8 for Detail of DS3-2C DLIM Config/Status entry 1.







ed to

Figure 12-3 Extra Detail of DS3-2C DLIM Config/Status

DS3-2C DLIM Config/Status Screen Parameters

The DS3-2C DLIM Config/Status screen enables you to view and set the parameters requirconfigure the DS3-2C DLIM. These parameters are defined in Table 12-3. The default values areindicated by d.

Table 12-3 DS3-2C DLIM Config/Status Screen Parameter Definitions



Loopback Enables/indicates the setting of a diagnostic loopback. The options are:

A - none d



Immediate



Switch Name:Slot x SYS DS3-2C DLIM Config/Status New EventDetail of DS3-2C DLIM Config/Status entry 0



LineInterface

SlotController

Received Data

Transmitted Data

LocalLoopback

DS3-2C DLIM

LineLoopback



03Iss

CE

e

red

On

E1-2C/2CS and E1-4C/4CS DLIMs










LIM OK Indicates the health of the DLIM. NA, read only

TX LBO Enables/indicates the setting of the line build out. The options are:

A - short d, select this option for 50-feet or lessB - long : select this option for 50 to 450-feet

Reconfigure

TX Clk Src Enables/indicates the setting of the TX clock source. The options are:A - systemB - local oscillator d


Reconfigure



Reconfigure Implements the reconfigurable changes made in this screen:yes : Type y to reconfigure CE with the screen values.


Immediate

Note Signaling is not supported with CE and the parameter is ignored if changed. Bit is fixed to (1) for E1-2C and E1-4C LIMs.


Table 12-3 DS3-2C DLIM Config/Status Screen Parameter Definitions (Continued)





d to


10. Repeat step 6 through step 8 for the other entries of the E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Statusscreen.






The E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status screen allows you to view and set the parameters requireconfigure the E1-2C/2CS and the E1-4C/4CS DLIMs. These parameters are defined in Table 12-4.The default values are indicated by d.

Table 12-4 E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status Screen Parameter Definitions



Version Indicates the DLIM type installed, in this case, an e1 dual . NA, read only



Switch Name:Slot x SYS E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status SW VersionDetail of E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status entry 0

Link No : 0 14 Sio Nat'l : on Line ES : 0 Version : dual 15 Si1 Nat'l : on Line SES : 000 Loopback : none LOS Defect: no ES : 001 Framer Mod: crc mfrm OOF Defect: no SES : 002 Tx Clk Src: system AIS Defect: no AISS : 003 TS16 PayLd: no FERF Defec: no UAS : 004 Tx AIS : no BER Defect: yes05 Extract Fr: no LOS Alarm : no06 Interface : balanc 120 LOF Alarm : no07 Clear Coun: yes AIS Alarm : no08 Reconfigur: no FERF Alarm: no09 SA4 Nat'l : on BER Alarm : yes10 SA5 Nat'l : on CRC Errors: 011 SA6 Nat'l : on Frame Erro: 012 SA7 Nat'l : on FEBE Error: 013 SA8 Nat'l : on Line Code : 0Select option:Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row,Press ^J for extra help on this item, Summary, eXit



03Iss

Loopback Enables/indicates the setting of the diagnostic loopback. Choices are:

A - none d


Note: You must set the Clock Mode in the CE Configuration Table to none for the loopback to operate. Loopback will not operate in the adaptive mode.

Immediate

Framer Mod Enables/indicates the setting of the framer. The options are:A - crc mfrm d

B - basicC - unframed , select for unstructured CED - cas

Reconfigure


A - system d: the system clock provides the DLIM transmit clockB - local oscillator : the local oscillator provides the DLIM transmit

clockC - local link0 : timing from the link provides the DLIM transmit clockD - local link1 : timing from the link provides the DLIM transmit clockE - local link2 : timing from the link provides the DLIM transmit clockF - local link3 : timing from the link provides the DLIM transmit clock

Reconfigure

TS16 Payld Enables/indicates the setting of the TS16 payload:yes : Type y to set timeslot 16 to carry payload.nod: Type n to be able to use timeslot 16 for CAS (Channel

Associated Signaling).

Reconfigure

Tx AIS Enables/indicates the setting of the transmit Alarm Indication Signalling (AIS) cells:yes : Type y to enable the transmission of AIS cells.


Reconfigure

Extract Fr Enables/indicates the extraction of frame bits:yes : Type y to enable the extraction of frame bits.nod: Type n to disable frame bit extraction.Note: Must be set to no for the CE Adaptation Controller.

Reconfigure


A - balanced 120 d

B - unbalanced 75

Reconfigure

Clear Coun Enables the clearing of the performance monitoring counters:yes : Type y to clear the counters


Immediate

Table 12-4 E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status Screen Parameter Definitions (Continued)




Controller

Received Data

Transmitted Data

LineLoopback

PayloadLoopback

DigitalLoopback

E1-2C/2CS or E1-4C/4CS DLIM

CE



Reconfigur Implements the reconfigurable changes made in this screen:yes : Type y to reconfigure the CE with the current screen values.


Immediate

SA4 Nat’l National bit Sa4, transmitted in bit position 4 of Non Frame Alignment Signal (NFAS) frames. Note: Not supported with CE and ignored if changed. Bit is fixed to

On (1) for E1-2C/4C LIMs.

Reconfigure

SA5 Nat’l National bit Sa5, transmitted in bit position 5 of NFAS frames. Note: Not supported with CE and ignored if changed. Bit is fixed to


Reconfigure



Reconfigure



Reconfigure



Reconfigure

Si0 Nat’l International bit Si0, transmitted in bit position 1 of NFAS frames. Note 1: Not supported with CE and ignored if changed. Bit is fixed

to On (1) for E1-2C/4C LIMs.Note 2: Not applicable when using CRC multiframe framing.

Reconfigure

Si1 Nat’l International bit Si1, transmitted in bit position 1 of Frame Alignment Signal (FAS) frames.Note 1: Not supported with CE and ignored if changed. Bit is fixed

to On (1) for E1-2C/4C LIMs.Note 2: Not applicable when using CRC multiframe framing.

Reconfigure





BER Defect Indicates if there is currently a bit error rate of approximately 1x10-3. NA, read only




FERF Alarm Indicates if there is currently a far-end receiver failure alarm. NA, read only













03Iss

CE

red

E3-2C DLIM




4. Select the E3-2C DLIM Config/Status menu option. The E3-2C DLIM Config/Statusscreen appears.

5. Select Extra detail . The Detail of E3-2C DLIM Config/Status entry 0 appears as shown inFigure 12-5. The screen parameters are described in E3-2C DLIM Config/Status ScreenParameters on page 12-18.




9. Select Down to transition to the Detail of E3-2C DLIM Config/Status entry 1 screen.

10. Repeat step 6 through step 8 for Detail of E3-2C DLIM Config/Status entry 1.














d to

Figure 12-5 Extra Detail of E3-2C DLIM Config/Status

E3-2C DLIM Config/Status Screen Parameters

The E3-2C DLIM Config/Status screen allows you to view and set the parameters requireconfigure the E3-2C DLIM. These parameters are defined in Table 12-5. The default values areindicated by d.

Table 12-5 E3-2C DLIM Config/Status Menu Definitions



Version Indicates the DLIM type installed, in this case, an e3 2c. NA, read only

LIM OK Indicates the health of the DLIM. NA, read only

Rx EQ Select Enables/indicates the selection of the receive equalization as:

A - auto d

B - set 0 to 3p5 dbC - set 2p6 to 8 dbD - set 6 to 9p9 dbE - set 8p6 to 13p2 db

Reconfigure



Switch Name:Slot x SYS E3-2C DLIM Config/Status SW VersionDetail of E3-2C DLIM Config/Status entry 0





03Iss

Loopback LIU Enables/indicates the setting of a diagnostic loopback. The options are:

A - none d



Immediate

TX AIS Enables/indicates the setting of the transmit Alarm Indication Signaling (AIS) cells:yes : Type y to enable AIS cell transmission.


Reconfigure

Timing Reference Enables/indicates the setting of the timing reference source. The options are:A - system



Reconfigure



Reconfigure Implements the reconfigurable changes made in this screen:yes : Type y to reconfigure the CE with the current screen values.


Immediate

Table 12-5 E3-2C DLIM Config/Status Menu Definitions (Continued)



LineInterface

SlotController

Received Data

Transmitted Data

LocalLoopback

E3-2C DLIM

LineLoopback



CE

red

SI-2C and SI-4C DLIMs




4. Select the SI (SCF) DLIM Config/Status menu option. The SI (SCF) DLIM Config/Statusscreen appears.

5. Select Extra detail . The Detail of SI (SCF) DLIM Config/Status entry 0 appears as shownin Figure 12-6. THe screen parameters are described in SI-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status ScreenParameters on page 12-21.



8. At the Reconfig Button: (Y/N) prompt, enter Y to send the changes to the DLIM.

9. Select Down to transition to the other Detail of SI-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status entries.

10. Repeat step 6 through step 8 for the other Detail of SI-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status entries.







03Iss

Figure 12-6 Detail of SI-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status

SI-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status Screen Parameters

Table 12-6 defines the parameters on the SI-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status screen. The defaultvalues are indicated by d.




LIM I.D. Type Indicates the DLIM type installed. NA, read only

Firmware Revision Indicates the revision of the firmware installed. NA, read only


Controller Enables/indicates the choice of Slot Controller:A - ce hpg hc2 d

B - ms ms2 : do not use this setting

Reconfigure

DCE or DTE Enables/indicates the DLIM is set to emulate:

A - dced

B - dte Note: If the port is to be set to operate in DTE mode,

the 16 pin resistor pack associated with the port must be resident in the DTE mode socket.

Reconfigure



SWITCH name:Slot x SYS SI (SCF) DLIM Config/Status SW VersionDetail of SI (SCF) DLIM Config/Status entry 0

Link Number : 0 LIM I.D. Type : si dual Firmware Revision : 0 Quality of Clock : low Primary0 Controller : ce hpg hc21 DCE or DTE : dce2 Loopback : none3 Receive Line Timing : disabled4 Data Rate in K Bits/Sec : rate 2048x05 Clock : system6 Interface Type : x217 Reconfig Button : no LOS Defect : no LOS Alarm : no




Loopback Enables/indicates the setting of the loopback feature as:

A - none d

B - lineC - link , (plus controls RTS->CTS and DTR->DSR must be made.)D - digital


Immediate

Receive Line Timing Enables/indicates the setting of receive line timing as:A - enabled d: allows clocking of data from remote timing source, use with long cable runs.B - disabled : uses internal source for clocking of data.

Reconfigure

Data Rate in KBits/Sec Enables/indicates the data rate set for the port is:A - rate 2x4 O - rate 57x6 d - rate 307x2B - rate 4x8 P - rate 64x0 e - rate 320x0C - rate 7x2 Q - rate 76x8 f - rate 384x0D - rate 9x6 R - rate 96x0 g - rate 448x0E - rate 14x4 S - rate 112x0 h - rate 512x0F - rate 16x0 T - rate 115x2 i - rate 768x0G - rate 16x6 U - rate 128x0 j - rate 1024x0H - rate 19x2 V - rate 144x0 k - rate 1536x0I - rate 28x8 W - rate 153x6 l - rate 1920x0J - rate 32x0 Y - rate 192x0 m - rate 2048x0K - rate 38x4 Z - rate 224x0 n - rate 3072x0L - rate 48x0 a - rate 230x0 o - rate 4096x0M - rate 50x0 b - rate 256x0 p - rate 6144x0N - rate 56x0 c - rate 288x0 q - rate 8192x0

Reconfigure

Clock Enables/indicates that the transmit clock source is set as:

A - system d

B - local oscillator : do not use this setting

Reconfigure

Interface Type Enables/indicates the setting of the interface type as:A - x21B - rs449C - eia530 AD - v35

Reconfigure

Reconfig Button Implements the reconfigurable changes made in this screen:yes : Type y to reconfigure the CE with the current screen values.

nod: Type n to exit this option without reconfiguration.

Immediate







Controller

Received Data

Transmitted Data

LineLoopback

LinkLoopback

DigitalLoopback

Serial I/O (SCF) DLIM


CE Configuration Configure the CE Configuration Table

03Iss

red

red

.

Configure the CE Configuration Table1. From the MIB Display and Management screen, select the CE menu option. The CE screen

appears.

2. Select the CE Configuration Table menu option. The CE Configuration Table screenappears.

3. Select Extra detail. The CE Configuration Table, Detail of CE Configuration Table entry0 appears as shown in Figure 12-7. The screen parameters are described in CE ConfigurationTable Screen Parameters on page 12-24.


5. Select Down to transition to the other Detail of CE Configuration Table entries.


7. Select eXit to return to the CE screen.

8. This completes the CE Configuration.

9. Proceed to Chapter 16: Bandwidth Allocation and Reservation for allocating resources, andChapter 17: Configuring Connections, for configuring PVCs and SPVCs.

Note If you modify the Clock Mode, CDV Tolerance, or Max CDV, you must select Enable from the CE Configuration Table and choose C - restart to restart the Slot Controller in order for the changes to take effect.

Note When transitioning from Wideband to Narrowband to Operating mode, bit errors can occur



d to

Figure 12-7 Detail of CE Configuration Table

CE Configuration Table Screen Parameters

The CE Configuration Table screen allows you to view and set the parameters requireconfigure the CE Adaptation Controller. These parameters are defined in Table 12-7. The defaultvalues are indicated by d.

Table 12-7 CE Configuration Table Screen Parameter Definitions



NA, read only

Enable Sets/indicates the link as being enabled. The options are:A - yesd

B - noC - restart : must be selected whenever the Clock Mode, CDV Tolerance, or Max CDV are changed

Immediate

Clock Mode Sets/indicates the clock recovery mode. The options are:

A - none d: DLIM configuration selects timing sourceB - adaptive : overrides DLIM timing configuration

Restart(Enable, Restart)

Priority Indicates the priority assigned to the link: always high for a circuit emulation link.

NA, read only

PVC Valid Indicates, yes or no , if the link is currently supporting a permanent virtual channel.

NA, read only

Dest Slot Indicates the slot number of the controller card at the next hop of the permanent virtual circuit.

NA, read only



Switch Name:Slot x SYS CE Configuration Table SW VersionDetail of CE Configuration Table entry 0

Link : 00 Enable : yes1 Clock Mode : none Priority : high PVC Valid : no Dest Slot : 0 Dest Link : link0 Dest VPI : 0 Dest VCI : 02 CDV Tolerance : 43 Max CDV : 8 Multicast Link : no PVC Type(s) : inactive




03Iss

Dest Link Indicates the link number of this circuit emulation link virtual channel. The switch returns a 1 for link 1, etc.

NA, read only

Dest VPI Indicates the virtual path identifier (VPI) number of the permanent virtual channel at the next controller card in the path.

NA, read only

Dest VCI Indicates the virtual channel identifier (VCI) number of the permanent virtual channel at the next controller card in the path.

NA, read only

CDV Tolerance Indicates/enables the setting of the CDV Tolerance in the range.

[1-31]: 4 d.Setting this parameter may require experimentation: a low setting is desirable to minimize the delay imposed by buffering, but cells are dropped when variation on the link underflows. The recommended setting is 4.Note: If your CE slot controller circuit contains an DSX1-IMA LIM or E1-IMA LIM, the following values are recommended for CDV Tolerance. Refer to the section System Timing with the IMA LIM on page 5-25, of the GDC Xedge Switch Applications Overview manual, part number 032R300, for details on the IMA LIM and CDV Tolerance.1024 CE bps=3 CDV Tolerance1536 CE bps=3 CDV Tolerance2048 CE bps=4 CDV Tolerance3072 CE bps=7 CDV Tolerance4096 CE bps=6 CDV Tolerance8192 CE bps=12 CDV Tolerance


Max CDV Indicates/enables the setting of the Max CDV in the range

[1-62]: 8 d.Specifies the maximum buffer overflow which triggers an auto restart of the circuit emulation link. This results in AAL1 resynchronization and is reported in the DV2CE status MIB. The recommended setting is 8.Note: If your CE slot controller circuit contains an DSX1-IMA LIM or E1-IMA LIM, the following values are recommended for Max CDV. Refer to the section System Timing with the IMA LIM on page 5-25, of the GDC Xedge Switch Applications Overview manual, part number 032R300, for details on the IMA LIM and Max CDV.1024 CE bps=5 Max CDV1536 CE bps=7 Max CDV2048 CE bps=10 Max CDV3072 CE bps=14 Max CDV4096 CE bps=14 Max CDV8192 CE bps=28 Max CDV


Multicast Link Indicates yes if the link has been configured to function in multicast; indicates no for point to point.

NA, read only

Table 12-7 CE Configuration Table Screen Parameter Definitions (Continued)





PVC Type(s) Indicates the type of PVC. May be:uni rootuni leafbi rootbi leafpoint to pointpoint to multi-pointNote: Refer to Chapter 17: Configuring Connections, in

this manual for further details on Multicast.

NA, read only

Table 12-7 CE Configuration Table Screen Parameter Definitions (Continued)




03Iss

tation see

2

6

5

7

9

Chapter 13: SCE Configuration

Chapter OverviewThis chapter describes how to configure the Structured Circuit Emulation (SCE) AdapController and its associated Line Interface Modules (LIMs). For an overview of the SCEChapter 7, Circuit Emulation of the GDC Xedge Switch Applications Overview, Part Number032R300 You can find status information in Chapter 10, SCE Status of the GDC Xedge DiagnosticsGuide, Part Number 032R500.

The topics in this chapter include:


Software Requirements..................................................................................................13-2

Define the DLIM in the Slot 0............................................................................................ 13-3

Physical Layout Screen Parameters................................................................................13-4


DS1-2CS and DS1-4CS DLIMs ....................................................................................13-6

E1-2CS and E1-4CS DLIMs......................................................................................... 1310

Configure the Partial Cell Fill............................................................................................ 13-14

Enable the Links................................................................................................................. 13-1

Link Configuration Screen Parameters........................................................................13-16

Assign the Channels........................................................................................................... 13-1

Channel Configuration Screen Parameters...................................................................13-18

Configure the Bundles....................................................................................................... 13-1

Bundle Configuration Screen Parameters....................................................................13-20


SCE Configuration Configuration Summary

filesin the

Sphere

lation

ation.

essione flashn. The for thePGAs.

Configuration SummaryAs a minimum, the SCE Adaptation Controller must have the mproX.cod and scelca.bininstalled on it prior to configuration. To configure the SCE you can use the menu system withSCE or the GDC ProSphere Network Management System. For information on the GDC ProNetwork Management System, refer to the GDC ProShpere User Guide.

To configure a SCE Adaptation Controller, you need to perform the following procedures:

• Define the DLIM in the Slot 0


• DS1-2CS and DS1-4CS DLIMs

• E1-2CS and E1-4CS DLIMs

• Configure the Partial Cell Fill

• Enable the Links

• Assign the Channels

• Configure the Bundles

This portion of the manual explains interface configuration specific to structured circuit emuapplications. Once you have completed these procedures, refer to Chapter 16: BandwidthAllocation and Reservation for allocating resources, and Chapter 17: Configuring Connections, forconfiguring PVCs and SPVCs. The PVC/SPVC on an SCE always uses Link-0 in its configur

Software Requirements

The SCE contains a boot PROM which contains a board identification number, decomprcoding, a minimum system, and the hard coded lca.bin files to load the on-board FPGAs. Thram is organized as a file system and two major files must exist for the SCE card to functiofirst is the mproX.cod, which contains the operating system. The second is the scelca.bin fileFPGAs. This will supersede the boot lca.bin enabling upgrades to the configuration of the F


SCE Configuration Define the DLIM in the Slot 0

03Iss

aptation must

r is

Define the DLIM in the Slot 0The Slot-0 Controller sends a health check signal that detects the presence of the SCE AdController in the installed slot. Before you can configure the SCE Adaptation Controller, youselect a DLIM type for it in the Slot-0 Physical Layout.

1. From the Slot-0 Root Menu, select Manage configuration. The Slot-0 MIB Display andManagement screen appears.



4. Select Goto row and enter the number of the slot in which the SCE Adaptation Controlleinstalled (for example, if the SCE is in slot 6, select Goto row, type 6, then press the Enterkey).

5. Select Extra detail . The Physical Layout, Detail of Physical Layout entry "X" appears asshown in Figure 13-1. The screen parameters are described in Physical Layout ScreenParameters on page 13-4.


7. From the list of DLIMs displayed, select:

• O - e1 dual for the E1-2CS DLIM

• P - e1 quad for the E1-4CS DLIM

• Q - ds1 dual for the DS1-2CS DLIM

• R - ds1 quad for the DS1-4CS DLIM

8. Select eXit twice to return to the Slot-0 MIB Display and Management screen.






IMs

Figure 13-1 Extra Detail Screen of Physical Layout for an SCE Entry







Immediate

Type When the Slot Controller has been installed, the application code has booted and is running, and the config update has been passed to the Slot-0 Controller, the Type field identifies the type of Slot Controller installed in the slot. In this case, the Slot Controller is recognized as a type sce .

NA, read only

DLIM Type Enables you to specify the DLIM type that is installed from a list of possible DLIMs. For the SCE Adaptation Controller, the supported DLIMs are:O - e1 dualP - e1 quadQ - ds1 dualR - ds1 quad

Immediate

Version Indicates the version of application software running on the SCE Adaptation Controller.

NA, read only



Switch Name: Slot 0 SYS Physical Layout New EventDetail of Physical Layout entry x

Slot No : 10 DOC Ser # : 03189700130 Name : Slot 10 DOC HW Ver : 1.0B Type : sce Slot MAC Addres: 6868686868681 DLIM Type : e1 quad Last State Chan: 26 Apr 2000 15:30:24 Version : 51c9 Lst Chngd Link : link 1 State : active Lst Previous St: up2 Reset Slot : no3 Required State : normal Changed State : no4 Associated Slot: 0 slot0PhyLink0St: down slot0PhyLink1St: down slot0PhyLink2St: stop slot0PhyLink3St: stop Slot Ser # : 0318970013 Slot HW Ver : 6.0JWorking...Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row,Press ^J for extra help on this item, Summary, Up, eXit



03Iss

State Indicates the current state of the Slot Controller. The possible states are:absent : the slot may be empty or the Slot Controller has lost communications.active : the full feature software has been loaded and is running.bootmode : the full feature software has not been loaded; the software may not be present or the rotary switch may be set to bootmode.

NA, read only

Reset Slot Enables a reset (toggle) of the slot. This is a warm restart of the slot. It is necessary when certain configuration changes are made to the slot:yes : Type y to reset the slot.no d: Type n to exit this option without a slot reset.

Immediate

Required State Enables you to set the required state of the slot as:


Immediate


NA, read only


slot0PhyLink0St Indicates the current status of link 0. May be:up : the Slot Controller and the DLIM have been installed, the DLIM has been selected and recognized, and line coding is passing.down : may indicate an incomplete installation, selection of the wrong DLIM, or line coding is not passing.stop : indicates this link is disabled.

NA, read only

slot0PhyLink1St Same as slot0PhyLink0St Status except reports on link 1. NA, read only

slot0PhyLink2St Same as slot0PhyLink0St Status except reports on link 2, if a quad is installed. Will indicate stop if a dual is installed.

NA, read only

slot0PhyLink3St Same as slot0PhyLink0St Status except reports on link 3, if a quad is installed. Will indicate stop if a dual is installed.

NA, read only


NA, read only


NA, read only


NA, read only


NA, read only


Immediate





SCE Configuration Configure the DLIM

es:

CE

e

red

Configure the DLIM

This procedure is divided into two main sub-headings which correspond to the SCE LIM typ

• If you have a DS1-2C or DS1-4C LIM, perform the procedure described in DS1-2CS and DS1-4CS DLIMs on page 13-6.

• If you have a E1-2C or E1-4C LIM, perform the procedure described in E1-2CS and E1-4CSDLIMs on page 13-10.

DS1-2CS and DS1-4CS DLIMs

1. From the Root Menu of the Slot-0 Controller, establish a telnet session with the SAdaptation Controller. The Root Menu of the SCE Adaptation Controller appears.

2. From the Root Menu of the SCE Adaptation Controller, select Manage configuration. TheMIB Display and Management screen for the SCE Adaptation Controller appears.






8. At the Reconfigure: (Y/N) prompt, type Y to send the changes to the DLIM.


10. Repeat step 6 through step 8 for the other ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status entries.

11. Select eXit twice to return to the SCE MIB Display and Management screen.


13. Proceed to Configure the Partial Cell Fill on page 13-14.

Note You must ensure that Extract Frame B is set to no during the LIM configuration.

You must set the Framer mode to SF or ESF for DS1.

Note You must set Extract Frame B to no for the SCE.



03Iss

d to

Figure 13-2 Extra Detail Screen of ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status


The ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status screen allows you to view and set the parameters requireconfigure the DS1-2CS/4C DLIM. These parameters are defined in Table 13-2. The default valuesare indicated by d.

Table 13-2 ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status Screen Parameter Definitions



Version Indicates the type of DLIM, ds1 dual signalin or ds1 quad signalin.“Signalin” indicates that a signaling enabled DLIM (DS1-2CS or DS1-4CS) is installed. The SCE will only support signaling supported DLIMs.

NA, read only

Txmt Line Length Enables/indicates the setting of the line length. The options are:

A - feet 0 110d

B - feet 110 220C - feet 220 330D - feet 330 440E - feet 440 550F - feet 550 660G - more than 655 feetH - square

Reconfigure



Switch Name:Slot xx SYS ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status New EventDetail of ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status entry 0

Link No : 0 LOS Alarm : no Version : ds1 dual LOF Alarm : no0 Txmt Line Lengt: feet 0 110 AIS Alarm : no1 Framer : esf4k Yellow Alarm : no2 Line Coding : b8zs BER Alarm : no3 Loopback : none DS1 Framing Err: 04 Tx AIS : no DS1 Bit Errors : 05 Extract Frame B: no DS1 OOF/COFA Er: 06 Txmt Clock Sele: system DS1 LCV Errors : 07 Clear Counters : no Line ES : 08 Reconfigure : no Line SES : 0 LOS Defect : no ES : 0 OOF Defect : no SES : 0 AIS Defect : no AISS : 0 Yellow Defect : no UAS : 0 BER Defect : no ExBER : 0Select option:Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row, Index search, Summary,eXit



Framer Enables/indicates the setting of the framer. The options are:

A - none d: transparent mode, not a valid choice for the SCEB - sf : superframeC - t1dm : DS1 data multiplexer framing (Not supported)D - slc96 : SLC96 framing, (Not supported)E - esf4k : extended superframe, 4 Kbit/s data linkF - esf2K 3 : extended superframe, 2 Kbit/s data link, frames 3, 7, 11, 15, 19, 23G - esf2k 1 : extended superframe, 2 Kbit/s data link, frames 1, 5, 9, 13, 17, 21

Reconfigure


A - b8zsd: bipolar with 8-zero substitution codingB - ami : alternate mark inversion coding

Reconfigure


A - none d


Immediate

Tx AIS Enables/indicates the setting of the transmit Alarm Indication Signalling (AIS) cells:yes : Type Y to enable AIS cell transmission.


Reconfigure

Extract Frame Bit Enables/indicates the extraction of frame bits:yesd: Type Y to enable the extraction of frame bitsno : Type n to disable the extraction of frame bits.

Note: This field must be set to no for the SCE

Reconfigure

Txmt Clock Select Enables/indicates the selection of the transmit clock. The options are:

A - system d: system clock provides the DLIM transmit clockB - local oscillator : local oscillator provides the DLIM transmit clockC - local link0 : timing from the link provides the DLIM transmit clockD - local link1 : timing from the link provides the DLIM transmit clockE - local link2 : timing from the link provides the DLIM transmit clockF - local link3 : timing from the link provides the DLIM transmit clock

Reconfigure





Controller

Received Data

Transmitted Data

LineLoopback

PayloadLoopback

DigitalLoopback

DS1-2CS DLIM

SCE



03Iss

Clear Counters Enables the clearing of the performance monitoring counters:yes : Type Y to clear the counters


Reconfigure Implements the reconfigurable changes made in this screen:yes : Type Y to reconfigure the changes

nod: Type n to exit this option without implementing the changes.

Immediate





BER Defect Indicates if there is currently a bit error rate > 1x10-3. The BER threshold is not selectable.

NA, read only






DS1 Framing Error Reports the number of DS1 framing errors. NA, read only


DS1 OOF/COFA Error Reports the number of DS1 out of frame/change of frame alignment errors.

NA, read only






AISS Reports the number of alarm indication signal second intervals.

NA, read only


ExBER Reports the number of extended bit errors. NA, read only






CE

e

red

E1-2CS and E1-4CS DLIMs

1. From the Root Menu of the Slot-0 Controller, establish a telnet session with the SAdaptation Controller. The Root Menu of the SCE Adaptation Controller appears.

2. From the Root Menu of the SCE Adaptation Controller, select Manage configuration. TheMIB Display and Management screen for the SCE Adaptation Controller appears.











13. Proceed to Configure the Partial Cell Fill on page 13-14.

Note You must set the Framer mode to basic or crc multiframe for E1.

Note You must set Extract Frame B to no for the SCE.



03Iss

d to



The E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status screen allows you to view and set the parameters requireconfigure the E1-2CS and the E1-4CS DLIMs. These parameters are defined in Table 13-3. Thedefault values are indicated by d.

Table 13-3 E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status Screen Parameter Definitions



Version Indicates the type of DLIM, dual_sig or quad_sig, which indicates that a signaling enabled DLIM (E1-2CS, or E1-4CS) is installed. The SCE will only support signaling supported DLIMs.

NA, read only

Loopback Enables/indicates the setting of the diagnostic loopback. The options are:A - none d


Immediate



Switch Name:Slot xx SYS E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status SW VersionDetail of E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status entry 0

Link No : 0 14 Sio Nat'l : on Line ES : 0 Version : quad sig 15 Si1 Nat'l : on Line SES : 000 Loopback : none LOS Defect: yes ES : 001 Framer Mod: crc mfrm OOF Defect: no SES : 002 Tx Clk Src: system AIS Defect: no AISS : 003 TS16 PayLd: no FERF Defec: no UAS : 51642604 Tx AIS : no BER Defect: no05 Extract Fr: no LOS Alarm : yes06 Interface : unbalan 75 LOF Alarm : no07 Clear Coun: no AIS Alarm : no08 Reconfigur: no FERF Alarm: no09 SA4 Nat'l : on BER Alarm : no10 SA5 Nat'l : on CRC Errors: 011 SA6 Nat'l : on Frame Erro: 012 SA7 Nat'l : on FEBE Error: 013 SA8 Nat'l : on Line Code : 0Select option:Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row, Index search, Summary,eXit


Controller

Received Data

Transmitted Data

LineLoopback

PayloadLoopback

DigitalLoopback

E1-2CS DLIM

SCE




A - crc mfrm d

B - basicC - unframed (not supported)

Reconfigure


A - system d: the system clock provides the DLIM transmit clockB - local oscillator : the local oscillator provides the DLIM transmit clock,C - local link0 : timing from the link provides the DLIM transmit clockD - local link1 : timing from the link provides the DLIM transmit clockE - local link2 : timing from the link provides the DLIM transmit clockF - local link3 : timing from the link provides the DLIM transmit clock

Reconfigure

TS16 Payld Enables/indicates the setting of the TS16 payload:yes : Type y to set timeslot 16 to carry payload.nod: Type n to be able to use timeslot 16 for CAS (Channel Associated Signaling).Note: This option not supported. The SCE ignores this setting.

NA

Tx AIS Enables/indicates the setting of the transmit alarm indication signalling,:yes : Type Y to enable the transmission of Alarm Indication Signalling (AIS) cells.N - nod: Type n to disable AIS cell transmission.

Reconfigure

Extract Fr Enables/indicates the extraction of frame bits:yes : Type Y to enable the extraction of frame bits.

nod: Type n so that frame bits are not extracted.Note: You must set this option to no for the SCE Adaptation Controller

Reconfigure


A - balanced 120 d

B - unbalanced 75

Reconfigure

Clear Coun Enables the clearing of the performance monitoring counters:yes : Type Y to clear the counters.


Immediate

Reconfigur Implements the reconfigurable changes made in this screen:yes : Type Y to reconfigure the SCE and implement the changes.nod: Type n to exit this option without implementing the changes.

Immediate

se1SA4 National bit Sa4, transmitted in bit position 4 of Non Frame Alignment Signal (NFAS) frames. Note: Only supported with E1-2CS/4CS LIMs. Bit is fixed to On (1) for

E1-2C/4C LIMs.

Reconfigure

se1SA5 National bit Sa5, transmitted in bit position 5 of NFAS frames.Note: Only supported with E1-2CS/4CS LIMs. Bit is fixed to On (1) for

E1-2C/4C LIMs.

Reconfigure


E1-2C/4C LIMs.

Reconfigure


E1-2C/4C LIMs.

Reconfigure






03Iss

se1SA8 National bit Sa8, transmitted in bit position 8 of NFAS frames.Note: Only supported with E1-2CS/4CS LIMs. Bit is fixed to On (1)

for E1-2C/4C LIMs.

Reconfigure

se1SI0 International bit Si0, transmitted in bit position 1 of NFAS frames. Note 1: Only supported with E1-2CS/4CS LIMs. Bit is fixed to On (1)

for E1-2C/4C LIMs.Note 2: Not applicable when using CRC multiframe framing.

Reconfigure

se1SI1 International bit Si1, transmitted in bit position 1 of Frame Alignment Signal (FAS) frames.Note 1: Only supported with E1-2CS/4CS LIMs. Bit is fixed to On (1)

for E1-2C/4C LIMs.Note 2: Not applicable when using CRC multiframe framing.

Reconfigure




FERF Defect Indicates if there is currently a far-end receiver failure defect state. NA, read only





FERF Alarm Indicates if there is currently a far-end receiver failure alarm. NA, read only
















SCE Configuration Configure the Partial Cell Fill

beless

Configure the Partial Cell Fill1. From the SCE MIB Display and Management screen, select the SCE menu option. The SCE

screen appears as shown in Figure 13-4.

Figure 13-4 SCE Screen

2. From the SCE screen, select the Partial Fill Char Value menu option. The option of enteringa value in the range (0-ff) is offered. This number, entered in hexidecimal, sets the value toused in filling out the remaining cell payload for any bundles configured for fill levels than 47-bytes.

3. Enter the value for the partial cell fill.

4. This completes the Configure the Partial Cell Fill procedure.

5. Proceed to Enable the Links on page 13-15.


Switch Name:Slot xx SYS SCE SW Version

0 Partial Fill Char Value (Hex): 0xff1 Link Configuration2 Channel Configuration3 Bundle Configuration4 Bundle Statistics Cell Rate Available (CPS): 38976 Current Cell Rate (percent): 0 AAl1 Card state: up



SCE Configuration Enable the Links

03Iss

inn

her

Enable the Links1. From the SCE screen, select the Link Configuration menu option. The Link Configuration

screen appears.

2. Select Extra detail . The Detail of Link Configuration entry 0 screen appears as shown Figure 13-5. The screen parameters are described in Link Configuration Screen Parameters opage 13-16.

3. At the Select option: prompt, select Link Enable and then select enabled to enable the link.

4. Select CE Mode. At the prompt, select the appropriate mode option for the link.

5. Use the Down and Up or Goto row commands to transition to the detail screens for the otlinks and perform step 3 and step 4 for each link.

6. Select eXit to return to the SCE screen. This completes the Enable the Links procedure.

7. Proceed to Assign the Channels on page 13-17.

Figure 13-5 Extra Detail Screen of Link Configuration


Switch Name:Slot xx SYS Link Configuration New EventDetail of Link Configuration entry 0

Link : 00 Link Enable : enabled1 Circuit Emulation Mode : structured data only Link Enable Status : enabled Circuit Emulation Mode Status : structured data only2 Trap Enable : disabled



SCE Configuration Enable the Links

able/

Link Configuration Screen Parameters

The Link Configuration screen allows you to view and set the parameters required to endisable the links. These parameters are defined in Table 13-4. The default values are indicated by d.

Table 13-4 Link Configuration Screen Parameter Definitions



NA, read only

Link Enable Enables/indicates the setting of the link as being enabled/disabled. The options are:A - enabledB - disabled d

Immediate

Circuit Emulation Mode Enables/indicates the link supporting bundles supporting Channel Associated Signaling (CAS). The options are:A - structured data only : bundles supporting CAS are not supported

B - structured cas mixed mode d: bundles supporting CAS are supported

Immediate

Link Enable Status Indicates the link enable status; may be one of the following:errorenableddisabledwaiting for valid limlink not usedwaiting signaling lim

NA, read only

Circuit Emulation Mode Status

Indicates the Circuit Emulation Mode status; may be one of the following:structured data onlystructured cas mixed modewaiting for valid limwaiting link enablewaiting signaling limwaiting lim framingwaiting Frame Bitworking lim cfgworking SCE CAS onerror

NA, read only

Trap Enable Indicates Trap status and setting; may be one of the following:A - disabled d

B - trap allC - trap link errorsD - trap state changes

Immediate

Table 13-4


SCE Configuration Assign the Channels

03Iss

links.E. The

if youered 0

and 32nels to

n

el to.

her

Assign the Channels

You can consider the SCE channels to be the timeslots on the lines connected to the SCE LIMThe Channel Configuration screen contains all the timeslots (channels) connected to the SCchannels are numbered according to the links they connected to on the LIM. For example,have four DS1 lines connected to a SCE/DS1-4C, each link will contain 24-channels, numbthrough 23, corresponding to timeslots 1 through 24.

The SCE software has a set maximum number of bundles; 24 for each link with DS1 service for each link with E1 service. You can assign a single channel to a bundle, or multiple chana bundle. In the following procedure you will assign the channels to bundles.

1. From the SCE screen, select the Channel Configuration menu option. The ChannelConfiguration screen appears.

2. Select Extra detail . The Detail of Channel Configuration entry 0 screen appears as showin Figure 13-6. The screen parameters are described in Channel Configuration ScreenParameters on page 13-18.

3. Select Bundle and, at the prompt, enter the bundle number you want to assign the chann

4. Select Active and, at the prompt, select yes to activate the channel.

5. Use the Down and Up or Goto row commands to transition to the detail screens for the otchannels and perform step 3 and step 4 for each channel.

6. Select eXit to return to the SCE screen. This completes the Assign the Channels procedure.

7. Proceed to Configure the Bundles on page 13-19

Figure 13-6 Extra Detail of Channel Configuration


Switch Name:Slot xx SYS Channel Configuration SW versionDetail of Channel Configuration entry 0

Link : 0 Channel : 10 Bundle : 01 Active : yes



SCE Configuration Assign the Channels

hese

Channel Configuration Screen Parameters

The Channel Configuration screen allows you to view and set the channel parameters. Tparameters are defined in Table 13-5. The default values are indicated by d.

Table 13-5 Channel Configuration Screen Parameter Definitions



NA, read only

Channel Displays the number of the channel associated with the link for which the detail is being shown.

NA, read only

Bundle Enables/indicates the setting of the bundle value for the channel

combination in the range (0d-31).

Channel Activation(Active = Y)

Active Enables/indicates the activation of the channel. The options are:A - yes : Select this option to activate the channel.

B - nod : Select this option to deactivate the channel.C - invalid (displayed for channels 24-31 with the DS1-2CS/4CS LIMs)

Immediate

Table 13-5


SCE Configuration Configure the Bundles

03Iss

u build on a theide of

inrsitch

the

her

Configure the BundlesSCE bundles enable you to associate a PVC or SPVC to the channels (timeslots). When yoyour PVC or SPVC you will enter a VCI value on the SCE side of the connection basedformula, [VCI= (link number x 32) + bundle + 256], to associate the bundle (containingchannels) with the connection. Additionally, you must enter VPI=1 and Link=0 on the SCE sthe PVC or SPVC. The software will determine the actual link number from the VCI value.

1. From the SCE screen, select the Bundle Configuration menu option.

2. Select Extra detail. The Detail of Bundle Configuration entry 0 screen appears as shown Figure 13-7. The screen parameters are described in Bundle Configuration Screen Parameteon page 13-20. You can find more information on these parameters in the GDC Xedge SwTechnical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310.

3. Select the Bundle Enable option and at the prompt select yes to enable the bundle.

4. If desired, at the Select option: prompt, select the item or items to be configured and enterconfiguration changes.

5. Use the Down and Up or Goto row commands to transition to the detail screens for the otbundles and repeat step 3 and step 4 for any bundle with channels assigned to it.


7. Select Save. This completes the Bundle Configuration procedure.

8. Proceed to Chapter 16: Bandwidth Allocation and Reservation for allocating resources, andChapter 17: Configuring Connections, for configuring PVCs and SPVCs.

Note The Bundle Status field will display wait for pvc until you configure and activate a PVC or SPVC associated with this bundle.



hese

Figure 13-7 Extra Detail Screen of Bundle Configuration

Bundle Configuration Screen Parameters

The Bundle Configuration screen allows you to view and set the bundle parameters. Tparameters are defined in Table 13-6. The default values are indicated by d.

Table 13-6 Bundle Configuration Screen Parameter Definitions


Link Displays the number of the link for which the extra detail screen is being shown.

NA, read only

Bundle Displays the number of the bundle associated with the link for which the extra detail screen is being shown.

NA, read only

VCI Displays the VCI: equals (link number x 32) + bundle + 256. NA, read only

PVC Active Indicates, yes or no , if a PVC has been configured for the bundle and is active.

NA, read only



Switch Name:Slot xx SYS Bundle Configuration SW VersionDetail of Bundle Configuration entry 0

Link : 0 Dest Link : 0 Bundle : 0 Dest Slot : 0 VCI : 256 Dest VCI : 0 PVC Active : no Dest VPI : 0 Bundle Status : wait for pvc CAS Enable Stat: invalid00 Bundle Enable : yes Bundle Cell Rat: 001 Fill Level : 47 10 Sig Cond (idle): a0 b0 c0 d002 CDV (1/4-mS) : 4 11 Trap Enable : disabled03 Max CDV (1/4-mS: 8 Assembly Time-u: 587504 Conditioning En: disabled05 Data Conditioni: idle code06 User Data : 0x107 CAS Enable : invalid08 Sig Cond (Down): a0 b0 c0 d009 Sig Cond (Up) : a0 b0 c0 d0Select option:Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row, Index search, Summary,eXit



03Iss

Bundle Status Indicates if the bundle is ready. May indicate:bundle not configuredrunningwaiting for PVCno active channelswaiting for valid LIMerrorwait link enablewait signaling linkwait lim framingwait Frame Bitconditioningcell lossinvalid

NA, read only

Bundle Enable Enables/disables the bundle. When not selected, this field reports the bundle status. The options are:yes : Type Y to enable the bundle.

nod: Type N to disable the bundle.

Immediate

Fill Level Enables/indicates the setting of the payload level in the range

(1-47d).Note: The fill level must be set to “two or more” than the

number of channels selected for this bundle.

Immediate

CDV (1/4-mS) Enables/indicates the setting of the cell delay variation in the

range: (1-127), 4d.Note: With DS102CS/4CS LIMs, the allowable range is 1-96.

This value must be less than the MAX CDV.Note: The value is entered in 1/4 milli-second increments.

Immediate

Max CDV (1/4-mS) Enables/indicates the setting of the maximum cell delay

variation in the range: (1-192), 8d.Note: The value is entered in 1/4 milli-second increments.

Immediate

Assembly Time-uS Indicates the assembly time delay. Can be significant depending on the user configuration. Assembly Time-uS = (Fill Level/#DS0s) * 125uS.

NA, read only

Conditioning Enbl Enables/indicates the setting of trunk conditioning. The options are:

A - enabled d

B - disabled

Immediate

Data Conditioning Enables/indicates the setting of the data value that the channels in this bundle will be set to during a conditioning state. The options are:A - idle code d

B - mux oosC - user data

Immediate

User Data Enables/indicates the setting of the user selectable data conditioning value entered as a hexidecimal number in the range:

(0-0xff ), 0x1d

Immediate

Table 13-6 Bundle Configuration Screen Parameter Definitions (Continued)





CAS Enable Enables/indicates the setting of CAS Enable. The options are:

A - enabled d

B - disabled

Immediate

Sig Cond (Down) Enables/indicates the setting of the signaling bits to be transmitted towards the downstream SCE for the channels assigned to this bundle during a conditioning state, i.e., if conditioning and CAS are enabled. The options are:A - a0 b0 c0 d0 d

B - a0 b1 c0 d1C - a1 b1 c1 d1D - a01 b01 c01 d01E - a10 b1 c10 d1F - a10 b10 c10 d10Note: Selections D through F, with two values for the CAS

bits, indicate that the first value will be transmitted for the first 2.5 seconds, and the second value for the remainder of the conditioning state.

Immediate

Sig Cond (Up) Enables/indicates the setting of the signaling bits to be transmitted upstream towards the link for the channels assigned to this bundle during a conditioning state, i.e., if conditioning and CAS are enabled. The options are:

A - a0 b0 c0 d0 d

B - a0 b1 c0 d1C - a1 b1 c1 d1D - a01 b01 c01 d01E - a10 b1 c10 d1F - a10 b10 c10 d10

Immediate

Dest Link Destination link for the VC of this bundle. NA, read only

Dest Slot Destination slot for the VC of this bundle. NA, read only

Dest VCI Destination VCI for the VC of this bundle. NA, read only

Dest VPI Destination VPI for the VC of this bundle. NA, read only

CAS Enable Status Status of DS1 CAS Enable for this bundle, may display:enableddisabledwait valid limwait link enablewait signal limwait lim framerwait CAS modewait Framer Bitinvalid : (displayed with the E1-2CS/4CS LIMs)error

NA, read only

Bundle Cell Rate Cell rate for this Bundles VC in cells per second (CPS). NA, read only

Idle Sig Bits Idle signaling bits: Forces signaling bits on channels associated with disabled bundles to designated pattern.

Bundle Disable(Bundle Enable: No)






03Iss

Sig Cond (idle) Enables/indicates the setting of the idle signaling bits for the channels assigned to this bundle during a conditioning state, i.e., if conditioning and CAS are enabled. The options are:A - a0 b0 c0 d0 d

B - a0 b0 c0 d1C - a0 b0 c1 d0D - a0 b0 c1 d1E - a0 b1 c0 d0F - a0 b1 c0 d1G - a0 b1 c1 d0H - a0 b1 c1 d1I - a1 b0 c0 d0J - a1 b0 c0 d1K - a1 b0 c1 d0L - a1 b0 c1 d1M - a1 b1 c0 d0N - a1 b1 c0 d1O - a1 b1 c1 d0P - a1 b1 c1 d1

Immediate

Trap Enable Indicates Trap status and setting; may be one of the following:

A - disabled d

B - trap allC - trap errorsD - trap state changes

Immediate





03Iss

roller, VSM

1

3

4

8

3

8

9

1

3

8

4

4

Chapter 14: VSM Configuration

Chapter OverviewThis chapter describes how to configure the Voice Service Module (VSM) Adaptation Contand its associated Line Interface Modules (LIMs). For an overview of the VSM see Chapter 8Overview of the GDC Xedge Switch Applications Overview, Part Number 032R300. For VSMStatus information see Chapter 11, VSM Status of the GDC Xedge Switch Diagnostics Guide, PartNumber 032R500.


Chapter Overview.................................................................................................................14-



Physical Layout..............................................................................................................14-


DS1-2CS/4CS DLIMs....................................................................................................14-8

E1-2CS/4CS DLIMs.....................................................................................................14-1

Configure VSM Options.....................................................................................................14-1

Card Configuration.......................................................................................................14-1

Configure the Links......................................................................................................14-2

Configure the Timeslots...............................................................................................14-23

Configure the Bundles..................................................................................................14-29

Logical Multicast................................................................................................................14-3

Q.SIG Configuration (Optional Feature)............................................................................14-35

Overview, Q.SIG Load Distribution............................................................................14-35

VSM Base Card Revision Requirements.....................................................................14-36

SAP Configuration.......................................................................................................14-3

Link Table Configuration (M, 60, 1)............................................................................14-39

Timeslot Table Configuration......................................................................................14-40

Bundle Table Configuration.........................................................................................14-40

SCC Configuration Table (M, 102, 0)..........................................................................14-40

Activate SAP (M, 109, 1).............................................................................................14-41

Q.931 Glare Priority.....................................................................................................14-4

Activate SAP................................................................................................................14-4

ISDN Link Table (M, 110, 2).......................................................................................14-44

Back-up Your .cfg Files...............................................................................................14-44

AEM ISDN Narrowband / Broadband Mapping Table Generation...................................14-45


VSM Configuration Chapter Overview

5

5

5

VC Profiles................................................................................................................... 14-4

VPN Plan...................................................................................................................... 14-4

DS0/VPN Mapping...................................................................................................... 14-4

Loading the isdn.bin Software File.............................................................................. 14-45


VSM Configuration Configuration Summary

03Iss

it priorge thermation

have

.

Configuration SummaryAs a minimum, the VSM Adaptation Controller must have the mpro1.cod and vsm.bin files installed on to configuration. To configure the VSM, you can use the menu system within the VSM. To manacontroller you can use the menu system or the GDC ProShpere Network Management System. For infoon the GDC ProSphere Network Management System, refer to the GDC ProSphere User Guide.

The VSM operates in all GDC Xedge chassis and requires one of the following LIMs:

• DS1-2CS DLIM (also referred to as ‘ds1 dual’)

• E1-2CS DLIM (also referred to as ‘e1 dual’)

• DS1-4CS DLIM (also referred to as ‘ds1 quad’)

• E1-4CS DLIM (also referred to as ‘e1 quad’)

To configure the VSM Adaptation Controller, you typically need to perform the followingprocedures:



• DS1-2CS/4CS DLIMs

• E1-2CS/4CS DLIMs

• Configure the Links

• Configure the Bundles

• Configure the Timeslots

This chapter explains interface configuration specific to VSM applications. Once you completed these procedures, refer to Chapter 16: Bandwidth Allocation and Reservation forallocating resources, and Chapter 17: Configuring Connections, for configuring PVCs and SPVCsThe VSM PVC/SPVC always uses Link-0 on the VSM side of the configuration.

Note The VSM cannot be used as the Slot-0 Controller.


VSM Configuration Define the DLIM in Slot-0

ptationmust

in

Define the DLIM in Slot-0The Slot-0 Controller sends a health check signal that detects the presence of the VSM AdaController in the installed slot. Before you can configure the VSM Adaptation Controller, you select a DLIM type for it in the Slot-0 Physical Layout.

Physical Layout




Figure 14-1 Physical Layout, Slot-0 (showing a VSM in Slot 4)

4. Select Goto row and enter the number of the slot in which the VSM Adaptation Controlleris installed, and press the Enter key.

5. Select Extra detail . The Physical Layout, Detail of Physical Layout entry “XX” appears asshown in Figure 14-2 (XX=VSM slot number). The screen parameters are describedPhysical Layout Screen Parameter Definitions on page 14-6.


Switch Name: Slot 0 Physical Layout SW VersionNo Slot No Name Type DLIM Type Version State Reset Slot

0 0 MSQ/SL0 qedoc dAUI 512a3 active no1 1 FRC/SL1 frac si dual 512a3 active no2 2 ACP/SL2 pdh e1 dual 512a3 active no3 3 ACP/SL3 pdh e1 dual 512a3 active no4 4 VSM/SL4 vsm e1 quad 512a3 active no5 5 Slot 05 unknown unknown absent no6 6 Slot 06 unknown unknown absent no7 7 Slot 07 unknown unknown absent no8 8 Slot 08 unknown unknown absent no9 9 Slot 09 unknown unknown absent no10 10 Slot 10 unknown unknown absent no11 11 Slot 11 unknown unknown absent no12 12 Slot 12 unknown unknown absent no13 13 Slot 13 unknown unknown absent no14 14 Slot 14 unknown unknown absent no15 15 Slot 15 unknown unknown absent noSelect option:Down, Enter entry number to edit, Extra detail, Goto row,Press ^J for extra help on this item, Right, eXit



03Iss


7. From the list of DLIMs displayed, select the appropriate DLIM:

• select ds1 dual for the DS1-2CS DLIM

• select ds1 quad for the DS1-4CS DLIM

• select e1 dual for the E1-2CS DLIM

• select e1 quad for the E1-4CS DLIM





Figure 14-2 Extra Detail Screen Physical Layout, VSM Entry XX (in this case, Slot Number 4)


Switch Name: Slot 0S Physical Layout SW VersionDetail of Physical Layout entry XX

Slot No : 4 DOC Ser # : 10289800350 Name : VSM/SL4 DOC HW Ver : 4.0C Type : vsm 5 Slot MAC Addres: f4f4f4f4f4f41 DLIM Type : e1 quad Last State Chan: 20 Jul 2000 12:52:49 Version : 512a3 Lst Chngd Link : link 3 State : active Lst Previous St: stop2 Reset Slot : no3 Required State : normal Changed State : no4 Associated Slot: 0 slot0PhyLink0St: up slot0PhyLink1St: down slot0PhyLink2St: down slot0PhyLink3St: down Slot Ser # : 1028980035 Slot HW Ver : 6.0NSelect option:Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row,Press ^J for extra help on this item, Summary, Up, eXit



by

Physical Layout Screen Parameter Definitions

The Physical Layout screen allows you to view and set the parameters, described in Table 14-1,for Slot Controllers and DLIMs in the Slot-0 Physical Layout. The default values are indicated d.

Table 14-1 Physical Layout Screen Parameter Descriptions




Immediate

Type When the Slot Controller has been installed, the application code has booted and is running, and the config update has been passed to the Slot-0 Controller, the Type field identifies the type of Slot Controller installed in the slot. In this case, the Slot Controller is recognized as the type vsm .

NA, read only

DLIM Type Enables you to specify the DLIM type that is installed from a list of possible DLIMs. For the VSM Adaptation Controller, the possible DLIMs that you can use are:O - e1 dualP - e1 quadQ - ds1 dualR - ds1 quadEnter the alpha character (case sensitive) for the DLIM type installed.

Immediate

Version Indicates the version of application software running on the VSM Adaptation Controller.

NA, read only

State Indicates the current state of the Slot Controller.absent : the slot may be empty or the Slot Controller has lost

communications.active : the full feature software has been loaded and is running.bootmode : the full feature software has not been loaded; the


NA, read only

Reset Slot Enables a reset (toggle) of the slot. This is a warm restart of the slot. It is necessary when certain configuration changes are made to the slot:yes : Type y to reset the slot.

nod: Type n to exit this option without resetting the slot.

Immediate

Required State Enables you to set the required state of the slot:A - normal d: the normal state required for runningB - shutdown : stops the slot from runningC - main : not supportedD - shadow : not supported

Immediate


NA, read only





03Iss

slot0PhyLink0St Indicates the current status of link 0 . The possible states are:up : the Slot Controller and DLIM have been installed, the DLIM

has been selected and recognized, and line coding is passing.down : may indicate an incomplete installation, selection of the

wrong DLIM, or line coding is not passing.stop : indicates this link is disabled.

NA, read only


slot0PhyLink2St Same as slot0PhyLink0St except reports on link 2, if a quad is installed. Will indicate stop if a dual-port LIM is installed.

NA, read only

slot0PhyLink3St Same as slot0PhyLink0St except reports on link 3, if a quad is installed. Will indicate stop if a dual-port LIM is installed.

NA, read only


NA, read only


NA, read only


NA, read only


NA, read only


Immediate

Last State Chan Reports the date and time of the last toggle between the normal state and the shutdown state.

NA, read only

Lst Chngd Link Reports which link changed state last NA, read only

Lst Previous St Reports the last previous state of the Link which changed last NA, read only

Table 14-1 Physical Layout Screen Parameter Descriptions (Continued)




VSM Configuration Configure the DLIM

pes:

Configure the DLIM

This procedure is divided into two main sub-headings which correspond to the VSM LIM Ty

• If you have a DS1-2CS or DS1-4CS LIM, perform the procedure described in DS1-2CS/4CSDLIMs starting on page 14-8.

• If you have an E1-2CS or E1-4CS LIM, perform the procedure described in E1-2CS/4CSDLIMs starting on page 14-13.

DS1-2CS/4CS DLIMs

This section describes how to configure the VSM if it is connected to a DS1-2CS or DS1-4CS LIM.

1. From the Root Menu of the Slot-0 Controller, establish a telnet session with the VSM Adaptation Controller. The Root Menu of the VSM Adaptation Controller appears.

2. From the Root Menu of the VSM Adaptation Controller select Manage configuration. TheMIB Display and Management screen for the VSM Adaptation Controller appears.

Figure 14-3 MIB Display for VSM Adaptation Controller



Note A Framer mode must be set to SF or ESF for DS1.


Switch Name: Slot 11 SYS MIB Display and Management SW Version

00 system 01 interfaces02 at03 ip04 icmp05 tcp06 udp07 snmp08 System Information12 Static Routing19 DSP DLIMs24 SVC Configuration/Status60 VSM

Select option:Enter group number, save As, Load, sTatus, eXit,Last save file is `/$/config.cfg'.



03Iss

e

red

5. Select Extra detail . The ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status, Detail of ds1-2C/4C DLIMConfig/Status entry 0 screen appears as shown in Figure 14-4. The screen parameters ardescribed in DS1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status Screen Parameters starting on page 14-10.

Figure 14-4 Extra Detail Screen for ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status Entry 0


Reconfigure




10. Repeat step 6 through step 8 for the other ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status entries.

11. Select eXit twice to return to the VSM MIB Display and Management screen.

Save the Configuration

12. Select Save. This completes the Configure the DLIM procedure for a DS1-2C or DS1-4C DLIM.

Note Extract Frame Bits must be set to no for the VSM.


Switch Name: Slot 11 SYS ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status SW VersionDetail of ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status entry 0

Link No : 0 LOS Alarm : yes Version : ds1 quad signaling LOF Alarm : no0 Txmt Line Lengt: feet 0 110 AIS Alarm : no1 Framer : none Yellow Alarm : no2 Line Coding : b8zs BER Alarm : no3 Loopback : none DS1 Framing Err: 04 Tx AIS : no DS1 Bit Errors : 05 Extract Frame B: yes DS1 OOF/COFA Er: 06 Txmt Clock Sele: system DS1 LCV Errors : 07 Clear Counters : no Line ES : 612268 Reconfigure : no Line SES : 61226 LOS Defect : yes ES : 0 OOF Defect : no SES : 0 AIS Defect : no AISS : 0 Yellow Defect : no UAS : 61223 BER Defect : no ExBER : 0Select option:Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row, Index search, Summary,eXit



the


The ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status screen allows you to view and set the parameters forDS1-2CS DLIM, listed in Table 14-2 (default values are indicated by d).

Table 14-2 ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status Screen Parameter Descriptions



Version Indicates the type of DLIM, ds1 dual signaling or ds1 quad signaling .Note: “signaling ” indicates that a signaling-enabled DLIM

(DS1-2CS or DS1-4CS) is installed. The VSM will only support signaling-enabled DLIMs.

NA, read only

Txmt Line Length Enables/indicates the setting of the line length. The options are:

A - feet 0 110d

B - feet 110 220C - feet 220 330D - feet 330 440E - feet 440 550F - feet 550 660G - more than 655 feetH - square

Reconfigure

Framer Enables/indicates the setting of the framer. You must select either the superframe or one of the extended superframe options. The menu choices are:

A - none d: transparent mode, not a valid choice for the VSMB - sf: superframeC - t1dm: DS1 data multiplexer framing (not supported)D - slc96: SLC96 framing (not supported)E - esf4k: extended superframe, 4 Kbit/s data linkF - esf2K 3: extended superframe, 2 Kbit/s data link, frames 3, 7,

11, 15, 19, 23G - esf2k 1: extended superframe, 2 Kbit/s data link, frames 1, 5,

9, 13, 17, 21Note: The default value of none is not a valid choice for VSM.

You must select sf or esf4k for the VSM.

Reconfigure

Line Coding Enables/indicates the setting of the line code. The options are:A - b8zsd: bipolar with 8-zero substitution codingB - ami: alternate mark inversion coding

Reconfigure




03Iss


A - none d - No loopbackB - line lpbk - Line LoopbackC - payload lpbk - Payload LoopbackD - digital lpbk - Digital Loopback

Immediate

Tx AIS Enables/indicates the setting of the transmit Alarm Indication Signalling (AIS) cells:yes: Type y to enable of AIS cell transmission.

nod: Type n disable AIS cell transmission.

Reconfigure

Extract Frame Bits Enables/indicates the extraction of frame bits:yesd: Type y to enable the extraction of frame bits.no: Type n to disable the extraction of frame bits.

Note: Must be set to no for the VSM.

Reconfigure

Txmt Clock Select Enables/indicates the selection of the transmit clock.Note: The VSM requires all links on the LIM to operate in a

common synchronization mode. The transmit and receive channels of all links are synchronized to the same master source. The master source is determined by the Link-0 transmit timing configuration.

The options are:A - system d: system clock provides the DLIM transmit clockB - local oscillator: local oscillator provides the DLIM transmit

clockC - local link0: timing from link0 provides the DLIM transmit

clockD - local link1: timing from link1 provides the DLIM transmit

clockE - local link2: timing from link2 provides the DLIM transmit

clockF - local link3: timing from link3 provides the DLIM transmit clock

Reconfigure

Clear Counters Enables the clearing of the performance monitoring counters:yes: Type y to clear the counters.

nod: Type n if you do not want to clear the counters.

Immediate

Reconfigure Implements the changes made in this screen:yes: Type y to reconfigure the VSM with the current changes.

nod: Type n if you want to exit this option without reconfiguring the VSM.

Immediate



Table 14-2 ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status Screen Parameter Descriptions (Continued)



LineInterface Framer

Received Data

Transmitted

LineLoopback

PayloadLoopback

DigitalLoopback

LIM

SlotController

Data





BER Defect Indicates if there is currently a bit error rate > 1x10-3. The BER threshold is not selectable.

NA, read only






DS1 Framing Error Reports the number of DS1 framing errors. NA, read only


DS1 OOF/COFA Er Reports the number of DS1 out of frame/change of frame alignment errors.

NA, read only








ExBER Reports the number of extended bit errors. NA, read only

Table 14-2 ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status Screen Parameter Descriptions (Continued)





03Iss

dure

M

the

E1-2CS/4CS DLIMs

This section describes how to configure the VSM with an E1-2CS or E1-4CS LIM.

If you are using a DS1-2CS or DS1-4CS LIM for your VSM application, use the procedescribed in DS1-2CS/4CS DLIMs starting on page 14-8.

1. From the Root Menu of the Slot-0 Controller, establish a telnet session with the VSAdaptation Controller. The Root Menu of the VSM Adaptation Controller appears.


Figure 14-5 MIB Display and Management screen for VSM Adaptation Controller



5. Select Extra detail. The E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status, Detail of E1-2C/4C DLIMConfig/Status entry 0 screen appears as shown in Figure 14-6.

Note A Framer mode must be set to basic or crc multiframe for E1.

The TS16 parameter is not used on the VSM. This option is automatically configured with signalling DLIMs. An entry for this parameter for VSM use will be ignored.







red
Reconfigure




Figure 14-6 Extra Detail Screen of E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status Entry 0



Save the Configuration


Note Extract Frame Bits must be set to no for the VSM.


Switch Name: Slot 4 SYS E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status SW VersionDetail of E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status entry 0

Link No : 0 14 Si0 Nat'l : on Line ES : 0 Version : quad sig 15 Si1 Nat'l : on Line SES : 000 Loopback : none LOS Defect: no ES : 001 Framer Mod: crc mfrm OOF Defect: no SES : 002 Tx Clk Src: system AIS Defect: no AISS : 003 TS16 PayLd: yes FERF Defec: no UAS : 004 Tx AIS : no BER Defect: no05 Extract Fr: no LOS Alarm : no06 Interface : unbalan 75 LOF Alarm : no07 Clear Coun: no AIS Alarm : no08 Reconfigur: no FERF Alarm: no09 SA4 Nat'l : on BER Alarm : no10 SA5 Nat'l : on CRC Errors: 011 SA6 Nat'l : on Frame Erro: 012 SA7 Nat'l : on FEBE Error: 013 SA8 Nat'l : on Line Code : 0Select option:Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row, Index search, Summary,eXit



03Iss

d in

E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status Screen Parameter Definitions

The E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status screen allows you to view and set the parameters, listeTable 14-3, for the E1-2CS and the E1-4CS DLIMs (default value is indicated by d).

Table 14-3 E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status Screen Parameter Descriptions



Version Indicates the type of DLIM, dual sig or quad sig , which indicates that a signaling-enabled DLIM (E1-2CS, or E1-4CS) is installed. The VSM will only support signaling-enabled DLIMs.

NA, read only

Loopback Enables/indicates the setting of the diagnostic loopback. The options are:A - none d - No loopbackB - line lpbk - Line LoopbackC - payload lpbk - Payload LoopbackD - digital lpbk - Digital Loopback

Immediate


A - crc mfrm d

B - basicC - unframed (not supported)

Reconfigure

Tx Clk Src Enables/indicates the selection of the transmit clock. Note: The VSM requires all links on the LIM to operate in a

common synchronization mode. The transmit and receive channels of all links are synchronized to the same master source. The master source is determined by the link-0 transmit timing configuration.

The options are:

A - system d: the system clock provides the DLIM transmit clockB - local oscil : the local oscillator provides the DLIM transmit clockC - local link0 : timing from local link0 provides the DLIM transmit

clockD - local link1 : timing from local link1 provides the DLIM transmit

clockE - local link2 : timing from local link2 provides the DLIM transmit

clockF - local link3 : timing from local link3 provides the DLIM transmit

clock

Reconfigure

TS16 Payld Configures/Indicates either reserving Timeslot 16 for CAS signalling or setting Timeslot 16 for payload use:yes : Type y to use Timeslot 16 for payload.

nod: Type n to be able to use Timeslot 16 for CAS.Note: The VSM ignores this parameter setting.

NA


LineInterface Framer

Received Data

Transmitted

LineLoopback

PayloadLoopback

DigitalLoopback

DLIMData

SlotController



Tx AIS Enables/indicates the setting of the transmit Alarm Indication Signalling (AIS) cells:yes : Type y to enable the transmission of Alarm Indication

Signaling (AIS) cells.nod: Type n to disable AIS cell transmission.

Reconfigure

Extract Fr Extract Frame Bits. Enables/indicates the extraction of frame bits:yes : Type y to enable the extraction of frame bits

nod: Type n to disable the extraction of frame bits.Note: Must be set to no for the VSM Adaptation Controller.

Reconfigure

Interface Enables/indicates the choice of one of two interface impedances:

A - balanced 120 d

B - unbalanced 75

Reconfigure



Immediate

Reconfigur Resets the ACP Cell Controller with the current parameter values:yes : Type y to reconfigure the ACP.nod: Type n to exit this option without reconfiguring the ACP.

Immediate

SA4 Nat’l National bit SA4, transmitted in bit position 4 of Non Frame Alignment Signal (NFAS) frames.Note: Only supported with E1-2CS/4CS LIMs. Bit is fixed to


Reconfigure

SA5 Nat’l National bit SA5, transmitted in bit position 5 of NFAS frames. Note: Only supported with E1-2CS/4CS LIMs. Bit is fixed to


Reconfigure



Reconfigure



Reconfigure



Reconfigure

Si0 Nat’l International bit SI0, transmitted in bit position 1 of NFAS frames. Note 1: Only supported with E1-2CS/4CS LIMs. Bit is fixed to

On (1) for E1-2C/4C LIMs.Note 2: Not applicable when using CRC Multiframe Framing.

Reconfigure

Si1 Nat’l International bit SI1, transmitted in bit position 1 of Frame Alignment Signal (FAS) frames.Note 1: Only supported with E1-2CS/4CS LIMs. Bit is fixed to

On (1) for E1-2C/4C LIMs.Note 2: Not applicable when using CRC Multiframe Framing.

Reconfigure










03Iss





















VSM Configuration Configure VSM Options

M

ee

Configure VSM Options1. From the Root Menu of the Slot-0 Controller, establish a telnet session with the VS

Adaptation Controller. The Root Menu of the VSM Adaptation Controller appears.

2. From the Root Menu of the VSM Adaptation Controller select Manage configuration. TheMIB Display and Management screen for the VSM Adaptation Controller appears. SFigure 14-7.


3. From the VSM MIB Display and Management screen, select the VSM menu option. TheVSM screen appears as shown in Figure 14-8.







03Iss

Figure 14-8 VSM Screen, from MIB Display and Management Screen

4. The sections that follow help configure the VSM for the following areas:

• Card Configuration

• Links

• Timeslot Configuration

• Bundle Configuration

Card Configuration

From the VSM Screen, select the Card Configuration Table option. The Card ConfigurationTable screen appears, as shown in Figure 14-9.


Switch Name: Slot 11 SYS VSM SW Version

0 Card Configuration Table1 Link Table2 Timeslot Configuration Table3 Bundle Configuration Table4 Card Status Table5 Timeslot Status Table6 Bundle Status Table




listed in

Figure 14-9 Card Configuration Table Screen

Set the Card Configuration parameters as appropriate. The options for each parameter are Table 14-4.


Switch Name: Slot 11 SYS Card Configuration Table SW VersionDetail of Card Configuration Table entry 0

Index : 1 Bundle/Timeslot Status : enabled0 Detect End of Fax/Modem : enabled1 Voice Activity Detection Level: high2 Comfort Noise Generation Level: medium

Select option:Enter entry number to edit, eXit



03Iss

Card Configuration Table Screen Parameters

Configure the Links

This section provides you with a procedure to configure your VSM links.

1. Select the Link Table menu option from the VSM screen (see Figure 14-8 on page 14-19).The Link Table screen appears.

Table 14-4 Card Configuration Table Parameter Descriptions


Index This field is used for SNMP purposes only. It does not report any information.

NA, read only

Bundle/Timeslot Status This field indicates whether the Bundle/Timeslot data gathering is enabled or disabled .

NA, read only

Detect end of FAX/Modem Select enabled (default) to allow VSM to terminate a fax/modem call in non-CAS applications.

Select disabled with applications that support CAS.Note: For more information about CAS, see DS1

Channel Associated Signaling (CAS) on page 1-11 or E1 Channel Associated Signaling (CAS) on page 1-14 of the GDC Xedge Switch Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310.

Upon Individual Timeslot Reconfiguration, or upon Power-Up

Voice Activity Detection Level

Select the Voice Activity Detection (VAD) Level , from high, medium or low .


Comfort Noise Generation Level

Select the Comfort Noise Generation (CNG) Level , from medium, low, or off .


Table 14-4



r
2. Select Extra detail. The Detail of Link Table entry 0 screen appears as shown in Figure
14-10. The screen parameters are described in Link Configuration Screen ParameteDefinitions on page 14-22.

Figure 14-10 Extra Detail of VSM Link Table Screen

3. To enable or disable the link, at the Select option: prompt, select Link Enable and enter thechange (enabled or disabled).

4. To enable or disable other links, use the Down and Up or Goto row commands to transition tothe detail screens for the other links and enter the changes as described in step 3, above.

5. Select the Link Sig. Type at the Select option: prompt, and enter the appropriate value.

6. Select eXit to return to the VSM screen. This completes the Configure the Links procedure.

Link Configuration Screen Parameter Definitions

The Link Configuration screen allows you to view and set the parameters listed in Table 14-5 (a default value is indicated by d). It also allows you to enable/disable the links.

Table 14-5 Link Configuration Screen Parameter Descriptions



NA, read only

Table 14-5


Switch Name: Slot 11 SYS Link Table SW VersionDetail of Link Table entry 0

Link : 00 Link Enable : enabled Link Enable Stat : wait lim framing1 Link Sig. Type : cas




03Iss

on.

slot

Configure the Timeslots

This section provides you with a procedure to configure your bundles through a telnet sessi

Use the following procedure to configure your timeslots through a telnet session:

1. From the VSM screen (see Figure 14-8 on page 14-19), select the Timeslot Configurationmenu option. The Timeslot Configuration screen appears.

2. To add and configure a timeslot, select Add entry (type an a). The software will prompt youfor the Link Number . Enter the link number for this timeslot.

3. The software will prompt you for the Timeslot Number. Enter the timeslot number. After youassign a Timeslot Number the Timeslot Configuration Table appears.

4. Select Extra detail . The Detail of Timeslot Configuration Table entry 0 screen appears asshown in Figure 14-11 on page 14-24. The screen parameters are described in TimeslotConfiguration Table Screen Parameters on page 14-25.

5. Select the Bundle No. option. Enter the number of the bundle you want to assign this timeto.

Link Enable Indicates the setting of the link as being enabled/disabled. The options are:A - enabled

B - disabled d

Immediate

Link Enable Stat Current status of a link depends on a valid LIM type and the availability of a link on the LIM. The possible status conditions are:enableddisabledwaiting-for-valid-limwait-for-lim-framinglink-not-usederror

NA, read only

Link Sig Type Link Signaling Type. You can configure signaling for each of the LIM links as follows:

A - cas d : Enables CAS for this linkB - none : Disables CAS (Channel Associated Signaling) for this linkC - isdn : Enables ISDN signalling type for this linkD - isup : Enables ISUP signalling type for this linkE - vpna : (not used)Note: For more information about CAS see DS1 Channel

Associated Signaling (CAS) on page 1-11 or E1 Channel Associated Signaling (CAS) on page 1-14 of the GDC Xedge Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310.

Immediate

Note For more information on configuring bundles and timeslots, refer to the ProSphere ATM Element Manager (AEM) User Guide, GDC P/N 032R720-V100 (or latest version).

Table 14-5 Link Configuration Screen Parameter Descriptions


Table 14-5



r on

er

d enter

mber

6. Select the AAL Type option. The AAL type must match the AAL Type selected for thebundle that this timeslot is assigned to. For example, if the bundle is configured for aal1 youmust select aal1 for the timeslot.

7. If you selected aal2 in step 6, and you want to map this timeslot to another timeslot numbethe other side of the connection, you must specify a Channel ID value (note that this ChannelID value must match the Channel ID value of the timeslot you want to map to on the othside of the connection).

8. If you want to change any of the other parameters, select the appropriate parameter anyour change.

9. Select the Admin Status option then select reconfig. All the values on the Detail of TimeslotConfiguration Table screen take effect (for this timeslot).

10. This completes the Configure the Timeslots procedure.


12. Select Save.

13. Proceed to Chapter 16: Bandwidth Allocation and Reservation for allocating resources, andChapter 17: Configuring Connections for configuring PVCs and SPVCs.

Figure 14-11 Extra Detail Screen of Timeslot Configuration Table

Note When you configure PVC or SPVC connections, the Bundle Number must equal the VCI nuon the VSM side of the connection.


Switch Name: Slot 3 SYS Timeslot Configuration Table SW VersionDetail of Timeslot Configuration Table entry 0

Link No. : 0 Oper. Status : down Timeslot No. : 1 14 Admin Status : down00 Bundle No. : 1 15 Validity : valid01 AAL Type : aal2 16 TLP Atten Level: 002 Channel ID : 8 17 FAX Relay : disable03 Compression Typ: none04 Bypass Handling: auto disable 64k05 Echo Cancel. : enable06 Silence Removal: enable07 Idle Chan Det. : enable08 Companding Type: auto09 Signal Type : none10 Signal Cond NB : onhook A0B011 Signal Cond ATM: onhook A0B012 Data Cond NB : muLaw 0V 7F13 Data Cond ATM : muLaw 0V 7FSelect option:Add entry, Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row, Index search,Kill entry, Move entry, Summary, eXit



03Iss

d in

Timeslot Configuration Table Screen Parameters

The Timeslot Configuration Table screen allows you to view and set the parameters listeTable 14-6 (default values are indicated by d).

Table 14-6 VSM Timeslot Configuration Screen Parameter Descriptions


Link No. The link number, 0 - 3. NA, read only

Timeslot No. The timeslot number of the link; DS1: 1 - 24, E1: 0 - 31. NA, read only

Bundle No. The bundle this timeslot is mapped to.

1dReconfigure(Admin Status)

AAL Type AAL type used for timeslot.AAL1 - For more information about AAL1 see AAL1 on

page 1-39 of the GDC Xedge Switch Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310.

AAL2 d - For more information about AAL2 see AAL2 on page 1-48 of the GDC Xedge Switch Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310.

Reconfigure(Admin Status)

Channel ID The channel ID (CID) this timeslot is mapped to. The CID must be unique across AAL2 VCs of an end-to-end connection. AAL2 only.8-255


Compression Typ The voice compression algorithm being used for the timeslot. AAL2 only, set to none for AAL1.

adpcmG726-32k d

none CS ACELP G729A 8KNote: R2 signaling is not supported when using CS ACELP

G729A 8K compression.


Bypass Handling The option to handle the bypass of Fax/modem signals.Note: For AAL2 only.auto disable 64k - Select this mode to fall-back to 64K pcm

(uncompressed) rate for the duration of the fax/modem portion of the voice call.

disable - no fall-back will occur. Set to disable if you do not use fax/modem.

auto disable 32k - Select this mode to fall-back to 32K ADPCM (compressed) rate for the duration of the fax/modem portion of the voice call.


Echo Cancel. Sets the operating mode of echo cancellation.enable - always enableddisable - always disabled

auto-disable d - Enabled at start of call, then disabled if modem tone is detected. Re-enabled at the end of the call.


Silence Removal Sets the operating mode of silence removal. For AAL2 only, set to disable for AAL1.enable - always enableddisable - always disabled

auto-disable d - Enabled at the start of the call, then disabled if modem tone is detected. Re-enabled at the end of the call.





Idle Chan Det. Indicates whether idle channel detection is enabled. If disabled this timeslot always sends cells, even when on hook unless you use silence removal. Note: Idle channel detection is disabled if the Signal Type

is set to none .

enable d

disable


Companding Type The options are:auto d - Sets the local companding type to match the local

LIM type.a to u law - Local is A-law, remote is µ-law. (Pre-v441PV1

configurations using µ-law are converted to this.)u to a law - Local is µ-law, remote is A-law. (Pre-v441PV1

configurations using A-law are converted to this.)u to u law - Local is µ-law, remote is µ-lawa to a law - Local is A-law, remote is A-lawNote: If you select any option besides auto , a DSP

resource is required for that channel and thus a DOC is required. Also, the VSM has the ability to allow each timeslot to accept A-law or µ-law companding, regardless of LIM type (T1 or E1).


Signal Type The signal type of the timeslot. None is used to turn off signaling. Used for AAL2 only, set to none for AAL1. nonegs-fxo-fxsgs-fxs-fxols-fxo-fxsls-fxs-fxo

e-and-m d

ssr2plar


Signal Cond NB The type of signaling conditioning to narrowband. Enables/indicates the setting of the signaling bits to be transmitted towards the connected T1/E1 PDH port for this timeslot during a conditioning state (a VC failure with conditioning and CAS enabled)Note: Selections with two values for the CAS bits indicate

that the first value will be transmitted for the first 2.5 seconds, and the second value for the remainder of the conditioning state.

onhook-A0B0 d

onhook-A0B1offhook-A01B01failure-A1B1failure-A10B1failure-A1B1C1D1


Table 14-6 VSM Timeslot Configuration Screen Parameter Descriptions (Continued)





03Iss

Signal Cond ATM The type of signaling conditioning to ATM. Enables/indicates the setting of the signaling bits to be transmitted towards the downstream ATM network for this timeslot during a conditioning state (A T1/E1 failure with conditioning and CAS enabled). Note: Selections with two values for the CAS bits, indicate

that the first value will be transmitted for the first 2.5 seconds, and the second value for the remainder of the conditioning state.

onhook-A0B0 d

onhook-A0B1offhook-A01B01failure-A1B1failure-A10B1failure-A1B1C1D1


Data Cond NB The type of data conditioning to narrowband.

muLaw-0V-7F d

muLaw-0V-FFaLaw-0V-D5aLaw-0V-54dacs-trbl-E4ctrl-mode-FEcir-oos-36mux-oos-1Auser-data-FFnone


Data Cond ATM The type of data conditioning to ATM.muLaw-0V-7F d

muLaw-0V-FFaLaw-0V-D5aLaw-0V-54dacs-trbl-E4ctrl-mode-FEcir-oos-36mux-oos-1Auser-data-FFnone







Oper. Status The operating status of the timeslot.

down d - Timeslot entry exists in the MIB but configuration has not been implemented on the VSM.

configured - The timeslot is configured and is running.inv-cfg - Something in the timeslot configuration is not valid.AALmismatch - AAL type of the bundle and the timeslot do

not match.no-more-DSPs - No more DSP resources are available for

assignment.inv-CID - Channel ID assignment for the timeslot is not valid.inv-Lk-no - Link number configured for the timeslot is not

valid. For example, configuring Link 2 and 3 of a dual LIM.invSil-Det - Silence Detection is configured for the timeslot

but the AAL type is not correct (must be AAL2).inv-CmpTyp - Compression is configured for the timeslot but

the AAL type is not correct (must be AAL2).unknown LIM - Either LIM configuration is not available, LIM

is not installed, or LIM type is not supported.inv-maxtslot - The number of timeslots assigned to a bundle

has exceeded the maximum time slots (maxtslot) configured for the bundle.

aal1-max-TS - More than 32 timeslots have been configured for an AAL1 bundle.

non-cas-link - A CAS signal type has been configured while the link is configured as non-CAS.

NA, read only

Admin Status The administration status of the bundle.up - Set by the VSM software when the timeslot has been

successfully configured.

down d - The VSM sets this status if there is an invalid timeslot configuration. You can set this status if you want to keep the entry in the MIB but do not want to implement it in the VSM hardware. If the timeslot is up and you set it to down, the timeslot will be deconfigured.

reconfig - Set this status to implement the configuration for the timeslot. You can make necessary changes to configure the timeslot. When ready to implement the changes, change the status to reconfig. The VSM then changes this status to up or down depending on the outcome of the configuration validation. Status must be changed to reconfig for changes to take effect.

Immediate

Validity Sets the validity of the set of parameters for this link. Set to invalid to delete this row (similar to Kill Entry).

valid d

invalid

Immediate

TLP Atten Level This option enables you to select the attenuation factor of the transmission level point (TLP) on a per timeslot basis towards the narrow band (T1/E1) interface (adjusts the signal level in the VSM to NB direction). The supported range is 0 to -9 dBm in 1 dBm increments.

Reconfigure






03Iss

in

mber

Configure the Bundles

Use the following procedure to configure your bundles through a telnet session:

1. From the VSM screen (see Figure 14-8 on page 14-19), select Bundle Configuration Table.The Bundle Configuration Table appears.

2. To add and configure a bundle, select Add entry (type an a). The software will prompt you forthe Bundle Number. After you assign a Bundle Number the Bundle Configuration Tablewill appear.

3. Select Extra detail. The Detail of Bundle Configuration entry 0 screen appears as shown Figure 14-12 on page 14-30.

FAX Relay This option enables or disables the FAX Relay option on a per-timeslot basis.

enabled d

disabled

Reconfigure

Note For more information on configuring bundles and timeslots, refer to the ProSphere ATM Element Manager (AEM) User Guide, GDC P/N 032R720-V100 (or latest version).

Note The bundle Operating Status will report bndl-novc until you configure and activate a PVC or SPVC associated with the bundle. The Operating Status field will automatically update when you configure and activate a PVC or SPVC associated with the bundle.

Note When you configure PVC or SPVC connections, the Bundle Number must equal the VCI nuon the VSM side of the connection.






ol

the

her

ndles,

Figure 14-12 VSM Bundle Configuration Screen

4. Use the Goto or the Up / Down command to access the bundle you added in step 3.

5. Select the AAL Type option. At the prompt select the AAL (ATM Adaptation Layer) protocfor the bundle.

6. At the Select option: prompt, select the item or items to be configured and enter configuration changes

7. Select Admin Status option then select reconfig. This activates the settings on the Detail ofBundle Configuration screen.

8. Use the Down and Up or Goto row commands to transition to the detail screens for the otbundles and enter the changes as described in step 3.

9. This completes the Configure the Bundles procedure.

Bundle Configuration Screen Parameter Definitions

The Bundle Configuration screen enables the viewing and setting of the parameters of the bulisted in Table 14-7.

Table 14-7 VSM Bundle Configuration Screen Parameter Descriptions


Bundle No. The bundle number. Valid Range is 1 to 127.


VPI The VPI of the VCC.

1dReconfigure(Admin Status)



Switch Name: Slot 11 SYS Bundle Configuration Table SW VersionDetail of Bundle Configuration Table entry 0

Bundle No. : 1230 VPI : 1 VCI : 1231 AAL Type : aal22 Max Tslots : 13 CDV (125 us) : 84 Tmr CU : 45 Part Fill/cell : 476 Conn Type : pvc7 Trap Configuration : no trap Operating Status : configured8 Admin Status : down9 Validity : valid

Select option:Add entry, Enter entry number to edit, Kill entry, Move entry,Summary, eXit



03Iss

VCI The VCI of the VCC. This will be the same as the Bundle No. for the VSM.

1d

NA

AAL Type The AAL type used for the bundle. The options are:AAL1 - (data or voice) For more information about AAL1 see

AAL1 on page 1-39 of the GDC Xedge Switch Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310.

AAL2 d - (voice) For more information about AAL2 see AAL2 on page 1-48 of the GDC Xedge Switch Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310.


Max Tslots Maximum number of Timeslots. The maximum number of timeslots that will be configured for the bundle. AAL2 only. This is used to calculate the PCR using the following formula: maximum timeslots x 200 cps = PCR (if a PCR is not specified in the VC parameters).1 to 120, 1d


CDV (125 us) Cell Delay Variation. Buffers Frames to account for ATM cell jitter in the network. Select number of 125msec increments, 1

to 128, 8d, add 47/number of timeslots, then roundup. Example: One Timeslot in a Bundle, with one millisecond CDV, 8 +47/1 = 55.


Tmr CU (Combined Use)

Maximum amount of time (msec) to hold ATM cell before padding and sending (AAL2 only).

0, 1 to 20, 4d


Part Fill/cell Specifies the number of user octets per cell for partial cell fill (AAL1 only). Not supported on VSM.

1 to 47, 47d


Conn Type The type of connection the VCC is (will be) configured as:

pvc d : Permanent Virtual Connectionspvc : Soft Permanent Virtual Connectionsvc : Switched Virtual Connection (Not Supported)For more information about Connection Types see Connection Types on page 3-2 of the GDC Xedge Switch Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310.


Trap Configuration State change results in traps sent to the management station.

no-trap d

state-changeFor more information about SNMP Traps see SNMP Traps on page 19-2 of the GDC Xedge Switch Diagnostics Guide, Part Number 032R500.


Table 14-7 VSM Bundle Configuration Screen Parameter Descriptions (Continued)





Operating Status The operating status of the bundle. The possible states are:

down d - Bundle entry exists in the MIB but configuration has not been implemented on the VSM.

configured - Bundle has a valid configuration and a VC exists to support the bundle.

inv-cfg - The bundle configuration is not valid.AALmismatch - AAL type of the bundle and one or more of

the timeslots do not match.inv-VPI - The VPI, configured for the bundle, and the VPI, of

the VC, do not match.bndl-novc - The bundle configuration is valid but no VC has

been configured to support the bundle.inv-maxtslot - The bundle has been assigned more timeslots

than allocated by the maximum timeslots number.inv-VPI-15 - The user is attempting to configure a bundle

which is associated with a VC which has a VPI value of 15. This is not supported.

logMCST root - The bundle is configured (see above) and is the root of a logical multicast tree on the VSM.

logMCST leaf - The bundle is configured (see above) and is a leaf of a logical multicast tree on the VSM.

NA, read only

Admin Status The administration status of the bundle. The options are:up - Set by the VSM software when the bundle has been

successfully configured.

down d - The VSM sets this status if there is an invalid bundle configuration. You can set this status if you want to keep the entry in the MIB but do not want to implement it in the VSM hardware. If the bundle is up and you set it to down, the bundle will be deconfigured.

reconfig - Set this status to implement the configuration for the bundle. You can make necessary changes to configure the bundle. When ready to implement the changes, change the status to reconfig. The VSM then changes this status to up or down depending on the outcome of the configuration validation.

Immediate

Validity Select invalid to delete this row.

valid d

invalid

Immediate

Table 14-7 VSM Bundle Configuration Screen Parameter Descriptions (Continued)




VSM Configuration Logical Multicast

03Iss

M

ee

s

Logical MulticastFor the circuit associated with the designated root bundle on the destination VSM, the SPVCConnection Type must be set to point-to-multipoint root in order to support Egress LogicalMulticast. SPVCs with other bundles on the same destination VSM are then configured aspoint-to-multipoint leafs.


2. From the Root Menu of the VSM Adaptation Controller select Manage configuration. TheMIB Display and Management screen for the VSM Adaptation Controller appears. SFigure 14-3 on page 14-8 to review this screen.

3. Select the SVC Configuration/Status Table option from the VSM’s MIB Display andManagement screen. See Figure 14-13.

Figure 14-13 SVC Configuration/Status Table screen, from VSM MIB screen

4. Select the SPVC Configuration/Status Table option from the SVC Configuration/Statuscreen.

If no SPVCs are configured, you must add them to set up the Connection Type. To Add,select Add, and enter an ID (1 - 750).

To view the information for an individual SPVC, select Extra Detail. Figure 14-14 shows theExtra Detail view of the SPVC Configuration/Status Table screen.


Switch Name: Slot 4S SVC Configuration/Status 512a3+I/Rev A-



VSM Configuration Logical Multicast

ame

Figure 14-14 SPVC Configuration/Status Table, from SVC Configuration/Status screen

5. Logical Multicast requires that the Connection Type of the first SPVC to the destination VSMis set to Point-to-Multipoint Root . Select the Connection Type option and choose the optionfor pt mpt root to configure the SPVC accordingly. For subsequent SPVCs to the sdestination VSM, select pt mpt leaf.

6. When done, exit out and save the configuration changes.


System Name: Slot 4S SPVC Configuration/Status Table SW VersionDetail of SPVC Configuration/Status Table entry 0

ID : 0 14 Source VPI : 1 Call ID : 1 15 Target VCI : 100 Source Link : 0 16 Target VPI : 101 Dest Address : 0020300 17 Timeout : 102 Pk Fd Rate(CPS): 400 Connect Time : 19203 Peak Frd Mode : clp01 discard 18 Num of Retries : 004 Pk Bd Rate(CPS): 400 Failures : 005 Peak Bwd Mode : clp01 discard 19 Alert Cfg : no trap06 Sd Fd Rate(CPS): 400 Cause and Diag : none07 Max Fd Burst Sz: 100 Type : active08 Sus Frd Mode : clp0 discard 20 Call State : call setup09 Sd Bd Rate(CPS): 400 Status : active10 Max Bd Burst Sz: 100 CauseDiag Code : 011 Sus Bwd Mode : clp0 discard 21 Connection Type: pt pt12 Service Categor: vbr rt13 Source VCI : 1Select option:Add entry, Enter entry number to edit, Kill entry, disPlay route,Summary, eXit


Switch Name: Slot 4S SPVC Configuration/Status Table SW Version

A - pt ptB - pt mpt rootC - pt mpt leafD - bidirect root

Connection Type: B pt mpt root


VSM Configuration Q.SIG Configuration (Optional Feature)

03Iss

Q.SIGof each

l) and Plan, a perll willf theccurch liken theare senthaviorycled

s), we

20 and

voicers over

tinue3 B-

ugh 23er is

g.

Q.SIG Configuration (Optional Feature)

Overview, Q.SIG Load Distribution

Q.SIG introduces an enhancement which improves the performance and robustness of thefeature. The Q.SIG feature now supports a method of load distribution at the destination end call on a per VPN (Virtual Private Network) basis.

With this enhancement, load distribution of both narrowband signaling (over the D-channevoice trunks (B-channels) is achieved. This is accomplished by alternating, within the VPNthe choice of the outgoing (destination) VSM physical link (PRI or Primary Rate Interface) oncall basis. This means that if there are two links (links 0 and 1) included in a VPN, the first cabe serviced over link0 of the destination VSM and the next call will be serviced over link1 odestination VSM, assuming the destination VSM is the same for each call. This will oregardless of the state of the first call to ensure that B-channel use is evenly distributed, muthe behavior of typical voice switches. The third call will be serviced over link0 once again onext available B-channel of the link0 PRI. In each case, the narrowband signaling messages over the appropriate D-channel, thus distributing the signaling message load as well. This bewill continue through the table of B-channels and return to the top of the list after all are cthrough, emulating a top-down fashion.

Example:

From the VPN Plan of a sample isdn.bin file in the source node (assuming DS1-4CS LIMhave:

Where the destination node ID = 120, the destination VSM desired resides in slot 3 of node 1the D-channel is timeslot 24 on each link.

• The 203 destination addresses will distribute their narrowband signaling and their channel use over links 0 through 2 in the manner described above. This distribution occua total of 56 B-channels.

• The 860 destination addresses will attempt to be serviced only over link 3, but will conusing the top-down fashion within the single link. This distribution occurs over a total of 2channels.

• The 914 destination addresses will attempt to be serviced only over B-channels 11 throon link 2. This distribution occurs over a total of 13 B-channels. Note the VPN numbunique to facilitate splitting the link2 PRI between two different addresses.

Important While performing this configuration procedure, do NOT save a .cfg file with live traffic runnin

Table 14-8 VPN Plan

VPN NBCPAVC

ProfileNode Slot

Link 0 Range

Link 1 Range

Link 2 Range

Link 3 Range

2 203* 1 120 3 1 - 23 1 - 23 1 - 10

2 860* 1 120 3 1 - 23

3 914* 1 120 3 11-23

Table 14-8



s) theno more

“Initiald forlevel

M

he

• In all cases, if all B-channels available to a specific address are in use (active connectionthe calling PBX will receive a release message with a cause explaining that there are nDS0’s available.

VSM Base Card Revision Requirements

The Q.SIG application requires a VSM base card which has been revised beyond the Revision” of the VSM, and you should verify that revised VSM slot controllers are employeyour Q.SIG application. To determine if you are using the revised VSM, identify the revision of your VSM slot controllers by performing the following procedure:



3. From the MIB Display and Management screen, select the VSM menu option and press theEnter key. The VSM screen appears, as shown in Figure 14-8.

4. From the VSM screen, select the Card Status Table menu option and press the Enter key. T“Card Status Table” screen is displayed, as seen in Figure 14-15.

Figure 14-15 Card Status Table Screen


Switch Name: Slot xx SYS Card Status Table SW VersionDetail of Card Status Table entry 0

Index : 0 Basecard Feature Description : New Hardware Feature ... HW SW Compatibility : compatible BIN File : present vsm.bin Revision : 51c10 Basecard Revision : First Revision DOC 1 type : type 48 channel DOC 1 Revision : 52 MIP DSP version DOC 2 type : type 48 channel DOC 2 Revision : 52 MIP DSP version LIM Type : ds1 quad signaling lim

Select option:Enter entry number to edit, eXit



03Iss

5. Refer to Table 14-9 for descriptions of the Card Status Table parameters. If the “BasecardRevision” field displays “First Revision” or “rev 2” , the slot controller is suitable for Q.SIGapplications. If the Basecard Revision field states “Initial Revision”, it does not supportQ.SIG.

6. Repeat this procedure to query all VSM slot controllers in the Q.SIG signal path.

Note If 8K CS-ACELP support is required, the “DOC 1 Revision” and “DOC 2 Revision” fields must display “52 MIP DSP version”.

Table 14-9 Card Status Table Screen Parameter Descriptions


Basecard Feature Description

The VSM basecard type.Initial ReleaseNew Hardware Feature...

NA, read only

HW SW Compatibility

This field reports if the required hardware/software is compatible. The possible reports are:waiting for bin (indicates the vsm.bin file is not loaded into flash)basecard not compatible with bin (indicates the vsm.bin file is

not compatible with this VSM controller basecard)basecard compatible with bin (indicates the vsm.bin file is

compatible with this VSM controller basecard)DOC1 not compatible with bin (indicates the vsm.bin file is not

compatible with DOC1)Both DOCs not compatible with bin (indicates the vsm.bin file

is not compatible with DOC1 and DOC2)DOC2 not compatible with bin (indicates the vsm.bin file is not

compatible with DOC2)compatible (indicates that the hardware and software are

compatible and loaded)

NA, read only

BIN File Indicates the presence of the vsm.bin file.bin-not-presentpresent

NA, read only

vsm.bin Revision The vsm.bin revision number NA, read only

Basecard Revision The card hardware feature revision.Initial-Revision (the initial revision does not support Q.SIG)First Revision (OK for Q.SIG)rev. 2 (OK for Q.SIG)

NA, read only

DOC1 type DOC1 type and revision number.unknown-doc typetype 48 channeltype 60 channeldoc not present

NA, read only

DOC1 Revision DOC1 hardware revision.Initial revision 52 MIP DSP version

NA, read only

DOC2 type DOC2 type and revision number.unknown-doc typetype 48 channeltype 60 channelDOC not present

NA, read only




s

Mto

SAP Configuration

The Signalling Protocol Type must be set to iisp31 for the slot corresponding to all NNI links awell as the VSM.

1. From the Root Menu of the Slot-0 Controller, establish a telnet session with the VSAdaptation Controller. The Root Menu of the VSM Adaptation Controller appears. Go Figure 14-5 on page 14-13 to review these steps.

2. From the MIB Display and Management screen, select the SVC Configuration/Statusmenu option and press the Enter key. The SVC Configuration/Status screen appears.

Figure 14-16 SVC Configuration/Status screen

3. Select the SVC Resource Table menu option and press the Enter key. The SVC ResourceTable screen appears, with Entry 0 at the top of the table.

DOC2 Revision DOC2 hardware revision.Initial revision 52 MIP DSP version

NA, read only

LIM Type The LIM detected for the VSM.invalid or no limds1 dual signaling LIMds1 quad signaling LIMe1 dual signaling LIMe1 quad signaling LIM

NA, read only

Table 14-9 Card Status Table Screen Parameter Descriptions (Continued)




Switch Name: Slot 4S SVC Configuration/Status SW Version




03Iss

.g., on

nused

4. Select Extra detail . The SVC Resource Table, Detail of SVC Resource Table entry 0screen appears, as shown in Figure 14-17.

5. Select the Signalling Protocol Type menu option and choose the menu option for iisp31 forthe slot corresponding to all NNI links as well as the VSM.

6. The SAP must now be reconfigured. Refer to Reconfigure starting on page 14-9 if using DS1DLIMs, or Reconfigure starting on page 14-14 if using E1 DLIMs with your VSM, for steps toreconfigure the card.

7. Set the resources on all slot controllers for line rate pertaining to the physical interface (ethe VSM, multiply the line rate by 4 to support the single ATM physical link).

8. Repeat these steps for each card in the shelf.

Figure 14-17 Detail of SVC Resource Table entry 0, including Signalling Protocol Type

Link Table Configuration (M, 60, 1)

For Q.SIG functionality, the Links must be configured and enabled as ISDN type. Leave ulinks disabled.


Switch Name: Slot xx SYS SVC Resource Table SW VersionDetail of SVC Resource Table entry 0

SAP : 0 Cur SAP Co: 0 27 Signalling: iisp3100 VPI/VCI Hi: low 12 Physical L: 0 28 Routing Pr: Xedge SVC VCI St: 0 13 VPCI/VPI M: off 29 Status : on SVC VCI En: 816 14 QoS Based : off01 SVC VPI St: 0 15 Restart Op: off02 SVC VPI En: 2 16 Dest E164 :03 SVP Start(: 5 17 Auto Sap O: no04 SVP End(Lo: 255 18 Sap Utiliz: 9505 SVC Max SA: 32000 19 CBR Bw Lim: 100 Available : 32000 20 VBR-RT Bw : 10006 Signalling: 5 21 VBR-NRT Bw: 10007 Signalling: 0 22 ABR Bw Lim: 10008 CDVT (uS) : 200 23 UBR Bw Lim: 10009 Interface : network 24 Ena Best E: off10 Policing : off 25 Pk Rate Li: 011 Max SAP Co: 200 26 UBR Reserv: 0Select option:Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row, Index search, Summary,eXit



(downuse the

is step AEM,

n the

M

s

Timeslot Table Configuration

Add timeslot entries with default parameters (except as noted) and leave them unconfiguredstate). This step can be performed using the Xedge craft port or the ProSphere AEM. To ProSphere AEM, refer to the ProSphere ATM Element Manager User Guide, P/N 032R720.

For clarification of the parameters in the Timeslot Configuration Table, refer to Configure theTimeslots on page 14-23 for a listing of all Timeslot parameter options.

Bundle Table Configuration

Add bundle entries with default parameters and leave them unconfigured (down state). Thcan be performed using the Xedge craft port or the ProSphere AEM. To use the ProSphererefer to the ProSphere ATM Element Manager User Guide, P/N 032R720.

SCC Configuration Table (M, 102, 0)

The following items must be configured appropriately for Q.SIG functionality, as described ifollowing steps.



3. From the MIB Display and Management screen, select the SCC Driver menu option and pressthe Enter key. The SCC Driver screen appears.

4. From the SCC Driver screen, select the SCC Configuration menu option. The SCCConfiguration screen appears. Select the Extra Detail option, which produces the screen aseen in Figure 14-18.

NoteNote Set the “Signal Type” to “none”. If desired settings for Fax/Modem Handling, Echo Cancellation, idle channel detection, companding type, TLP attenuation, and signal/data conditioning differ from the default values, set each of these items manually to the desired values.



03Iss

e

M

Figure 14-18 Extra Detail of SCC Configuration entry 0

5. Set the Protocol type to “hdlc”.

6. Set the Baud Rate to “baud rate 64K”.

7. Set the Signalling Timeslot number (enter “16” for E1 card types; for DS1 cards, choose thappropriate timeslot from the range of 1-24).

8. Save your configuration changes and exit out when done.

Activate SAP (M, 109, 1)

For Q.SIG functionality, you must configure the SAP Table as follows:



Switch Name: Slot 11 SYS SCC Configuration SW VersionDetail of SCC Configuration entry 0

SAP Id : 000 Protocol Type : hdlc01 Baud Rate : baudrate 64k02 Max Frm Len (bytes) : 27203 CRC : crc 16Bit04 Num Interfrm Flags : 105 Flag Share : no sharing06 Tx Flags/Idle : tx flags07 Internal Loopback : disable08 Fisu Filtering : disable09 DatCfm Threshold : 25510 Signalling TimeSlot : 16







Switch Name: Slot 4 SYS MIB Display and Management 511+I/Rev A-

00 system 110 ISDN IWF01 interfaces02 at03 ip04 icmp05 tcp06 udp07 snmp08 System Information12 Static Routing19 DSP DLIMs24 SVC Configuration/Status60 VSM101 QAAL2102 SCC Driver108 ISDN Layer2109 ISDN Layer3Select option:Enter group number, save As, Load, sTatus, eXit,Last save file is `/$/config.cfg'.



03Iss

3. From the MIB Display and Management screen, select the ISDN Layer3 option to access theSAP Configuration Table option.

Figure 14-20 ISDN Layer3 screen, showing SAP Configuration Table option

4. Select the SAP Configuration Table menu option and press the Enter key. The SAPConfiguration Table screen appears.


Switch Name: Slot 4 SYS ISDN Layer3 511+I/Rev A-

0 Timers Table1 SAP Configuration Table2 Statistics Table




ith

Figure 14-21 Extra Detail of SAP Configuration Table, entry 0

Q.931 Glare Priority

5. Set the isdnq931sapGlrPriority to “network”.

Activate SAP

6. For all links that will be carrying Q.SIG traffic, set Activate SAP to “Yes”. Do not change anynon-Q.SIG links.

7. Save your configuration changes and exit out when done.

ISDN Link Table (M, 110, 2)

1. In the ISDN IWF’s Isdn Link Table, ensure the Min. Route Digits is set to what you want theminimum-number-of-digits-to-route-on to be, for each desired Q.SIG link.

Back-up Your .cfg Files

1. Make a back-up copy of your .cfg files.

Important It is important that you make a back-up copy of your .cfg files. Mistakenly saving a .cfg file wlive traffic running will cause the file to become incorrectly configured. If this is done with noback-up available, a complete reconfiguration would be required.


Switch Name: Slot 11 SYS SAP Configuration Table SW VersionDetail of SAP Configuration Table entry 0

SAP Id : 0 Variant : qsig0 isdnQ931SapGlrPriority : network1 Activate SAP : no

Select option:Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row, Index search, Kill entry,


VSM Configuration AEM ISDN Narrowband / Broadband Mapping Table Generation

03Iss

rm

e, SCRximum

node

ssign

File

,

.

slots

AEM ISDN Narrowband / Broadband Mapping Table GenerationUsing the AEM ISDN File Generation Tool, select the Interface Type (E1 or DS1) and perfothe following procedures.

VC Profiles

1. Assign index numbers and give each profile a name for reference; assign the PCR valuvalue, MBS value, QoS category, compression state, silence detection state and manumber of timeslots for the bundle.

VPN Plan

1. For each NBCPA within each VPN, assign a VC Profile number, the VSM destination and slot, and per link DS0 ranges. (eg. range for an E1: “1-15, 17-31”.)

DS0/VPN Mapping

1. For each desired DS0 within each Q.SIG link, remove the “Not in use” check mark and aa VPN number. Leave non-Q.SIG links set to “Not in use”.

Loading the isdn.bin Software File

This section describes loading the ISDN software file (isdn.bin), generated by the AEM ISDNGeneration Tool, onto a VSM.

1. Using the File Generation Tool, click on “TFTP —> To Switch”; enter the VSM’s IP addressclick “OK” and wait for “Complete” to be displayed.

2. Load the isdn.bin files on the appropriate VSM slot controllers using M, 110, 1.

NoteNote For more detail on the ProSphere ATM Element Manager (AEM) refer to the VSM ISDN Configuration chapter in the ProSphere ATM Element Manager User Guide, P/N 032R720

NoteNote Ensure that the PCR/SCR values are the correct size to accommodate the number of time(Max T/S Value) intended for the profile.

NoteNote For information on software installation, refer to the GDC Xedge Switch System Software Release Notes, P/N 032R901.


VSM Configuration AEM ISDN Narrowband / Broadband Mapping Table Generation


03Iss

ptation theberumber

2

-3

6

Chapter 15: VE ConfigurationChapter Overview

This section describes how to configure and manage video interfaces using the VE AdaController and its associated LIM. For an overview of the VE Adaptation Controller (andMPG2V LIM) see Chapter 12, Video Applications of the Applications Overview, Part Num032R300. For status information see Chapter 12, VE Status of the Diagnostics Guide, Part N032R500. Topics in this chapter include:


Required VE Configuration............................................................................................15-2

Optional Configuration...................................................................................................15-2

Define the LIM..................................................................................................................... 15

Configure the CDV.............................................................................................................. 15-

MPG2V LIM (VIP-4) Configuration................................................................................... 15-8

MPEG System Information Group.................................................................................15-9

MPEG Physical Interfaces Group................................................................................15-13

MPEG Codec Function Ctrls Group.............................................................................15-20

MPG2V Audio and Video Parameter Restrictions.......................................................15-32

Network Bandwidth and Audio/Video Delays.............................................................15-32

Loading MPG2V LIM Software........................................................................................ 15-33

Loading Software from the VE Adaptation Controller................................................15-33

Loading Software from the Front Panel Management Port..........................................15-34


VE Configuration Configuration Summary

GDCtwork

nd the

areM for

ional

of the

Configuration SummaryTo configure the VE Adaptation Controller you can use the menu system within the VE or theProSphere Network Management System. For information on the GDC ProSphere NeManagement System, refer to the GDC ProSphere User Guide. For the instructions that follow, itis assumed that you are connected to the GDC Xedge switch via a VT-100 terminal amanagement port.

There is one required step to configuring the VE Adaptation Controller. Additionally thereoptional configuration steps you can use to customize the VE Adaptation Controller and LIyour setup.

Required VE Configuration

1. Define the LIM (in the Slot-0 Physical Layout)

Once you have completed this procedure, you can proceed to Chapter 16: Bandwidth Allocationand Reservation, and Chapter 17: Configuring Connections to configure PVCs and SPVCsconnections. You can also customize your configuration by performing any of the optconfigurations.

Optional Configuration

If you are not using the standard VE configuration default settings you can perform any following optional configurations:

1. You can configure the Maximum CDV and the CDV Tolerance as described in Configure theCDV on page 15-6.

2. You can configure the LIM as described in MPG2V LIM (VIP-4) Configuration on page 15-8.

3. You can load LIM software upgrades on the MPG2V as described in Loading MPG2V LIMSoftware on page 15-33. These procedures describe:

• Loading the software from the VE Adaptation Controller

• Loading the software from the Management Port


VE Configuration Define the LIM

03Iss

ptationmust

is.

lerns. If canctions

Define the LIMThe Slot-0 Controller sends a health check signal that detects the presence of the VE AdaController in the installed slot. Before you can configure the VE Adaptation Controller, you select a DLIM type for it in the Slot-0 Physical Layout.




4. Select Goto row and enter the number of the slot in which the VE Adaptation Controllerinstalled (for example, if the VE is in slot 6, select Goto row, type 6, then press the Enter key)

5. Select Extra detail . The Physical Layout, Detail of Physical Layout entry “X” appears asshown in Figure 15-1. The screen parameters are described in Physical Layout ScreenParameter Definitions on page 15-4.


7. From the list of DLIMs displayed, select M - mpg2v for the MPG2V LIM.



10. Select eXit to return to the Root Menu. This completes the standard VE Adaptation Controlconfiguration. You are now ready allocate bandwidth and to build your virtual connectioyour setup is different than the default configuration provided with the VE and LIM, youcustomize the configuration according to the procedures provided in the appropriate seof this chapter.

11. If you are ready to build your connections, proceed to Chapter 16: Bandwidth Allocationand Reservation for allocating resources, and Chapter 17: Configuring Connections, forconfiguring PVC and/or SPVCs. If you want to configure your CDV, proceed to Configure the CDV on page 15-6.To configure an MPG2V LIM, proceed to MPG2V LIM (VIP-4) Configuration on page 15-8.



IMs

Figure 15-1 Extra Detail Screen of Physical Layout (for VE Entry)

Physical Layout Screen Parameter Definitions


Table 15-1 Physical Layout Screen Definitions




Immediate

Type When the Slot Controller has been installed, the application code has booted and is running, and the config update has been passed to the Slot-0 Controller, the Type field identifies the type of Slot Controller installed in the slot. In this case, the Slot Controller is recognized as a type ve.

NA, read only

DLIM Type Enables you to specify the LIM type that is installed from a list of possible LIMs. For the VE Adaptation Controller, the supported LIMs are:a - mpg2vS - jpegEnter the alpha character (case sensitive) for the LIM type installed.

Immediate

Version Indicates the version of application software running on the VE Adaptation Controller.

NA, read only



Switch Name: Slot 0 SYS Physical Layout SW VersionDetail of Physical Layout entry 3

Slot No : 3 DOC Ser # : 08209900710 Name : Slot 03 DOC HW Ver : 1.4B Type : ve Slot MAC Addres: 8a8a8a8a8a8a1 DLIM Type : mpg2v Last State Chan: 03 May 2000 14:50:53 Version : 51c9 Lst Chngd Link : link 0 State : active Lst Previous St: down2 Reset Slot : no3 Required State : normal Changed State : yes4 Associated Slot: 0 slot0PhyLink0St: up slot0PhyLink1St: stop slot0PhyLink2St: stop slot0PhyLink3St: stop Slot Ser # : 0820990071 Slot HW Ver : 8.0HSelect option:Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row, Index search, Summary,Up, eXit



03Iss

State Indicates the current state of the Slot Controller. Possible states are:absent : Indicates the slot may be empty or the Slot Controller has lost communications.active : Indicates the full feature software has been loaded and is running.bootmode : Indicates the full feature software has not been loaded; the software may not be present or the rotary switch may be set to bootmode.

NA, read only

Reset Slot Enables you to reset the slot. This is a warm restart of the slot. It is necessary when certain configuration changes are made to the slot such as a change in its IP address. The options are:yes : Type y to reset the slot.N - nod: Type n to exit this option without resetting the slot.

Immediate

Required State Enables you to set the required state of the slot. The options are:


Immediate


NA, read only


slot0PhyLink0St Indicates the current status of link 0. The possible states are:up : the Slot Controller and the LIM have been installed, the LIM has been selected and recognized, and line coding is passing,down : may indicate an incomplete installation, selection of the wrong LIM, or line coding is not passing,stop : indicates that the port is disabled.

NA

slot0PhyLink1St Indicates the current status of physical link 1. The possible states are the same as slot0PhyLink0St.

NA, read only

slot0PhyLink2St Will always indicate stop since there is no physical link 2 in this configuration.

NA

slot0PhyLink3St Will always indicate stop since there is no physical link 3 in this configuration.

NA


NA, read only


NA, read only


NA, read only


NA, read only


Immediate

Table 15-1 Physical Layout Screen Definitions (Continued)




VE Configuration Configure the CDV

tion CDV

VE

Configure the CDV

You can change the CDV (Cell Delay Variation) configuration through the VE ConfiguraTable. You can change the CDV Tolerance and the Max CDV. You can find a explanation ofin the Traffic Management chapter of the GDC Xedge Switch Technical Reference Manual, PartNumber 032R310.

Use the following procedure to access the CDV configuration parameters:

1. From the Root Menu of the Slot-0 Controller, establish a telnet session with the Adaptation Controller. The Root Menu of the VE Adaptation Controller appears.

2. From the Root Menu of the VE Adaptation Controller, select Manage configuration. TheMIB Display and Management screen appears.

3. Select the VE menu option and press the Enter key. The VE screen appears.

4. Select the VE Configuration Table menu option and press the Enter key. The VE Configuration Table screen appears.

5. Select Extra detail. The VE Configuration Table, Detail of VE Configuration Table entry0 screen appears as shown in Figure 15-2. The screen parameters are described in VEConfiguration Table Configuration Parameter Definitions on page 15-7.

6. If you want to change the CDV tolerance, select CDV Tolerance and enter the desired CDVtolerance value.

7. If you want to change the maximum CDV value, select Max CDV and enter the desiredmaximum CDV value.

8. Select Enable then select Restart.

9. Select Down to transition to the Detail of VE Configuration Table entry 1.

10. If you want to change the CDV tolerance, select CDV Tolerance and enter the desired CDVtolerance value.

11. If you want to change the maximum CDV value, select Max CDV and enter the desiredmaximum CDV value.

12. Select Enable then select Restart.


14. Select Save. This completes the VE CDV configuration.

15. If you are ready to build your connections, proceed to Chapter 16: Bandwidth Allocationand Reservation for allocating resources, and Chapter 17: Configuring Connections, forconfiguring PVC and/or SPVCs. To configure an MPG2V LIM, proceed to MPG2V LIM (VIP-4) Configuration on page 15-8.


VE Configuration Configure the CDV

03Iss

u tofined in areumber

Figure 15-2 Extra Detail Screen of VE Configuration Table

VE Configuration Table Configuration Parameter Definitions

The VE Configuration Table screen contains two selectable parameters that enable yoconfigure the CDV settings (and one to disable/enable the link). These parameters are deTable 15-2. The default values are indicated by d. The remaining parameters (status parameters)described in the VE Status chapter of the GDC Xedge Switch Diagnostics Guide, Part N032R500.

Table 15-2 VE Configuration Table Configuration Parameter Definitions


Enable Sets/indicates the link as being enabled. The options are:

A - yesd

B - noC - restart

CDV Tolerance Indicates/enables the setting of the CDV Tolerance in the

range [1-31]: 31d.Setting this parameter may require experimentation. A low setting is desirable to minimize the delay imposed by buffering, but cells are dropped when variation on the link underflows.

Enable, Restart

Max CDV Indicates/enables the setting of the Max CDV in the

range [1-62]: 62 d.Specifies the maximum buffer overflow which triggers an auto restart of the circuit emulation link. This results in AAL1 resynchronization and is reported in the DV2VE status MIB.

Enable, Restart

Table 15-2


Switch Name: Slot xx SYS VE Configuration Table SW VersionDetail of VE Configuration Table entry 0

Link : 00 Enable : yes Clock Mode : video Priority : high PVC Valid : no Dest Slot : 0 Dest Link : link0 Dest VPI : 0 Dest VCI : 01 CDV Tolerance : 312 Max CDV : 62 Multicast Link : no PVC Type(s) : inactive



VE Configuration MPG2V LIM (VIP-4) Configuration

andsis. Itircuit

rded

hereystem,

VE

E

MPG2V LIM (VIP-4) Configuration

The MPG2V LIM implements the ISO MPEG 2 standard for the coding of moving picturesassociated audio when coupled with a VE Adaptation Controller in the GDC Xedge chasenables the transport of multiplexed video, audio and data over a single ATM virtual cconnection using constant bit rate AAL 1 circuit emulation.

Management of the MPG2V LIM is supported via SNMP requests to the LIM that are forwaby the VE Adaptation Controller.

To configure the MPG2V LIM, use the menu system within the Slot Controller or the ProSpNetwork Management System. For information on the ProSphere Network Management Srefer to the GDC ProSphere Users Guide.

Configuring the MPG2V LIM may involve all of the following selectable options in the MIBDisplay and Management screen. Each is explained in detail.


2. From the Root Menu of the VE Adaptation Controller, select Manage configuration. TheMIB Display and Management screen appears as shown in Figure 15-3.


Note Always select B - save on lim after changing a non-default setting for the LIM. The save on lim command is an option when you select the MIB Config Req menu option in the MPEG System Information Group screen. Also save any non-default settings used when configuring the VAdaptation Controller.


Switch Name: Slot xx SYS MIB Display and Management SW Version

00 system01 interfaces02 Address Translation03 ip04 icmp05 tcp06 udp07 snmp08 System Information10 Trace Toggles12 Static Routing24 SVC Configuration/Status26 VE47 MPEG System Information Group48 MPEG Physical Interfaces Group49 MPEG System Multiplex Ctrls Group50 MPEG Codec Function Ctrls GroupSelect option:Enter group number, save As, Load, sTatus, eXit,Last save file is `/$/config.cfg'.



03Iss

the

umber

be

The MIB Display and Management menu screen presents four selectable options specific toVE Adaptation Controller and the MPG2V LIM:

• MPEG System Information Group

• MPEG Physical Interfaces Group

• MPEG System Multiplex Ctrls Group (described in the VE Status chapter of the GDC Xedge Switch Diagnostics Guide, Part N032R500)

• MPEG Codec Function Ctrls Group

MPEG System Information Group

1. From the MIB Display and Management screen, select the MPEG System InformationGroup option and press the Enter key. The MPEG System Information Group screenappears as shown in Figure 15-4. The screen parameters are described in MPEG SystemInformation Group Screen Parameters on page 15-10.

2. At the Select option: prompt, enter the item number or numbers of those options toconfigured and press the Enter key after each one.

Figure 15-4 MPEG System Information Group Screen


Switch Name: Slot xx SYS MPEG System Information Group SW Version

LIM Type: mpg2v Application S/W Revision: 1_10 Boot S/W Revision: E- Hardware Revision: 030 LIM Action Request: none LIM state: working LIM Fault LED: off LIM Fault Class: none LIM Fault Qualifier: 01 LIM Custom Profiles: none2 MIB Config Req: none3 SCM Detail Config/Status Table




erspter of

MPEG System Information Group Screen Parameters

The MPEG System Information Group screen permits you to view and set the parametassociated with the MPG2V LIM. The status parameters are described in the VE Status chathe GDC Xedge Switch Diagnostics Guide, Part Number 032R500. Table 15-3 lists theconfiguration parameters and their definitions. Default values are indicated by d.

Table 15-3 MPEG System Information Group Parameter Definitions


LIM Action Request Enables you to set the LIM for maintenance, testing, and reset. Results of selections made in this field are reported in LIM State. LIM Action Request momentarily displays the selected action. When the action is accepted, LIM Action Request returns none. LIM Action Request choices are:A - none d: leaves the LIM in its current stateB - reset : sends a signal to the LIM to reboot and reload the application code; reset must be invoked to change the LIM State from mtce to working; reset is not available when the LIM is running boot codeC - mtce : forces the LIM into maintenance mode in which the LIM can be diagnosed by selecting test.Note: mtce must be selected before test can be

invoked; otherwise, test is ignored.D - test : forces the LIM to run hardware diagnostics on itself and to report any faults via the LIM state; test runs for approximately 10 secondsE - exit mtce : returns the LIM to the state before the mtce action was invoked.

Immediate*(*exit mtce has a

delay)

LIM Custom Profiles Chooses between a series of custom profiles for the MPEG-2 decoder.Profile 1 : increases video frequency response by enabling a comb-filter.

Immediate(Requires Save for

permanent change)

MIB Config Req Forces actions to occur on the LIM. Choices are:

A - none d

B - save on lim: save the LIM’s MIB configuration file on the LIM’s FLASH, so that when the LIM restarts, the configuration file is read first.C - load from lim: restores the current LIM configuration from the MIB on the LIM’s FLASH. This action is immediate.

Immediate

SCM Detail Config/Status Table

Choosing this brings up the Slot Controller Management Detail Configuration / Status table.

NA

Table 15-3



03Iss

e VE

n

be

Slot Controller Management

The SCM Detail Config/Status Table enables you to load the MPG2V software from thAdaptation Controller to the LIM.

1. Select SCM Detail Config/Status Table from the MPEG System Information Groupscreen to configure the Slot Controller Management (SCM) parameters. The SCM DetailConfig/Status Table screen appears.

2. Select Extra detail. The SCM Detail Config/Status Table screen appears as shown in Figure15-5. The screen parameters are described in SCM Detail Config/Status Table ScreeParameters on page 15-12.



Figure 15-5 SCM Detail Config/Status Table Screen


Switch Name: Slot xx SYS SCM Detail Config/Status Table SW VersionDetail of SCM Detail Config/Status Table entry 0

Port Idx : 0 Link Status : up Bytes Rx : 54078323 Bytes Tx : 54078323 MIB Tx State : idle MIB Rx State : idle0 File Xfer Req : none File Xfer State : idle File Xfer Count : 0 File Xfer Abort Reason : none1 Reset Stats : no




lot

nosticss.

SCM Detail Config/Status Table Screen Parameters

The SCM Detail Config/Status Table screen enables you to load the LIM software from the SController and to reset the statistics counters on the SCM Detail Config/Status Table screen. Thestatus parameters are defined in the VE Status chapter of the GDC Xedge Switch DiagGuide, Part Number 032R500. Table 15-4 lists the configuration parameters and their definitionDefault values are indicated by d.

Table 15-4 SCM Detail Config/Status Table Parameter Definitions


File Xfer Req Enables the file transfer of the mpg2v.cod file from the VE Adaptation Controller to the MPG2V LIM. The possible values are:A - none d: no transferB - abort xfer : aborts a current transferC - mpg2v cod : Selecting option C starts the file transfer process of the mpg2v.cod file from the VE to the MPG2V LIM.

Immediate

File Xfer State Indicates the file to be transferred, then indicates the current state of the file transfer request as:idle - no file transfer in progressstart - file transfer in progresscontinue - file transfer in progressend - successful file transferabort - user requested file stop transferack - file transfer in progresserror - file transfer failed

NA, read only

File Xfer Count Displays a running count of bytes transferred from the Slot Controller to the LIM. This is helpful in monitoring the progress of the file transfer.

NA, read only

File Xfer Abort Reason Displays the reason for the last File Transfer problem. May be:nonememory error : problem with Slot Controller RAM memoryfileio error : could not find the file on the LIM FLASHtimeout : the transfer timed out waiting for the LIM to responduser request : an abort request was issued by the userinvalid cksm : an invalid check sum was determined on the Slot Controllerbad state : an internal problem to the File Transfer protocollim memory error : problem with the Slot Controller RAM memorylim fileio error : could not find the file on the LIM FLASHlim invalid cksm : an invalid check sum was determined on the LIMlim bad state : an internal problem to the File Transfer

NA, read only

Reset Stats Enables the statistics counters to be reset: (Y/N): Nd. Immediate

Table 15-4



03Iss

VE

ct

e

iguring

MPEG Physical Interfaces Group


2. From the Root Menu of the VE Adaptation Controller, select Manage configuration. TheMIB Display and Management screen appears as shown in Figure 15-3.

3. From the MIB Display and Management screen of the VE Adaptation Controller, seleMPEG Physical Interfaces Group option and press the Enter key. The MPEG PhysicalInterfaces Group screen appears as shown in Figure 15-6. The screen parameters ardescribed in MPEG Physical Interfaces Group Screen Parameters on page 15-13.

Figure 15-6 MPEG Physical Interfaces Group Screen

MPEG Physical Interfaces Group Screen Parameters

The various functional components of the ports can be accessed for monitoring and conffrom the MPEG Physical Interfaces Group screen. The screen parameters are defined in Table15-5.

Table 15-5 MPEG Physical Interfaces Group Parameter Definitions


Video Port Interfaces Table Sets and displays video port parameters.

Audio Port Interfaces Table Sets and displays audio port parameters.

Mgmt & User Data Ports Intfs Table Sets and displays management and user data port parameters

Chnl Interfaces Table Sets and displays channel parameters. This parameter is reserved for future use with the exception of Chnl Loopback as described in Table 12-23 of the Diagnostics Guide, Part Number 032R500.

Table 15-5


Switch Name: Slot xx SYS MPEG Physical Interfaces Group SW Version

0 Video Port Interfaces Table1 Audio Port Interfaces Table2 Mgmt & User Data Ports Intfs Table3 Chnl Interfaces Table




ct

be

be

rs on

Video Port Interfaces Table

1. From the MIB Display and Management screen of the VE Adaptation Controller, seleMPEG Physical Interfaces Group option and press the Enter key. The MPEG PhysicalInterfaces Group screen appears as shown in Figure 15-6.

2. Select the Video Port Interfaces Table option and press the Enter key. The Video PortInterfaces Table screen appears.

3. Select Extra detail. The Video Port Interfaces Table, Detail of Video Port Interfaces Tableentry 0 screen appears as shown in Figure 15-7. The screen parameters are described in VideoPort Interfaces Table Screen Parameters on page 15-14.


5. If applicable, select Down to transition to the Detail of Video Port Interfaces Table entry 1screen or proceed to step 7.


7. Select eXit to return to the MPEG Physical Interfaces Group screen.

Figure 15-7 Detail of Video Port Interfaces Table

Video Port Interfaces Table Screen Parameters

The Video Port Interfaces Table screen enables you to view and set the video port parametethe MPG2V LIM. The Video Loopback parameter is described in the VE Status chapter of the GDCXedge Switch Diagnostics Guide, Part Number 032R500. Table 15-6 lists the configurationparameters and their definitions.


Switch Name: Slot xx SYS Video Port Interfaces Table SW VersionDetail of Video Port Interfaces Table entry 0

Port Idx : 00 Inp Standard : ntsc1 Inp Select : inp composite 0 Inp Present : yes2 Out Standard : ntsc3 Out Mute : off4 Out Timing Src : through5 Vid Loopback : none




03Iss

Default values are indicated by d. An asterisk (*) indicates the item is for future use.

Table 15-6 Video Port Interfaces Table Parameter Definitions


Port Idx Displays the index of the Video Port that is currently selected. The default value is 0.

NA, read only

Inp Standard Enables you to select the input video standard. The choices are:A - ntsc d B - pal : (PAL B, G, and I @5.0 MHz)C - pal m *D - pal n *E - secam*F - auto *Note: Both the local and remote codecs must have their

standards set to the same choice for a single video stream. An asterisk (*) indicates future use.

Immediate with delay

(Requires Save for permanent

change)

Inp Select Enables you to select one of the available input connectors. The choices are:A - inp composite 0 d: Link 0 composite inputB - inp S video 0 : Link 0 S-Video inputC - inp SDI 0 : Link 0 Serial Digital Interface*D - inp composite 1 : Link 1 composite input*E - inp SDI 1 : Link 1 Serial Digital Interface*



change)

Inp Present Indicates the presence of analog video input to the front panel connector. May indicate yes or no .When no input is present and a call is active, the LIM displays a flat blue screen.

NA, read only

Out Standard Enables you to select the output video standard. The options are:A - ntsc d

B - palC - pal m *D - pal n *E - secam*F - auto *Note: Both the local and remote codecs must have their

standards set to the same choice for a single video stream. An asterisk (*) indicates future use.



change)

Out Mute The options are:A - off d

B - on : the video output is muted, displaying the color bar test pattern; the call remains active and the video state remains working.



change)

Out Timing Src Enables you to set the timing source for the video output. The choices are:

A - through d: the video output timing is locked to the source end of the signal.B - free : the video output timing is derived from an internal, free-running oscillator. This is a fall-back state only.C - genlock : the video output timing is locked to the video signal received at the input.*

Table 15-6



ct

in

be

be

Audio Port Interfaces Table


2. Select the Audio Port Interfaces Table option and press the Enter key. The Audio PortInterfaces Table screen appears.

3. Select Extra detail. The Audio Port Interfaces Table, Detail of Audio Port InterfacesTable entry 0 screen appears as shown in Figure 15-8. The screen parameters are describedAudio Port Interfaces Table Screen Parameters on page 15-17.


5. If applicable, select Down to transition to the Detail of Audio Port Interfaces Table entry 1.The Detail of Audio Port Interfaces Table entry 1 screen appears.


7. Select eXit to return to the MPEG Physical Interfaces Group screen.

Figure 15-8 Detail of Audio Port Interfaces Table


Switch Name: Slot xx SYS Audio Port Interfaces Table New EventDetail of Audio Port Interfaces Table entry 0

Port Idx : 00 Inp Mute : off1 Inp Sample Rate : khz 482 Inp Chnls : dual3 Out Mute : off4 Out Volume : 2555 Aud Loopback : none




03Iss

s on

Audio Port Interfaces Table Screen Parameters

The Audio Port Interfaces Table screen permits you to view and set the audio port parameterthe MPG2V LIM. The Audio Loopback parameter is described in the VE Status chapter of the GDCXedge Switch Diagnostics Guide, Part Number 032R500. Table 15-7 lists the configurationparameters and their definitions. Default values are indicated byd.

Table 15-7 Audio Port Interfaces Table Definitions


Port Idx Displays the index of the Audio Port that is currently selected. NA, read only

Inp Mute Enables/indicates the setting of audio muting towards the remote end. Inp Mute takes the input attached to the LIM and mutes it so that the audio is not transmitted to the Network. Select either:

A - off d

B - on . Note: Select ON when toggling into and out of PCM audio mode, or when changing sampling rates in PCM audio mode. Reason: Loud audio transients are propagated when performing these operations.



change)

Inp Sample Rate Enables/indicates the setting of the audio sampling rate. Choices are:A - khz 32B - khz 44 1 (reserved for future use)C - khz 48d



change)

Inp Chnls Enables/indicates the selected input source signal. The choices areA - mono : one channel, monophonicB - dual d: two channel, stereo



change)

Out Mute Enabling this setting mutes the audio to the external speakers/headphones. The options are:A - off d

B - onNote: Select on when toggling into and out of PCM audio mode, or when changing sampling rates in PCM audio mode. Reason: Loud audio transients are propagated when performing these operations.



change)

Out Volume Enables/indicates the setting of output gain in the range [0 - 255d]. Note: This is a non-linear scale.



change)

Table 15-7



ct

ort

on

s the

s the

Mgmt & User Data Ports Intfs Table


2. Select the Mgmt & User Data Ports Intfs Table and press the Enter key. The data for PIndex 0 (for ‘mgmt’) is displayed at the top of the table.

3. Select Extra detail . The Mgmt & User Data Ports Intfs Table, Detail of Mgmt & UserData Port Intfs Table entry “X” screen appears as shown in Figure 15-9. The screenparameters are described in Mgmt & User Data Ports Intfs Table Screen Parameterspage 15-19.

4. At the Select option: prompt, enter the item number or numbers to be configured and presEnter key after each one.

5. Select Down to transition to the Detail of Mgmt & User Data Ports Intfs Table entry 1. TheDetail of Mgmt & User Data Ports Intfs Table entry 1 screen appears.


7. Select eXit to return to the MPEG Physical Interfaces Group Table screen.

Figure 15-9 Detail of Mgmt & User Data Port Intfs Table

Note The data Port Idx parameter is not supported in this release.


Switch Name: Slot xx SYS Mgmt & User Data Ports Intfs Table SW VersionDetail of Mgmt & User Data Ports Intfs Table entry 0

Port Idx : 0 Port Descr : mgmt0 Protocol : async1 Speed : baud 384002 Flow Ctrl : hardware3 Loopback : none Port Status : up Bytes Rx : 0 Bytes Tx : 10922274 Reset Stats : no

Select option:Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row, Summary, eXit



03Iss

n

ir

Mgmt & User Data Ports Intfs Table Screen Parameters

The Mgmt & User Data Ports Intfs Table permits you to view and set the port configuratioparameters. The status parameters are defined in the VE Status chapter of the GDC Xedge SwitchDiagnostics Guide, Part Number 032R500. Table 15-8 lists the configuration parameters and thedefinitions. Default values are indicated by d.

Table 15-8 Mgmt & User Data Ports Intfs Table Definitions


Protocol Enables/indicates the setting of the protocol to run over the port. Currently, only serial async data is supported.

Speed Enables/indicates the selection of the port speed.Choices are:A - baud 2400B - baud 9600C - baud 19200

D - baud 38400 d

E - baud 57600 : not supported.Note: Ports support 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit.



change)

Flow Ctrl Enables you to select the flow control mode on the data port. The choices are:

A - none d

B - hardware : the flow control is handled within the hardware signalsC - software : the flow control is handled in-band (xon /xoff )



change)

Reset Stats Enables the statistics counters to be reset: (Y/N): Nd. Immediate

Table 15-8



iguringons

MPEG Codec Function Ctrls Group

1. From the VE MIB Display and Management screen, select the MPEG Codec FunctionCtrls Group option and press the Enter key. The MPEG Codec Function Ctrls Groupscreen appears as shown in Figure 15-10. The screen parameters are described in MPEGCodec Function Ctrls Group Screen Parameters on page 15-20.

Figure 15-10 MPEG Codec Function Ctrls Group Screen

MPEG Codec Function Ctrls Group Screen Parameters

The various functional components of the codecs can be accessed for monitoring and conffrom the MPEG Codec Function Ctrls Group screen. The screen parameters and their definitiare listed in Table 15-9.

Table 15-9 MPEG Codec Function Ctrls Group Definitions


Global Encoder Control Table Sets and displays global encoder parameters.

Global Decoder Control Table Sets and displays global decoder parameters.

Video Encoder Control Table Sets and displays video encoder parameters.

Video Decoder Control Table Sets and displays video decoder parameters.

Audio Encoder Control Table Sets and displays audio encoder parameters.

Audio Decoder Control Table Sets and displays audio decoder parameters.

Data Encoder & Decoder Control Table Sets and displays data encoder and decoder parameters.

Table 15-9


Switch Name: Slot xx SYS MPEG Codec Function Ctrls Group SW Version

0 Global Encode Controls Table1 Global Decode Controls Table2 Video Encode Controls Table3 Video Decode Controls Table4 Audio Encode Controls Table5 Audio Decode Controls Table6 Data Encode & Decode Controls Table




03Iss

in

be

Thenosticses

Global Encode Controls Table

1. Select the Global Encode Controls Table (from the MPEG Codec Function Ctrls Groupscreen) and press the Enter key. The Global Encode Controls Table screen appears.

2. Select Extra detail. The Global Encode Controls Table, Detail of Global Encode ControlsTable entry “X” appears as shown in Figure 15-11. The screen parameters are describedGlobal Encode Controls Table Screen Parameters on page 15-21.


4. Select eXit to return to the MPEG Codec Function Ctrls Group screen.

Figure 15-11 Detail of Global Encode Controls Table

Global Encode Controls Table Screen Parameters

The Global Encode Controls Table permits you to view and set the global encode parameters.status parameters are described in the VE Status chapter of the GDC Xedge Switch DiagGuide, Part Number 032R500. Table 15-10 lists the parameters and their definitions. Default valuare indicated by d.


Switch Name: Slot xx SYS Global Encode Controls Table SW VersionDetail of Global Encode Controls Table entry 0

Codec Idx : 00 Codec Action : none1 Codec Request : connect Codec state : working Fault Reason : 0




ed

s the

Global Decode Controls Table

1. Select the Global Decode Controls Table (from the MPEG Codec Function Ctrls Groupscreen) and press the Enter key. The Global Decode Controls Table screen appears.

2. Select Extra detail. The Global Decode Controls Table, Detail of Global Decoder ControlTable entry 0 screen appears as shown in Figure 15-12. The screen parameters are describin Global Decoder Control Table Screen Parameters on page 15-23.



Figure 15-12 Detail of Global Decoder Control Table

Table 15-10 Global Encode Controls Table Configuration Parameter Definitions


Codec Action Enables/indicates the resetting of the codec. The options are:

A - none d

B - reset

Immediate

Codec Request Enables/disables the transmission/reception of data between the codec and the VE Adaptation Controller. The options are:

A - connect d: normal encoding of video, audio and dataB - disconnect : stops the encoding process

Immediate

Table 15-10


Switch Name: Slot xx SYS Global Decode Controls Table SW VersionDetail of Global Decode Controls Table entry 0

Codec Idx : 00 Codec Action : none1 Codec Request : connect Codec state : working Fault Reason : 0




03Iss

ers.nosticss.

Global Decoder Control Table Screen Parameters

The Global Decoder Control Table permits you to view and set the global decoder parametThe status parameters are defined in the VE Status chapter of the GDC Xedge Switch DiagGuide, Part Number 032R500. Table 15-11 lists the configuration parameters and their definitionDefault values are indicated byd.

Table 15-11 Global Decoder Control Table Definitions


Codec Action Enables/indicates the resetting of the codec. The options are:

A - none d

B - reset

Immediate

Codec Request Enables/disables the transmission/reception of data between the codec and the VE Adaptation Controller. The options are:

A - connect d: normal encoding of video, audio and dataB - disconnect : stops the encoding process (video test pattern is displayed and audio is muted)

Immediate

Table 15-11



e

s the

Video Encode Controls Table

1. Select the Video Encode Controls Table option (from the MPEG Codec Function CtrlsGroup screen) and press the Enter key. The Video Encode Controls Table screen appears.

2. Select Extra detail. The Video Encode Controls Table, Detail of Video Encode ControlsTable entry “X” screen appears as shown in Figure 15-13. The screen parameters ardescribed in Video Encode Controls Table Screen Parameters on page 15-25.



Figure 15-13 Detail of Video Encoder Control Table


Switch Name: Slot xx SYS Video Encode Controls Table SW VersionDetail of Video Encode Controls Table entry 0

Codec Idx : 000 Algorithm : mpeg201 Profile : main02 Level : main03 Chroma Format : chroma4 2 004 Comp Mode : mode I05 GOP Size : 1506 Bitrate (Kbps) : 1500007 Window Size : size CCR60108 DC Precision : 1009 Error Vectors : off Encoder state : idle Frame Count : 0 Error Count : 010 Reset Stats : no




03Iss

ers.

ostics

Video Encode Controls Table Screen Parameters

The Video Encode Controls Table permits you to view and set the video encoder parametTable 15-12 lists the parameters and their definitions. Default values are indicated byd.

Refer to MPG2V Audio and Video Parameter Restrictions on page 15-32 for more information.

For more information see the Video Decode Controls Table on page 12-63 of the DiagnGuide, Part Number 032R500.

Table 15-12 Video Encode Controls Table Parameter Definitions


Codec Idx Displays the Index of the codec currently being reviewed. NA, read only

Algorithm Enables/indicates the setting of the MPEG encoding algorithm. The options are:A - mpeg1 (reserved for future use)

B - mpeg2 d

Profile Enables/indicates the setting of the profile level. The options are:A - simple : 4:2:0 sampling; I and P frames only; lower delay

B - main d: 4:2:0 sampling; I, P and B frames; medium delay

Level Enables/indicates the selection of one of three encoding resolutions:A - low : 352x240x29.97 (NTSC); 352x288X25 (PAL),

B - main d: 720x480x29.97 (NTSC); 720x576x25 (PAL),C - high : 1920x1080x29.97 (NTSC and PAL).*Note: An asterisk (*) indicates the item is reserved for future use.

Chroma Format Enables/indicates the selection of one of two sampling formats:A - chroma 4 2 0 d: chrominance is sub-sampled at a 2:1 ratio with respect to the luminance; the second chrominance component is passed along with the first to further reduce the required bandwidthB - chroma 4 2 2 : *Note: An asterisk (*) indicates the item is reserved for future use.

Comp Mode Enables/indicates the selection of the Frame Pattern format. The options are:A - mode I : I frame only; lowest delay; highest bandwidthB - mode IP d: I and P frames onlyC - mode IPB : I, P and B framesD - mode IBBP : I, P and B frames, where B frames are a 2:1 ratio with respect to the P frame; highest delay; lowest bandwidth.

Immediate with delay for session


change)

GOP Size Enables/indicates the setting of the number of frames

between two successive I frames in the range [1 - 127], 13d.



change)




Bitrate (kbps) Enables/indicates the setting of the Video Encoder output rate with a granularity of 100 kbps in the range [800 - 15000]

kbps, 10000d. (Main Level = 1500 - 15000 kbps, Low Level = 800 - 4000 kbps) Comp Mode I (CCIR 601 size) supports a bit rate range of 3000-15,000 kbps.Comp Mode I (Half CCIR 601 size) Bit rate range is 2000 - 15,000 kbps.Comp Mode IP , IPB, and IPPB support a bit rate range of 1500-15,000 kbps.Note: 800 through 1400kbps only supported by size SIF and Half CCIR 601.



change)

Compressed Picture Size

Enables/indicates the setting of the compressed picture size. The compressed picture size reflects the resolution of the output image.The options are:A - size CCR601d: 720x480 NTSC, 720 x 576 PAL resolutionB - size SIF : 352x240 NTSC, 352 x 288 PAL resolutionC - size Half CCR601 : 352x480 NTSC, 352 x 576 PAL resolution

DC Precision Enables/indicates the size of encoded DC coefficients in bits. The greater the size (in bits), the higher the precision. The

allowable range is [8 - 11] , 10d.



change)

Error Vectors Enables/indicates whether or not error concealment vectors are sent with the video stream. The options are:A - on

B - off d

Encoder state Displays the state of the Video Encoder. The possible values are:idle : the encoder is initialized, however encoding has not startedworking : the encoder is coding picturesfault : an error has occurred within the encoder.Note: See the Global Encoder Control Table, Fault Reason

for fault description.

NA, read only

Frame Count Displays a running count of the encoded video frames. NA, read only

Error Count Displays a running count of the errored video frames. NA, read only

Reset Stats Enables the Video Encoder Control Table statistics counters

to be reset: (Y/N): Nd.

Immediate

Table 15-12 Video Encode Controls Table Parameter Definitions (Continued)





03Iss

e

s the

ters.

Audio Encode Controls Table

1. Select the Audio Encode Controls Table option (from the MPEG Codec Function CtrlsGroup screen) and press the Enter key. The Audio Encode Controls Table screen appears.

2. Select Extra detail. The Audio Encode Controls Table, Detail of Audio Encode ControlsTable entry “X” screen appears as shown in Figure 15-14. The screen parameters ardescribed in Audio Encode Controls Table Screen Parameters on page 15-27.



Figure 15-14 Detail of Audio Encode Controls Table

Audio Encode Controls Table Screen Parameters

The Audio Encode Controls Table permits you to view and set the audio encoder parameTable 15-13 lists the parameters and their definitions. Default values are indicated by d.

Table 15-13 Audio Encode Controls Table Definitions


Codec Idx Displays the index of the Codec currently being reviewed. NA, read only

Echo Cancel Enables/indicates the setting of remote end echo cancellation. The options are:

A - off d

B - on .*Note: An asterisk (*) indicates the item is reserved for future use.



Switch Name: Slot XX SYS Audio Encode Controls Table SW VersionDetail of Audio Encode Controls Table entry 0

Codec Idx : 00 Echo Cancel : off1 Algorithm : layer 12 Num Chnls : dual3 Chnl Mode : stereo4 Subband Encoding : enc 85 Bitrate (Kbps) : 64 Error Count : 5 Encode state : idle6 Reset Stats : no




Algorithm Enables/indicates the selection of one of three encoding algorithms:

A - layer 1 d: MPEG1 Layer 1 compression. B - layer 2 : MPEG1 Layer 2 compression C - pcm : no compression Note: When pcm mode is desired, all encoder settings,

including sampling rate, must be matched end-to-end (This is not required in MPEG layer 1 or layer 2 modes.). Also, when going into or out of pcm audio mode, turn the input and output mute features ON at each end. Before changing the algorithm. change the algorithm at both ends, then unmute input and outputs.



change)

Num Chnls Enables/indicates the selection of the number of analog audio channels the input audio encoder is required to encode. The options are:A - mono : single channelB - dual d: two channels



change)

Chnl Mode Enables/indicates the selection of one of the audio encoding modes. The options are:A - mono : single audio channel. If you are using this mode you only need to feed the left channel (left channel input feeds outputs to both channels).

B - stereo d: two audio channels (left and right). Note: PCM audio mode supports stereo channel mode only . To ensure PCM stereo mode, select both stereo and dual options while in Layer 1 or 2 mode, before entering PCM mode.C - dual chnl : two independent mono channelsD - joint stereo : reduces the bitstream by exploiting redundancies between the left and right channels.



change)

Subband Encoding Enables/indicates the selection of one of the available audio subband encoding methods. Used with MPEG1 layer 1, and layer 2 modes. Not used in pcm mode, and only applicable to joint stereo channel mode. The options are:A - enc 4 : four sub-bands (lowest granularity)

B - enc 8d: eight sub-bandsC - enc 12 : twelve sub-bandsD - enc 16 : sixteen sub-bands (highest granularity).



change)

Bitrate (kbps) Enables/indicates the selection of the audio encoder bitrate. This field is read-only in pcm mode.Refer to MPG2V Audio and Video Parameter Restrictions on page 15-32 for more information.



change)

Error Count Displays a running error count of the audio encoder errors. NA, read only

Encode state Displays the status of the audio encoder. The modes are:idle : The encoder is initialized but not processing audio data.working : The encoder is processing audio data.fault : A problem has occurred with the encoder.

NA, read only

Reset Stats Enables the Audio Encoder Control Table statistics counters to

be reset: (Y/N): Nd.

Immediate

Table 15-13 Audio Encode Controls Table Definitions (Continued)





03Iss

e

s the

Audio Decoder Control Table

1. Select the Audio Decoder Control Table option (from the MPEG Codec Function CtrlsGroup screen) and press the Enter key. The Audio Decoder Control Table screen appears.

2. Select Extra detail. The Audio Decoder Control Table, Detail of Audio Decoder ControlTable entry “X” screen appears as shown in Figure 15-15. The screen parameters ardescribed in Audio Decoder Control Table Screen Parameters on page 15-30.



Figure 15-15 Detail of Audio Decoder Control Table


Switch Name: Slot XX SYS Audio Decode Controls Table SW VersionDetail of Audio Decode Controls Table entry 0

Codec Idx : 00 Sync Master : pts Decoder state : idle Rx Bitrate (Kbps) : 0 Error Count : 0 ReSync Count : 01 Reset Stats : no




er by

on

G2V

Audio Decoder Control Table Screen Parameters

The Audio Decoder Control Table permits the viewing and setting of the audio decodparameters. Table 15-14 lists the parameters and their definitions. Default values are indicatedd.

Data Encoder & Decoder Control Table

1. Select the Data Encoder & Decoder Control Table option (from the MPEG CodecFunction Ctrls Group screen) and press the Enter key. The Data Encoder & DecoderControl Table screen appears.

2. Select Extra detail . The Data Encoder & Decoder Control Table, Detail of Data Encoder& Decoder Control Table entry “X” screen appears as shown in Figure 15-16. The screenparameters are described in Data Encoder & Decoder Control Table Screen Parameterspage 15-31.

3. Select Data Chnl Req and press the Enter key.

4. Select A to disable data processing on the channel or B to enable data processing on thechannel.


6. Select eXit . Select Y when the system prompts you to save the new configuration.

This completes the process of configuring the VIP-4, the VE Adaptation Controller and the MPLIM. Detailed information concerning other aspects of the MPG2V LIM follow.

Table 15-14 Audio Decoder Control Table Definitions


On

Codec Idx Displays the index of the Audio Decoder currently being reviewed. NA, read only

Sync Master Enables/indicates the selection of a source for synchronizing the decoded audio. The options are:A- audio : uses the audio system time clock (future use)B - video : uses the video system time clock (future use)

C - pts d: uses the Presentation Time Stamp (interpreted as System Time Clock Sync). Changing this option causes the decoder to reset. D - none (future use)E - fixed : a fixed delay is introduced to the audio packets (this option is reserved for engineering/service use only).

Decoder state Displays the current state of the Audio Decoder. May be:idle : initialized, but not in a running stateworking : initialized and runningfault : fault state

NA, read only

Rx Bitrate (kbps) Displays a calculated estimate of the received bitrate. NA, read only

Error Count Displays a running count of the received errors. NA, read only

Resync Count Displays a running count of the audio resynchronization errors. NA, read only

Reset Stats Enables the Audio Decoder Control Table statistics counters to be

reset: (Y/N): Nd.

Immediate

Table 15-14



03Iss

d in by

Figure 15-16 Detail of Data Encoder & Decoder Control Table

Data Encoder & Decoder Control Table Screen Parameters

The Data Encoder & Decoder Control Table enables you to view and set the parameters listeTable 15-15. This table lists the parameters and their definitions. Default values are indicatedd.

Table 15-15 Data Encoder & Decoder Control Table Definitions


Codec Idx Displays the index of the Audio Decoder currently being reviewed.

NA, read only

Data Chnl Req Enables/disables/indicates data processing on the channel. The options are:

A - disable d

B - enable (not supported for initial release)

NA

Table 15-15


Switch Name: Slot xx SYSData Encode & Decode Controls Table SW VersionDetail of Data Encode & Decode Controls Table entry 0

Codec Idx : 00 Data Chnl Req : disable




2R901,

MPG2V Audio and Video Parameter Restrictions

Video Parameters

Audio Parameters

Network Bandwidth and Audio/Video Delays

Refer to the appropriate version of the GDC Xedge Switch Release Notes, Part Number 03for the Network Peak Cell Rate.

Table 15-16 MPEG2 Levels Verses Profiles

LevelProfile

Simple Main High

LowNA SIF max

4:2:0 (I, IP, IBP, IBBP)0.8-4 Mbps

NA

Main

CCIR-6014:2:0 (I, IP only)3-15 Mbps (Comp Mode I)1.5-15 Mbps (Comp Mode IP)

CCIR-601 max.4:2:0 (I, IP, IBP, IBBP)3-15 Mbps (Comp Mode I)1.5-15 Mbps (Comp Mode IP, IBP, IBBP)

NA

Half CCIR-6012-15 Mbps (Comp Mode I)SIF 0.8-15 Mbps

Half CCIR-601Resolution)2-15 Mbps (Comp Mode I)SIF 0.8-15 Mbps

NA

Table 15-16

Table 15-17 Compressed Picture Size

Parameter NTSC (29.97 Hz) PAL (25 Hz)

CCIR-601 704x480 704x576

Half CCIR-601 (Half Horizontal Resolution)

352x480 352x576

SIF 352x240 352x288

Table 15-17

Table 15-18 Audio Encoding and Allowed Bit-Rates

Encoding Allowed Bit Rates

MPEG Layer 1 32, 64, 96, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 288, 320, 352, 384 and 448 kbps 32kbps is a mono-only setting

MPEG Layer 2 32, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320, and 384 kbps(32, 48, 56, 80 are single channel only, >= 224 are dual channel only)

PCM = 16 x encoded channel x sampling rate (system generated)

Table 15-18


VE Configuration Loading MPG2V LIM Software

03Iss

essary

ion

d by

ount

, and

ult

havem theever,

tes.

Loading MPG2V LIM Software

This section describes the two methods for loading the application software and other necdevice files onto the MPG2V LIM for MPEG-2 application functionality.

Loading Software from the VE Adaptation Controller

The following is the procedure for loading files to the MPG2V LIM via the VE AdaptatController:

1. Load the mpg2v.cod file on the VE Adaptation Controller.

2. From the Root Menu of the VE Adaptation Controller, select Manage configuration. The VEMIB Display and Management screen appears.

3. From the MIB Display and Management screen, select the MPEG System InformationGroup option and press the Enter key. The MPEG System Information Group screenappears.

4. Select the SCM Detail Config/Status Table and then select Extra Detail.

5. Select File Xfer Req.

6. Select C - mpg2v cod. The file transfer state should automatically go through the start,continue, ack and end states without any aborts. The File Xfer Count will show anincrementing count as the file transfer progresses. The File Xfer State will report on theprogress of the transfer. At the end of the file transfer, the state should report end followed byidle.

7. This step assumes that the LIM, to which the file was transferred in step 6, is being newlyinstalled and that boot code is the only code running on the LIM. This would be indicatethe Application S/W Revision and the Boot S/W Revision fields showing dashes, "-----",instead of version numbers under the MPEG System Information Group. Also, the LIMFault LED would indicate “on”. Once the software has been downloaded, the File Xfer Cfield will stop incrementing. The files required by the LIM will have been recovered from the mpg2v.cod archive filethe LIM automatically resets and runs the code. The Application S/W Revision and the BootS/W Revision fields will indicate version numbers following the reset, and the LIM FaLED will indicate “off”. The download is then complete.

8. This step assumes that you are upgrading the LIM, to which the file was transferred in step 6,with new code and that application code is already running on the LIM. Once you downloaded the software and the files required by the LIM have been recovered frompg2v.cod archive file, the new files replace any existing files with the same names. Howyou must reset the LIM to run the new code. Wait at least 1 minute. Then, from the MPEGSystem Information Group screen, select the LIM Action Request option and press theEnter key.

9. Select B - reset. This will reset the LIM using the new software.

Note Due to the very slow nature of the SCM link (200 baud), the file transfer may take 40 minu



ode or

r type

the.

me oth

IM

Loading Software from the Front Panel Management Port

The following procedure assumes you are using ProComm Plus Version 2.0.

1. Enter Setup, Alt Z , Alt S. Create a file upload path under host mode options.

2. Enter Protocol options, General options, and change only the following settings:C - Abort xfer if CD lost-no

3. Enter Protocol options, ASCII Protocol options, and change only the following settings:D - Character pacing - 0E - Line pacing - 0

4. Enter terminal option and select D-Hardware Flow Cntrl (ON).

5. Enter Alt P (Line/Port set up) and select:Baud rate-(38400) or Baud rate - 5 (96000) for ports using 8250 UARTSs. Parity- Alt N (N/8/1)

Save setting and escape out of ProComm Setup.

There are slight differences in procedure depending on whether the LIM is running its boot cits application code. The LIM is running application code if the Root Menu is present. All promptsare shown in lower type case. If the LIM is running boot code, all prompts are shown in uppecase.

The procedure for downloading files via the front panel management port is as follows:

1. A Help option is available in each of the following sub-menus. Then, from the Root Menuscreen or the boot prompt, MPG2V>, select File system.

2. From the Root Menu edosui> or boot menu EDOSUI> prompt, select Zap (erase) entireFlash. This erases and reformats the flash. Perform a Garbage collect. This process can takeup to a minute.

3. From the edosui>, the EDOSUI>, or the load> prompt, select L to enter download file frommgmt port UART.

4. From the edosui> , the EDOSUI>, or the load> prompt, select Carman file type .The LIM will now be waiting for a file download to be started on the UART. To abort download at this stage, press the Esc key or any other single key and wait for 2 seconds

Note Ensure the file download via the VE Adaptation Controller is not in progress at the same tias the download via the front panel management port is taking place. Otherwise, they will bcontend for the same RAM buffer for intermediate storage of the downloading file data.

The LIM is pre-loaded with software from the factory. If there is no software installed, the Lwill operate in the boot menu mode upon power-up. To enter the boot menu (upper case prompts) hit the <q> or <.> key while the tumbler symbol is rotating.

Note It is recommended that you enable ‘hardware flow control’ in Procomm Plus and on the management port before downloading (see Figure 15-9 and Table 15-8). Do NOT download with ‘software flow control’ enabled.

Note An alternative to step 2 is to write over the existing files. Perform a Garbage collect first, then proceed to step 3.



03Iss

cters

will

eal file,d files

o

level

5. To start sending file mpg2v.cod from the terminal to the LIM, perform the following:a. Press the "Page UP" key,b. Enter R - Raw ASCII,c. Enter the filename for transfer, mpg2v.cod.

6. The screen responds, Downloading, and you should see a clockwise rotating "/" as the file datais received by the LIM. The LIM will process data sent on the UART until no new charaare received for 2 seconds.

7. The LIM will verify file headers and then prompt you to save the file (Y/N). Answer N for no.Leave the file in the RAM buffer.

8. From the edosui> or the EDOSUI> prompt, select Double UnarchiVe; this un-archives thefile two times, once from SRAM to flash, and once from flash. The un-archiving processrecover 11 files from the mpg2v.cod file. The unit responds Double Unarchive completed.

9. Perform a check of the file directory, select list Directory, to ensure that all of the files havbeen recovered from the archived file. Since the mpg2v.cod file is a compressed archivthe files that should be recovered and found in the LIM’s directory are the uncompresserequired by the LIM and should include the files listed in Table 15-19

10. Reset and reboot the LIM: From any Root Menu prompt (for example: edosui>), quit back tthe Root Menu and select Reload restart. At the (Y/N) prompt, enter Y. The LIM will rebootand auto load the new application code. Alternately, from the boot menu, quit to the topprompt, MPG2V>, and simultaneously press the Shift and 6 keys (^ ).

Note After performing the Double Unarchive, the original mpg2v.cod compressed file will not appear in the LIM’s file directory. Also, the file list order may be different than the order shown.

Table 15-19 mpg2v.cod File Uncompressed Content

File Contents

vhlim.cod carman compressed host application software

fpga.bin code for Slot Controller FPGA used for SCM link communication

mencR.bin MPEG2 encoder R-chip functional microcode

mencE.bin MPEG2 encoder I-chip functional microcode

mencH.bin MPEG2 encoder header buf init file

mencI.bin MPEG2 encoder I-chip init microcode

mdecvid.bin MPEG2 decoder video microcode

mdecaud.bin MPEG2 decoder audio microcode

aencpcm.bin audio signal processor encoder PCM microcode

aencmpg.bin audio signal processor encoder MPEG microcode

sldsp.bin DSP microcode

Table 15-19


03Iss

des analing

1

2

-2

2

4

Chapter 16: Bandwidth Allocationand Reservation

Chapter OverviewThis chapter describes how to configure the bandwidth available for connections. It includescription of how resources are allocated, SAPs (Service Access Points), and Multiple SigControl Channels (MSCC).



Bandwidth Allocation and SAPs...........................................................................................16-2

Physical SAPs.................................................................................................................16-

Virtual SAPs...................................................................................................................16

Logical SAPs..................................................................................................................16-

QAAL2 Physical SAPs...................................................................................................16-2

QAAL2 Virtual SAPs.....................................................................................................16-3

Assigning Bandwidth to a Physical SAP........................................................................16-3

Assigning Bandwidth to a Logical SAP.........................................................................16-3

Assigning Bandwidth to a QAAL2 Physical SAP.........................................................16-3

Restricting Resources............................................................................................................16-

Restricting Cell Rates.....................................................................................................16-4

Restricting QOS Classes and Allocating UBR CAC Deduction....................................16-5

Configuring Link Resources.................................................................................................16-7

Defining VP and VC Switching Ranges in the PVC Resource Table............................16-7

Allocating Physical SAP Resources.............................................................................16-10

Allocating Logical SAP Resources..............................................................................16-21


Bandwidth Allocation and Reservation Bandwidth Allocation and SAPs

SAPs usedal SAPs

ious

ged over

rollers,ks 0 tohen or not. In thee,

troller

ugh 3

hanged

le, thatgnalinglot-2.es to/

over a-31.

rted.

ssagesfer to

Bandwidth Allocation and SAPs

The amount of bandwidth for SVC/SPVC/SPVP applications is set only for the Physical (when MSCC is not used) and for the Logical SAPs (when MSCC is used). Virtual SAPs areto transfer messages across the Switch Fabric thus bandwidth is not assigned to them.Physic

Table 16-1 shows the Q93B and QAAL2 Physical, Logical and Virtual SAPs available on varXedge slot controller and LIM combinations.

Physical SAPs

The Physical SAPs are the Service Access Points used when signaling messages are exchana physical trunk to its neighboring node.

The number of physical SAPs depends on the type of slot controller used. For ECC contthere are 16 broadband physical SAPs, 0 through 3 and 32 through 43, corresponding to lin15 respectively. The ECC controller software supports two modes, non-IMA and IMA. Wrunning in non-IMA mode, the ECC configuration allows using any LIM except a DSX1-IMAE1-IMA LIM. In this mode MSCC is supported and physical SAPs 32 through 43 areconfigurable. All attempts to use these SAPs such as opening a VC channel will be rejectedIMA mode, the ECC configuration allows using a DSX1-IMA or E1-IMA LIM. In this modMSCC is not supported and physical SAPs 32 to 43 are configurable.

For SMC slot controllers, there is 1 physical SAP, SAP 0. The physical SAP on the SMC condoes not correspond to physical links because LIMs are not supported by the SMC.

For all other controllers, there are 4 physical SAPs, 0 through 3, corresponding to links 0 throrespectively. Refer to Table 16-1.

Virtual SAPs

The Virtual SAPs are the Service Access Points used when signaling messages are excbetween slots within the same shelf.

The Virtual SAPs (numbers 4-19) are associated with Slots 0-15, respectively. For exampsignaling messages are being exchanged between Slot-1 and Slot-2 in a shelf. The siapplication in Slot-1 will transmit/receive messages to/from SAP-6 for messages to/from SThe signaling application in Slot-2 will transmit/receive messages to/from SAP-5 for messagfrom Slot-1. Refer to Table 16-1.

Logical SAPs

The Logical SAPs are the Service Access Points used to exchange signaling messagesphysical trunk using the Multiple Signaling Channel feature. The Logical SAPs are SAPs 20

For an SMC or ECC slot controller configured for an IMA LIM, logical SAPs are not suppoAll attempts to use these SAPs will be rejected. Refer to Table 16-1.

QAAL2 Physical SAPs

QAAL2 Physical SAPs are the Service Access Point used to exchange QAAL2 signaling meover a physical trunk and its neighboring node. For a listing of QAAL2 Physical SAPs, reTable 16-1. These SAPs are set to ‘off’ by default.


Bandwidth Allocation and Reservation Bandwidth Allocation and SAPs

03Iss

sages

ating at

n the

hion asts own

nical

QAAL2 Virtual SAPs

QAAL2 Virtual SAPs are the Service Access Point used to exchange QAAL2 signaling meswithin the same node (or shelf). For a listing of QAAL2 Virtual SAPs, refer to Table 16-1. TheseSAPs are set to ‘on’ by default.

Assigning Bandwidth to a Physical SAP

The amount of bandwidth assigned for PVCs, SPVCs, SPVPs, and SVCs crossing or terminthe Physical SAPs is configured in the SVC Resource Table.

This table limits the amount of Backward Bandwidth (bandwidth allocated for connections oEgress side of the link).

Assigning Bandwidth to a Logical SAP

The amount of bandwidth assigned for Logical SAPs (SAPs 20-31) is done in the same faswas explained for the Physical SAPs. Each of the individual Logical SAPs then manages ibandwidth resource. Refer to Allocating Logical SAP Resources for detailed information onMSCC. Refer to Connection Admission Control on page 2-6 of the GDC Xedge Switch, TechReference Manual (Part Number 032R310) for detailed information on the CAC.

Assigning Bandwidth to a QAAL2 Physical SAP

Table 16-1 Slot-0 SAP Connections

Slot Controller & LIM

Q93B Physical SAPs

Q93B Logical SAPs

Q93B Virtual SAPs

QAAL2 Physical SAPs

QAAL2 Virtual SAPs

All except ACP, ACS, ECC,

VSM

0 and0–3 (CE only)

– 4–19 – –

ACP, ACS 0–1 20–31 4–19 32–33 36–51

VSM 0 – 4–19 32 36–51

ECC w/OC-3 0–1 20–31 4–19 44–45 60–75

ECC w/DSX1/E1-IMA

0–3, 32–43 – 4–19 44, 48, 52, 56 60–75

ACP w/LCE-16 0 – 4–19 – –

Table 16-1


Bandwidth Allocation and Reservation Restricting Resources

n call

rs:

n

or

callnfigured

Restricting ResourcesThe ECC and ACP/ACS Cell Controllers enable you to restrict SVC and SPVC resources osetup requests.

Use the following procedures to restrict the resources on ECC and ACP/ACS Cell Controlle

1. Telnet to the desired ECC and ACP/ACS Cell Controller.

2. Select Manage Configuration. The MIB Display and Management screen appears.

3. Select SVC Configuration/Status. The SVC Configuration/Status screen appears as showin Figure 16-1.

Figure 16-1 SVC Configuration/Status Screen (ECC and ACP/ACS Controllers)

Proceed to Restricting Cell Rates on page 16-4 to restrict the cell rates for connections and/Restricting QOS Classes and Allocating UBR CAC Deduction on page 16-5 to restrict theconnection types and/or to deduct bandwidth on UBR connections (for CAC purposes).

Restricting Cell Rates

The Link Cell Rate Restrictions parameter enables you to restrict the number of cells in a setup message. If the number of cells specified in the setup message is greater than the covalue, the controller will reject the setup request.

Use the following procedure to restrict the cell rates for connections:

1. Select Link Cell Rate Restrictions from the SVC Configuration/Status screen. The LinkCell Rate Restrictions screen appears

2. Select Extra detail to display the detail screen for the selected link as shown in Figure 16-2.


5B ECC: Slot 5 SYS SVC Configuration/Status SW Version




03Iss

) for

r any

any

each

on is

or CAC

Figure 16-2 Link Cell Rate Restrictions Screen

3. Select PCR CLP01 Max and enter the maximum Peak Cell Rate (0-16,777,216 cells/secany connection on this link.

4. Select SCR Max and enter the maximum Sustained Cell Rate (0-16,777,216 cells/sec) foconnection on this link.

5. Select MBS Max and enter the Maximum Burst Size (0-16,777,216 cells/sec) for connection on this link.

6. Use the Up/Down or Goto row commands to select the other links.

7. Repeat step 3 to step 6 for each link on the controller.

Restricting QOS Classes and Allocating UBR CAC Deduction

The Link QOS Class Restrictions parameter enables you to restrict the connection class for link. If the connection class specified in the setup message is restricted in the Link QOS ClassRestrictions configuration, the controller will reject the setup request.

You can also allocate bandwidth for UBR connections. Typically, when a UBR connectiaccepted CAC does not deduct any bandwidth from the link. The UBR subtract percent parameterenables you to select a percentage of the UBR bandwidth (specified in the setup message) fto deduct from the link.

Use the following procedure to restrict the QOS class for connections:

1. Select Link QOS Class Restrictions from the SVC Configuration/Status screen. The LinkQOS Class Restrictions screen appears

2. Select Extra detail to display the detail screen for the selected link as shown in Figure 16-2.


5B ECC: Slot 5 SYS Link Cell Rate Restrictions SW VersionDetail of Link Cell Rate Restrictions entry 0

Link : 00 PCR CLP01 Max : 01 SCR Max : 02 MBS Max : 0




BR

R-

R-

BR

BRn the

Figure 16-3 Link QOS Class Restrictions Screen

3. Select CBR allowed and at the prompt, select yes (Y) if you want this link to accept Cconnections or no (N) if you want this link to reject CBR connections.

4. Select VBRRt allowed and at the prompt, select yes (Y) if you want this link to accept VBrt connections or no (N) if you want this link to reject VBR-rt connections.

5. Select VBRNrt allowed and at the prompt, select yes (Y) if you want this link to accept VBnrt connections or no (N) if you want this link to reject VBR-nrt connections.

6. Select UBR allowed and at the prompt, select yes (Y) if you want this link to accept Uconnections or no (N) if you want this link to reject UBR connections.

7. Select UBR subtract percent. At the prompt, enter the percentage (0-100) of the Ubandwidth, as specified in the setup message, that CAC will deduct from the link wheconnection is accepted.

8. Use the Up/Down or Goto row commands to select the other links.

9. Repeat step 3 to step 8 for each link on the controller.


5B ECC: Slot 5 SYS Link QOS Class Restrictions SW VersionDetail of Link QOS Class Restrictions entry 0

Link : 00 CBR allowed : yes1 VBRRt allowed : yes2 VBRNrt allowed : yes3 UBR allowed : yes4 UBR subtract percent : 0



Bandwidth Allocation and Reservation Configuring Link Resources

03Iss

shared

v4.0x

ntrolble for

totale theationwitch

-9

nd endges on

t of

Configuring Link ResourcesBandwidth resource for PVCs, PVPs, SPVCs, SPVPs and SVCs are combined into a singleresource, configured in the SVC Resource Table. The Cell Rate resource in the PVC ResourceTable is only used once; when the GDC Xedge software is upgraded to v4.2x or greater, fromor v4.1x, the resources from the PVC Resource Table are added to the SVC Resource Table. Thecell rates in the PVC Resource Table are then are no longer used.

This section contains instructions for the following procedures:

• Defining VP and VC Switching Ranges in the PVC Resource Table

• Allocating Physical SAP Resources

• Allocating Logical SAP Resources

Defining VP and VC Switching Ranges in the PVC Resource Table

You must assign bandwidth for all physical SAPs. In the case of Multiple Signaling CoChannels, bandwidth is allocated to the logical SAPs (any un-allocated bandwidth is availaPVCs).

If you intend to use MSCC, plan how many VPIs per Logical SAP as well as how manyLogical SAPs will be used for MSCC. Try to plan ahead for this because if you changSwitching Ranges later, you will need to reboot the Slot Controller. You can find more informon VP and VC switching ranges in Switching Ranges on page 3-5 of the GDC Xedge STechnical Reference Manual (Part Number 032R310).

Arrange your PVC Resources for the Physical Link as follows:


2. Select PVC Configuration/Status and press the Enter key. The PVC Configuration/Statusscreen appears.

3. Select PVC resource Table and press the Enter key. The PVC Resource Table appears.

4. Select Extra detail and the Detail of PVC Resources Table appears as shown in Figure 16-4.The parameters are described in PVC Resources Table Parameter Descriptions on page 16.

You need to adjust the VP, VPI, and VCI start and end ranges so that the VPI range start amatches the range of VPs used through the cloud. For more details refer to Switching Ranpage 3-5 of the GDC Xedge Technical Reference Manual (Part Number 032R310).

5. Select PVC VCI Range Start, press the Enter key and type in the VCI range start value.

6. Select PVC VCI Range End, press the Enter key and type in the VCI range end value.

7. Select PVC VPI Range Start, press the Enter key and type in the VPI range start value.

8. Select PVC VPI Range End, press the Enter key and type in the VPI range end value.

Note When MSCC is used the Physical SAP signaling is turned off.

Note If you want to change the switching range, and you already have circuits built that will be outhe new range, you need to kill the circuits (that will be out of range) before changing the switching range.



The

9. Select VP Range Start, press the Enter key and type in the VP range start value.

10. Select VP Range End, press the Enter key and type in the VP range end value.

11. Select Link Type , press the Enter key and configure the link type for the physical links. options are; A- uni , B- nni, C- b ici, and D- non atm link. Each link you plan to use MSCCon must be set to nni.

12. Select eXit until the prompt, Saved changed configuration (Y/N): appears. Press Y to save.

Figure 16-4 Detail of PVC Resource Table

Note If the Link Type is set to nni, the Protocol Type in the SVC Resource Table must be set to iisp30 or iisp31 for both sides of the nni link.


5B: Slot 0 SYS PVC Resource Table New EventDetail of PVC Resource Table entry 0-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Slot No : 0 Link No : 00 VC VCI Range Start : 01 VC VCI Range End : 8162 VC VPI Range Start : 03 VC VPI Range End : 24 VP VPI Range Start : 55 VP VPI Range End : 2556 Link type : uni7 MOLN VPI : 08 MOLN VCI : 0




03Iss

PVC Resources Table Parameter Descriptions

Table 16-2 lists the Detail of PVC Resources Table screen parameters and their definitions.

Table 16-2 PVC Resource Table Parameter Definitions


Slot No Displays the slot number of the selected Slot Controller. NA, read only

Link No Displays the link number of the selected Link. NA, read only

VC VCI Range Start This parameter sets the start of the VCI range. The default value is 0. For more information see Switching Ranges on page 3-5 of the Technical Reference Manual (Part Number 032R310).

Warm start of affected Slot Controller(s)

VC VCI Range End This parameter sets the end of the VCI range. The default value is 816. For more information see Switching Ranges on page 3-5 of the Technical Reference Manual (Part Number 032R310).


VC VPI Range Start This parameter sets the start of the VPI range for VC switching. The default value is 0. For more information see Switching Ranges on page 3-5 of the Technical Reference Manual (Part Number 032R310).Note : If changes to this value are made in the SVC Resources Table , they will not be reflected here.


VC VPI Range End This parameter sets the start of the VPI range for VC switching. The default value is 2. For more information see Switching Ranges on page 3-5 of the Technical Reference Manual (Part Number 032R310).Note : If changes to this value are made in the SVC Resources Table , they will not be reflected here.


VP Range Start This parameter sets the start of the VP switching range. The default value is 5. For more information see Switching Ranges on page 3-5 of the Technical Reference Manual (Part Number 032R310).


VP Range End This parameter sets the end of the VP switching range. The default value is 255. For more information see Switching Ranges on page 3-5 of the Technical Reference Manual (Part Number 032R310).


PVC Max Link Rate This is the maximum cell rate that can be supported for PVCs. This value is only used when upgrading GDC Xedge software v4.0x or v4.1x to v4.2x. In this case this value is added to the SVC Resource Table. This value is not used from that point forward.





ysicaly.

roughsection

ss the

Allocating Physical SAP Resources

For ECC slot controllers configured as non-IMA, ACP/ACS and slave slot controllers, the PhSAPs are SAPs 0, 1, 2, and 3. These correspond to physical links 0, 1, 2, and 3 respectivel

For ECC slot controllers configured as IMA and the SMC, the Physical SAPs are SAPs 0 th3 and 32 through 43, corresponding to physical links 0, 1, 2, and 3 respectively. Refer to the Bandwidth Allocation and SAPs on page 16-2 for more information.

1. From the Root Menu, telnet to the appropriate Slot Controller by selecting Telnet.

2. Type either the IP address or the alias for the slot you want to configure and then preEnter key.


4. Select SVC Configuration/Status and press the Enter key. The SVC Configuration/Statusscreen.

5. If you are configuring for SPVC Multicast, set the number of Max Pt-Mpt Trees. Theavailable range is 0-25. Setting this parameter does not require a warm start.

Link type This is the type of link, and is one of UNI, NNI, b-ici or non-ATM-link. Currently, the biggest difference is between UNI and NNI. If a link is a native ATM type and connected to another GDC Xedge switch, it should be configured to NNI. By doing so, the management overlay network protocol is run between the switches. If the link is connected to an end-point device, such as an ATM controller card fitted to a workstation, the link type should be set to UNI. Type non-ATM is used for non-ATM cell based links such as on Adaptation Controllers. Type b-ici is not supported at this time.


MOLN VPI This identifies the VPI that is used for the Management OverLay Network (MOLN). For more information see MOLN on page 5-9 of the Technical Reference Manual (Part Number 032R310).


MOLN VCI This identifies the VCI that is used for the Management OverLay Network (MOLN). For more information see MOLN on page 5-9 of the Technical Reference Manual (Part Number 032R310).


Note For an emulated LAN, you must set a minimum of 2 Pt-Mpt Trees; one for the LES (LAN Emulation Server), and one for the BUS (Broadcast Unknown Server).

Table 16-2 PVC Resource Table Parameter Definitions (Continued)





03Iss

ter

are6-13

l

list of

m the

for

nge SAP

PI and

VPI

VP

y

6. If you are configuring for SPVC Multicast, set the number of Max Parties per Tree. Theavailable range is 0-750 for the ACP/ACS and 0-4000 for the ECC. Setting this paramerequires a warm start.

7. From the SVC Configuration/Status screen, select SVC Resource Table. The SVCResource Table screen appears.

8. Select Extra Detail. If you are configuring an ACP, ACS, or ECC Cell Controller, the Detailof SVC Resource Table entry 0 screen (SAP-0) appears as shown in Figure 16-5. The Detailof SVC Resource Table screen parameters for ACP, ACS, or ECC Cell Controllers described in ACS, ACP or ECC SVC Resource Table Parameter Descriptions on page 1.For all other Slot Controllers, the Detail of SVC Resource Table entry 0 screen (SAP-0)appears as shown in Figure 16-6. The Detail of SVC Resource Table screen parameters for alSlot Controllers (other than ACP, ACS, or ECC) are described in SVC Resource TableParameters for Slot Controllers Other Than ACS, ACP ECC on page 16-17.

9. Select MAX SAP Rate and press the Enter key to set the Maximum SVC Backward Rate.

10. Type in the value for the link capacity (maximum rate) and press the Enter key. For a supported rates, see Link Capacity on page 16-20. You can use Table 16-5 to determine thelink capacity. This ensures that the physical link can support the cells per second froswitch. Table 16-5 lists the physical interfaces (lines) and the value to enter for the MAX SAPRate (cell rate maximum).

11. Select VPI/VCI Hi/Lo and press the Enter key; then select either high or low by typing theletter corresponding to the option.

• If you select high software attempts to use the last VPI/VCI pair in the upper rangean incoming SVC connection.

• If you select Low, the software attempts to use the first VPI/VCI pair in the upper rafor an incoming SVC call. You may select either but note that the other end of theshould be the opposite selection to avoid glare.

12. Select the SVC VPI Start for this SAP and press the Enter key. This should be the first Vthat the VPC provider is granting for this SAP. At the prompt, type in the VPI Start valuepress the Enter key.

13. Select the SVC VPI End for this SAP and press the Enter key. At the prompt, type in the Start value and press the Enter key.

14. Select the SVP Start for this SAP and press the Enter key. At the prompt, type in the SStart value.

Note When configuring Max Pt-Mpt Trees, a warm start is not required. But when setting Max Parties per Tree, a warm start is required.

Note You may configure up to five Consecutive VPIs for each MSCC Logical SAP.

Note You must reserve at least one VP per logical SAP- even if you do not intend to establish anSPVPs over the Logical SAP.



in the the

n the 5.he

ofss the

d on

f your

save

15. To use a different VPI for the Signaling Virtual Channel of this SAP, you must choose it VPI range (between, and including the VPI Start to VPI End). By default this VPI will beVPI Start chosen above. To do so, select Signalling VPI for the Signaling Virtual Channel ofthis SAP and press the Enter key. Type in a new value and press the Enter key.

16. To use a different VCI for the Signaling Virtual Channel of this SAP, you must choose it iVCI range (between, and including the VCI Start to VCI End). By default this VCI will beTo do so, select Signalling VCI for the Signaling Virtual Channel of this SAP and press tEnter key.

17. Select Policing and press the Enter key to determine whether Policing will be turned ON orOFF for this SAP.

18. Select Max SAP Conns and press the Enter key to select the Maximum numberconnections that will be allowed on this SAP. Type in the value at the prompt and preEnter key.

19. Select Protocol Type and press the Enter key to select the Signaling protocol to be usethis SAP. Type the letter corresponding to the desired option.

20. Select Restart Option and press the Enter key to select whether or not to send a RESTARTall VCs on a layer-2 re-establish.

21. Select Down to step down to the next entry (SAP-1).

22. Repeat step 9 to step 20 for the next entries if applicable (SAPs 2-3).

23. Select eXit until the Save changed configuration (Y/N) : prompt appears. Type Y(yes) to save.

This procedure must be done for each link (physical SAP) on every Slot Controller in each onodes.

If applicable, continue with the next section Allocating Logical SAP Resources. DO NOT performa Warm Start on the Slot Controller at this time. If you are finished, use the following steps to the configuration and reboot this Slot Controller:

24. After saving the configuration changes, perform a warm start by selecting Warm Start fromthe Root Menu.

25. At the prompt, select Normal to reboot the Slot Controller.

Note If the Link Type is set to nni in the PVC Resource Table, the Protocol Type must be set to iisp30, iisp31, or PNNI 1.0 for both sides of the nni link.

Note You can avoid multiple Warm Starts by configuring all system link resources in one session.



03Iss

ACS, ACP or ECC SVC Resource Table


Figure 16-5 Detail of SVC Resource Table for ACS, ACP or ECC Cell Controllers

ACS, ACP or ECC SVC Resource Table Parameter Descriptions

Table 16-3 SVC Resource Table Parameter Descriptions


Preemption On/Off This option enables you to enable or disable selective route feature at this interface or SAP. The options are: Enable -enable selective route feature Disable - Disable selective route feature

Immediate

SAP Identifies the SAP NA, read only

VPI/VCI Hi On SVC call establishment, the switch will assign a VPI/VCI value within the allowable range. This parameter enables you to set the selected VPI/VCI value on SVC establishment to the high or low side of the VPI/VCI range (in order to prevent glaring).The options are:highlow

Reconfigure(Status )

SVC VCI St SVC VCI Range Start. Identifies the start of the range of SVC VCI values supported on this link.

NA, read only




SVC VCI En SVC VCI Range End. Identifies the end of the range of SVC VCI values supported on this link.

NA, read only

SVC VPI St SVC VPI Range Start. This parameter applies to Logical SAPs only (20-31). Identifies the start of the range of logical SAP VPI values for VCs supported on this link.Note : Changes made to this parameter will not be reflected in the PVC Resource Table .


SVC VPI En SVC VPI Range End. This parameter applies to Logical SAPs only (20-31). Identifies the end of the range of logical SAP VPI values for VCs supported on this link.Note : Changes made to this parameter will not be reflected in the PVC Resource Table .


SVP Start ( SVP Range Starting Value. This parameter applies to Logical SAPs only (20-31). Identifies the start of the range of logical SAP VPI values for VPs supported on this link.


SVP End (Lo SVP Range Ending Value. This parameter applies to Logical SAPs only (20-31). Identifies the end of the range of logical SAP VPI values for VPs supported on this link.


SVC Max SA SVC Backward Cell Rate Total.The backward total cell rate configured for SVCs on this link. Note that this object is in cells per second (CPS). The default value is: 0


Available SVC Backward Cell Rate Available. The backward cell rate available for SVCs on this link. Note that this parameter value is in cells per second (CPS).The default value is: 0

NA, read only

Signalling Signalling VCI. This is the VCI used for signaling messages. The default value is: 5


Signalling Signalling VPI. This is the VPI used for signaling messages. The default value is: 0


CDVT (uS) Cell Delay Variation Tolerance (CDVT) Size (in microseconds). This parameter enables you to set the CDVT.The default value is: 200


Interface This enables you to select the Interface type. The options are:network - select this option if the SAP is connected to the network side of the connection.user - select this option if the SAP is connected to a user endpoint.The default value is: network


Policing This parameter enables you to enable or disable policing.on - Select this option to enable policing (default).off - Select this option to disable policing.


Max SAP Co svcMaxSapConn. Maximum SVCs this SAP.The default value is: 55


Cur SAP Co svcCurSapConn. Current SVC count this SAPThe default value is: 0

NA, read only

Physical L Physical Link Number.This is the physical link number associated with this SAP.The default value is: 0







03Iss

VPCI/VPI M VPI/VCI Mapping.offonThe default value is: off


QoS Based QoS based routing. The options are:off - disables QoS based routing (default).on - enables QoS based routing.


Restart Op This parameter enables you to Send Restart when link is up. The options are:onoff


Dest E164 The E.164 address for this SAP. Reconfigure(Status )

Auto Sap O Auto Sap Off. This option allows a Sap Status to be automatically turned off after T309 expiry. Select yes if a sap (which was on before) is to be turned off after T309 expiry, else select no . The options are:yesnoThe default value is: no


Sap Utiliz This parameter enables you to set the percent of the bandwidth in SVC Backward Cell Rate Total that will be available.


CBR Bw Lim SVC CBR Bandwidth Limit. This parameter is applicable to the ECC Controller only. This is the percent of bandwidth available for CBR class connections.


VBR-RT Bw SVC VBR-rt Bandwidth Limit. This parameter is applicable to the ECC Controller only. This is the percent of bandwidth available for VBR Real Time class connections.The default value is: 100


VBR-NRT Bw SVC VBR-nrt Bandwidth Limit. This parameter is applicable to the ECC Controller only. This is the percent of bandwidth available for VBR Non-Real Time class connections.The default value is: 100


ABR Bw Lim This parameter is not supported. This parameter is applicable to the ECC Controller only.SVC ABR Bandwidth Limit. This is the percent of bandwidth available for ABR class connections.The default value is: 100


UBR Bw Lim SVC UBR Bandwidth Limit. This parameter is applicable to the ECC Controller only. This is the percent of bandwidth available for UBR class connections.The default value is: 100


Ena Best E Enable Best Effort. This parameter is applicable to the ECC Controller only. This option allows you to Enable Best Effort for VBR-nrt class connections. The options are:off -Select this option to on - Select this option toThe default value is: off







Pk Rate Li Peak Rate Limiting. This parameter is applicable to the ECC Controller only. This parameter is applicable to the ECC Controller only. Burst tolerance factor for VBR-NRT. (Implied decimal, 25 = .25)The default value is: 100


UBR Reserv UBR Reservation. This parameter is applicable to the ECC Controller only. Bandwidth reservation factor for UBR. (Implied decimal, 25 = .25).The default value is: 0


Signalling This parameter enables you to set the signaling protocol used by the SAP. The options are:uni40uni31uni30pnni 1.0iisp30iisp31


Routing Pr This option enables you to select the Routing Protocol. The options are:Xedge DTLPNNI


Status This parameter reports the status of the selected SAP and enables you to change the SAP parameters. The options are:on - turns on the SAP or reports that the SAP is onoff - turns off the SAP or reports that the SAP is offreconfig - This option reconfigures the SAP with the current parameter values.reset - This option resets the SAP to the default parameter values.

Immediate






03Iss

items.rs are

SVC Resource Table for All Slot Controllers Except ACS, ACP or ECC

Figure 16-6 Detail of SVC Resource Table

SVC Resource Table Parameters for Slot Controllers Other Than ACS, ACP ECC

There are several parameters in the SVC Resource Table that contain useful configurationNot all of these parameters are applicable to all SAPs. To distinguish which parameteapplicable to which SAP type, the following convention is used:P - This indicates that this item applies to the Physical SAPs.V - this indicates that this item applies to the Virtual SAPs.L - This indicates that this item applies to the Logical SAPs.

Table 16-4 contains descriptions of the SVC Resource Table fields.

Table 16-4 SVC Resource Table Parameter Descriptions for Controllers (except ACS, ACP ECC)

Item Applicable to Description Takes Effect On

SAP P, V, L This indicates the SAP number to which this information is associated with.

NA, read only



5B: Slot 0 SYS SVC Resource Table SW versionDetail of SVC Resource Table entry 0

SAP : 0 12 Max SAP Conns : 5500 VPI/VCI Hi/Lo : low Cur SAP Conns : 0 SVC VCI Start : 0 13 Physical Link : 0 SVC VCI End : 1023 14 VPCI/VPI Mappin: off01 SVC VPI Start(L: 1 15 QoS Based Route: off02 SVC VPI End(Log: 1 16 Signalling Prot: uni3103 SVP Start(Logic: 5 17 Restart Option : off04 SVP End(Logical: 255 18 Dest E164 Addr :05 SVC Max SAP Rat: 95000 19 Auto Sap OFF : no Available cell : 9181406 Signalling VCI : 507 Signalling VPI : 008 Status : idle09 CDVT (uS) : 20010 Interface Type : network11 Policing : onSelect option:Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row,Press ^J for extra help on this item, Summary, eXit



VPI/VCI Hi/Lo P, L During SVC establishment (for an NNI or UNI) VPCI/VCI pairs are dynamically allocated. This item configures whether the VPCI/VCI pair will be selected beginning with the top of the range (Hi) or beginning with the bottom of the range (Lo). The purpose is to avoid glare conditions on alternate sides of a symmetrical link (a network to network type of connection). At configuration time, configure one side of the network-network link to be Hi and the other to be Lo .


SVC VCI Start P, L This is the smallest VCI Value that will be dynamically allocated for SVCs. Note that SPVCs can be configured to use VCI values lower than this if the PVC resource range is lower than this. 32 is the lowest displayed value here as a reminder that VCI values lower than 32 are reserved.

NA, read only

SVC VCI End P, L This is the largest VCI Value that will be used for SVCs and SPVCs.

NA, read only

SVC VPI Start P, L This is the smallest VCI Value that will be used for SVCs and SPVCs.


SVC VPI End P, L This is the largest VPI Value that will be used for SVCs and SPVCs.


SVP Start P, L Any SPVC that is configured in this range will be established as Virtual Path Connection. This is the low end of that range.


SVP End P, L Any SPVC that is configured in this range will be established as Virtual Path Connection. This is the high end of that range.


SVC Max SAP Rate P, L This is total amount of bandwidth assigned to this SAP.


Available Cell R: P, L This is a total of the remaining resources available to this SAP.

NA, read only

Signalling VCI P, L This is the VCI that will carry the signaling messages between peers over a Physical or Logical SAP.


Signalling VPI P, L This is the VPI that will carry the signaling messages between peers over a Physical or Logical SAP.


Status P, V, L This is used to turn signaling ‘off’ for a SAP that has no signaling peer at the other end; it is also used to turn the SAP back ‘on’ after having been off; it is also used to ‘reconfigure’ the SAP to take on a change in configuration; finally it is used for ‘reset’ purposes of grooming all calls connected on this SAP (sends a RESTART All command).

Immediate

CDV Tolerance Size P, L Sets the CDVT Size for any connection that establishes and will have the GCRA applied.


Interface Type P, V, L Sets whether the signaling application associated with this SAP will act as ‘network’ or ‘user’ side of the signaling protocol.







03Iss

Policing P, L Enables (on) or disables (off) GCRA on this SAP. Reconfigure(Status )

Low Pri OB Per P, L Sets the low priority overbooking percentage for this SAP.


Max SAP Conns P, L Sets a limit on the number of connections that will be allowed on this SAP. Useful if a Slot Controller has a UNI Physical SAP active and an NNI Physical SAP active where the UNI SAP has a number of SPVCs that will try to connect. Say that a UNI SAP will have 200 SPVCs configured. Further, say that the slot has 250 max-point-to-point connections configured. In order to ensure that the 200 SPVCs can connect on the UNI SAP, set the NNI SAP to 50.


Cur SAP Conns P, L Indicates the current number of connections assigned to this SAP. See section on Connection Admission Control for more details.

NA, read only

Physical Link L This is the Physical Link that this Logical SAP is associated with. Any signaling messages on this SAP will travel over the Physical Link Identified here.


VPCI/VPI Mapping L Selects whether VPCI/VCI mapping is enabled (on) or disabled (off) for this Logical SAP. See section on MSCC for further details.


QoS Based Route L Selects whether QoS based Routing is enabled (on) or disabled (off) for this Logical SAP. See section on MSCC for further details.


Protocol Type P, V, L Selects the signaling protocol used to carry signaling messages on this SAP. The options are:uni30uni31iisp30iisp31pnni10uni40


Restart Option P, V, L When enabled (on) will cause a layer-3 RESTART message to be transmitted on this SAP when a layer-2 reestablish has occurred and there are no connections established on this SAP. For initialization purposes.


Dest E164 Addr L This is used to identify the entity connected to the other end of this Logical SAP. This is useful for the Routing Tool Manager to auto-map the ‘logical’ topology.







Link Capacity

Table 16-5 lists the maximum rates supported by GDC Xedge.

Table 16-5 Link Capacity Table

Interface Line Rate (Mbps) ATM Transfer Rate (Mbps) Cells per Second

DS1 1.544 1.536 3,622

E1 2.048 1.920 4,528

J2 6.312 6.144 14,490

E3-HEC 34.368 33.920 80,000

E3-PLCP 34.368 30.528 72,000

DS3-PLCP 44.736 40.704 96,000

DS3-HEC 44.736 44.210 104,269

OC-3C 155.520 149.760 353,207

TAXI 100 235,850

MJPEG Audio 1.948 1.728 4,075

MJPEG Video 5 13,300





VH320 (channel) 0.505 0.384 1,200

CE w/DS1 1.544 4,107

CE w/E1 2.048 5,447

CE w/DS3 118,979

CE w/SI-2C 2.4 k to 8,192 kbs 6.4 to 21,788

Table 16-5



03Iss

ack for. Eachs. Theontroll trunknnel

k thattheirt thesages

ed keyfficient

ridingat thisPC is

or re-

egresse sum of the

hat is turn

Pland for

need

Allocating Logical SAP Resources

A physical GDC Xedge port can accommodate up to 12 instances of a Signaling Protocol stestablishing SPVCs or SVCs. This is accomplished by using the Logical SAPs (SAPs 20-31)of the configurable Logical SAPs are associated with one of the two possible Physical Linkway in which the signaling messages are conveyed over the MSCC (Multiple Signaling CChannels) Logical Links is through a Virtual Path Connection on the other side of the physicathat is connected to the physical link on which the MSCC Logical Link signaling Virtual Chatravels.

MSCC Uses

Multiple Signaling Control Channels are used to:

• connect SVCs or SPVCs through a third party network that does not support signaling.

• shorten the number of hops from calling to called parties in an all GDC Xedge network.

• connect a call to multiple destinations.

The first instance is for the ability to connect SVCs or SPVCs through a third party networdoes not support UNI signaling. By having this third-party network provide a VPC through environment, the VPC will carry the Signaling Virtual Channel to another signaling entity aother side of this third-party network. The two entities will then use the VPC to exchange mesand dynamically establish and release connections.

Secondly, by using MSCC Logical Links, the number of hops between the strategically selectentities can be reduced to one logical hop across the backbone. This would provide a more emethod for Connecting SVCs or SPVCs across several hops.

By choosing SPVPs to support the VPC a dynamic Logical Link reroute (and all of the SVCs in this VPC) without having to reestablish all of the SVCs in the VPC can be effected. Note threroute method provides fault coverage between the endpoints of the VPC. If the link to the Vdown, then all calls of the Logical link will have to be released back to the origination points festablishment.

The third instance for using MSCC is to connect a call to multiple destinations achieved by logical multicast. Each logical SAP assigned to a link may contain a different destination. Thof the bandwidth assigned to the logical SAPs must not exceed the bandwidth capacityphysical link.

MSCC Support Configuration

In order to enable MSCC support, you must first turn OFF the Physical SAP (0 or 1) tassociated with the Physical Link to be used for the Logical SAP. You will not be allowed toON a Logical SAP until you first turn OFF the Physical SAP.

The following is a step-by-step procedure for configuring MSCC support:

1. Arrange your PVC Resources for the Physical Link that will be used for the Logical SAP.how many VPIs per Logical SAP as well as how many total Logical SAPs will be useMSCC. Refer to the sample MSCC planning map in Figure 16-7.

Note You need to plan ahead for this because if you change the Switching Ranges later, you willto reboot the Slot Controller.



ss the

d to

al

SAP

Figure 16-7 Sample MSCC Planning Map

2. From the Root Menu, telnet to the appropriate Slot Controller by selecting Telnet.

3. Type either the IP address or the alias for the slot you want to configure and then preEnter key.


5. Select SVC Configuration/Status and press the Enter key. The SVC Configuration/Statusscreen appears.

6. Select the SVC Resource Table and press Enter. The SVC Resource Table screen appears.

7. Select Extra Detail. The Detail of SVC Resource Table entry screen appears.

8. Use the Up and Down commands to choose the Physical Link (physical SAP) to be usecarry the MSCC Logical SAP messages. This corresponds to the Physical Link item on theDetail of SVC Resource Table entry screen. Typically, you would select SAP-0 (PhysicLink-0) or SAP-1 (Physical Link-1).

9. Select Status and press the Enter key. Type the letter corresponding to the off option to turnoff the physical SAP that you want to use for MSCC.

10. Use the Goto command to access the logical SAPs. Type in the number of the Logical and press the Enter key. Logical SAPs are SAPs 20 to 31.

6093900201

88024009002128750120

4052800301

8606350500

SAP 20 VP 2/6

SAP 22 VP 12/16SAP 23 VP 15/18

SAP 24 VP 17/21

SAP 21 VP 7/11

2037580201

Slot-6Link-0

Slot-10Link-1

Slot-10Link-1

Slot-0Link-1

Slot-0Link-1

Slot-1Link-1



03Iss

this

this

g

n the

s Slot

llow

ure.

VPIaling

applies

er the of the

the

11. Select Status and press the Enter key. Type the letter corresponding to the on option to turn onthe Logical SAP.

12. Select VPCI/VPI Mapping from the Detail of SVC Resource Table entry screen and pressthe Enter key. This allows you to select whether VPCI/VPI Mapping will be enforced onLogical SAP. See VPCI Mapping on page 16-23. Type the letter corresponding to either on oroff.

13. Select QoS Based Route from the Detail of SVC Resource Table entry screen and press theEnter key. This allows you to select whether QoS Based Routing will be enforced onLogical SAP. See QoS Mapping on page 16-24. Type the letter corresponding to either on oroff.

14. Select Dest E164 Addr and press the Enter key. Type in the E.164 address of the SignalinEntity Logically connected to this Logical SAP.

15. Select Auto SAP OFF and press the Enter key. Type in either Y (yes) or N (no). If you selectYes, the switch automatically turns off this SAP when there is a signaling failure betweeend to end signaling entities.

16. Repeat step 8 to step 15 for each Logical SAP to be enabled.

When you are finished, use the following steps to save the configuration and reboot thiController:

17. Select eXit until the prompt, Save changed configuration (Y/N): appears. Press Y to save.

18. Perform a warm start by selecting Warm Start from the Root Menu.

19. Select Normal to reboot the Slot Controller.

20. For Xedge routing, load and activate the Routing Tables (def.rtb or dtl.bin) that will aCalls to be forwarded over the Logical SAPs. For PNNI routing refer to the Chapter 19: PNNIConfiguration for configuration details. This completes the MSCC configuration procedFor more details on Routing Tables, see the section entitled Routing in Chapter 17:Configuring Connections.

VPCI Mapping

A VPCI is a logical identification of a Virtual Path Connection. This choice is mandatory if therange being used for the Logically connected Logical SAPs are different. This allows signmessages to unambiguously identify the Virtual Path Connection that the signaling messageto (for example, Connection Identifier IE).

Disabling VPCI Mapping

Keep in mind that the number of VPIs available to the Logical SAPs logically connected ovVPC must be the same. If the VPIs provided for the Logical SAPs are identical on both sidesLogical SAPs, you can turn this option off.

Note If you enable the Auto SAP Off option (by selecting Yes) you will need to manually turn on SAP after the failed trunk is restored.



ed on that areppen

ill beI/VCI

QoS Mapping

The GDC Xedge MSCC signaling feature allows calls to be routed over a Logical SAP basthe QoS requirement for the requested connection. This would be the case when the VPCsbeing provided have different deliverable QoS characteristics. This mapping will haautomatically as defined in Table 16-6.

Disabling QoS Mapping

If QoS based Routing is not selected, the VPCI/VCI pairs that will be used for connections wchosen from the top (or bottom depending if high or low is selected, respectively) of the VPranges. All QoS classes will be grouped over the same VPC.

Table 16-6 QoS Characteristics

# of VPCscbr will use

VPCI #

vbr-rtconnections will

use VPCI #

vbr-nrt connections will

use VPCI #

ubr connections will use

VPCI #

1 0 0 0 0

2 0 1 1 1

3 0 1 2 2

4 0 1 2 3

5 0 1 2 3

Table 16-6


03Iss

ayer

1

-3

-

-3

-5

6

-9

4

4

2

9

Chapter 17: Configuring ConnectionsChapter Overview

This chapter describes how to configure an GDC Xedge ATM network to provide ATM lservices. The topics in this chapter include:


ATM Circuits........................................................................................................................17

MOLN ............................................................................................................................173

Signaling.........................................................................................................................17

Configuring an ACS Xedge Network...................................................................................17-4

Network Configuration Summary.........................................................................................17-5

Configure Slot-0 Overview............................................................................................17-5

Specific Slot Controllers (non-Slot-0) Configurations...................................................17-5

Routing...........................................................................................................................17

Configure the PVCs........................................................................................................17-

Configure the SPVCs.....................................................................................................17-8

Establish SVC Support Requirements............................................................................17-8

Configure Slot-0....................................................................................................................17

Configure the Port Types................................................................................................17-9

Configure Switching Ranges (VCC and VPC Switching Ranges)..............................17-10

Assign an ATM addresses (E.164 Address).................................................................17-10

LECS Network Prefix...................................................................................................17-11

Assign DTL Node IDs..................................................................................................17-11

Configure the Physical Table.......................................................................................17-11

Assign a Node IP Address............................................................................................17-12

Specific Slot Controller Network Configurations...............................................................17-13

PVCs...................................................................................................................................17-14

Resources......................................................................................................................17-1

Configuring a PVC.......................................................................................................17-1

Configuring a Multicast PVC.......................................................................................17-22

SPVCs.................................................................................................................................17-23

SPVPs...........................................................................................................................17-3

Configuring an SPVC...................................................................................................17-23

SPVC Multicast...................................................................................................................17-2

SPVC Multicast Configuration Overview....................................................................17-29

SPVC Multicast Configuration.....................................................................................17-31

SVCs...................................................................................................................................17-33

Configuring the Network for SVCs..............................................................................17-33

Interim Local Management Interface (ILMI).....................................................................17-34


Configuring Connections Chapter Overview

4
Configuring ILMI ........................................................................................................ 17-3
Address Registration Information on the Network-Side.............................................. 17-37

Address Registration Information on the User-Side.................................................... 17-39


Configuring Connections ATM Circuits

03Iss

Cs)ined in

e basisrs and, seeumber

end ofol) to

ller toitched

nnect toched

ctionomes

edge6 (0/

often1-63 of

ATM CircuitsGDC Xedge supports point-to-point and point-to-multipoint Virtual Channel Connections (VCand Virtual Path Connections (VPCs). These connections can be established and maintathree different ways:

• Permanent Virtual Connections (PVCs, PVPs) These are connections that are manually configured VCCs (or VPCs) on a node-by-nodto effect the end user connectivity. These connections are configured in Slot-0 Controllestay in place until manually torn down. For more information about PVCs and PVPsPermanent Connections on page 3-7 of the Technical Reference Manual, Part N032R310.

• Soft Permanent Virtual Connections (SPVCs, SPVPs) These are connections that are manually configured on one Slot Controller that is on onea network. These types of connections use SVC “mechanisms” (i.e. UNI Signaling Protocestablish VCCs (or VPCs) across an ATM network to a remote GDC Xedge Slot Controeffect the end user connectivity. For more information about SPVCs and SPVPs, see SwConnections on page 3-13 of the Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310.

• Switched Virtual Connections (SVCs) These are connections that are initiated (or requested) by an end user that wishes to coanother end user of the ATM network. Any GDC Xedge Cell Controller supports SwitConnections.

MOLN

GDC Xedge uses the Management Overlay Network (MOLN) to support connecommunication between nodes. If enabled it can run on all links of each node. MOLN becactive when you select NNI for the link type. It allows TCP/IP activities supported by GDC Xto run between nodes (i.e. Telnet, SNMP, and TFTP). By default, MOLN uses VPI=0, VCI=116) for nni links.

Signaling

By default, GDC Xedge uses the value of VPI=0 and VCI=5 as the signaling channel (0/5,referred to as the signaling channel). For a detailed explanation refer to Signaling on pagethe Technical Reference Manual (Part Number 032R310).


Configuring Connections Configuring an GDC Xedge Network

ices.ctions.s. An

y. Thisations,

Configuring an GDC Xedge NetworkThe following describes how to configure an GDC Xedge network to provide ATM layer servBefore you begin we recommend that you draw a map of your network that shows your conneBy doing so you will be able to remain oriented as you navigate through the menu itemexample network map is shown below in Figure 17-1.

Figure 17-1 Example Network Map

In this example there are four types of user data: ethernet, video/audio, voice, and frame relanetwork map contains six Xedge nodes and notes the physical line types, Slot/Link combinSlot-0 E.164 addresses, Node IDs and interface types.

Ethernet

nni nni

nni

nninni

nni

nni

nni

nni

Ethernet

nni

Lexington

White Plains

Bronx

Stamford

Cromwell

Slot-0Link-1 Slot-6

Link-0

Slot-8Link-0

Slot-10Link-2

E.164= 1761650000

E.164= 3271850000

E.164= 1251550000

E.164= 6801950000

Slot-0Link-0

Slot-6Link-0

Slot-8Link-1

Slot-10Link-1

Slot-4Link-1

Slot-1Link-0

Slot-0Link-1

Slot-9Link-0

Slot-3Link-0

Slot-5Link-0

Slot-0Link-0

Slot-1Link-0

Slot-6Link-1

Slot-0Link-0

Slot-4Link-1

Slot-6Link-1

Slot-7Link-0

ip= 172.16.7.74

ip= 173.16.8.81

Slot-0Link-1

Slot-2Link-2

Slot-6Link-1

Slot-10Link-2

Slot-6Link-1

NaugatuckE.164= 0321750000

E.164= 4911950000

OC-3

OC-3

DS1

DS1

DS1

DS1

DS-3

OC-3

OC-3

ETH

ETHFRC

FRC

VSM

Node ID= 001

Node ID= 002

Node ID= 003Node ID= 004

Node ID= 005

Node ID= 006

Frame Relay Router

Frame Relay Router

ACS

ECC

ECC

ACS

ACS

ACS

DS-3DS-3

ACPACP

ACP

ACP

ACP

ACP

DS-3

ECC ACSECC

ECC

ACS

OC-3

ACP

DS-3

VE

VE

PBX

VSMVE

VE

ETH

VSM

VSM

VSM

Ethernet

ip= 192.6.17.84

PBX

PBXPBX

PBX


Configuring Connections Network Configuration Summary

03Iss

iption

, Part

sical

theeed toto the

itch.

, etc.)

and

Network Configuration Summary

Configure Slot-0 Overview

The following is an overview of the settings required for Slot-0 (you can find a detailed descrin Configure Slot-0 on page 17-9):

• Configure the port types (UNI, NNI, non-ATM) for each link

• Configure Switching Ranges (VCC and VPC Switching ranges)

• Assign ATM addresses (E.164 Address) for the node

• Assign DTL Node IDs for the node (for more information see Routing on page 3-25 of the Technical Reference ManualNumber 032R310)

• Define the Line Interface Modules used for the Slot Controllers (defined in the Slot-0 PhyLayout).

• Assign an IP address for the node with the “hosts” file

• Warm start (normal) the node

Specific Slot Controllers (non-Slot-0) Configurations

You can find detailed instructions for configuring specific Slot Controller/LIM combinations inappropriate Slot Controller chapters of this manual. To perform these configurations you ntelnet to the specific Slot Controller that you want to configure. For detailed information refer appropriate chapter for the specific Slot Controller. Generally you need to:

• Configure the Physical layer attributes (framing, encoding, scrambler, etc.)

These configurations are specific to the Slot Controller/LIM combinations you have in your sw

• Configure Link Resources (Egress bandwidth allocation: SVC Bwd rate max)

• Configure SVC attributes (Protocol Timers, Protocol type, UPC support enabled/disabled

Routing

GDCs Xedge supports 2 forms of routing:

• Static Routing Tables

• Dynamic PNNI Routing (Please refer to Chapter 19: PNNI Configuration for more information)

Static Routing Tables

The GDC ProSphere Routing Manager (RTM) provides static routing table generationmanagement for a network of GDC Xedge ATM switches.



ables.blished.te Slot thenrk, isy the. For

nd

outing

s in

edure

n refer

SPVC and SVC routing in a network of GDC Xedge switches is achieved through routing tThese tables must be present within the Slot Controllers before SPVCs or SVCs can be estaRouting tables are files that are generated by the RTM then downloaded to each appropriaController. You can also create routing tables by entering the routing information manuallydownloading those files to the Slot Controllers, but this method, even for a small ATM netwoan extremely time consuming task. The purpose of the Routing Manager is to simplifgeneration and distribution of these routing table files to the Slot Controllers in your networkmore details about the RTM refer to the Routing Manager User Guide (Publication No. 910041,packaged with the RTM software) and the ProSphere-Routing Manager Release Notes aInstallation Guide, Publication No. 032R904.

The following is a generalized description of the RTM steps used to generate and distribute rtables to the Slot Controllers in your network.

• Define your network topology

• Assign weighting factors for route calculations

• Generate Routing tables off-line for examination (if necessary)

• Perform a full installation of the selected routing tables

Configure the PVCs

All PVCs are set in Slot-0. You can find a detailed description for configuring existing PVCConfiguring a PVC on page 17-14.

Adding PVCs

The following is a generalized description of how to add a PVC. You can find a detailed procfor adding new PVCs in Add and define the PVC on page 17-16.

• Add a PVC entry.

• Enter the destination slot, destination link, destination VCI, and destination VPI.

• Enter the source slot, source link, source VCI, and source VPI.

• Set the Quality of Service.

• Configure the cell rates, bucket max sizes, and policing modes.

• Select Point-to-Point or multicast support.

• Select Uni-directional or Bi-directional (for multicast only).

• Start the PVC.

Configure Multicast PVCs

To configure a multicast PVC use the following general procedure. For a detailed explanatioto Configuring a Multicast PVC later in this chapter.

• Create a PVC, select Multicast from the PVC Configuration/Status table then type ay(selecting Yes) for a multicast PVC.

Note When adding a PVC and setting the destination VCI (Dest. VCI) on the PVC Configuration/Status Table screen, the screen displays “Dest. VCI [0-65535]”. The range displayed in brackets is not correct. The actual range is 0-816.



03Iss

ith a

lticast)

• Create another PVC with the same Source Slot and Link and source VCI/VPI but wdifferent Destination Slot and Link.

The Source Slot/Link, Source VCI/VPI, is referred to as the root. Each destination for the muPVC is referred to as a leaf. The Num_Leaves field (in the PVC Configuration/Status tableindicates the number of multicast PVC destinations.



PVCs

tatus

Xedge

Configure the SPVCs

SPVCs are set in any Slot Controller. You can find a detailed description of configuring Slater in this chapter under the heading: Configuring an SPVC. The following is a generalizeddescription of how to add a SPVC.

• Telnet to the desired Slot Controller and access the SPVC Configuration/Status table.

• Add a SPVC entry.

• Set the Quality of Service.

• Enter values for the source link, source VCI, and source VPI in the SPVC Configuration/Stable.

• Enter values for the destination address, target VCI, target VPI.

• Configure the cell rates, bucket max sizes, and policing modes.

• Start the SPVC

Establish SVC Support Requirements

SVC connections originate and terminate outside the GDC Xedge network. For an GDC network to support SVC connections the following must be configured:

• Addresses must be entered for each GDC Xedge Network Node,

• Routing Tables must be loaded into each GDC Xedge Slot Controller,

• Egress Values must be set for the Physical SAPs (SVC Bwd Rate Max).

The following must be done only if you plan to isolate Slot Controllers within a node:

• Configure the Virtual SAPs.

The following must be done only if you plan to enable Multiple signaling Control Channels:

• Configure the Logical SAPs (this requires disabling the appropriate physical SAPs).


Configuring Connections Configure Slot-0

03Iss

s an

for

t

Configure Slot-0You can find the details for configuring Slot Controllers in earlier chapters. The following ioverview of the settings required for Slot-0 to provide ATM layer services.

1. Go to the Slot-0 Controller and select Manage configuration from the Root Menu.

2. Select PVC configuration/status. The PVC Configuration/Status screen appears.

3. Select PVC resource table. The PVC Resource Table screen appears.

4. Type an e for Extra detail and perform the following for each link in the node.(Use Goto or the Up / Down commands to select the appropriate link.) Set the following each link:

• Configure the Port Types

• Configure Switching Ranges (VCC and VPC Switching Ranges)

• Assign an ATM addresses (E.164 Address)

• LECS Network Prefix

• Assign DTL Node IDs

• Configure the Physical Table

• Assign a Node IP Address

Configure the Port Types

You should have configured the Port Type in Configuring Link Resources on page 16-7 of Chapter 16: Bandwidth Allocation and Reservation. If not, perform the following for each SloController entry in the PVC Resource Table (detail screen):

1. Select Link type .

2. At the prompt select from uni, nni, b ici, or non atm link. The link type must be nni if youplan to use MSCC.



r moreumber

t

umber

Configure Switching Ranges (VCC and VPC Switching Ranges)

GDC Xedge provides defaults for the switching ranges that you can change if required. Fodetails refer to Switching Ranges on page 3-5 of the Technical Reference Manual (Part N032R310).

You should have configured the switching ranges in Configuring Link Resources on page 16-7 ofChapter 16: Bandwidth Allocation and Reservation. If not, perform the following for each SloController entry in the PVC Resource Table (detail screen):

1. Select PVC VCI range start and enter the appropriate value.

2. Select PVC VCI range end and enter the appropriate value.

3. Select PVC VPI range start and enter the appropriate value.

4. Select PVC VPI range end and enter the appropriate value.

5. Select VP range start and enter the appropriate value.

6. Select VP range end and enter the appropriate value.

7. Return to the Root Menu then select Slot-0 Configuration/Status.

Assign an ATM addresses (E.164 Address)

For more details refer to Addressing on page 3-21 of the Technical Reference Manual (Part N032R310).

1. Go to the Slot-0 Root Menu and select Manage configuration. The MIB Display andManagement screen appears.

2. Select the Slot 0 Configuration/Status menu option. The Slot 0 Configuration/Status screenappears.

3. Select the Slot 0 E.164 Address: option.

4. At the prompt, enter the E.164 address for this node (10-digits).



03Iss

ECS

the

y theress

eto the

done

LECS Network Prefix

If you have a LANE (Lan Emulation) application, use the following procedure to enter the LNetwork Prefix (if you are at the Slot 0 Configuration/Status screen, skip to step 3):



3. Select the LECS Network Prefix: option. At the prompt, enter the LECS Network Prefixaddress.

The LECS Network Prefix (Lan Emulation Configuration Server) address is the interpreter for‘Well Known Address’ used for ATM end (user) stations. The LECS Network Prefix address usesthe NSAP ICD format comprised of 13 hex bytes or 26 digits. This address is defined bphysical location of the associated Node/Slot/Link. The NNNSSLL (Node/Slot/Link) add(GDC format) can also be used as a LECS Network Prefix address.

Slot-0 is used to propagate the LECS Network Prefix address to all other Slot Controllers in thshelf. The address is used by the ‘other’ Slot Controllers to route the ‘Well Known Address’ appropriate Node/Slot/Link.

Assign DTL Node IDs

If you are at the Slot 0 Configuration/Status screen, skip to step 3.



3. Select the Slot0 Switch ID: option and enter the DTL node ID.

Configure the Physical Table

Define the Line Interface Module used with each Slot Controller. This should have beenearlier when you configured the individual Slot Controllers. If you are at the Slot 0 Configuration/Status screen, skip to step 3.



3. Select Physical Layout then type an e for Extra detail .

4. Select DLIM type . Select the appropriate DLIM type for each Slot Controller (use the Gotocommand or the Up / Down commands to select the appropriate entry).

Note In the Slot-0 Configuration screen, the item LECS ESI is not used at this time.



.1.32,

other

Assign a Node IP Address

Use the following procedure to assign an IP address for the node with the “hosts” file:

1. Select File system from the Slot-0 Root Menu.

2. Select Alter.

3. Type hosts and press the Enter key.

4. Enter the IP address for Slot-0 on the first line (for example, if your IP address is 192.10type: ipaddress=192.10.1.32 ).

5. Type in any shortcuts (aliases) that you want to use for your network (i.e. if you call annode “Bronx” and its IP address is 172.10.2.24, type bronx=172.10.2.24 ).

6. When you are finished configuring Slot-0, you need to warm start the node by selecting Warmstart from the Root Menu. At the prompt, type n for Normal restart.


Configuring Connections Specific Slot Controller Network Configurations

03Iss

inntroller

your

bled,

Specific Slot Controller Network ConfigurationsYou can find detailed instructions for configuring specific Slot Controller/LIM combinationsearlier chapters. To perform these configurations you need to telnet to each specific Slot Coin the node.

• Configure the Physical layer attributes (framing, encoding, scrambler, etc.)These configurations are specific to the Slot Controller/LIM combinations you have in switch. For detailed information refer to appropriate chapter for the Slot Controller.

• Configure Link Resources (Egress bandwidth allocation: SVC Bwd rate max). This ensures that the physical link can support the cells per second from the switch. Table 17-1lists the physical interfaces (lines) and the value to enter for the SVC Bwd rate max (cell ratemaximum). This should have been done in the section entitled Configuring Link Resources inChapter 16: Bandwidth Allocation and Reservation.

• Configure SVC attributes (Protocol Timers, Protocol type, GCRA support enabled/disaetc.). This should have been done in the section entitled Configuring Link Resources in Chapter16: Bandwidth Allocation and Reservation.

Table 17-1 Physical Interfaces and values for SVC Bwd Rate Max

Interface Line Rate ATM Transfer Rate Cell per Second

DS1 1.544 Mb 1.536 Mb 3641

E1 2.048 Mb 1.920 Mb 4830

J2 6.312 Mb 6.144 Mb 14,491

E3-HEC 34.368 Mb 33.920 Mb 81,056

E3-PLCP 34.368 Mb 30.528 Mb 74,386

DS3-PLCP 44.736 Mb 40.704 Mb 96,000

DS3-HEC 44.736 Mb 44.210 Mb 104,269

OC-3C 155.520 Mb 149.760 Mb 353,207

TAXI 100 Mb 235,850

MJPEG Audio 1.948 Mb 1.728 Mb 4600

MJPEG @ 5 Mb 13,300

MJPEG @ 10 Mb 26,600

MJPEG @ 15 Mb 39,900

MJPEG @ 20 Mb 53,200

MJPEG @ 25 Mb 66,500

CE w/DS1 1.544 Mb 4107

CE w/E1 2.048 Mb 5447

CE w/DS3 118,979

VH320 (channel) 505 Kbps 384 Kbps 1200

Table 17-1


Configuring Connections PVCs

3-7 of

Xedget and

pported.

forward

ce, 0x or urce

I

the

PVCs

You can find an overview of Permanent Virtual Connections (PVCs) under PVCs on pagethe Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310.

Resources

The link resource table is used to set the ATM resources available for each link. The GDC switch software performs a Connection Admission Control function during the establishmenclearing of PVCs to ensure that a link is not configured to use more resources than can be su

Configuring a PVC


Map the PVC End Points (Connection Path)Draw a map of the connection.

Add and define the PVCAdd the PVC, define the source slot, link, VCI, VPI and destination slot, link, VCI, VPI.

Set the Quality of Servicecbr, vbr-high, vbr-medium, or vbr-low.

Configure the cell rates, bucket max sizes, and policing modesFor all QoS set the peak forward rate, size, and mode. For vbr-class PVCs set the sustainedrate, mode and size, and the sustained backward rate, mode and size.

Select Point-to-point or Multicast SupportSelect whether this PVC is point-to-point PVC or a multicast PVC.

Configure Uni-directional or Bi-directional (for multicast only)If it is a Multicast PVC select whether it is Uni-directional or Bi-directional.

Start the PVC

Note Bandwidth resource for PVCs, SPVCs and SVCs are combined into a single shared resourconfigured in the SVC Resource Table. The Cell Rate resource in the PVC resource table (nowredundant) is only used once when the GDC Xedge software is upgraded to v4.2x from v4.v4.1x. In this case the resources from the PVC Resource Table are added to the SVC ResoTable and then are no longer used.

Note The procedure for configuring a PVP is the same as a configuring a PVC except that a VCvalue is not required and the VPI value must fall within the VP switching range.

Note Before you make any change to an existing PVC, you must first “idle” the PVC by selectingvalid option under Status. When you are finished making changes to the PVC, select start PVC to restart the PVC.



03Iss

(map) while

nk-0.twork NNI

Map the PVC End Points

In order to simplify the PVC configuration process we recommend that you draw a diagram of your network and the PVCs you want to create. This map enables you to remain orientednavigating through the PVC configuration procedure.

The key items to note on your map are:

• the PVC path (the source Slot/Link numbers and the destination Slot/Link numbers)

• the physical link types (UNI, NNI, non-ATM)

• the VCI/VPI values

• the physical line type (for capacity)

Figure 17-2 shows an example of a PVC path map.

Figure 17-2 Sample of a PVC Path Map

In this example we want to configure a PVC in node A between Slot-3 Link-0 and Slot-5 LiSlot 3 link 0 is physically connected to a user device so the link type is UNI (user to neinterface). Slot 5 link 0 is connected to another GDC Xedge node so this connection is(network to network).

Note PVCs or SPVCs on the CHFRC Adaptation controller can be established at its Link-0 connection only.

Slot 3

Link 0

Link 1

Slot 5

Link 0

Link 1

Slot 5

Link 0

Link 1

Slot 9

Link 0

Link 1

UNI

NNI

Node “A”

Node “B”

VPI = 1VCI = 32

VPI = 2VCI = 32

VPI = 1VCI = 32

VPI = 2VCI = 32

VPI = 2VCI = 800

VPI = 2VCI = 800

NNIUNI

DS-3

User Data

User Data



main

:

n

Add and define the PVC

All PVCs are established and maintained in the Slot-0 Controller. The PVC you create will rein Slot-0 until you delete it.

1. Go to the Slot-0 Root Menu and type m to select Manage Configuration. The MIB Displayand Management screen appears.

2. Enter the PVC Configuration/Status menu option number, and press Enter. The PVCConfiguration/Status screen appears.

3. Select the PVC Configuration/Status table option and press Enter. The PVCConfiguration/Status table appears as shown in Figure 17-3.

Figure 17-3 PVC Configuration/Status Table

4. Select Add entry to add a PVC connection. The software will prompt you for the following

• Destination Slot

• Destination Link

• Destination VCI

• Destination VPI

• Source Slot

Note When you add a PVC and set the destination VCI (Dest. VCI) on the PVC Configuration/Status Table screen, the screen displays “Dest. VCI [0-816]” which is the range for all Slot Controllers except the ECC. The range displayed in brackets is not correct if the destinatio(target) is an ECC Controller. The actual range for the ECC Controller is 0-65535.


Switch Name: Slot 0 SYS PVC Configuration/Status Table SW VersionNo Dest Slot Dest Link Dest VCI Dest VPI Src Slot Src Link Src VCI Src VPI

0 2 0 50 1 0 0 50 11 2 0 55 1 0 0 55 12 2 0 56 1 0 0 56 13 2 0 60 1 0 0 60 6

Select option:Add entry, Enter entry number to edit, Extra detail, Goto row,Index search, Kill entry, Move entry, Right, eXit



03Iss

u mustts in

se

• Source Link

• Source VCI

• Source VPI

Refer to the “map” you created in the previous section (Map the PVC End Points) when enteringthe values for the items above. Note that certain Slot Controllers have specific values that yoenter in the above fields. You can find the specific Slot Controller VPI/VCI requiremenSpecific VPI/VCI Requirements on page 17-17.

5. Type an x to Exit to the PVC Configuration/Status screen.

Specific VPI/VCI Requirements

Note GDC Xedge allows the use of VCI = 1 and VCI = 2 for various applications. Do not use thevalues if you are configuring for a UNI 3.0 application.

Table 17-2 Specific Slot Controller VPI/VCI Requirements

Slot Controller Requirement

All Slot Controllers VPI-0 / VCI-5 is reserved for signaling. VPI-0 / VCI-16 is reserved for MOLN (nni applications only) or ILMI. Note: If you want to use both MOLN and ILMI in your application you

must change the VPI/VCI value for one of them (they cannot both use the default value of VPI-0 /VCI-16).

ECC VCI-0 is reserved. VCI-3 and VCI-4 are reserved for OAM.

ACP/ACS VCI-3 and VCI-4 are reserved for OAM.

CE VPI must be 1 at the CE end of the PVC

SCE VPI must be 1. VCI = [(Link number x 32) + 256 + bundle number]. You must only enter link-0 on the SCE end of the PVC (in the PVC Configuration/Status table). The SCE will determine the actual link number from the VCI value.

VSM The VCI must equal the VSM Bundle Number (on the VSM side of the connection).You must only enter Link-0 on the VSM end of the PVC (in the PVC Configuration/Status table). The VSM will determine the actual link number from the VSM Bundle and Timeslot configurations.

VE VPI must be 1 at the VE end of the PVC

MS/QEDETH

VCI must be tunnel number, VPI must be 1 at the MS/QED or ETH end of the PVC. Configure all VCs to terminate at Link-0.

CHFRC VPI must be 1 at the CHFRC end of the PVC. You must only enter Link 0 on the CHFRC end of the PVC (in the PVC Configuration/Status table). The CHFRC will determine the actual link from its link / time slot / channel configuration.

FRC VPI must be 1 at the FRC end of the PVC. Use Link-0 only.

DXDOC (frame relay) For Link 0: VCI must be DLCI, VPI must be 1For Link 1: VCI must be DLCI + 512, VPI must be 1

DXDOC (frame transport) For Link 0: VCI must be 16, VPI must be 1For Link 1: VCI must be 16, VPI must be 1

Table 17-2



ailedission(Part

ore, Part

ange ch.

Set the Quality of Service

The Quality of Service (QoS) setting enables you to define the priority of traffic. For a detdescription of how QoS relates to policing and the CAC function refer to the Connection AdmControl section of Chapter 2, Traffic Management of the Technical Reference Manual Number 032R310).

1. Select PVC Configuration/Status table from the PVC Configuration/Status screen.The PVC Configuration/Status table appears.

2. Type an e for Extra detail. The detail of PVC Configuration/Status Table appears as shownin Figure 17-4.

Figure 17-4 Detail of PVC Configuration/Status Table Screen

3. Use either the Goto command or type u or d (for Up / Down) to go to the desired PVC entry.

4. Select Service Ca and then select the desired priority for the traffic on this PVC (for minformation see Chapter 2, Traffic Management of the Technical Reference ManualNumber 032R310). The supported options are:

• cbr

• vbr rt

• vbr nrt

• ubr

Note GDC Xedge sets the QoS to the same class for the entire tree of a Multicast PVC. If you chthe QoS for any part of a multicast tree, the software will change the rest of the tree to mat


Switch Name: Slot 0 SYS PVC Configuration/Status Table SW VersionDetail of PVC Configuration/Status Table entry 0

Dest Slot : 3 08 Sd Fd Mode: off 18 CLP1 Disc : off VBR1 C Dest Link : 1 09 Sd Bd Rate: 0 Dest VCI : 0 10 Bd MBS(Cel: 0 Dest VPI : 5 11 Sd Bd Mode: off Src Slot : 3 12 Service Ca: cbr Src Link : 0 13 Multicast : no Src VCI : 0 14 Direction : bidirect Src VPI : 5 15 Frame Disc: disallow00 Pk Fd Rate: 1000 16 Enable UBR: on01 Fd CDVT(uS: 0 17 Status : running02 Pk Fd Mode: off Error Code: ok03 Pk Bd Rate: 1000 Num Leaves: -04 Bd CDVT(uS: 0 Fwd Int VP: 358005 Pk Bd Mode: off Fwd Int VC: 006 Sd Fd Rate: 0 Bwd Int VP: 357907 Fd MBS(Cel: 0 Bwd Int VC: 0Select option:Add entry, Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row, Kill entry,Move entry, Press ^J for extra help on this item, Summary, eXit



03Iss

ffic toct blishst

nce.ailed

nt

set the

d forward

Select Point-to-point or Multicast Support

PVCs can support point to point connections within a node or can simultaneously send tramultiple links (leaves) from a single source (root). For point to point PVCs you need to seleNoin the Multicast option for the PVC in the PVC Configuration/Status table. If you plan to estaa multicast PVC, select Yes for the Multicast option then the PVC will be ready for multicasupport as described in Configuring a Multicast PVC later in this chapter.


2. Select PVC Configuration/Status.

3. Select PVC configuration/status table. The PVC Configuration/Status Table appears.

4. Select Extra detail and then either Goto or use the Up / Down commands to step to thedesired PVC.

5. Select Multicast then type a n (selecting No) for a point to point PVC or type a y (selectingYes) for a multicast PVC.

Configure Uni-directional or Bi-directional (for multicast only)

1. Select Manage configuration from the root menu then select PVC Configuration/Status.

2. Select PVC configuration/status table.


4. Select Direction, then select Unidirect for cells to flow from the source to the destinatioonly, or Bidirect for traffic on this PVC to additionally flow from the destination to the sourNote that only one leaf of a multicast PVC can support bidirectional traffic. For more detinformation refer to Configuring a Multicast PVC later in this chapter.

Configure the cell rates, bucket max sizes, and policing modes

You can configure the cell rates, bucket max sizes, and policing modes from the Extra detail screenof the PVC Configuration/Status Table (for more information see Chapter 2, Traffic Managemein the Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310).

Set the peak (Pk) values only for cbr class connections. For all vbr class connections sustained (Sd) values in addition to the peak values.

For all classes of connections:

1. Select Pk Fd Rate. This is the amount of peak forward (Source) bandwidth that is reservethis connection. This is the rate at which connections may be policed to in the fordirection and is used for Connection Admission Control.

2. Select Fd CDVT(uS to set the maximum peak bucket size.

3. Select Pk Fd Mode. This is the policing mode in the forward direction. The choices areoffand clp01 disc.

Note Multicast PVCs are supported by all GDC Xedge Cell Controllers, the CE Adaptation Controller, and the VE Adaptation Controller only.



thisection

t isin the

thisection

the

on

C

4. Select Pk Bd Rate. This is the amount of peak backward bandwidth that is reserved forconnection. This is the rate at which connections may be policed to in the backward dirand is used for Connection Admission Control.

5. Select Bd CDVT(uS to set the maximum peak backward bucket size.

6. Select Pk Bd Mode. This is the policing mode in the backward direction. The choices areoffand clp01 disc.

For all vbr class connections:

1. Select Sd Fd Rate. This is the amount of sustained forward (source) bandwidth thareserved for this connection. This is the rate at which connections may be policed to forward direction and is used for Connection Admission Control.

2. Select Fd MBS(Cel to set the maximum sustained bucket size.

3. Select Sd Fd Mode. This is the policing mode in the forward direction. The choices are off,clp0 disc, clp01 disc, and clp0 tag.

4. Select Sd Bd Rate. This is the amount of peak backward bandwidth that is reserved forconnection. This is the rate at which connections may be policed to in the backward dirand is used for Connection Admission Control.

5. Select Bd MBS(Cel to set the maximum sustained bucket size.

6. Select Sd Bd Mode. This is the policing mode in the backward direction. The choices areoff,clp0 disc, clp01 disc, and clp0 tag.

For ECC Controllers Only (see ECC Buffer Management Configuration on page 2-45 of Technical Reference Manual):

1. Select Frame Disc to allow or disallow frame discard (see Egress Cell and Packet Discardpage 2-10 of the Technical Reference Manual).

2. For UBR PVCs, select Enable UBR and set the UBR Tagging option to on if your PVC isdefined as UBR.2 or off for UBR.1.

3. For CBR or VBR PVCs, select CLP1 Disc then map the conformance definition for the PV(on for VBR.2/VBR.3/CBR, or off for VBR.1/CBR.1).



03Iss

your

. The

the

Start the PVC

When you are finished adding and configuring the PVC you must start it so that it is active innetwork.

1. Go to the PVC Configuration/Status Table.


3. Select Status. You can select from the first three options (A, B, and C). Selecting options D,E, and F have no effect. They are used by the MIB only to display the status of the PVCoptions are described in Status Option Descriptions on page 17-21The options are:A - validB - invalidC - start PVCD - notifiedE - runningF - waiting

4. Select start PVC. This starts the PVC.

Status Option Descriptions

Table 17-3 describes the Status options.

Note Before you make any change to an existing PVC, you must first “idle” the PVC by selectingvalid option under Status. When you are finished making changes to the PVC, select start PVC to restart the PVC.

Table 17-3 Status Option Descriptions

Option Description

valid When a PVC is first configured the state is set to valid . If you select valid for an existing PVC, the software idles the circuit. The valid option checks that PVC configuration is within the set parameters and that the PVC is not running (idle).

invalid Setting to Invalid removes the entry from the PVC table and stops running the PVC.

start PVC To start a PVC running the state should be set to start_PVC . The Slot-0 Controller code automatically detects PVCs in the state start_PVC and tries to establish the PVC. If a card goes down then active PVCs are set to start_PVC automatically so when the card comes back up, the PVC is re-established automatically and the card goes to the running state.

notified This is a Status field that is used by the MIB. If it is set to notified , it indicates that the controllers involved in the PVC have been sent a request to establish the PVC. This state is transitory and should not occur normally. If it does occur, there is a problem with an applicable Slot Controller.

running This is a status field that is used by the MIB. The running state indicates that the PVC is active .

waiting This is a status field that is used by the MIB.

Table 17-3



f the

pair

affic

sourcetionlticastticular

e Slot

g the Slot

e Slots the

ller.

Configuring a Multicast PVC

You can find an overview of Multicasting under Multicast Connections on page 3-10 oTechnical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310.

PVC Multicast Configuration Summary

• Add and Configure a PVC with multicast support enabled. The source Slot Controller/Linkand the source VCI/VPI is the root.

Add a PVC, select Multicast from the PVC Configuration/Status table then type a y (selectingYes) for a multicast PVC. Select Mcst Type and select either A-bidirect or B-unidirect (youmust select uni-directional for an egress logical multicast). Assign all desired trmanagement parameters.

• For a spatial multicast, add another PVC (with multicast support enabled) using the sameSlot Controller/Link pair and source VCI/VPI as the first PVC but with a different destinaslot and link. This is the first leaf. The system assigns internal VPI/VCI values to each muPVC configured as well as reports the VPI/VCI in use and the number of leaves this parPVC has associated with it.

If desired, create more PVCs (with multicast support enabled) using the same sourcController/Link pair and source VCI/VPI as the first PVC but with different destination. These are the leaves.

• For an egress logical multicast PVC, add a PVC (with multicast support enabled) usinsame source Slot Controller/Link pair and source VCI/VPI and the same destinationController/Link as the first PVC, but with a different VPI/VCI value. This is the first leaf.

If desired, create more PVCs (with multicast support enabled) using the same sourcController/Link pair and source VCI/VPI and the same destination Slot Controller/Link afirst PVC, but with different VCI/VPI. These are the leaves.

Note Multicast PVCs are supported by all GDC Xedge Cell Controllers, the CE Adaptation Controller, and the VE/VJLIM, VE/MPG2V Adaptation Controller/LIM combinations only.

Note The VPI must always be 1 when configuring a multicast PVC with a VE Adaptation Contro

Note When used with a VE Adaptation Controller only one leaf of a spatial multicast PVC can support bi-directional traffic. The other leaves must be uni-directional.

Note The VE Adaptation Controller supports a maximum of 2 PVCs per link. A bidirectional multicast PVC counts as one PVC. Unidirectional multicast PVCs each count as one PVC.

Note Starting or stopping one leaf may cause minimal cell loss on other leaves.


Configuring Connections SPVCs

03Iss

rmitsh thery loss see

l Pathat both SVC

es. etc.)Ps on

VCC)s the

re an

SPVCs

An SPVC provides a Virtual Circuit Connection (VCC) across an GDC Xedge network. It pequick recovery from network outages without the need for any manual intervention. Througuse of alternate routing, the loss of an NNI link between switches results in only a momentaof service until the SPVC is re-established over a different NNI link. For more informationSPVCs on page 3-13 of the Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310.

SPVPs

The only thing that distinguishes an SPVP from an SPVC is that an SPVP provides a VirtuaConnection (VPC) across an GDC Xedge network. To configure a SPVP, select a VPI value ends of the connection that is within the VP range (between VP Start and VP End of theResource menu for the Links of the source and destination). All other parameters (rates, modare configured exactly as an SPVC would be configured. For more information see SPVpage 3-14 of the Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310.

Configuring an SPVC

SPVCs are manually configured connections that provide a Virtual Channel Connection (across an GDC Xedge network. Before you can configure SPVCs your network needfollowing:

• Every node in the path must have a unique Node ID.

• Signaling must be enabled on all appropriate Slot Controllers.

• There must be enough remaining bandwidth for the QoS class of the SPVC.

• There must be valid routing tables loaded in the appropriate network nodes.

SPVC Configuration Summary

Add an SPVC entry

Configure the QoS

Define the Source

Define the Destination

Configure the cell rates, MBS, and policing modes

Start the SPVC

SPVC Configuration Procedure

All SPVCs are configured in specific Slot Controllers. Use the following procedure to configuSPVC:

Telnet to the specific slot and access the SPVC Configuration table as follows:

1. Select Manage configuration from the Root Menu of the Slot Controller. The MIB Displayand Management screen appears.

2. Select the SVC Configuration/Status option. The SVC Configuration/Status screenappears.



uential

3. Select the SPVC Configuration/Status table option. The SPVC Configuration/Status tablescreen appears as shown in Figure 17-5.

Figure 17-5 SPVC Configuration/Status Table Screen

Add an SPVC entry

1. Type an a to select Add entry. The software will prompt you for an ID value (ID: [1-500]) forthe SPVC. This value is used for reference to index the SPVCs. You can use seqindexing or set number ranges to group your SPVCs.

2. Type e to select Extra Detail. The Detail of SVPC Configuration/Status Table screenappears as shown in Figure 17-6.


Switch Name:Slot x SYS SPVC Configuration/Status Table SW VersionNo ID Call ID Source Link Dest Address Pk Fd Rate(CPS) Peak Frd Mode

0 1040 49 0 192100100016000 48 off1 1041 50 0 192100100016000 48 off2 1042 51 0 192100100016000 48 off3 1043 52 0 192100100016000 48 off4 1044 53 0 192100100016000 48 off5 1045 54 0 192100100016000 48 off6 1046 55 0 192100100016000 48 off7 1047 56 0 192100100016000 48 off8 1048 57 0 192100100016000 48 off9 1049 58 0 192100100016000 48 off10 1050 59 0 192100100016000 48 off11 1051 60 0 192100100016000 48 off12 1052 61 0 192100100016000 48 off13 1053 62 0 192100100016000 48 off14 1054 63 0 192100100016000 48 off15 1055 64 0 192100100016000 48 offSelect option:Add entry, Down, Enter entry number to edit, Extra detail, Goto row,Kill entry, Move entry, Press ^J for extra help on this item,disPlay route, Right, eXit



03Iss

er. Thedgehat the


Figure 17-6 Detail of SVC Configuration/Status Table Screen

Configure the QoS

When GDC Xedge SPVCs are configured, there are certain traffic parameter values to entitems listed in Table 17-4 indicate which parameters must be configured (yes) for the GDC XeQuality of Service (QoS) type and parameters that do not have to be configured (no). Note tparameters that do not have to be configured are ignored.

Table 17-4 Traffic Parameter Values

Traffic Parameter cbr vbr-rt vbr-nrt ubr

Pk Fd Rate(CPS) yes yes yes yes

Peak Frd Mode yes yes yes yes

Pk Bd Rate(CPS) yes yes yes yes

Peak Bwd Mode yes yes yes yes

Sd Fd Rate(CPS) no yes yes no

Max Fd Burst Sz no yes yes no

Sus Frd Mode no yes yes no

Sd Bd Rate(CPS) no yes yes no

Max Bd Burst Sz no yes yes no

Sus Bwd Mode no yes yes no

Table 17-4



u can).

is

listed

he be thedress GDC

l, Part

nt ofrwardrate atction

ard

Peakwidthwhichction

ard

ese

1. If you just added a new SPVC entry, that entry will be selected (displayed). Otherwise youse the Goto command or the Up / Down commands to step to the desired ID value (SPVC

2. Select QoS Class and select the desired service for this link. The options are; cbr, vbr-rt , vbr-nrt , and ubr.

Define the Source

1. Enter a value for the source link. This is the local Physical Link that this connection associated with.

2. Enter a value for the source VCI.

3. Enter a value for the source VPI.

Certain Slot Controllers have specific VCI/VPI requirements. The specific requirements arein Table 17-2 on page 17.

Define the Destination

1. Enter a value for the destination address. This is the Called Party for this SPVC request. TCalled Party can reside in the local node, or can be another port on this card, or cansame port on this card (for a diagnostic loopback). For more information about the adformat, see the section on Addressing in the GDC Xedge Connections chapter of theXedge Switch Technical Reference manual, part number 032R310.

2. Enter a value for the target VCI .

3. Enter a value for the target VPI .

Configure the cell rates, MBS, and policing modes

For more information see Chapter 2, Traffic Management of the Technical Reference ManuaNumber 032R310.

1. Select Pk Fd Rate to set the maximum peak ingress cell rate (in CPS). This is the amouPeak Forward Bandwidth that is necessary for this connection. Note that the FoBandwidth defined at the Source is the Backward Bandwidth at the Target. This is the which connections may be policed to in the Forward direction and is used for ConneAdmission Control.

2. Select Pk Fd Mode to set the ingress policing mode. This is Policing mode in the Forwdirection. The choices are clp01 discard or off.

3. Select Pk Bd Rate to set the maximum peak egress bucket size. This is the amount of Backward Bandwidth that is reserved for this connection. Note that the Backward Banddefined at the Source is the Forward Bandwidth at the Target. This is the rate at connections may be policed to in the Backward direction and is used for ConneAdmission Control.

4. Select Pk Bd Mode to set the egress policing mode. This is Policing mode in the Backwdirection. The choices are clp01 discard or off.

Note The software allows the use of VCI = 1 and VCI = 2 for various applications. Do not use thvalues if you are configuring for a UNI 3.0 application.



03Iss

ext

thiset tot, the

teriavent has

p orected.r the

or

r-class

inedwidthwhichission

urst

ard

unt ofkwardate atction

urst

ard

e

5. Select Timeout Connect Time to set the delay (after a failed connection) before the nconnection attempt.

6. Select Num of Retries to set the number of times that the software will attempt to connectSPVC. If the value is 0, the software will try forever to connect the call. If the value is s10, the software will try 10 times to connect the call. After the 10th unsuccessful attempsoftware will put this SPVC in the idle state.

7. Select Alert Cfg to set SNMP trap messaging (if desired). This allows the selection of criused to generate an SNMP trap message (or event table entry) when the selected eoccurred. These choices are:no trap - No trap or Event will ever be generated.fail - A Trap or event will occur for each and every failed connect attempt.fail or clear - A Trap or event will occur for each and every failed connect attempt. A traevent will also be generated when the SPVC is in the active state and becomes disconnfail all attempts - A Trap or event will occur when the call has not been able to connect foNum of Retries value.call success - A Trap or event will occur when a SPVC has successfully connected.trap all - A Trap or event will occur for all of the events above.trap state change - A Trap or event will occur when the ‘state’ - active to disconnecteddisconnected to active - of the SPVC has changed.

For all vbr-class connections:

The following steps are not necessary for cbr-class connections but are required for vbconnections as described in the table under the heading Configure the QoS earlier in this chapter:

1. Select Sd Fd Rate to set the maximum sustained cell rate. This is the amount of SustaForward Bandwidth that is necessary for this connection. Note that the Forward Banddefined at the Source is the Backward Bandwidth at the Target. This is the rate at connections may be policed to in the Forward direction and is used for Connection AdmControl.

2. Select Max Fd Burst Sz to set the maximum ingress burst size. This is the Maximum BSize (MBS) in the forward direction only.

3. Select Sus Fd Mode to set the ingress policing mode. This is Policing mode in the Forwdirection. The choices are off, clp0 discard, clp01 discard or clp0 tag.

4. Select Sd Bd Rate to set the egress bandwidth necessary for this SPVC. This is the amoPeak Backward Bandwidth that is necessary for this connection. Note that the BacBandwidth defined at the Source is the Forward Bandwidth at the Target. This is the rwhich connections may be policed to in the Backward direction and is used for ConneAdmission Control.

5. Select Max Bd Burst Sz to set the maximum ingress burst size. This is the Maximum BSize (MBS) in the forward direction only.

6. Select Sus Bwd Mode to set the egress policing mode. This is Policing mode in the Backwdirection. The choices are off, clp0 discard, clp01 discard or clp0 tag.

Configure Connection Priority

1. Select Priority Level then select Level1 to Level5 to prioritize the connection or select none to have a normal SPVC connection. Notes: The Preemption On/Off in the SVC ResourcTable must be set to Enable if VC Preemption is desired.



ting

Start the SPVC

1. Select Call State then select Call Setup to start the SPVC.

Note Before you make any change to an existing SPVC, you must first “idle” the SPVC by selecthe idle option under Call State. When you are finished making changes to the SPVC, select Call Setup to restart the SPVC.


Configuring Connections SPVC Multicast

03Iss

uires of sloth

:

10 of

ints iniatedk. Thisns or

d userarties

up the

SPVC MulticastThis section describes SPVC multicast terms and configuration. A multicast circuit reqallocated resources as with any SPVC. To accomplish this task, and minimize the numberwarm starts, the SPVC Multicast Configuration procedure is performed in conjunction witresource allocation procedures in Chapter 16: Bandwidth Allocation and Reservation. Whereapplicable, links are provided to locate the associated procedures.

In the configuration screens, the following abbreviations are used as part of multicast set-up

• pt = point

• mpt = multipoint

SPVC Multicast Configuration Overview

You can find more information about Multicasting under Multicast Connections on page 3-the Technical Reference Manual, Part Number 032R310.

SPVC multicast is a uni-directional broadcast of cells from one point to multiple end user pothe ATM network. The tree, or root, receives cells from outside the ATM network that are init(or requested) by an end user that wishes to connect to multiple end users of the ATM networis the same as a point-to-point circuit with the exception of the cells having multiple destinatioleafs.

The SPVC multicast tree replicates the cells in a forward direction to the leafs, or multiple enpoints of the ATM network. An SPVC multicast circuit supports up to 25 trees and up to 500 p(leafs) per tree (see note below for limitations).

To Configure an SPVC Multicast Circuit:

• Configure the multicast resources by setting the Max Pt-Mpt Trees, and the Max Parties perTree in the SVC Configuration/Status. Refer to the section Allocating Physical SAPResources in Chapter 16: Bandwidth Allocation and Reservation.

• Configure the connection type in the SPVC Configuration/Status Table as described inConfigure the Connection Type on page 17-30.

• Configure the SPVC parameters as you would in a normal SPVC connection. To set SPVCs, refer to Configuring an SPVC on page 17-23.

Note SPVC logical multicast is only supported by ECC and new A-series Cell Controllers (ACP: 032M024-002, 032M025-002, 032M026-002, 032M027-002 and greater, ACS: 032M028-002,

032M029-002, 032M030-002, 032M031-002 and greater). Adaptation Controllers do not support logical multicast.



xceed

oose

The Max Pt-Mpt Trees and Max Parties per Tree

An SPVC multicast circuit can have up to 25 trees (Max Pt-Mpt Trees) and up to 500 Max Partiesper Tree (leafs). For a tree using a Cell Controller, the product of the trees and leafs cannot e500 (Parties). The following describes the trees X leafs = parties equation:

Example:An SPVC multicast circuit comprised of Max Pt-Mpt Trees=2 and Max Parties per Tree=250 (orleafs) has 500 parties (2 trees X 250 leafs = 500 parties).

Configure the Connection Type

The Connection Type describes the multicast circuit topology. There are four selections to chfrom:

A-pt-ptB-pt-mpt rootC-pt-mpt leafD-bidirectional root

The Connection Type is set in the slot where the multicast originates from (root). Pt-Mptconnections are uni-directional. Only forward data rates must be specified. Figure 17-7 gives anexample of a point to multipoint circuit and the Connection Type settings required.

Note For an emulated LAN, you must set a minimum of 2 Pt-Mpt Trees; one for the LES (Lan Emulation Server), and one for the BUS (Broadcast Unknown Server).

Note When configuring Max Pt-Mpt Trees, a warm start is not required. But when setting Max Parties per Tree, a warm start is required.



03Iss

f n

t)

the

Figure 17-7 Sample Point to Multipoint Circuit

For the SPVC Multicast Tree shown in Figure 17-7, the following is the Connection Type for:

• point 1 to point 2 select: B-pt-mpt root

• point 1 to point 3 select: C-pt-mpt leaf

• point 1 to point 4 select: C-pt-mpt leaf

SPVC Multicast Configuration

Before performing the procedure, configure the multicast resources by setting the number oMaxPt-Mpt Trees and Max Parties per Tree. Refer to Allocating Physical SAP Resources opage 16-10 of Chapter 16, Bandwidth Allocation and Reservation. After allocating the resources tothe multicast, continue with the following procedure.

1. From the Root Menu, telnet (by selecting Telnet) to the slot where the multicast tree (roooriginates from.

2. Select Manage Configuration.

3. Select SVC Configuration/Status.

4. From the SVC Configuration/Status screen select SPVC Configuration/Status Table.

5. Refer to Add an SPVC entry in this chapter to add the next connection. After adding connection, continue with step 6.

6. From the SPVC Configuration/Status Table Extra detail screen, select Connection Typeand enter the appropriate connection (A-pt-pt , B-pt-mpt root, C-pt-mpt leaf, or D-bidirectional root ). Refer to the diagram of the SPVC Multicast Tree for Configure theConnection Type details.

pt-mpt root(leaf)

pt-mpt root(tree)

pt-mpt leaf(leaf)

pt-mpt leaf(leaf)

3

4

2

1

SPVC Multicast Tree(1 Tree, 3 Leafs, 3 Parties)



ld for

ch

7. For the root, you must specify the SPVC configuration parameters as you normally wouan SPVC circuit. Refer to Configuring an SPVC in this chapter.

8. Repeat this procedure starting with step 5 for all the leafs on the SPVC multicast tree. For ealeaf configure:

• the Destination Address

• the Source VCI/VPI (same as root VCI/VPI)

• the Destination VCI/VPI


Configuring Connections SVCs

03Iss

n GDCaches

Xedge

anualesults

nk.

nlyused).ssigned

SVCs

SVCs are dynamic connections that originate and terminate at an End Station outside aXedge network. An end station (the calling Party) originates a call request that eventually rean GDC Xedge node and if accepted, the call request is carried all the way through an GDCnetwork to the other party (the called party).

SVCs also permit quick recovery from network outages without the need for any mintervention. Through the use of alternate routing, the loss of an NNI link between switches rin only a momentary loss of service until the SVCs are re-established over a different NNI li

Configuring the Network for SVCs

The following must be configured prior to any SVC connections:

Enter Addresses for each Network NodeThis is done in Slot-0 for each node. For more details refer to Configure Slot-0 Overview earlier inthis chapter.

Configure routingThis is typically done by the Routing Manager. For more details refer to Routing earlier in thischapter.

Set Egress Values for the Physical SAPs (SVC Bwd Rate Max)For more details refer to Specific Slot Controller Network Configurations earlier in this chapter.

Configure the Virtual SAPs (to disable only)For more details refer to The amount of bandwidth for SVC/SPVC/SPVP applications is set ofor the Physical SAPs (when MSCC is not used) and for the Logical SAPs (when MSCC is Virtual SAPs are used to transfer messages across the Switch Fabric thus bandwidth is not ato them.Physical SAPs on page 16-2 of Chapter 16: Bandwidth Allocation and Reservation.

Configure the Max Pt-Pt ConnectionFor more details refer to Max Pt-Pt Connection in Table 16-2 of Chapter 16, SVC Status in theDiagnostics Guide (Part No. 032R500).

Configure the Logical SAPs (MSCC only)For more details refer to MSCC Support Configuration in Chapter 16: Bandwidth Allocationand Reservation.

Configure the Max Pt-Mpt Trees if you are using SPVC MulticastFor more details refer to Allocating Physical SAP Resources in Chapter 16: Bandwidth Allocationand Reservation.

Configure the Max Parties per Tree if you are using SPVC MulticastFor more details refer to Allocating Physical SAP Resources in Chapter 16: Bandwidth Allocationand Reservation.

Configure the LECS Network Prefix if you are using LANE (LAN Emulation)For more details refer to LECS Network Prefix in this chapter.


Configuring Connections Interim Local Management Interface (ILMI)

erfacess.

rface.ork

rk-sideetworkr-side

-sidem theser-side

frome Slot-0 is

E.164its long.

, Link-

tion.tween

dress

tion,

Interim Local Management Interface (ILMI)

This section describes the configuration and usage of the Interim Local Management Int(ILMI) feature of the switch. If you have end user ATM devices, you must set the ILMI addre

ILMI supports the bi-directional exchange of management information related to the UNI inteThe switch currently supports ILMI address registration and two ILMI MIB groups: the NetwPrefix Group and the Address Group.

To set up an ATM connection at the UNI through signaling, both the user-side and the netwomust know the ATM addresses in effect at that UNI. This address consists of two parts: the nprefix and the user part. The network-side of the UNI provides the network prefix, and the useprovides the user part.

ILMI address registration works in the following way. First the network-side informs the userwhich prefix is in use, then the user-side combines this prefix with its own user part to forcomplete ATM address and sends this address back to the network-side. If needed, the umay register more than one address.

The switch assigns a unique network prefix to each Slot/Link. The switch derives the prefixthe Slot-0 IP address (each switch node must have a unique IP address). For example, if thIP address is 202.9.125.0, then the NSAP E.164 prefix for Slot-12, Link-145002020091250120100000000.

When a Slot-0 E.164 address is specified, the switch derives the prefix from the Slot-0 address instead of from IP address. The Slot-0 E.164 address must be between 6 to 15 digFor example, if Slot-0 E.164 address is 2037580000, then the NSAP E.164 prefix for Slot-121 is 45000000203758120100000000.

LMI 4.0 protocol timers take default values as specified by the ATM Forum ILMI 4.0 specificaNumber of polls to declare loss of connectivity, K = 4. Time between polls, T = 5 sec. Time bedetection of connectivity messages, S = 1 sec.

Configuring ILMI

You must set the link type in the PVC Resource Table to UNI in order to activate adregistration for that link.

There are four configurable ILMI parameters per link: VPI and VCI values for the ILMI connectype (network-side or user-side), and the address format.

To change these configurable parameters:

1. Telnet to the slot with the link you want to configure.

2. Type m to select Manage configuration. The MIB Display and Management screen appears.

3. Select ILMI Configuration/Status from the MIB Display and Management screen and theILMI Configuration/Status screen appears, as shown in Figure 17-8.



03Iss

link,

Figure 17-8 ILMI Configuration/Status Screen

4. Select ILMI Configuration Table from the ILMI Configuration/Status screen. Thefollowing ILMI Configuration Table screen appears, as shown in Figure 17-9.

Figure 17-9 ILMI Configuration Table Screen

5. Select the link you wish to configure. Link-0 is already selected. To select a differentselect Goto row and enter the desired link number at the prompt.


Switch Name: Slot x SYS ILMI Configuration/Status SW Version

0 ILMI Configuration Table1 Network Side Control Table2 User Side Control Table



Switch Name: Slot XX SYS ILMI Configuration Table SW VersionNo SAP Physical Link ILMI VPI ILMI VCI ILMI Type ILMI State

0 0 0 0 16 network side stopped1 1 1 0 16 network side stopped2 2 2 0 16 network side stopped3 3 3 0 16 network side stopped4 20 0 0 16 network side stopped5 21 0 0 16 network side stopped6 22 0 0 16 network side stopped7 23 0 0 16 network side stopped8 24 0 0 16 network side stopped9 25 0 0 16 network side stopped10 26 0 0 16 network side stopped11 27 0 0 16 network side stopped12 28 0 0 16 network side stopped13 29 0 0 16 network side stopped14 30 0 0 16 network side stopped15 31 0 0 16 network side stoppedSelect option:Down, Extra detail, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row,Index search, Right, eXit



The

lds is

6. Select Extra detail to display the configurable information concerning the selected link. Detail of ILMI Configuration Table screen appears as shown in Figure 17-10.

Figure 17-10 Detail of ILMI Configuration Table Screen

To select an item to configure, enter the number of that item. A description of the various fieshown in Table 17-5.

Table 17-5 ILMI Configuration Table Parameter Definitions


ILMI VPI Selects/indicates the VPI value for the ILMI connection. The default value is 0.

ILMI VCI Selects/indicates the VCI value for the ILMI connection. The default value is 16.

ILMI Type Selects/indicates the network type, network-side or user-side . The default is network-side .

ILMI State Indicates the state of ILMI. initialized - indicates that the card is starting up, the link is not configured as UNI, or the link is down. connecting - indicates when a UNI link comes up (the ILMI is attempting to connect to the remote site). connected - indicates that the ILMI connection across the UNI is set up.idle - indicates registered statestopped - ILMI connection halted because link is configured as NNI.

Address format Selects/indicates the address format of network-side only. The default format is NSAP E.164.

Default Network Prefix Shows the LECS Network Prefix address for LANE.



Switch Name: Slot XX SYS ILMI Configuration Table SW VersionDetail of ILMI Configuration Table entry 0

SAP : 0 Physical Link : 00 ILMI VPI : 01 ILMI VCI : 162 ILMI Type : network side ILMI State : stopped3 Address Format : nsap icd Default Network Prefix : 470000002200220300002203004 ILMI On/Off : on5 Network Prefix(26 digits) :6 User side ESI(12 digits) : Auto Configuration : off




03Iss

dge

-siden or

been

If using SNMP authentication, set the IP Address to 0.0.0.0 and the community string to ILMIfor the ILMI entry (this is not necessary if ILMI support is turned off; beginning with GDC XeATM Switch Version 4.1.1, you can turn ILMI support on or off).

Address Registration Information on the Network-Side

For a typical application on a UNI port, you configure the GDC Xedge Switch as the networkof the UNI and you configure the ATM end-station, such as an ATM-equipped workstatiorouter, as the user-side of the UNI.

On the network-side, you can check which prefix is in effect and which addresses havesuccessfully registered.

To view the prefix in effect for a link:

1. Select Network Side Control Table from the ILMI Configuration/ Status screen and theNetwork Side Control Table screen appears.

2. Select Extra detail in the Network Side Control Table screen. The Detail of Network SideControl Table screen appears as shown in Figure 17-11.

Figure 17-11 Detail of Network Side Control Table Screen

ILMI On/Off When set to “on ,” the switch will attempt to register the ILMI address. When set to “off ,” no registration will occur.

Network Prefix (26 digits) not used

User side ESI (12 digits) not used

Table 17-5 ILMI Configuration Table Parameter Definitions (Continued)




Switch Name:Slot x SYS Network Side Control Table

Link No :1Prefix ID :1Network Prefix :45002020091252470100000000Status :registered

Select option:Enter option number or e Xit



en

Table 17-6 lists the descriptions of the parameters in the Network Side Control Table Extra detailscreen.

To view registered addresses from the user-side:

1. Select Address Group in the MIB Display and Management screen and the Address Groupscreen appears, as shown in Figure 17-12.

Figure 17-12 Address Group Screen

2. Select AddressTable from the Address Group, and the AddressTable appears as shown inFigure 17-13. The AddressTable screen contains all ATM addresses which have beregistered.

3. Select Extra detail to display the address or addresses registered for each port/link.

Table 17-6 Network Side Control Table Descriptions


Link No Indicates the number of the link being displayed.

Prefix Id Indicates the identification number of the prefix.

Network Prefix Indicates the network prefix in use for the link.

Status Indicates the last successful prefix, either registered or the detail screen is blank, depending on whether the user-side accepted or rejected the last prefix.

Table 17-6


Switch Name:Slot x SYS Address Group

0 :addressTable




03Iss

are, when UNIe GDC

is mayltiple

been

Figure 17-13 Address Table Screen

Table 17-7 lists descriptions of the parameters in the AddressTable Extra detail screen.

Although the GDC Xedge switch is typically the network-side of the UNI interface, therespecial cases when you define the GDC Xedge switch UNI as the user-side, for exampleconnecting a switch to a non-GDC Xedge switch or non-GDC Xedge ATM network using aconnection. In these cases, the non-GDC Xedge switch provides the network prefix and thXedge switch responds with the full ATM address.

Address Registration Information on the User-Side

Note that the GDC Xedge Switch can support the registration of multiple ATM addresses. Thoccur with devices like ethernet hubs, switches, or routers with ATM uplinks that have muphysical devices attached.

On the user-side, you can check which prefix is in effect and which addresses havesuccessfully registered.

Table 17-7 AddressTable Parameter Descriptions


Port Indicates the number of the link being displayed.

Address Indicates the last successful ATM address in effect for the link. The address clears when a new address registration is attempted.

Status Indicates status, either registered or the entire detail screen is blank, depending on whether or not the address has been successfully registered.

Table 17-7


Switch Name:Slot xx SYS AddressTable

Port :1Address :4500202009125247010000000000000000000000Status :registered

Select option:Enter entry number to edit, Press ^J for extra help on this item, Summary, eXit



To view the prefix in effect for a link:

1. Select Prefix Group from the MIB Display and Management screen and the Prefix Groupscreen appears as shown in Figure 17-14.

Figure 17-14 Prefix Group Screen

2. Select NetPrefixTable from the Prefix Group screen, and the NetPrefixTable screen appearsas shown in Figure 17-15.


Switch Name:Slot x SYS Prefix Group

0 :NetPrefixTable




03Iss

Figure 17-15 NetPrefixTable Screen

3. Select Extra detail in the NetPrefixTable screen, and the NetPrefixTable Extra detailappears as shown in Figure 17-16.

Figure 17-16 Detail of NetPrefixTable Screen

Table 17-8 lists a description of the parameters in the NetPrefixTable Extra detail screen.


Switch Name:Slot x SYS NetPrefixTable

No. Port Prefix Status

0 0 450020 valid1 1 450020 valid

Select option:Enter entry number to edit, Extra detail,Press ^J for extra help on this item, e Xit


Switch Name:Slot x SYS NetPrefixTable

Port :1Prefix :45002020091252470000000000Status :registered




To view the address in effect for the UNI link:

1. Select User Side Control Table from the ILMI Configuration/Status screen, and the UserSide Control Table screen appears.

2. Select Extra detail in the User Side Control Table screen, and the User Side Control TableExtra detail screen appears as shown in Figure 17-17.

Figure 17-17 Detail of User Side Control Table

Table 17-9 lists a description of the parameters in the User Side Control Table Extra detail screen.

Table 17-8 NetPrefixTable Parameter Descriptions


Port Indicates the number of the link being displayed.

Prefix Indicates the network prefix in effect for the link.

Status Indicates the last successful prefix, either registered or detail screen is blank, depending on whether the user-side accepted or rejected the last prefix.

Table 17-8


Switch Name:Slot x SYS User Side Control TableDetail of User Side Control Table entry 0

Link No :0Address ID :1ATM Address :4500202009125247000000000000000000000000




03Iss

. Also,
The switch deletes the registration of user-side addresses if the physical UNI line goes downthe switch rejects improperly formatted addresses from the user.
Table 17-9 User Side Control Table Parameter Descriptions


Link No Indicates the number of the link being displayed.

Address Id Indicates the identification number of the address.

ATM address Indicates the ATM address in effect for the link.

Status Indicates the status of the address, either registered or the screen is blank when the network-side has not registered the address.

Table 17-9


03Iss

itch.

3

Chapter 18: System TimingConfiguration

Chapter OverviewThe information in this chapter describes System Timing Configuration for the GDC Xedge swThe topics in this chapter include:

Overview.............................................................................................................................. 18-2


System Timing Without the NTM....................................................................................... 18-4

System Timing References Screen.................................................................................18-4

Primary and Secondary System Timing.........................................................................18-5

System Timing Reference Hierarchy.............................................................................18-8

System Timing Reference Configuration.......................................................................18-8

System Timing With The NTM......................................................................................... 18-11

Configuring the NTM...................................................................................................18-11

Transmit Timing Configuration......................................................................................... 18-22

OC-3c/STM-1 LIM Transmit Timing..........................................................................18-22

DS1/E1 LIM Transmit Timing.....................................................................................18-27

DS3 LIM Transmit Timing..........................................................................................18-30

E3 LIM Transmit Timing.............................................................................................18-32

Serial I/O LIM Receive Timing...................................................................................18-35

Transmit Timing for a LIM Associated with a CE Slot Controller................................... 18-37


System Timing Configuration Overview

atingmingkingDC

ious

OverviewWithin the GDC Xedge switch, network timing may be distributed between nodes by propagtiming information between two physical interfaces using enhanced clocking LIMs. Another tioption, the GDC Xedge Node Timing Module (NTM), used in conjunction with enhanced clocLIMs, enables more flexible support for timing distribution and synchronization within the GXedge switch. Table 18-1 shows the possible combinations of timing systems within the varGDC Xedge systems.

Table 18-1 GDC Xedge Switch System Timing

GDC Xedge Chassis

Timing Distribution Without NTM

Timing Distribution With NTM

Redundant NTMSupport

NPX Yes Yes Yes

DV2 Yes Yes Yes

IMX Yes Yes No

MAC Yes No n/a

MAC1 Yes No n/a

Table 18-1


System Timing Configuration Configuration Summary

03Iss

ve

g

Configuration SummaryTo configure system timing, refer to the appropriate section:

• System Timing Without the NTM on page 18-4Follow this procedure if the node does not haa timing module.

• System Timing With The NTM on page 18-11Follow this procedure if the node has a timinmodule.

Then, configure the timing options for your LIMs by referring to the section:

• Transmit Timing Configuration on page 18-22


System Timing Configuration System Timing Without the NTM

dgeor the node from

h other

mple, to timeced

IM asfigure

System Timing Without the NTMConfiguring system timing without an NTM requires enhanced clocking LIMs. GDC XeEnhanced Clocking LIMs are designed to allow the GDC Xedge switch to source the timing fwhole system from the clock received at a selectable line interface. For a GDC Xedgecomposed entirely of Enhanced Clocking LIMs, the system clock reference may be derivedany single physical interface, and then propagated as the transmit timing source for eacinterface in the system.

The received clock may only be used to drive a transmit clock of equal or lower order. For exaan OC-3c/STM-1 source may be used to time a DS1 line, but a DS1 source may not be usedan OC-3c/STM-1 line. Table 18-2 shows the hierarchy of timing options available using enhanclocking LIMs (without the NTM).

System Timing References Screen

When you configure the node you can designate one LIM local oscillator or a link on one Lthe primary reference, and one link on another LIM as the secondary reference. You consystem timing at the Slot-0 Controller by means of the System Timing References screen. Use thefollowing procedure to access the System Timing References screen:

1. Select Manage configuration from the Slot-0 Controller Root menu. The MIB Display andManagement screen appears.

2. Select the System Timing References option from the MIB Display and Managementscreen. The System Timing References screen appears as shown in Figure 18-1.

Table 18-2 Enhanced Clocking LIM Timing Hierarchy (Without the Timing Module)

Receive LineReference

Transmit Line Timing

OC-3c/STM-1 DS3 PLCP DS1 E3 E1

OC-3c/STM-1 X X X X X

DS3 PLCP X X X X

E3 X X X

DS1 X

E1 X X

Table 18-2



03Iss

ify LIMs

timing.ated

clock

rence

rcesystemnt.

ndaryisable,

Figure 18-1 System Timing References Screen

Without the NTM, only options 00-05 are available for configuration. Options Primary LineReference and Secondary Line Reference provide access to the screens in which you specwhich LIMs are to supply system timing references to the GDC Xedge switch and how thoseare to generate the references.

The possible reference sources are receive timing from a selected link and local oscillator Divider circuits on the LIMs derive the 8-kHz signal required for system timing from the designreference source, which operates at a higher rate.

LIMs employ phase locked loop (PLL) circuitry at their transmit ports to achieve the transmit rates they require based on the 8-kHz system timing reference from the node.

The Automatic REVERT, REVERT Timer , Activate REVERT, and Force Secondary LIMsoptions concern conditions for switching from the primary to the secondary system timing refeand reverting to the primary.

Primary and Secondary System Timing

The GDC Xedge switch reduces the possibility of timing loss by providing fallback timing southat can supply the system timing reference. The switch supports configuration of two stiming references, primary and secondary, as part of this resilient system timing arrangeme

The Slot-0 configuration software enforces the requirement that the primary and secoreferences must originate on separate LIMs. Configuration of a secondary reference is advbut not mandatory.


Switch Name: Slot 0 SYS System Timing References New Event

00 Automatic REVERT: yes 14 Primary External Config01 REVERT Timer: 5 15 Secondary External Config02 Activate REVERT: no 16 Primary External Status03 Force Secondary LIMs: no 17 Secondary External Status Line Ref Alarm Statu: clear 18 Primary Derived Config Active Line Source : pri plcp 19 Secondary Derived Config04 Primary Line Reference 20 Primary Derived Status05 Secondary Line Reference 21 Secondary Derived Status Stratum 3 Clock: no Line Ref Alarm Error: none06 Primary NTM Control07 Secondary NTM Control08 Primary NTM Status09 Secondary NTM Status10 Primary Stratum 3 Config11 Secondary Stratum 3 Config12 Primary Stratum 3 Status13 Secondary Stratum 3 StatusSelect option:Enter option number or eXit



steming

if thatfigured.shown

n

LIMs configured to base their transmit timing on system timing use the configured primary sytiming signal when it is available. Normally the LIM configured to be the primary system timreference source supplies timing based on a receive signal. What type of fallback occursreceive signal is lost depends on whether or not a secondary timing reference source is conTable 18-3 illustrates the possible fallback sequences. The possible timing references are from left to right in order of declining desirability.

Table 18-4 lists the options in the System Timing References screen govern switching betweetiming references.

Table 18-3 System Timing Fallback Sequence

System Timing Status

System Timing Reference Used

Primary Receive Timing

Primary Local

Oscillator

Secondary Receive Timing

Secondary Local

Oscillator

Individual Local

Oscillators

Normal Operation X

Loss of:Primary Receive (no secondary) X

Loss of:Primary Receive

(secondary configured)X

Loss of:Primary and Secondary Receive X

Loss of:Primary and Secondary Receive

Signals, and Secondary OscillatorX

Table 18-3

Table 18-4 System Timing References Definitions


Automatic Revert If yes then after an interruption of the primary, restores availability of the primary, when available. If no , then no automatic switching occurs.

Revert Timer

0 to 30 seconds; imposes a delay between availability of a primary timing reference and automatic switch to that reference. Delay ensures the reference is definitely established before switchover occurs.

Activate Revert

If yes , commands immediate switchover from fallback to primary system timing reference; the only mechanism for switchover when Automatic Revert is set to no . No is the normal state of this option; the yes setting is not stored.

Force Secondary If yes , commands switchover from primary to configured secondary system timing. No is the normal state of this option; the yes setting is not stored.

Primary Line Reference Refer to System Timing Reference Hierarchy on page 18-8 and System Timing Reference Configuration on page 18-8.



03Iss

Secondary Line Reference Refer to System Timing Reference Hierarchy on page 18-8 and System Timing Reference Configuration on page 18-8.

Table 18-4 System Timing References Definitions


Table 18-4



here isers of type., Part

stemin thehe timing canre by

t are the

System Timing Reference Hierarchy

When you configure a node that contains a variety of LIM types you need to be aware that ta hierarchy of system timing. Each type of LIM can provide a system timing reference for othits own type, but not every type of LIM can provide a system timing reference for every other(See Chapter 4, System Timing & Synchronization of the Technical Reference ManualNumber 032R310, for system timing relationships between LIM types.)

System Timing Reference Configuration

Enhanced clocking LIMs can be configured to take their transmit timing from an 8-kHz sytiming reference in the GDC Xedge switch. To use system timing you must specify one LIM node as the source of the timing reference and designate the source it uses as the basis of tit provides. You make the specification in the configuration for the Slot-0 Controller. Youprovide additional assurance of resilient operation in the event of primary system timing failuspecifying another LIM as the source of secondary system timing.

Figure 18-2, System Timing Source Selection Block Diagram, illustrates the alternatives thaavailable for timing sources and how you configure them. Instructions for performingconfiguration follow the figure.

Figure 18-2 System Timing Source Selection Block Diagram

To configure the system timing reference source:

1. From the Slot-0 MIB Display and Management screen, select option System TimingReferences. The System Timing References screen appears as shown in Figure 18-3.

Local Oscillator (Internal Clock)

Receive Clock

Recovery

Receive Clock

Recovery

System Timing Reference screen,Option 4 to configure primaryOption 5 to configure secondary

RxclkL0

RxclkL1

Local_osc

Primary (or Secondary) Reference screen,Option 2 - Reference Select:link0linkn (up to number of links on the LIM)local oscillator

RxLink0

RxLink1 A

B

C C

B

A

Primary Secondary

SwitchSystem Clock Bus

LIM



03Iss

ctedin the


2. From the System Timing References screen, select either option Primary Line Reference,or option Secondary Line Reference. The Detail of Primary Line Reference Screen isshown in Figure 18-4. The switch responds by displaying the summary screen for the selereference. You must configure the primary reference in order to use system timing switch node. Configure both references to provide resilient timing operation.

Figure 18-4 Primary Line Reference Screen





Switch Name: Slot 0 SYS Primary Line Reference New EventNo Index Valid Reference On/Off Line Slot Number Reference Select

0 1 yes on 1 link0

Select option:Enter entry number to edit, Extra detail, Right, eXit



Line

yerencendary

iming

the

the

M).the

on-

3. Enter E to reach the Extra detail screen for the selected reference. The Detail of PrimaryReference Screen appears as shown in Figure 18-5.

Figure 18-5 Detail of Primary Line Reference Screen

4. Change the On/Off Line display option to off. The switch displays a warning that timing mabe interrupted and requests confirmation of the command. When you take the timing refoff-line, the switch node continues to operate using its fallback timing source; either secosystem timing or local oscillators. You cannot change the configuration of a system treference while it is on-line.

5. Select the Slot Number option, and specify the slot number of the LIM that is to supply system timing reference.

6. Select the Reference Select option, and specify the source on which the LIM is to base timing reference it provides. The available selections are local oscillator and link0 throughlink15 depending on the type of installed LIM (the number of links available on the LISelecting a link which is not physically available on your installed LIM will cause Reference Select option to revert to link0 .

7. Select the On/Off Line option and place the newly configured system timing reference line. Refer to Transmit Timing Configuration to configure the timing for the LIMs in yoursystem.


Switch Name: Slot 0 SYS Primary Line Reference New EventDetail of Primary Line Reference entry 0

Index : 1 Valid Reference : yes0 On/Off Line : on1 Slot Number : 12 Reference Select : link0 Active Reference : plcp Input Line OK : yes Reference OK : yes



System Timing Configuration System Timing With The NTM

03Iss

ning

LIM,es.

igure

ens to

as its

ens to

NTM:

andists ofre all

03

System Timing With The NTM

The Node Timing Module (NTM-DS1 or NTM-E1) provides an alternate method of provisiotiming in the switch. As a result, there are two ways of provisioning timing.

Without NTM, the switch receives network timing via the primary and secondary lines of a distributes the timing, and uses it to provide timing, as required, by the transmit line interfac

Configuring the NTM

The following describes the strategy you should use for NTM configuration.

• If you are using one NTM only, you must configure it as Primary .

• If the configuration uses a LIM timing source, you must use the following screens to confthe NTM: Primary/Secondary Line Reference, and Primary/Secondary NTM Control .

• If the configuration only uses an external timing source, you must use the following screconfigure the NTM: Primary/Secondary NTM Control and Primary/Secondary ExternalConfig screens.

• If the configuration only uses the Stratum 3 clock in the internal, free-running mode timing source, you must use the Primary/Secondary NTM Control screen to configure theNTM.

• If the configuration only uses the derived timing source, you must use the following screconfigure the NTM: Primary/Secondary NTM Control and Primary/Secondary DerivedConfig screens.

• In all cases, you must use the Primary/Secondary Stratum 3 Config screen to configure theNTM.

• Usage of the following options depend on how you plan to use the revert functions of the Automatic REVERT , REVERT Timer , and Activate REVERT.

• If the configuration includes a primary and secondary NTM, you must use the primarysecondary config screens to configure the NTMs, however, if the configuration only consa primary NTM, you must use the primary config screens to configure the NTM and ignosecondary config screens including the Force Secondary LIMs screen.

• To download NTM software, the NTM Compatible SODOC option must be set to yes. Thisis accomplished by selecting Manage configuration from the Root Menu, and then selectingthe Slot 0 configuration option. The Slot 0 configuration screen displays the NTMCompatible SODOC option.

To configure and manage the NTM, you access the System Timing References screen, as follows.After you finish configuring the NTM, refer to the section Transmit Timing Configuration onpage 18-22 to configure the timing for the LIMs in your system.

1. Select Manage configuration from the Root Menu screen.

2. Select System Timing References from the MIB Display and Management screen. TheSystem Timing References screen appears as shown in Figure 18-6.

Note The E1 version of the Node Timing Module utilizes the timing interface table described in ITU-T G.7Table 10 (not Table 6).




The System Timing References screen contains the items listed in Table 18-5.

Table 18-5 System Timing References Screen Definitions


Automatic REVERT Indicates/selects the state of the automatic revert function (Yes for enable; No for disable). When enabled, the NTM and LIM automatically revert back to the more desirable timing source after (1) the source is restored subsequent to an interruption and (2) the revert timer has expired.

REVERT Timer Indicates/selects the length of the revert timer. 5 to 60 seconds are selectable in 1-second increments.

Activate REVERT Indicates/selects the state of the immediate revert function (Yes for enable; No for disable). When enabled, an immediate reversion back to the more desirable timing source occurs after the more desirable timing source is restored subsequent to it being interrupted.

Force Secondary LIMs Indicates/selects the state of the forced secondary timing source function (Yes for enable; No for disable). When enabled, this function forces the NTM to use the secondary timing source.

Line Ref Alarm Status Indicates whether any alarms (minor or major ) currently exist for the LIM selected as a timing reference.clear indicates that there are no alarms.A minor alarm indicates that another clock source has taken over.A major alarm indicates there is no valid clock source; both the primary and secondary clock sources have a problem. See the definition for Current Alarm Error on page 18-14.







03Iss

Active Line Source This indicates the current timing source for the line reference (low quality bus): none - No line reference selected.line - indicates the source is from the link and oscilator means the node is using its internal clock as the source.pri-line - The primary line source is selected.sec-line - The secondary line source is selected.pri-plcp - The primary line PLCP source is selected (DS3).sec-plcp - The secondary line PLCP source is selected (DS3).pri-internal - The local oscillator is selected for the primary source.sec-internal - The local oscillator is selected for the secondary source.

Primary Line Reference Accesses the Primary Line Reference screen, which is described fully in Primary and Secondary Line Reference Screens on page 18-14.

Secondary Line Reference Accesses the Secondary Line Reference screen, which is described fully in Primary and Secondary Line Reference Screens on page 18-14.

Stratum 3 Clock Indicates whether an NTM is absent or offline (no ) or present and online (yes ).

Primary NTM Control Accesses the Primary NTM Control screen, which is described fully in Primary and Secondary Line Reference Screens on page 18-14.

Secondary NTM Control Accesses the Secondary NTM Control screen, which is described fully in Primary and Secondary Line Reference Screens on page 18-14.

Primary NTM Status Accesses the Primary NTM Status screen, which is described fully in Primary and Secondary Line Reference Screens on page 18-14.

Secondary NTM Status Accesses the Secondary NTM Status screen, which is described fully in Primary and Secondary Line Reference Screens on page 18-14.

Primary Stratum 3 Config Accesses the Primary Stratum 3 Config screen, which is described fully in Primary and Secondary Line Reference Screens on page 18-14.

Secondary Stratum 3 Config Accesses the Secondary Stratum 3 Config screen, which is described fully in Primary and Secondary Line Reference Screens on page 18-14.

Primary Stratum 3 Status Accesses the Primary Stratum 3 Status screen, which is described fully in Primary and Secondary Line Reference Screens on page 18-14.

Secondary Stratum 3 Status Accesses the Secondary Stratum 3 Status screen, which is described fully in Primary and Secondary Line Reference Screens on page 18-14.

Primary External Config Accesses the Primary External Config screen, which is described fully in Primary and Secondary Line Reference Screens on page 18-14.

Secondary External Config Accesses the Secondary External Config screen, which is described fully in Primary and Secondary Line Reference Screens on page 18-14.

Primary External Status Accesses the Primary External Status screen, which is described fully in Primary and Secondary Line Reference Screens on page 18-14.

Secondary External Status Accesses the Secondary External Status screen, which is described fully in Primary and Secondary Line Reference Screens on page 18-14.

Primary Derived Config(n/a to NTM-E1)

Accesses the Primary Derived Config screen, which is described fully in Primary and Secondary Line Reference Screens on page 18-14.

Secondary Derived Config (n/a to NTM-E1)

Accesses the Secondary Derived Config screen, which is described fully in Primary and Secondary Line Reference Screens on page 18-14.

Primary Derived Status(n/a to NTM-E1)

Accesses the Primary Derived Status screen, which is described fully in Primary and Secondary Line Reference Screens on page 18-14.

Table 18-5 System Timing References Screen Definitions (Continued)





n

Primary and Secondary Line Reference Screens

The Primary Line Reference and Secondary Line Reference screens contain the items, listed iTable 18-6, which are relative to the external inputs to the NTM.

Secondary Derived Status (n/a to NTM-E1)

Accesses the Secondary Derived Status screen, which is described fully in Primary and Secondary Line Reference Screens on page 18-14.

Current Alarm Error See Line Ref Alarm Status on page 18-12.pRIlineSECoffline : This indicates a problem with the primary and secondary clock sources are offline.pRIoscSECoffline : This indicates a problem with the primary oscillator and the secondary is offline.sEClinePRIoffline : This indicates a problem with the secondary line source and primary is offline.sECoscPRIoffline : This indicates a problem with the secondary oscillator and primary is offlinepRIlineSECline : This indicates a problem with the primary line and a problem with the secondary line.pRIosc : This indicates a problem with the primary oscillator (possibly no other timing configured).sECosc : This indicates a problem with the secondary oscillator.pRIoscSECosc : This indicates a problem with the primary oscillator and a problem with the secondary oscillator.pRIoscSECline : This indicates a problem with the primary oscillator and a problem with the secondary line source.pRIlineSECosc : This indicates a problem with the primary line source and a problem with the secondary oscillator.no-valid-error : This field indicates an illegal combination of inputs.

Table 18-6 Primary and Secondary Line Reference Screen Definitions


Valid Reference Indicates (yes or no) whether the selected primary/secondary line timing source is a valid timing source.

On/Off Line Indicates/selects the state (on-line or off-line ) of the primary/secondary line timing source

Slot Number Indicates/selects the Slot (0-15) containing the LIM that is the source of the primary/secondary line reference clock.

Reference Select Indicates/selects the source of the primary/secondary line reference clock: link 0 through link 3, or the local oscillator of the LIM selected in the previous entry.

Active Reference Indicates whether the selected primary/secondary line timing source is line , internal or plcp .

Input Line OK Indicates (yes or no) whether the input line of the selected primary/secondary line timing source is functioning.

Reference OK Indicates (yes or no) whether the timing source of the selected primary/secondary timing source is functioning.

Table 18-6

Table 18-5 System Timing References Screen Definitions (Continued)





03Iss

n

Primary and Secondary NTM Control Screens

The Primary NTM Control and Secondary NTM Control screens contain the items listed iTable 18-7.

Table 18-7 Primary and Secondary NTM Control Screen Definitions


NTM LIM type Selects the type of NTM (T1, E1 or none ). The T1 NTM external received and derived transmit interfaces are T1-compatible. For the NTM-E1, the external received is E1 external BITS clock compatible.

Download NTM Code Select yes to immediately initiate the NTM software downloading function for upgrading the primary/secondary NTM software (displays no when not selected).Note: To download NTM software, the NTM Compatible SODOC option must be set to yes . This is accomplished by selecting Manage configuration from the Root Menu , and then selecting Slot 0 configuration (09). The Slot 0 Configuration screen displays the NTM Compatible SODOC option.

Activate NTM Code Select yes to immediately activate the NTM software stored in flash EPROM (displays no when not selected).

Download NTM Configuration Select yes to immediately initiate downloading the entire NTM configuration (displays no when not selected).

NTM Code Bytes Transferred Indicates the number of bytes transferred while downloading the NTM software.

NTM File transfer status Indicates the state of the NTM downloading function (idle , start , continue , end , ack , aborted , or error ).

Force Secondary External This item only appears in the Primary NTM Control screen. Select yes to immediately force the NTMs to use the secondary external timing source (displays no when not selected).

Force Secondary Stratum 3 This item only appears in the Primary NTM Control screen. Select yes to immediately force the LIMs to use the secondary Stratum 3 timing source (displays no when not selected).

Current Command Not applicable to the user.

NTM on/offline Immediately selects the state of the primary/secondary NTM (on-line or off-line ).

Table 18-7



d

on-d

Primary and Secondary NTM Status Screens

The Primary NTM Status and Secondary NTM Status screens contain the items listed in Table18-8.

Primary and Secondary Stratum 3 Config Screens

The Primary Stratum 3 Config and Secondary Stratum 3 Config screens contain the items listein Table 18-9 (these items are relative to controlling the Stratum 3 clock).

Table 18-8 Primary and Secondary NTM Status Screen Definitions


NTM LIM type Indicates the type of NTM (T1, E1 or none).

NTM Code Revision Indicates the revision level of the primary/secondary NTM software.

NTM Boot Revision Indicates the revision level of the primary/secondary NTM boot software.

NTM Flash File Status Indicates whether software exists on the flash EPROM of the primary/secondary NTM. The possible indications are present , not-present , and na (not available).

NTM Flash File Revision Indicates the revision level of the primary/secondary NTM flash software.

NTM Hardware Revision Indicates the revision level of the primary/secondary NTM hardware.

NTM Operating Mode Indicates the operating mode of the primary/secondary NTM, either no-card , boot , full-feature-offline , unknown , full-feature-in-dnld (download), boot-in-dnld (download), or full-feature-online .

NTM Error Code Indicates errors, if any, that occur during a download to the primary/secondary NTM. The possible indications are none, bad-config, no-code, no-config, download-ok, or download-fail.

Table 18-8

Table 18-9 Primary and Secondary Stratum 3 Config Screen Definitions


Stratum 3 Reference Selects the timing source for the primary/secondary Stratum 3 clock, either an external timing source connected to the RC connector of the NTM or line timing from a LIM installed in the switch chassis.

Stratum 3 Mode Selects the mode of operation of the primary/secondary Stratum 3 clock, either external , line , or internal . Selecting external or line causes the Stratum 3 clock to use the timing source selected in Stratum 3 Reference above to generate its timing. Selecting internal causes the Stratum 3 clock to free-run using its own oscillator.

Force Secondary This item only appears in the Primary Stratum 3 Config screen. Select yes to immediately force the LIMs to use the secondary Stratum 3 timing source (displays no when not selected).

Re-configure Selects the state of the reconfigure function (Yes for enable; No for disable). When enabled, this function reconfigures the primary/secondary NTM using the parameters selected in this screen.

Table 18-9

Note When the Node Timing Module is set to line (i.e., no external clock is connected to the NTM’s “IN” cnector), a NO NTM BITS LINE INPUT trap will always be sent to the Xedge system event log anto ProSphere NMS. This does not adversely affect NTM or system functionality.



03Iss

ds

nd

Primary and Secondary Stratum 3 Status Screens

The Primary Stratum 3 Status and Secondary Stratum 3 Status screens contain the items listein Table 18-10 (the Secondary Stratum 3 Status screen is valid only if a secondary NTM iinstalled in the switch chassis).

Primary and Secondary External Config Screens

The Primary External Config and Secondary External Config screens contain the items listed iTable 18-11 (the Secondary External Config screen is valid only if a secondary NTM is installein the switch chassis).

Table 18-10Primary and Secondary Stratum 3 Status Screen Definitions


Stratum 3 Reference Status Indicates whether the timing source of the primary/secondary Stratum 3 clock is the primary (listening-to-Primary), secondary (listening-to-Secondary) timing source, or nonexistent (no-input).

Stratum 3 Output Indicates the state of the output of the primary/secondary Stratum 3 clock, either enabled-online , disabled-offline , or fault .

Stratum 3 Oscillator Indicates the state of the primary/secondary Stratum 3 clock oscillator, either idle , acquisition wideband , acquisition narrowband, locked-in-range , holdover , reference-out-of-range , or internal .If the Stratum 3 mode has been set to external or line , the idle state indicates that upon card start-up or reconfiguration, neither the primary or secondary reference timing source was available.If the Stratum 3 mode has been set to external or line , the acquisition state (also known as the wideband state) indicates that the reference timing source is available. This state allows the oscillator to converge towards a new reference timing source frequency more quickly than it would in normal or narrowband state. The acquisition state lasts for 255 seconds.The locked-in-range state indicates that the oscillator transferred from the wideband to the narrowband state after the 255-second acquisition mode elapsed. It remains in this state as long as the reference timing source exists. The holdover state indicates that both the primary and secondary reference source signals became unavailable while the oscillator was in the locked-in-range state. In the holdover state, the output of the oscillator remains at the last known reference timing source frequency. If a reference timing source subsequently becomes available, the oscillator transfers to the acquisition wideband state, then if available, the acquisition narrowband state.The reference-out-of-range state indicates that the tracking of the reference timing source fell out of specification while the oscillator was in the narrowband state.If the Stratum 3 mode was set to internal , the internal state indicates that the high-quality oscillator was set to free-run at the center frequency.

Table 18-10



nd

Primary and Secondary External Status Screens

The Primary External Status and Secondary External Status screens contain the items listed iTable 18-12 (the Secondary External Status screen is valid only if a secondary NTM is installein the switch chassis).

Table 18-11Primary and Secondary External Config Screen Definitions


Transmit Line Length(n/a to NTM-E1)

Selects the length (in feet) of the line connected to the RC connector of the primary/secondary NTM, either 0-110, 110-220, 220-330, 330-440, 440-550, 550-660, or greater than 655 feet .

Frame Format(n/a to NTM-E1)

Selects the frame format of the data being transferred on the line connected to the RC connector of the primary/secondary NTM, either none , sf (superframe), or esf (extended superframe).

Line Code (n/a to NTM-E1) Selects the line code format of the data being transferred on the line connected to the RC connector of the primary/secondary NTM, either na (not applicable), ami (alternate mark inversion), or b8zs-t1 (bit 8-zero suppression T1).

Loopback (n/a to NTM-E1) Immediately selects the loopback mode of the primary/secondary NTM RC interface, either none , line loopback , or local loopback . Line loopback causes the signal received over the line connected to RC to be looped and transmitted over the same line. Local loopback causes the signal being transmitted by the NTM at RC to be looped back as received data.

Clear Performance Counters Select yes to immediately clear the items displayed in the Primary/Secondary External Status screen (displays no when not selected).


Table 18-11

Table 18-12Primary and Secondary External Status Screen Definitions


External Reference OK Indicates (yes or no) if any of the following four alarm conditions exist on the line connected to the RC connector of the primary/secondary NTM: receive alarm indication signal (Rx AIS), loss of signal (LOS), out of frame (OOF), or bit error rate (BER).

Rx AIS (n/a to NTM-E1) Indicates (yes or no) if a receive alarm indication signal condition exists on the line connected to the RC connector of the primary/secondary NTM.

LOS Indicates (yes or no) if a loss of signal alarm condition exists on the line connected to the RC connector of the primary/secondary NTM.

OOF (n/a to NTM-E1) Indicates (yes or no) if an out of frame alarm condition exists on the line connected to the RC connector of the primary/secondary NTM.

BER (n/a to NTM-E1) Indicates (yes or no) if a bit error rate alarm condition exists on the line connected to the RC connector of the primary/secondary NTM.




03Iss

nd

Primary and Secondary Derived Config Screens (n/a to NTM-E1)

The Primary Derived Config and Secondary Derived Config screens contain the items listed iTable 18-13 (the Secondary Derived Config screen is valid only if a secondary NTM is installein the switch chassis).

OOF Count (n/a to NTM-E1) Indicates the number of out of frame alarm conditions detected on the line connected to the RC connector of the primary/secondary NTM. The Clear Performance Counters function in the Primary/Secondary External Config screen sets this item to 0.

BER Count (n/a to NTM-E1) Indicates the number of bit error rate alarm conditions detected on the line connected to the RC connector of the primary/secondary NTM. The Clear Performance Counters function in the Primary/Secondary External Config screen sets this item to 0.

LOS Count Indicates the number of loss of signal alarm conditions detected on the line connected to the RC connector of the primary/secondary NTM. The Clear Performance Counters function in the Primary/Secondary External Config screen sets this item to 0.

LCV Count (n/a to NTM-E1) Indicates the number of line code violation alarm conditions detected on the line connected to the RC connector of the primary/secondary NTM. The Clear Performance Counters function in the Primary/Secondary External Config screen sets this item to 0.

Table 18-13Primary and Secondary Derived Config Screen Definitions


Transmit Line Length Selects the length (in feet) of the line connected to the DR connector of the primary/secondary NTM, either 0-110, 110-220, 220-330, 330-440, 440-550, 550-660, or greater than 655 feet.

Table 18-13

Table 18-12Primary and Secondary External Status Screen Definitions (Continued)





Primary and Secondary Derived Status Screens (n/a to NTM-E1)

The Primary Derived Status screen contains the items listed in Table 18-14 (the SecondaryDerived Status screen is valid only if a secondary NTM is installed in the switch chassis).

Frame Format Selects the frame format of the data being transferred on the line connected to the DR connector of the primary/secondary NTM, either none , sf (superframe), or esf (extended superframe).

Line Code Selects the line code format of the data being transferred on the line connected to the DR connector of the primary/secondary NTM, either na (not applicable), ami (alternate mark inversion), or b8zs-t1 (bit 8-zero suppression T1).

Loopback Immediately selects the loopback mode of the primary/secondary GTMNTM DR interface, either none , line loopback , or local loopback . Line loopback causes the signal received over the line connected to DR to be looped and transmitted over the same line. Local loopback causes the signal being transmitted by the NTM at DR to be looped back as received data.

Clear Performance Counters Select yes to immediately clear the items displayed in the Primary/Secondary Derived Status screen (displays no when not selected).


Table 18-14Primary Derived Status Screen


Line OK Indicates (yes or no) if any of the following four alarm conditions exist on the line connected to the DR connector of the primary/secondary NTM: receive alarm indication signal (Rx AIS), loss of signal (LOS), out of frame (OOF), or bit error rate (BER).

Transmit Reference Status Indicates whether the timing source of the primary/secondary derived clock is the primary (primary valid ), secondary (secondary valid ) timing source, or nonexistent (no input ).

Rx AIS Indicates (yes or no) if a receive alarm indication signal condition exists on the line connected to the DR connector of the primary/secondary NTM.

LOS Indicates (yes or no) if a loss of signal alarm condition exists on the line connected to the DR connector of the primary/secondary NTM.

OOF Indicates (yes or no) if an out of frame alarm condition exists on the line connected to the DR connector of the primary/secondary NTM.

BER Indicates (yes or no) if a bit error rate alarm condition exists on the line connected to the DR connector of the primary/secondary NTM.


Table 18-13Primary and Secondary Derived Config Screen Definitions (Continued)


Table 18-13



03Iss

OOF Count Indicates the number of out of frame alarm conditions detected on the line connected to the DR connector of the primary/secondary NTM. The Clear Performance Counters function in the Primary/Secondary Derived Config screen sets this item to 0.

BER Count Indicates the number of bit error rate alarm conditions detected on the line connected to the DR connector of the primary/secondary NTM. The Clear Performance Counters function in the Primary/Secondary Derived Config screen sets this item to 0.

LOS Count Indicates the number of loss of signal alarm conditions detected on the line connected to the DR connector of the primary/secondary NTM. The Clear Performance Counters function in the Primary/Secondary Derived Config screen sets this item to 0.

LCV Count Indicates the number of line code violation alarm conditions detected on the line connected to the DR connector of the primary/secondary NTM. The Clear Performance Counters function in the Primary/Secondary Derived Config screen sets this item to 0.

Table 18-14Primary Derived Status Screen (Continued)




System Timing Configuration Transmit Timing Configuration

are localeam

agesM-1,

The

ings for

aillator

se

Transmit Timing ConfigurationEach LIM in the node must be individually configured with the type of transmit timing its linksto use. The alternatives are system timing from the GDC Xedge switch, local timing from theoscillator on the LIM, or receive timing in which the transmit clock is derived from the bit strthe port is receiving.

Because LIM types differ somewhat in their transmit timing characteristics, the following pcontain separate descriptions of and configuration instructions for transmit timing in OC-3/STDS3/E3, DS1/E1, and Serial I/O LIMs.

LIMs of different types are available in various single channel and multichannel forms.descriptions and instructions apply regardless of the number of links.

OC-3c/STM-1 LIM Transmit Timing

Figure 18-7, Transmit Timing for a dual channel OC-3/STM-1 LIM, illustrates the transmit timalternatives that are available for this type of LIM and how you configure them. Instructionperforming the configuration follow the figure.

Notice in this figure that the SONET DLIM Config/Status screen option allows you to select transmit timing source for both channels of the LIM. You can select system timing, local osctiming, or receive timing from either channel.

You can use the SDH Configuration/Status screen option to set either channel of the LIM to batransmit timing on its own receive timing instead of the source specified on the SONET DLIMConfig/Status screen.



03Iss

oller

Figure 18-7 Transmit Timing for a Dual Channel OC-3/STM-1 LIM

Configuring OC-3/STM-1 Link Transmit Timing

The following procedure describes how to configure the OC-3/STM-1 link transmit timing:

1. From the Root Menu of the Slot-0 Controller, establish a telnet session to the Slot Contrcontaining the OC-3/STM-1 LIM you need to configure.

2. From the MIB Display and Management screen for the selected slot, select the DSP DLIMsoption and press the Enter key. The switch responds by displaying the DSP DLIMs screen.

3. From the DSP DLIMs screen, select the SONET DLIM Config/Status option. The switchresponds by displaying the SONET DLIM Config/Status screen as shown in Figure 18-8.

Transmit Clock PLL

SONET DLIM Config/Status screen,Option 0 - Timing Reference:

systemlocal link0link1

RxclkL0

RxclkL1

Local_osc

C

B

A

Primary Secondary

System Clock Bus

RxclkL1

RxclkL0

System (8-kHz)

1. SDH Config/Status screen,select option 0, Configuration.

2. Configuration Table screen,select link 0 or 1

3. Option 1 - Loop Timing:yesno

TxclkL0

TxclkL1 D

On

Off

Off

On



Figure 18-8 SONET DLIM Config/Status Screen

4. Select Extra Detail to display SONET DLIM Config/Status detail screen as shown in Figure18-9.

Figure 18-9 Detail of SONET DLIM Config/Status Screen

5. Select the Timing Reference option.


Switch Name: Slot 1 SYS SONET/DELIM DLIM Config/Status New EventNo Index Version Timing Reference Link 0 TX Enable Link 1 TX Enable

0 0 solim v1 system yes yes

Working...Enter entry number to edit, Extra detail,Press ^J for extra help on this item, Right, eXit


system-1:Slot 3 SYS SONET DLIM Config/StatusDetail of SONET DLIM Config/Status entry 0

Index : 0 Version : solim v20 Timing Reference : system1 Link 0 TX Enable : yes2 Link 1 TX Enable : yes3 LIM Description : dual intermediate reach

Select option:Enter entry number to edit,Press ^J for extra help on this item, Summary, eXit



03Iss

ction

The

ceive

by

6. Select the transmit timing source for the LIM from the choices on the resulting selescreen: System, Local Oscillator, Link0 , or Link1 .The transmit timing source you configure here applies to both links of a two link LIM. Link1 selection is always displayed, but it is not valid for a single link LIM.

7. Set the Link TX Enable option to yes for each link that is to be active.

8. Select the Reconfigure option and set it to yes. This completes the transmit timingconfiguration if the LIM is to use a single timing source.

Configuring OC-3/STM-1 Link Loop Timing

The following procedure describes how to configure one OC-3/STM-1 link to use its own re(loop) timing, independent of the other link:

1. Return to the MIB Display and Management screen; select the SDH Configuration/Statusoption and press the Enter key. The switch responds by displaying the SDH Configuration/Status screen shown in Figure 18-10.

Figure 18-10 SDH Configuration/Status Screen

2. Select the Configuration Table option and press the Enter key. The switch respondsdisplaying the Configuration Table summary screen as shown in Figure 18-11.


Switch Name: Slot x SYS SDH Configuration/Status SW Version

0 Configuration Table1 Status/Alarm Table2 Performance Monitoring




link,

Figure 18-11 Configuration Table Summary Screen

3. Select the link you wish to configure (link 0 is already selected). To select a differentselect Goto row and enter the link number at the prompt.

4. Select Extra detail and the switch responds by displaying the Configuration Table Detailscreen for that link (as shown in Figure 18-12).

Figure 18-12 Configuration Table Detail Screen


Switch Name: Slot x SYS Configuration Table SW VersionNo Link No Enable Loop Timing Diagnostic Loopback Line Loopback Scramble

0 0 yes no no no yes1 1 yes no no no yes



Switch Name: Slot x SYS Configuration Table New EventDetail of Configuration Table entry 0

Link No : 000 Enable : yes01 Loop Timing : no02 Diagnostic Loopback : no03 Line Loopback : no04 Scramble : yes05 XOR With 0x55 : yes06 Sonet/SDH : sonet07 Clear Counts : no08 Reconfigure : no09 Loopback Timeout : 110 155.52Mbit/s or 51.84Mbit/s : oc 311 APS On/Off : off12 Idle Cell : unassigned




03Iss

e

ings for

ysical

oller

d E

5. Select the Loop Timing option and set it to yes. Loop timing configured here overrides thtransmit timing source selection, made for the LIM as a whole, on the SONET DLIM Config/Status screen.

DS1/E1 LIM Transmit Timing

Figure 18-13, Transmit Timing for a Four-Channel DS1/E1 LIM, illustrates the transmit timalternatives that are available for this type of LIM and how you configure them. Instructionperforming the configuration follow the figure.

Notice, in the figure, that you configure transmit timing sources independently for each phinterface of a DS1/E1 LIM.

Configuring DS-1, E-1 Link Transmit Timing

The following procedure describes how to configure the DS1/E1 link transmit timing:

1. From the Root Menu of the Slot-0 Controller, establish a telnet session to the Slot Contrcontaining the DS1/E1 LIM you want to configure.

2. From the MIB Display and Management screen for the selected slot, select option DSPDLIMs . The switch responds by displaying the DSP DLIMs screen.

Note When the DS1/E1 LIM is associated with a CE card, the transmit timing selection configurefor a channel at the LIM is overridden if you select Adaptive timing for the channel in the Ccard configuration.



her

, but

Figure 18-13 Transmit Timing for a Four-Channel DS1/E1 LIM

3. From the DSP DLIMs screen, select the option for the LIM type you are configuring; eitthe E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status option, or the ds1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status option.The switch responds by displaying the appropriate DLIM Config/Status summary screen asshown in Figure 18-14. The screens differ in the information that appears in their headersthey otherwise they are the same.

E1-2C DLIM Config/Status screen for each linkOption 2 - Tx Clk Src:

systemlocal oscillatorlink n (receive clock of the individual link)

Local_osc

C

B

A

Primary Secondary

System Clock Bus

RxclkL3

System (8-kHz)

TxclkL0

TxclkL1

Transmit Clock PLL

Transmit Clock PLL

Transmit Clock PLL

Transmit Clock PLLTxclkL2

TxclkL3

Local_osc

RxclkL2

System (8-kHz)

Local_osc

RxclkL1

System (8-kHz)

Local_osc

RxclkL0

System (8-kHz)

Transmit Clock Reference Select

C

B

A

C

B

A



03Iss

link,

Figure 18-14 DLIM Config/Status Summary Screen

4. Select the link you wish to configure. Link 0 is already selected. To select a differentselect Goto row and enter the desired link number at the prompt.

5. Select Extra detail and the switch responds by displaying the DLIM Config/Status Detailscreen for that link.

Figure 18-15 DLIM Config/Status Detail Screen


Switch Name: Slot x SYS E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status New EventNo Link No Version Loopback Framer Mode Tx Clk Src TS16 PayLd Tx AIS

0 0 quad sig none crc mfrm system no no1 1 quad sig none crc mfrm system no no2 2 quad sig none crc mfrm system no no3 3 quad sig none crc mfrm system no no



Switch Name: Slot x SYS E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status SW VersionDetail of E1-2C/4C DLIM Config/Status entry 0

Link No : 0 14 Sio Nat'l : on Line ES : 0 Version : quad sig 15 Si1 Nat'l : on Line SES : 000 Loopback : none LOS Defect: yes ES : 001 Framer Mod: crc mfrm OOF Defect: no SES : 002 Tx Clk Src: system AIS Defect: no AISS : 003 TS16 PayLd: no FERF Defec: no UAS : 17543704 Tx AIS : no BER Defect: no05 Extract Fr: no LOS Alarm : yes06 Interface : unbalan 75 LOF Alarm : no07 Clear Coun: no AIS Alarm : no08 Reconfigur: no FERF Alarm: no09 SA4 Nat'l : on BER Alarm : no10 SA5 Nat'l : on CRC Errors: 011 SA6 Nat'l : on Frame Erro: 012 SA7 Nat'l : on FEBE Error: 013 SA8 Nat'l : on Line Code : 0Select option:Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row, Index search, Summary,eXit



ction

ngs for

ysicale ind for

nsmit

6. Select the Tx Clk Src options and press the Enter key.

7. Select the transmit timing source for the link from the choices on the resulting selescreen: System, Local Oscillator, or Link n (where n is the link number of the link beingconfigured).

DS3 LIM Transmit Timing

Figure 18-16, Transmit Timing for a Two-Channel DS3 LIM, illustrates the transmit timialternatives that are available for this type of LIM and how you configure them. Instructionperforming the configuration follow the figure.

Note from the figure that you configure transmit timing sources independently for each phinterface of a DS3 LIM. In addition, the DS3 LIM differs from the other LIMs discussed herthat its transmit timing configuration determines the source of the 8-kHz clock signal requirethe Physical Layer Control Protocol (PLCP) framing on the DS3 line. Other LIMs output a traclock signal at the link data rate.

Figure 18-16 Transmit Timing for a Two-Channel DS3 LIM

Local_osc

C

B

A

RxPLCP1

RxPLCPL0

System (8-kHz)

D

Primary Secondary

System Clock Bus

DS3 DLIM Config/Status screen for each link,Option 2 - Tx Clk Src:

systemlocal oscillatorlink0link1


Oscillator

Oscillator

Local_osc

C

B

A

RxPLCP1

RxPLCPL0

System (8-kHz)

D

44.736 MHzTx Line

44.736 MHzTx Line

8 kHz to Link 0 PLCPSublayer Tx Timing

8 kHz to Link 0 PLCPSublayer Tx Timing



03Iss

oller

link,

or a d

Configuring DS3 Link Transmit Timing

The following procedure describes how to configure the DS3 link transmit timing:

1. From the Root Menu of the Slot-0 Controller, establish a telnet session to the Slot Contrcontaining the DS3 LIM you want to configure.

2. From the MIB Display and Management screen for the selected slot, select the DSP DLIMsoption. The switch responds by displaying the DSP DLIMs screen.

3. From the DSP DLIMs screen, select the DS3-2C DLIM Config/Status option. The switchresponds by displaying the DS3-2C DLIM Config/Status summary screen as shown in Figure18-17.

Figure 18-17 DS3-2C DLIM Config/Status Summary Screen

4. Select the link you wish to configure (link 0 is already selected). To select a differentselect Goto row and enter the desired link number at the prompt.

5. Select Extra detail and the switch responds by displaying the DS3-2C DLIM Config/Statusdetail screen for that link (as shown in Figure 18-18).

Note When the DS3 LIM is associated with a CE card, the transmit timing selection configured fchannel at the LIM is overridden if you select Adaptive timing for the channel in the CE carconfiguration.


Switch Name: Slot x SYS DS3-2C DLIM Config/Status New EventNo Link No Loopback Version LIM OK TX LBO Tx Clk Src LOS Defect LOS Alarm

0 0 none ds3 2c yes short system no no1 1 none ds3 2c yes short system no no




ction

ngs for

ysical

a d

Figure 18-18 Detail of DS3-2C DLIM Config/Status

6. Select the Tx Clk Scr option.

7. Select the transmit timing source for the LIM from the choices on the resulting selescreen: System, Local Oscillator, Link0 , or Link1 .

E3 LIM Transmit Timing

Figure 18-19, Transmit Timing for a Two-Channel E3 LIM, illustrates the transmit timialternatives that are available for this type of LIM and how you configure them. Instructionperforming the configuration follow the figure.

Note that in the figure you configure transmit timing sources independently for each phinterface of an E3 LIM.

Note When the E3 LIM is associated with a CE card, the transmit timing selection configured forchannel at the LIM is overridden if you select Adaptive timing for the channel in the CE carconfiguration.


Switch Name: Slot x SYS DS3-2C DLIM Config/Status New EventDetail of DS3-2C DLIM Config/Status entry 0





03Iss

oller

Figure 18-19 Transmit Timing for a Two-Channel E3 LIM

Configuring E3 Link Transmit Timing

The following procedure describes how to configure the E3 link transmit timing:

1. From the Root Menu of the Slot-0 Controller, establish a telnet session to the Slot Contrcontaining the E3 LIM you want to configure.

2. From the MIB Display and Management screen for the selected controller, select the DSPDLIMs option. The DSP DLIMs screen appears.

3. From the DSP DLIMs screen, select the E3-2C DLIM Config/Status option. The switchresponds by displaying the E3-2C DLIM Config/Status summary screen as shown in Figure18-20.

Primary Secondary

System Clock Bus

E3 DLIM Config/Status screen for each link,Option 4 - Timing Reference:

systemlocal oscillatorlink0link1


Local_osc

C

B

A

RxclkL0

System (8-kHz)

D

TxclkL0

RxclkL1

Local_osc

C

B

A

RxclkL0

System (8-kHz)

D

RxclkL1

TxclkL1Transmit

Clock PLL

Transmit Clock PLL



link,

Figure 18-20 E3-2C DLIM Config/Status Summary Screen


5. Select Extra detail and the switch responds by displaying the E3-2C DLIM Config/Statusdetail screen for that link (as shown in Figure 18-21).

Figure 18-21 Detail of E3-2C DLIM Config/Status Screen


Switch Name: Slot x SYS E3-2C DLIM Config/Status SW VersionNo Link No Version LIM OK Rx EQ Select Loopback LIU Tx AIS

0 0 e3 2c no auto none no1 1 e3 2c no auto none no



Switch Name: Slot x SYS E3-2C DLIM Config/Status New EventDetail of E3-2C DLIM Config/Status entry 0





03Iss

ction

Therial I/

oller

n

link,

6. Select the Timing Reference option.

7. Select the transmit timing source for the LIM from the choices on the resulting selescreen: System, Local, Oscillator, Link0 , or Link1 .

Serial I/O LIM Receive Timing

The Serial I/O LIM is capable of receiving timing only. It is not capable of generating timing.following procedure describes how to configure the options for receive line timing on the SeO LIM. The same procedure is used for both two and four channels Serial LIMs.

1. From the Root Menu of the Slot-0 Controller, establish a telnet session to the Slot Contrcontaining the Serial I/O LIM you want to configure.

2. From the MIB Display and Management screen for the selected slot, select the DSP DLIMsoption. The switch responds by displaying the DSP DLIMs screen.

3. From the DSP DLIMs screen, select the SI (SCF) DLIM Config/Status option. The switchresponds by displaying the SI (SCF) DLIM Config/Status summary screen as shown iFigure 18-22.

Figure 18-22 SI (SCF) DLIM Config/Status Summary Screen


5. Select Extra detail and the switch responds by displaying the SI (SCF) DLIM Config/Statusdetail screen for that link (as shown in Figure 18-23).


Switch Name: Slot x SYS SI (SCF) DLIM Config/Status SW VersionNo Link Number LIM I.D. Type Firmware Revision Quality of Clock Controller

0 0 si dual 0 low Primary ce hpg hc21 1 si dual 0 low Primary ce hpg hc22 2 si dual 0 low Primary ce hpg hc23 3 si dual 0 low Primary ce hpg hc2




Figure 18-23 Detail of SI (SCF) DLIM Config/Status

There are two options to configure for receive timing on the SI (SCF) DLIM Config/Status detailscreen for that link. The Receive Line Timing option can be A-enabled or B-disabled. The otheroption to set is Clock.

If you select A-enabled for the Receive Line Timing option, you must select A-system for the Clock option. If you select B-disabled for the Receive Line Timing, you mustselect B-localOscillator for the Clock option.


Switch Name: Slot x SYS SI (SCF) DLIM Config/Status New EventDetail of SI (SCF) DLIM Config/Status entry 0




System Timing ConfigurationTransmit Timing for a LIM Associated with a CE Slot Controller

03Iss

art ofted.ith a

onizesthe cell

ming

Transmit Timing for a LIM Associated with a CE Slot ControllerThe Circuit Emulation (CE) Adaptation Controller provides three transmit timing options as pits own configuration in addition to the options provided by the LIM with which it is associaThe two options are System timing (none) and, Adaptive timing. If your LIM is associated wCE controller module, you must set the Clock Mode to none to use System timing. A CE cardcan be associated with a DS3/E3 LIM or a DS1/E1 LIM.

The CE Adaptation Controller has two timing options:

• Adaptive timing

The CE Adaptation Controller assumes that the incoming cell bit rate is correct, so, it synchrto it and, as the cell bit rate varies, it adapts to the variations and remains synchronized to bit rate.

• LIM configuration timing

The configuration of the LIM associated with the CE Adaptation Controller determines the tisource.

To select adaptive timing:

1. Select the dv2CE Configuration Table screen.

2. Select the Clock Mode option.

3. Select adaptive.

To select LIM configuration timing:

1. Select the dv2CE Configuration Table screen.

2. Select the Clock Mode option.

3. Select none


System Timing ConfigurationTransmit Timing for a LIM Associated with a CE Slot Controller


03Iss

an

4

5

1

3

3

7

Chapter 19: PNNI Configuration

Chapter Overview

This chapter describes how to configure PNNI routing and signaling for switched circuits in GDC Xedge ATM network. The topics in this chapter include:

Overview Of Routing Methods.............................................................................................19-2

Static Routing Tables.....................................................................................................19-2

Dynamic PNNI Routing.................................................................................................19-2

Used Terminology..........................................................................................................19-


Select A PNNI Topology Slot...............................................................................................19-7

Configure The PT Slot....................................................................................................19-7

Configure The Routing Parameters................................................................................19-9

Configure The Node Table...........................................................................................19-13

Configure The PNNI Timers........................................................................................19-17

SAP Configuration..............................................................................................................19-2

Configure The Max PNNI SAPs..................................................................................19-21

Customize Metrics..............................................................................................................19-2

Configure Metrics.........................................................................................................19-2

Adding Static Routes..........................................................................................................19-2

Configure Static Routes................................................................................................19-27

Additional PNNI Information

• For PNNI related status information, refer to the Xedge Diagnostics Guide (Part Number 032R500), Chapter 19.

• For a technical overview of PNNI features and specifications, refer to the Xedge Technical Reference Guide (Part Number 032R310), Chapter 3 under the paragraphs on PNNI.


PNNI Configuration Overview Of Routing Methods

) and C rs e RTM ntering s of the Slot

outing

to

rs of

key

is

r L2

Overview Of Routing Methods

GDCs Xedge supports 2 forms of routing:

• Static Routing Tables

• Dynamic PNNI Routing

Static Routing Tables

Two forms of static routing tables are available. One is used for a hop by hop routing (def.rtbone for source routing (dtl.bin). The static routing tables are generated and managed by GDProSphere Routing Manager (RTM). These tables must be present within the Slot Controllebefore SPVCs or SVCs can be established. Routing tables are files that are generated by ththen downloaded to each appropriate Slot Controller. You can also create routing tables by ethe routing information manually then downloading those files to the Slot Controllers, but thimethod, even for a small ATM network, is an extremely time consuming task. The purpose Routing Manager is to simplify the generation and distribution of these routing table files to theControllers in your network. For more details about the RTM refer to the Routing Manager User Guide (Publication No. 910041, packaged with the RTM software) and the ProSphere-Routing Manager Release Notes and Installation Guide, Publication No. 032R904.

The following is a generalized description of the RTM steps used to generate and distribute rtables to the Slot Controllers in your network.

• Define your network topology

• Assign weighting factors for route calculations

• Generate Routing tables off-line for examination (if necessary)

• Perform a full installation of the selected routing tables

This chapter will not cover the configuration for static routing tables. For more details of howconfigure the network for the use of static routing tables, refer to the Routing Manager User Guide (Publication No. 910041, packaged with the RTM software) and the ProSphere-Routing ManagerRelease Notes and Installation Guide, Publication No. 032R904.

Dynamic PNNI Routing

PNNI is a linkstate routing protocol designed for the use between private ATM switches. It isdefined in the ATM Forum standard af-pnni-0055.000.

It is based on the use of two categories of protocols:

• One protocol is defined for distributing topology information between switches and clusteswitches. This information is used to compute paths through the network. A hierarchy mechanism ensures that this protocol scales well for large world-wide ATM networks. Afeature of the PNNI hierarchy mechanism is its ability to automatically configure itself in networks in which the address structure reflects the topology. PNNI topology and routingbased on the well-known linkstate routing technique. By default, GDCs Xedge Switch is usingVPI 0 VCI 18 to carry this protocol. The VC is available on every NNI Link configured foPNNI routing and signaling. From there, the information is passed over an internal QAAconnection directly to the configured PNNI Topology Slot.



03Iss

t and TM

DCs TM

over The

.

NI

s

• A second protocol is defined for signaling, that is used to establish switched point-to-poinpoint-to-multipoint connections across the ATM network. This protocol is based on the AForum UNI signaling, with mechanisms added to support source routing, crankback, andalternate routing of call setup requests in case of connection setup failure. By default, GXedge Switch is using VPI 0 VCI 5 to carry this protocol. The VC is available on every Aport. The signaling protocol is terminated locally on every Cell Controller.

PNNI Topology Slot (Routing Module)

Every GDC Xedge ATM switch in a PNNI peer group has one Slot Controller assigned to takethe functionality of the Router for PNNI. The Slot is called the PNNI Topology Slot (PT Slot).PT Slot fulfills several special functions in the switch:

• Controlling the PNNI communication to the neighbor nodes in the peer group

• Assigning PNNI ATM Addresses to all slots in the switch

• Maintaining the Topology database

• Calculating the Path to all other switches in the peer group

• Providing the DTL for a call setup of a switched VC/VP

It is suggested that the most powerful card in the switch is chosen to be the PT Slot. The performance of the peer group is dependent on the least powerful PT Slot in the peer groupPerformance parameters depending on the type of card are for example:

• Maximum number of switches in the peer group

• Maximum number of PNNI SAPs configured to be NNI links within a switch

• Maximum number of static routes in the peer group

• Maximum number of stored path in a switch

The following order should be applied when deciding which slot controller should be the PNRouter:

1. SMC Controller (most powerful)

2. ECC Controller

3. ACx Controller (least powerful)

Note GDCs implementation of the protocol does not support a hierarchical network topology. It ibased on a flat routing topology and only supports a single peer group.

Note Only SMC, ECC and ACx Controller are eligible to become the PT Slot in a switch.



gned

is a

a e.

a part utput e ps has

Used Terminology

Pt Slot - The PNNI Topology Slot sometimes also called the "Routing Module" is the slot assiwith the PNNI Router functionality.

Signaling Module - A Signaling Module sometimes also called the PNNI Signaling Slot (PS) Slot Controller running the PNNI signaling protocol. When using PNNI, the PNNI signaling protocol should be used as the standard internal protocol between all Slot Controllers withinswitch. Therefore each Slot Controller within a switch is considered to be a Signaling Modul

DTL Stack - A call setup message contains one or two DTL Stacks. The DTL Stack contains or a full route to a destination address. The Stack is a list of ATM addresses including the oslot and link detailing the path the call has to take to reach the destination address. Since thmaximum entries in one stack is limited to 10 a route to a destination farther away then 10 hoto use two DTL stacks to describe the path.


PNNI Configuration Configuration Summary

03Iss

ll Slot

the ay of

r or

oup

etc.


In order to be able to run PNNI routing a special set of operation code has to be loaded to aController in the switch. The file names for the different type of Controller are:

• slavepnni.cod

• mpro1pnni.cod

• mpro2pnni.cod

• smcpnni.cod

Whether a Controller is running PNNI code or regular code can be determined by looking atupper right corner of the terminal window. The PNNI code is marked by a “+P” after the displthe software version as shown in the example below.

Figure 19-1 Display of Software Version

To configure PNNI routing you can use the menu system within the individual Slot Controlleyou can use GDC ProSphere Network Management System. For information on the GDC ProSphere Network Management System, refer to the GDC ProSphere User Guide.

Once you have decided to use PNNI routing in the network, all Slot Controller in the peer grhave to be configured for PNNI routing.

Note Before loading them onto the switch, the files have to be renamed to slave.cod, mpro1.cod


Switch Name: Slot X PNNI Topology (PT) Config/Status 620+P/Rev A-

PT Slot: slot 2Active PT Slot: slot 2Active PT Status: up

0 Link Rsrc Update Timer (secs): 101 Route Calculation Timer (secs): 202 Route Optimization: adminweight3 Status Timer (secs): 164 Admin State: enable5 Routing Parameter Config



PNNI Configuration Configuration Summary

nd

ed

ding

NI is used in the

ized PNNI the

l our

f is st

ired

m.

tion

NNI group.

To configure PNNI routing, you typically need to perform the following procedures:

• Select A PNNI Topology Slot

• Configure The PT Slot - Describes how to select a slot to be the PNNI Topology Slot ahow to activate it.

• Configure The Routing Parameters - Describes how to configure the performance relatto the entire peer group. All PT Slots in the peer group will have to have the same configuration. The procedure describes how to select the right configuration depenon your network configuration.

• Configure The Node Table- Describes how to configure parameters related to the PNaddress (e.g. peer group, ID Node address and node level). If only one peer group in the network the default parameters can be used. In case of several peer groupsnetwork the parameters for the Domain Name and ATM Address need to be customso that each peer group has its own peer group ID. Please refer to the Chapter XXX,Overview of the GDC Xedge Switch Applications Overview to find out more about structure of the PNNI ATM address.

• Configure The PNNI Timers- Describes the default configuration of the PNNI protocorelated timers. If desired the procedure describes how to customize them to suite yrequirements.

• SAP Configuration

• Configure The Max PNNI SAPs- Describes how to configure the maximum amount oNNI SAPs configured to use PNNI signaling and routing. This is a parameter whichconfigured on the individual slot. The default setting of this parameter is fine for moapplications. Only if you use an IMA Lim or use the MSCC feature it might be requto adjust its setting.

• Customize Metrics

• Configure Metrics - Describes how to configure the Metrics affecting the SPF algorithWith the default setting the algorithm will always choose the shortest path to a destination. If it is desired to have the algorithm to take in account the link type, thedefault configuration has to be modified. Each QOS class has its own metric configuration. The configuration is SAP specific and only affects the transmit direcof the SAP.

• Adding Static Routes

• Configure Static Routes - This procedure describes how addresses external to the Ppeer group can be registered to a particular slot and then distributed within the peer


PNNI Configuration Select A PNNI Topology Slot

03Iss

e the

Select A PNNI Topology SlotThe first step in the configuration is to select one of the Slot Controllers in the switch to becomPT Slot (PNNI Topology Slot).

Configure The PT Slot

1. From the Slot-0 Root Menu, Telnet to the selected Slot which is to become the PT Slot.


Figure 19-2 MIB Display and Management

3. Select the PNNI Topology (PT) Config/Status menu option and press the Enter key. The PNNI Topology (PT) Config/Status screen appears.


Switch Name: Slot X MIB Display and Management SW Version

00 system 57 PNNI Configuration/Status01 interfaces 82 Ethernet Statistics02 at 94 Management IF03 ip 95 Node Status04 icmp 96 aal5 Performance Statistics05 tcp 98 Module Loader06 udp07 snmp08 System Information09 Slot 0 Configuration/Status12 Static Routing23 PVC Configuration/Status24 SVC Configuration/Status27 System Timing References42 Alarm Handler55 PNNI Topology (PT) Config/Status56 PNNI Signaling (PS) Config/StatusSelect Option:Enter group number, save As, Load, Save, sTatus, eXit



on-

Figure 19-3 PNNI Topology (PT) Config/Status

4. At the Select option: prompt, enter the option number 4 for the Admin State and select enable to make the selected Slot the PT Slot.

5. Select eXit once to return to the MIB Display and Management screen.

6. Select Save, to save the configuration.

This completes the Configure The PT Slot procedure.

Note To activate any configuration changes made in the screen, it is required to reboot the Slot Ctroller.


Switch Name: Slot X PNNI Topology (PT) Config/Status SW Version

PT Slot: slot 2Active PT Slot: slot 2Active PT Status: up

0 Link Rsrc Update Timer (secs): 101 Route Calculation Timer (secs): 202 Route Optimization: adminweight3 Status Timer (secs): 164 Admin State: enable5 Routing Parameter Config




03Iss

ted

ire

for ters.

f Slot

PNNI Topology (PT) Config/Status Screen Parameter Definitions

The PNNI Topology (PT) Config/Status screen allows you to view and set the parameters, lisin Table 19-1, for the PNNI Topology Slot.

Configure The Routing Parameters

This section describes how to configure the Routing Parameters which will apply for the entswitch.

Table 19-1 PNNI Topology (PT) Config/Status Screen Parameter Descriptions


PT Slot Slot number that can possibly be the PNNI Topology Slot. Always indicates its own slot number.

NA, read only

Active PT Slot Indicates the slot number of the Controller which is configured to be the PNNI Topology Slot.

NA, read only

Active PT Status Indicates the status of the PNNI Topology Slot. Possible statuses:up - PT Slot is active and functioningdown - PT Slot is temporarily down due to changes in node tableconfiguring - in process of activating PT Slotstopped - PT Slot is not active

NA, read only

Rsrc Update Timer (secs)

Sets the periodic timer interval within which the Signaling module will send all of its links’ resource information to the Routing mod-ule.Default value: 10 secSupported range: 2 - 255

Immediate

Route Calculation Timer (secs)

Sets the periodic timer interval within which the Routing module recalculate all its routes.Default value: 20 secSupported range: 10 - 43200 (up to 12 hrs)

Immediate

Route Optimization Sets the metric the SPF (Shortest Path First) algorithm on the PT Slot will use to calculate the routes. The only option which should be used is adminweight. The options are:A – adminweightB – ctd (not supported)C – cdv (not supported)

Warmstart of the Slot Controller

Status Timer (secs) Sets the periodic timer interval within which the Routing Module sends its status to all its Signaling Modules.Default value: 16 secSupported range: 6 - 255

Immediate

Admin State Enables/Disables the PT Slot. The options are:A – enableB – disable


Table 19-1

Note The parameter settings in the Routing Parameter Config screen are dependent on the type of Slot Controller used as PT Slot. Each of the three different types of Slot Controller eligible becoming the PT Slot (SMC, ECC and ACx) comes up with a different set of default parameThe parameters in the Routing Parameter Config screen of all the PT Slots in the peer group have to be adjusted to match the parameter set of the PT Slot with the least powerful type oController. Refer to the PNNI Topology Slot (Routing Module)section in the Overview Of Rout-ing Methods section for guidance.



PNNI

pology

Con-

From the Slot-0 Root Menu, Telnet to the Slot which is the active PT Slot in the switch.


8. Select the PNNI Topology (PT) Config/Status menu option and press the Enter key. The Topology (PT) Config/Status screen appears.

9. Select the Routing Parameter Config menu option and press the Enter key. The RoutingParameter Config screen appears.

Figure 19-4 Routing Parameter Config

10. Configure the parameters to match the suggested values for the least powerful PNNI ToSlot in your peer group. Refer to Table 19-3 for the parameters.


12. Select Save, to save the configuration

This completes the Configure The Routing Parameters procedure.

Note To activate any configuration changes made in this screen, it is required to reboot the Slot troller.


Switch Name: Slot X Routing Parameter Config SW Version

00 Max PNNI Ports: 9 Available Memory: 45546601 Max Visible Nodes: 30

Max Neighbors (NBR): 902 Max Static Rte (Int/Ext): 3203 Max Stored Paths: 3004 Max Re-Xmit of PTSEs: 1005 Max Summ Addr Entries: 506 Max Signalling Modules: 16

Max Reachable Addrs: 99007 Max Transit NETs: 108 Max DTL Table Size: 2009 Max Outstanding Rte Req : 2010 Max P-MP Endpts/Tree: 2011 Max P-MP End Trees: 200012 Max Hor. Link Advert: 013 Max SVC RCC: 0




03Iss

Routing Parameter Config Screen Parameter DefinitionsThe Routing Parameter Config screen allows you to view and set the parameters, listed in Table 19-2, for the PNNI Topology Slot. Please refer to Table 19-3 on the following page for the recommended setting for the individual parameters.

Table 19-2 Routing Parameter Config Screen Parameter Descriptions


Max PNNI Ports Sets the maximum number of NNI ports in the switch which can be configured for PNNI routing and signaling.


Max Visible Nodes Sets the maximum number of nodes in the PNNI domain that will be visible to this node.


Max Neighbors Displays the maximum number of neighbors this system will have, across all hierarchical levels. Parameter is linked to the Max PNNI Ports parameter. Will always display the same value as the Max PNNI Ports parameter.

NA, read only

Max Static Rte (Int/Ext)

Sets the maximum number of static routes configured on the system.


Max Stored Paths Sets the maximum number of path stored in the system concurrently.


Max Re-Xmit of PTSEs

Maximum number of times a PTSE or a PTSE request will be retransmitted before the neighbor state machine is declared DOWN.


Max Summ Addr Entries

Sets the maximum number of summary addresses to be configured.


Max Signaling Modul

Sets the maximum number of signaling module to which the routing module can communicate. Each Slot Controller Default value: 16


Max Reachable Addrs

Sets the maximum number of reachable address prefixes in the PNNI domain that will be visible on this node. It is calculated using the following formula:Max Reachable Addrs = Max Visible Nodes x Max Static Rte(Int/Ext) + Max Visible_Nodes

NA, read only

Max Transit NETs Not supported. NA

Max DTL Table Size

Sets the maximum number of DTL stacks maintained by this system concurrently.


Max Outstanding Rte Req

Sets the maximum number of DTL request the PT Slot can process at any given time.


Max P-MP Endpts/Tree

Sets the maximum number of endpoints a point to multipoint call can have per tree.


Max P-MP End Trees

Sets the Maximum number of point to multipoint trees a VC can have when using PNNI.


Max Hor. Link Advertised

Not supported. NA

Max SVC RCC Not supported. NA

Table 19-2



Routing Parameter Config Screen Parameter Recommendations

The default parameters of the least powerful PT Slot in the peer group (Refer to the PNNI Topology Slot (Routing Module) section in the Overview Of Routing Methods section), must be configured inall other PT Slots in the group. Use the table below as a reference.

Table 19-3 Routing Parameter Config Screen Parameter Recommendations

Parameter Recommended Parameter Values For:

SMC ECC ACx

Max PNNI Ports 64 32 9

Max Visible Nodes 100 50 30

Max Static Rte (Int/Ext) 100 50 32

Max Stored Paths 100 50 30

Max Re-Xmit of PTSEs 5 5 5

Max Summ Addr Entrie 5 5 5

Max Signalling Modul 16 16 16

Max DTL Table Size 100 50 20

Max Outstanding Rte 20 20 20

Max P-MP Endpts/Tree 20 20 20

Max P-MP End Trees 2000 1000 1000

Table 19-3



03Iss

the PT

all lot.

Configure The Node Table

This section describes how to configure the Node Table Parameters which are configured onSlot but will apply for the entire switch.

1. From the Slot-0 Root Menu, Telnet to the Slot which is the active PT Slot in the switch.


3. Select the PNNI Configuration/Status menu option and press the Enter key. The PNNI Configuration/Status screen appears.

Figure 19-5 PNNI Configuration/Status

4. Select the Node Table menu option and press the Enter key. The Node Table screen appears.

5. Select Extra detail. The Node Table, Detail of Node Table entry 0 screen appears as shownin Figure 19-6. The screen parameters are described in Node Table Screen Parameters Definitions.

Note The Node Table is only valid for the active PT Slot. Even though the screen is available onCell Controllers as well as on the SMC Controller, it should only be used on the active PT S


Switch Name: Slot X PNNI Configuration/Status SW Version

00 Base Group 17 PNNI Routing Group01 Node Table 18 Summary Address Table02 GL Election Table03 Initial Timer Values Table04 Svcc-based RCC Variables Table05 Scope Mapping Table06 Interface Table07 Link Table08 Neighboring Peer Table09 Neighboring Peer Port Table10 PNNI SVCC-based RCC Table11 PTSE Table12 PNNI Map Table13 Nodal Map Table14 Address Map Table15 TNS Map Table16 PNNI Metrics TableSelect option:eXit



d and

Figure 19-6 Node Table

6. At the Select option: prompt, enter the option number of the item or items to be configureenter the configuration changes.



This completes the Configure The Node Table procedure.

Node Table Screen Parameter Definitions

The Node Table screen allows you to view and set the parameters, listed in Table 19-4, for the PNNI Topology Slot.

Note To activate any configuration changes, it is required to reboot the Slot Controller.

Table 19-4 Node Table Screen Parameter Descriptions


Node Index The Node Index is always 0 NA, read only



Switch Name: Slot X Node Table SW VersionDetail of Node Table entry 0

Node Index : 00 Node Level : 961 Node Id : 60a04748495320495320414e204141020000000000002 Lowest Node : true3 Admin Status : up

Oper Status : up4 Domain Name : DOMAIN 15 ATM Address : 4748495320495320414e204141020000000000006 Peer Group Id : 604748495320495320414e2041007 Restricted Transit : false8 Complex Node Rep : false

Restricted Branch : falseDB Overload : falseTotal PTSEs : 104

9 Row Status : active




03Iss

Node Level The level of PNNI hierarchy at which this node exists. This attribute is used to determine the default node ID and the default peer group ID for this node. It determines how many bits from the start of the ATM Address are used to specify the Peer Group ID. The representation is in decimal.Default value: 96 (= 12 bytes or 24 Hex digits)Supported range: 0 to 104


Node Id The value the switching system is using to represent itself as this node. Depending of the value of the Lowest Node parameter is the structure the Node ID can change. In this implementation the value is always true and therefore the structure will be as following:The first octet equal to Node Level, the second octet equal to A0 (indicating a lowest level node), and the last 20 octets equal to Node ATM Address. The representation is in Hex.Note : The parameter will automatically follow the configuration of the ATM Address parameter. It is recommended not to change it, since there should be no need to change.


Lowest Node Indicates whether this node acts as a lowest level node or whether this node is a logical group node that becomes active when one of the other nodes in this switching system becomes a peer group leader. The value 'false' must not be used with nodes that are not PGL/LGN capable.Note : The option false is not supported. The parameter should always be set to true.

NA

Admin Status Indicates whether the administrative status of the node is Up.Note : The status can not be changed.

NA, read only

Oper Status Indicates whether the node is active or whether the node has yet to become operational. When the value is down, all state has been cleared from the node and the node is not communicating with any of its neighbor nodes.

NA, read only

Domain Name The name of the PNNI routing domain in which this node participates. All lowest-level PNNI nodes with the same Domain Name are presumed to be connected.


ATM Address This node's ATM End System Address. Remote systems wishing to exchange PNNI protocol packets with this node should direct packets or calls to this address. The representation is in Hex.


Peer Group Id The Peer Group Identifier of the peer group that the given node is to become a member of. The default value of this attribute has the first octet equal to Node Level parameter; the next 104 bits equal ATM Address. The representation is in hexadecimal.Note : The parameter will automatically follow the configuration of the ATM Address parameter. It is recommended not to change it, since there should be no need to change.


Restricted Transit Not supported. NA

Table 19-4 Node Table Screen Parameter Descriptions (Continued)





Complex Node Rep Specifies whether this node uses the complex node representation. A value of `true' indicates that the complex node representation is used, whereas a value of `false' indicates that the simple node representation is used. This attribute determines the setting of the nodal representation bit in the nodal information group originated by this node. Options are:A - trueB - false


Restricted Branch Indicates whether the node is able to support additional point-to-multipoint branches. A value of 'false' indicates that additional branches can be supported, and a value of 'true' indicates that additional branches cannot be supported. This attribute reflects the setting of the restricted branching bit in the nodal information group originated by this node.Note : The option true is not supported.

NA

DB Overload Indicates whether the originating node is currently operating in topology database overload state. A node is said to be in a topology database overload state when it is unable to store the complete topology database it is required to maintain by the normal PNNI algorithms. This would happen if there is insufficient memory in the node to store all the PTSE data currently active in the peer group (including any PTSEs that describe ancestor peer group topology). While a node in a topology database overload state is not able to operate fully as a normal PNNI node, it is nevertheless desirable for it to continue operating normally in most respects, consistent with the requirement that such operation must not drastically disrupt the correct operation of other nodes in the network.

NA, read only

Total PTSEs Indicates the total number of PTSEs currently in this node's topology database(s)

NA, read only

Row Status Not supported. Always shows active. NA

Table 19-4 Node Table Screen Parameter Descriptions (Continued)





03Iss

ot but ich

the

Configure The PNNI Timers

This section describes how to configure the PNNI Timers which are configured on the PT Slwill apply for the entire switch. The configuration is done in the Initial Timer Values Table, whholds PNNI timer values and significant change thresholds for the entire switch.

1. From the Slot-0 Root Menu, Telnet to the Slot which is the active PT Slot in the switch.


3. Select the PNNI Configuration/Status menu option and press the Enter key. The PNNI Configuration/Status screen appears.

Figure 19-7 PNNI Configuration/Status

4. Select the Initial Timer Values Table menu option and press the Enter key. The Initial Timer Values Table screen appears.

5. Select Extra detail. The Initial Timer Values Table, Initial Timer Values Table entry 0 screen appears as shown in Figure 19-8. The screen parameters are described in Initial Timer Values Table Screen Parameters Definitions.

Note The Initial Timer Values Table is only valid for the active PT Slot. Even though the screen isavailable on all Cell Controllers as well as on the SMC Controller, it should only be used on active PT Slot.


Switch Name: Slot X PNNI Configuration/Status SW Version

00 Base Group 17 PNNI Routing Group01 Node Table 18 Summary Address Table02 GL Election Table03 Initial Timer Values Table04 Svcc-based RCC Variables Table05 Scope Mapping Table06 Interface Table07 Link Table08 Neighboring Peer Table09 Neighboring Peer Port Table10 PNNI SVCC-based RCC Table11 PTSE Table12 PNNI Map Table13 Nodal Map Table14 Address Map Table15 TNS Map Table16 PNNI Metrics TableSelect option:eXit



d and

Figure 19-8 Initial Timer Values Table




This completes the Configure The PNNI Timers procedure.

Initial Timers Value Table Screen Parameter Definitions

The Initial Timers Value Table screen allows you to view and set the parameters, listed in Table 19-5, for the PNNI Topology Slot.

Note To activate any configuration changes, it is required to reboot the Slot Controller.

Table 19-5 Initial Timers Value Table Screen Parameter Descriptions


pnniNodeIndex The PNNI Node Index is always 0 NA, read only

PTSE Hold Down Time

The initial value for the PTSE hold down timer that will be used by the given node to limit the rate at which it can re-originate PTSEs. It must be a positive non-zero number.Default value: 10 (x 100 milliseconds)Supported range: 0 - 4294967295

Warmstart of the PT Slot



Switch Name: Slot X Initial Timer Values Table SW VersionDetail of Initial Timer Values Table entry 0

pnniNodeIndex : 000 PTSE Hold Down Time : 1001 Hello Hold Down Time : 1002 Hello Timer Initial Value : 1503 Hello Inactivity Factor : 504 Horizontal Link Time : 12005 Refresh Time : 180006 Life Time Factor : 20007 Retransmit Time : 508 Peer Delay Act Time : 1009 AvCR Parameter Multiplier : 5010 AvCR Mininum Threshold : 311 CDV Metrics Multiplier : 2512 CTD Metrics Multiplier : 50




03Iss

Hello Hold Down Time

The initial value for the Hello hold down timer that will be used by the given node to limit the rate at which it sends Hellos. It must be a positive non-zero number.Default value: 10 (x 100 milliseconds)Supported range: 0 - 4294967295


Hello Timer Initial Value

The amount of time in seconds this node will send one Hello packet on each of its ports in the absence of triggered Hellos.Default value: 15 (seconds)Supported range: 0 - 4294967295


Hello Inactivity Factor

The number of Hello intervals allowed to pass without receiving a Hello, before the node declares that the link to a neighbor is down.Default value: 5Supported range: 0 - 4294967295


Horizontal Link Time

Not supported. NA

Refresh Time The initial value for the Refresh timer that this node will use to drive (re-)origination of PTSEs in the absence of triggered updates.Default value: 1800 (seconds)Supported range: 0 - 4294967295


Life Time Factor The value for the lifetime multiplier, expressed as a percentage. The result of multiplying the Refresh Time attribute value by this attribute value is used as the initial lifetime that this node places into self-originated PTSEs.Default value: 200 (percent)Supported range: 101 - 1000


Retransmit Time The period between retransmissions of unacknowledged Database Summary packets, PTSE Request packets, and PTSPs.Default value: 5 (seconds)Supported range: 0 - 4294967295


Peer Delay Act Time

The minimum amount of time between transmissions of delayed PTSE acknowledgment packets.Default value: 10 (x 100 milliseconds)Supported range: 0 - 4294967295


AvCR Parameter Multiplier

The proportional multiplier used in the algorithms that determine significant change for Available Cell Rate parameters, expressed as a percentage.Default value: 50Supported range: 1 -99


AvCR Minimum Threshold

The minimum threshold used in the algorithms that determine significant change for Available Cell Rate parameters, expressed as a percentage.Default value: 3Supported range: 1 -99


Table 19-5 Initial Timers Value Table Screen Parameter Descriptions (Continued)





CDV Metrics Multiplier

The proportional multiplier used in the algorithms that determine significant change for Cell Delay Variation metrics, expressed as a percentage.Default value: 25Supported range: 1 -99


CTD Metrics Multiplier

The proportional multiplier used in the algorithms that determine significant change for Cell Transfer Delay metrics, expressed as a percentage.Default value: 50Supported range: 1 -99


Table 19-5 Initial Timers Value Table Screen Parameter Descriptions (Continued)




PNNI Configuration SAP Configuration

03Iss

ave ical

.

Ps,

Slot ged. be

SAP ConfigurationIn order for PNNI to work correctly with all Slot Controllers in a switch, all SAPs in the switch hto be configured for PNNI. This includes all physical SAPs, all virtual SAPs and all used logSAPs (please see Bandwidth Allocation and SAPs in Chapter 16: Bandwidth Allocation and Reservation for reference). This configuration has to be applied to every slot in the switch

• For all SAPs the parameter for the Routing Protocol in the SVC Resource Table has to be changed to “pnni”.

• For all SAPs configured as NNI Links using the PNNI signaling protocol and all virtual SAthe parameter for Signaling in the SVC Resource Table has to be changed to “pnni10”.

Please refer to the Configuring Link Resources section of Chapter 16: Bandwidth Allocation and Reservationfor detailed instructions how to configure the SAPs.

Configure The Max PNNI SAPs

If MSCC (Multiple Signaling Channels) or an IMA LIM is used and more then 2 SAPs on oneController are configured to be NNI Links using the PNNI signaling and routing protocol, thedefault configuration of maximum 2 PNNI signaling SAPs per Slot Controller has to be chanThe following procedure describes how to change this configuration. The procedure has to repeated on every Slot Controller where the above statement is true.

1. From the Slot-0 Root Menu, Telnet to the Slot on which you want to change the configuration.


3. Select the PNNI Signaling (PS) Config/Status menu option and press the Enter key. The PNNI Signaling (PS) Config/Status screen appears.

Figure 19-9 PNNI Signaling (PS) Config/Status


Switch Name: Slot X PNNI Signaling (PS) Config/Status SW Version

Registered PT Slot: slot 2Registered PT Status: up

0 Max PNNI Sap: 21 PT Alive Timer: 92 Reachable Address Table3 PNNI Port Config/Status Table



PNNI Configuration SAP Configuration

l s

ted

4. At the Select option: prompt, enter the option number 0 for the Max PNNI Sap and set it equato the number of SAPs configured for NNI and PNNI signaling (physical + logical) on thiSlot Controller.

5. Select eXit once to return to the MIB Display and Management screen.

6. Select Save. This completes the Configure The Max PNNI SAPs procedure.

PNNI Signaling (PS) Config/Status Screen Parameter Definitions

The PNNI Signaling (PS) Config/Status screen allows you to view and set the parameters, lisin Table 19-6.

Table 19-6 PNNI Signaling (PS) Config/Status Screen Parameter Descriptions


Registered PT Slot Indicates the slot number of the active PT Slot. NA, read only

Registered PT Status

Indicates the status of the PT Slot. NA, read only

Max PNNI Sap Maximum number of SAPs which can be configured to use PNNI signaling.Default value: 2


PT Alive Timer Not supported. NA

Table 19-6


PNNI Configuration Customize Metrics

03Iss

t and y SAP lated

ccount ed to s the S1

r could

meters ould th with

to

Customize MetricsThe SPF (Shortest Path First) algorithm on the PT Slot uses by default the metrics of weighavailable bandwidth to calculate the paths to each switch in the peer group. By default everin the switch is configured with an adminweight of 5040. This effectively means that all calcuroutes are based on a hop count. The PT Slot will always try to use the shortest path first.

If for any reason this is not desirable, for example because you want the algorithm to take in athe different type of links (e.g. STM-1, DS3, E3 and so on) the default weights can be changreflect the different link speeds. The algorithm always picks the one with the lowest weight aprimary route. Therefore a STM-1 links needs to have a lower weight than a DS3 (E3) or a D(E1). The weights on the switch are assigned per QOS. This means that the routing behaviobe configured to behave differently for a CBR VC than it would for VBR-nrt VC.

For example: If the weight parameters for the QOS CBR would be left as default and the parafor VBR-nrt would be changed so the link type would be taken in account. Then a CBR VC walways use the shortest path to the destination whereas a VBR-nrt VC would always use a pathe highest speed links available to the destination. The following procedure describes howchange the weight parameters for the links.

Configure Metrics

1. From the Slot-0 Root Menu, Telnet to the Slot on which you want to change the configuration.



4. Select the PNNI Port Config/Status Table menu option and press the Enter key. The PNNI Port Config/Status Table screen appears.



d

l.

Figure 19-10 PNNI Port Config/Status Table

5. Select Extra detail. The PNNI Port Config/Status Table, Detail of PNNI Port Config/Status Table entry 0 screen appears as shown in Figure 19-11. The screen parameters are describein PNNI Port Config/Status Table Screen Parameter Definitions on the following page.

Note The PNNI Port Config/Status Table is displaying all SAPs on the selected Slot Controller which are configured to be NNI links and are using the PNNI signaling and routing Protoco


Switch Name: Slot X PNNI Port Config/Status Table SW VersionNo Port UBR Weight CBR Weight VBR RT Weight VBR NRT Weigh ABR Weight

0 2000 5040 5040 5040 5040 50401 2001 5040 5040 5040 5040 50402 2020 5040 5040 5040 5040 50403 2021 5040 17000 15000 15000 50404 2022 5040 35000 35000 25000 50405 2023 5040 60000 60000 60000 5040

Select option:Enter entry number to edit, Extra detail, Goto row, Index search,eXit



03Iss

d and

Figure 19-11 PNNI Port Config/Status Table (Extra Detail)


7. Select Down to transition to the detail entries of the other SAPs and repeat the configurationchanges for each of the SAPs.


9. Select Save. This completes the Configure Metrics procedure

Note Changing the weight on the SAP only affects the transmit direction.


Switch Name: Slot X PNNI Port Config/Status Table SW VersionDetail of PNNI Port Config/Status Table entry 0

Port : 20000 UBR Weight : 50401 CBR Weight : 50402 VBR RT Weight : 50403 VBR NRT Weight : 50404 ABR Weight : 5040

Select option:Down, Enter entry number to edit, Goto row, Index search, SummaryeXit



in

PNNI Port Config/Status Table Screen Parameter Definitions

The PNNI Port Config/Status Table screen allows you to view and set the parameters, listedTable 19-7.

Table 19-7 PNNI Port Config/Status Table Screen Parameter Descriptions


Port Representation of slot and SAP in the form of:Slot No. +1 x1000 + SAP No.e.g. Slot0 SAP1 = 1001

NA, read only

UBR Weight Administrative weight for UBR class VCs on this link.Default value: 5040 Supported Range: 0 - 65535

Immediate

CBR Weight Administrative weight for CBR class VCs on this link.Default value: 5040 Supported Range: 0 - 65535

Immediate

VBR RT Weight Administrative weight for VBR RT class VCs on this link.Default value: 5040 Supported Range: 0 - 65535

Immediate

VBR NRT Weight Administrative weight for VBR NRT class VCs on this link.Default value: 5040 Supported Range: 0 - 65535

Immediate

ABR Weight Not supported. NA

Table 19-7


PNNI Configuration Adding Static Routes

03Iss

ingle ation about

ternal"

NI peer ix and rk the twork.

ly they es in the ress. ble. If ss. It

roller

s.

Adding Static RoutesThe Reachable Address Table allows you to add static routing entries to other networks or saddresses which are not part of the peer group. The PNNI Topology Slot will use the informand distributes it to the rest of the peer group so that all switches in the peer group will learnthis gateway to other network or how to reach a particular address.

The Reachable Address Table used to configure these static routes differentiates between "inand "external" addresses.

External Addresses are considered to be ATM addresses which are not part of the same PNgroup. The address configured in the table can either be a complete ATM address with PrefESI describing a particular endstation, or if it is desired to configure a route to another netwoentry can be limited to the part of the Prefix describing the network address of the remote ne

Internal addresses are ATM addresses which are part of the same PNNI peer group. Usualdon't need to be configured because the PNNI routing protocol is distributing these addressaround the peer group. PNNI uses part of the End Station Identifier (ESI) to describe the portswitch. If ILMI is used this information could be overwritten by the end stations hardware addIn this case the switch automatically registers this address to the slots reachable address taILMI is not used but the end station does not allow you to configure the ESI part of the addreis necessary to manually add the address to the Reachable Address Table on the Slot Contwhere the endstation is connected to.

Configure Static Routes

1. From the Slot-0 Root Menu, Telnet to the Slot on which you want to add the static addres



4. Select the Reachable Address Table menu option and press the Enter key. The Reachable Address Table screen appears



Figure 19-12 Reachable Address Table

5. At the Select option: prompt, enter Add. Select a Table Index for the new entry.

6. Select Extra detail . The Reachable Address Table, Detail of Reachable Address Table entry 0 screen appears as shown in Figure 19-13. The screen parameters are described in Reachable Address Table Screen Parameters Definitions on the following page.


Switch Name: Slot X Reachable Address Table SW VersionNo Index Sap Port Adver Address Reachable Address VPI

Select option:Add entry, Enter entry number to edit, Extra detail, Right eXit



03Iss

d

for

Figure 19-13 Reachable Address Table (Extra Detail)

7. At the Select option: prompt, enter the option number of the item or items to be configureand enter the configuration changes.

8. If there are multiple entries in the table, select Down or Up to transition to the other entries inthe table.

9. At the Select option: prompt, enter the option number of the item or items to be configuredthose other entries and enter the configuration changes.


11. Select Save.

This completes the Configure Static Routes procedure.

Note Changing a previously registered address requires to unregister it first


Switch Name: Slot X Reachable Address Table SW VersionDetail of Reachable Address Table entry 0

Index : 00 Sap : 0

Port : 30001 Advertisement Scope : 962 Address Type : internal3 Reachable Address :4 VPI (exterior only) : 05 Action : unregister

Status : unregistered

Select option:Add entry, Enter entry number to edit, Kill entry, Summary, eXit



Reachable Address Table Screen Parameter Definitions

The Reachable Address Table screen allows you to view and set the parameters, listed in TTable 19-8.

Table 19-8 Reachable Address Table Screen Parameter Descriptions


Index Table index NA, read only

Sap Indicates the SAP the specified address is reachable on. Register/Unregister

Port Representation of slot and SAP in the form of:Slot No. +1 x1000 + SAP No.e.g. Slot0 SAP1 = 1001

NA, read only

Advertisement Scope

Indicates up to which Node Level this address can be advertised. If the scope is the same as the Node Level then only these nodes and nodes that have lower node level will see this address.

Register/Unregister

Address Type Type of address. Options are:A - internalB - external

Register/Unregister

Reachable Address Target address Register/Unregister

VPI (exterior only) Used when the reachable address is connected via a VP connection. It indicates the VPI address the reachable address is connected to. This is for exterior address type only. VPI 0 indicates physical connection.

Register/Unregister

Action Register/Unregister the reachable address. The options are:A - register (Registers the address with the router)B - unregister (Deregister the address from the router)C - delete (Deregister and remove the address from the router)

Immediate

Status Status of registered/unregistered. The available statuses are:A - registerB - unregistered

Immediate

Table 19-8


The Best Connections in the Business

XEDGE6000 COVER12 - GDC

Documents

Transcript of XEDGE6000 COVER12 - GDC